Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
26 - Instructions - Bozeman Library Children's Room Renovation
Page 1 of 11 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) BOZEMAN LIBRARY CHILDREN’S ROOM RENOVATION CITY OF BOZEMAN Bozeman, MT City of Bozeman PO Box 1230 Bozeman, MT 59771-1230 July 2026 NOTICE IS HEREBY given that the City of Bozeman (City) is seeking proposals from firms to provide general contracting services related to the renovation of the City of Bozeman Library Children’s Room Renovation. The selected firm is to provide scheduling, construction execution, cost estimates and project sequencing for general renovation, FFE replacement, MEP upgrades, finishes improvements, and administration services for the project per drawings and specifications. Copies of the Request for Proposals are available on the City’s website. All proposals must be provided as a single, searchable PDF document file and be submitted digitally as an email attachment to the RFP Recipient email address below. Respondents are advised that Recipient’s email attachment size limit is 25MB and that only one PDF file will be allowed per response. The subject line of the transmittal email shall clearly identify the RFP title, company name and due date/time. File sizes greater than 25MB in size may be uploaded to bzncloud.bozeman.net upon special arrangement of the Recipient; however, it is the respondent’s sole responsibility to ensure the file upload is completed, and that the Recipient is separately notified via email of same, prior to the given deadline. Deliver RFPs via email to the City Clerk by [Thursday, August 13th] at [5:00pm] MST. It is the sole responsibility of the proposing party to ensure that proposals are received prior to the closing time as late submittals will not be accepted and will be returned unopened. The email address for submission is: procurement@bozemanmt.gov NON-DISCRIMINATION AND EQUAL PAY The City of Bozeman is an Equal Opportunity Employer. Discrimination in the performance of any agreement awarded under this RFP on the basis of race, color, religion, creed, sex, age, marital status, national origin, or actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity or disability is prohibited. This prohibition shall apply to the hiring and treatment of the awarded entity’s employees and to all subcontracts. As such, each entity submitting under this notice shall include a provision wherein the submitting entity, or entities, affirms in writing it will not discriminate on the basis of race, color, religion, creed, sex, age, marital status, national origin, or because of actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity or disability and which also recognizes the eventual contract will contain a provision prohibiting discrimination as described above and that this prohibition on discrimination shall apply to the hiring and treatment of the submitting entity’s employees and to all subcontracts. In addition, pursuant to City Commission Resolution 5169, the entity awarded a contract under this RFP and any subcontractors must abide by the Equal Pay Act of 1963 and Section 39-3-104, MCA (the Montana Equal Pay Act), and affirm it will abide by the above and that it has visited the State of Montana Equal Pay for Equal Work “best practices” website, or equivalent “best practices publication and has read the material. Any administrative questions regarding proposal procedures should be directed to: Mike Maas, City Clerk (406) 582-2321, procurement@bozemanmt.gov. Questions relating to the RFP should be directed to: Shane Miller, Facilities Project Coordinator, (406) 577-7425, smiller@bozemanmt.gov DATED at Bozeman, Montana, this [Tuesday, July 7th]. Mike Maas City Clerk City of Bozeman For publication on: Saturday, [July 25th] Saturday, [August 1st] I. INTRODUCTION The City of Bozeman (Owner), is seeking proposals from firms to undertake contracting services relating to the renovation of the Children’s Room at the Bozeman Public Library. The Owner intends to enter into a contract with the selected firm that will include general contracting services related to the renovation of the City of Bozeman Library Children’s Room Renovation. The selected firm is to provide scheduling, construction execution, cost estimates and project sequencing for general renovation, FFE replacement, MEP upgrades, finishes improvements, and administration services for the project per drawings and specifications. This RFP shall not commit the Owner to enter into an agreement, to pay any expenses incurred in preparation of any response to this request, or to procure or contract for any supplies, goods or services. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject all responses received as a result of this RFP if it is in the Owner’s best interest to do so. This procurement is governed by the laws of the State of Montana and venue for all legal proceedings shall be in the 18th Judicial District Court, Gallatin County. By offering to perform services under this RFP, all Submitters agree to be bound by the laws of the State of Montana and of the Owner, including, but not limited to, applicable wage rates, payments, gross receipts taxes, building codes, equal opportunity employment practices, safety, non-discrimination, etc. II. PROJECT BACKGROUND AND DESCRIPTION In 2001, taxpayers approved a $4 million bond referendum for a library new facility; the money was used to purchase the 14.3-acre former Milwaukee Railroad property on East Main Street. After five years of fundraising and planning, a new 53,000 square foot Library opened at 626 East Main Street in November 2006. The new Library achieved a Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) silver level certification, the first public building in the state to be certified LEED. The ‘Kids Room’, located South, just inside the main entrance, serves children of all ages and needs. The Children’s Room Renovation project is to include but is not limited to FFE replacements, shelving replacements, finishes upgrades, and general renovation work. Bookshelves, play area furniture, new service desks, new staff workstations, new staff work benches, refurbished kitchenette, upgraded paint, and refreshed flooring are examples of potential design/construction scope of work. III. SCOPE OF SERVICES The Scope of Services for the proposed contract is final construction & owner acceptance of the Children’s Room Renovation project. The successful firm will provide all services necessary to complete the construction, commissioning, cost estimates, QA/QC and coordination in oversight of the construction activities. All work must be in compliance with all applicable requirements under Montana and Federal laws and regulations. Construction services may commence NO EARLIER THAN Monday, October 5th. IV. PROPOSAL REQUIREMENTS Firms interested in providing the services described above are requested to submit the following information. Responses to each item should appear in the same order as in this RFP and should identify the item to which the responses applies. • Executive Summary • Qualifications of the Firm for Scope of Services; Cost • Schedule • Related Experience with Similar Projects a) Affirmation of Nondiscrimination (see Appendix A) Non-completion of the Affirmation of Nondiscrimination is cause for disqualification of firms. V. TIMELINES, DELIVERY DEADLINE, AND INSTRUCTIONS EVENT DATE/TIME Publication dates of RFP Saturday, [July 25th] Saturday, [August 1st] Deadline for receipt of proposals [Thursday, August 13th] Evaluation of proposals TBD Interviews (if necessary) and Selection of consultants TBD With the exception of the advertising dates and advertised due date, the City reserves the right to modify the above timeline. Deliver RFPs via email to the City Clerk (procurement@bozemanmt.gov) by [Thursday, August 13th] at [5:00pm] MST. It is the sole responsibility of the proposing party to ensure that proposals are received prior to the closing time as late submittals will not be accepted and will be returned unopened. All proposals must be provided as a single, searchable PDF document file and be submitted digitally as an email attachment to the RFP Recipient email address agenda@bozeman.net. Respondents are advised that Recipient’s email attachment size limit is 25MB and that only one PDF file will be allowed per response. The subject line of the transmittal email shall clearly identify the RFP title, company name and due date/time. File sizes greater than 25MB in size may be uploaded to bzncloud.bozeman.net upon special arrangement of the Recipient; however, it is the respondent’s sole responsibility to ensure the file upload is completed, and that the Recipient is separately notified via email of same, prior to the given deadline. VI. AMENDMENTS TO SOLICITATION Any interpretation or correction of this request will be published on the City’s webpage. The deadline for questions related to this document is [5:00pm] MST on [Friday, August 7th]. VII. CONTACT INFORMATION Any administrative questions regarding proposal procedures should be directed to: Mike Maas, City Clerk, (406) 582-2321, procurement@bozemanmt.gov Questions relating to scope of services should be directed to: MSR Design Mitch Karr, Architect, mitch@msrdesign.com, (612) 359-3255 -and- City of Bozeman Shane Miller, Facilities Project Coordinator, smiller@bozeman.net, (406) 577- 7425 VIII. SELECTION PROCEDURE A review committee will evaluate all responses to the RFP that meet the submittal requirements and deadline. Submittals that do not meet the requirement or deadline will not be considered. The review committee will rank the proposals and may arrange interviews with the finalist(s) prior to selection. Selection may be made directly based on the written RFP submission. If interviews occur, the selection of finalists to be interviewed will be made by a selection committee representing the City of Bozeman. The selection of interview candidates will be based on an evaluation of the written responses to the RFPs. All submitted proposals must be complete and contain the information required as stated in the "Request for Proposals.” IX. SELECTION CRITERIA Proposals will be evaluated based on the following criteria: • [5 points] Executive Summary • [45 points] Qualifications of the Firm for Scope of Services; Cost • [30 points] Schedule • [20 points] Related Experience with Similar Projects X. FORM OF AGREEMENT The Contractor will be required to enter into a contract with the City in substantially the same form as the professional services agreement attached as Attachment B. XI. CITY RESERVATION OF RIGHTS / LIABILITY WAIVER All proposals submitted in response to this RFP become the property of the City and public records and, as such, may be subject to public review. A SUBMISSION IN RESPONSE TO THIS REQUEST FOR QUALIFICATIONS CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON ANY RESPONDENTS AND SHALL NOT OBLIGATE THE CITY IN ANY MANNER WHATSOEVER. THE CITY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MAKE NO AWARD AND TO SOLICIT ADDITIONAL REQUEST FOR QUALIFICATIONS AT A LATER DATE. A. This RFP may be canceled or any or all responses may be rejected in whole or in part, as specified herein, when it is in the best interests of the City. If the City cancels or revises this RFP, all Respondents who submitted will be notified using email. B. The City reserves the right to accept or reject any and all proposals; to add or delete items and/or quantities; to amend the RFP; to waive any minor irregularities, informalities, or failure to conform to the RFP; to extend the deadline for submitting proposals; to postpone award for up to 60 days; to award one or more contracts, by item or task, or groups of items or tasks, if so provided in the RFP and if multiple awards or phases are determined by the City to be in the public interest. C. The City of Bozeman reserves the right to reject the proposal of any person/firm who previously failed to perform properly to the satisfaction of the City of Bozeman, or complete on time agreements of similar nature, or to reject the proposal of any person/firm who is not in a position to perform such an agreement satisfactorily as determined by the City of Bozeman. D. The City of Bozeman reserves the right to determine the best qualified Contractor and negotiate a final scope of service and cost, negotiate a contract with another Contractor if an agreement cannot be reached with the first selected Contractor, or reject all proposals. E. The professional services contract between the City of Bozeman and the successful Contractor will incorporate the Contractor's scope of service and work schedule as part of the agreement (see Appendix B for form of professional services agreement. The professional services agreement presented to the Contractor may differ from this form as appropriate for the scope of services). F. This RFP does not commit the City to award a contract. The City assumes no liability or responsibility for costs incurred by firms in responding to this request for proposals or request for interviews, additional data, or other information with respect to the selection process, prior to the issuance of an agreement, contract or purchase order. The Contractor, by submitting a response to this RFP, waives all right to protest or seek any legal remedies whatsoever regarding any aspect of this RFP. G. The City reserves the right to cancel, in part or in its entirety, this RFP including, but not limited to: selection procedures, submittal date, and submittal requirements. If the City cancels or revises this RFP, all Contractors who submitted proposals will be notified using email. H. Projects under any contract are subject to the availability of funds. XII. NONDISCRIMINATION AND EQUAL PAY POLICY The City of Bozeman requires each entity submitting under this notice shall affirm, on a separate form provided, that it will not discriminate on the basis of race, color, religion, creed, sex, age, marital status, national origin, or because of actual or perceived sexual orientation, sexual preference, gender identity, or disability in fulfillment of a contract entered into for the services identified herein and that this prohibition on discrimination shall apply to the hiring and treatment of the submitting entity’s employees and to all subcontracts it enters into in the fulfillment of the services identified herein. Failure to comply with this requirement shall be cause for the submittal to be deemed nonresponsive. The City also requires each entity submitting under this notice shall affirm it will abide by the Equal Pay Act of 1963 and Section 39-3-104, MCA (the Montana Equal Pay Act), and has visited the State of Montana Equal Pay for Equal Work “best practices” website, https://equalpay.mt.gov/BestPractices/Employers, or equivalent “best practices publication and has read the material. XIII. MISCELLANEOUS A. No Oral Agreements. No conversations or oral agreements with any officer, employee, or agent of the City shall affect or modify any term of this solicitation. Oral communications or any written/email communication between any person and City officer, employee or agent shall not be considered binding. B. No Partnership/Business Organization. Nothing in this solicitation or in any subsequent agreement, or any other contract entered into as a result of this solicitation, shall constitute, create, give rise to or otherwise be recognized as a partnership or formal business organization of any kind between or among the respondent and the City. C. Employment Restriction and Indemnity. No person who is an owner, officer, employee, contractor, or consultant of a respondent shall be an officer or employee of the City. No rights of the City’s retirement or personnel rules accrue to a respondent, its officers, employees, contractors, or consultants. Respondents shall have the responsibility of all salaries, wages, bonuses, retirement, withholdings, worker’s compensation and occupational disease compensation, insurance, unemployment compensation other benefits and taxes and premiums appurtenant thereto concerning its officers, employees, contractors, and consultants. Each Respondent shall save and hold the City harmless with respect to any and all claims for payment, compensation, salary, wages, bonuses, retirement, withholdings, worker’s compensation and occupational disease compensation, insurance, unemployment compensation other benefits and taxes and premiums in any way related to each respondent’s officers, employees, contractors and consultants. D. Accessibility. Upon reasonable notice, the City will provide assistance for those persons with sensory impairments. For further information please contact the ADA Coordinator David Arnado via the City’s TTY line at 406-582-2301. E. Procurement. When discrepancies occur between words and figures in this solicitation, the words shall govern. No responsibility shall attach to a City employee for the premature opening of an RFP not properly addressed and identified in accordance with these documents. F. Governing Law. This solicitation and any disputes arising hereunder or under any future agreement shall be governed and construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of Montana, without reference to principles of choice or conflicts of laws. XIV. ATTACHMENTS The following exhibits are incorporated in this RFP: Appendix A: Non-Discrimination Affirmation Appendix B: Sample Construction Agreement Appendix C: 2026-06-29_BPL Childrens Room_Bidding and Permit DRAWINGS Appendix D: 2026-06-29_BPL Childrens Room_Bidding and Permit_SPECIFICATIONS END OF RFP Attachment A NONDISCRIMINATION AND EQUAL PAY AFFIRMATION ____________________________________(name of entity submitting) hereby affirms it will not discriminate on the basis of race, color, religion, creed, sex, age, marital status, national origin, or because of actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity or disability and acknowledges and understands the eventual contract will contain a provision prohibiting discrimination as described above and this prohibition on discrimination shall apply to the hiring and treatments or proposer’s employees and to all subcontracts. In addition, ____________________________________(name of entity submitting) hereby affirms it will abide by the Equal Pay Act of 1963 and Section 39-3-104, MCA (the Montana Equal Pay Act), and has visited the State of Montana Equal Pay for Equal Work “best practices” website, https://equalpay.mt.gov/BestPractices/Employers, or equivalent “best practices publication and has read the material. ______________________________________ Name and title of person authorized to sign on behalf of submitter Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 1 of 19 CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT This Construction Agreement is made and entered into this _____ day of ____________, 202__ (“Effective Date”), by and between the CITY OF BOZEMAN, MONTANA, a self-governing municipal corporation organized and existing under its Charter and the laws of the State of Montana, 121 North Rouse Street, Bozeman, Montana, with a mailing address of PO Box 1230, Bozeman, MT 59771, hereinafter referred to as “City,” and, ___________________________, hereinafter referred to as “Contractor.” City and Contractor may be referred to individually as “Party” and collectively as “Parties.” In consideration of the covenants, agreements, representations, and warranties contained herein, the Parties agree as follows: 1. Work to be Performed: a. A description of the work to be performed to _____________________ (the “Construction Project”) and Contractor’s duties is set forth in the Scope of Services, attached as Exhibit A and by this reference made a part of this Agreement. b. Prior to the commencement of any work on Construction Project, Contractor’s representatives and City’s representatives must hold a meeting to establish a working understanding among the Parties as to the scope of Construction Project and duties of Contractor. At this meeting, Contractor and City must resolve any outstanding issues related to the plans, designs, drawings, and specifications. If the Parties are unable to resolve these issues and City fails, refuses, or is unable to approve the same, no work must commence on Construction Project until such issues are resolved and City approves the related plans, designs, drawings, and specifications. c. Except as provided elsewhere in this Agreement, Contractor must furnish all the labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services necessary to perform and complete Construction Project. Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 2 of 19 d. During work on Construction Project, and as part of the final completion of Construction Project, Contractor must clean up the Project site, including the removal and satisfactory disposal of all waste, garbage, excess materials, and equipment, and the performance of any other work necessary to restore the site to at least as good order and condition as at the commencement of Construction Project. 2. City-Supplied Materials: City may supply materials from time to time in furtherance of Construction Project. Such materials will be noted as an addendum to this Agreement. 3. Time of Performance: Contractor must begin Construction Project after receiving a Notice to Proceed from City and must complete Construction Project no later than ______________________. Time is of the essence of completion of all work and each phase of Construction Project. 4. Liquidated Damages: If Construction Project is not completed within the time provided by this Agreement, City may deduct for each day Construction Project remains uncompleted the sum of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) from the compensation hereinafter specified and retain that sum as payment for liquidated damages sustained by reason of Contractor’s failure to complete Construction Project on time. 5. Compensation: a. City must pay to Contractor, and Contractor must accept as full payment for the performance of this Agreement and Construction Project, the amount of _____________________________ Dollars ($_____________). b. Prior to beginning work outside the original Construction Project, both Parties must agree in writing to the additional work and costs (“Change Order”). c. City may retain five percent (5%) of the total amount of compensation to be paid to Contractor to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement and the timely completion of Construction Project and any punch list items (“Retainage Amount”). City must pay the Retainage Amount, if any, to Contractor thirty (30) days after City’s final acceptance of Construction Project. 6. Inspection and Testing: Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 3 of 19 a. City has the right to inspect and test any work performed by Contractor on Construction Project. Contractor must allow City and its agents access to Construction Project at all times and must provide access for inspection and testing, including temporarily discontinuing portions of the work or uncovering or removing portions of the work. Any inspection and testing performed by City and its agents is for the sole benefit of City and must not relieve Contractor of its duties, responsibilities, and obligations to ensure the work strictly complies with the Scope of Services and all applicable laws and building and safety codes. City’s inspection and testing is not deemed or considered acceptance by City of any portion of Construction Project. City’s inspection and testing does not serve to nullify, amend, or waive any warranties provided by Contractor under this Agreement. b. Contractor must, without charge, replace any material or correct any work found by City or its agents to be defective or otherwise not in compliance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement. If Contractor fails to replace or correct any defective work or materials after receiving reasonable written notice by City, City may take corrective action. Corrective action may include using City’s own materials and employees or retaining a third Party. City will deduct the cost and expense of the corrective action from Contractor’s compensation. 7. Partial Utilization of Construction Project: City has the right to use or occupy any portion of Construction Project City and Contractor mutually agree is substantially completed. If City takes possession of any portion of Construction Project, this possession is not an acceptance of Construction Project, in whole or in part. Any use by City of Construction Project is not grounds for extensions of any construction deadlines or a change in Contractor’s compensation. Contractor’s warranties runs from the completion of the total Construction Project and not from the date City may take possession of selected portions of Construction Project. 8. Related Work at the Site: Nothing in this Agreement prevents or precludes City, through its employees or by contract with a third Party, from performing work related to the Project not otherwise addressed in the Scope of Services. Such work may not interfere with Contractor’s performance of this Agreement. Contractor must allow access for any City employee, agent or representative, or any third Party under contract with City to perform the work. 9. Contractor’s Representations and Warranties: Contractor represents and warrants as follows: Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 4 of 19 a. Unless otherwise specified by the terms of this Agreement, all materials used by Contractor on Construction Project must be new and of the most suitable grade for their intended uses. b. The quality of services and materials must be of a kind and nature acceptable to City. All services provided to, on, or for Construction Project must be free of defects and nonconformities. c. Contractor’s representation and warranty begins with the commencement of the work on Construction Project and ends one (1) year from the final completion and acceptance by City of Construction Project, regardless of whether such equipment, materials, or labor were supplied by Contractor or by Contractor’s subcontractors or suppliers. Other express warranties for materials that provide for a longer warranty period are not reduced by this provision. When Contractor receives City’s written notice of a defective or nonconforming condition during an applicable warranty period, Contractor must take all actions, including redesign and replacement, to correct the defective or nonconforming condition within a time frame acceptable to City and at no additional cost to City. Contractor must also, at its sole cost, perform any tests required by City to verify that Contractor corrected the defective or nonconforming condition. Contractor warrants the corrective action taken against defective and nonconforming conditions for a period of an additional one (1) year from the date of City’s acceptance of the corrective action. d. Contractor and its sureties are liable for the satisfaction and full performance of all warranties. e. Contractor is responsible for the completion of Construction Project. Contractor, or its duly authorized representative assigned to serve as Construction Project Manager, must be personally present at the site of Construction Project during working hours for the term of this Agreement until the completion of Construction Project. f. Contractor must have a complete, accurate, and up-to-date set of construction plans, drawings, and specifications on site at all times. g. Contractor has examined all available records and made field examinations of the site of Construction Project. Contractor has knowledge of the field conditions to be encountered during Construction Project. Contractor has knowledge of the types and character of equipment necessary for the work, the types of materials needed and the sources of such materials, and the condition of the local labor market. Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 5 of 19 h. Contractor is responsible for the safety of the work and must maintain all lights, guards, signs, temporary passages, or other protections necessary for safety of the site at all times. i. All work must be performed at Contractor’s risk, and Contractor must promptly repair or replace all damage and loss at its sole cost and expense regardless of the reason or cause of the damage or loss. j. Contractor is responsible for any loss or damage to materials, tools, or other articles used or held for use in the completion of performance of Construction Project. k. Contractor’s performance must be without damage or disruption to any other work or property of City or of others and without interference with the operation of existing machinery or equipment, unless otherwise agreed to in writing. l. Title to all work, materials, and equipment covered by any payment of Contractor’s compensation by City, will pass to City at the time of payment, free and clear of all liens and encumbrances. 10. Prevailing Wage Requirements a. Montana Resident Preference. The nature of the work performed, or services provided, under this Contract meets the statutory definition of a "public works contract" in 18- 2-401, MCA. Unless superseded by federal law, Montana law requires that contractors and subcontractors give preference to the employment of Montana residents for any public works contract in excess of $25,000 for construction or non-construction services. Contractor must abide by the requirements set out in 18-2-401 through 18-2-432, MCA, and all administrative rules adopted under these statutes. The Commissioner of the Montana Department of Labor and Industry has established the resident requirements in accordance with 18-2-403 and 18-2-409, MCA. Any and all questions concerning prevailing wage and Montana resident issues should be directed to the Montana Department of Labor and Industry. b. Standard Prevailing Rate of Wages. In addition, unless superseded by federal law, all employees working on a public works contract must be paid prevailing wage rates in accordance with 18-2-401 through 18-2-432, MCA, and all associated administrative rules. Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 6 of 19 Montana law requires that all public works contracts, as defined in 18-2-401, MCA, in which the total cost of the contract is greater than $25,000, contain a provision stating for each job classification the standard prevailing wage rate, including fringe benefits, travel, per diem, and zone pay that Contractors, subcontractors, and employers must pay during the public works contract. Wage rate adjustments for multiyear public works contracts are the sole responsibility of the Contractor and must be done in accordance with 18-2-417, MCA. c. Notice of Wages and Benefits. Furthermore, 18-2-406, MCA, requires that all contractors, subcontractors, and employers who are performing work or providing services under a public works contract post in a prominent and accessible site on the project staging area or work area, no later than the first day of work and continuing for the entire duration of the contract, a legible statement of all wages and fringe benefits to be paid to the employees in compliance with 18-2-423, MCA. d. Wage Rates, Pay Schedule, and Records. 18-2-423, MCA, requires that employees receiving an hourly wage must be paid on a weekly basis. Each contractor, subcontractor, and employer must maintain payroll records in a manner readily capable of being certified for submission under 18-2-423, MCA, for not less than three years after Contractor's, subcontractor's, or employer's completion of work on the public works contract. 11. Delays and Extensions of Time: If Contractor’s performance of this Agreement is prevented or delayed by any unforeseen cause beyond the control of Contractor, including acts or omissions of City, Contractor must, within ten (10) days of the commencement of any such delay, give City written notice thereof. Further, Contractor must, within ten (10) days of the termination of such delay, give City written notice of the total actual duration of the delay. If City is provided with these required notices and if City determines that the cause of the delay was not foreseeable, was beyond the control of Contractor, and was not a result of the fault or negligence of Contractor, then City will determine the total duration of the delay and extend the time for performance of the Agreement accordingly. Unless the delay is caused by the intentional interference of City with Contractor’s performance, Contractor must make no claim for damages or any other claim other than for an extension of time as herein provided by reason of any delays. 12. Suspension: a. City may, by written notice to Contractor and at its convenience for any reason, suspend the performance of all or any portion of the work to be performed on Construction Project (“Notice of Suspension”). The Notice of Suspension must set forth the time of suspension, Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 7 of 19 if then known to City. During the period of suspension, Contractor must use its best efforts to minimize costs associated with the suspension. b. Upon Contractor’s receipt of any Notice of Suspension, unless the notice requires otherwise, Contractor must: (1) immediately discontinue work on the date and to the extent specified in the Notice of Suspension; (2) place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services, or equipment; (3) promptly make every reasonable effort to obtain suspension upon terms satisfactory to City of all orders, subcontracts, and rental agreements to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work suspended; and (4) continue to protect and maintain the Project, including those portions on which work has been suspended. c. As compensation for the suspended work, Contractor will be reimbursed for the following costs, reasonably incurred, without duplication of any item, and to the extent that such costs directly resulted from the suspension: (1) a standby charge paid during the period of suspension which will be sufficient to compensate Contractor for keeping, to the extent required in the Notice of Suspension, Contractor’s organization and equipment committed to the Project in standby status; (2) all reasonably incurred costs for the demobilization of Contractor’s and subcontractor’s crews and equipment; (3) an equitable amount to reimburse Contractor for the cost to protect and maintain the Project during the period of suspension; and (4) an equitable adjustment in the cost of performing the remaining portion of the work post-suspension if, as a direct result of the suspension, the cost to Contractor of subsequently performing the remaining work on Construction Project has increased or decreased. d. Upon receipt of written notice by City to resume the suspended work (“Notice to Resume Work”), Contractor must immediately resume performance of the suspended work as to the extent required in the Notice to Resume Work. Any claim by Contractor for time or compensation described in Section 11(c) must be made within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the Notice to Resume Work and Contractor must submit a revised Construction Schedule for City’s review and approval. Contractor’s failure to timely make such a claim must result in a waiver of the claim. e. No compensation described in Section 11(c) must be paid and no extension of time to complete Construction Project must be granted if the suspension results from Contractor’s non-compliance with or breach of the terms or requirements of this Agreement. 13. Termination for Contractor’s Fault: Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 8 of 19 a. If Contractor refuses or fails to timely do the work, or any part thereof, or fails to perform any of its obligations under this Agreement, or otherwise breaches any terms or conditions of this Agreement, City may, by written notice, terminate this Agreement and Contractor’s right to proceed with all or any part of Construction Project (“Termination Notice Due to Contractor’s Fault”). City may then take over Construction Project and complete it, either with its own resources or by re-letting the contract to any other third party, and may immediately take possession of and use such materials, appliances, tools, and equipment as may be on the site and which may be necessary for the completion of Construction Project. b. In the event of a termination pursuant to this Section 13, Contractor must be entitled to payment only for those services Contractor actually rendered. In the case of a lump sum or unit price contract, Contractor must not be entitled to any further payment until Construction Project has been completed. Upon completion of Construction Project, if the unpaid balance of Contractor’s compensation exceeds the cost to City of completing the work, including all costs paid to any subcontractors or third Parties retained by City to complete Construction Project and all administrative costs resulting from the termination (“City’s Cost for Completion”), such excess must be paid to Contractor. If City’s Cost for Completion exceeds the unpaid balance of Contractor’s compensation, then Contractor and its sureties must be liable for and must pay the difference, plus interest at the rate applicable to court judgments, to City. c. Any termination provided for by this Section 13 must be in addition to any other remedies to which City may be entitled under the law or at equity. d. In the event of termination under this Section 13, Contractor must, under no circumstances, be entitled to claim or recover consequential, special, punitive, lost business opportunity, lost productivity, field office overhead, general conditions costs, or lost profits damages of any nature arising, or claimed to have arisen, as a result of the termination. 14. Termination for City’s Convenience: a. Should conditions arise which, in the sole opinion and discretion of City, make it advisable to City to cease work on Construction Project, City may terminate this Agreement by written notice to Contractor (“Notice of Termination for City’s Convenience”). The termination must be effective in the manner specified in the Notice of Termination for City’s Convenience and must be without prejudice to any claims that City may otherwise have against Contractor. b. Upon receipt of the Notice of Termination for City’s Convenience, unless otherwise directed in the Notice, Contractor must immediately cease work on Construction Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 9 of 19 Project, discontinue placing orders for materials, supplies, and equipment for Construction Project, and make every reasonable effort to cancel all existing orders or contracts upon terms satisfactory to City. Contractor must do only such work as may be necessary to preserve, protect, and maintain work already completed, in progress, or in transit to the construction site. c. In the event of a termination pursuant to this Section 14, Contractor is entitled to payment only for those services Contractor actually rendered and materials actually purchased or which Contractor has made obligations to purchase on or before the receipt of the Notice of Termination for City’s Convenience, and reasonably incurred costs for demobilization of Contractor’s and any subcontractor’s crews. It is agreed that any materials that City is obligated to purchase from Contractor will remain City’s sole property. d. The compensation described in Section 14(c) is the sole compensation due to Contractor for its performance of this Agreement. Contractor must, under no circumstances, be entitled to claim or recover consequential, special, punitive, lost business opportunity, lost productivity, field office overhead, general conditions costs, or lost profits damages of any nature arising, or claimed to have arisen, as a result of the termination. 15. Limitation on Contractor’s Damages; Time for Asserting Claim: a. In the event of a claim for damages by Contractor under this Agreement, Contractor’s damages must be limited to contract damages and Contractor expressly waives any right to claim or recover consequential, special, punitive, lost business opportunity, lost productivity, field office overhead, general conditions costs, or lost profits damages of any nature or kind. b. In the event Contractor wants to assert a claim for damages of any kind or nature, Contractor must provide City with written notice of its claim, the facts and circumstances surrounding and giving rise to the claim, and the total amount of damages sought by the claim, within ten (10) days of the facts and circumstances giving rise to the claim. In the event Contractor fails to provide such notice, Contractor must waive all rights to assert such claim. c. Upon acceptance of final payment and for other good and valuable consideration, Contractor must and hereby does release and forever discharge City, its officers, agents, and employees of and from any and all claims, demands, actions, causes of action, obligations, and liabilities of every kind and character whatsoever, in law and in equity, whether now known or in the future discovered, arising from or related to this Agreement or Construction Project that Contractor may have or assert against City, its officers, agents, and employees. Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 10 of 19 16. Representatives and Notices: a. City’s Representative: City’s Representative for the purpose of this Agreement must be _____________________or such other individual as City must designate in writing. Whenever approval or authorization from or communication or submission to City is required by this Agreement, such communication or submission must be directed to City’s Representative and approvals or authorizations must be issued only by such Representative; provided, however, that in exigent circumstances when City’s Representative is not available, Contractor may direct its communication or submission to other designated City personnel or agents and may receive approvals or authorization from such persons. b. Contractor’s Representative: Contractor’s Representative for the purpose of this Agreement must be ________________ or such other individual as Contractor must designate in writing. Whenever direction to or communication with Contractor is required by this Agreement, such direction or communication must be directed to Contractor’s Representative; provided, however, that in exigent circumstances when Contractor’s Representative is not available, City may direct its direction or communication to other designated Contractor personnel or agents. c. Notices: All notices required by this Agreement must be in writing and must be provided to the Representatives named in this Section. Notices must be deemed given when delivered, if delivered by courier to Party’s address shown above during normal business hours of the recipient; or when sent, if sent by email or fax (with a successful transmission report) to the email address or fax number provided by the Party’s Representative; or on the fifth business day following mailing, if mailed by ordinary mail to the address shown above, postage prepaid. 17. Locating Underground Facilities: Contractor must be responsible for obtaining and determining the location of any underground facilities, including but not limited to, the location of any pipelines or utility supply, delivery, or service lines in accordance with the provisions of §69-4-501, et seq., Montana Code Annotated (MCA). Contractor must make every effort to avoid damage to underground facilities and must be solely responsible for any damage that may occur. If City personnel assume responsibility for locating any underground facilities, this fact must be noted in writing prior to commencement of such location work. 18. Permits: Contractor must provide all notices, comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations, obtain all necessary permits, licenses, including a City of Bozeman business license, and inspections from applicable governmental authorities, pay all fees Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 11 of 19 and charges in connection therewith, and perform all surveys and locations necessary for the timely completion of Construction Project. 19. Ownership of Documents; Indemnification: All plans, designs, drawings, specifications, documents, sample results and data, in whatever medium or format, originated or prepared by or for Contractor in contemplation of, or in the course of, or as a result of this Agreement or work on Construction Project, must be promptly furnished to City (“City Documents and Information”). All City Documents and Information must be the exclusive property of City and must be deemed to be works-for-hire. Contractor hereby assigns all right, title, and interest in and to City Documents and Information, including but not limited to, all copyright and patent rights in and to City Documents and Information. Neither Party grants to the other any express or implied licenses under any patents, copyrights, trademarks, or other intellectual property rights, except to the extent necessary to complete its obligations to the other under this Agreement. 20. Laws and Regulations: Contractor must comply fully with all applicable state and federal laws, regulations, and municipal ordinances including, but not limited to, all workers’ compensation laws, all environmental laws including, but not limited to, the generation and disposal of hazardous waste, the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), the safety rules, codes, and provisions of the Montana Safety Act in Title 50, Chapter 71, MCA, all applicable City, County, and State building and electrical codes, the Americans with Disabilities Act, and all non- discrimination, affirmative action, and utilization of minority and small business statutes and regulations. 21. Nondiscrimination and Equal Pay: Contractor agrees that all hiring by Contractor of persons performing this Agreement must be on the basis of merit and qualifications. Contractor will have a policy to provide equal employment opportunity in accordance with all applicable state and federal anti-discrimination laws, regulations, and contracts. Contractor will not refuse employment to a person, bar a person from employment, or discriminate against a person in compensation or in a term, condition, or privilege of employment because of race, color, religion, creed, political ideas, sex, age, marital status, national origin, actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity, physical or mental disability, except when the reasonable demands of the position require an age, physical or mental disability, marital status or sex distinction. Contractor must be subject to and comply with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964; Section 140, Title 2, United States Code, and all regulations promulgated thereunder. Contractor represents it is, and for the term of this Agreement will be, in compliance with the requirements of the Equal Pay Act of 1963 and Section 39-3-104, MCA (the Montana Equal Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 12 of 19 Pay Act). Contractor must report to City any violations of the Montana Equal Pay Act that Contractor has been found guilty of within 60 days of such finding for violations occurring during the term of this Agreement. Contractor must require these nondiscrimination terms of its subcontractors providing services under this Agreement. 22. Generative Artificial Intelligence (AI): City’s representative may, in their discretion, permit or deny Contractor’s use of Generative AI. If Contractor is permitted to use Generative AI, Contractor agrees to review any work created by Generative AI for accuracy, bias, and copyright infringement. Contractor agrees it will never submit any confidential or personal identifiable information acquired through this Agreement into a Generative AI system. For the purposes of this section, Generative AI is defined as a deep learning model that can generate high quality content such as stories or writings, images, voice replication and music. 23. Intoxicants; DOT Drug and Alcohol Regulations: Contractor must not permit or suffer the introduction or use of any intoxicants, including alcohol or illegal drugs, upon the site of Construction Project. Contractor acknowledges it is aware of and must comply with its responsibilities and obligations under the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations governing anti-drug and alcohol misuse prevention plans and related testing. City must have the right to request proof of such compliance and Contractor must be obligated to furnish such proof. Contractor must be responsible for instructing and training Contractor's employees and agents in proper and specified work methods and procedures. Contractor must provide continuous inspection and supervision of the work performed. Contractor is responsible for instructing its employees and agents in safe work practices. 24. Labor Relations: a. In the event that, during the term of this Agreement and throughout the course of Contractor’s performance of Construction Project, any labor problems or disputes of any type arise or materialize which in turn cause any work on Construction Project to cease for any period of time, Contractor specifically agrees to take immediate steps, at its own expense and without expectation of reimbursement from City, to alleviate or resolve all such labor problems or disputes. The specific steps Contractor must take to resume work on Construction Project must be left to the discretion of Contractor; provided, however, that Contractor must bear all costs of any related legal action. Contractor must provide immediate relief to City so as to permit the Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 13 of 19 work on Construction Project to resume and be completed within the time frames set forth in the Construction Schedule at no additional cost to City. b. In addition to Contractor’s indemnification obligations under paragraph 29(a) of this Agreement, Contractor must indemnify, defend, and hold City harmless from any and all claims, demands, costs, expenses, damages, and liabilities arising out of, resulting from, or occurring in connection with any labor problems or disputes or any delays or stoppages of work associated with such problems or disputes. The provisions of paragraph 28(b) – (g) apply to this subsection. 25. Subcontractors: a. Contractor may employ subcontractors for any work on Construction Project. Contractor must provide City with a list of all subcontractors employed. b. Contractor remains fully responsible for the acts and omissions of any subcontractor, just as Contractor is for its own acts and omissions, and Contractor must remain fully responsible and liable for the timely completion of Construction Project. c. Contractor is solely liable for any and all payments to subcontractors. Contractor must hold all payments received from City in trust for the benefit of subcontractors, and all such payments must be used to satisfy obligations of Construction Project before being used for any other purpose. Contractor must make any payments due to any subcontractor within seven (7) days of Contractor’s receipt of payment, including a proportional part of the retainage Contractor has received from City. In the event of a dispute regarding any subcontractor’s invoice, Contractor must promptly pay the undisputed amount to the subcontractor and notify the subcontractor in writing of the amount in dispute and the reasons for the dispute. Any withholding of payment must comply with the requirements of §28-2-2103, MCA. In the event Contractor is unwilling or unable to make timely and proper payment to any subcontractor, City may elect to withhold any payment otherwise due to Contractor and upon seven (7) days’ written notice to Contractor, may pay subcontractor by direct or joint payment. 26. Indebtedness and Liens: Before City may make any final payment to Contractor, Contractor must furnish City with satisfactory proof that there are no outstanding debts or liens in connection with Construction Project. If Contractor allows any indebtedness to accrue to subcontractors or others during the progress of the work, and fails to pay or discharge the same within five (5) days after demand, then City may either withhold any money due to Contractor until such indebtedness is paid or apply the same towards the discharge of the indebtedness. If Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 14 of 19 any lien or claim is filed or made by any subcontractor, material supplier, or any other person, Contractor must immediately notify City and must cause the same to be discharged of record within thirty (30) days after its filing. 27. Hazard Communication: Contractor must comply with all hazard communication requirements dictated by the Environmental Protection Agency, the Montana Department of Agriculture, OSHA, Hazard Communications Standard, 29 CFR 1910.1200, and applicable City ordinances. Contractor must supply a chemical list, the associated material safety data sheets (MSDS), and other pertinent health exposure data for chemicals that Contractor’s, subcontractor’s or City’s employees may be exposed to while working on City property during the course of Construction Project. One copy of this documentation must be delivered to City to the attention of City’s Representative. This documentation must be delivered before work involving these chemicals may commence. 28. Accounts and Records: During the term of this Agreement and for two (2) years following City’s final acceptance of Construction Project, Contractor must maintain accounts and records related to Construction Project. Upon reasonable notice, City must have the right to inspect all such accounts and records, including but not limited to, Contractor’s records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, specifications, field and site notes, receipts, invoices, bills, contracts, or other documents relating to Construction Project. 29. Indemnification; Insurance; Bonds: a. Contractor agrees to release, defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the City, its agents, representatives, employees, and officers (collectively referred to for purposes of this Section as the City) from and against any and all claims, demands, actions, fees and costs (including attorney’s fees and the costs and fees of and expert witness and consultants), losses, expenses, liabilities (including liability where activity is inherently or intrinsically dangerous) or damages of whatever kind or nature connected therewith and without limit and without regard to the cause or causes thereof or the negligence of any Party or Parties that may be asserted against, recovered from or suffered by the City occasioned by, growing or arising out of or resulting from or in any way related to: (i) the negligent, reckless, or intentional misconduct of Contractor; or (ii) any negligent, reckless, or intentional misconduct of any of Contractor’s agents. b. Such obligations must not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist. The indemnification obligations of this Section must not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce any common-law or statutory rights of the indemnitee(s) which would otherwise exist as to such indemnitee(s). Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 15 of 19 c. Contractor’s indemnity under this Section must be without regard to and without any right to contribution from any insurance maintained by the City. d. Should the City be required to bring an action against Contractor to assert its right to defense or indemnification under this Agreement or under Contractor’s applicable insurance policies required below the City must be entitled to recover reasonable costs and attorney fees incurred in asserting its right to indemnification or defense but only if a court of competent jurisdiction determines Contractor was obligated to defend the claim(s) or was obligated to indemnify the City for a claim(s) or any portion(s) thereof. e. In the event of an action filed against the City resulting from the City’s performance under this Agreement, the City may elect to represent itself and incur all costs and expenses of suit. f. Contractor also waives any and all claims and recourse against the City, including the right of contribution for loss or damage to person or property arising from, growing out of, or in any way connected with or incident to the performance of this Agreement except “responsibility for [the City’s] own fraud, for willful injury to the person or property of another, or for violation of law, whether willful or negligent” as per 28-2-702, MCA. g. These obligations must survive termination of this Agreement and the services performed hereunder. h. In addition to and independent from the above, Contractor must at Contractor’s expense secure insurance coverage through an insurance company or companies duly licensed and authorized to conduct insurance business in Montana which insures the liabilities and obligations specifically assumed by Contractor in this Section. The insurance coverage must not contain any exclusion for liabilities specifically assumed by Contractor in subsection (a) of this Section. The insurance must cover and apply to all claims, demands, suits, damages, losses, and expenses that may be asserted or claimed against, recovered from, or suffered by the City without limit and without regard to the cause therefore and which is acceptable to the City. Contractor must furnish to the City an accompanying certificate of insurance and accompanying endorsements in amounts not less than as shown below: Workers’ Compensation – not less than statutory limits; Employers’ Liability - $1,000,000 per occurrence; $2,000,000 annual aggregate; Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 16 of 19 Commercial General Liability - $1,000,000 per occurrence; $2,000,000 annual aggregate; Products and Completed Operations – $1,000,000; Automobile Liability - $1,000,000 property damage/bodily injury; $2,000,000 annual aggregate (all owned, hired, non-owned vehicles); Builder’s Risk/Property Insurance at least as broad as that provided by the ISO special causes of loss form (CP10 30) naming at a minimum the City in an amount equal to greater of Contractor’s compensation or full replacement value of the work (covering at a minimum all work, buildings, materials and equipment, whether on site or in transit, loss due to fire, lightening, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of laws, water damage, flood if site within a flood plain, repair or replacement costs, testing and start-up costs) on an all risk coverage basis. This insurance must include waivers of subrogation between the City and Contractor to the extent that damage to Construction Project or City Hall is covered by other insurance; Owner’s and Contractor’s Protective Liability: one policy designating the City (including its agents, representatives, employees, and officers) as the insured and another independent policy designated the City’s Representative (including its consultants, consultants, agents and employees) as the insured on the declarations with both policies covering: (i) operations performed by Contractor under this Agreement for the City; and (ii) the City’s and the City’s Representatives acts or omissions, including negligent acts, in connection with its general supervision of the work of Contractor’s and its subcontractors - $1,000,000 per occurrence; $2,000,000 aggregate; Contractual Liability Insurance (covering Contractor’s indemnity obligations described in this Agreement) - $1,000,000 per occurrence $2,000,000 aggregate The amounts of insurance provided must be exclusive of defense costs. The City of Bozeman must be endorsed as an additional or named insured on a primary non-contributory basis on both the Commercial General and Automobile Liability policies. The insurance and required endorsements must be in a form suitable to the City and must include no less than a thirty (30) day notice of cancellation or non-renewal. Contractor must notify the City within two (2) business days of Contractor’s receipt of notice that any required insurance coverage will be terminated or Contractor’s decision to terminate any required insurance coverage for any reason. Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 17 of 19 The City must approve all insurance coverage and endorsements prior to Contractor commencing work. i. Pursuant to the City’s authority provided for in 18-2-201(4) MCA, Contractor may not be required to provide bonds as required by 18-2-201(1) MCA under this Agreement. 30. Taxes: Contractor is obligated to pay all taxes of any kind or nature and make all appropriate employee withholdings. Contractor understands that all contractors or subcontractors working on a publicly funded project must comply with 15-50-101 through 15-50- 311, MCA. 31. Dispute Resolution: a. Any claim, controversy, or dispute between the Parties, their agents, employees, or representatives must be resolved first by negotiation between senior-level personnel from each Party duly authorized to execute settlement agreements. Upon mutual agreement of the Parties, the Parties may invite an independent, disinterested mediator to assist in the negotiated settlement discussions. b. If the Parties are unable to resolve the dispute within thirty (30) days from the date the dispute was first raised, then such dispute must be resolved in a court of competent jurisdiction in compliance with the Applicable Law provisions of this Agreement. 32. Survival: Contractor’s indemnification and warranty obligations must survive the termination or expiration of this Agreement for the maximum period allowed under applicable law. 33. Headings: The headings used in this Agreement are for convenience only and are not be construed as a part of the Agreement or as a limitation on the scope of the particular paragraphs to which they refer. 34. Waiver: A waiver by City of any default or breach by Contractor of any covenants, terms, or conditions of this Agreement does not limit City’s right to enforce such covenants, terms, or conditions or to pursue City’s rights in the event of any subsequent default or breach. 35. Attorney’s Fees and Costs: In the event it becomes necessary for either Party to retain an attorney to enforce any of the terms or conditions of this Agreement or to give any notice required herein, then the prevailing Party or the Party giving notice must be entitled to Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 18 of 19 reasonable attorney's fees and costs, including fees, salary, and costs of in-house counsel including City Attorney’s Office staff. 36. Severability: If any portion of this Agreement is held to be void or unenforceable, the balance thereof must continue in effect. 37. Applicable Law: The Parties agree that this Agreement is governed in all respects by the laws of the State of Montana. 38. Binding Effect: This Agreement is binding upon and inures to the benefit of the heirs, legal representatives, successors, and assigns of the Parties. 39. Amendments: This Agreement may not be modified, amended, or changed in any respect except by a written document signed by all Parties. 40. No Third-Party Beneficiary: This Agreement is for the exclusive benefit of the Parties, does not constitute a third-Party beneficiary agreement, and may not be relied upon or enforced by a third Party. 41. Counterparts: This Agreement may be executed in counterparts, which together constitute one instrument. 42. Assignment: Contractor may not assign this Agreement in whole or in part without the prior written consent of City. No assignment will relieve Contractor of its responsibility for the performance of the Agreement and the completion of Construction Project. Contractor may not assign to any third Party other than Contractor’s subcontractors on Construction Project, the right to receive monies due from City without the prior written consent of City. 43. Authority: Each Party represents that it has full power and authority to enter into and perform this Agreement and the person signing this Agreement on behalf of each Party has been properly authorized and empowered to sign this Agreement. 44. Independent Contractor: The Parties agree and acknowledge that in the performance of this Agreement and the completion of Construction Project, Contractor must render services as an independent contractor and not as the agent, representative, subcontractor, or employee of City. The Parties further agree that all individuals and companies retained by Contractor at all times will be considered the agents, employees, or independent Construction Agreement for __________ FY2020-2021 Page 19 of 19 contractors of Contractor and at no time will they be the employees, agents, or representatives of City. 45. Integration: This Agreement and all Exhibits attached hereto constitute the entire agreement of the Parties. Covenants or representations not contained therein or made a part thereof by reference, are not binding upon the Parties. There are no understandings between the Parties other than as set forth in this Agreement. All communications, either verbal or written, made prior to the date of this Agreement are hereby abrogated and withdrawn unless specifically made a part of this Agreement by reference. 46. Consent to Electronic Signatures: The Parties have consented to execute this Agreement electronically in conformance with the Montana Uniform Electronic Transactions Act, Title 30, Chapter 18, Part 1, MCA. **** END OF AGREEMENT EXCEPT FOR SIGNATURES **** IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Contractor and City have caused this Agreement to be executed, effective on the date written above, and intend to be legally bound thereby. CITY OF BOZEMAN, MONTANA CONTRACTOR By: _______________________________ By: Chuck Winn, City Manager Print Name: Title: APPROVED AS TO FORM: By: _______________________________ Greg Sullivan, City Attorney • • ADD ALTERNATE 1: SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILING BAFFLES. SEE 1/A101 BASE PROJECTNO ACPNL-4ADD ALTERNATE 1FURNISH AND INSTALL ACPNL-4 IN SIZES AND CONFIGURATION AS NOTED IN DRAWINGS. •• • ADD ALTERNATE 2: SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILING BAFFLES. SEE 3/A101 BASE PROJECTNO ACPNL-5A/B/CNO ACPNL-6A/B/CADD ALTERNATE 2FURNISH AND INSTALL ACPNL-5A/B/C AND ACPNL-6A/B/C IN SIZES AND CONFIGURATION AS NOTED IN DRAWINGS. 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 Architecture and Interiors Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel 626 E Main St. Bozeman, MT 59715 Bidding and Permit2026.06.29 Morrison-Maierle 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 |406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT SMA 515 W ASPEN ST. SUITE 200A | 406.451.7310 Associate Architect THIS BULDING HAS BEEN DESIGNED IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE STANDARDS OF THE AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES AT (ADA) AS CERTIFIED BY THE ARCHITECT OR RECORD, MSR DESIGN DAGMARA LARSEN, AIA CERTIFIED BY SHT NO SHEET NAME GENERAL G00 COVER G001 SYMBOLS & MATERIAL I.D. G003 TYPES AND SYSTEMS G051 BUILDING CODE SUMMARY G052 BUILDING EGRESS AND OCCUPANCY ARCHITECTURAL AD101 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL PLAN A100 OVERALL FLOOR PLANS A101 FLOOR PLANS AND RCP'S A141 TOILET ROOMS A501 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A601 DOOR SCHEDULE AND DETAILS A701 FINISH PLANS - CHILDRENS AREA A801 MILLWORK PLANS, ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS A901 LIBRARY SHELVING AND ACCESORIES PLAN A902 COLLECTION PLAN - REFERENCE ONLY A911 FURNITURE PLANS - REFERENCE ONLY ELECTRICAL E001 ELECTRICAL LEGENDS AND ABBREVIATIONS E002 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS ED101 LEVEL ONE POWER AND SIGNAL DEMOLITION PLAN ED201 LEVEL ONE LIGHTING DEMOLITION PLAN E101 LEVEL ONE POWER AND SIGNAL PLAN E201 LEVEL ONE LIGHTING PLAN MECHANICAL M001 MECHANICAL LEGEND AND NOTES MD102 LEVEL ONE UPPER DEMO - HVAC M100 BASEMENT - HVAC M101 LEVEL ONE LOWER - HVAC M102 LEVEL ONE UPPER - HVAC PLUMBING P001 PLUMBING LEGEND, SCHEDULES AND DETAILS PD100 BASEMENT DEMO - PLUMBING PD101 LEVEL ONE LOWER DEMO - PLUMBING PD102 LEVEL ONE UPPER DEMO - PLUMBING P100 BASEMENT - PLUMBING P101 LEVEL ONE - PLUMBING TECHNOLOGY T001 TELECOM SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS T002 ICT DETAILS TD101 LEVEL ONE ICT DEMO T100 LEVEL ONE - ICT T201 TELECOM ROOM ENLARGED PLANS MULTI - ELEVATION REFERENCE ELEVATION REFERENCE SECTION REFERENCE DETAIL REFERENCE DETAIL REFERENCE DRAFTING SYMBOLS B&B BABDBITBLBLDGBLKGBMBOBOFBOSBOSBOTBPLBRBRCBRGBSMTBTWNBUR CC/CCABCANTCATCBCECEMCERCFCFSCGCHNLCICIPCIRCJCLCLNGCLOCLR CM CMUCOCO DBL DEGDEMODEPTDFDIADIAGDIFFDIMDISPDISTDIV DLDNDRDSDTLDWDWGDWLDWTR EEAEFEGENEIFSEJELELECELEVEMERE TREOEOSEPDEQEQUIPESTBEWEWCEXCEXHEXIST/EX EXP EXT FEC FFFFE FFLFHCFINFIXTFLASH FLEXFLRFLUOR FNFND FOFOCFOMFOS FPFPLFRPFRTFTFTGFTRFURFTFWC G GAGALGALV GARGBGCGENGENGFRPGLGLUGYPGWB HHBHCHDRHDWDHDWRHMHORHRHTHTRHVACHYDHWHWH IDININCLINFOINSULINT JANJBOXJCJSTJT KITKO MASMATMATLMAXMCMDFMDOMECHMEMBMEZZMFRMHMINMISCMOMRMTDMTLMULMWMWA NNANICNONOMNRCNTS OAOCOCDODOFCIOFOIOHOHDOPOPGOPPOPTORD QTQTRQTY RRARADRBRCPRDRECRECTREFREFREGREINFREQDREVRFRFHRFVRHRHRRMRNDROROWRTRWL SSFSSKSTSTCSTDSTLSTNSTORSTRUCTSUBFLSUSPSYMSYS TT>ANTBDTDTEMPTERETHKTHRESTOBTOCTODTOFTOJTOMTOPTOSTOSTOWTRTDTSTYP UCUFINUGUNOUPHURUTIL VARVBVCTVERTVESTVINVNRVRVTVWC WWW/W/OWCWDWDWWFWGWHTRWPWRWSWSCTWT B C D E F G H I J K M N O Q R S T U V W LLABLAMLAVLBLCDLFLHLHRLINLINOLLLOCLONGLTGLVR L ABBREVIATIONS A/E ABABVACACFLACOUSACTADADDLADJADJSTADMINAFFALTALUMAMENDANCAPAPCAPROXARCHAUTOAVAVGAWT A Architect and/or EngineerAnchor BoltAboveAir ConditioningAccess FloorAcousticalAcoustical Ceiling TileAccess DoorAdditionalAdjacentAdjustableAdministrationAbove Finish FloorAlternateAluminumAmendmentAnchorAccess PanelArchitectural Precast ConcreteApproximatelyArchitecturalAutomaticAudio VisualAverageAcoustical Wall Treatment Balled and BurlappedBuilding AccessoryBoardBituminousBrick LedgeBuildingBlock(ing)Beam or Bench MarkBy OwnerBottom of FootingBottom of SlabBottom of SteelBottomBearing PlateBrickBrick CourseBearingBasementBetweenBuilt up Roof CourseCenter to CenterCabinetCantileverCategoryCatch BasinCivil EngineerCementCeramicCubic FeetCubic Feet per SecondCorner GuardChannelCast-IronCast-In-PlaceCircleControl JointCenterlineCeilingCloset Clear(ance)Construction ManagerConcrete Masonry UnitCased OpeningClean Out COL COM COMPCOMPRCONCCONDCONFCONNCONSTCONTCORRCPTCSKCTCTRCUCUHCW CW C ColumnCommunicationCompositeCompressibleConcreteConditionConferenceConnectionConstructionContiue (ous) (ation)CorridorCarpetCountersunkCeramic TileCenterCubicCabinet Unit HeaterCold WaterCurtain Wall DoubleDegreeDemolitionDepartmentDrinking FountainDiameter DiagonalDiffuserDimensionDispenserDistributionDivision or DividerDead LoadDownDoorDownspoutDetailDishwasherDrawingDowelDumbwaiter EastEachExhaust FanEmergency GeneratorExterior Insulation & Finish SystemExpansion JointElevationElectric(al)ElevatorEmergencyEntranceElectrial OutletEdge of SlabEthylene Propylen Dien MonomerEqualEquipmentEstablishedEach WayElectric Water CoolerExcavate(d), ExcavationExhaustExistingExpansionExterior Fire Extinguisher CabinetFinished Face, Face of WallFinish Floor ElevationFinish Floor LevelFire Hose CabinetFinishFixtureFlashingFlexibleFloor(ing)FluorescentFenceFoundationFinished OpeningFace of ConcreteFace MasonryFace of Suds / SteelFireproofingFireplaceFiberglass Reinforce Plastic PanelFire Retardant TreatedFoot or FeetFootingFine Tube Radiation / RadiatorFurringFutureFabric Wall Covering GasGaugeGallonGalvanizedGarageGrab BarGeneral ContractorGeneralGeneratorGypsum Fiberglass Reinforce PanelGlazingGlue LaminatedGypsumGyspum Wall Board HighHose BibHandicapHeaderHardwoodHardwareHollow MetalHorizontalHandrailHeightHeaterHeating / Ventilation / Air ConditioningHydrantHot WaterHot Water Heater Inside DiameterInchInclude(ing)InformationInsulationInterior JanitorJuncition BoxJanitor's ClosetJoistJoint KitchenKnockout Long, LengthLaboratoryLaminate, LaminationLavatoryPoundLinear Ceiling DiffuserLinear FootLeft HandLeft Hand ReverseLinearLinoleumLive LoadLocationLongitudinalLightingLouver MasonryWalk Off MatMaterialMaximumMedicine CabinetMedium Density FiberboardMedium Density OverlayMechanicalMembraneMezzanineManufacturerManholeMinimumMiscellaneousMasonry OpeningMoisture ResistantMountedMetalMullionMillworkMillwork Accessory OverallOn CenterOverhead Coiling DoorOutside DiameterOwner Furnished - Contractor InstalledOwner Furnished - Owner InstalledOverheadOverhead DoorOperable PartitionOpeningOppositeOptionalOverflow Roof Drain NorthNot ApplicableNot in ContractNumberNominalNoise Reduction CoefficientNot to Scale PERPPFMPFNPKGPLPLPLAMPLASPLBGPLFPLYWDPNLPRPREFABPRELIMPROJPSIPTPTNPVC P PerpendicularPre-FormedPre-FinishedParkingPlateProperty LinePlastic LaminatePlasterPlumbingPound per Linear FootPlywoodPanelPairPrefabricatedPreliminaryProjectionsPound per Square InchPaintPartitionPolyvinyl Chloride Quarry TileQuarterQuantity RadiusReturn AirRadiatorRubber BaseReflected Ceiling PlanRoof DrainRecessedRectangularReferenceRefrigeratorRegisterReinforce (ment) (ing)RequiredReverseResilient FloorRoof HatchRoof VentRight HandRight Hand ReverseRoomRoundRough OpeningRight of WayRubber TileRain Water Leader Solid SurfaceService SinkStone TileSound Transmission CoefficientStandardSteelStoneStorageStructuralSubfloor(ing)SuspendedSymmetry, SymmetricalSystem TreadTongue & GroovedTangentTo Be DeterminedTrench DrainTemporaryTerrazzoThick(ness)ThresholdTop of BeamTop of Concrete or CurbTop of DeckTop of FootingTop of JoistTop of MasonryToppingTop of SlabTop of SteelTop of WallTreatedTube SteelTypical UndercutUnfinishedUndergroundUnless Noted OtherwiseUpholsteryUrinalUtility VariesVapor BarrierVinyl Composition TileVerticalVestibuleVinylVeneerVapor RetarderVinyl TileVinyl Wall Covering WestWide, WidthWithWithoutWater ClosetWoodWindowWide FlangeWall GuardWater HeaterWaterproof(ing)Waster ReceptacleWeather-Strip(ing)WainscotWindow Treatment SSASANSCSCHEDSDSECTSFSFRNTSHRSHTSHTGSIMSLNTSMSMTLSOGSPSPECSQSS S SouthSupply AirSanitarySolid CoreScheduleStorm DrainSectionSquare FootStorefrontShowerSheetSheathingSimilarSealantSurface MountSheet MetalSlab on GradeSpace(ing)SpecificationsSquareStainless Steel FA FBR FCFD FE F Fire AlarmFace of BrickFaceFloor DrainFire Extinguisher PAPARPBDPCPERIM P Public AddressParallelPartical BoardPrecast ConcretePerimeter 1A101 SIM 1 A101 SIM 1 A101 SIM 1A101 SIM 1A101 SIM WALL TYPE PARTITION TYPE DOOR NUMBER OR TYPEDOOR SIZE WHEN NOTED WINDOW TYPE REVISION GRID LINE LEVEL MARKER ROOM NAME ROOM NUMBER NORTH SYMBOL VIEW NAME1 A1011/8" = 1' - 0" DRAWING NUMBER DRAWING TITLE SCALE SHEET NUMBER 1KEYNOTE Room name 101 0 1 CCD-000BP-1 Name Elevation 1iA1 1A1 W1 ACOUSTICAL RATED FIRE RATING ACOUSTICAL RATED FIRE RATING 1011'-0" x 1'-0"Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the Laws of the State of Montana. Architect Seal Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 Dagmara Cygler ARC-LIC-22020 6/25/2026 10:30:53 AMC:\Users\mitch\AppData\Local\Autodesk\Revit\Autodesk Revit2026\CollaborationCache\SE9LP2RL9C65\da5fc686-9fbb-4b88-84c4-252d479585b8\c70f9ff1-8639-4ccd-b4be-7e524297b68e.rvtG001 SYMBOLS & MATERIAL I.D. Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and TeenCorner Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors Associate Architect 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 515 W ASPEN ST. SUITE 200A | 406.451.7310 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT MATERIAL / PRODUCT ID LIST ID DESCRIPTION SPECSECTION Spec Data ACP-1BACP-1B 09 51 00 MFR: MATCH EXISTING PRODUCTPRODUCT: 2X2 LAY-IN ACOUSTIC CEILING PANELSIZE: 2X2GRID: EXPOSED, MATCH COLOR AND STYLEPANEL COLOR: MATCH EXISTINGNOTE: CONFIRM EXISTING PRODUCT IN FIELD, PROVIDE NEW IN QUANTITIESAS REQ'D, CONFIRM OWNER'S EXISTING ATTIC STOCK ACPNL-4SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CLOUD 09 84 00 MFR: FRASCH;PRODUCT: CUSTOM SHAPE PET PANEL;SIZE: VARIES (3 TYPES) - ARCHITECT TO PROVIDE DIGITAL FILES;THICKNESS: 12MM;COLOR: WHITE 07-12;NRC: TO BE 1.0 OR ABOVE;SUSPENSION:MFR's STEEL CABLE SYSTEM FOR DRYWALL CEILINGS; ACPNL-5ASUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CLOUD 09 84 00 MFR: EUREKA;PRODUCT: JOLI UNLIT CEILING SUSPENDED - 4227U-18;SIZE: 18"H;COLOR: TDF; ACPNL-5BSUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CLOUD 09 84 00 MFR: EUREKA;PRODUCT: JOLI UNLIT CEILING SUSPENDED - 4227U-18;SIZE: 18"H;COLOR: DYF; ACPNL-6ASUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CLOUD 09 84 00 MFR: EUREKA;PRODUCT: JOLI UNLIT CEILING SUSPENDED - 4227U-28;SIZE: 28"H;COLOR: PNF; CG-1CORNER GUARD, METAL 10 26 00 MATERIAL: STAINLESS STEEL, TYPE 304;FINISHED: BRUSHED VERTICAL;THICKNESS: 16GA;SIZE: 1"X1"XAS INDICATED ON DRAWINGSMOUNTING: ADHERED; CPT-3ACARPET TILE 09 68 13 MFR: INTERFACE;COLLECTION: HUMAN CONNECTIONS COLLECTION;PRODUCT: KERBSTONE;COLOR: *CUSTOM*;SIZE: 50CM X 50CM;INSTALL METHOD: DIRECT APPLY;BACKING: CQUESTBIOX;CONTENT: POST CONSUMER RECYCLED NYLON;INSTALLATION: CUSTOM, SEE DETAIL ON DRAWINGS;NOTE: PVC-FREE, RECYCLED NYLON; CPT-3BCARPET TILE 09 68 13 MFR: INTERFACE;COLLECTION: HUMAN CONECTIONS COLLECTION;PRODUCT: MOSS IN STONE;COLOR: *CUSTOM*;SIZE: 50CM X 50CM;INSTALL METHOD:DIRECT APPLY;BACKING: CQUESTBIOX;CONTENT: POST CONSUMER RECYCLED NYLON;INSTALLATION: CUSTOM, SEE DETAIL ON DRAWINGS;NOTE: PVC-FREE, RECYCLED NYLON;CPT-3CCARPET TILE 09 68 13 MFR: INTERFACE;COLLECTION: HUMAN CONNECTIONS COLLECTION;PRODUCT: MOSS;COLOR: *CUSTOM*;SIZE: 50CM X 50CM;INSTALL METHOD: DIRECT APPLY;BACKING: CQUESTBIOX;CONTENT: POST CONSUMER RECYCLED NYLON;INSTALLATION: CUSTOM, SEE DETAIL ON DRAWINGS;NOTE: PVC-FREE, RECYCLED NYLON; FILM-1DECORATIVE FILM 08 80 00 MFR: SKYLINE;PRODUCT: ULTRAGREEN SX-5038-UG JUTE;PRIVACY: MORE PRIVATE;COLOR: WHITE; FLA-1FLOORING ACCESSORY 09 65 00 "| MFR: TARKETT/JOHNSONITE;| PRODUCT: SLIM LINE TRANSITION;| SIZE: 1/4" TO 3/8" MATERIAL (WITH CONTOUR EDGE);| COLOR: MOON ROCK;" GL-4MONOLITHIC GLAZING 08 80 00 MFR: OPEN;PRODUCT: MID-IRON, MONOLITHIC FLOAT GLASSTHICKNESS: VARIES BY HEIGHT OR SYSTEM. GLASS PROVIDER TO PROVIDETHICKNESS AS REQ'D BY BUILDING CODE;NOTE: FULY TEMPERED WHERE REQUIRED GWB-15/8" GYPSUM WALL BOARD 09 21 16 INSUL-1FIBERGLASS BATT ACOUSTIC INSULATION 09 21 16 INSUL-7INSULATING FOAM SEALANT 06 20 00 MIR-1GLASS MIRROR, FRAMELESS 10 28 00 TYPE: CUT GLASS MIRROR;SIZE: SEE ELEVATIONS, ARCHITECT TO PROVIDE DIGITAL FILES; MTLPNL-1GALVANIZED STEEL, SHEET 10 14 00 *GC TO COORDINATE WITH LOCAL SHEET METAL FABRICATOR;STEEL: GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET;GUAGE: 20-22GA;MOUNTING: DIRECT APPLY;EDGES: ALL EDGES TO BE FINISHED TO ELIMINATE SHARP EDGES;MAGNETIC PERFORMANCE: PROVIDE STEEL SURFACE CAPABLE OF HOLDINGSTANDARD CERAMIC OR RARE-EARTH MAGNETS; MWA-1MILLWORK PULL 12 36 00 MFR: MOCKETT;PRODUCT: DP305 SERIES - BLADE DRAWER PULL;SIZE: 6-27/32";FINISH: SATIN NICKEL; PLAM-1PLASTIC LAMINATE 06 41 00 MFR: WILSONART;PRODUCT: TRACELESS BY WILSONART;COLOR: DESIGNER WHITE D354-60; PLAM-2PLASTIC LAMINATE 12 36 00 MFR: WILSONART;PRODUCT: TRACELESS BY WILSONART;COLOR: SLATE GREY D91-60; PT-1PAINT TYPE 09 91 23 STYLE: INTERIOR ACRYLIC LATEX, FLAT;TYPE: ECOSPEC;NOTE: LOW OR NO VOC PAINT; PT-2PAINT TYPE 09 91 23 STYLE: INTERIOR ACRYLIC LATEX, EGGSHELL;TYPE: ECOSPEC;NOTE: LOW OR NO VOC PAINT; PT-3PAINT TYPE 09 91 23 STYLE: INTERIOR ACRYLIC LATEX, SEMI-GLOSS;TYPE: ECOSPEC;INSTITUTIONAL LOW-VOC, WATER-BASED; PT-4PAINT TYPE 09 91 23 STYLE: WATERBOURNE DRYFALL, WATER-BASED, FAST-DRYINGOVERSPRAY COATING FOR INTERIOR USE;TYPE: ECOSPEC;NOTE: LOW OR NO VOC PAINT; PT-5ACT TILE REFURBISHMENT COATING 09 91 23 STYLE: ACT TILE REFUBISHMENT COATING;MFR: PROCOAT;TYPE: PROCOUSTIC;COLOR: MATCH PT-KNOTE: LOW OR NO VOC PAINT; PT-BPAINT COLOR - WHITE 09 91 23 MFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMS;COLOR NUMBER: SW 7637;COLOR NAME: ORIGAMI WHITE; PT-KPAINT COLOR - BLUE 09 91 23 MFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMS;COLOR NUMBER: SW 6792;COLOR NAME: MINOR BLUE; PT-LPAINT COLOR - GREEN 09 91 23 MFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMS;COLOR NUMBER: SW 6719;COLOR NAME: GECKO; PT-MPAINT COLOR 099100 MFR: SHERWIN WILLIAMS;COLOR NUMBER: SW 6696;COLOR: QUILT GOLD; MATERIAL / PRODUCT ID LIST ID DESCRIPTION SPECSECTION Spec Data RB-3 RUBBER BASE - GREY 09 65 00 MFR: TARKETT;PRODUCT: BASEWORKS THERMOSET RUBBER;HEIGHT: 4";COLOR: MOON ROCK; RFL-1 RUBBER FLOORING - YELLOW 09 65 00 MFR: ZANDUR FLOORING;PRODUCT: SUSTAIN CORK RUBBER;SIZE: 388"X38";THICKNESS: 9MM;COLOR: CR4052 DAFFODIL; RFL-2 RUBBER FLOORING - GREEN 09 65 00 MFR: ZANDUR FLOORING;PRODUCT: SUSTAIN CORK RUBBER;SIZE: 38''X38'';THICKNESS: 9MM;COLOR: CR4045 MANTIS; SSF-3 SOLID SURFACE (RESIN)12 36 00 MFR: WILSONART;PRODUCT: SOLID SURFACE;COLOR: MILK GLASS SPECTRA; STFT-3 INTERIOR, ASSEMBLED WOOD STOREFRONT 06 20 00 MFR: N/A;STYLE: FULLY FINISHED AND CASED GLAZED OPENINGS AS DETAILED ANDDESCRIBED IN DRAWINGS TA-1 LIQUID-SOAP DISPENSER 10 28 00 MFR: BOBRICK;STYLE: B-2111 WALL MOUNT SOAP DISPENSER;OPERATION: MANUALFINISH: SATIN BRUSHED 304 STAINLESS; TA-3 TOILET TISSUE SURFACE DOUBLE JUMBO-ROLL 10 28 00 MFR: GP PAPER PRODUCTS;STYLE: SURFACE MOUNTED TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER;PRODUCT: STYLE 59210, DOUBLE JUMBO ROLLFINISH: BLACK; TA-8 COMBINATION TOWEL (FOLDED) DISPENSER / WASTERECEPTACLE 10 28 00 MFR: BOBRICK;STYLE: B-3803, RECESSED PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER AND WASTERECEPTACLE;COLOR: SATIN FINISH;SIZE: 6.3-GALLON WASTE; TA-12 GRAB BAR 10 28 00 MFR: BOBRICK;STYLE: B-9806, STRAIGHT GRAB BAR, 1-1/2" DIAMETER, FINO COLLECTION;LENGTH: AS REQ'D BY DRAWINGS FOR ADA COMPLIANCE;COLOR: SATIN FINISH; TA-14 SANITARY-NAPKIN DISPOSAL UNIT 10 28 00 MFR: BOBRICK;STYLE: B-270, SURFACE MOUNTED SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL;COLOR: SATIN FINISH;SIZE: 1 GALLON; TA-19 HOOK 10 28 00 MFR: SHELFOLOGY;STYLE: DOOHOOKY;COLOR: STEELY BLUE;WALL ANCHOR: DRYWALL; TA-24 DIAPER-CHANGING STATION 10 28 00 MFR: KOALA KARE;STYLE: KB311-SSRE VERTICAL STAINLESS RECESSED MOUNTED;COLOR: STAINLESS STEEL; TA-25 CHILD WALL MOUNT SAFETY SEAT 10 28 00 MFR: SOVA;STYLE: TODDLER WALL SAFETY SEAT;COLOR: LIGHT GREY; TA-27 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER - SURFACE MOUNTEDSINGLE ROLL 10 28 00 MFR: BOBRICK;STYLE: B-66997 SURFACE-MOUNTED TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER, SATIN FINISH,ONE ROLL;FINISH: SATIN FINISH STAINLESS STEEL; TA-28 WIRE BASKET, WHITE 10 28 00 MFR: GLOBAL INDUSTRIAL;PRODUCT: RACK'EM MOUNT ANYWHERE WIRE BASKET 18"WX6"DX6"H;DEPTH: 6'';LENGTH: 18";HEIGHT: 6";COLOR: WHITE; TA-29 EXISTING TOILET ACCESSORY - DIAPER GENIE N/A EXISTING OWNER INSTALL EQUIPMENT: DIAPER GENIE; TL-4 FLOOR TILE 09 30 00 MFR: ATLAS CONCORDEPRODUCT: BOOST;COLOR: SMOKE;SIZE: 5'X10';THICKNESS:6MM; GROUT:;MFR: TEC;COLOR:CHARCOAL GREY;JOINT WIDTH: 1/8"; TL-5 WALL TILE 09 30 00 MFR: CROSSVILLE;PRODUCT: RETROACTIVE 2.0;COLOR: GULF BREEZE;SIZE: 12''X24'';THICKNESS: 0.3125"; GROUT:;MFR: TEC;COLOR: MIST 939;JOINT WIDTH: 1/8";TLA-1A TILE ACCESSORY 10 28 00 MFR: SCHLUTER SYSTEMS;STYLE: COVE SHAPED PROFILE - DILEX-AHK;COLOR: ANNODIZED ALUMINUM; TLA-1B TILE ACCESSORY 10 28 00 MFR: SCHLUTER SYSTEMS;STYLE: COVE SHAPED PROFILE - DILEX-AHKA;COLOR: ANNODIZED ALUMINUM; TLA-2 TILE ACCESSORY 10 28 00 MFR: SCHLUTER SYSTEMS;STYLE: JOLLY;COLOR: ANNODIZED ALUMINUM; UPH-3 UPHOLSTERY 06 41 00 MFR: MAHARAM;PATTERN: COMPOUND;COLOR: AFINA;APPLICATION: SEAT OF BENCH;CONTENT: 100% POLYURETHANE;FINISH: NONE; WCVG-1 WALLCOVERING, CORK BOARD 098400 MFR: FORBO;PRODUCT: BULLETIN BOARD;COLOR: 2186 BLANCHED ALMOND;THICKNESS: 0.24";SIZE: SEE ELEVATION, V.I.F; WCVG-2 WALLCOVERING, PVC-FREE WALL PROTECTION 09 72 00 MFR: MDC INTERIOR SOLUTIONS;PRODUCT: DURATEC PVC-FREE WALL PROTECTION;PATTERN: HOLLIS;COLOR: MDV8102 PORCELAIN;WIDTH: 52" ROLLS;MATERIAL: OLEFIN COMPOSITE;THICKNESS: 0.034";INSTALL: RANDOM;ADHESIVE: HEAVY DUTY CLAY; WD-1A WOOD INTERIOR DOOR VENEER 08 14 16 SPECIES: WHITE MAPLE;CUT: PLAIN SPLICED;GRADE: PREMIUM GRADE;MATCH BETWEEN VENEER LEAVES: PLEASING MATCH;MATCH WITHIN DOOR FACES: RUNNING MATCH;STILES: SAME SPECIES AS FACE; WD-1B WOOD INTERIOR DOOR FRAMES 06 20 00 SPECIES: MATCH DOOR;CUT: MATCH DOOR; WD-2A SOLID HARDWOOD TRIM 06 20 00 SPECIES: WHITE MAPLE;CUT: PLAIN SLICED;SIZE: 3/4" X 4" U.N.O CASING w/ OTHER PROFILES AS NOTED ON DRAWINGSFINISH: AS SPECIFIED IN DIV 09 WD-3A MDF W/ WOOD VENEER 06 41 00 PANEL: HIGH DENSITY MDF IN THICKNESS AS DESCRIBED IN DRAWINGS WITHVENEER;VENEER: WHITE MAPLE;CUT: PLAIN SLICED (MATCH EXISTING VENEER PANELS);MATCH: MATCH EXISTING;EDGE: HARDWOOD EDGE;EDGE SPECIES: WHITE MAPLE;EDGE CUT: PLAIN SAWN; APPLIED WALL BASEBASE1 TILE BASEBASE2 SERIES NOTES PARTITION TYPESTUD SIZEPARTITION WIDTHUL DESIGN. NUMBERFIRERATINGSTCRATINGNOTES A A22 1/2"3 3/4"UL U4191HR471,2 A33 5/8"4 3/4"UL U4191HR481,2 A66"7 1/4"UL U4191HR481,2 A88"9 1/4"UL U4191HR481,2 ONE LAYER 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD BOTH SIDES METAL STUD ACOUSTIC SOUND BATT INSULATION WHEN ACOUSTICALLY RATED. INSUL-1 SERIES NOTES PARTITION TYPE STUD SIZE PARTITION WIDTH UL DESIGN. NUMBER FIRERATING STCRATING NOTES C C3 3 5/8"SEE PLAN UL U420 1HR 52 1,2 C4 3 5/8"SEE PLAN UL U420 2 HR 57 1,2,3 1.2.3. FIRE RATING WHERE NOTED ON PLANSTC VARIES WITH INSULATION USEDPROVIDE AN ADDITIONAL LAYER OF 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD ON BOTH SIDES TO MAINTAIN 2 HR FIRE RATING (SECOND LAYER SHOWN DASHED) ONE LAYER 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD (SECOND LAYER SHOWN DASHED) METAL STUD ACOUSTIC SOUND BATT INSULATION WHEN ACOUSTICALLY RATED. INSUL-1 METAL STUD BRACES @ 4'-0" O.C. MAX 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. INTERIOR PARTITIONS TYPES TO BE INDICATED BY THIS SYMBOL ON FLOOR PLANS. GAUGE, SPACING, AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OF METAL STUDS TO BE DETERMINED BY SPECIFICATIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE NEEDED TYPE "X" GYPSUM BOARD REQUIRED AT RATED PARTITIONS ONLY. FIRE RATED OR ACOUSTICALLY RATED PARTITIONS TO EXTEND TO ROOF OR FLOOR DECK ABOVE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. PROVIDE REQUIRED CLOSURE TO MAINTAIN FIRE OR ACOUSTICAL RATING. PROVIDE APPROPRIATE DEFLECTION JOINT AT TOP OF PARTITION TO ELIMINATE CRUSHING OF PARTITION. AT NON-RATED PARTITIONS IN ROOMS WITH FINISHED CEILING, GYPSUM BOARD TO GO 6" ABOVE CEILING UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. AT NON-RATED PARTITIONS IN ROOMS WITHOUT FINISH CEILINGS, GYPSUM BOARD TO GO TO DECK UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. PENETRATIONS IN FIRE RATED OR ACOUSTICAL RATED PARTITIONS AND CONNECTIONS TO THESE PARTITIONS BY OTHER PARTITIONS SHALL BE PER PARTITION MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN RECOMMENDATIONS OR U.L REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE TEST AND ACOUSTICAL TEST RATINGS. REFER TO SPEC FOR BACKER AT PARTITIONS SCHEDULED TO RECEIVE CERAMIC TILE. PROVIDE TILE BACKER BOARD TO PARTITIONS IN SHOWERS, HIGH MOISTURE AREAS OR SIMILAR AREAS AND WHERE NOTED. INSTALLATION OF MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD OR TILE BACKER BOARD SHALL NOT REDUCE FIRE OR ACOUSTICAL RATINGS FOR ANY PARTITION. GENERAL NOTES 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. ACOUSTICALLY RATED PARTITIONS SHALL HAVE CONTINUOUS SOUND BATT INSULATION AND ACOUSTICAL CAULKING UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. STAGGER JUNCTION BOXES A MINIMUM OF 2'-0" BETWEEN PENETRATIONS AT ACOUSTICALLY RATED OR FIRE RATED PARTITIONS THERMALLY SEPARATED PARTITIONS SHALL HAVE VAPOR BARRIER AND THERMAL INSULATION AS SPECIFIED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. VERIFY WITH STRUCTURAL ALL NON-BEARING MASONRY PARTITION THAT ARE NOT ADEQUATELY BRACED BY FIXED ELEMENTS PRIOR TO ERECTION. PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF 1'-0" OF SOLID MASONRY BETWEEN PENETRATIONS IN MASONRY PARTITIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR INTERIOR STRUCTURAL PARTITIONS. PROVIDE BLOCKING AND BACKER SUPPORT FOR ALL EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT AND MOUNTING. COORDINATE LOCATION OF BLOCKING AND BACKER MATERIAL WITH OWNER AND CONTRACTOR SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OF PARTITION. SEE FURNITURE PLAN FOR FURNITURE LOCATIONS THAT REQUIRE BLOCKING. STC RATINGS INDICATED MINIMUM WALL REQUIREMENTS WITH SOUND BATT INSULATION. REFER TO GYPSUM ASSOCIATION BULLETIN #500 AND THE UL MANUAL FOR DETAILED CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES TO ACHIEVE STC RATINGS. XX SERIES NOTES PARTITION TYPESTUD SIZEPARTITION WIDTHUL DESIGN. NUMBERFIRERATINGSTCRATING NOTES F F11 5/8"2 1/4"NANANA F66"6 5/8"NANANA ONE LAYER 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD METAL STUD 1 A ACOUSTICAL RATEDFIRE RATING 1.2.FIRE RATING WHERE NOTED ON PLANSTC VARIES WITH INSULATION USED FIRE RATINGUL DESIGN. NUMBERSTC RATING CLNG-1 - GWB LID SUSPENSION SYSTEM MAIN 'T' AND GRID GWB-1 FIRE RATING UL DESIGN. NUMBER STC RATING CLNG-7 - ACT 2x2 (MATCH EXISTING) SUSPENSION SYSTEM MAIN 'T' AND GRID MATCH EXISTING INSTALLED PRODUCT - MATCH EXISTING GRID LAYOUTS WHERE EXISTING CEILINGS ARE ADJACENT ACP-1B FLOOR TYPE SLAB THICKNESS TRAN-1 : FLA-1 SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR PARTITION TYPESEE FINISH PLANS FOR WALL FINISH RB-3 USE STRAIGHT BASE AT CARPETED AREAS AND COVED BASE AT HARD FLOORING SURFACES. SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR PARTITION TYPESEE FINISH PLANS FOR WALL FINISH TLA-1A TL-5 FLOOR LEVELSEE SECTION FLOOR LEVELSEE SECTIONSEE ELEVATIONSTL-4 TLA-2 Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the Laws of the State of Montana. Architect Seal Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 Dagmara Cygler ARC-LIC-22020 6/24/2026 4:07:54 PMC:\Users\mitch\AppData\Local\Autodesk\Revit\Autodesk Revit2026\CollaborationCache\SE9LP2RL9C65\da5fc686-9fbb-4b88-84c4-252d479585b8\c70f9ff1-8639-4ccd-b4be-7e524297b68e.rvtG003 TYPES AND SYSTEMS Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and TeenCorner Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors Associate Architect 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 515 W ASPEN ST. SUITE 200A | 406.451.7310 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1 1/2" = 1'-0"G003 1WALL TYPES - PARTITION 1 1/2" = 1'-0"G003 2CEILING TYPES 1 1/2" = 1'-0"G003 3 TRANSITION TYPES 1 1/2" = 1'-0"G003 4BASE TYPES REF-2SETBACKLINESYHD YHD YHDWVWVYHDWVWV WVWVWVYHDLM1200LM2100REF-2W/D DWBASEMENT AREA NOT TABULATED PER IBC 506.1.3 LIBRARY22,065 SF | A-3 UTILITYSTAFF5,516 SF | B ADDITION131 SF | A-3 EXT LOADING LIBRARY13,656 SF | A-3 STAFF5,280 SF | BSTAFF631 SF | BMAIN STREETFIRE LANE ACCESS LAND AND PAD EXISTING F.A.C.P(TO REMAIN IN PLACE) PROPERTY LINE Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the Laws of the State of Montana. Architect Seal Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 Dagmara Cygler ARC-LIC-22020 6/30/2026 5:09:50 PMC:\Users\mitch\AppData\Local\Autodesk\Revit\Autodesk Revit2026\CollaborationCache\SE9LP2RL9C65\da5fc686-9fbb-4b88-84c4-252d479585b8\c70f9ff1-8639-4ccd-b4be-7e524297b68e.rvtG051 BUILDING CODE SUMMARY Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and TeenCorner Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors Associate Architect 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 515 W ASPEN ST. SUITE 200A | 406.451.7310 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT BUILDING CODE SUMMARY APPLICABLE CODES MT State Building Code. Adoptions below based on ARM Title 24, Chapter 301 - 2021 International Building Code - 2021 Existing Building Code - 2021 International Energy Conservation Code - 2021 Uniform Plumbing Code - 2021 International Mechanical Code - 2021 International Fuel Gas Code - 2020 National Electrical Code - ICC A117.1 - Accessibility Code, 2017 Edition PROPOSED PROJECT SUMMARY The project consists only of interior remodling work entirely within the children's room space. There are no changes tooccupancy types or SF of this space. Office space is being expanded slightly, but not enough that occupant loads in thisportion of the building will change enough to effect any critical revisions to egress strategies. (2) of the existing (4) exits fromthe children's room are being abandoned for security concerns. The Occupant load of the space and remaining (2) means ofegress are adequate. See G052. There are minor revisions to plumbing fixtures in the space, and a restroom exhaust will bedecoupled from the building exhaust system. Otherwise, all electrical and mechanical revisions are limited to simple relocationof existing devices to support slighty different orrice space and furniture layouts. Finishes will be replaced throughouit thespace.Type of Construction Type IIB (no changes to existing proposed) Automatic Sprinkler System Provided Building Height 2 Stories with a Basement. 44' - 2" Building Area See "BUILDING AREA" Schedule and notes USE AND OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION (Chapter 3) Assembly Use, including Libraries (Section 303.4)A-3 Business Use, including small Storage and Conference spaces (Sections 303.1, 303.1.2, and 304.1)B Storage Use, Moderate-hazard (Section 311.2)S-1 GENERAL BUILDING HEIGHTS AND AREA (Chapter 5) Building Height - Allowable (Section 504) - Height limitations for IIB, Sprinklered Construction (Table 504.3)75' - 0" - Story limitations for IIB, Sprinklered Construction (Table 504.4)3 Stories Above Grade Mezzanines (505.2) - Mezzanines in compliance Building Area - Allowable (Section 506) - Area limitation for A-3 (Strictest non-separated) (Table 506.2)28,500 SF - Allowable area per story (Section 506.2.4) Aa=At+[NS x lf]33,060 SF per story - Actual area per story Complies See Area Plans - Frontage increase (Section 506.3.3) If= [F/P-0.25] W/30 If = .48 Mixed Use and Occupancy (Section 508) Accessory Occupancies (Section 508.2)N/A. Nonseparated Occupancies (Section 508.3)A-3, B Incidental Use Ares (Table 509) - Furnace rooms where any piece of equipment is over 400,000 BTU per hour input 1 HR w/ Automatic Sprinkler System (existing basement, no changes proposed) TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION (Chapter 6) Fire-Resistance Rating Requirements for Building Elements (Table 601) based on IIB Construction - Structural frame 0 HRS - Bearing walls (Exterior)0 HRS - Bearing walls (Interior)0 HRS - Nonbearing walls and partitions (Exterior)0 HRS - Nonbearing walls and partitions (Interior)0 HRS - Floor construction (Including supporting beams and joists)0 HRS - Roof construction (Including supporting beams and joists)0 HRS Fire-Resistance Rating Requirements for Exterior Walls (Table 602) - Fire separation distance >30', See Code Site Plan - Required Rating 0 HRS Combustible Materials in Type I and II Construction (603) - Window Frames may be of combustible material (603.1,2, Exception 6) FIRE-RESISTANCE RATED CONSTRUCTION (Chapter 7) Maximum Area of Exterior Wall Openings (Table 705.8) - Fire separation distance >30, See Code Site Plan - Degree of Opening Protection Unprotected, Sprinklered - Allowable Opening Area No Limit Vertical Opening Protection (Section 712) Shaft Enclosures Required (Section 712.1.1) except as noted below.3 stories (including basement) 1 HR - No changes proposed to existing shafts or other vertical openings - Unenclosed Stairs and Ramps (Section 712.1.12) MEANS OF EGRESS (Chapter 10) Occupant Load (Section 1004) - See Code Plans for Occupant Loads for each story and space Egress Width (Section 1005.3) Capacity Factor with Automatic Sprinkler System and an Emergency voice/alarm communication system - Stairways (Section 1005.3.1, Exception)0.2 inch per occupant - Other egress components (Section 1005.3.2, Exception)0.15 inch per occupant Number of Exits and Exit Access Doorways (Section 1006) Egress from spaces and Common Path of Egress Travel (Section 1006.2 and Table 1006.2.1) Provide not less than 2 exits from spaces where the occupant load exceeds: - Group A, B, E, F, M Occupancies 49 occupants Provide not less than 2 exits from spaces where common path of egress travel exceeds: - Group A, E, M Occupancies with or without Automatic Sprinkler System 75 feet - Group B, F, S Occupancies with Automatic Sprinkler System 100 feet Provide not less than 3 exit doorways from spaces with an occupant load of:501 to 1,000 occupants (No Instances in Buillding) Egress from stories or occupied roofs (Section 1006.3) Provide not less than 2 exits from all stories except where the occupant load does not exceed: - Group A, B, E, F, M Occupancies on First story or Basement 49 occupants - Group B, F, M, S Occupancies on Second story 29 occupants Provide not less than 2 exits from all stories except where common path of egress travel does not exceed: - Group A, B, E, F, M, S Occupancies on First story or Basement 75 feet - Group B, F, M, S Occupancies on Second story 75 feet Provide not less than 3 exits from stories with an occupant load of:501 to 1,000 occupants (No Instanses in Building) Common Path of Egress Travel (Section 1006.2.1 and table 1006.2.1) Common path of egress travel shall not exceed the following distances: - Group A Occupancies 75 feet - Group B and S Occupancies 100 feet Exit or Exit Access Doorway Arrangement (Section 1007.1.1) Where multiple doorways are required, not less than 2 shall be located as follows: - Separation distance as measured along maximum overall diagonal dimension:1/2 of diagonal - Exception 2: Separation Distance along diagonal with Automatic Sprinkler System 1/3 of diagonal Accessible Means of Egress (Section 1009.1) Provide Accessible Means of Egress as follows: - Not less than 1 from all accessible spaces Provided - See Egress Plans - Not less than 2 from any accessible space requiring multiple exits per 1006.2 or 1006.3 Provided - See Egress Plans - Exception 1: Not required in alterations to existing buildings Stairways used as part of an Accessible Means of Egress (Section 1009.3) shall comply with 1009.3.1 - 1009.3.3 - Stairways require a clear width between handrails (1009.3.2)48 inches - Exception 1: 48" Not required where Automatic Sprinkler System is provided Sprinklers Provided, 48" btwn handrails not required - Stairways shall provide an area of refuge complying with 1009.6 (1009.3.3) - Exception 2: Not required where Automatic Sprinkler System is provided Sprinklers Provided, Area of Refuge not provided Stairways used as part of egress (1011.2) - Miniumum width between stringers 44 inches Exit Access Travel Distance (Section 1017) Exit access travel distance shall not exceed the following values (Table 1017.2): - Group B Occupancies with Automatic Sprinkler System 300 feet - Group A, E, F-1, M, R, S-1 Occupancies with Automatic Sprinkler System 250 feet Exit Access Stairways and Ramps (Section 1019) Stairways in Group A & B floor openings containing Exit Access Stairways shall be enclosed in accordance with 713 - Exemption 1: Exit Access Stairways that serve only two stories.Open Stairs Between Level 1 and Level 2 are provided (existing condition) Corridors (Section 1020) Corridor Fire-Resistance Rating (Table 1020.1) - Group A, B, E, F, M, S Occupancies with Automatic Sprinkler System or serving >30occupants 0 HRS Minimum Corridor Width (Table 1020.2) - All occupancies unless noted below:44 inches Dead ends in Corridors shall not exceed the following length (Section 1020.4):20 feet - Exception 2: In Group B and S occupancies with Automatic Sprinkler System:50 feet 1" = 80'-0"G051 1BASEMENT AREA PLAN 1" = 80'-0"G051 2LEVEL 1 BUILDING AREA PLAN 1" = 80'-0"G051 3LEVEL 2 BUILDING AREA PLAN 1/64" = 1'-0"G051 4CODE SITE PLAN BUILDING AREA NAME AREA LEVEL 1 ADDITION 131 SF LIBRARY 22,065 SF STAFF 5,516 SF UTILITY 204 SF 27,916 SF LEVEL 2 LIBRARY 13,656 SF STAFF 5,280 SF STAFF 631 SF 19,566 SF 47,483 SF NOTE ON BUILDING AREASGENERAL BUILDING AREAS VARY SLIGHTLY FROM ORIGINALLY PERMITED AREAS DUE TO INTERPRETATION OF PROVIDED AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS INTO BUILDING INFORMATION MODEL USED FOR DOCUMENTATION OF THIS PROJECT. ORIGINALY PERMITED BUILDING AREAS (FLOOR TOTALS) ARE NOTED TO RIGHT OF SCHEDULE ABOVE IN ASTERIX FOR REFERENCE *28,280 SF* *20,070 SF* *48,358 SF* PROJECT SCOPE AREAS - INTERIOR REMODELS AND INTERIOR FINISHES AND FURNISHINGS ONLY. SEE G052 FOR UPDATED EGRESS CALCS THE FOLLOWING BUILDING CODE SUMMARY IS A FULL-BUILDING CODE SUMMARY. THE PROPOSED PROJECT SUMMARY DESCRIBES THE SCOPE OF WORK SPECIFIC TO THE CHILDREN'S ROOM AND TEEN CORNER REMODEL. FOR SPECIFIC OCCUPANCY AND EGRESS INFO FOR THE AREAS IN PROJECT SCOPE - SEE G052 YHDWVWVWVLM1200LM2100REF-2W/D DWYHDWVWVWV EGRESS TRAVEL PATH COMMON PATH OF EGRESS TRAVEL PATH DIAGONAL / EXIT SEPARATION LINE - REQUIRED DIAGONAL / EXIT SEPARATION LINE - PROVIDED 1 HOUR RATED FIRE WALL 2 HOUR RATED FIRE WALL SMOKE RATED WALL FIRE EXTINGUISHER DESIGNATED EXIT ACCESSIBLE MEANS OF EGRESS ACCESSIBLE COMPONENT FUNCTION OF SPACE BUILDING CODE SYMBOLS KEY OCCUPANCY TYPE OCC. LOAD FACTOR SQUARE FEET # OF OCCUPANTS FE PROVIDEDREQUIRED OCCUPANTS THRU MINIMUM REQUIRED 32"OCCUPANT LOAD X .15 EXIT DOOR NUMBER #"# WIDTH IN" FACTOR THAT IS USED TO DETERMINE REQ'D WIDTH WIDTH IN INCHES WIDTH IN INCHES NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS THROUGH PROVIDEDREQUIRED OCCUPANTS THRUFROM OCCUPANT LOAD X .20 0"0"0WIDTH IN INCHES NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS THROUGH STAIRS SERVE WHICH LEVELS WIDTH IN INCHES FACTOR THAT IS USED TO DETERMINE REQ'D WIDTH A-2 A-3 B M S-1 S-2 OCCUPANCY TYPE LEGEND F STAIR NUMBER 3' - 6" 50 READINGROOM 1,342 SF 27 A-3100 LIBRARYSTACKS 3,185 SF 32 A-3150 BUSINESSAREA 889 SF 6 B 7 CHAIRS ONLY 913 SF 131 A-3 300 MECHANICAL /STORAGE 255 SF 1 S-2 150 BUSINESSAREA 104 SF 1 B 15 TABLES ANDCHAIRS 395 SF 27 A-3 150 BUSINESSAREA 65 SF 1 B 15 TABLES ANDCHAIRS 459 SF 31 A-3 150 BUSINESSAREA 4,771 SF 32 B 50 READINGROOM 2,627 SF 53 A-3 PROVIDEDREQUIRED OCCUPANTS THRU MINIMUM REQUIRED 32"OCCUPANT LOAD X .15 67.00"20.25"EXIT DOOR 109A.1 135 EXIT SEPARATION DIAGONALMIN REQ'D 1/3" DIAGONAL DIMENSION 53' - 8 7/8"17' - 11" EXIT SEPARATION PROVIDED32' - 4 1/8" 20 CLASSROOM 56 SF 3 A-3 50 READINGROOM 214 SF 5 A-350 READINGROOM 180 SF 4 A-3 PROVIDEDREQUIRED OCCUPANTS THRU MINIMUM REQUIRED 32"OCCUPANT LOAD X .15 5.70"EXIT DOOR 116A 41.56"38 50 READINGROOM 674 SF 14 A-3100 LIBRARYSTACKS 351 SF 4 A-3 100 LIBRARYSTACKS 3,320 SF 34 A-350 READINGROOM 741 SF 15 A-3 300 MECHANICAL /STORAGE 154 SF 1 S-2 2' - 10 1/2"PATH "C" PATH "E"PATH "C"32 TOTAL B OCCUPANTS AT LEVEL 1 STAFF AREA. PROVIDEDREQUIRED OCCUPANTS THRU MINIMUM REQUIRED 32"OCCUPANT LOAD X .15 67.00"22.05"EXIT DOOR 109B.1 147 300 MECHANICAL /STORAGE 470 SF 2 S-2 PROVIDEDREQUIRED OCCUPANTS THRU MINIMUM REQUIRED 32"OCCUPANT LOAD X .15 5.10"EXIT DOOR 138.2 32.75"34 PROVIDEDREQUIRED OCCUPANTS THRU MINIMUM REQUIRED 32"OCCUPANT LOAD X .15 9.00"EXIT DOOR 128.2 32.75"60 120 TOTAL A-3 OCCUPANTS AT STACKS AND READING AREAS. PROVIDEDREQUIRED OCCUPANTS THRU MINIMUM REQUIRED 32"OCCUPANT LOAD X .15 9.00"EXIT DOOR 128.1 32.75"60 75 TOTAL A-3 & B OCCUPANTS AT CHILDRENS AREA PATH "D"PATH "D"PATH "E"63 TOTAL A-3 & B IN LABS AND GALLERY AREAS PATH "B"PATH "A"PATH "G"PATH "G"PATH "B" PATH "F" PROVIDEDREQUIRED OCCUPANTS THRU MINIMUM REQUIRED 32"OCCUPANT LOAD X .15 4.05"EXIT DOOR 132.1 32.75"27 PROVIDEDREQUIRED OCCUPANTS THRU MINIMUM REQUIRED 32"OCCUPANT LOAD X .15 67.00"9.90"EXIT DOOR 101A.1 66 32 FROM LABS AND GALLERYS65 FROM COMM ROOMS38 FROM CHILDRENS 50 STACKS AND READING31 FROM LABS AND GALLERY SPACES66 FROM COMM ROOMS FE FETYPE 'K' IN SINK BASE FE FER 75' - 0"R 75' - 0"R 75' - 0"PROVIDEDREQUIRED OCCUPANTS THRU MINIMUM REQUIRED 32"OCCUPANT LOAD X .15 9.75"EXIT DOOR 101B.3 32.75"65 FE R 7 5 ' - 0 " PROVIDEDREQUIRED OCCUPANTS THRU MINIMUM REQUIRED 32"OCCUPANT LOAD X .15 67.00"5.70"EXIT DOOR 116 38 EXIT SEPARATION PROVIDED97' - 2 5/8"EXIT SEPARATION DIAGONALMIN REQ'D 1/3" DIAGONAL DIMENSION 110' - 8"36' - 10 5/8" BOZEMAN PUBLIC LIBRARY CHILDREN'S ROOM AND TEEN CORNER REMODEL SCOPE AREAS. FULL EGRESS PLANS PROVIDED FOR REFERENCE. INDICATES AREA WITH NO PROJECT SCOPE. EXISTING EGRESS INFO IN NON-PROJECT AREAS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE 50 READINGROOM 440 SF 9 A-3 150 BUSINESSAREA 570 SF 4 B 150 BUSINESSAREA 2,208 SF 15 B 300 MECHANICAL /STORAGE 1,128 SF 4 S-2150 BUSINESSAREA 751 SF 6 B 100 LIBRARYSTACKS 5,227 SF 53 A-3 50 READINGROOM 659 SF 14 A-350 READINGROOM 1,447 SF 29 A-3 50 READINGROOM 428 SF 9 A-315 TABLES ANDCHAIRS 756 SF 51 A-3 100 LIBRARYSTACKS 154 SF 2 A-3 150 BUSINESSAREA 48 SF 1 B 50 READINGROOM 479 SF 10 A-3 100 LIBRARYSTACKS 476 SF 5 A-3 100 LIBRARYSTACKS 315 SF 4 A-3 50 READINGROOM 348 SF 7 A-3 OPEN TO BELOW PATH "F"EXIT SEPARATION DIAGONALMIN REQ'D 1/3" DIAGONAL DIMENSION 139' - 7 3/8"46' - 6 1/2" 203 TOTAL A-3 OCCUPANTS AT LEVEL 2. PATH "G"EXIT SEPARATION PROVIDED62' - 8 1/4" PROVIDEDREQUIRED OCCUPANTS THRU MINIMUM REQUIRED 32"OCCUPANT LOAD X .15 4.05"EXIT DOOR 232 32.75"27 PROVIDEDREQUIRED OCCUPANTS THRUFROM OCCUPANT LOAD X .20 5.4"44"27LEVEL 2 STAFF EXIST ACCESS STAIR 3 PROVIDEDREQUIRED OCCUPANTS THRUFROM OCCUPANT LOAD X .20 21"71"105LEVEL 2 EXIT ACCESS STAIR 1 PROVIDEDREQUIRED OCCUPANTS THRUFROM OCCUPANT LOAD X .20 21"48"105LEVEL 2 EXIT ACCESS STAIR 2 Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the Laws of the State of Montana. Architect Seal Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 Dagmara Cygler ARC-LIC-22020 6/24/2026 4:08:26 PMC:\Users\mitch\AppData\Local\Autodesk\Revit\Autodesk Revit2026\CollaborationCache\SE9LP2RL9C65\da5fc686-9fbb-4b88-84c4-252d479585b8\c70f9ff1-8639-4ccd-b4be-7e524297b68e.rvtG052 BUILDING EGRESS AND OCCUPANCY Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and TeenCorner Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors Associate Architect 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 515 W ASPEN ST. SUITE 200A | 406.451.7310 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/16" = 1'-0"G052 2LEVEL 1 EGRESS PLAN 1/16" = 1'-0"G052 1LEVEL 2 EGRESS PLAN EXIT ACCESS PATH DISTANCE PATH NAME LENGTH PATH "A"65' - 9" PATH "A" COMMON PATH 9' - 6" 75' - 3" PATH "B"216' - 6" PATH "B" COMMON PATH 9' - 6" 226' - 0" PATH "C"188' - 6" 188' - 6" PATH "D"112' - 1" 112' - 1" PATH "E"200' - 10" 200' - 10" PATH "F"134' - 7" 134' - 7" PATH "G"230' - 2" 230' - 2" OCCUPANT LOAD SUMMARY PER LEVEL OCCUPANCYTYPE FUNCTION OF SPACE OCCUPANT LOAD FACTOR AREA OCCUPANTLOAD1PER Not Placed A-3 CHAIRS ONLY 7 NET 0 SF 0 LEVEL 1 A-3 CHAIRS ONLY 7 NET 913 SF 131 A-3 TABLES AND CHAIRS 15 NET 853 SF 58 A-3 CLASSROOM 20 NET 56 SF 3 A-3 READING ROOM 50 NET 5,778 SF 118 A-3 LIBRARY STACKS 100 GROSS 6,856 SF 70 B BUSINESS AREA 150 GROSS 5,828 SF 40 S-2 MECHANICAL / STORAGE 300 GROSS 879 SF 4 LEVEL 2 A-3 TABLES AND CHAIRS 15 NET 756 SF 51 A-3 READING ROOM 50 NET 3,801 SF 78 A-3 LIBRARY STACKS 100 GROSS 6,172 SF 64 B BUSINESS AREA 150 GROSS 3,577 SF 26 S-2 MECHANICAL / STORAGE 300 GROSS 1,128 SF 4 36,597 SF 647 OCCUPANT LOAD SUMMARY TOTAL OCCUPANCYTYPE FUNCTION OF SPACE OCCUPANT LOAD FACTOR AREA OCCUPANTLOAD1PER A-3 CHAIRS ONLY 7 NET 913 SF 131 A-3 TABLES AND CHAIRS 15 NET 1,609 SF 109 A-3 CLASSROOM 20 NET 56 SF 3 A-3 READING ROOM 50 NET 9,579 SF 196 A-3 LIBRARY STACKS 100 GROSS 13,028 SF 134 B BUSINESS AREA 150 GROSS 9,405 SF 66 S-2 MECHANICAL / STORAGE 300 GROSS 2,007 SF 8 36,597 SF 647 REQUIRED PLUMBING FIXTURES OCCUPANCYTYPE OCCUPANCYCLASSIFICATION OCCUPANTLOAD WATER CLOSETS LAVATORIES DRINKINGFOUNTAINSMALEFEMALEMALEFEMALE Not Placed A-3 ASSEMBLY 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 LEVEL 1 A-3 ASSEMBLY 380 1.52 2.92 0.95 0.95 0.76 B BUSINESS 40 0.69 0.69 0.50 0.50 0.40 S-2 STORAGE 4 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.00 424 2.23 3.63 1.47 1.47 1.16 LEVEL 2 A-3 ASSEMBLY 193 0.77 1.48 0.48 0.48 0.39 B BUSINESS 26 0.45 0.45 0.33 0.33 0.26 S-2 STORAGE 4 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.00 223 1.24 1.95 0.83 0.83 0.65 TOTAL 647 3.47 5.59 2.30 2.30 1.81 WATER CLOSETS DRINKING FOUNTAINSLEVEL LAVATORIES MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE TOTAL PROVIDED PLUMBING FIXTURES UNISEX UNISEX 04410855 LOWER LEVEL 0 0 0 0 0 LEVEL 1 4 6 3 2 0 LEVEL 2 4 4 2 2 0 0 2 2 0 2 3 YHDWVWV2 3 4 5 6 7 A B C D E F 19' - 6 5/8"D1 D1 D2 D2 D1 D3D3 D4 EXISTING ART INSTALLATION TO REMAIN IN NEW WORK. PROTECT IN PLACE D4 D1APROTECT IN PLACED1 D1 D5 PROTECT EXISTING CASING TO REMAIN ADJ TO DEMO D6 D6 D6 D6 FOR ALL AREAS IN PROJECT SCOPE, REMOVE EXISTING FLOOR FINISHES, ADHEISIVES AND FASTENERS BACK TO SUBSTRATE. PREP PER REQUIREMENTS OF NEW WORK. SPECIFIC NOTES BY AREA ALSO APPLY - SEE KEYNOTES D6 D6 D7 ACTIVE PLAY 116A COLLECTION 116B CHILDRENSROOM 116 STEAM ZONE 116C THEME ROOM 113 NOOK 116D STORAGE / IT 120 STAFF WORK 118 OFFICE 117 FAMILYRESTROOM 114A FAMILYRESTROOM 115 D10 D10 D10 D10 D10 E117E118.2E118.1 E116.3D10 E113.1 E113.2 D11D12 D11 D11 D11 D11 D8 D5 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 AA BB CC DD EE FF 6" D12 D11 D9 D9 D9 D9 D1D1D1 D1 D1 APROTECT IN PLACED1 REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE D11 D11 D11D11D11D12 DEMOLITION GENERAL NOTES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. EXISTING DRAWINGS ARE BASED ON ORIGINAL BUILDING DOCUMENTS. VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS IN FIELD AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY IF FIELD CONDITIONS ARE DIFFERENT THAN SHOWN ON PLANS. REFER TO, AND COORDINATE WITH, ALL OTHER DISCIPLINES' D-SERIES DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL RELATED DEMOLITION WORK. SALVAGE ALL INTERIOR STFT-3 COMPONENTS. SOME COMPONENTS ARE TO BE INSTALLED IN SAME CONFIGURATION AT NEW LOCATIONS. SOME COMPONENTS ARE TO BE MODIFIED AND REINSTALLED IN NEW CONFIGURATIONS. COORDINATE WITH NEW WORK. COORDINATE w/ NEW WORK NOTED IN ARCHITECTURAL AND OTHER DISCIPLINES FOR SCOPE OF SALVAGE AND RE-USE. FOR ALL ITEMS TO BE SALVAGED AND REINSTALLED IN NEW WORK - PROVIDE PROTECTED TEMPORARY STORAGE ON SITE WHERE DEMOLITION WORK ABUTTS OR INTERSECTS EXISTING CONSTRUCTION WHICH IS TO REMAIN, REFER TO NEW CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FOR EXTENTS OF REMOVAL. PROTECT ALL EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN. REFER TO FINISH PLANS FOR EXTENTS OF NEW FINISH FLOORING. AT THESE LOCATIONS, REMOVE ALL EXISTING FINISH FLOORING. REMOVE ALL MATERIAL - E.G. FASTENERS, BACKING, GROUTED SETTING BEDS, ADHESIVES, ETC TO STRUCTURAL SLAB BELOW. PREPARE SLAB SURFACE FOR NEW FINISHES PER REQUIREMENTS OF SURFACE PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS OF NEW WORK. WHERE PARTITIONS ARE REMOVED, REMOVE ALL ITEMS CONTAINED WITHIN - E.G. - DOORS, HARDWARE, FRAMES, SIDELIGHTS, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, ETC TO STRUCTURE ABOVE AND BELOW, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. WHERE EXISTING CEILINGS ARE REMOVED, REMOVE FINISH AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM ALONG WITH ALL ASSOCIATED FASTENERS AND FITTINGS. ALL OBSOLETE OR ABANDONED MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT - E.G. CONDUIT, LIGHT FIXTURES, ETC, SHALL BE REMOVED BACK TO CLOSEST MAIN OR 'T' AND CAPPED. COORDINATE WITH MEP REMOVAL DRAWINGS. REFER TO A901's FOR SCOPE OF DECONSTRUCTION AND RE-USE OF EXISTING LIBRARY SHELVING, END PANELS AND CANOPY TOPS DEMOLITION KEYED NOTES D1 DECONSTRUCT AND SALVAGE EXISTING STOREFRONT (STFT-3) COMPONENTS. WOOD CASINGAND GLASS TO BE USED IN MODIFIED CONFIGURATION. COORDINATE w/ NEW WORK D2 STRIP EXISTING TILE FINISHES AT WALLS AND FLOORS BACK TO SUBSTRATE. REMOVE ANDCLEAN EXISTING DRAIN COVERS. PREP FOR NEW FINISHES. COORDINATE w/ NEW WORK D3 REMOVE ALL EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURES, LIGHTING AND TOILET ACCESSORIES D4 NEW WORK ALONG THIS WALL INCLUDES PATCHING AREAS WHERE STOREFRONT WASREMOVED, AND REINSTALLATION OF SALVAGED COMPONENTS IN NEW CONFIGURATIONS.COORDINATE REMOVAL IN THIS ZONE WITH INTENT OF NEW WORK D5 SALVAGE EXISTING CASEWORK FOR RE-USE IN NEW WORK. COORDINATE w/ NEW WORK D6 REMOVE EXISTING MILLWORK SHELF ASSEMBLY IN ALCOVES. D7 DEMOLISH EXISTING COUNTERTOP AND PLUMBING FIXTURES. PROTECTECT ADJ. CASEWORKTO REMAIN AS PART OF NEW WORK. COORDINATE w/ A800's. SEE PLUMBING FOR DRAIN ANDVENT REMOVAL AND NEW WORK D8 REMOVE COUNTER TOP AND SUPPORTS AND RAILS. PATCH AND REPAIR WALL AND PREP FORNEW FINISH D9 SALVAGE LIGHT FIXTURE FOR REINSTALLATION IN NEW WORK - SEE ELECTRICAL FOR MOREINFO D10 SALVAGE DOOR AND HARDWARE. PREP FOR REINSTALLATION. REFER TO DOOR SCHEDULEFOR NEW LOCATION D11 CEILINGS IN THIS AREA REMOVED MINIMALLY AS NEEDED. COORDINATE w/ FULL SCOPE OFWORK D12 REMOVE CEILINGS DEMOLITION SYMBOLS LEGEND EXISTING TO REMAIN EXISTING TO BE REMOVED Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the Laws of the State of Montana. Architect Seal Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 Dagmara Cygler ARC-LIC-22020 6/24/2026 4:12:13 PMC:\Users\mitch\AppData\Local\Autodesk\Revit\Autodesk Revit2026\CollaborationCache\SE9LP2RL9C65\da5fc686-9fbb-4b88-84c4-252d479585b8\c70f9ff1-8639-4ccd-b4be-7e524297b68e.rvtAD101 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL PLAN Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and TeenCorner Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors Associate Architect 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 515 W ASPEN ST. SUITE 200A | 406.451.7310 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"AD101 2 CHILDREN'S ROOM - DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0"AD101 1CHILDREN'S AREA - DEMOLITION RCP YH DYHDWVWVWVDN UP UP DN DN LM1200 LM2100REF-2W/D DW123456781011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2116.17.9 A B C D E F G H K G.9 9 J I.5 G.14 1.1 2" A101 1 A1014 CHILDRENSROOM 116 TEENCORNER 109C Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the Laws of the State of Montana. Architect Seal Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 Dagmara Cygler ARC-LIC-22020 6/24/2026 4:01:48 PMC:\Users\mitch\AppData\Local\Autodesk\Revit\Autodesk Revit2026\CollaborationCache\SE9LP2RL9C65\da5fc686-9fbb-4b88-84c4-252d479585b8\c70f9ff1-8639-4ccd-b4be-7e524297b68e.rvtA100 OVERALL FLOOR PLANS Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and TeenCorner Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors Associate Architect 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 515 W ASPEN ST. SUITE 200A | 406.451.7310 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/16" = 1'-0"A100 1LEVEL 1 FLOOR PLAN YHDWVWVW/D DWWALL / PARTITION LEGEND EXISTING CONDITION NEW CONSTRUCTION 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 A A B B C C D D E E F F A501 A501 10 9 A501 11 A141 1 5 8 12 17 15 16 6 7 A501 2 1 4 3 STFT-3 A3A ACTIVE PLAY 116A CHILDRENSROOM 116 OFFICE 117 STAFF WORK 118 STORAGE / IT 120 NOOK 116D WELLNESSROOM 114 FAMILYRESTROOM 114A FAMILYRESTROOM 115 STEAM ZONE 116C THEME ROOM 113 COLLECTION 116B A3A A3A9' - 11 1/4"34' - 1"14' - 0"10' - 1"19' - 0"5' - 0"1' - 0 1/4"8' - 11"EXISTING AND NEW CASEWORK - SEE INT ELEVATIONS AND A800's FOR MORE INFO EXISTING WALLALIGN TO EXISTING UNMODIFIEDSTFT-3SALVAGEDSTFT-3STFT-3STFT-3EXISTING PARTITION REFERENCE EXISTING PARTITION REFERENCE F3 +/- 12' - 11 3/8"+/- 41' - 5 3/4" EXISTING - V.I.F.3' - 5 1/4"+/- 16' - 7 1/8" WD-1 EXISTING +/- 13' - 2 7/8" - V.I.F.+/- 3' - 4" CLR 12' - 3"+/- 11 7/8" 1 1 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 STFT-3SALVAGED 117118.1 120116115113 116A 114A114 3 3 3 118.29"11' - 2"9" F3F3ALIGN 5 5 ---- RE-ROUTE SINK VENT IN EXISTING STUD CAVITY. PATCH FINISHES. AS REQ'D. SEE PLUMBING TIE NEW GWB FINISH INTO EXISTING 2 +/- 13' - 0"6' - 0" PT PT3' - 6"15' - 6"3' - 6"15' - 6"2 FE (EXISTING) PT PT PT PTPT PT 2 2 7' - 5"8' - 5"8' - 4"7' - 3"8' - 7" 4' - 2"4' - 2"3' - 4"3' - 4"PT 1' - 0"1' - 0" PT 1' - 2"1' - 0"ALIGN5 5 A501 19 5' - 2"4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 A B C D E F OFFICE 117 STAFF WORK 118 STORAGE / IT 120 9' - 4" A.F.F(E) CEILING-1 9' - 4" A.F.FCLNG-19' - 4" A.F.FCLNG-19' - 4" A.F.FCLNG-1 11' - 9" A.F.F(E) CEILING-1 10' - 0" A.F.F(E) CLNG-7 10' - 0" A.F.F(E) CLNG-7 10' - 0" A.F.FCLNG-7 9' - 0" A.F.F (E) CLNG-7 11' - 9" A.F.F(E) CEILING-110' - 0" A.F.F(E) CLNG-7 11' - 9" A.F.F(E) CEILING-1 9' - 4" A.F.F(E) CEILING-1 11' - 9" A.F.F(E) CEILING-111' - 9" A.F.F(E) CEILING-111' - 9" A.F.F(E) CEILING-1 11' - 9" A.F.F(E) CEILING-1 WELLNESSROOM 114 THEME ROOM 113 FAMILYRESTROOM 114A FAMILYRESTROOM 115 NOOK 116D ACTIVE PLAY 116A CHILDRENSROOM 116 COLLECTION 116B 10' - 0" A.F.FCLNG-7 11' - 9" A.F.F(E) CEILING-1 C1 C1 C1 11' - 9" A.F.F(E) CEILING-1 A3 C2 C2 8' - 0" A.F.F (E) CEILING-1 9' - 4" A.F.FCLNG-7 ACPNL-4 EQ6' - 0"EQEQEQEQEQ6' - 0"6' - 0"6' - 0"6' - 0"6' - 9"3' - 1" C32' - 0" LIGHTING DATUM BASED ON GRID LAYOUT IN RM 113. CENTER LIGHTS IN PANELSEQEQEQEQEQEQEQEQEQEQ C3C3C3 2' - 0"2' - 0"3' - 6"3' - 6"EQEQ EQEQ9' - 4" A.F.F(E) CEILING-1 COORDINATE LOCATION AND MOUNTING HEIGHT OR PENDANT FIXTURES w/ OWNER/ARCHITECT DURING INSTALL- SEE ELECTRICAL C2 C2 C3 • • ADD ALTERNATE 1: SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILING BAFFLES. SEE 1/A101 BASE PROJECTNO ACPNL-4 ADD ALTERNATE 1FURNISH AND INSTALL ACPNL-4 IN SIZES AND CONFIGURATION AS NOTED IN DRAWINGS. (1) 48"X60"(2) 30"X42"(4) 26"X40" ACPNL-4 (1) 48"X60"(1) 30"X42"(5) 26"X40" PT-5K ED C3 C3 ED ED 2' - 2"3' - 10" C4 C4 ADJUST HEIGHT OF SOFFIT AS REQ'D TO ALLOW INSTALLATION OF SALVAGED TALL CASEWORK BELOW. CONFIRM w/ ARCHITECT PATCH CEILINGS 10 10 11 11 DD EE 9 9 TEENCORNER 109C NO NEW CONSTRUCTION WORK IN TEEN CORNER - FFE SCOPE ONLY GENERAL NOTES - CEILING PLANS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. REFER TO ELECTRICAL FOR SCOPE OF DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND NEW LIGHT FIXTURES. NOT ALL CEILING MOUNTED LIGHTING AND DEVICES ARE SHOWN ON ARCHITECTURAL RCP'S. SYMBOLS ON THIS DRAWING INDICATE PRESENCE OF FIXTURE FOR LAYOUT, POSITION AND COORDINATION PURPOSES. REFER TO MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. ALL LIGHTING AND DEVICES ARE DIMENSIONED FROM THE CENTER LINE OF THE COMPONENT TO THE CENTER LINE OF STRUCTURAL GRID OR FINISH FACE OF WALL ASSEMBLY - INCLUDING APPLIED FINISHES. REFER TO G003 FOR CEILING TYPES. SEE SPECIFICATION FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON FINISHES AND ASSEMBLIES. EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES TO BE MOUNTED IN PANELED CEILING SHALL BE CENTERED ON CEILING PANEL, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. REFER TO AV DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. BOTTOM OF FINISH TO BE AT ELEVATION SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE FRAMING AND ANY SUBSTRATES ACCORDINGLY. EXISTING SPRINKLERS COVERAGE WILL BE MAINTAINED AS CURRENTLY INSTALLED. NO CHANGE IN PROTECTION. PROTECT ALL HEADS IN PLACE DURING WORK RECENTER EXISTING SPRINKLER HEADS IN MODIFIED CEILINGS. RELOCATE ANY HEADS AS REQ'D TO MAINTAIN CLEARANCES AND SPACING ALL CLNG-1 CEILINGS TO BE PAINTED PT-1B UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. REMOVE EXISTING ACT TILE FROM GRID PRIOR TO PT-5L REFUBISHMENT. CLEAN ALL EXISTING EQUIPMENT, DEVICES AND FIXTURE IN CEILINGS THAT ARE TO REMAIN KEYED NOTES - CEILING PLANS C1 TIE NEW CEILINGS INTO EXISTING GRID ON CONTINUATION OF EXISTING MODULE. PROVIDENEW TILES AT EXISTING / NEW TRANSITION C2 REINSTALL SALVAGED LIGHT FIXTURE - SEE ELECTRICAL C3 RELOCATE EXISTING MECHANICAL DEVICE IN THIS AREA TO LOCATION SHOWN. PATCHCEILING C4 COORDINATE SUPPORT FOR CEILING MOUNTED POWER DEVICE. DIMENSIONS PROVIDED FORREFERENCE. COORDINATE LOCATION w/ OWNER AND ARCHITECT DURRING CONSTRUCTION -SEE ELCTRICAL GENERAL NOTES - FLOOR PLANS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. REFER TO PROJECT MANUAL FOR INFORMATION ON MATERIAL AND FINISH TAGS IN DRAWINGS. SEE G003 FOR ASSEMBLIES. SHORT FORM MATERIAL ID LIST IS LOCATED ON SHEET G001. MATERIAL I.D. AND PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS ARE OF EQUAL PRECEDENCE. CLARIFY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO WORK ELECTRICAL FIXTURES, DEVICES, ETC SHOWN ON ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS ARE FOR REFERENCE AND CRITICAL LOCATING ONLY. SEE OTHER DISCIPLINES FOR INFORMATION. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF STANDARD GWB FINISH OR OTHER SUBSTRATE TIED TO CENTERLINE OF STRUCTURAL GIRD, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. LOCATING ABBREVIATIONS FOR DIMENSIONS NOTED OTHERWISE ARE: IN EXISTING SPACES, VERIFY DIM'S NOTED "+/-" HOLD ALL OTHER DIMS. NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF DISCREPANCIES. WALL TYPES REFER TO BASE WALL CONSTRUCTION. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, FINISH PLANS AND INTERIOR DETAILS FOR ADDITIONAL DIMENSIONAL FINISHES APPLIED OVER WALLS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY INFRASTRUCTURE (POWER, DATA, OPENINGS, BLOCK, ETC) FOR OWNER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT. SEE SPECIFICATION FOR FULL LIST OF PROVIDED EQUIPMENT WITH ROLE OF CONTRACTOR DEFINED. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE AND PROVIDE IN WALL BLOCKING AT ALL LOCATIONS REQUIRING IT - E.G. WALL-MOUNTED FURNITURE, AV EQUIPMENT, TOILET ACCESSORIES, ETC. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND FURNITURE PLANS. COORDINATE SALVAGE AND RE-USE OF STFT-3 ASSEMBLIES. SEE DEMOLITION DRAWINGS FOR EXISTING DOOR NUMBERS. COORDINATE RE-USE OF EXISTING DOORS w/ DOOR SCHEDULE. PREP ALL NEW AND EXISTING FRAMES FOR RE-USE SEE A601 FOR TYPICAL DOOR DETAILS AND TYPICAL JAMB OFFSETS FROM WALLS. ALL DOORS ARE LOCATED PER THESE DETAILS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. SEE A901 FOR SCOPE AND RESPONSIBILITY OF LIBRARY SHELVING RELOCATION. INFILL STRUCTURAL DECK AND SLAB AT ALL LOCATIONS WHERE IN-FLOOR DEVICES OR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT HAVE BEEN REMOVED - REF. MECHANICAL FOR LOCATIONS 1 PATCH GWB FINISHES. PROVIDE NEW SKIMCOAT TO BLEND APPEARANCE KEYED NOTES - FLOOR PLANS 2 NEW POKE-THROUGH POWER AND DATA - SEE ELECTRICAL AND IT 3 EXISTING DOOR TO REMAIN. NO CHANGES 5 EXISTING BUILT IN WOOD SHELVING TO REMAIN. FIX SHELVES IN PLACE 6 NEW EXTERIOR VENT HOOD - PATCH AND REPAIR VENEERS AT NEW OPENING - SEEMECHANICAL 4 DOOR SALVAGED FROM ELSEWHERE AND REINSTALLED. COORDINATED w/ AD101 AND A601 10 10 11 11 D E 9 9 ACPNL-6A ACPNL-6A ACPNL-6A ACPNL-6A ACPNL-6A ACPNL-6AACPNL-5A ACPNL-5A ACPNL-5A ACPNL-5A ACPNL-5A ACPNL-5A ACPNL-5B ACPNL-5B ACPNL-5B•• • ADD ALTERNATE 2: SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILING BAFFLES. SEE 3/A101 BASE PROJECTNO ACPNL-5A/B/CNO ACPNL-6A/B/C ADD ALTERNATE 1FURNISH AND INSTALL ACPNL-5A/B/C AND ACPNL-6A/B/C IN SIZES AND CONFIGURATION AS NOTED IN DRAWINGS. TEENCORNER 109C Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the Laws of the State of Montana. Architect Seal Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 Dagmara Cygler ARC-LIC-22020 6/24/2026 4:01:59 PMC:\Users\mitch\AppData\Local\Autodesk\Revit\Autodesk Revit2026\CollaborationCache\SE9LP2RL9C65\da5fc686-9fbb-4b88-84c4-252d479585b8\c70f9ff1-8639-4ccd-b4be-7e524297b68e.rvtA101 FLOOR PLANS AND RCP'S Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and TeenCorner Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors Associate Architect 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 515 W ASPEN ST. SUITE 200A | 406.451.7310 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"A101 1 CHILDREN'S ROOM - FLOOR PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0"A101 2CHILDREN'S ROOM - RCP 1/8" = 1'-0"A101 4TEEN CORNER - FLOOR PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0"A101 3TEEN CORNER - RCP 45 F A501 14 13A1412A1416A14111 3 5 4 7 8 9 10 TA-12TA-12TA-12TA-8MW SEE A800STA-3 TA-14TA-3TA-14 TA-27 THEME ROOM 113 WELLNESSROOM 114 FAMILYRESTROOM 114A FAMILYRESTROOM 115 113115 A3A A3A STFT-3F3A A6A 7 1/8" SALVAGED AND NEW - SEE ELEVATION FOR CLERESTORY ABOVE RM 114 22' - 11 1/8" - STFT-31' - 7 3/4"7' - 3 1/2"1' - 9 1/4"8' - 4"2' - 0" TYP/ INFILL EXISTING AS REQ'D 7' - 3"1' - 1" C3A WALL 9 1/2"6' - 6" 2' - 6"1' - 10"114ATA-29 TA-24 114 STFT-3 12' - 4"12' - 10"10 5/8" F31' - 4"7' - 2 1/2"8' - 6 1/2" V.I.F.TA-25 A3A6' - 0 5/8"6' - 3 3/8"TA-8TA-19TA-19 TA-19TA-82' - 3"1' - 2"12 1' - 8"2' - 6"A141 9 TA-27 TA-121' - 8"3' - 2 1/4"5' - 0"TA-29 TA-25TA-25 A601 3 A6018A60110 A6015 TA-28 TA-1 TA-1 TA-1 1' - 10"1' - 10" CHILD HEIGHT FIXTURES ARE IN ADDITION TO REQ'D FULLY COMPLIANT FIXTURES COMPLIANT FIXTURE LEVEL 1 100' - 0" TL-5 PT-2K TA-25 TLA-2 MW-SEE A800S5' - 0"2' - 0"2' - 0"1' - 0"EQEQ TA-28 1' - 6"3' - 6"BASE2 LEVEL 1 100' - 0" 114 PT-2K GL-4 SALVAGED FROM EXISTING STOREFRONT ASSEMBLY. NEW ONLY AS REQ'D WD-2A CASING, SALVAGED FROM EXISTING STOREFRONT ASSEMBLY. NEW ONLY AS REQ'D GL-4 WD-2A GL-4 GL-4 GL-4 BLEND FINISH AT WALL INFILL LOCATION 1' - 0"TL-5 TLA-2 ALIGN w/ JOINT AT OPP WALL AND FLOOR FILM-1 BASE2 LEVEL 1 100' - 0" F TL-5 PT-2K TA-8 BASE2 TLA-2 114A 5' - 0"V.I.F.2' - 0"2' - 0"1' - 0"ALIGN TILE JOINT w/ TA R.O.3' - 1 1/2"WD-2A CASINGWD-2A LEVEL 1 100' - 0" TL-5 PT-2K MW - SEE A800S BASE2 TLA-2 MIR-1 TA-25 5' - 0"MIR-1 1' - 8"2' - 10"TL-5 1' - 0"2' - 0"2' - 0"6' - 0"3' - 3"ALIGN JNT w/ BENCH 6' - 1"3' - 2"2' - 0"1' - 6"1' - 6" TA-1 1' - 6"1' - 8"SIGNAGE N.I.C. LEVEL 1100' - 0" TL-5 PT-2K TA-8 TLA-2 MIR-1 114A 3' - 1 1/2"4' - 4"10"5' - 0"2' - 0"2' - 0"1' - 0"2' - 8"1' - 8"V.I.F. TA-1 2' - 0"WD-2A CASINGWD-2A FILM-1 BASE2 LEVEL 1100' - 0" TLA-2 TL-5 PT-2K 5' - 0"TA-27 EQEQ2' - 0"2' - 0"1' - 0"BASE2 LEVEL 1100' - 0" PT-2K TLA-2 BASE2 TA-12 5' - 0"TL-52' - 0"2' - 0"1' - 0"EQEQ TA-3TA-14 TA-19 10"10" LEVEL 1100' - 0" TL-5 PT-2K TA-12 TA-35' - 0"TLA-2 BASE2 TA-14 3' - 3"3' - 3"1' - 0"2' - 0"2' - 0"LEVEL 1100' - 0" TL-5 PT-2K TLA-2 BASE2 115 TA-27 5' - 0"2' - 0"2' - 0"1' - 0"TA-19 TLA-2 LEVEL 1100' - 0" TL-5 PT-2K MIR-1 MIR-12' - 0"2' - 0"1' - 0"1' - 6"1' - 6"5' - 0"6' - 0"3' - 2"2' - 10"3' - 3"2' - 0"4"1' - 8"BASE2 TLA-2 TA-1, BY OWNER SOME ACCESSORIES MAY NOT BE USED ON THIS PROJECTS. SEE PLANS FOR SPECIFIC TYPES USED. SINK / LAVATORIES NOTE:EXPOSED PIPES SHALL BE INSULATED OR CONFIGURED TO PROTECT AGAINST CONTACT MAX6"36" MIN 29" MIN34" MAXTOP OF SPOUT36" MAXDRINKING FOUNTAIN 16" - 18" WATER CLOSETS AND GRAB BARS 56" CLEAR FOR WALL HUNG TOILET*59" CLEAR FOR FLOOR MOUNTED TOILET PROTRUDING DISPENSER BELOW GRAB BAR EXCEPTION:TOILET PAPER DISPENSERS THAT ACCOMMODATE A MAXIMUM OF TWO TOILET PAPER ROLLS OF NOT MORE THAN 5" DIAMETER EACH SHALL BE INSTALLED BENEATH HORIZONTAL GRAB BAR AND 7" - 9" BEYOND THE FRONT EDGE OF WATER CLOSET MEASURED FROM THE CENTERLINE OF THE DISPENSER. THE OUTLET OF THE DISPENSER SHALL BE 15" MIN AND 48" MAX ABOVE THE FLOOR17" - 19"OBSTRUCTIONOBSTRUCTION60" CLEAR MIN MIN 15" 42" MIN 42" MAX MIN18"24" MIN RECESSED 42" MAX 48" MAX24" MIN MIN18"36" MAX FOR CHILDREN19" MAXTOE AND KNEE CLEARANCE9" MIN6" MAX 11" MIN 27" MINMIN8"OBSTRUCTIONMIN 15" 30" MIN MIN18"39" - 41"33" - 36"MAX 12" MIN 42" 39" - 41" 54" MIN 48" MAX40"TO HIGHEST OPERABLE PART OF THE DEVICE TO INSURE FORWARD REACHSUGGESTED MOUNTING HEIGHTS FOR VARIOUS ACCESSORIES OPERABLE PART OF DEVICEREFLECT. EDGE OF MIRRORFRAME SEE ELEVATIONS FOR INSTALLATION HEIGHT 66"48"28"POSITION34" IN OPEN40" MAX B.O. TA-5 TA-6 TA-7 TA-8 TA-11 TA-13 TA-14 TA-15 TA-17 TA-19 TA-23 TA-24 MISCELLANEOUS TOILET ACCESSORIES MOUNTING HEIGHTSOBSTRUCTION59" SPECIFICATIONS FOR WATER CLOSET SERVING CHILDREN 12"24"14"TA-25 OR 2" FROM BOTTOM OF PARTITION WHICHEVER IS HIGHERDISPENSERS AGES 3-4AGES 5-6 AGES 7-12 WATER CLOSET CENTERLINE12"12" - 15"15" - 18"WATER CLOSET SEAT HEIGHT11" - 12"12" - 15"15" - 17"GRAB BAR HEIGHT18" - 20"20" - 25"25" - 27"TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER HEIGHT4"14" - 17"17" - 19" *59" CLEAR FOR WALL AND FLOOR MOUNTED WATER CLOSET TA-1LIQUID-SOAP DISPENSER TA-2PAPER TOWEL (FOLDED) DISPENSER TA-3TOILET TISSUE SURFACE DOUBLE JUMBO-ROLL TA-4TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER JUMBO-ROLL TA-5PAPER TOWEL (FOLDED) DISPENSER TA-6 PAPER TOWEL (ROLL) DISPENSER TA-7 WASTE RECEPTACLE TA-8 COMBINATION TOWEL (FOLDED) DISPENSER / WASTE RECEPTACLE TA-9 COMBINATION TOWEL (ROLL) DISPENSER / WASTE RECEPTACLE TA-10 MULTIPURPOSE SOAP/TOWEL DISPENSER UNIT TA-11 LIQUID-SOAP DISPENSER TA-12 GRAB BAR TA-13 VENDOR TA-14 SANITARY-NAPKIN DISPOSAL UNIT TA-15 SEAT-COVER DISPENSER TA-16 FOLD-DOWN PURSE SHELF TA-17 MIRROR UNIT (FRAMED) TA-18 FACIAL TISSUE DISPENSER TA-19 HOOK TA-20 SHOWER CURTAIN ROD TA-21 FOLDING SHOWER SEAT TA-22 SOAP DISH TA-23 WARM-AIR DRYERS TA-24 DIAPER-CHANGING STATION TA-25 CHILD WALL MOUNT SAFETY SEAT LEVEL 1100' - 0"5' - 0"2' - 0"2' - 0"1' - 0"TL-5 PT-2K TA-12 TA-3 TLA-2 BASE2 TA-14 EQ EQ TA-24 TA-28 3' - 6"Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the Laws of the State of Montana. Architect Seal Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 Dagmara Cygler ARC-LIC-22020 6/30/2026 5:06:43 PMC:\Users\mitch\AppData\Local\Autodesk\Revit\Autodesk Revit2026\CollaborationCache\SE9LP2RL9C65\da5fc686-9fbb-4b88-84c4-252d479585b8\c70f9ff1-8639-4ccd-b4be-7e524297b68e.rvtA141 TOILET ROOMS Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and TeenCorner Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors Associate Architect 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 515 W ASPEN ST. SUITE 200A | 406.451.7310 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/4" = 1'-0"A141 1CHILDRENS ROOM - RESTROOMS 1/4" = 1'-0"A141 2WELLNESS 114 - NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0"A141 3 WELLNESS 114 - EAST 1/4" = 1'-0"A141 4 WELLNESS 114 - SOUTH 1/4" = 1'-0"A141 5 WELLNESS 114 - WEST 1/4" = 1'-0"A141 6FAMILY RESTROOM 114A - NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0"A141 7FAMILY RESTROOM 114A - EAST 1/4" = 1'-0"A141 8FAMILY RESTROOM 114A - SOUTH 1/4" = 1'-0"A141 9FAMILY RESTROOM 114A - WEST 1/4" = 1'-0"A141 10 FAMILY RESTROOM 115 - EAST 1/4" = 1'-0"A141 11 FAMILY RESTROOM 115 - SOUTH 1/4" = 1'-0"A141 12 FAMILY RESTROOM 115 - NORTH LEVEL 1 100' - 0" BCDEF PT-2B PT-2B EXISTINGWOODSHELVESTO REMAIN PT-2MPT-2B AROUND COLUMN WCVG-2WCVG-2WCVG-2 PT-2B WCVG-2 PT-2M WCVG-2WCVG-2 AROUND COLUMN MTLPNL-1 3' - 8 1/4"WD-2AWD-2AWD-2A PT-2B CG-1CG-1 CG-1 CG-1 WD-2A PT-2B PT-2B PT-2B WD-2A 18A501 TYP PROVIDE (2) LAG SCREWS w/ 1"⌀ EYE. LOCATE AT STUD, BLOCKING OR PROVIDE SUITABLE 150LB ANCHOR. CONFIRM LOCATION w/ OWNER IN FIELD EQ2' - 6"EQ V.I.F. 3' -8"EXISTING FE CAB CUT WOOD TRIM AROUND CABINET AROUND COLUMN WD-2A AROUND COLUMN WCVG-2, RETURN TO FACE OF SHELVING AT CORNER, TYP.WCVG-2 WD-2A LEVEL 1100' - 0" 34 5 6 WCVG-2 WCVG-2 PT-2B 5' - 0"4' - 4"9' - 4"118.1 116A GL-4 GL-4 GL-4 GL-4 GL-4 SALVAGED FROM EXISTING STOREFRONT ASSEMBLY. NEW ONLY AS REQ'D WD-2A CASING, SALVAGED FROM EXISTING STOREFRONT ASSRMBLY. NEW ONLY AS REQ'D GL-4 WD-2A INSTALLED IN NEW WALL. SAME CONFIGURATION STFT-3 SALVAGESTFT-3 WCVG-2 WD-2A V.I.F.3' - 8"EXISTINGWOODSHELVESTO REMAIN PT-2B PT-2B WCVG-2, RETURN TO FACE OF SHELVING AT CORNER, TYP.WCVG-2 WALL-HUNG ARTWORK DISPLAY CASE - OFCI WCVG-2 WD-2AWD-2AWD-2AWD-2A PT-2B PT-2B LEVEL 1100' - 0" BCD E PT-2BPT-2B EXISTING ARTWORK TO REMAIN 116118.2 4' - 0"5' - 4"9' - 4"GL-4GL-4GL-4GL-4GL-4 EXISTING / NEW WALL.SKIM COAT AND BLEND FINISH REV FROM EXISTING CONFIG. STFT-3 - SALVAGED. INSTALLEDSTFT-3 EXISTING UNMODIFIED EQAS SCHED.EQEQ STFT-3 - SALVAGEDSTFT-3STFT-3STFT-3 WD-2A CASING, TYP. SEE DETAILSWD-2A GL-4 SALVAGED FROM EXISTING STOREFRONT ASSEMBLY. NEW ONLY AS REQ'D WD-2A CASING, SALVAGED FROM EXISTING STOREFRONT ASSRMBLY. NEW ONLY AS REQ'D GL-4 WD-2A +/-EXISTING PT-2BPT-2B INFILL EXISTING WALL AT LOCATION OF RELOCATED DOOR LEVEL 1 100' - 0" 3456 PT-2B OPEN TO BEYOND PT-2B 115 GL-4 GL-4 GL-4 GL-4 GL-4 GL-4 GL-4GL-4 114 113 GL-4 SALVAGED FROM EXISTING STOREFRONT ASSEMBLY. NEW ONLY AS REQ'D WD-2A CASING, SALVAGED FROM EXISTING STOREFRONT ASSEMBLY. NEW ONLY AS REQ'D SEE DTLS AS SCHED.2 EQ2 EQ SEE DTLS AS SCHED. C.L. PARTITION - SEE PLANC.L. PARTITION - SEE PLAN 3' - 0"+/-7' - 0"EXISTING / NEW WALL.SKIM COAT AND BLEND FINISH EXISTING / NEW WALL.SKIM COAT AND BLEND FINISH GL-4 WD-2A1A601 6 A601 8 A60110A601 4 A601 3 A6017 A601+/-WCVG-1 7' - 4 3/4"3' - 8"SIGNAGE, N.I.C. DRINKING FOUNTAIN W/ BOTTLE FILLER - SEE PLUMBING STFT-3, SALVAGEDSTFT-3 11' - 3 1/4"STFT-3 STFT-3 PT-2L WD-2A PT-2B FILM-1 LEVEL 1100' - 0" PT-2LPT-2B PAINT COLOR TRANSITION AT CORNER LEVEL 1100' - 0" PT-2LPT-2B PAINT COLOR TRANSITION AT CORNER LEVEL 1100' - 0" 6 PT-2L PT-2L 6' - 0"1' - 0"6"3"LEVEL 1100' - 0" PT-2L LEVEL 1100' - 0" 4 PT-2L SIGNAGE, N.I.C. LEVEL 1100' - 0" B PT-2B WD-2A CASING, TYP. SEE DETAILSWD-2A 2 EQ STFT-3 -SALVAGE GL-4GL-46' - 0"4' - 0"INFILL EXISTING WALL AT LOCATION OF RELOCATED DOOR STFT-3 LEVEL 1100' - 0" PT-2B LEVEL 1 100' - 0" B PT-2B WD-2A 117 LEVEL 1 100' - 0" PT-2B GL-4GL-4GL-4 7' - 0 1/4"2' - 11 3/4"WD-2A CASING, TYP. SEE DETAILSWD-2A 10' - 0"3 EQ STFT-3STFT-3 LEVEL 1 100' - 0" CD PT-2B GL-4 SALVAGED FROM EXISTING STOREFRONT ASSEMBLY. NEW ONLY AS REQ'D WD-2A CASING, SALVAGED FROM EXISTING STOREFRONT ASSRMBLY. NEW ONLY AS REQ'D GL-4 WD-2A GL-4GL-4 GL-4 118.2 EXISTING UNMODIFIED STFT-3 REV. FROM EXISTING CONFIG. STFT-3 SALVAGED. INSTALLEDSTFT-3STFT-3 6' - 0"4' - 0"10' - 0"EQEQAS SCHEDEQ EXISTING / NEW WALL.SKIM COAT AND BLEND FINISH GL-4 PREP FRAME AND STRIKE - COORDINATE w/ EXISTING HARDWARE4 A601 1 A6017A601 2 A601 TYP TYPTYP TYP 2A601 TYP LEVEL 1 100' - 0" 7 PT-2B PT-2BGL-4GL-4GL-4 2' - 11 3/4"7' - 0 1/4"3 EQ STFT-3STFT-3 WD-2A CASING, TYP. SEE DETAILSWD-2A WD-1, OFCI LEVEL 1 100' - 0" B C D PT-2BPT-2B PT-2B 120PT-2B MW - SEE A800S 8' - 0"DW-1, OFCI UNDERCOUNTER REFRIGERATOR, OFOI PRINTER/COPIER - OFOI EXISTING BULKHEAD AND MAIN CEILING, HIDDEN FOR CLARITY PT-2B LEVEL 1 100' - 0" 7 PT-2BPT-2B GL-4GL-4GL-4 118.1 4' - 0"6' - 0"10' - 0"INSTALLED IN NEW WALL. SAME CONFIGURATION STFT-3 SALVAGESTFT-3 GL-4 SALVAGED FROM EXISTING STOREFRONT ASSEMBLY. NEW ONLY AS REQ'D WD-2A CASING, SALVAGED FROM EXISTING STOREFRONT ASSRMBLY. NEW ONLY AS REQ'D GL-4 WD-2A GL-4 TYP 4 A601 4 A601 8 A601 7A601 2 A601 3/4"1 1/2"WOOD COUNTER NOSING ABOVE EXISTING WOOD SHELVING, BY LOCATION WD-2A TRIM. 1/8" EASED EDGE. KERF DEPTH OF WCVG-2 AND ADHESIVE. V.I.F.WCVG-2WD-2A 1/2"WCVG-2 EXISTING OR NEW WALL WCVG-2 LEVEL 1100' - 0" EXISTING STFT-3 EQEQ 3' - 0"3' - 0" PT-2L PROVIDE (3) LAG SCREWS w/ 1"⌀ EYE. CENTER IN CASING. 150LB MIN. CAPACITY. GC TO CONFIRM TYPE. CONFIRM LOCATION w/ OWNER IN FIELD PAINT COLOR TRANSITION AT CORNER Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the Laws of the State of Montana. Architect Seal Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 Dagmara Cygler ARC-LIC-22020 6/24/2026 4:02:18 PMC:\Users\mitch\AppData\Local\Autodesk\Revit\Autodesk Revit2026\CollaborationCache\SE9LP2RL9C65\da5fc686-9fbb-4b88-84c4-252d479585b8\c70f9ff1-8639-4ccd-b4be-7e524297b68e.rvtA501 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and TeenCorner Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors Associate Architect 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 515 W ASPEN ST. SUITE 200A | 406.451.7310 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 5CHILDREN'S ROOM - NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 8CHILDREN'S ROOM - EAST 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 12CHILDREN'S ROOM - SOUTH 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 11CHILDREN'S ROOM - WEST 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 15NOOK - NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 16NOOK - SOUTH 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 17 NOOK - WEST 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 13 THEME ROOM - SOUTH 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 14 THEME ROOM - WEST 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 6YS OFFICE - NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 7YS OFFICE - EAST 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 9YS OFFICE - SOUTH 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 10YS OFFICE - WEST 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 1YS WORKROOM - NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 2YS WORKROOM - EAST 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 3 YS WORKROOM - SOUTH 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 4YS WORKROOM - WEST 3" = 1'-0"A501 18 TYP WD-2A TRIM 1/4" = 1'-0"A501 19STEAM 116C - SOUTH DOOR TYPES, SCHEDULE, AND TYPICAL DETAILS GENERAL NOTES 1. 2. 3. SEE DEMOLITION PLAN FOR LOCATION OF EXISTING DOORS NOTED IN COMMENTS TO BE RE-USED IN PROJECT CONFIRM DIMENSIONS OF EXISTING DOORS TO BE RE-USED, COORDINATE WITH NEWLY BUILT OR EXISTING OPENINGS, AND PREP OR MODIFY FRAMES AS REQ'D. FOR SALVAGED DOORS INSTALLED IN NEWLY BUILT, OR RECONFIGURED SALVAGED STFT-3, COORDINATE LAYOUT OF OVERALL STFT-3 SYSTEM TO ENSURE PROPER FIT OF SALVAGED DOORS IN OPENING. 4. U.N.O., ALL DOOR HARDWARE AND LOCKSETS ARE TO BE SALVAGED AND RE-USED. FOR EXISTING CLASSROOM LOCKSETS, PROVIDE NEW CYLINDERS AND COORDINATE KEY SCHEDULE w/ OWNER. SALVAGE ALL WALL STOPS OR PROVIDE NEW, IVES STYLE WS406/407-CCV, OR OTHER WALL STOP COMPATIBLE WITH NEW LOCATION 5. HARDWARE GROUPS BELOW DESCRIBE DESIRED FUNCTIONALITY AND MAY NOT DESCRIBE ALL COMPONENTS REQ'D. PROVIDE COMPLETE HARDWARE SETS AS REQ'D TO SATISFY FUNCTIONAL INTENT. ALL LOCKSETS SHALL BE SCHLAGE, HINGES SHALL BE IVES, CONFIRM AND MATCH CYLINDER MFR, DOOR HARDWARE GROUPS 1. •••• MORTISE PRIVACY LOCKSET WITH INDICATOR TRIM (1) SET INTERIOR HINGES. 652 FINISH(1) MORTISE PRIVACY LOCKSET. OCCUPANCY INDICATORS EA. SIDE. THUMBTURN INTERIOR. COIN TURN EXT. SCHLAGE L/LV9444 OR SIMILAR(1) WALL GUARD(1) SET ACOUSTIC GASKETS RETROFIT TO DOORS AND FRAMES. SEE SCHEDULE FOR DOOR MATERIAL AND GLASS TYPESEE SCHEDULESEE SCHEDULE D# - FULL LITE10"6"6"6"SEE SCHEDULESEE SCHEDULE D3 - WID STILE10"6"6"6" F#SEE SCHEDULE4" - TYP CASINGF2 - WOOD FRAME SEE SCHEDULE ALL SIDES1/4" - TYP FRAME REVEAL SINGLE RABBET WD-1B FRAME TYPICAL WD-2 CASING, SEE DETAILS FRAME AND DOOR PREPPED FOR HARDWARE - SEE SCHEDULE FOR HARDWARE GROUP DOOR, AS SCHEDULED SHIM AS REQ'D WALL CONSTRUCTION, PER WALL TYPE - SEE PLANS FOR TYPE, BY LOCATION WD-1B FRAME. AS SCHEDULED 1 1/4" 1/2"3/4" 4" TYP, U.N.O. BLOCKING 1 1/2"VARIESSCHD.ASVARIES4" WD-2A, 1X NOM SOLID CASING C STFT-33/4"PER WALL TYPE3/4"VARIES4 1/2"1 1/8"VARIES1X NOM. SOLID CASING 2X NOM. WOOD FRAMING CFMS FRAMING BELOW OPENING PER WALL TYPE. EA. SIDE OF 2X SHIM, AS REQ'D FILL VOID w/ INSUL-7 BLOCKING, AS REQ'D GL-4 1/4", TEMPERED WHERE REQ'D PROVIDE GLAZING GASKETS ALL FOUR SIDES OR OPENING STANDARD 5/8" GWB SHOWN BELOW FOR REFERENCE GLAZING STOP, TYP 3/4"3/4"1/2" WD-2A, STFT-3 FRAME 1/4"4"1/4" A3A STFT-3 PLAN REFERENCE R.O. 4 1/4" 4"1/4" 1 1/4"VARIES3/4"PER WALL TYPE3/4"1 1/8"VARIES1 1/4"1 1/2"1 1/4" WALL CONSTRUCTION, PER WALL TYPE - SEE PLANS FOR TYPE, BY LOCATION BLOCKING 3/4"1/2" WD-2A 1X NOM. SOLID CASING SHIM, AS REQ'D FILL VOID w/ INSUL-7 GL-41/4", TEMPERED WHERE REQ'D PROVIDE GLAZING GASKETS ALL FOUR SIDES OR OPENING GLAZING STOP, TYP A3A 7 3/4" FRAME AND DOOR PREPPED FOR HARDWARE - SEE SCHEDULE FOR HARDWARE GROUP DOOR, AS SCHEDULED SHIM AS REQ'D WALL CONSTRUCTION, PER WALL TYPE - SEE PLANS FOR TYPE, BY LOCATION WD-1B FRAME. PROFILE AND SPECIES AS SCHEDULED (2) LAYERS 3/4" PLYWOOD BUCKS AT INT OF CMFS OPENING, ALL SIDES WD-2A 1X NOM. SOLID CASING w/ MITER LOCK CORNER SEE 8/A601 FOR TYPICAL NOTES AND DIMENSIONS AT STFT-3 FRAME6 5/8"1/4"6 7/8"WD-2A CASING AT DOOR SIDE OF CORNER TYPICAL WD-2A CASING BELOW WD-2A C R.O. SILL 4 1/4"4"1/4"1 1/4"1 1/2"1 1/4"3/4"1/2"VARIES 3/4"PER WAL TYPE3/4" 1 1/8"VARIES STFT-3 A3A SEE 8/A601 FOR TYPICAL NOTES AND DIMENSIONS AT STFT-3 FRAME C A3A R.O. HEAD4"4 1/4"1/4"1 1/4"1 1/2"1 1/4"1X NOM. SOLID CASING SHIM, AS REQ'D FILL VOID w/ INSUL-7 BLOCKING, AS REQ'D GL-4 1/4", TEMPERED WHERE REQ'D PROVIDE GLAZING GASKETS ALL FOUR SIDES OR OPENING GLAZING STOP, TYP WD-1B, STFT-3 FRAME CFMS HEADER. CONSTRUCTION ABOVE PER WALL TYPE VARIES 3/4"PER WALL TYPE3/4" 1 1/8"VARIES WD-2A 4"1/2"1/4"3 1/2"1/4"STFT-3 HORIZONTAL TRANSOM IS SIMILAR IN CONSTRUCTION TO STFT-3INTERMEDIATE VERTICAL SEE 8/A601 FOR TYPICAL NOTES AND DIMENSIONS STFT-3 HORIZONTAL TRANSOM HEAD IS SIMILAR IN CONSTRUCTION TO DOOR JAMB AT STFT-3 INTERMEDIATE VERTICAL SEE 2/A601 FOR TYPICAL NOTES AND DIMENSIONS PREP DOOR AND CASING FOR HARDWARE - REF DOOR SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS CL OF STFT-3 HORIZONTAL STFT-3 HORIZONTAL TRANSOM IS SIMILAR IN CONSTRUCTION TO STFT-3 INTERMEDIATE VERTICAL SEE 8/A601 FOR TYPICAL NOTES AND DIMENSIONS A3A A3A 2"2" 1/4"4"1/4" 1/4"1/4" 1 1/4"1 1/2"1 1/4" SEE 8/A601 FOR TYPICAL NOTES AND DIMENSIONS AT STFT-3 FRAME WD-2A TRIM 'J' BEAD CASING CENTER STF-3 TYP. VERTICAL ON INTERSECTION PARTITION STFT-3 COMPONENTS ABOVE AT CLERESTORY LEVEL - SEE INT. ELEVATIONS4"1/4"1 1/2"4"1/4"1/2"9 1/2" - WALL F.F + F.F. WD-1B FRAME EXT FRAME FRAME AND DOOR PREPPED FOR HARDWARE - SEE SCHEDULE FOR HARDWARE GROUP DOOR, AS SCHEDULED SHIM AS REQ'D WALL CONSTRUCTION, PER WALL TYPE - SEE PLANS FOR TYPE, BY LOCATION WD-1B FRAME AND EXTENSION. AS SCHEDULED BLOCKING WD-2A, 1X NOM SOLID CASING, EA. SIDE TL-5 TL-5 TLA-1ATLA-1A +/- SCHED AS Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the Laws of the State of Montana. Architect Seal Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 Dagmara Cygler ARC-LIC-22020 6/25/2026 10:32:59 AMC:\Users\mitch\AppData\Local\Autodesk\Revit\Autodesk Revit2026\CollaborationCache\SE9LP2RL9C65\da5fc686-9fbb-4b88-84c4-252d479585b8\c70f9ff1-8639-4ccd-b4be-7e524297b68e.rvtA601 DOOR SCHEDULE AND DETAILS Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and TeenCorner Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors Associate Architect 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 515 W ASPEN ST. SUITE 200A | 406.451.7310 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT DOOR SCHEDULE - CHILDREN'S ROOM DOOR NO DOOR FRAME FIRE HDWR COMMENTSWIDTHHEIGHTTHICKNESSTYPEMAT'L HEAD SILL JAMB TYPE MAT'L 1133' - 0"7' - 0"2 1/4"(E) D3 EXISTING 1/A601 --1,3/A601 (SIM)SALVAGED STFT-3, PREP FRAME WD-1B N/A EXISTING, PASSAGE EXISTING DOOR E113.2 1143' - 0"7' - 0"2 1/4"(E) D3 EXISTING 1/A601 --4/A601 (SIM)STFT-3 WD-1B N/A 1 EXISTING DOOR E116.3, FILM-1 114A3' - 0"7' - 0"2 1/4"(E) D3 EXISTING 5/A601 (SIM)--5/A601 F2 WD-1B N/A EXISTING, PASSAGE EXISTING DOOR E113.1, FILM-1 1173' - 0"7' - 0"2 1/4"(E) D3 EXISTING 2/A601 --4/A601 (SIM)F2 WD-1B N/A EXISTING, CLASSROOM EXISTING DOOR E118.2 118.13' - 0"7' - 0"2 1/4"(E) D3 EXISTING 1/A601 --1/A601 (SIM)SALVAGED STFT-3, PREP FRAME WD-1B N/A EXISTING, CLASSROOM EXISTING DOOR E118.1 118.23' - 0"7' - 0"2 1/4"(E) D3 EXISTING 1/A601 --1/A601 (SIM)SALVAGED STFT-3, PREP FRAME WD-1B N/A EXISTING CLASSROOM EXISTING DOOR E117 DOOR TYPES - CHILDREN'S REMODEL FRAME TYPES - CHILDREN'S REMODEL 3" = 1'-0"A601 4 TYPICAL CASED WOOD FRAME DETAIL - HEAD SIM 3" = 1'-0"A601 8STFT-3 INTERMEDIATE 3" = 1'-0"A601 9 STFT-3 JAMB 3" = 1'-0"A601 3STFT-3 CORNER 3" = 1'-0"A601 7TYP. STFT-3 SILL 3" = 1'-0"A601 2TYP. STFT-3 HEAD 3" = 1'-0"A601 1STFT-3 TRANSOM HEAD 3" = 1'-0"A601 6STFT-3 TRANSOM 3" = 1'-0"A601 10 STFT-3 AT CORNER w/ CLERESTORY 3" = 1'-0"A601 5 HM FRAME IN C3 WALL DOOR 115 IS EXISTING AND IS TO REMAIN IN PLACE. PROVIDE NEW HARDWARE GROUP 1 AND PREP FRAME AT DOOR 115. W/D DW2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 A A B B C C D D E E F F CPT-3C CPT-3B CPT-3A CPT-3A TL-4 TL-4 TL-5 TL-5 TL-5 PT-2K PT-2K PT-2K COLLECTION 116B OFFICE 117 STAFF WORK 118 CHILDRENSROOM 116 STORAGE / IT 120 NOOK 116D STEAM ZONE 116C ACTIVE PLAY 116A THEME ROOM 113 WELLNESSROOM 114 FAMILYRESTROOM 114A FAMILYRESTROOM 115 PT-2L CPT-3C CPT-3B A701 2 TL-4 CPT-3C CPT-3B CPT-3A CPT-3A (PHASE 1)EXISTING CARPETCPT-3A PT-2GPAINT COLUMN PT-2GPAINT COLUMN PT-2GPAINT COLUMN CPT-3A CPT-3A CPT-3A CPT-3A WCVG-2 PT-2B BASE2 BASE2 BASE2 IN PLACE MOCKUP FOR CPT-3 FINISH GENERAL NOTES FINISH PLAN KEY FLOOR FINISH CPT-1 A STYLE COLOR WALL FINISH PT-1 A STYLE / FINISH COLOR FINISH BASE SYMBOL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. SHORT FORM MATERIAL ID LIST IS LOCATED ON SHEET G001. MATERIAL I.D. AND PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS ARE OF EQUAL PRECEDENCE. CLARIFY DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO WORK . COORDINATE EXTENT OF FLOOR AND WALL FINISHES WITH MILLWORK DRAWINGS. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, FLOOR FINISHES SHALL EXTEND BENEATH MILLWORK AND CASEWORK. REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR FINISH COORDINATION AND PATTERNS, TYP. ALL NEW GWB CEILINGS AND SOFFITS TO BE PAINTED PT-1B U.N.O. WALLS, NEW AND EXISTING SHALL BE PAINTED PT-2B U.N.O. ALL WALLS TO HAVE RB-3 (BASE-1) U.N.O. SEE SHEET G003. SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS FOR CPT-3A, CPT-3B, & CPT-3C INSTALLATION SHALL INCLUDE FULL AREA OF INSTALL AND SHALL CLEARLY NOTE DISTRIBUTION OF VARIOUS TILES TO CREATE GRADIENT PER DESIGN INTENT. MOCK UP REQUIRED IN FRONT NOOK 116D. 34 B C D E F3' - 2"RFL-1 RFL-2 RFL-1 RFL-1 RFL-2 RFL-2 RFL-2 RFL-2 3' - 2" PT-2LPT-2MWCVG-2WCVG-2WCVG-2MTLPNL-1WCVG-2WCVG-2PT-2BPT-2BPT-2BPT-2MWCVG-2* FULL TILE STARTS HERE PT-2BPT-2BWCVG-2 CPT-3C CPT-3B RFL-2 RFL-1 PT-2L TRAN-1 CPT-3C CPT-3B RFL-2 5' - 2 3/4"10"Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the Laws of the State of Montana. Architect Seal Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 Dagmara Cygler ARC-LIC-22020 6/24/2026 4:02:28 PMC:\Users\mitch\AppData\Local\Autodesk\Revit\Autodesk Revit2026\CollaborationCache\SE9LP2RL9C65\da5fc686-9fbb-4b88-84c4-252d479585b8\c70f9ff1-8639-4ccd-b4be-7e524297b68e.rvtA701 FINISH PLANS - CHILDRENS AREA Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and TeenCorner Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors Associate Architect 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 515 W ASPEN ST. SUITE 200A | 406.451.7310 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"A701 1 CHILDREN'S ROOM - FINISH PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0"A701 2CHILDREN'S ROOM - ENLARGE FINISH PLAN W/DDW YHDWVWVW/D DW7 BC A801 3 PLAM-1PLAM-1 9' - 9" RELOCATED - V.I.F. 7' - 9"1" - FILLER EXISTING CASEWORK, SALVAGE FROM ELSEWHERE AND REINSTALLED AS SHOWN. REF. DEMO DRAWINGS, TYP.2' - 1 1/2"2' - 1 1/2"17' - 3 1/4" LEVEL 1 100' - 0" BC +/- 1" - FILLER8' - 1 3/8" - V.I.F.9' - 0" - EXISTING TO REMAIN. V.I.F.1" - FILLER3' - 6"3" V.I.F. 3' - 9" 1" V.I.F. 4' - 0"3' - 0" - 1.1 CLR 2' - 1 1/2"V.I.F. 3' - 0" V.I.F. 3' - 0" 3' - 0" - 1.1 PLAM-2PLAM-2 PROVIDE (3), NEW, FULL-DEPTH PULL OUT SHELVES PER CABINET SECTION. (12 TOTAL). HD, SOFT CLOSE SLIDES1' - 4"+/- 5' - 8" RELOCATED V.I.F. 7' - 9"1" FILLER PROVIDE NEW WD-1 FILLER BETWEEN T.O. CABINETS AND NEW SOFFITS 4"10"10"10"2' - 10"DW-2(OFOI)OPEN 17' - 3 1/2" V.I.F. 3' - 0" EXISTING CASEWORK TO REMAIN AS IS WITH NO CHANGES, U.N.O. SHOWN IN DARK FILL, TYP. EXISTING CASEWORK, SALVAGE FROM ELSEWHERE AND REINSTALLED AS SHOWN. REF. DEMO DRAWINGS, TYP.8' - 0"COUNTER BRACKET AS REQ'D NEW WD-3A VALANCE TO MATCH EXISTING AT OPP. SIDE OF WINDOW8"V.I.F.2' - 8"V.I.F.2' - 8"EXISTING CASEWORK, SALVAGE FROM ELSEWHERE AND REINSTALLED AS SHOWN. REF. DEMO DRAWINGS, TYP. 3' - 11"1" OFOI EQUIPMENT EXISTING CASEWORK, SALVAGE FROM ELSEWHERE AND REINSTALLED AS SHOWN. REF. DEMO DRAWINGS, TYP. WD-3A SCRIBE WD-3AWD-3A 4" PLAM-1 BACKSPLASH,TYPPLAM-1 1.11.1 7 A801 PROVIDE NEW PULLS, STYLE AND FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING. V.I.F. 1.1 BASE CABINET WITH 6" DRAWER + 2 DOORS AND ADJUSTABLE SHELF BELOW MILLWORK TYPES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. LIBRARY SHELVING WORK IS NOT IN CONTRACT, U.N.O. SEE A901 FOR SCHEDULE OF RESPONSIBILITY FOR WORK AT LIBRARY SHELVING END PANELS AND CANOPY TOPS. COORDINATE WITH AD101 FOR EXISTING CASEWORK TO BE REMOVED FOR REINSTALLATION IN NEW LOCATIONS PROTECT ALL CASEWORK TO REMAIN IN PLACE. SEE 'E' SHEETS FOR ELECTRICAL COORDINATION AND UNDER-CABINET LIGHTING SEE 'P' SHEETS FOR PLUMBING FIXTURE COORDINATION. COORDINATE PRIOR TO FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION OF MILLWORK ELEMENTS. MILLWORK CONTRACTOR SHALL CONFIRM QUANTITY, AND SPACING OF COUNTERTOP BRACKETS OF INDICATED TYPE TO PREVENT SAGGING COORDINATE ANY REQ'D IN-WALL BLOCKING WITH GC. ALL MILLWORK QUANTITIES NOTED ON SHEETS TO BE CONFIRMED BY MILLWORK VENDOR. MILLWORK GENERAL NOTES: A801 56 A801 SSF-3 UPH-3, FULL WIDTH AND DEPTH OF SSF-3 TOP. PROVIDE VELCRO RETAINERS UPH-3SSF-3 2' - 2 1/2"6' - 0 1/2" LEVEL 1100' - 0" 6A801 SSF-3 PLAM-1 UPH-3 TL-44"1' - 0 1/2"1 1/2"1' - 6"1"TLA-1A MWA-1 TLA-1B AT TOP AND SIDES, TO FLOORTLA-1A LEVEL 1100' - 0" SSF-3 LOCKABLE PULL OUT DRAWERPLAM-1 NEW TILE FINISHES - STOP AT MILLWORK TLA-1B, AT TOP AND SIDES OF BENCH, CONT. TO TLA-1A AT FLOORTLA-1BTLA-1A UPH-3, OVER 1.5"T HIGH DENSITY FOAM PAD. PROVIDE VELCRO STRIP ATTACHMENT1/2"2' - 1 1/2"1/2" UPH-3 1 1/2"1' - 6"1 1/2"1' - 0 1/2"4"HD DRAWER SLIDES AND SOFT CLOSERS TL-4 FINISH AT TOE KICK w/ TLA-1A TRANSITION TO FLOOR TILETLA-1ATL-4 1"3" 4" MDF AND MELAMINE CABINET BODY CONSTRUCTION SOLID WOOD DRAWER BODY PANEL: HIGH DENSITY MDF IN THICKNESS AS DESCRIBED IN DRAWINGS WITH VENEER;VENEER: WHITE MAPLE; CUT: PLAIN SLICED (MATCH EXISTING VENEER PANELS);MATCH: MATCH EXISTING;EDGE: HARDWOOD EDGE; EDGE SPECIES: WHITE MAPLE;EDGE CUT: PLAIN SAWN; WD-3A MDF W/ WOOD VENEER MFR: WILSONART;PRODUCT: TRACELESS BY WILSONART; COLOR: DESIGNER WHITE D354-60; PLAM-1 PLASTIC LAMINATE MILLWORK FINISHES MFR: WILSONART;PRODUCT: TRACELESS BY WILSONART; COLOR: SLATE GREY D91-60; PLAM-2 PLASTIC LAMINATE 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 A A B B C C D D E E F F STAFF WORK 118 WELLNESSROOM 114 A8012 A8014 NOOK 116D FAMILYRESTROOM 115 FAMILYRESTROOM 114A THEME ROOM 113 STEAM ZONE 116C CHILDRENSROOM 116 ACTIVE PLAY 116A COLLECTION 116B OFFICE 117 STORAGE / IT 120 LEVEL 1100' - 0" NEW CABINET PULLS AT DOORS AND DRAWINGS. MATCH EXISTING IN SPACE RUBBER BASE 4"2' - 6"2' - 10"6"1/4"1 1/2"FLUSH OVERLAY WD-3A CABINET FRONTS AND EXPOSED PANELS PLAM-2 COUNTER . PROVIDE MATCHING BACKSPLASH UP TO WINDOW SILL HEIGHT MDF AND MELAMINE CABINET BODY CONSTRUCTION SOLID WOOD DRAWER BODY ADJUSTABLE SHELVING 3/4" 2' - 1 1/2"Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the Laws of the State of Montana. Architect Seal Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 Dagmara Cygler ARC-LIC-22020 6/24/2026 4:02:35 PMC:\Users\mitch\AppData\Local\Autodesk\Revit\Autodesk Revit2026\CollaborationCache\SE9LP2RL9C65\da5fc686-9fbb-4b88-84c4-252d479585b8\c70f9ff1-8639-4ccd-b4be-7e524297b68e.rvtA801 MILLWORK PLANS,ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and TeenCorner Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors Associate Architect 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 515 W ASPEN ST. SUITE 200A | 406.451.7310 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 3/8" = 1'-0"A801 2MW1 - YS WORKROOM 3/8" = 1'-0"A801 3MW1 - YS WORKROOM 3/8" = 1'-0"A801 4MW-2 PLAN 3/8" = 1'-0"A801 5MW-2 ELEVATION 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A801 6MW-2 SECTION 1/8" = 1'-0"A801 1 MILLWORK PLAN 1 1/2" = 1'-0"A801 7TYPE 1.1 YHDWVWVW/D DWWVWVWV2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 A A B B C C D D E E F F ? STAFF WORK 118 WELLNESSROOM 114 BD-1BD-1BD-1 BD-2 BD-2BD-3BD-3EP-1CEP-1CEP-1CEP-1CEP-2AEP-2AEP-2C EP-2C EP-2CEP-2C EP-1CEP-1CEP-2CEP-2CEP-2CEP-1AEP-1AEP-1AEP-1AEP-1AEP-1AEP-1AEP-1AEP-1AEP-1AEP-1AEP-1AEP-1AEP-3A EP-3A EP-3CEP-3C EP-3C EP-3C 15' - 1 1/2" 15' - 1 1/2"15' - 3"21' - 3"21' - 3"21' - 3"9' - 3"9' - 3"9' - 3"9' - 3"12' - 4 1/2"24' - 3"9' - 3"3' - 3"9' - 3"12' - 3"9' - 3" 12' - 3"6' - 3"6' - 3"6' - 3"SH1 SH1 SH1 SH1 SH1 SH1 SH2 SH2 SH3SH3 SH3 SH3 SH8 SH10 SH10 EP-1C EP-1C 12' - 3" SH7 SH7 SH7 SH8 SH3 SH3 SH3SH3 SH9 SH9 SH6 SH6 SH4 SH4 SH4 SH5 EXBD-1 EXBD-1 EXBD-1 EXBD-1 4' - 0"2' - 0"NOOK 116D FAMILYRESTROOM 115 FAMILYRESTROOM 114A THEME ROOM 113 STEAM ZONE 116C OFFICE 117 CHILDRENSROOM 116 ACTIVE PLAY 116A COLLECTION 116BNP-1NP-1NP-1 NP-1 NP-1 NP-1 NP-1NP-1NP-1 NP-1 NP-1 NP-1 BD-4 3' - 5 1/2"3' - 6 1/2" 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 AA BB CC DD EE FF 7' - 7 1/8"19' - 6 5/8"EXBDEXBDEXBDEXBDEXBDEP-1AEP-1A EP-1BEP-1AEP-1AEP-1B EP-1AEP-1A EP-1BEP-1B EP-1AEP-1AEP-1AEP-1AEP-1AEP-1A EP-2B EP-2B EP-1AEP-1A EP-1BEP-1B EP-1BEP-1B EP-2AEP-2A EP-2BEP-2B EP-2AEP-2A 47"H 61.75"H 47"H 47"H 61.75"H 61.75"H 61.75"H 61.75"H 61.75"H 61.75"H 61.75"H 61.75"H61.75"H 47"H 47"H 47"H47"H47"H 61.75"H 21' - 3" 21' - 3" 24' - 3" 24' - 3" 24' - 3" 24' - 3" 24' - 3" 12' - 3" 6' - 3"12' - 3" 21' - 3" 21' - 3" 12' - 3"6' - 3" 21' - 3" 6' - 3"3' - 3"15' - 3"3' - 3"EP-2CEP-2CEP-2CEP-2CEP-2CEP-2CEP-2CEP-2C ALL EXISTING WOOD BOOK BINS TO BE TURNED OVER TO OWNER AS SALVAGE NONE RETAINED IN NEW WORK EP-1A | 61.75" H X 21.5" W SOLID WOOD EP-1B | 61.75" H X 21.5" W SOLID WOOD WITH SLATS EP-1C | 61.75" H X 14" W SOLID WOOD EP-2A | 47" H X 21.5" W SOLID WOOD EP-2B | 47" H X 21.5" W SOLID WOOD WITH SLATS EP-2C | 47" X 14" W SOLID WOOD EP-3A | 36" X 21.5" W SOLID WOOD EP-3C | 36" X 14" W SOLID WOOD EP-1A | 14 EP-1B | 8 EP-1C | 0 EP-2A | 4 EP-2B | 4 EP-2C | 8 EP-3A | 0 EP-3C | 0 END PANEL TYPEQTY AVAILABLE IN PROJECT AREAQTY REQUIRED IN RECONFIGURATION EP-1A | 13 EP-1B | 0 EP-1C | 8 EP-2A | 2 EP-2B | 0 EP-2C | 10 EP-3A | 2 EP-3C | 4 ALL EXISTING CANOPY TOPS ARE TO BE REMOVED AND INVENTORIED FOR RE-USE IN NEW SHELVING CONFIGURATION SOME CANOPY TOPS WILL BE CUT TO NEW SIZES (WIDTH OR LENGTH). REFER TO NEW SHELVING LAYOUT AND COORDINATE QTY AT EA. SIZE MODIFIED END PANELS SHOULD HAVE NEW SOLID TRIM OR VENEER BANDING, TO MATCH EXISTING WOOD SPECIES CUT AND FINISH, INSTALLED TO FINISH EDGES CANOPY TYPE AND RE-USE CHECK STORAGE FOR THIS SIZE USE ADDITIONAL LEFT OVER 2 TO BE CUT DOWN FOR EP- 2C CHECK STORAGE AVAILABLE FOR THESE NEW SIZES ADDITIONAL UNITS AVAILABLE IN OWNER'S EXISTING ATTIC STOCK. COORDINATE QTY'S w/ OWNER EXBD | EXISTING WOOD BOOK DISPLAYS MOVED TO NEW LOCATION BD-1 | 61.75" H X 8" D X 21.5" WFACE OUT DISPLAY SHELVES 4 SHELVES HIGH BD-2 | 47" H X 8" D X 21.5" WFACE OUT DISPLAY SHELVES 3 SHELVES HIGH BD-3 | 36" H x 8"D X 21.5" WFACE OUT DISPLAY SHELVES 2 SHELVES HIGH BD-4 | 36" H x 2'D X 4' WDISPLAY UNIT ON LOCKING CASTERS BOOK DISPLAY END CAP TYPESSHELVING KEY NOTES SH1 42" H DOUBLE FACE PICTURE BOOK SHELVING:METAL: WHITE METAL SHELVING (2 HIGH)LENGTH: TYPICAL 3' SECTIONS;SIGNAGE: ACRYLIC SIGNAGE WITH PAPER INSERT;SEE DETAIL FOR SIGNAGE ON PAGE A902END PANELS: NP-1 MAPLE WOOD VENEER - SEE ELEVATION DRAWING; SH2 42" H SINGLE FACE BOARD BOOK SHELVING:METAL: WHITE METAL SHELVING (4 HIGH)LENGTH: CUSTOM LENGTH TO FIT IN EXISTING NOOKS V.I.F.SIGNAGE: ACRYLIC SIGNAGE WITH PAPER INSERTSEE DETAIL FOR SIGNAGE ON PAGE A902END PANELS: NO END PANELS SH361.75" H DOUBLE FACE RUN:SHELVING: EXISTING FLAT SHELVES (4 HIGH)BASE SHELF: EXISTING SH8 47" H SINGLE FACE RUN:SHELVING: EXISTING FLAT FLAT SHELVES (2 HIGH)BASE SHELF: NEW BASE SHELF NEEDED SH10 36" H SINGLE FACE RUN:SHELVING: EXISTING FLAT SHELVES (1 HIGH)BASE SHELF: NEW BASE SHELF NEEDEDSTANDARDS: CUT DOWN TO LOWER HEIGHT SH7 47" H SINGLE FACE RUN:SHELVING: EXISTING FLAT FLAT SHELVES (2 HIGH)BASE SHELF: EXISTING SH9 36" H DOUBLE FACE RUN:SHELVING: EXISTING FLAT FLAT SHELVES (1 HIGH)BASE SHELF: EXISTINGSTANDARDS: CUT DOWN TO LOWER HEIGHT SH6 47" H DOUBLE FACE RUN:SHELVING: EXISTING FLAT FLAT SHELVES (2 HIGH)BASE SHELF: EXISTING SH461.75" H SINGLE FACE RUN:SHELVING: EXISTING FLAT SHELVING (4 HIGH)BASE SHELF: NEW BASE SHELF NEEDED SH561.75" H SINGLE FACE RUN:SHELVING: EXISTING PULL OUT DVD DRAWERS (4 HIGH)BASE SHELF: NEW BASE SHELF NEEDED * NEW BOOK DISPLAYS - BY OWNER SEE SHEET A902 FOR DETAILS END PANEL TYPE AND RE-USE LEGEND LIBRARY SHELVING, END PANEL AND CANOPY TOP SCOPE RESPONSIBILITY: EXISTING END PANEL AND CANOPY TOP REMOVAL* EXISTING SHELVING DISASSEMBLY AND REMOVAL* EXISTING END PANEL AND CANOPY TOP MODIFICATION EXISTING SHELVING MODIFICATION EXISTING SHELVING RE-INSTALLATION AND ANCHORING EXISTING END PANEL AND CANOPY TOP REINSTALLATION NEW SHELVING INSTALLATION AND ANCHORING NEW END PANEL INSTALLATION NEW BOOK DISPLAY CONSTRUCTION NEW BOOK DISPLAY INSTALLATION *COORDINATE TEMPORARY STORAGE SPACE WITH OWNER. ALL ITEMS TO BE RE-USED GC GC GC OWNER OWNER OWNER OWNER OWNER OWNER 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. SCOPE OF SHELVING WORK IS SPLIT BETWEEN GENERAL CONTRACT AND OWNER. SEE SCOPE RESPONSIBILITY TABLE FOR WORK TO BE COMPLETED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR (GC) AND WORK TO COMPLETED BY OWNER UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACT (OWNER) U.N.O. ALL SHELVING IN 1/A901 IS RECONFIGURED EXISTING SHELVING SOURCED FROM THIS SPACE. END PANELS AND CANOPY TOPS USED IN NEW SHELVING CONFIGURATION SHALL BE SOURCED FROM EXISTING STOCK, IN ROOM, OR IN OWNERS ATTIC STOCK, U.N.O. INVENTORY FULL EXISTING STOCK OF END PANELS AND CANOPY TOPS AND PRIORITIZE REUSE OF EXISTING CANOPY TOPS AND END PANELS THAT ARE IN THE BEST CONDITION IN HIGH-VISIBILITY AREAS. INSTALL COMPONENTS WITH THE LEAST WEAR, DAMAGE, OR DISCOLORATION IN PUBLIC-FACING LOCATIONS FIRST, TYP. ALL NEW SHELVING COMPONENTS SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH OWNER'S EXISTING SYSTEMS. ALL RECONFIGURED SHELVING SHALL APPEAR LIKE-NEW AFTER REINSTALLATION. REPLACE DAMAGED COMPONENTS AND PROVIDE TOUCH UP AS NEEDED. MATCH EXISTING SYSTEM LIBRARY SHELVING GENERAL NOTES: V.I.F 1' - 2"5' - 1 3/4" - V.I.F.V.I.F 1' - 9 1/2" EP-1A(EXISTING)EP-1C(EXISTING) EXISTING SIGNAGE TO BE CAREFULLY REMOVED V.I.F 1' - 9 1/2" EP-1B(EXISTING)5' - 1 3/4" - V.I.F5' - 1 3/4" - V.I.FV.I.F 1' - 2"3' - 11" - V.I.F.V.I.F 1' - 9 1/2" EP-2A(EXISTING) V.I.F 1' - 9 1/2" EP-2B(EXISTING)3' - 11" - V.I.F3' - 11" - V.I.FEP-2C(EXISTING) NOT USED IN NEW WORK V.I.F 1' - 2"3' - 0"EP-3C(EXISTING) V.I.F 1' - 9 1/2" EP-3A(EXISTING)3' - 0"WOOD CANOPY TOP BEYOND WOOD CANOPY TOP BEYOND 4' - 0"2' - 0"R 1 ' - 0 " NP-1(NEW) MAPLE WOOD VENEER END PANEL - TO MATCH EXISTING MAPLE TONE. ARCHITECT TO SEND A CONTROL SAMPLE NOT USED IN NEW WORK V.I.F 1' - 9 1/2"5' - 1 3/4" - V.I.FV.I.F 1' - 9 1/2"3' - 11" - V.I.FV.I.F 1' - 9 1/2" MATCH EXISTING END PANEL WIDTHS MATCH EXISTING END PANEL WIDTHS MATCH EXISTING END PANEL WIDTHS TO MATCH EXISTING END PANEL HEIGHT3' - 0"BD-1 BD-2 BD-3 WD = MAPLE WOOD VENEER TO MATCH EXISTING WOOD - ARCHITECT TO PROVIDE CONTROL SAMPLE VENDOR. VENDOR TO FURNISH SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO PRODUCTION 8"TO MATCH EXISTING END PANEL HEIGHT MATCH EXISTING END PANEL HEIGHTMETAL WALL STANDARDS TO MATCH EXISTING GRAY SHELVING FACE OUT DISPLAY TO MATCH EXISTING GRAY SHELVING WD WD 4"WDWD WD FACE WD SIDE PANEL BEYOND WD BACK PANEL 2 DISPLAY SHELVES3 DISPLAY SHELVES4 DISPLAY SHELVES4"4"BD-1, BD-2, BD-3 TYP SECTION WD HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FLAT SHELF WD WD WD 2' - 0"2' - 0"2"2' - 10"WD HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FLAT SHELF WD 4" LOCKING CASTERS WD 1' - 0"3' - 0" BD-4ELEVATION BD-4SIDE BBD-4SIDE A WD 3' - 0"SIDE B(HIDDEN) SIDE A ELEVATION (OPP SIDE SIM)Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the Laws of the State of Montana. Architect Seal Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 Dagmara Cygler ARC-LIC-22020 6/24/2026 4:02:42 PMC:\Users\mitch\AppData\Local\Autodesk\Revit\Autodesk Revit2026\CollaborationCache\SE9LP2RL9C65\da5fc686-9fbb-4b88-84c4-252d479585b8\c70f9ff1-8639-4ccd-b4be-7e524297b68e.rvtA901 LIBRARY SHELVINGAND ACCESORIES PLAN Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and TeenCorner Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors Associate Architect 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 515 W ASPEN ST. SUITE 200A | 406.451.7310 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"A901 1 LIBRARY SHELVING PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0"A901 2LIBRARY SHELVING PLAN - EXISTING 3/4" = 1'-0"A901 3SHELVING END PANEL TYPES 1/2" = 1'-0"A901 5 BOOK DISPLAY TYPES - MOBILE 3/4" = 1'-0"A901 4BOOK DISPLAY TYPES - END CAPS W/D UP DN DWJ J T T D D H C C C C C C D D D D 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 A A B B C C D D E E F F NON-FICTION5 HIGH CHAPTER BOOKS 5 HIGHFICTION 5 HIGHFICTION 5 HIGHGRAPHIC / COMICS (3 HIGH) COMIC DISPLAY READING ZONE THEMATICSEASONAL (2 HIGH)SEASONAL (2 HIGH) BOARD BOOKS4 HIGH PICTURE BOOKS 2 HIGH DVDS 5 HIGHPLAY AWAYS 5 HIGH VOXWORLD LANGUAGEBIOMAGAZINESPARENTNEW BOOKS (2 HIGH) BULLETIN BOARD ABOVE NEW BOOKS (2 HIGH)THEMATIC 5 HIGH3' - 6 1/2"3' - 5 1/2"LEARNING TO READGRAPHIC / COMICS (5 HIGH)FOOD PANTRY EXISTING BOOK DISPLAYS Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the Laws of the State of Montana. Architect Seal Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 Dagmara Cygler ARC-LIC-22020 6/24/2026 4:02:47 PMC:\Users\mitch\AppData\Local\Autodesk\Revit\Autodesk Revit2026\CollaborationCache\SE9LP2RL9C65\da5fc686-9fbb-4b88-84c4-252d479585b8\c70f9ff1-8639-4ccd-b4be-7e524297b68e.rvtA902 COLLECTION PLAN - REFERENCE ONLY Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and TeenCorner Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors Associate Architect 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 515 W ASPEN ST. SUITE 200A | 406.451.7310 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"A902 2CHILDRENS' ROOM COLLECTION PLAN - REFERENCE ONLY 1 JJ T J J UP DN W/D DWCC 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 AA BB CC DD EE FF E6E6 E7 E12 E13 E5 E9 E10 E11 E11 COORDINATE SCOPE OF SALVAGED / EXISTING TO REMAIN / NEW CASEWORK IN WORKROOM WITH AD100's AND A800's E15 E17 E18 E21 E20 E19 E23 COMP COMPCOMP COMP E24 E24 E25 E26 2 3 4 5 6 7 A A B B C C D D E E F F E6E6 E9 E12 E7 E13 E14 E10 E9 E15 CH-1 CH-1 CH-4CH-4CH-3 CH-4 CH-4 CH-4 CH-3 CH-7 CH-8 CH-8 CH-7 CH-4 CH-3 CH-2 CH-10A CH-10B CH-11 CH-10B CH-10A CH-12 CH-12CH-13BCH-13A CH-13B CH-13A A-1 T-2 CH-14 CH-15CH-15CH-15CH-15 T-4 CH-17 CH-17 T-3 CH-12 CH-12 CH-20 CH-19 CH-18 CH-5 CH-5CH-6A CH-6B CH-6C CH-5 CH-9 CH-9 T-1 CH-16 CH-16 CH-12 CH-12 PRINT REF-1 E11E11E17 E18 E5 E19 E20E21E23 COMP COMP COMP COMP E24 E24 T-3 CH-21 CH-21 E25E26 DESK-1 DESK-1 DESK-1 DESK-1 DESK-1 DESK-1 A-1A-1 A-1 A-2 ?T-5T-5 COMP COMP floor space 10 10 11 11 DD EE 9 9 CH-21CH-21(E)T-1B (E)CH-21 (E)PT-1B(E)PT-1A (E)CH-21 (E)CH-2B (E)CH-2B (E)PT-1B (E)PT-1A (E)T-8 (E)CH-8 (E)CH-8 (E)CH-8(E)CH-20(E)T-4 (E)CH-3B (E)CH-20 CH-22 T-5(E)CH-8 (E)CH-8 (E)CH-8 10 10 11 11 DD EE 9 9 E101C (E)CH-2B (E)CH-2B (E)CH-3B (E)CH-20 (E)T-4 (E)CH-20 (E)CH-11 (E)CH-11 (E)T-8 (E)CH-8 (E)CH-8 (E)CH-8 (E)PT-1A (E)PT-1B (E)CH-21 (E)T-1B (E)CH-21 (E)PT-1B (E)PT-1A (E)CH-8 (E)CH-8 (E)CH-8 FURNITURE PLAN LEGEND EXISTING FURNITURE N.I.C 1/8" = 1'-0"A911 2 CHILDREN'S ROOM - FURNITURE PLAN - REFERENCE ONLY Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION I hereby certify that this plan, specification or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the Laws of the State of Montana. Architect Seal Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 Dagmara Cygler ARC-LIC-22020 6/24/2026 4:02:59 PMC:\Users\mitch\AppData\Local\Autodesk\Revit\Autodesk Revit2026\CollaborationCache\SE9LP2RL9C65\da5fc686-9fbb-4b88-84c4-252d479585b8\c70f9ff1-8639-4ccd-b4be-7e524297b68e.rvtA911 FURNITURE PLANS - REFERENCE ONLY Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and TeenCorner Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors Associate Architect 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 515 W ASPEN ST. SUITE 200A | 406.451.7310 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"A911 1CHILDREN'S ROOM - FURNITURE SALVAGE PLAN - REFERENCE ONLY 1/8" = 1'-0"A911 3TEEN CORNER - FURNITURE PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0"A911 4TEEN CORNER - FURNITURE SALVAGE PLAN XX XJTV J PS-XXD-1 X PS FS TS H SD D SD SS CO D F FF SS X OS OS P ELECTRICAL ABBREVIATIONS LEGEND A, AMP AMPERES AC ALTERNATING CURRENT A/C AIR CONDITIONING AF AMP FUSE AFC AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AFCI ARC FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT AL ALUMINUM AS AMP SWITCH ATS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH BAS BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM BKR BREAKER BOF BOTTOM OF FIXTURE C RACEWAY/CONDUIT CB CIRCUIT BREAKER CCT COLOR RENDERING TEMPERATURE CCTV CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION CKT CIRCUIT CLG CEILING C.O.RACEWAY/CONDUIT ONLY, WITH PULL STRING COD CENTER OF DEVICE CNTRL CONTROL CU COPPER (D)EXISTING TO BE DEMOLISHED DISC DISCONNECT DIST DISTRIBUTION DPDT DOUBLE POLE DOUBLE THROW DWG DRAWING EA EACH EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EF EXHAUST FAN ELEC ELECTRIC EMT ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING EQUIP EQUIPMENT EX, EXIST EXISTING FA FIRE ALARM FAA FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR FACP FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL FD FUSED DISCONNECT FLR FLOOR FO FIBER OPTIC FSD FIRE SMOKE DAMPER RELAY, CONTROLLED BY ASSOCIATED SMOKE DETECTOR AND CIRCUITED BACK TO FACP FVNR FULL VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING FVR FULL VOLTAGE REVERSING GEC GROUNDED ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR GFCI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER GFI GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER GFP GROUND FAULT PROTECTION GND GROUND GRC GALVANIZED RIGID CONDUIT HID HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE HOA HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC HP HORSEPOWER HPS HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM HTR HEATER HVAC HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING HZ HERTZ J-BOX JUNCTION BOX KVA KILOVOLT-AMPERES KW KILOWATTS LCP LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL LPW LUMENS PER WATT LTG LIGHTING LM LUMENS LV LOW VOLTAGE MAG MAGNETIC STARTER MAN MANUAL MAX MAXIMUM MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR MCA MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPACITY MCC MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MDP MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL MECH MECHANICAL MEP MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING MH METAL HALIDE MIN MINIMUM MSS MOTOR STARTER SWITCH WITH THERMAL OVERLOADS N NEUTRAL NC NORMALLY CLOSED NEC NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE NEMA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NFD NON-FUSED DISCONNECT NIC NOT IN CONTRACT NO NORMALLY OPEN #NUMBER OAE OR APPROVED EQUAL OC ON CENTER OCPD OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE OH OVERHEAD P POLE PB PUSHBUTTON PC PLUMBING CONTRACTOR PH PHASE PNL PANEL PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT PWR POWER (R)EXISTING TO RELOCATE RCPT RECEPTACLE RECEPT RECEPTACLE RGS RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL RM ROOM RVNR REDUCED VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING RVR REDUCED VOLTAGE REVERSING SP SINGLE POLE TOGGLE SWITCH SPD SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (TVSS) SPEC SPECIFICATION SPST SINGLE POLE SINGLE THROW SSPB START-STOP PUSHBUTTON SW SWITCH SWBD SWITCHBOARD SWGR SWITCHGEAR TB TELEPHONE BOARD TC TIME CLOCK TD TIME DELAY TEL TELEPHONE TR TAMPER RESISTANT TSP TWISTED SHIELDED PAIR TTB TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARD TYP TYPICAL UG UNDERGROUND UH UNIT HEATER UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE V VOLT VA VOLT-AMPERES VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE W WATTS WAO WORK AREA OUTLET WP WEATHERPROOF W/O WITHOUT XFMR TRANSFORMER Y WYE-CONNECTED Δ DELTA-CONNECTED ø PHASE ELECTRICAL LIGHTING FIXTURE LEGEND RECESSED LED FIXTURE - "a" & "b" DESIGNATES SWITCH EXIT SIGN - WALL MOUNT, CEILING MOUNT. ARROW INDICATES DIRECTION OF TRAVEL, SHADING INDICATES LIGHTED FACE. RECESSED EMERGENCY LED FIXTURE - "a" & "b" DESIGNATES SWITCH SURFACE LED FIXTURE - "a" & "b" DESIGNATES SWITCH SURFACE EMERGENCY LED FIXTURE - "a" & "b" DESIGNATES SWITCH SURFACE WALL MOUNT LED FIXTURE LED STRIP OR INDUSTRIAL, SURFACE OR CHAIN HUNG EMERGENCY LED STRIP OR INDUSTRIAL, SURFACE OR CHAIN HUNG POLE MOUNTED FIXTURE LIGHTED BOLLARD PENDANT FIXTURE; HIGH BAY, LOW BAY, DECORATIVE DUAL HEAD EMERGENCY EGRESS BATTERY PACK, WALL MOUNT OR CEILING MOUNT WALL MOUNTED SCONCE SURFACE DOWNLIGHT SURFACE EMERGENCY DOWNLIGHT RECESSED CAN DOWNLIGHT RECESSED CAN EMERGENCY DOWNLIGHT RECESSED CAN WALL WASHER TRACK LIGHTING. SEE FIXTURE SCHEDULE AND LIGHTING PLANS. COMBINATION EXIT SIGN/ EGRESS LIGHTING UNIT - WALL MOUNT, CEILING MOUNT. ARROW INDICATES DIRECTION OF TRAVEL, SHADING INDICATES LIGHTED FACE. ELECTRICAL POWER LEGEND PANEL AND CIRCUIT DESIGNATION ARE SHOWN NEXT TO EACH DEVICE (PANEL NAME - CIRCUIT NUMBER). BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRE SIZE IS #12, UNO. A SINGLE INSULATED GREEN GROUND CONDUCTOR SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH EACH HOME RUN. PROVIDE A SEPARATE NEUTRAL FOR EACH CIRCUIT. HOME RUNS SHALL HAVE NO MORE THAN THREE CIRCUITS. LINE VOLTAGE AND LOW VOLTAGE WIRING IS NOT SHOWN ON PLANS. FOR EQUIPMENT CIRCUITING, SEE MEP COORDINATION SCHEDULE. "X" INDICATES TYPE: GFI - GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER WP - WEATHERPROOF WHILE-IN-USE COVER U - PROVIDE WITH (2) USB PORTS TR - TAMPER RESISTANT PANELBOARD OR LOAD CENTER JUNCTION BOX FLATSCREEN TV BOX SIMPLEX RECEPTACLE - CEILING MOUNT, WALL MOUNT (+18", UNO) DUPLEX RECEPTACLE - CEILING MOUNT, WALL MOUNT (+18", UNO) QUADRUPLEX RECEPTACLE - CEILING MOUNT, WALL MOUNT (+18", UNO) FLOOR BOX WITH POWER & COMM PORTS, OR WITHOUT COMM AS SHOWN. INCLUDE ALL HARDWARE/ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. PROVIDE WITH COVER (COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECT FOR FLOORING TYPE AND FINISH). SPECIAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLE (MOUNT AT +18", UNO) "X" INDICATES TYPE: A - NEMA 5-20R, #12 CU; B - NEMA 5-30R, #10 CU; C - NEMA 5-50R, #8 CU; D - NEMA 6-20R, #12 CU; E - NEMA 6-30R, #10 CU; F - NEMA 6-50R, #8 CU; G - NEMA 14-20R, #12 CU; H - NEMA 14-30R, #10 CU; I - NEMA 14-50R, #8 CU* * +4" AFF FOR RANGE DROP-DOWN RECEPTACLE SURFACE MOUNTED PLUGSTRIP "X" INDICATES TYPE: A - PLUGSTRIP, POWER ONLY, OUTLET EVERY 3' OC B - WIREMOLD SERIES 4000 POWER AND DATA C - WIREMOLD SERIES 5000 POWER AND DATA SURFACE MOUNTED RACEWAY RACEWAY CONCEALED IN WALL, FLOOR, OR CEILING IN FINISHED SPACES, EXPOSED IN UNFINISHED SPACES RACEWAY BELOW FLOOR OR BELOW GRADE RACEWAY STUB-OUT WITH CAPPED END RACEWAY STUB-OUT WITH BRUSHED END GROUNDING BUS PUSHBUTTON (MOUNT AT +48", UNO) "X" INDICATES TYPE: EPO - EMERGENCY POWER OFF ADA - HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBLE DOOR (DEVICE BY OTHERS) ODO - OVERHEAD DOOR OPERATOR (DEVICE BY OTHERS) "X" INDICATES TYPE: C - FIRE RATED POKE-THROUGH FLOOR BOX, 3" DIA. CORE (HUBBELL PT7FSD SERIES). PROVIDE WITH DUPLEX RECEPTACLE AND FURNISH (1) 3/4" POWER CONDUIT FROM BOX. D - FIRE RATED POKE-THROUGH FLOOR BOX, 8" DIA. CORE (HUBBELL S1R8PTFIT SERIES WITH S1R8JNC6 FITTING BOX). PROVIDE WITH (2) DUPLEX RECEPTACLES AND COMM PORTS AS SPECIFIED ON T-SERIES DRAWINGS. FURNISH (1) 3/4" POWER CONDUIT FROM BOX AND (2) 1-1/4" COMM CONDUITS FROM BOX OVER TO AND UP WALL INTO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE, OR ROUTED AS NOTED ON T- SERIES DRAWINGS. ABOVE COUNTER RECEPTACLE - MOUNT AT +4" ABOVE BACKSPLASH ELECTRICAL LOW VOLTAGE LEGEND FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SPRINKLER PRESSURE SWITCH SPRINKLER FLOW SWITCH SPRINKLER TAMPER SWITCH HEAT DETECTOR SMOKE DETECTOR - PHOTO-ELECTRIC DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR SINGLE-STATION SMOKE DETECTOR. PROVIDE 120V AND MONITOR AT FACP VIA RELAY. CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR DOOR HOLDER MANUAL STATION (MOUNT AT +48", UNO) STROBE - WALL MOUNT (+90"), CEILING MOUNT SPEAKER STROBE - WALL MOUNT (+90"), CEILING MOUNT NOTE: FIRE ALARM SCOPE IS LIMITED TO RELOCATION OF (3) EXISTING NOTIFICATION DEVICES AS SHOWN ON PLANS. EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IS BY SIMPLEX GRINNELL ELECTRICAL PROJECT GENERAL NOTES A. PRIOR TO BID CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE. NOT ALL WORK REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THE PROJECT IS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BECOME THOROUGHLY FAMILIAR WITH ALL THE WORK REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THE PROJECT IN ADDITION TO THE LOCAL CONDITIONS AND INCLUDE SAID WORK IN THE BID. B. GENERAL WORK PRACTICES FOR ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NECA 1, "STANDARD PRACTICES FOR GOOD WORKMANSHIP IN ELECTRICAL CONTRACTING." THIS PUBLICATION IS AVAILABLE FROM NECA BY TELEPHONE AT 301-657-3110 OR ON-LINE AT WWW.NECANET.ORG. C. IT IS THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL FOR PLENUM SPACES AND PROVIDE PLENUM RATED CABLES WHERE REQUIRED FOR LIGHTING CONTROL, DATA AND ALL OTHER L.V. SYSTEMS NOT INSTALLED IN CONDUIT. VERIFY CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS ON DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. D. FIRE-RESISTANCE: PROVIDE A MINIMUM HORIZONTAL DISTANCE OF 24" BETWEEN OUTLET BOXES LOCATED ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF FIRE- RESISTANCE RATED WALLS. WHERE THIS IS NOT POSSIBLE INSTALL UL LISTED PUTTY PADS ON ALL OUTLET BOXES NOT MEETING THE 24" SEPARATION. PROVIDE A UL LISTED THROUGH -PENETRATION FIRESTOP FOR PENETRATIONS OF FIRE-RESISTANCE RATED ASSEMBLIES. E. CONDUCTORS ARE SIZED PER THE 75 DEGREE C RATING COLUMN OF NEC TABLE 310.16. IF THE TERMINAL USED FOR A TERMINATION OF A PARTICULAR CONDUCTOR IS NOT MARKED, OR THE TERMINAL IS MARKED FOR 60 DEGREE C CONDUCTORS, IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO EITHER ADJUST THE AMPACITY OF THE CONDUCTOR TO MATCH THE 60 DEGREE COLUMN OF TABLE 310.16, OR REPLACE THE TERMINAL WITH ONE RATED FOR AT LEAST 75 DEGREES C. F. BASED ON ACTUAL HOMERUN LENGTHS REQUIRED IN THE FIELD, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CALCULATE AND INCREASE THE WIRE SIZES AS REQUIRED TO LIMIT BRANCH CIRCUIT VOLTAGE DROP TO 3%. FOR 20A BRANCH CIRCUITS THE MINIMUM CONDUCTOR SIZES SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: #10 AWG CU FOR RUNS BETWEEN 100 AND 200 LINEAR FEET, #8 AWG CU FOR RUNS BETWEEN 200 AND 325 LINEAR FEET, AND AS CALCULATED BY THE CONTRACTOR FOR CIRCUITS EXTENDING BEYOND 325 LINEAR FEET. IN ALL CASES WHERE WIRE SIZES INCREASE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE LARGER CONDUITS AS REQUIRED. G. PROVIDE A DEDICATED NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR FOR EACH 120V BRANCH CIRCUIT. ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS GENERAL NOTES A. THE ABBREVIATIONS ON THIS SHEET COMPRISE A STANDARD LIST; NOT ALL ABBREVIATIONS APPEAR ON THIS PROJECT. B. THE SYMBOLS ON THIS SHEET COMPRISE A STANDARD LIST; NOT ALL SYMBOLS APPEAR ON THIS PROJECT. C. ALL MOUNTING HEIGHTS ARE TO CENTER OF DEVICE ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS, MAKING ADJUSTMENTS AS REQUIRED TO AVOID INTERFERENCE WITH EQUIPMENT SUCH AS BASEBOARD FIN-TUBE, CABINET UNIT HEATERS, ETC. ARCHITECT/ENGINEER SHALL BE NOTIFIED OF ALL SUCH HEIGHT ADJUSTMENTS. MOUNTING HEIGHTS INDICATED ON ARCHITECTURAL WALL ELEVATIONS OR AS NOTED SPECIFICALLY ON THE DRAWINGS OR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER MOUNTING HEIGHTS LISTED. ELECTRICAL PROJECT DEMO NOTES A. DURING DEMOLITION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTE ALL EXISTING RACEWAY (BOTH SURFACE AND CONCEALED) TO THE EXTENT POSSIBLE. THESE RACEWAYS SHALL BE REUSED TO THE GREATEST EXTENT POSSIBLE TO INSURE A CLEAN FINISHED PRODUCT. WHERE PRACTICAL, AND ALLOWED PER CODE, FISHING THROUGH WALLS WITH MC CABLE IS PREFERRED TO SURFACE-MOUNTED CONDUIT. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE, TRANSPORT, AND LEGALLY DISPOSE OF LAMPS AND BALLASTS OFF-SITE. IT IS ASSUMED THAT THE BALLASTS DO NOT CONTAIN PCBs. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE OWNER IMMEDIATELY IF IT IS SUSPECTED THAT BALLASTS CONTAIN PCBs. C. ALL POWER INTERRUPTIONS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH OWNER. ANY DISRUPTION OF WORKERS IN THE SPACE SHALL BE KEPT TO A MINIMUM AND BE COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER PRIOR TO WORK COMMENCING IN THAT SPACE. D. CONTRACTOR SHALL EXTEND UNSWITCHED HOT LEG FROM EXISTING EMERGENCY FIXTURE LOCATION TO NEW EMERGENCY FIXTURES, AS NEEDED. SEE DEMO PLANS FOR AN APPROXIMATION OF EXISTING EMERGENCY FIXTURE LOCATIONS. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION PRIOR TO BID. E. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REPAIR OF ANY EXISTING CONDUIT OR FEEDER CIRCUITS THAT ARE INTENDED TO REMAIN THAT ARE SAW-CUT, OR OTHERWISE DAMAGED, AS PART OF THE DEMOLITION PROCESS. PROVISION FOR THIS WORK SHALL INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO: ALL NECESSARY CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS, MOUNTING ACCESSORIES AND LABOR, TO RESTORE THE SYSTEM TO ITS INTENDED FUNCTION. F. ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS SHOWING EXISTING BUILDING CONDITIONS, SUCH AS DEMOLITION DRAWINGS, EXISTING PANEL SCHEDULES, ETC ARE BASED ON RECORD DRAWINGS AND SITE VISITS. IF ACTUAL EXISTING CONDITIONS DIFFER FROM THOSE SHOWN ON DRAWINGS, PLEASE NOTIFY ENGINEER. ELECTRICAL LIGHTING CONTROL LEGEND OCCUPANCY SENSOR - DUAL TECHNOLOGY CEILING MOUNT: WATTSTOPPER DT-300 WALL MOUNT: WATTSTOPPER DT-200 WALL MOUNTED SHALL BE AT +96", UNO PROVIDE WITH BZ-50 POWER PACKS AS NEEDED. TOGGLE SWITCH (MOUNT AT +48", UNO) "X" INDICATES TYPE: BLANK - SINGLE POLE 3 - INDICATES THREE-WAY 4 - INDICATES FOUR-WAY D - INDICATES DIMMER SWITCH WATTSTOPPER RADIANT RH4FBL3PTC K - INDICATES KEYED SWITCH T - INDICATES TIMER P - INDICATES PILOT LIGHT OS - INDICATES WALL SWITCH OCC SENSOR WATTSTOPPER DSW-301 OSD - INDICATES WALL SWITCH OCC SENSOR WITH 0-10V DIMMING - WATTSTOPPER DW-311 PHOTOCELL - CEILING MOUNT, WATTSTOPPER LS-301 STANDARD LIGHTING CONTROLS: SWITCHES AND LINE VOLTAGE DIMMERS No. 60006 PE RYAN P. MARONEY M O NTANA LICENS E DPRO F ESSIONA L E N G IN EERDrawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 Ryan P. Maroney 60006 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.04.24 Design Pricing 6/22/2026 11:27:53 AM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ MEP_R26.rvtE001 ELECTRICAL LEGENDS AND ABBREVIATIONS Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 Bidding and PermitProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT ELECTRICAL SHEET INDEX NUMBER SHEET NAME E001 ELECTRICAL LEGENDS AND ABBREVIATIONS E002 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS ED101 LEVEL ONE POWER AND SIGNAL DEMOLITION PLAN ED201 LEVEL ONE LIGHTING DEMOLITION PLAN E101 LEVEL ONE POWER AND SIGNAL PLAN E201 LEVEL ONE LIGHTING PLAN CONDUIT DROP CEILING (ACT OR GYP) BUILDING STRUCTURE UNISTRUT TWIST-LOCK PLUGFLUSH-MOUNT J-BOX W/ TWIST-LOCK RECEPTACLE, NEMA L5-20R 3/C-#12 TYPE SO CORD RECEPTACLE AS DEFINED ON PLANS NEUTRAL SINGLE-RELAY POWER PACK CONTROL OUTPUT COMMON +24VDC FOR AREAS WITH MULTIPLE OCCUPANCY SENSORS, CONNECT ALL SENSORS IN PARALLEL TO SINGLE POWER PACK. 277VAC LOCAL SWITCH(ES)TRAVELERS 3-WAY SWITCHES INPUT (UN-SWITCHED) LOW VOLTAGE SENSOR LOW VOLTAGE SENSOR LIGHTING LOAD FOR AREAS WITH DIMMING, REPLACE WITH 0-10V DIMMING SWITCH(ES) AS APPLICABLE. No. 60006 PE RYAN P. MARONEY M O NTANA LICENS E DPRO F ESSIONA L E N G IN EERDrawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 Ryan P. Maroney 60006 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.04.24 Design Pricing 6/22/2026 11:27:53 AM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ MEP_R26.rvtE002 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 Bidding and PermitProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT Notes: Receptacle 23992 VA 70.84% 16996 VA Total Est. Demand:116 A Power 16500 VA 100.00% 16500 VA Total Conn.:135 A Lighting 1500 VA 125.00% 1875 VA Total Est. Demand:41871 VA Heating 3500 VA 100.00% 3500 VA Total Conn. Load:48492 VA HVAC 3000 VA 100.00% 3000 VA Load Classification Connected Load Demand Factor Estimated Demand Panel Totals <1> UTILIZE EXISTING SPARE CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR NEW LOAD <2> PROVIDE NEW CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR NEW LOAD <3> PROVIDE NEW GFCI CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR NEW LOAD Legend: Total Amps:141 A 125 A 143 A Total Load:16610 VA 14946 VA 16936 VA 53 2496 0 1 20 A -- EXISTING SPARE 54 51 <2> RCPT - DRYER Receptacle 30 A 2 2496 720 1 20 A Receptacle <1> RCPT - COLLECTION FLR 52 49 <3> RCPT - DISHWASHER Receptacle 20 A 1 180 180 1 20 A Receptacle <1> RCPT - STAFF WORK PRINTER 50 47 <1> RCPT - STAFF WORK CLG Receptacle 20 A 1 360 1080 1 20 A Receptacle <1> RCPT - STAFF WORK 48 45 EXISTING LOAD Receptacle 20 A 1 360 180 1 20 A Receptacle <3> RCPT - WASHING MACHINE 46 43 <1> EF-8 Power 20 A 1 500 360 1 20 A Receptacle <3> RCPT - DRINKING FOUNTAIN 44 41 EXISTING LOAD Receptacle 20 A 1 360 720 1 20 A Receptacle <1> RCPT - WORKSTATION FLR 42 39 EXISTING LOAD Receptacle 20 A 1 360 720 1 20 A Receptacle <1> RCPT - KIOSK FLR 40 37 EXISTING LOAD Receptacle 20 A 1 360 900 1 20 A Receptacle <1> RCPT - BOOKSHELF FLR 38 35 EXISTING LOAD Receptacle 20 A 1 360 720 1 20 A Receptacle <1> RCPT - ACTIVE PLAY FLR 36 33 <1> RCPT - STEAM ZONE CLG Receptacle 20 A 1 180 500 1 20 A Lighting EXISTING LOAD 34 31 4250 1000 1 20 A Lighting EXISTING LOAD 32 29 EXISTING LOAD Power 50 A 2 4250 1750 30 27 EXISTING LOAD Power 20 A 1 500 1750 2 25 A Heating EXISTING LOAD 28 25 EXISTING LOAD Receptacle 20 A 1 1000 1500 26 23 EXISTING LOAD Receptacle 20 A 1 1000 1500 2 20 A HVAC EXISTING LOAD 24 21 3500 900 1 20 A Receptacle EXISTING LOAD 22 19 EXISTING LOAD Power 40 A 2 3500 360 1 20 A Receptacle EXISTING LOAD 20 17 EXISTING LOAD Receptacle 20 A 1 540 180 1 20 A Receptacle EXISTING LOAD 18 15 EXISTING LOAD Receptacle 20 A 1 800 180 1 20 A Receptacle EXISTING LOAD 16 13 EXISTING LOAD Receptacle 20 A 1 180 360 1 20 A Receptacle EXISTING LOAD 14 11 EXISTING LOAD Receptacle 20 A 1 180 180 1 20 A Receptacle EXISTING LOAD 12 9 EXISTING LOAD Receptacle 20 A 1 540 180 1 20 A Receptacle EXISTING LOAD 10 7 EXISTING LOAD Receptacle 20 A 1 360 540 1 20 A Receptacle EXISTING LOAD 8 5 EXISTING LOAD Receptacle 20 A 1 900 360 1 20 A Receptacle EXISTING LOAD 6 3 EXISTING LOAD Receptacle 20 A 1 720 360 1 20 A Receptacle EXISTING LOAD 4 1 EXISTING LOAD Receptacle 20 A 1 720 360 1 20 A Receptacle EXISTING LOAD 2 CKT Circuit Description Load Classification Trip Poles A B C Poles Trip Load Classification Circuit Description CKT THIS SQUARE D NQ PANELBOARD IS EXISTING TO REMAIN. Notes: Enclosure:Type 1 Mounting:Surface Wires:4 Mains Rating:200 A Supply From: Phases:3 Mains Type:MLO Location: Volts:120/208 Wye A.I.C. Rating:9215 Branch Panel: LG 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. PROVIDE 0-10V DIMMING, DOWN TO 10% LUMEN OUTPUT, MINIMUM. VERIFY FINISH WITH ARCHITECT. ANY ALTERNATE FIXTURE REQUIRES PRIOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO BID. FOLLOW ALL PROJECT SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS. VERIFY STEM LENGHTS WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS AND MOUNTING HEIGHTS WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. A. B. ALL LUMINAIRES SHALL BE TESTED AND LISTED BY A NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED TESTING LABORATORY (NRTL) SUCH AS UL OR ETL. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL CEILING TYPES AND PROVIDE ALL MOUNTING, FIRE-RATED, AND IC-RATED ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED. FOR FIRE-RATED CEILING ASSEMBLIES AND FOR CEILINGS WITH INSULATION, VERIFY ALL RECESSED LUMINAIRE HOUSINGS ARE RATED APPROPRIATELY OR PROVIDE DROP-OVER ENCLOSURES OR TENTS FOR LUMINAIRES. VERIFY THAT DROP-OVER ENCLOSURES OR TENTS ALLOW FOR AIR SPACE AROUND LUMINAIRE PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. NOTES: GENERAL NOTES: LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE TYPE LAMPS LOAD (WATTS) OUTPUT (LM, NOMINAL) CCT (KELVIN)DESCRIPTION MFR CATALOG NO. OR SERIES MOUNTING VOLTAGE NOTES D1 LED 20 W 2,000 LM 3500K 4" RECESSED DOWNLIGHT HE WILLIAMS 4DR-TL-L20/835-DIM-UNV-R-W-OF-CS-MWT-N-F1 RECESSED 277 V 1,2,3 D2 LED 20 W 2,000 LM 3500K 4" RECESSED ADJUSTABLE DOWNLIGHT HE WILLIAMS 4AR-L20/835-DIM-UNV-O-M-OF-CS-MWT-R RECESSED 277 V 1,2,3 G1 LED 12 W 800 LM 3500K SUSPENDED GLOBE PENDANT LUMENWERX GLBP-6IN-IRO-SW-80CRI-800LM-35K-UNV-D1-1C-FTMW-FLR-FTMW- WHS##IN SUSPENDED 277 V 1,2,3,4 U1 LED 16 W 1,800 LM 3500K UNDERCABINET LIGHT. PROVIDE INTEGRAL ON/OFF ROCKER SWITCH. HE WILLIAMS 1SF-3-L18/835-AF12125-WRS/120-DRV-UNV SURFACE 120 V 3 V1 LED 10 W 500 LM 3500K WALL MOUNT GLOBE SCONCE LUMENWERX GLBW-4IN-IRO-SW-80CRI-525LM-35K-UNV-D1-1C-FTMB-FLR-FTMW WALL 277 V 1,2,3,5 1. INTEGRAL DISCONNECT AND OVERLOADS A. B. CONTROL WIRING SHALL BE CONCEALED WITHIN WALL CONSTRUCTION, ABOVE CEILING, OR RUN IN CONDUIT. EXPOSED CONTROL WIRING IS UNACCEPTABLE. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED, ALL FEEDERS SHALL INCLUDE A FULL SIZE NEUTRAL. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY WITH THE MANUFACTURER OF THE ACTUAL EQUIPMENT BEING SUPPLIED WETHER A NEUTRAL IS REQUIRED PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. NOTES:GENERAL NOTES: BAS CO CONT EF HCP INT L MS OS PS T TC UC VE N/A BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR CONTINUOUS OPERATION INTERLOCK WITH EXHAUST FAN HOOD CONTROL PANEL INTEGRAL LIGHT SWITCH MANUAL SWITCH OCCUPANCY SENSOR PRESSURE SWITCH THERMOSTAT TIME CLOCK UNIT CONTROLLER VEHICLE EXHAUST DETECTION SYSTEM NOT APPLICABLE CB CSFD FD FST FW MOCP MSS NFD RCPT RVSS VFD N/A PANELBOARD CIRCUIT BREAKER WITHIN SIGHT OF EQUIPMENT COMBINATION STARTER/DISCONNECT - HOA FUSED DISCONNECT FUSTAT FACTORY-WIRED SINGLE POINT CONNECTION MOTOR OVER-CURRENT PROTECTION MANUAL STARTER SWITCH WITH THERMAL OVERLOADS (1-, 2- OR 3-POLE AS REQUIRED) NON-FUSED DISCONNECT 20A DUPLEX RECEPTACLE (GFCI PROTECTED AS REQUIRED), CORD AND PLUG REDUCED VOLTAGE SOLID-STATE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE - HOA NOT APPLICABLE 22/22 22/26 23/23 23/26 26/26 FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY DIV. 22, WIRED BY DIV. 22 FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY DIV. 22, WIRED BY DIV. 26 FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY DIV. 23, WIRED BY DIV. 23 FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY DIV. 23, WIRED BY DIV. 26 FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY DIV. 26, WIRED BY DIV. 26 CONTROL TYPE:DISCONNECT/STARTER TYPE:DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES: EF-8 EXHAUST FAN 100 W 120 - 1 BAS 23 / 23 1 FW 23/26 - - - 1 #12 3/4" MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LOAD VOLT-PHASE TYPE DIV TYPE DIV SIZE (NEMA) SWITCH (AMPS) FUSE (AMPS) ENCLOSURE (NEMA) COPPER WIRE (AWG) CONDUIT (INCHES) MARK DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL DATA CONTROL NOTES DISCONNECT / STARTER DISCONNECT FEEDER MEP COORDINATION SCHEDULE NOT TO SCALEE002 1 DROP RECEPTACLE DETAIL NOT TO SCALEE002 2 LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM EXISTING REF-2M M S S S FS SFFD C SM ADAADAD C M D D E D J TVTV J F SD F SADAADAADAM ADA J J E M S S SS S M M M J J J S S T TV SJ J S S S FF F S F1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7.9 8 9 K J I.5 I H G.9 G F E D C B A (E)(EX)LC (EX)LB (D) (D)EXISTING WIREMOLD ALONG WALL (D) (D)(D)(D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D)(D) (D) (D) (D)(D) (D) (D) COLLECTION 116B ACTIVE PLAY 116A NOOK 116D STORAGE / IT 120 FAMILYRESTROOM115FAMILYRESTROOM114A(D) (D)(D) (R) (R) STEAM ZONE 116C THEME ROOM 113 WELLNESS ROOM 114 (R)(EX)LG3 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 (D) GENERAL ELECTRICAL DEMO NOTES A. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REPAIR OF ANY EXISTING CONDUIT OR FEEDER CIRCUITS THAT ARE INTENDED TO REMAIN, THAT ARE SAW-CUT, OR OTHERWISE DAMAGED, AS PART OF THE DEMOLITION PROCESS. PROVISION FOR THIS WORK SHALL INCLUDE, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO: ALL NECESSARY CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS, MOUNTING ACCESSORIES AND LABOR, TO RESTORE SYSTEM TO INTENDED FUNCTION. B. ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS SHOWING EXISTING BUILDING CONDITIONS, SUCH AS DEMOLITION DRAWINGS, EXISTING PANEL SCHEDULES, ETC. ARE BASED ON RECORD DRAWINGS AND SITE VISITS. IF ACTUAL EXISTING CONDITIONS DIFFER FROM THOSE SHOWN ON DRAWINGS, PLEASE NOTIFY ENGINEER. C. ELECTRICAL DEVICES SHOWN IN GREY ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN. ELECTRICAL DEVICES SHOWN IN BLACK/DASHED WITH A '(D)' ARE TO BE DEMOLISHED AND WITH A '(R)' ARE TO BE RELOCATED, UNO. FOR DEVICES NOTED TO BE DEMOLISHED, ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE IN ENTIRETY, INCLUDING ASSOCIATED BRANCH CIRCUIT BACK TO SOURCE OR NEAREST UPSTREAM LIVE DEVICE. D. PATCH/REPAIR ALL HOLES IN FLOOR, WALLS, AND DECK RESULTING FROM DEMOLITION WORK AS REQUIRED. No. 60006 PE RYAN P. MARONEY M O NTANA LICENS E DPRO F ESSIONA L E N G IN EERDrawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 Ryan P. Maroney 60006 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.04.24 Design Pricing 6/22/2026 11:27:54 AM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ MEP_R26.rvtED101 LEVEL ONE POWER AND SIGNAL DEMOLITION PLAN Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 Bidding and PermitProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"ED101 1 LEVEL ONE POWER AND SIGNAL DEMOLITION PLAN 1. FILL AND PATCH RESULTING HOLE IN FLOOR FROM DEMOLISHED FLOOR BOX. 2. SALVAGE EXISTING FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION DEVICE FOR RE-USE AND RE- LOCATION. 3. RETAIN EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUIT SERVING DEMOLISHED DEVICE FOR RE- USE TO SERVE NEW POWER TO NEW DEVICE(S) IN SAME AREA. SEE SHEET E101 FOR DETAILS. KEY NOTES:# GENERAL ELECTRICAL DEMO NOTES A. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REPAIR OF ANY EXISTING CONDUIT OR FEEDER CIRCUITS THAT ARE INTENDED TO REMAIN, THAT ARE SAW-CUT, OR OTHERWISE DAMAGED, AS PART OF THE DEMOLITION PROCESS. PROVISION FOR THIS WORK SHALL INCLUDE, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO: ALL NECESSARY CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS, MOUNTING ACCESSORIES AND LABOR, TO RESTORE SYSTEM TO INTENDED FUNCTION. B. ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS SHOWING EXISTING BUILDING CONDITIONS, SUCH AS DEMOLITION DRAWINGS, EXISTING PANEL SCHEDULES, ETC. ARE BASED ON RECORD DRAWINGS AND SITE VISITS. IF ACTUAL EXISTING CONDITIONS DIFFER FROM THOSE SHOWN ON DRAWINGS, PLEASE NOTIFY ENGINEER. C. ELECTRICAL DEVICES SHOWN IN GREY ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN. ELECTRICAL DEVICES SHOWN IN BLACK/DASHED WITH A '(D)' ARE TO BE DEMOLISHED AND WITH A '(R)' ARE TO BE RELOCATED, UNO. FOR DEVICES NOTED TO BE DEMOLISHED, ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE IN ENTIRETY, INCLUDING ASSOCIATED BRANCH CIRCUIT BACK TO SOURCE OR NEAREST UPSTREAM LIVE DEVICE. D. PATCH/REPAIR ALL HOLES IN FLOOR, WALLS, AND DECK RESULTING FROM DEMOLITION WORK AS REQUIRED. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7.9 8 9 K J I.5 I H G.9 G F E D C B A (R)(R) (D)(D)(D)(D) (D)(D)(D)(D) (D) (D) (D)(D) (R)(R) (D) CHILDRENS ROOM 116 COLLECTION 116B STORAGE / IT 120 (D)(D) (D)(D) 1 1 1 1 1/8" = 1'-0"ED201 1 LEVEL ONE LIGHTING DEMOLITION PLAN 1. SALVAGE EXISTING LUMINAIRE FOR RE-USE AND RE-LOCATION. KEY NOTES:# No. 60006 PE RYAN P. MARONEY M O NTANA LICENS E DPRO F ESSIONA L E N G IN EERDrawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 Ryan P. Maroney 60006 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.04.24 Design Pricing 6/22/2026 11:27:56 AM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ MEP_R26.rvtED201 LEVEL ONE LIGHTING DEMOLITION PLAN Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 Bidding and PermitProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT M M S S S FS SFFD C SM ADAADAADAADAD C M D D E D J TVTV J F SSD F SADAADAADAM ADA J J E M S S SS S M M M J J S S TV SD D J H F C C C F C C JC S S S F S F D J D J D D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7.9 8 9 K J I.5 I H G.9 G F E D C B A GFI GFI GFI DRINKING FOUNTAIN LG EF-8 FAMILY RESTROOM 115 FAMILY RESTROOM 114A NOOK 116D STAFF WORK 118 YS DIRECTOR 117 COLLECTION 116B ACTIVE PLAY 116A STEAM ZONE 116C THEME ROOM 113 WELLNESS ROOM 114 1 1 1 1 1 3 DISHWASHER 2 2 LG-36 LG-36 LG-38 LG-38 LG-40 LG-42 LG-47 LG-49 3 LG-51,53 LG-44 GFI3 LG-38 3 LG-43 3 3 2 4 3 3 5 (EX)LB 3 1 3 3 3 3333 48" LG-46 1 LG-40 LG-47 5 LG-48 LG-48 LG-48 1 LG-42 PRINTERLG-50LG-48LG-33 5 1 LG-52 1 LG-52 1 1 48" 48" 48" (EX) 6 6 GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES A. IT IS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY FOR ALL TRADES INVOLVED TO COORDINATE WITH EACH OTHER AND VERIFY THAT THERE ARE NO CONFLICTS IN LOCATION OF DUCTS, CONDUITS, DIFFUSERS, BOXES, AND OTHER ITEMS THROUGHOUT THIS PROJECT BEFORE FINAL PLACEMENT OF MATERIALS. B. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CUTTING OF FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND ROOFS TO PERFORM THE REQUIRED WORK DEPICTED IN THESE DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL PATCHING OF HOLES TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. C. LOW VOLTAGE CABLES (LIGHTING CONTROLS) ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILINGS SHALL BE SUPPORTED USING J-HOOKS AT INTERVALS NOT TO EXCEED 48" OC, UNO. D. ELECTRICAL DEVICES SHOWN IN GREY ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN. ELECTRICAL DEVICES SHOWN IN BLACK ARE NEW, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. E. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CONNECTIONS TO POWERED MILLWORK AND CASEWORK ACCESSORIES, COORDINATE WITH MILLWORK DRAWINGS. F. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR FINAL CONNECTIONS TO POWERED FURNITURE AND ACCESSORIES, COORDINATE WITH FURNITURE PLANS AND MANUFACTURERS REQUIREMENTS. G. WHERE NEW ELECTRICAL DEVICES ARE SHOWN ON EXISTING WALLS, ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FISH MC CABLE CONCEALED THROUGH EXISTING WALL AND PROVIDE FLUSH DEVICES. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR ANY REQIURED CUTTING AND PATCHING. H. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL CEILING PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS OF CEILING MOUNTED DEVICES IN GYPSUM BOARD AND WOOD CEILINGS. I. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS OF WALL MOUNTED DEVICES. J. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION AND ORIENTATION OF LUMINAIRES AND DEVICES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. No. 60006 PE RYAN P. MARONEY M O NTANA LICENS E DPRO F ESSIONA L E N G IN EERDrawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 Ryan P. Maroney 60006 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.04.24 Design Pricing 6/22/2026 11:27:57 AM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ MEP_R26.rvtE101 LEVEL ONE POWER AND SIGNAL PLAN Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 Bidding and PermitProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"E101 1 LEVEL ONE POWER AND SIGNAL PLAN KEY NOTES:# 1. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION OF FLOOR BOXES PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. 2. RELOCATE SALVAGED FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION DEVICE HERE. EXTEND EXISTING FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT AS REQUIRED. 3. POWER NEW RECEPTACLE FROM EXISTING 20A 120V CIRCUIT SERVING EXISTING RECEPTACLE(S) IN ROOM, UNO. EXTEND EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUIT AS REQUIRED. 4. MOUNT RECEPTACLE UNDER SINK TO SERVE DISHWASHER. 5. SEE DETAIL ON SHEET E002 FOR DROP RECEPTACLE. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING FOR EXACT LOCATION PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. 6. UPDATE EXISTING PANEL SCHEDULE DIRECTORY UPON COMPLETION OF WORK TO REFLECT AS-BUILT CIRCUITRY. OSD OSDOSOSOS 3 OS OS 3 3 3 DD DOS OS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7.9 8 9 K J I.5 I H G.9 G F E D C B A CS2CS1AV CS1AV AV CS2 CS1 CS2 PLC D1 D1D1 D1D1 D1 D1 D1 D1THEME ROOM 113 WELLNESS ROOM 114 FAMILY RESTROOM 114A FAMILY RESTROOM 115 NOOK 116D COLLECTION 116B ACTIVE PLAY 116A CHILDRENS ROOM 116 STAFF WORK 118 YS DIRECTOR 117 STORAGE / IT 120 1 11 1 D1 D1D1 D1D1 U1 U1 V1V1 V1 V1 V1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 D2 D2D2 D2 G1 2 a b a a a a b b b b b b c c c c d c d c d d d 3 3 V1ee e ee D1D1 4 44 4 STEAM ZONE 116C 4 U1 3 4 GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES A. IT IS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY FOR ALL TRADES INVOLVED TO COORDINATE WITH EACH OTHER AND VERIFY THAT THERE ARE NO CONFLICTS IN LOCATION OF DUCTS, CONDUITS, DIFFUSERS, BOXES, AND OTHER ITEMS THROUGHOUT THIS PROJECT BEFORE FINAL PLACEMENT OF MATERIALS. B. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CUTTING OF FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND ROOFS TO PERFORM THE REQUIRED WORK DEPICTED IN THESE DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL PATCHING OF HOLES TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. C. LOW VOLTAGE CABLES (LIGHTING CONTROLS) ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILINGS SHALL BE SUPPORTED USING J-HOOKS AT INTERVALS NOT TO EXCEED 48" OC, UNO. D. ELECTRICAL DEVICES SHOWN IN GREY ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN. ELECTRICAL DEVICES SHOWN IN BLACK ARE NEW, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. E. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CONNECTIONS TO POWERED MILLWORK AND CASEWORK ACCESSORIES, COORDINATE WITH MILLWORK DRAWINGS. F. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR FINAL CONNECTIONS TO POWERED FURNITURE AND ACCESSORIES, COORDINATE WITH FURNITURE PLANS AND MANUFACTURERS REQUIREMENTS. G. WHERE NEW ELECTRICAL DEVICES ARE SHOWN ON EXISTING WALLS, ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FISH MC CABLE CONCEALED THROUGH EXISTING WALL AND PROVIDE FLUSH DEVICES. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR FOR ANY REQIURED CUTTING AND PATCHING. H. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL CEILING PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS OF CEILING MOUNTED DEVICES IN GYPSUM BOARD AND WOOD CEILINGS. I. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS OF WALL MOUNTED DEVICES. J. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION AND ORIENTATION OF LUMINAIRES AND DEVICES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. No. 60006 PE RYAN P. MARONEY M O NTANA LICENS E DPRO F ESSIONA L E N G IN EERDrawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 Ryan P. Maroney 60006 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.04.24 Design Pricing 6/22/2026 11:27:59 AM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ MEP_R26.rvtE201 LEVEL ONE LIGHTING PLAN Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 Bidding and PermitProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"E201 1 LEVEL ONE LIGHTING PLAN 1. RELOCATE SALVAGED LIGHT FIXTURE HERE. PROVIDE POWER VIA EXISTING 20A 277V LIGHTING CIRCUIT PREVIOUSLY SERVING SPACE. UPDATE SWITCHING AS SHOWN. 2. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION OF NOOK LIGHT FIXTURES PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. 3. EXTEND EXISTING NEARBY 20A 120V CIRCUIT TO NEW UNDER-CABINET LIGHT. NOTE, UNDER-CABINET LIGHT HAS INTEGRAL LIGHT SWITCH. 4. PROVIDE POWER TO NEW LIGHT FIXTURES VIA EXISTING 20A 277V LIGHTING CIRCUIT PREVIOUSLY SERVING SPACE. UPDATE SWITCHING AS SHOWN. KEY NOTES:# CND STEAM CONDENSATE RETURN LPS MPS HPS LOW PRESSURE STEAM MEDIUM PRESSURE STEAM HIGH PRESSURE STEAM VALVES COMBINATION Y-STRAINER & SHUTOFF VALVE COMBINATION AUTOFLOW & SHUTOFF VALVE CHECK VALVE AUTOFLOW VALVE HWR HWS HEATING WATER RETURN HEATING WATER SUPPLY REFRIGERANT (LIQUID AND SUCTION)REF HPWR HPWS HEAT PUMP WATER RETURN HEAT PUMP WATER SUPPLY CWR CHILLED WATER RETURN CWS CHILLED WATER SUPPLY ATV ATMOSPHERIC VENT S M M ISOLATION VALVE - SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE MANUAL BALANCING VALVE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE SOLENOID VALVE 2-WAY TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVE 3-WAY VALVE 3-WAY TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVE ANCHOR SCHEMATIC PUMP FLOW SWITCH AUTOMATIC AIR VENT BACKFLOW PREVENTER PIPE WELL - EMPTY DDC PRESSURE SENSOR STRAINER T P FS PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE PORT PRESSURE SWITCH PS PRESSURE GAUGE & COCK TEMPERATURE GAUGE T FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR PIPE GUIDES PIPING SPECIALTIES HUMIDISTATH THERMOSTAT W/ LOCKABLE COVERT CARBON MONOXIDE / NITRIC OXIDE SENSORCO/NO DUCT UP (PLAN VIEW) DUCT DOWN (PLAN VIEW) RECTANGULAR DUCT WIDTH x DEPTHW"xD" ROUND DUCT DIAMETER X"ø X"ø FLEXIBLE DUCT DIAMETER R INCLINED RISE - IN DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW D INCLINED DROP - IN DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW INTERNAL DUCT LINING ELBOW WITH TURNING VANES RADIUS ELBOW W"/D"OVAL DUCT WIDTH/DEPTH SUPPLY DUCT (SECTION VIEW) RETURN DUCT (SECTION VIEW) EXHAUST DUCT (SECTION VIEW) OUTDOOR AIR DUCT (SECTION VIEW) MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER BACKDRAFT DAMPER ZONE DAMPER BYPASS DAMPER MOTORIZED DAMPER FIRE DAMPER FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER SMOKE DAMPERZBMFFSSFLOOR/CEILING SUPPLY DIFFUSER FLOOR/CEILING RETURN GRILLE FLOOR/CEILING EXHAUST GRILLE REMOTE VOLUME DAMPER SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER SIDEWALL RETURN/EXHAUST GRILLE HVAC DUCTWORK STATIC PRESSURE SENSORSP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORDP BUILDING PRESSURE SENSOR CTR CTS COOLING TOWER RETURN COOLING TOWER SUPPLY ANNOTATION SYMBOLS X X X X CFM X DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER SECTION NUMBER SHEET NUMBER AIR DEVICE MARK AND CFM ME-#MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MARK POINT OF NEW CONNECTION POINT OF DISCONNECTION THERMOSTATT ZONED THERMOSTATT ZONED THERMOSTAT - MASTERT ROOM HUMIDITY SENSOR ROOM CO2 SENSOR $WALL SWITCH CFM X AIR DEVICE MARK AND CFM - PROVIDE OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER OBD CFM X AIR DEVICE MARK AND CFM - PROVIDE RADIAL DAMPER RD X X 3D VIEW NUMBER SHEET NUMBER #M HVAC LEGEND RBDROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR HVAC PIPING (E) NAME (D) NAME DIRECTION OF FLOW EXISTING PIPE TO BE DEMOLISHED EXISTING PIPE TO REMAIN NAME NEW PIPING GENERAL MANUAL BALANCING VALVE AUTOFLOW VALVE P PRESSURE GAUGE P HOSE END DRAIN MANUAL AIR VENT - 1/4" BALL VALVE WITH 12" SOFT COPPER TUBE THERMAL EXPANSION LOOP BLIND FLANGE BOTTOM CONNECTION CAPPED OUTLET CHANGE IN ELEVATION OF PIPE ELBOW PIPE BREAK PIPE UP PIPE DOWN SIDE CONNECTION OR TEE FITTING TOP CONNECTION UNION PIPE FITTINGS HVAC CONTROL SYMBOLS NOTE: THIS IS A STANDARD LEGEND. NOT ALL PIPE TYPES AND SYMBOLS ARE NECESSARILY UTILIZED IN THE DRAWINGS. ID INSIDE DIAMETER IFB INTEGRAL FACE & BYPASS IGV INLET GUIDE VANES IPS IRON PIPE SIZE IU INDUCTION UNIT KW KILOWATTS KWH KILOWATT HOUR LAT LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE (°F) LF LINEAR FEET LWT LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE (°F) M MOTOR OPERATED MAU MAKEUP AIR UNIT MB MIXING BOX MBH 1000 BTU/HR MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR MFR MANUFACTURER MS MINI-SPLIT NC NOISE CRITERIA NC NORMALLY CLOSED NIC NOT IN CONTRACT NO NORMALLY OPEN NPS NOMINAL PIPE SIZE OA OUTSIDE AIR OAD OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER OBD OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER P PUMP PC PLUMBING CONTRACTOR PD PRESSURE DROP PH PHASE PHC PREHEAT COIL PPM PART PER MILLION PROP PROPELLER PRV PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE PSIA PSI, ABSOLUTE PSIG PSI, GAUGE QTY QUANTITY R REGISTER RA RETURN AIR RD RADIAL DAMPER RF RETURN/RELIEF AIR FAN RH RELATIVE HUMIDITY RHC REHEAT COIL SA SUPPLY AIR SAF SUPPLY AIR FAN SC SENSIBLE COOLER SCFM CFM, STANDARD CONDITIONS SD SMOKE DETECTOR SEER SEASONAL ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATIO SENS SENSIBLE SP STATIC PRESSURE SPS STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR SS STAINLESS STEEL T THERMOSTAT TA TRANSFER AIR TCC TEMPERATURE CONTROL CONTRACTOR TCP TEMPERATURE CONTROL PANEL TG TRANSFER GRILL TOD TOP OF DUCT TOP TOP OF PIPE TOS TOP OF STEEL TSP TOTAL STATIC PRESSURE TYP TYPICAL UH UNIT HEATER UNC UNDERCUT UV UNIT VENTILATOR VA VOLT-AMPERE VAV VARIABLE AIR VOLUME VD VOLUME DAMPER VEL VELOCITY VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE VRF VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW WB WET BULB TEMPERATURE (°F) WC WATER COLUMN WG WATER GAUGE WSHP WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMP ΔT TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE (°F) ACC AIR COOLED CONDENSER ACU AIR CONDITIONING UNIT AD ACCESS DOOR ADJ ADJUSTABLE AF AIR FOIL AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE AFR ABOVE FINISHED ROOF AFS AIR FLOW STATION AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT AP ACCESS PANEL ATC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL ATM ATMOSPHERE AWG AMERICAN WIRE GAUGE B BOILER BB BASEBOARD BC BACKWARD CURVED BD BACKDRAFT DAMPER BF BOILER FEED BHP BRAKE HORSEPOWER BI BACKWARD INCLINED BMS BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM BOD BOTTOM OF DUCT BOJ BOTTOM OF JOIST BOS BOTTOM OF STEEL BTU BRITISH THERMAL UNIT C COMMON CAV CONSTANT AIR VOLUME CC COOLING COIL CCW COUNTER CLOCKWISE CFM CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE CH CHILLER C&I CONTROLS & INSTRUMENTATION CLG CEILING CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CND CONDENSATE CONT CONTINUATION CORR CORRIDOR CT COOLING TOWER CU CONDENSING UNIT CH CABINET HEATER CV CONTROL VALVE CVS CONTROL VALVE STATION CW CLOCKWISE dB DECIBEL DB DRY BULB TEMPERATURE (°F) DDC DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL DH DUCT HEATER DP DEW POINT TEMPERATURE (°F) DX DIRECT EXPANSION E EXHAUST EA EXHAUST AIR EAT ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE (°F) EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EDR EQUIVALENT DIRECT RADIATION EER ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATIO EF EXHAUST FAN EFF EFFICIENCY ELEV ELEVATION ERV ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR ESP EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE ET EXPANSION TANK EWT ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE (°F) F&T FLOAT & THERMOSTATIC FA FACE AREA FC FORWARD CURVED FC FAN COIL FP FIRE PROTECTION FPM FEET PER MINUTE FT FEET GA GAUGE OR GAGE GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR GEN GENERATOR GH GRAVITY HOOD GPD GALLONS PER DAY GPH GALLONS PER HOUR GPM GALLONS PER MINUTE H HUMIDIFIER HC HEATING COIL HG MERCURY HOA HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC HP HORSEPOWER HR HOUR HX HEAT EXCHANGER ABBREVIATIONS BUTTERFLY VALVE FLANGE (E) ME-#EXISTING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT (D) ME-#DEMOLISHED MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT # T H C P ADJUSTABLE ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR T COMBO ROOM TEMPERATURE & CO2 SENSORT A C ADJUSTABLE COMBO ROOM TEMP & CO2 SENSORT C/A DDC TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSTALLATION: A. ALL NEW PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CURRENTLY ADOPTED INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL AND INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODES. B. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED LEVEL, PLUMB, AND FIRMLY ANCHORED IN LOCATIONS INDICATED ON PLAN. OBSERVE MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND RECOGNIZED INDUSTRY PRACTICES TO ENSURE THAT PRODUCTS SERVE THEIR INTENDED FUNCTION. C. INSTALL ALL EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, AND PIPING SO AS TO MAINTAIN CODE REQUIRED CLEARANCES FOR ALL ELECTRICAL AND TELECOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT. D. ELEMENTS PENETRATING BUILDING COMPONENTS (ROOF ASSEMBLIES, WALL ASSEMBLIES, ETC.) SHALL BE SEALED WEATHER AND WATER TIGHT. COORDINATE PENETRATIONS WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PATCH TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER. COORDINATION: A. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TO FIELD COORDINATE THE LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT, ROUTING OF DUCTWORK, AND ROUTING OF PIPING WITH ALL OTHER TRADES. B. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TO REVIEW THE DRAWINGS FOR ALL DISCIPLINES AND PROVIDE THE NECESSARY LABOR AND MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. C. COORDINATE THE INSTALLATION OF GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLANS, THE ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLANS, AND IF RELEVANT, THE TELECOMMUNICATION AND FIRE SPRINKLER PLANS. ELECTRICAL COORDINATION: A. SEE THE MEP COORDINATION SCHEDULE ON SHEET M001 FOR ELECTRICAL INFORMATION. COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES TO ENSURE THAT ALL ELECTRICAL DISCONNECTS, MOTOR STARTERS, VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES, CONTROLS, AND ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES ARE FURNISHED AND/OR INSTALLED BY THE APPROPRIATE TRADE. SITE ELEVATION: A. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE SELECTED FOR THE PROJECT ELEVATION OF 4,820’. MECH. GENERAL NOTES MOTOR MOTOR CEILING FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR TYPICAL DISCHARGE EXHAUST AIR DUCT SERVICE ACCESS PANEL (SIDE OR BOTTOM) CEILING ACCESS PANEL WHERE REQUIRED CENTRIFUGAL IN-LINE TYPE FAN MOUNTING BRACKET(S) FURNISHED WITH FAN 1/4"" THREADED ROD W/ VIBRATION ISOLATORS TYPICAL OF 4 PER FANEXHAUST AIR DUCT W/ 1" ACOUSTICAL LINER WHERE INDICATED EXHAUST FAN POINT NAME NOTES HARDWARE POINTS SOFTWARE POINTS AI AO BI BO AV BV ADJ SCH TRD ALM DISP X X XFAN -COMMAND OUTPUT RELAY (R) X X X XFAN -STATUS CURRENT TRANSDUCER (CT) SEQUENCE OF OPERATION: EF-8 FAN CONTROL • ENABLE FAN WHEN BUILDING ENTERS OCCUPIED MODE. • DISABLE WHEN WHEN BUILDING ENTERS UNOCCUPIED MODE. ALARMS • GENERATE ALARM WHEN FAN STATUS DOES NOT MATCH COMMAND EAEA CT R M O N T N A PROF E SSIONA L E N G INEERCARLY M. SVENVOLD No. 80662 PE LICE N DES A Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.04.24 Design Pricing Carly M. Svenvold 80662 6/22/2026 12:30:51 PM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ MEP_R26.rvtM001 MECHANICAL LEGEND & NOTES Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 Bidding and PermitProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT HVAC SHEET INDEX NUMBER SHEET NAME M001 MECHANICAL LEGEND & NOTES MD102 LEVEL ONE UPPER DEMO - HVAC M100 BASEMENT - HVAC M101 LEVEL ONE LOWER - HVAC M102 LEVEL ONE UPPER - HVAC NOTES: PROVIDE MANUAL BALANCING DAMPER AT LOCATIONS WHERE A SPECIFIED AIR VOLUME IS REQUIRED I.E. FOR SUPPLY AND EXHAUST ONLY. COORDINATE FRAME AND MOUNTING TYPE WITH CEILING TYPES. SEE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR CEILING TYPES. SUBMIT FULL COLOR CHART TO ARCHITECT FOR SELECTION.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO PROVIDE ALL FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. SCHEDULES N.C. VALUES ARE VALID FOR SCHEDULE AIR FLOW ONLY AND REPRESENT A MAXIMUM ACCEPTABLE N.C. VALUE. SUBSTITUTED EQUIPTMENT SHALL HAVE N.C. VALUE EQUAL TO OR BELOW THE SCHEDULES N.C. AT THE AIR FLOW LISTED ON THE PLANS. T-1 PRICE 80 12" x 24" LAY-IN TRANSFER GRILLE TRANSFER -- - - 10" x 22" MANUAL STEEL BY ARCH SEE NOTES S-1 PRICE SMCD 12" x 12" LAY-IN 4-WAY ADJUSTABLE GRILLE SUPPLY 80 - 5 0.02 8" x 8" MANUAL STEEL BY ARCH SEE NOTES E-1 PRICE 80 12" x 12" EGGCRATE EXHAUST GRILLE EXHAUST 100 - - 0.02 6" MANUAL STEEL BY ARCH SEE NOTES MARK MFGR MODEL DESCRIPTION FUNCTION MAX CFM NC AT MAX CFM THROW AT MAX CFM (FT) PRESSURE DROP AT MAX CFM (in. W.C.) NECK SIZE (W"xH")DAMPER TYPE MATERIAL FINISH REMARKS GRILLE, REGISTER AND DIFFUSER SCHEDULE NOTES: 1.) UNIT SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY EXISTING BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM. SEE 23 0900 AND CONTROL SEQUENCE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2.) PROVIDE FAN WITH DIRECT DRIVE MOTOR WITH 0-10V INPUT FROM BMS AND FACTORY WIRED DISCONNECT. EF-8 LOREN COOK GN-622 INLINE RESTROOMS DIRECT 300 0.5 BACKDRAFT 120 1 100 W SEE NOTES VOLTAGE PHASE HP / WATTS MARK MANUFACTURER MODEL # TYPE SERVES DRIVE CFM STATIC PRESSURE (inWC)DAMPER ELECTRICAL DATA REMARKS EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE 1. INTEGRAL DISCONNECT AND OVERLOADS A. B. CONTROL WIRING SHALL BE CONCEALED WITHIN WALL CONSTRUCTION, ABOVE CEILING, OR RUN IN CONDUIT. EXPOSED CONTROL WIRING IS UNACCEPTABLE. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED, ALL FEEDERS SHALL INCLUDE A FULL SIZE NEUTRAL. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY WITH THE MANUFACTURER OF THE ACTUAL EQUIPMENT BEING SUPPLIED WETHER A NEUTRAL IS REQUIRED PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. NOTES:GENERAL NOTES: BAS CO CONT EF HCP INT L MS OS PS T TC UC VE N/A BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR CONTINUOUS OPERATION INTERLOCK WITH EXHAUST FAN HOOD CONTROL PANEL INTEGRAL LIGHT SWITCH MANUAL SWITCH OCCUPANCY SENSOR PRESSURE SWITCH THERMOSTAT TIME CLOCK UNIT CONTROLLER VEHICLE EXHAUST DETECTION SYSTEM NOT APPLICABLE CB CSFD FD FST FW MOCP MSS NFD RCPT RVSS VFD N/A PANELBOARD CIRCUIT BREAKER WITHIN SIGHT OF EQUIPMENT COMBINATION STARTER/DISCONNECT - HOA FUSED DISCONNECT FUSTAT FACTORY-WIRED SINGLE POINT CONNECTION MOTOR OVER-CURRENT PROTECTION MANUAL STARTER SWITCH WITH THERMAL OVERLOADS (1-, 2- OR 3-POLE AS REQUIRED) NON-FUSED DISCONNECT 20A DUPLEX RECEPTACLE (GFCI PROTECTED AS REQUIRED), CORD AND PLUG REDUCED VOLTAGE SOLID-STATE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE - HOA NOT APPLICABLE 22/22 22/26 23/23 23/26 26/26 FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY DIV. 22, WIRED BY DIV. 22 FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY DIV. 22, WIRED BY DIV. 26 FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY DIV. 23, WIRED BY DIV. 23 FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY DIV. 23, WIRED BY DIV. 26 FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY DIV. 26, WIRED BY DIV. 26 CONTROL TYPE:DISCONNECT/STARTER TYPE:DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES: EF-8 EXHAUST FAN 100 W 120 - 1 BAS 23 / 23 1 FW 23/26 - - - 1 #12 3/4" MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LOAD VOLT-PHASE TYPE DIV TYPE DIV SIZE (NEMA) SWITCH (AMPS) FUSE (AMPS) ENCLOSURE (NEMA) COPPER WIRE (AWG) CONDUIT (INCHES) MARK DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL DATA CONTROL NOTES DISCONNECT / STARTER DISCONNECT FEEDER MEP COORDINATION SCHEDULE NOT TO SCALEM001 1 INLINE EXHAUST FAN DETAIL T T T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7.9 8 9 K J I.5 I H G.9 G F E D C B A (E) VAV-16(E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø(E) 14"ø (E) 12"ø (E) 16"ø (E) 24"ø(E) 16"/8"(E) 24"/14"(E) 24"/22"(E) 10"/10"(E) 16"ø (E) 24"/22"(E) 20"/16" (E) 16"ø (E) 16"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø(E) 10"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 6"ø (E) 24"/14" (E) 24"/22" (E) 24"/18"(E) 18"/14"(E) 14"/14"(E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 18"/14"(E) VAV-17(E) VAV-19 (E) VAV-24(E) VAV-27(E) VAV-28(E) 8"/8" (E) 24"x12" (E) 24"x12" (E) 16"/16" (E) 12"ø (E) 12"ø (E) 8"ø(E) 8"ø (E) 12"/10"(E) 22"ø (E) 20"ø (E) 18"ø (E) 20"/14"(E) 16"/14" (E) 12"ø (E) 12"ø (E) 22"ø(E) 12"ø(E) 12"ø (E) 12"ø (E) 14"ø (E) 10"/10"(E) 10"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 12"/10"(E) 12"/10"(E) 10"/10" (E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 6"ø (E) 20"ø (E) 18"ø (E) 18"ø (E) 16"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 8"/6"(E) 6"/6"(E) 10"/10" (E) 16"x16" (E) 6"ø (E) 6"ø(E) 6"ø(E) 60"x12" (E) 60"x12" (D) 6"/6" 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 VAV-9 VAV-18 M O N T N A PROF E SSIONA L E N G INEERCARLY M. SVENVOLD No. 80662 PE LICE N DES A Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.04.24 Design Pricing Carly M. Svenvold 80662 6/22/2026 12:30:52 PM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ MEP_R26.rvtMD102 LEVEL ONE UPPER DEMO - HVAC Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 Bidding and PermitProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"MD102 1 LEVEL ONE UPPER DEMO - HVAC A. LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF EXISTING FACILITIES IDENTIFIED ON THIS DRAWING ARE APPROXIMATE AND REPRESENT THE BEST AVAILABLE INFORMATION BASED ON A COMBINATION OF FIELD INVESTIGATIONS AND VARIOUS DESIGN AND RECORD DRAWINGS AVAILABLE AT THE TIME OF THE DESIGN. FIELD VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO AND DURING PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK. PROVIDE ALL DEMOLITION WORK NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE SCOPE OUTLINED IN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. B. ALL EXISTING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, AND PIPING SHOWN AS DARK AND DASHED SHALL BE DEMOLISHED. EXISTING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, AND PIPING SHOWN LIGHT ARE TO REMAIN UNCHANGED. C. THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE SALVAGE OF ALL REMOVED EQUIPMENT IN GOOD CONDITION WITH THE OWNER. THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL DISPOSE OF ALL UNWANTED EQUIPMENT. D. COORDINATE ALL UTILITY OUTAGES WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR THROUGHOUT THE DURATION OF CONSTRUCTION. NOTIFICATION MUST BE GIVEN TO THE OWNER AT LEAST A WEEK PRIOR TO ANY PLANNED OUTAGES. E. COORDINATE WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PATCH AND REPAIR ANY ROOF, WALL, CEILING, OR FLOOR PENETRATIONS ASSOCIATED WITH THE DEMOLITION OF THE EXISTING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. MECHANICAL DEMO NOTES KEY NOTES:# 1. REMOVE DIFFUSER / GRILLE. RETAIN FOR REUSE. 2. REMOVE THERMOSTAT AND RETAIN FOR REUSE. 3. DEMOLISH DUCT MAIN TO POINT NOTED AND CAP. 4. DEMOLISH TRANSFER GRILLE AND ASSOCIATED DUCT. 5. REMOVE, RETAIN, AND CLEAN DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES NOTED AS EXISTING TO REMAIN AS NEEDED TO FACILITATE SCOPE OF WORK. PREPARE DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES FOR REINSTALLATION. 6. DEMOLISH TRANSFER GRILLE. RETAIN ASSOCIATED DUCT FOR REUSE. 7. DEMOLISH SUPPLY GRILLE AND FLEX DUCT. PREPARE DUCT FOR RECONNECTION. FS FS FS FS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7.9 8 9 K J I.5 I HG.9 G F E D C B A (E) VAV-15 (E) VAV-8(E) VAV-7(E) VAV-9(E) VAV-10(E) VAV-18(E) VAV-11(E) VAV-11A (E) VAV-12(E) VAV-13(E) VAV-14(E) VAV-6(E) VAV-3(E) AHU-2 (E) AHU-1 (E) 6"ø (E) 12"/12"(E) 8"ø (E) 24"/14" (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 12"ø (E) 14"/14" (E) 12"ø (E) 12"ø (E) 24"/16" (E) 12"ø (E) 24"/14" (E) 14"ø (E) 14"ø (E) 12"ø (E) 12"ø (E) 12"ø (E) 24"/14"(E) 16"/14"(E) 12"/12"(E) 14"/14" (E) 24"/14" (E) 18"/18" (E) 24"/18" (E) 24"/22"(E) 24"/14"(E) 14"/14"(E) 24"/16"(E) 24"/14"(E) 14"/12"(E) 24"/14"(E) 20"/10"(E) 6"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 16"ø (E) 18"ø (E) 16"ø (E) 14"ø (E) 16"ø (E) 14"ø(E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 16"ø(E) 14"ø(E) 16"ø(E) 14"ø(E) 16"ø(E) 16"ø(E) 14"ø(E) 16"ø(E) 14"ø(E) 10"ø(E) 8"ø(E) 44"ø(E) 30"ø(E) 38"ø(E) 26"ø (E) 44"ø (E) 40"ø (E) 36"ø (E) 34"ø(E) 36"ø (E) 24"ø(E) 12"/10"(E) 14"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 20"/10" (E) 20"ø (E) 24"ø (E) 18"ø6"ø (E) 14"ø (E) 14"ø (E) 14"ø (E) 14"/14" (E) 12"ø (E) 12"ø (E) 12"ø (E) 14"/14" 1 (E) 200 (E) 645 (E) 645 (E) 645 111 M O N T N A PROF E SSIONA L E N G INEERCARLY M. SVENVOLD No. 80662 PE LICE N DES A Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.04.24 Design Pricing Carly M. Svenvold 80662 6/22/2026 12:30:54 PM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ MEP_R26.rvtM100 BASEMENT - HVAC Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 Bidding and PermitProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"M100 1 BASEMENT - HVAC KEY NOTES:# A. VERIFY THE LOCATION OF THERMOSTATS AND SENSORS WITH THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. INSTALL THERMOSTATS 48" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR PER ADA REQUIREMENTS. B. PROVIDE AND INSTALL SEISMIC BRACING FOR ALL EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK AND PIPING PER THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CURRENTLY ADOPTED INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE. C. FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK BETWEEN BRANCH DUCTS AND GRILLES, REGISTERS, OR DIFFUSERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO 5FT. FLEXIBLE DUCT SHALL NOT BE USED IN PLACE OF ELBOWS. D. PROVIDE AND INSTALL FIRE, SMOKE AND/OR COMBINATION SMOKE/FIRE DAMPERS WHERE DUCTWORK PASSES THROUGH FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES. ASSOCIATED DUCT DETECTORS SHALL BE ADDRESSABLE. SMOKE DAMPERS AND COMBINATION SMOKE/FIRE DAMPERS SHALL INCLUDE A KEYED REMOTE TEST SWITCH LOCATED IN AN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION. FIELD COORDINATE THE LOCATION OF TEST SWITCHES WITH THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER PRIOR INSTALLATION. E. SEAL ALL DUCT AND PIPE PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES WITH A UL-APPROVED FIRE STOP SYSTEM. F. PROVIDE ACCESS DOORS TO ALLOW SERVICE AND INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT, VALVES, DAMPERS AND DEVICES INSTALLED ABOVE NON- REMOVABLE CEILINGS. COORDINATE SUCH INSTALLATIONS WITH THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. G. ALL PIPING SHALL BE IDENTIFIED WITH PIPE LABELS MARKED AT A MAXIMUM OF EVERY 25 FT. ALL VALVES SHALL BE IDENTIFIED WITH BRASS OR ALUMINUM VALVE TAGS. H. PROVIDE AND INSTALL PIPE GUIDES, EXPANSION JOINTS, AND HANGERS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. I. ALL PIPING WALL PENETRATIONS SHALL HAVE A CHROME ESCUTCHEON PLATE. J. MINIMUM TERMINAL DEVICE BRANCH PIPE SIZE IS 3/4"ø UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. K. PROVIDE HIGH POINT AIR VENTS, LOW POINT DRAINS (WITH CAPPED HOSE CONNECTIONS), AND SLOPE PIPING AS NECESSARY TO ALLOW FOR COMPLETE DRAINAGE OF THE HYDRONIC SYSTEMS. L. ALL EXPOSED DUCTWORK TO BE HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED STEEL AND PAINTED PER ARCHITECTURAL. CONTRACTOR TO CLEAN AND DRY DUCTWORK PRIOR TO PAINTING. MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES 1. REBALANCE EXISTING DIFFUSER TO NOTED CFM. REF-2W/D DWT T T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7.9 8 9 K J I.5 I H G.9 G F E D C B A (E) 200 (E) 645 (E) 645 (E) 645 1 1 2 VAV-9 VAV-18 M O N T N A PROF E SSIONA L E N G INEERCARLY M. SVENVOLD No. 80662 PE LICE N DES A Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.04.24 Design Pricing Carly M. Svenvold 80662 6/22/2026 12:30:55 PM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ MEP_R26.rvtM101 LEVEL ONE LOWER - HVAC Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 Bidding and PermitProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"M101 1 LEVEL ONE LOWER - HVAC KEY NOTES:# A. VERIFY THE LOCATION OF THERMOSTATS AND SENSORS WITH THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. INSTALL THERMOSTATS 48" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR PER ADA REQUIREMENTS. B. PROVIDE AND INSTALL SEISMIC BRACING FOR ALL EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK AND PIPING PER THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CURRENTLY ADOPTED INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE. C. FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK BETWEEN BRANCH DUCTS AND GRILLES, REGISTERS, OR DIFFUSERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO 5FT. FLEXIBLE DUCT SHALL NOT BE USED IN PLACE OF ELBOWS. D. PROVIDE AND INSTALL FIRE, SMOKE AND/OR COMBINATION SMOKE/FIRE DAMPERS WHERE DUCTWORK PASSES THROUGH FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES. ASSOCIATED DUCT DETECTORS SHALL BE ADDRESSABLE. SMOKE DAMPERS AND COMBINATION SMOKE/FIRE DAMPERS SHALL INCLUDE A KEYED REMOTE TEST SWITCH LOCATED IN AN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION. FIELD COORDINATE THE LOCATION OF TEST SWITCHES WITH THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER PRIOR INSTALLATION. E. SEAL ALL DUCT AND PIPE PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES WITH A UL-APPROVED FIRE STOP SYSTEM. F. PROVIDE ACCESS DOORS TO ALLOW SERVICE AND INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT, VALVES, DAMPERS AND DEVICES INSTALLED ABOVE NON- REMOVABLE CEILINGS. COORDINATE SUCH INSTALLATIONS WITH THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. G. ALL PIPING SHALL BE IDENTIFIED WITH PIPE LABELS MARKED AT A MAXIMUM OF EVERY 25 FT. ALL VALVES SHALL BE IDENTIFIED WITH BRASS OR ALUMINUM VALVE TAGS. H. PROVIDE AND INSTALL PIPE GUIDES, EXPANSION JOINTS, AND HANGERS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. I. ALL PIPING WALL PENETRATIONS SHALL HAVE A CHROME ESCUTCHEON PLATE. J. MINIMUM TERMINAL DEVICE BRANCH PIPE SIZE IS 3/4"ø UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. K. PROVIDE HIGH POINT AIR VENTS, LOW POINT DRAINS (WITH CAPPED HOSE CONNECTIONS), AND SLOPE PIPING AS NECESSARY TO ALLOW FOR COMPLETE DRAINAGE OF THE HYDRONIC SYSTEMS. L. ALL EXPOSED DUCTWORK TO BE HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED STEEL AND PAINTED PER ARCHITECTURAL. CONTRACTOR TO CLEAN AND DRY DUCTWORK PRIOR TO PAINTING. MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES 1. RELOCATE THERMOSTAT FOR VAV-9. 2. 4"ø DRYER EXHAUST DUCT. INSTALL DRYERBOX MODEL DB-425 OR EQUAL. W/D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7.9 8 9 K J I.5 I H G.9 G F E D C B A (E) 6"ø (E) EXHAUST FAN (E) RANGE HOOD (E) VAV-16 (E) 18"x14" (E) 14"ø (E) 12"ø (E) FC-1 (E) 24"ø (E) 22"ø (E) VAV-17 (E) 16"/16" (E) 8"ø (E) 12"/10"(E) 8"ø(E) 12"ø(E) 12"ø(E) 22"ø (E) 24"ø (E) 18"ø (E) 20"ø (E) 14"ø (E) 12"ø (E) VAV-19 (E) VAV-24(E) 8"ø(E) 8"ø(E) VAV-27(E) VAV-28(E) 12"/10"(E) 10"ø(E) 10"ø (E) 12"/10"(E) 10"/10"(E) 6"ø (E) 8"ø(E) 8"ø (E) 18"ø (E) 16"ø (E) 12"/12" (E) 16"/14" (E) 20"/14"(E) 8"ø (E) 12"ø (E) 12"ø (E) 10"/10"(E) 10"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø(E) 8"ø(E) 10"ø(E) 10"ø(E) 12"ø (E) 12"ø(E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 8"ø (E) 16"ø (E) 20"/16" (E) 16"ø (E) 16"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 14"/14"(E) 10"ø (E) 18"/14" (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 24"/14"(E) 6"ø (E) 24"/22" (E) 24"/18"(E) 24"/14" (E) 24"x12" (E) 6"ø (E) 6"ø(E) 8"/8"(E) 24"/14"(E) 10"/10"(E) 16"/8"(E) 24"/22"(E) 24"x12" (E) 24"x12" (E) 24"x12" (E) 8"x8" (E) CUH-1 (E) 10"ø (E) 10"ø (E) 18"/14" (E) 10"ø (E) 350 (E) 215 (E) 215 (E) 215 (E) 215 (E) 215 (E) 215 (E) 215 (E) 350 (E) 50 (E) 50 (E) 100 1 10"ø 1 2 3 (E) 200 (E) 100 (E) 125 (E) 500 E-1 100 EF-8 10"ø 16"x12" 6"ø 4 T-1 S-1 80 10"x8" 5 6 7 7.9 8 J I.5 I H G.9 (E) 24"ø (E) 22"ø (E) VAV-26 (E) 16"ø(E) 18"ø(E) VAV-25 (E) 24"x24"(E) 24"ø(E) 24"x24" (E) 24"ø (E) 60"x24" (E) 60"x24" (E) 20"x20" (E) 18"ø (E) 16"ø (E) 8"ø(E) 6"ø (E) 6"ø(E) 14"x12"(E) 16"x16"(E) 450 (E) 450 UP TO (E) EF-1 M O N T N A PROF E SSIONA L E N G INEERCARLY M. SVENVOLD No. 80662 PE LICE N DES A Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.04.24 Design Pricing Carly M. Svenvold 80662 6/22/2026 12:30:56 PM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ MEP_R26.rvtM102 LEVEL ONE UPPER - HVAC Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 Bidding and PermitProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"M102 1 LEVEL ONE UPPER - HVAC KEY NOTES:# A. VERIFY THE LOCATION OF THERMOSTATS AND SENSORS WITH THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. INSTALL THERMOSTATS 48" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR PER ADA REQUIREMENTS. B. PROVIDE AND INSTALL SEISMIC BRACING FOR ALL EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK AND PIPING PER THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CURRENTLY ADOPTED INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE. C. FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK BETWEEN BRANCH DUCTS AND GRILLES, REGISTERS, OR DIFFUSERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO 5FT. FLEXIBLE DUCT SHALL NOT BE USED IN PLACE OF ELBOWS. D. PROVIDE AND INSTALL FIRE, SMOKE AND/OR COMBINATION SMOKE/FIRE DAMPERS WHERE DUCTWORK PASSES THROUGH FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES. ASSOCIATED DUCT DETECTORS SHALL BE ADDRESSABLE. SMOKE DAMPERS AND COMBINATION SMOKE/FIRE DAMPERS SHALL INCLUDE A KEYED REMOTE TEST SWITCH LOCATED IN AN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION. FIELD COORDINATE THE LOCATION OF TEST SWITCHES WITH THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER PRIOR INSTALLATION. E. SEAL ALL DUCT AND PIPE PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES WITH A UL-APPROVED FIRE STOP SYSTEM. F. PROVIDE ACCESS DOORS TO ALLOW SERVICE AND INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT, VALVES, DAMPERS AND DEVICES INSTALLED ABOVE NON- REMOVABLE CEILINGS. COORDINATE SUCH INSTALLATIONS WITH THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. G. ALL PIPING SHALL BE IDENTIFIED WITH PIPE LABELS MARKED AT A MAXIMUM OF EVERY 25 FT. ALL VALVES SHALL BE IDENTIFIED WITH BRASS OR ALUMINUM VALVE TAGS. H. PROVIDE AND INSTALL PIPE GUIDES, EXPANSION JOINTS, AND HANGERS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. I. ALL PIPING WALL PENETRATIONS SHALL HAVE A CHROME ESCUTCHEON PLATE. J. MINIMUM TERMINAL DEVICE BRANCH PIPE SIZE IS 3/4"ø UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. K. PROVIDE HIGH POINT AIR VENTS, LOW POINT DRAINS (WITH CAPPED HOSE CONNECTIONS), AND SLOPE PIPING AS NECESSARY TO ALLOW FOR COMPLETE DRAINAGE OF THE HYDRONIC SYSTEMS. L. ALL EXPOSED DUCTWORK TO BE HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED STEEL AND PAINTED PER ARCHITECTURAL. CONTRACTOR TO CLEAN AND DRY DUCTWORK PRIOR TO PAINTING. MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES 1. RELOCATE DIFFUSER/GRILLE. 2. 4"ø DRYER EXHAUST WALL CAP. COORDINATE WITH ARCH FOR ELEVATION. 3. CAP (E) DUCT AND REBALANCE (E) EF-1 TO AIRFLOWS SHOWN. 4. 10"ø WALL CAP WITH BACKDRAFT DAMPER. COORDINATE WITH ARCH FOR ELEVATION. NOT TO SCALEM102 3 LEVEL TWO UPPER - NORTH - HVAC - FOR REFERENCE ONLY PLUMBING LEGEND PLUMBING NAME (E) NAME (D) DIRECTION OF FLOW EXISTING PIPE TO BE DEMOLISHED EXISTING PIPE TO REMAIN NAME NEW PIPING IRR IRRIGATION SAN SANITARY WASTE DHWR DHW DCW DOMESTIC HOT WATER (120°F) DOMESTIC COLD WATER DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRC. V SANITARY VENT NG NATURAL GAS RAIN WATER LEADER RAIN WATER OVERFLOW CONDENSATE DRAIN RWL ORL CND GENERAL RO GW GREASE WASTE AW ACID WASTE AV ACID VENT LIQUIFIED PETROLEUM GAS COMPRESSED AIR LPG CA REVERSE OSMOSIS TREATED ANNOTATION SYMBOLS X X X X DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER SECTION NUMBER SHEET NUMBER X X 3D VIEW NUMBER SHEET NUMBER PF#PLUMBING FIXTURE / EQUIPMENT MARK POINT OF NEW CONNECTION POINT OF DISCONNECTION 1/4" SLOPE DIRECTION OF FLOW AND SLOPE PER FOOT PIPE FITTINGS VALVES COMBINATION Y-STRAINER & SHUTOFF VALVE COMBINATION AUTOFLOW & SHUTOFF VALVE CHECK VALVE AUTOFLOW VALVE S M M ISOLATION VALVE - SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR TYPE MANUAL BALANCING VALVE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE SOLENOID VALVE 2-WAY TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVE 3-WAY VALVE 3-WAY TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVE BACKFLOW PREVENTER STRAINER MANUAL BALANCING VALVE AUTOFLOW VALVE HOSE END DRAIN ANCHOR SCHEMATIC PUMP FLOW SWITCH AUTOMATIC AIR VENT DDC TEMP SENSOR FLOOR CLEAN OUT WALL CLEAN OUT PIPE WELL - EMPTY DDC PRESSURE SENSOR T P FS PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE PORT PRESSURE SWITCH PS PRESSURE GAUGE & COCK TEMPERATURE GAUGE T HOSE BIBB WALL HYDRANT IRRIGATION BLOWOUT PORT FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR PIPE GUIDES WATER METER PIPING SPECIALTIES P W WATER HAMMER ARRESTER PRESSURE GAUGE P MANUAL AIR VENT - 1/4" BALL VALVE WITH 12" SOFT COPPER TUBE THERMAL EXPANSION LOOP BLIND FLANGE BOTTOM CONNECTION CAPPED OUTLET CHANGE IN ELEVATION OF PIPE ELBOW PIPE BREAK PIPE UP PIPE DOWN SIDE CONNECTION OR TEE FITTING TOP CONNECTION UNION NOTE: THIS IS A STANDARD LEGEND. NOT ALL PIPE TYPES AND SYMBOLS ARE NECESSARILY UTILIZED IN THE DRAWINGS. ID INSIDE DIAMETER IFB INTEGRAL FACE & BYPASS IGV INLET GUIDE VANES IPS IRON PIPE SIZE IU INDUCTION UNIT KW KILOWATTS KWH KILOWATT HOUR LAT LEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE (°F) LF LINEAR FEET LWT LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE (°F) M MOTOR OPERATED MAU MAKEUP AIR UNIT MB MIXING BOX MBH 1000 BTU/HR MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR MFR MANUFACTURER MS MINI-SPLIT NC NOISE CRITERIA NC NORMALLY CLOSED NIC NOT IN CONTRACT NO NORMALLY OPEN NPS NOMINAL PIPE SIZE OA OUTSIDE AIR OAD OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER OBD OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER P PUMP PC PLUMBING CONTRACTOR PD PRESSURE DROP PH PHASE PHC PREHEAT COIL PPM PART PER MILLION PROP PROPELLER PRV PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE PSIA PSI, ABSOLUTE PSIG PSI, GAUGE QTY QUANTITY R REGISTER RA RETURN AIR RD RADIAL DAMPER RF RETURN/RELIEF AIR FAN RH RELATIVE HUMIDITY RHC REHEAT COIL SA SUPPLY AIR SAF SUPPLY AIR FAN SC SENSIBLE COOLER SCFM CFM, STANDARD CONDITIONS SD SMOKE DETECTOR SEER SEASONAL ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATIO SENS SENSIBLE SP STATIC PRESSURE SPS STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR SS STAINLESS STEEL T THERMOSTAT TA TRANSFER AIR TCC TEMPERATURE CONTROL CONTRACTOR TCP TEMPERATURE CONTROL PANEL TG TRANSFER GRILL TOD TOP OF DUCT TOP TOP OF PIPE TOS TOP OF STEEL TSP TOTAL STATIC PRESSURE TYP TYPICAL UH UNIT HEATER UNC UNDERCUT UV UNIT VENTILATOR VA VOLT-AMPERE VAV VARIABLE AIR VOLUME VD VOLUME DAMPER VEL VELOCITY VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE VRF VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW WB WET BULB TEMPERATURE (°F) WC WATER COLUMN WG WATER GAUGE WSHP WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMP ΔT TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE (°F) ACC AIR COOLED CONDENSER ACU AIR CONDITIONING UNIT AD ACCESS DOOR ADJ ADJUSTABLE AF AIR FOIL AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE AFR ABOVE FINISHED ROOF AFS AIR FLOW STATION AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT AP ACCESS PANEL ATC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL ATM ATMOSPHERE AWG AMERICAN WIRE GAUGE B BOILER BB BASEBOARD BC BACKWARD CURVED BD BACKDRAFT DAMPER BF BOILER FEED BHP BRAKE HORSEPOWER BI BACKWARD INCLINED BMS BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM BOD BOTTOM OF DUCT BOJ BOTTOM OF JOIST BOS BOTTOM OF STEEL BTU BRITISH THERMAL UNIT C COMMON CAV CONSTANT AIR VOLUME CC COOLING COIL CCW COUNTER CLOCKWISE CFM CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE CH CHILLER C&I CONTROLS & INSTRUMENTATION CLG CEILING CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CND CONDENSATE CONT CONTINUATION CORR CORRIDOR CT COOLING TOWER CU CONDENSING UNIT CH CABINET HEATER CV CONTROL VALVE CVS CONTROL VALVE STATION CW CLOCKWISE dB DECIBEL DB DRY BULB TEMPERATURE (°F) DDC DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL DH DUCT HEATER DP DEW POINT TEMPERATURE (°F) DX DIRECT EXPANSION E EXHAUST EA EXHAUST AIR EAT ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE (°F) EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EDR EQUIVALENT DIRECT RADIATION EER ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATIO EF EXHAUST FAN EFF EFFICIENCY ELEV ELEVATION ERV ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR ESP EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE ET EXPANSION TANK EWT ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE (°F) F&T FLOAT & THERMOSTATIC FA FACE AREA FC FORWARD CURVED FC FAN COIL FP FIRE PROTECTION FPM FEET PER MINUTE FT FEET GA GAUGE OR GAGE GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR GEN GENERATOR GH GRAVITY HOOD GPD GALLONS PER DAY GPH GALLONS PER HOUR GPM GALLONS PER MINUTE H HUMIDIFIER HC HEATING COIL HG MERCURY HOA HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC HP HORSEPOWER HR HOUR HX HEAT EXCHANGER ABBREVIATIONS BUTTERFLY VALVE FLANGE HTHW HIGH TEMPERATURE HOT WATER (140°F) (E) PF#EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURE / EQUIPMENT (D) PF#DEMOLISHED PLUMBING FIXTURE / EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION: A. ALL NEW PIPING AND EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CURRENTLY ADOPTED UNIFORM PLUMBING AND INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODES. B. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED LEVEL, PLUMB, AND FIRMLY ANCHORED IN LOCATIONS INDICATED. OBSERVE MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND RECOGNIZED INDUSTRY PRACTICES TO ENSURE THAT PRODUCTS SERVE THEIR INTENDED FUNCTION. C. DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC IN NATURE. THE PURPOSE OF THESE PLANS IS TO INDICATE THE INTENDED SIZES, APPROXIMATE LOCATION AND ROUTING OF MAJOR COMPONENTS. ACTUAL CONDITIONS AND LOCATIONS SHALL BE FIELD VERIFIED AND ADJUSTED IF NECESSARY. D. PROVIDE AND INSTALL SEISMIC BRACING FOR ALL EQUIPMENTNAND PIPING PER THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CURRENTLY ADOPTED INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE. E. ELEMENTS PENETRATING BUILDING COMPONENTS (ROOF ASSEMBLIES, WALL ASSEMBLIES, ETC.) SHALL BE SEALED WEATHER AND WATER TIGHT. COORDINATE PENETRATIONS WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PATCH TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER. F. ALL MATERIAL THAT IS IN CONTACT WITH POTABLE DOMESTIC WATER SHALL BE NSF CERTIFIED LEAD FREE. COORDINATION: A. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO FIELD COORDINATE THE LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ROUTING OF PIPING WITH ALL OTHER TRADES. B. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO REVIEW THE DRAWINGS FOR ALL DICIPLINES AND PROVIDE ALL LABOR AND MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. ELECTRICAL COORDINATION: A. SEE THE MEP COORDINATION SCHEDULE ON SHEET M001 FOR ELECTRICAL INFORMATION. COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES TO ENSURE THAT ALL ELECTRICAL DISCONNECTS, MOTOR STARTERS, VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES, CONTROLS, AND ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES ARE FURNISHED AND/OR INSTALLED BY THE APPROPRIATE TRADE. SITE ELEVATION: A. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE SELECTED FOR THE PROJECT ELEVATION OF 4,820’. PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES M O N T N APROFE SSIONA L E N G IN EERCARLY M. SVENVOLD No. 80662 PE LICE N DES A Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.04.24 Design Pricing Carly M. Svenvold 80662 6/22/2026 3:22:12 PM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ MEP_R26.rvtP001 PLUMBING LEGEND, SCHEDULES, & DETAILS Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 Bidding and PermitProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT PLUMBING SHEET INDEX NUMBER SHEET NAME P001 PLUMBING LEGEND, SCHEDULES, & DETAILS PD100 BASEMENT DEMO - PLUMBING PD101 LEVEL ONE LOWER DEMO - PLUMBING PD102 LEVEL ONE UPPER DEMO - PLUMBING P100 BASEMENT - PLUMBING P101 LEVEL ONE - PLUMBING NOTES: PROVIDE ALL FIXTURES WITH APPROPRIATE COMMERCIAL GRADE SUPPORTS/CARRIERS, P-TRAPS, STOP VALVLES, BRAIDED FLEXIBLE SUPPLIES, UNDER FIXTURE PIPING INSULATION AND HAMMER ARRESTORS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL TRAP PRIMERS FOR ALL FLOOR DRAINS AND FLOOR SINKS UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. INSTALL ALL TRAP PRIMERS IN RECESSED WALL MOUNTED BOXES IN AN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION. FIELD COORDINATE INSTALLATION LOCATION OF TRAP PRIMER WALL BOXES, WATER CLOSETS, LAVATORIES, AND URINALS FOR ADA COMPLIANCY WITH ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. VB-1 SIOUX CHIEF 696-G2313 WASHING MACHINE VALVE BOX ABS N / A - - 2" 1-1/2" 1/2" 1/2" PROVIDE COMPLETE WITH TOP MOUNTED QUARTER TURN STOP VALVES AND 2" SLIPNUT DRAIN. WC-2 SLOAN ST-2309 CHILD WATER CLOSET VITREOUS CHINA SLOAN 111-1.6-CP MANUAL FLUSH VALVE - - 4" 2" 1" - - FLOOR- MOUNTED - MANUAL FLUSH VALVE - 1.6 GAL/FLUSH. PROVIDE ELONGATED OPEN FRONT TOILET SEAT, HEAVY DUTY COMMERCIAL. FLUSH VALVE LEVER SHALL BE 36" AFF MAX. WC-1 SLOAN ST-2459 WATER CLOSET VITREOUS CHINA SLOAN 111-1.28-CP MANUAL FLUSH VALVE - - 4" 2" 1" - - WALL- MOUNTED - MANUAL FLUSH VALVE - 1.28 GAL/FLUSH. PROVIDE ELONGATED OPEN FRONT TOILET SEAT, HEAVY DUTY COMMERCIAL - JR SMITH COMPACT HORIZONTAL CARRIER. SK-1 ELKAY DLR312210 31"x22"x10" SINGLE BOWL SINK STAINLESS STEEL T&S BRASS MPJ-8CLN-08-CR - - 2" 1-1/2" 1/2" 1/2" PROVIDE COMPLETE WITH CHROME P-TRAP, QUARTER TURN STOP VALVES, BASKET STRAINER, AND OFFSET DRAIN W/ TRUEBRO LAV GUARD II PIPE INSULATION. 1.0 GPM AERATED FAUCET. COORDINATE FAUCET FINISH SELECTION WITH ARCHITECT. LAV-2 SLOAN SS3006 CHILD LAVATORY VITREOUS CHINA KOHLER K-400T29-5ANL MANUAL FAUCET - - 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 1/2" 1/2" PROVIDE JR SMITH #700 SERIES CARRIER, WATER STOPS, OFFSET DRAIN W/ TRUEBRO LAV GUARD II PIPE INSULATION. PROVIDE ASSE 1070 TEMPERATURE LIMITING DEVICE. COORDINATE MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECTURAL. 3 HOLES 4" ON CENTER. LAV-1 SLOAN SS3006 LAVATORY VITREOUS CHINA KOHLER K-400T29-5ANL MANUAL FAUCET - - 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 1/2" 1/2" PROVIDE JR SMITH #700 SERIES CARRIER, WATERS TOPS, OFFSET DRAIN WITH TRUEBRO LAV GUARD II PIPE INSULATION. PROVIDE ASSE 1070 TEMPERATURE LIMITING DEVICE. COORDINATE MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECTURAL. 3 HOLES 4" ON CENTER. DF-1 ELKAY EZWS-EDFPBM117K BI-LEVEL DRINKING FOUNTAIN WITH BOTTLE FILL STAINLESS STEEL N / A - - 2" 1-1/2" 1/2" - - NO LEAD DESIGN - WALL MOUNTED - DUAL HEIGHT - NON-REFRIGERATED, NON-FILTERED. PROVIDE TRAP AND WATER STOP. RL/ORL WASTE VENT COLD HOT MARK MFGR MODEL # DESCRIPTION MATERIAL & FINISH TRIM ROUGH-IN SIZE REMARKS PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7.9 8 9 K J I.5 I H G.9 G F E D C B A (E) 1" DCW (E) 4" SAN (E) 4" SAN (E) 3" SAN (E) 1/2" DCW (E) 2 1/2" DCW (E) 2 1/2" DCW (E) 4" SAN (E) 4" SAN (E) 1 1/2" DCW (E) 2" DCW (E) 4" SAN (E) 4" SAN (E) 2" SAN (D) 1/2" DCW (E) 2" SAN (E) 1 1/2" V (E) 1 1/2" DCW (E) 2" V (E) 1 1/2" V (E) CO (E) 2" SAN (E) 1 1/2" DCW (E) 4" SAN (E) 1 1/2" V (E) 2" SAN (E) 3/4" DCW (E) 3" SAN (E) 4" SAN (E) 2" DCW (E) 4" SAN (E) 2" DCW (E) 3/4" DCW (E) 2" SAN (E) 2" SAN(E) 1/2" DCW (E) 1/2" DCW (E) 1 1/2" V (E) 4" SAN (E) 1" DCW 1 NOT IN SCOPE (E) 2" SAN (E) 3/4" DCW (E) 4" SAN (E) 1/2" DCW M O N T N APROFE SSIONA L E N G IN EERCARLY M. SVENVOLD No. 80662 PE LICE N DES A Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.04.24 Design Pricing Carly M. Svenvold 80662 6/22/2026 3:22:13 PM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ MEP_R26.rvtPD100 BASEMENT DEMO - PLUMBING Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 Bidding and PermitProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"PD100 1 BASEMENT DEMO - PLUMBING PLUMBING DEMO NOTES A. LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF EXISTING FACILITIES IDENTIFIED ON THIS DRAWING ARE APPROXIMATE AND REPRESENT THE BEST AVAILABLE INFORMATION BASED ON A COMBINATION OF FIELD INVESTIGATIONS AND VARIOUS DESIGN AND RECORD DRAWINGS AVAILABLE AT THE TIME OF DESIGN. FIELD VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING EQUIPMENT AND DURING PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK. PROVIDE ALL DEMOLITION WORK, NECESSARY FITTINGS, TRANSITIONS, AND OTHER COMPONENTS AS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND FUNCTIONAL INSTALLATION OF NEW SYSTEMS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. B. EXISTING PLUMBING EQUIPMENT, FIXTURES, AND PIPING SHOWN AS DARK AND DASHED SHALL BE DEMOLISHED. EXISTING PLUMBING EQUIPMENT, FIXTURES, AND PIPING SHOWN LIGHT ARE TO REMAIN UNCHANGED. C. THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE SALVAGE OF ALL REMOVED EQUIPMENT IN GOOD CONDITION WITH THE OWNER. THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL DISPOSE OF ALL UNWANTED EQUIPMENT. D. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PATCH AND REPAIR ROOF AND WALL ASSEMBLIES ASSOCIATED WITH PLUMBING DEMOLITION. E. CONCRETE SLAB CUTTING REGIONS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS ARE APPROXIMATE AND MUST BE FIELD COORDINATED PRIOR TO THE CUTTING OF THE SLAB. F. PROTECT EXISTING BUILDING ELEMENTS DURING DEMOLITION WORK. COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES TO ENSURE NO EXISTING EQUIPMENT/PIPING TO REMAIN IS DAMAGED DURING THE DEMOLITION WORK. KEY NOTES:# 1. DEMOLISH 2" SAN TAP AND 2" SAN UP AND PREPARE MAIN FOR RECONNECTION. REF-21 2 3 4 5 6 7 7.9 8 9 K J I.5 I H G.9 G F E D C B A 3 11 22 (E) FD (E) FD NOT IN SCOPE (E) HWH-3 M O N T N APROFE SSIONA L E N G IN EERCARLY M. SVENVOLD No. 80662 PE LICE N DES A Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.04.24 Design Pricing Carly M. Svenvold 80662 6/22/2026 3:22:15 PM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ MEP_R26.rvtPD101 LEVEL ONE LOWER DEMO - PLUMBING Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 Bidding and PermitProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"PD101 1 LEVEL ONE LOWER DEMO - PLUMBING PLUMBING DEMO NOTES A. LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF EXISTING FACILITIES IDENTIFIED ON THIS DRAWING ARE APPROXIMATE AND REPRESENT THE BEST AVAILABLE INFORMATION BASED ON A COMBINATION OF FIELD INVESTIGATIONS AND VARIOUS DESIGN AND RECORD DRAWINGS AVAILABLE AT THE TIME OF DESIGN. FIELD VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING EQUIPMENT AND DURING PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK. PROVIDE ALL DEMOLITION WORK, NECESSARY FITTINGS, TRANSITIONS, AND OTHER COMPONENTS AS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND FUNCTIONAL INSTALLATION OF NEW SYSTEMS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. B. EXISTING PLUMBING EQUIPMENT, FIXTURES, AND PIPING SHOWN AS DARK AND DASHED SHALL BE DEMOLISHED. EXISTING PLUMBING EQUIPMENT, FIXTURES, AND PIPING SHOWN LIGHT ARE TO REMAIN UNCHANGED. C. THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE SALVAGE OF ALL REMOVED EQUIPMENT IN GOOD CONDITION WITH THE OWNER. THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL DISPOSE OF ALL UNWANTED EQUIPMENT. D. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PATCH AND REPAIR ROOF AND WALL ASSEMBLIES ASSOCIATED WITH PLUMBING DEMOLITION. E. CONCRETE SLAB CUTTING REGIONS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS ARE APPROXIMATE AND MUST BE FIELD COORDINATED PRIOR TO THE CUTTING OF THE SLAB. F. PROTECT EXISTING BUILDING ELEMENTS DURING DEMOLITION WORK. COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES TO ENSURE NO EXISTING EQUIPMENT/PIPING TO REMAIN IS DAMAGED DURING THE DEMOLITION WORK. KEY NOTES:# 1. DEMOLISH EXISTING FIXTURE. RETAIN ASSOCIATED PIPING FOR RECONNECTION. 2. DEMOLISH EXISTING LAVATORY AND ASSOCIATED PIPING. 3. DEMOLISH SINK AND ASSOCIATED VENT PIPING. SEE PD102 FOR EXTENTS. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7.9 8 9 K J I.5 I H G.9 G F E D C B A (E) 2" V (E) 3/4" DHW (E) 3/4" DHWR (E) 3/4" DCW (E) 1 1/2" V (E) 1/2" DHW (E) 2" V (E) 3/4" DHW (E) 3/4" DHWR (E) 3" V (E) 3" V (E) 1 1/2" V (E) 3" V (E) 1 1/2" V (E) 3/4" DHW (E) 3/4" DHWR (E) 3" V (E) 1 1/2" V (E) 3" V (E) 2" V (D) 2" V NOT IN SCOPE (D) 3/4" DHWR (E) 3/4" DHW (E) 3/4" DHWR (E) 1/2" DHW (D) 1/2" DHW M O N T N APROFE SSIONA L E N G IN EERCARLY M. SVENVOLD No. 80662 PE LICE N DES A Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.04.24 Design Pricing Carly M. Svenvold 80662 6/22/2026 3:22:16 PM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ MEP_R26.rvtPD102 LEVEL ONE UPPER DEMO - PLUMBING Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 Bidding and PermitProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"PD102 1 LEVEL ONE UPPER DEMO - PLUMBING PLUMBING DEMO NOTES A. LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF EXISTING FACILITIES IDENTIFIED ON THIS DRAWING ARE APPROXIMATE AND REPRESENT THE BEST AVAILABLE INFORMATION BASED ON A COMBINATION OF FIELD INVESTIGATIONS AND VARIOUS DESIGN AND RECORD DRAWINGS AVAILABLE AT THE TIME OF DESIGN. FIELD VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO ORDERING EQUIPMENT AND DURING PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK. PROVIDE ALL DEMOLITION WORK, NECESSARY FITTINGS, TRANSITIONS, AND OTHER COMPONENTS AS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND FUNCTIONAL INSTALLATION OF NEW SYSTEMS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. B. EXISTING PLUMBING EQUIPMENT, FIXTURES, AND PIPING SHOWN AS DARK AND DASHED SHALL BE DEMOLISHED. EXISTING PLUMBING EQUIPMENT, FIXTURES, AND PIPING SHOWN LIGHT ARE TO REMAIN UNCHANGED. C. THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE SALVAGE OF ALL REMOVED EQUIPMENT IN GOOD CONDITION WITH THE OWNER. THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL DISPOSE OF ALL UNWANTED EQUIPMENT. D. COORDINATE WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PATCH AND REPAIR ROOF AND WALL ASSEMBLIES ASSOCIATED WITH PLUMBING DEMOLITION. E. CONCRETE SLAB CUTTING REGIONS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS ARE APPROXIMATE AND MUST BE FIELD COORDINATED PRIOR TO THE CUTTING OF THE SLAB. F. PROTECT EXISTING BUILDING ELEMENTS DURING DEMOLITION WORK. COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES TO ENSURE NO EXISTING EQUIPMENT/PIPING TO REMAIN IS DAMAGED DURING THE DEMOLITION WORK. KEY NOTES:# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7.9 8 9 K J I.5 I H G.9 G F E D C B A (E) 4" SAN (E) 1 1/2" DCW (E) 2" SAN (E) 4" SAN (E) 4" SAN (E) 3" SAN (E) 4" SAN (E) 3" SAN (E) 2 1/2" DCW (E) 2 1/2" DCW (E) 1/2" DCW (E) 1/2" DCW (E) 4" SAN (E) 4" SAN (E) 4" SAN (E) 2" V (E) 2" DCW (E) 2" DCW (E) 4" SAN (E) 3/4" DCW (E) 4" SAN (E) 4" SAN (E) 1/2" DCW (E) 2" SAN (E) 1" DCW (E) 2" SAN (E) 1 1/2" DCW (E) 1 1/2" V (E) 2" SAN (E) 3/4" DCW (E) 3" SAN (E) 4" SAN (E) 1 1/2" V (E) 1/2" DCW (E) 2" SAN (E) GI-1 (E) 4" SAN 2" SAN (E) 2" SAN 4" SAN UP2 1 1/2" DCW (E) 1 1/2" DCW 2" SAN UP 3/4" DHW UP 3/4" DHWR UP 3/4" DHWR 3/4" DHW (E) 3/4" DCW 3/4" DCW 1/2" DCW UP NOT IN SCOPE 1 1/2" DCW UP 3 3 C.O. M O N T N APROFE SSIONA L E N G IN EERCARLY M. SVENVOLD No. 80662 PE LICE N DES A Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.04.24 Design Pricing Carly M. Svenvold 80662 6/22/2026 3:22:17 PM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ MEP_R26.rvtP100 BASEMENT - PLUMBING Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 Bidding and PermitProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"P100 1 BASEMENT - PLUMBING A. PROVIDE ACCESS DOORS TO ALLOW SERVICE AND INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT, VALVES, AND OTHER DEVICES INSTALLED ABOVE NON- REMOVABLE CEILINGS. COORDINATE SUCH INSTALLATIONS WITH ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. B. PROVIDE TRAP SEALS FOR ALL FLOOR DRAINS AND SINKS. C. PROVIDE TRAP PRIMERS FOR ALL FLOOR DRAINS AND SINKS. LOCATE TRAP PRIMERS IN A VALVE BOX AS INDICATED ON PLAN. D. INSTALL ACCESSIBLE PLUMBING FIXTURES IN COMPLIANCE WITH ADA REQUIREMENTS. INSULATE ALL EXPOSED PIPING BELOW ADA ACCESSIBLE FIXTURES. E. INSTALL FLOOR DRAIN STRAINERS AND CLEANOUT COVERS FLUSH AND LEVEL WITH FINISHED FLOOR. F. ALL PIPING SHALL BE IDENTIFIED WITH PIPE LABELS MARKED AT A MAXIMUM OF EVERY 25 FT. ALL VALVES SHALL BE IDENTIFIED WITH BRASS OR ALUMINUM VALVE TAGS. G. PROVIDE AND INSTALL PIPE GUIDES, EXPANSION JOINTS, AND HANGERS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. H. ALL PIPING WALL PENETRATIONS SHALL HAVE A CHROME ESCUTCHEON PLATE. I. NO FITTINGS OR PIPING CONNECTIONS ARE ALLOWED UNDER SLAB. J. ALL GAS PIPING IS TO BE WELDED IN CONCEALED SPACES. K. REFER TO THE PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE FOR PIPE SIZES TO INDIVIDUAL FIXTURES. L. COORDINATE ALL CONCRETE PENETRATIONS WITH STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS TO VERIFY HOW AND WHERE CONCRETE CAN BE CUT. M. ALL EXPOSED PIPING TO BE PAINTED PER ARCHITECTURAL OR PROVIDED WITH A PVC COATED JACKET IN THE COLOR OF THE ARCHITECT'S CHOOSING. CONTRACTOR TO CLEAN AND DRY PIPING PRIOR TO PAINTING. N. SANITARY SEWER, RAINWATER, AND OTHER DRAIN PIPING SHALL BE INSTALLED AT A MINIMUM 1/4" PER FOOT (2%) SLOPE IN DIRECTION OF FLOW. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES KEY NOTES:# 1. 2" SAN UP TO DF. 2. 4" SAN UP TO WATER CLOSETS. CONTINUE UP WITH 2" V TO CEILING SPACE. 3. 1-1/2" SAN AND 1/2" DCW UP TO LAV. REF-2W/D DW1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7.9 8 9 K J I.5 I H G.9 G F E D C B A (E) 1/2" DHW (E) 3/4" DHW (E) 3/4" DHWR (E) 3" V (E) 3" V (E) 3/4" DHW (E) 3/4" DHWR (E) 1/2" DHW (E) 1 1/2" V (E) 2" V (E) 3/4" DCW (E) 3" V (E) 1 1/2" V (E) 1 1/2" V (E) 3" V (E) 3/4" DHWR (E) 3/4" DHW (E) 2" V (E) 1/2" DHW (E) 2" V (E) WH 2" V 3/4" DHW 3/4" DHW 2" V SK-1 WB-1 (E) 3" V 3/4" DHW 3/4" DHWR NOT IN SCOPE (E) 2" V DF-1 WC-1 WC-2 LAV-1 LAV-2LAV-1 LAV-2 1 (E) HWH-3 2 2" V2" V 3 4 5 M O N T N APROFE SSIONA L E N G IN EERCARLY M. SVENVOLD No. 80662 PE LICE N DES A Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.04.24 Design Pricing Carly M. Svenvold 80662 6/22/2026 3:22:18 PM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ MEP_R26.rvtP101 LEVEL ONE - PLUMBING Bidding and Permit 2026.06.29 Bidding and PermitProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W, Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, IT 1/8" = 1'-0"P101 1 LEVEL ONE - PLUMBING A. PROVIDE ACCESS DOORS TO ALLOW SERVICE AND INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT, VALVES, AND OTHER DEVICES INSTALLED ABOVE NON- REMOVABLE CEILINGS. COORDINATE SUCH INSTALLATIONS WITH ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER. B. PROVIDE TRAP SEALS FOR ALL FLOOR DRAINS AND SINKS. C. PROVIDE TRAP PRIMERS FOR ALL FLOOR DRAINS AND SINKS. LOCATE TRAP PRIMERS IN A VALVE BOX AS INDICATED ON PLAN. D. INSTALL ACCESSIBLE PLUMBING FIXTURES IN COMPLIANCE WITH ADA REQUIREMENTS. INSULATE ALL EXPOSED PIPING BELOW ADA ACCESSIBLE FIXTURES. E. INSTALL FLOOR DRAIN STRAINERS AND CLEANOUT COVERS FLUSH AND LEVEL WITH FINISHED FLOOR. F. ALL PIPING SHALL BE IDENTIFIED WITH PIPE LABELS MARKED AT A MAXIMUM OF EVERY 25 FT. ALL VALVES SHALL BE IDENTIFIED WITH BRASS OR ALUMINUM VALVE TAGS. G. PROVIDE AND INSTALL PIPE GUIDES, EXPANSION JOINTS, AND HANGERS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. H. ALL PIPING WALL PENETRATIONS SHALL HAVE A CHROME ESCUTCHEON PLATE. I. NO FITTINGS OR PIPING CONNECTIONS ARE ALLOWED UNDER SLAB. J. ALL GAS PIPING IS TO BE WELDED IN CONCEALED SPACES. K. REFER TO THE PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE FOR PIPE SIZES TO INDIVIDUAL FIXTURES. L. COORDINATE ALL CONCRETE PENETRATIONS WITH STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS TO VERIFY HOW AND WHERE CONCRETE CAN BE CUT. M. ALL EXPOSED PIPING TO BE PAINTED PER ARCHITECTURAL OR PROVIDED WITH A PVC COATED JACKET IN THE COLOR OF THE ARCHITECT'S CHOOSING. CONTRACTOR TO CLEAN AND DRY PIPING PRIOR TO PAINTING. N. SANITARY SEWER, RAINWATER, AND OTHER DRAIN PIPING SHALL BE INSTALLED AT A MINIMUM 1/4" PER FOOT (2%) SLOPE IN DIRECTION OF FLOW. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES KEY NOTES:# 1. REROUTE VENT SERVING SK-1 THROUGH CASEWORK. 2. 3/4" DHW AND 3/4" DHWR DOWN TO CRAWL SPACE. 3. PROVIDE 3/4" DCW CONNECTION TO DISHWASHER ROUTED THROUGH CASEWORK. CONNECT DISHWASHER DRAIN TO EXISTING SANITARY SERVING SINK. 4. COORDINATE LAVATORY MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. 5. COORDINATE DRINKING FOUNTAIN MOUNTING HEIGHTS WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. XX X ICT ABBREVIATIONS LEGEND AFC ABOVE FINISHED CEILING ACT ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE AHJ AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION AP ACCESS POINT (WIRELESS, TYP.) AV AUDIO-VISUAL AWG AMERICAN WIRE GAUGE BAS BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM C.CONDUIT CAT CATEGORY CFCI CONTRACTOR FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED CFOI CONTRACTOR FURNISHED, OWNER INSTALLED CMP COMMUNICATIONS PLENUM (RATED) CMR COMMUNICATIONS RISER (RATED) CU COPPER (D)DEMOLISHED DIM DIMENSION DMARC DEMARCATION DPS DOOR POSITION SWITCH (E), EX.EXISTING EA EACH EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR (DIV 26) EF ENTRANCE FACILITY E.L.ELECTRIFIED LATCH EMT ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING EPT ELECTRIC POWER TRANSFER ER EQUIPMENT ROOM FACP FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL FLR FLOOR GND GROUND HT HEIGHT/HIGH I/O INDOOR/OUTDOOR ICT INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY IDS INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM IMC INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT ISP INTERNET SERVICE PROVIDER J-BOX JUNCTION BOX MFR MANUFACTURER MH MAINTENANCE HOLE MIN MINIMUM MMF MULTI-MODE FIBER MUTOA MULTI-USER TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET ASSEMBLY (N)NEW NEC NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE NEMA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NIC NOT IN CONTRACT NTS NOT TO SCALE O.C.ON CENTER OFCI OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED OFOI OWNER FURNISHED, OWNER INSTALLED OH OVERHEAD OSP OUTSIDE PLANT CABLE PB PULLBOX PBB PRIMARY BONDING BUSBAR PEX PRESS TO EXIT PoE POWER OVER ETHERNET PP PATCH PANEL QEL QUIET ELECTRIFIED LATCH QTY QUANTITY REQ REQUIREMENT RM ROOM REX REQUEST TO EXIT SBB SECONDARY BONDING BUSBAR SMF SINGLE-MODE FIBER SP SERVICE PROVIDER SPEC SPECIFICATION STP SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR TR TELECOM ROOM TTB TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARD TYP TYPICAL UG UNDERGROUND UPS UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE UTP UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR VIF VERIFY IN FIELD W/WITH W/O WITHOUT WAO WORK AREA OUTLET WAP WIRELESS ACCESS POINT WP WEATHERPROOF TELECOM PROJECT GENERAL NOTES 1. THIS PROJECT IS TO CONFORM TO THE LATEST LOCALLY ADOPTED VERSION OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE AND THE LATEST REVISION OF: ANSI/TIA-526-7-A, Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant, and its published addenda. ANSI/TIA-526-14-C, Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant, and its published addenda. ANSI/TIA-568.0-E, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises, and its published addenda. ANSI/TIA-568.1-E, Commercial Building Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard, and its published addenda. ANSI/TIA-568.2-E, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard, and its published addenda. ANSI/TIA-568.3-E, Optical Fiber Cabling and Components Standard, and its published addenda. ANSI/TIA-569-E, Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces, and its published addenda ANSI/TIA-598-D Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding ANSI/TIA-606-D, Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure, and its published addenda ANSI/TIA-607-D, Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises, and its published addenda. ANSI/TIA-758-C, Customer Owned Outside-Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard, and its published addenda. 2. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS, PRODUCT INSTALLATION, AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS. 3. ALL DIMENSIONS MUST BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD AND ANY DEVIATIONS CAUSING CHANGES EXCEEDING 6 INCHES TO THE INTENDED LOCATION OF MAJOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE COMPONENTS MUST BE COORDINATED WITH THE ARCHITECT AND DESIGNER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 4. ALL ICT DEVICES SHALL BE SECURELY MOUNTED PLUMB AND STRAIGHT TO WALLS, FLOORS, OR RACKS, PER THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED MOUNTING PRACTICE, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED IN THE ICT DRAWINGS. 5. ALL CABLES SHALL BE RATED FOR THE ENVIRONMENT IN WHICH THEY ARE INSTALLED. 6. INSTALL FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES IN ALL THROUGH-SLAB AND THROUGH-WALL PENETRATIONS FOR THE INSTALLATION OF ICT CABLING AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN FIRE RATING OF PENETRATED SLAB OR WALL. REVIEW DRAWINGS FOR PARTITION TYPE RATINGS. FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS USED FOR ALL PENETRATIONS SHALL BE A UL LISTED ASSEMBLY AND APPROVED BY APPLICABLE AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 7. THE METHOD OF INSTALLATION FOR ALL ICT RELATED BACK BOXES IN WALLS AND THE METHOD FOR PASSAGE OF CONDUIT AND WIREWAYS THROUGH ACOUSTICALLY SENSITIVE WALLS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE ACOUSTICAL CONSULTANT OR OWNER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 8. BOND ALL CONDUITS, CABLE TRAYS, AND JUNCTION BOXES PER ANSI/TIA-607-D IN ADDITION TO ANY APPLICABLE CODE REQUIREMENTS. 9. ALL ICT RELATED FLOOR BOXES, POKE THRU DEVICES, JUNCTION BOXES AND BACK BOXES SHOULD BE PROVIDED WITH AN EMPTY CONDUIT TO THE APPLICABLE TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM, CABLE TRAY PATHWAY OR PULL BOX. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS. 10. CONDUIT ROUTES ON THE ICT DRAWINGS SHOW ONLY INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN THE TERMINATION POINTS AND APPROXIMATE ROUTES. THE EXACT ROUTE OF CONDUIT AND CABLE PATHWAYS ARE DETERMINED BY FIELD CONDITIONS AND VERIFIED BY INSTALLING CONTRACTOR. 11. NOTIFY THE DESIGNER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE EXISTING CONDITIONS AND THE "T" (ICT) DRAWINGS. OBTAIN CLARIFICATION BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. 12. ALL PATHWAY AND RACEWAY INCLUDING CONDUIT SLEEVES, FLOOR BOXES, OUTLET BOXES AND CONDUIT BY ELECTRICAL, UNO. 13. ALL CABLES SHALL BE SUPPORTED EVERY 48" O.C. MAX. BY J-HOOKS, CABLE TRAY, OR IN CONDUIT. 14. ALL CABLES RUN IN CONDUIT UNDER SLAB SHALL BE INDOOR/OUTDOOR RATED CATEGORY 6A. 15. CABLE GAUGE AND NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS ARE SHOWN IN THE FORMAT: AWG/# (EX. 16/2 = 16 AWG / 2 CONDUCTOR) 16. CALL 811 PRIOR TO PERFORMING ANY EXCAVATION. ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS GENERAL NOTES A. THE ABBREVIATIONS ON THIS SHEET COMPRISE A STANDARD LIST; NOT ALL ABBREVIATIONS APPEAR ON THIS PROJECT. B. THE SYMBOLS ON THIS SHEET COMPRISE A STANDARD LIST; NOT ALL SYMBOLS APPEAR ON THIS PROJECT. C. ALL MOUNTING HEIGHTS ARE TO CENTER OF DEVICE ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. MOUNTING HEIGHTS INDICATED ON ARCHITECTURAL WALL ELEVATIONS OR AS NOTED SPECIFICALLY ON THE DRAWINGS OR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER MOUNTING HEIGHTS LISTED. CABLE ROUTING LEGEND CABLE PATHWAY EMT CONDUIT SLEEVE LADDER RACK, WITH RUNGS 12" OC VERTICAL TRANSITION BETWEEN FLOORS OR GRADE HORIZONTAL TRANSITION BETWEEN SHEETS AND/OR DETAILS TELECOM LEGEND WORK AREA OUTLET - WALL MOUNT AT +18", UNO. "X" INDICATES NUMBER OF CAT 6A JACKS. SEE NOTE. NOTE: PROVIDE 4" SQUARE BOX (2-1/8" DEEP) WITH SINGLE-GANG MUD RING & 1" EMT CONDUIT STUBBED UP TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE. WORK AREA OUTLET - CEILING MOUNT. "X" INDICATES NUMBER OF CAT 6A JACKS. PROVIDE 15' SERVICE LOOP. WORK AREA OUTLET - FLOOR MOUNT. "X" INDICATES NUMBER OF CAT 6A JACKS. USE CONDUIT PROVIDED BY ELECTRICAL AND ROUTE CABLES TO NEAREST CABLE PATHWAY. IS S EFORP LANO E N G INEERO NTM ANA LICENS E D PAUL HEFFERNAN No. 91429 PE Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 91429 Paul Heffernan 6/17/2026 4:41:12 PM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ICT_R26.rvtT001 ICT SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS Bidding and Permit 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W | Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, ICT WAO, PROVIDE 4" SQUARE BOX (2-1/8" DEEP) WITH SINGLE GANG MUD RING 1" EMT CONDUIT TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE ON SAME LEVEL AS WORK AREA OUTLET. ACCESSIBLE CEILING J-HOOKS EVERY 48", PROVIDE ROOM FOR 50% GROWTH TWISTED PAIR CABLES, TYPICALLY CAT 6 OR 6A 12" SERVICE LOOP CONDUIT SHALL RUN TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE PROVIDE BUSHING FOR END OF CONDUIT NOTES: • NO SINGLE BEND IN 1" EMT CONDUIT SHALL EXCEED 90 DEGREES. • THE AGGREGATE OF CONDUIT BENDS SHALL NOT EXCEED 180 DEGREES • CONDUIT SHALL STUB TO CEILING SPACE ON SAME LEVEL AS WORK AREA OUTLET. INSTALLATION NOTES: • LABELS SHALL BE ELECTRONICALLY GENERATED AND: • PROVIDE VINYL SUBSTRATE WITH WHITE PRINTING AREA AND A CLEAR 'TAIL' THAT SELF LAMINATES THE PRINTED AREA WHEN WRAPPED AROUND THE PRINTED AREA. IF CABLE IS WHITE IN COLOR, A DIFFERENT COLOR SHALL BE USED. • CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL TYPED LABEL ON EACH TELECOM ROOM, JACK, FACEPLATE, PATCH PANEL, AND AT EACH END OF EVERY CABLE INSTALLED BY THIS CONTRACTOR. • LABEL EACH CABLE/WIRE WITHIN 12" OF EACH TERMINATION POINT, BUT ENSURE THAT AT LEAST 3" SHALL REMAIN BETWEEN LABEL AND TERMINATION POINT. • CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT AND REVIEW THE FINAL LABELING SCHEME WITH THE DESIGNER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. • LABELING SHALL FOLLOW ANSI/TIA-606-D, UNLESS THE OWNER SPECIFIES THEIR OWN LABELING REQUIREMENTS. TR# - RACK - PP - PORT 3" MIN 12" MAX PATCH PANEL "A" WAO LABELING EXAMPLE: • FOR A DUPLEX WAO THAT TERMINATES IN TR 01, RACK 2, PATCH PANEL C, PORTS 36 & 37: THE CORRESPONDING LABELS SHOULD LOOK LIKE 01-2-C-36 AND 01-2-C-37, RESPECTIVELY. • FOR TRs (TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOMS) WITH A COMBINED TOTAL OF ONE TELECOMMUNICATIONS RACK AND/OR CABINET, THE RACK/CABINET IDENTIFIER MAY BE DROPPED FROM THE LABEL (I.E. "TR# - PP - PORT). TR# - RACK - PP - PORT TR# - RACK - PP - PORT TR# -RACK -PORT TR# -- PORTRACK- PP A 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 - PP WIRE ROD SUPPORT. MOUNT J-HOOKS ACCORDING TO FIELD CONDITIONS (TYP.) MOUNT J HOOKS 48" APART. REFER TO MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. 12" MAX. 6" MAX. CABLE SAG BETWEEN J- HOOKS REFER TO CABLE MANUFACTURER FOR MINIMUM BEND RADIUS. TO DATA OUTLETS AND FIELD DEVICES TIE CABLE BUNDLE TO J HOOK USING AN APPROVED PLENUM RATED CABLE RESTRAINT (TYP.) BUNDLE CABLES WITH AN APPROVED PLENUM RATED HOOK AND LOOP STRAP (TYP.). J-HOOK CABLE SUPPORT. SIZE AS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT THE NUMBER OF CABLES. DO NOT EXCEED 40% FILL RATIO. TO CABLE TRAY TO DATA OUTLETS AND FIELD DEVICES N.T.S.1 WORK AREA OUTLET (WAO) DETAIL N.T.S.2 DATA CABLE LABELING DETAIL N.T.S.3 J-HOOK DETAIL IS S EFORP LANO E N G INEERO NTM ANA LICENS E D PAUL HEFFERNAN No. 91429 PE Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 91429 Paul Heffernan 6/17/2026 4:41:12 PM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ICT_R26.rvtT002 ICT DETAILS Bidding and Permit 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W | Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, ICT REF-21 2 3 4 5 6 7 7.9 8 9 A B C D E F G G.9 H I I.5 J K (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D) (D)(D) (D) WAOS IN EXISTING WIREMOLD. SEE ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL INFO. GENERAL ICT DEMO NOTES A. IT IS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY FOR ALL TRADES INVOLVED TO COORDINATE WITH EACH OTHER. B. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CUTTING OF FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND ROOFS TO PERFORM THE REQUIRED WORK DEPICTED IN THESE DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL PATCHING OF HOLES TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. C. ALL WALL REGIONS SHOWN DASHED ARE EXISTING, TO BE DEMOLISHED, OR IN SOME CASES ARE EXISTING DOORWAYS TO BE WALLED IN. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY AFFECTED ICT SYSTEMS PRIOR TO BID, AND DURING CONSTRUCTION. D. DASHED WALLS, EQUIPMENT, AND DEVICES SHOWN BLACK, OR BLACK AND DASHED, IN HATCHED GRID REGION ARE EXISTING FOR DEMOLITION, AND ITEMS IN SOLID GREY ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN, UNO. E. THE DEVICE LAYOUT IN THESE DEMOLITION PLANS DOES NOT REFLECT ALL DEVICES OR CONDITIONS THE CONTRACTOR MAY FIND IN THE FIELD. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DEMOLTION OF DEVICES NOT SHOWN IN THE ICT DEMOLITION DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD-VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID. F. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL CABLING ASSOCIATED WITH DEMOED DEVICES (LABELED (D)) FROM SOURCE TO DESTINATION. G. ALL WORK AREA OUTLETS, CABLING, CAMERAS, KEYPADS, CARD READERS, RACKS, CABINETS, SPEAKERS, AND ACTIVE EQUIPMENT IN HATCHED GRID REGION SHALL BE RETURNED TO OWNER, UNO. IS S EFORP LANO E N G INEERO NTM ANA LICENS E D PAUL HEFFERNAN No. 91429 PE Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 91429 Paul Heffernan 6/17/2026 4:41:14 PM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ICT_R26.rvtTD101 LEVEL ONE - ICT DEMO PLAN Bidding and Permit 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W | Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, ICT 1/8" = 1'-0"TD101 1 LEVEL ONE ICT DEMOLITION PLAN REF-2W/D LNP21L25LNP21L25 LNP11L30DW1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7.9 8 9 A B C D E F G G.9 H I I.5 J K 2 22 2 2 2 2 T201 1 Sim 1 1 STAFF WORK 118 STORAGE / IT 120CHILDRENS ROOM 116 ACTIVE PLAY 116A THEME ROOM 113 FAMILY RESTROOM & WELLNESS ROOM 114 FAMILY RESTROOM 114A FAMILY RESTROOM 115 NOOK 116D 2 2 3 2 FOR WIRELESS ACCESS POINT FOR WIRELESS ACCESS POINT 2 2 2 1 2 4 2 1 2 1 2 1 GENERAL ICT NOTES A. IT IS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY FOR ALL TRADES INVOLVED TO COORDINATE WITH EACH OTHER AND VERIFY THAT THERE ARE NO CONFLICTS IN LOCATION OF DUCTS, CONDUITS, DIFFUSERS, BOXES, AND OTHER ITEMS THROUGHOUT THIS PROJECT BEFORE FINAL PLACEMENT OF MATERIALS. B. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CUTTING OF FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND ROOFS TO PERFORM THE REQUIRED WORK DEPICTED IN THESE DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL PATCHING OF HOLES TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. C. ALL SIZING, PLACEMENT, AND QUANTITIES FOR CONDUITS, CONDUIT SLEEVES, CABLE TRAY, AND LADDER RACK CALLED OUT ON STRUCTURED CABLING PLANS AND/OR ENLARGED VIEWS. D. ALL CONDUIT ENDS SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH PLASTIC BUSHINGS FOR CABLE PROTECTION. E. PROVIDE PULL STRINGS FOR ALL CONDUITS INSTALLED GREATER THAN 10'. F. PROVIDE SECURITY LOOP FOR ALL NEW CABLING IN STORAGE/IT 120. SECURITY LOOP SHALL BE LONG ENOUGH TO REACH FURTHEST CORNER OF THE ROOM PLUS AN ADDITIONAL 10'. IS S EFORP LANO E N G INEERO NTM ANA LICENS E D PAUL HEFFERNAN No. 91429 PE Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 91429 Paul Heffernan 6/17/2026 4:41:15 PM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ICT_R26.rvtT100 LEVEL ONE - ICT Bidding and Permit 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W | Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, ICT 1/8" = 1'-0"T100 1 LEVEL ONE ICT PLAN 1 RUN CABLING FOR FLOOR BOX THROUGH CRAWL SPACE BACK TO STORAGE/IT 120. 2 RUN 2" EMT CONDUIT SLEEVE BETWEEN SECTIONS OF ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE. 3 RUN 3" EMT CONDUIT SLEEVE BETWEEN SECTIONS OF ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE. 4 MOUNT WORK AREA OUTLET ABOVE COUNTER, MATCH ADJACENT ELECTRICAL RECEPTACLE HEIGHT. KEY NOTES:# (E) TWO POST RACK (E) TWO POST RACK (7' x 19" x 6") (E) LADDER RACK (E) 4' x 8' x 3/4" PLYWOOD BACKBOARD (E) GROUND BAR (E) (2) 4" EMT CONDUIT SLEEVES THROUGH ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE (E) 4" EMT CONDUIT SLEEVE. (E) CATEGORY 6A PATCH PANEL (E) HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGER ETHERNET SWITCH, BY OWNER (E) CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANEL (E) HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGER ETHERNET SWITCH, BY OWNER (E) CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANEL (E) HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGER ETHERNET SWITCH, BY OWNER (E) 3" EMT CONDUIT SLEEVE STUBBED FROM CRAWL SPACE BELOW. (E) 3" EMT CONDUIT SLEEVE. (E) 6-PORT POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT, 1RU (E) CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANEL (E) HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGER ETHERNET SWITCH, BY OWNER (N) CATEGORY 6A PATCH PANEL (N) HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGER ETHERNET SWITCH, BY OWNER (N) 3" EMT CONDUIT SLEEVE. SEE SHEET T100 FOR ADDITIONAL INFO. (E) TWO POST RACK (E) TWO POST RACK (E) LADDER RACK (E) (2) 4" EMT CONDUIT SLEEVES TO LEVEL ABOVE (E) 4" EMT CONDUIT SLEEVE (E) 3" EMT CONDUIT SLEEVE STUBBED FROM CRAWL SPACE BELOW. (E) 3" EMT CONDUIT SLEEVE. 3" EMT CONDUIT SLEEVE. SEE SHEET T100 FOR ADDITIONAL INFO. GENERAL ICT NOTES A. IT IS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY FOR ALL TRADES INVOLVED TO COORDINATE WITH EACH OTHER AND VERIFY THAT THERE ARE NO CONFLICTS IN LOCATION OF DUCTS, CONDUITS, DIFFUSERS, BOXES, AND OTHER ITEMS THROUGHOUT THIS PROJECT BEFORE FINAL PLACEMENT OF MATERIALS. B. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL CUTTING OF FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS, AND ROOFS TO PERFORM THE REQUIRED WORK DEPICTED IN THESE DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL PATCHING OF HOLES TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. C. ALL SIZING, PLACEMENT, AND QUANTITIES FOR CONDUITS, CONDUIT SLEEVES, CABLE TRAY, AND LADDER RACK CALLED OUT ON STRUCTURED CABLING PLANS AND/OR ENLARGED VIEWS. D. ALL CONDUIT ENDS SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH PLASTIC BUSHINGS FOR CABLE PROTECTION. E. PROVIDE PULL STRINGS FOR ALL CONDUITS INSTALLED GREATER THAN 10'. F. PROVIDE SECURITY LOOP FOR ALL NEW CABLING IN STORAGE/IT 120. SECURITY LOOP SHALL BE LONG ENOUGH TO REACH FURTHEST CORNER OF THE ROOM PLUS AN ADDITIONAL 10'. IS S EFORP LANO E N G INEERO NTM ANA LICENS E D PAUL HEFFERNAN No. 91429 PE Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. Drawing 2021 Copyright Meyer, Scherer & Rockcastle, Ltd. ISSUE / REVISION Signature Print Name Date License No DateMark Description 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 2026.06.29 91429 Paul Heffernan 6/17/2026 4:41:16 PM Autodesk Docs://2025021 Bozeman Childrens Room Renovation/5964.004 - BPL Childrens Room_ICT_R26.rvtT201 TELECOM ROOM ENLARGED PLANS Bidding and Permit 2025.12.05 Scope Concept Pricing 2026.06.29 Bidding and Permit 2026.04.24 Design PricingProject No: 2025021Bozeman Public LibraryChildren's Room Remodel626 E Main St.Bozeman, MT 59715Architecture and Interiors 2880 Technology Blvd W | Bozeman, MT, 59718 | 406.587.0721 Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, ICT T201 2 STORAGE/IT 120 ENLARGED VIEW 3/4" = 1'-0"T201 1 STORAGE/IT 120 PLAN VIEW 510 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 200 Minneapolis, MN 55402 | 612.375.0336 msrdesign.com Specification Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel 626 E Main Street Bozeman, MT 59715 June 29, 2026 Bid Documents Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel 00 01 07 Bozeman, MT 59715 SEALS & SIGNATURES MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 1 of 2 SEALS & SIGNATURES I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed Architect under the laws of the State of Montana. Dagmara Larsen ________________________________________________ Signature Date Registration Expires: MT Reg No. 22020 Pages or sheets covered by this seal: G and A Series Divisions: 01-14, except those listed elsewhere. I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Montana. Carly M. Svenvold ________________________________________________ Name Date Registration Expires: MT Reg No. 80662 Pages or sheets covered by this seal: M and P Divisions: 22, 23 I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Montana. Ryan P. Maroney ________________________________________________ Name Date Registration Expires: MT Reg No. 60006 Pages or sheets covered by this seal: E Divisions: 26 2026.06.29 2028.06.30 2028.06.30 Dagmara Cygler 2026.06.29 2027.06.30 2026.06.29 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel 00 01 07 Bozeman, MT 59715 SEALS & SIGNATURES MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 2 of 2 I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Montana. Paul Heffernan _______________________________________________ Name Date Registration Expires: MT Reg No. 91429 Pages or sheets covered by this seal: T Divisions: 27 END OF SECTION 2028.06.30 2026.06.29 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel 01 10 00 Bozeman, MT 59715 TABLE OF CONTENTS MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 1 of 4 SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 00 00 Cover Sheet MSR 00 01 07 Seals Pages MSR 00 01 10 Table of Contents MSR 00 10 00 Invitation to Bid O 00 21 00 Bidders Checklist O 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders O Certificate Of Non-Segregated Facilities O Certificate Of Compliance with Insurance Requirements O EJCDC C-430 Bid Bond O 00 41 00 Bid Form MSR 00 43 23 Alternates Form MSR 00 43 36 Proposed Subcontractors Form MSR 00 50 00 Contracting Forms MSR Sample Construction Agreement Form O EJCDC C-610 Performance Bond O EJCDC C-615 Payment Bond O Notice of Award O Notice to Proceed O Measurement and Payment O Non-Discrimination and Equal Pay Affirmation O Prevailing Wage Rates for Building Construction, State of Montana O-PENDING SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary MSR 01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures MSR AIA G702 – 1992 Application and Certificate for Payment O AIA G703 – 1992 Continuation Sheet O AIA G701 – 2017 Change Order O AIA G709 – 2018 Proposal Request O AIA G710 – 2017 Architect’s Supplemental Instructions O AIA G714 – 2017 Construction Change Directive O 01 23 00 Alternates MSR 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements MSR AIA G716 – 2004 Request for Information (“RFI”) O AIA G705 – 2001 List of Subcontractors O 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule MSR 01 40 00 Quality Requirements MSR 01 42 16 Definitions MSR 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls MSR 01 57 19 Temporary Environmental Controls MSR 01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage MSR 01 60 00 Product Requirements MSR 01 60 10 Substitution Procedures MSR Substitution Request Form MSR 01 61 16 Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions MSR 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements MSR Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel 01 10 00 Bozeman, MT 59715 TABLE OF CONTENTS MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 2 of 4 AIA G704 – 2017 Substantial Completion Form O AIA G706A – 1994 Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens O AIA G707 – 1994 Consent of Surety to Final Payment O 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal MSR Appendix A – Project Waste Management Plan Worksheet O Appendix B – Standard Solid Waste Conversions O 01 76 10 Temporary Protective Coverings MSR 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals MSR 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training MSR 01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirements MSR DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 00 Selective Demolition MSR DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE 03 05 16 Under-Slab Vapor Barrier MSR 03 30 01 Cast-In-Place Concrete Patching MSR DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY 04 01 00 Maintenance of Masonry MSR DIVISION 05 -- METALS 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications MSR 05 75 00 Decorative Metal MSR DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry MSR 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry MSR 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework MSR DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 92 00 Joint Sealants MSR DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors MSR 08 71 00 Door Hardware MSR 08 80 00 Glazing MSR 08 83 00 Mirrors MSR DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES 09 05 61 Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation MSR 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies MSR 09 30 00 Tiling MSR 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings MSR 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring and Base MSR 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting MSR 09 72 00 Wall Coverings MSR 09 84 00 Acoustical Decorative Panels MSR 09 91 23 Interior Painting MSR DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES 10 26 00 Wall and Door Protection MSR 10 28 00 Toilet and Miscellaneous Accessories MSR Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel 01 10 00 Bozeman, MT 59715 TABLE OF CONTENTS MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 3 of 4 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS 12 36 00 Countertops MSR DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION (NOT USED) DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING 22 0000 General Requirements of Plumbing 22 0500 General Provisions of Plumbing 22 0523 General Duty Valves for Plumbing 22 0529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 0548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 0553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 0716 Plumbing and HVAC Equipment and Piping Insulation 22 1116 Domestic Water Piping 22 1119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 1316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 22 1319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 22 4100 Plumbing Fixtures DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITION ING (HVAC) 23 0000 General Requirements of HVAC 23 0500 General Provisions of HVAC 23 0529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 0548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 0553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing For HVAC 23 0713 Duct Insulation 23 0900 HVAC Controls 23 3113 Metal Ducts 23 3300 Air Duct Accessories 23 3346 Flexible Ducts 23 3423 HVAC Power Ventilators 23 3713 Grilles Registers and Diffusers DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL 26 0010 General Electrical Requirements 26 0505 Selective Demolition of Electrical Systems 26 0519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 0533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 0923 Lighting Control Devices 26 2726 Wiring Devices 26 2913 Manual and Magnetic Motor Controllers 26 5100 LED Lighting DIVISION 27 -- COMMUNICATIONS Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel 01 10 00 Bozeman, MT 59715 TABLE OF CONTENTS MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 4 of 4 27 0000 Project Overview 27 0100 Basic Telecommunications Requirements 27 0528 Pathways for Communications Systems 27 1513 Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling 27 1700 Testing, Identification, And Administration of Balanced and Twisted Pair Infrastructure DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 3111 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK (NOT USED) DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (NOT USED) DIVISION 33 -- UTILITIES (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 10 00 INVITATION TO BID Page 1 of 2 SECTION 001000 - INVITATION TO BID NOTICE IS HEREBY given that the City of Bozeman (City) is seeking proposals from firms to provide general contracting services related to the renovation of the City of Bozeman Library Childrens’ Room Renovation. The selected firm is to provide scheduling, construction execution, cost estimates and project sequencing for general renovation, FFE replacement, MEP upgrades, finishes improvements, and administration services for the project per drawings and specifications. Copies of the Request for Proposals are available on the City’s website. All proposals must be provided as a single, searchable PDF document file and be submitted digitally as an email attachment to the RFP Recipient email address below. Respondents are advised that Recipient’s email attachment size limit is 25MB and that only one PDF file will be allowed per response . The subject line of the transmittal email shall clearly identify the RFP title, company name and due date/time. File sizes greater than 25MB in size may be uploaded to bzncloud.bozeman.net upon special arrangement of the Recipient; however, it is the respondent’s sole responsibility to ensure the file upload is completed, and that the Recipient is separately notified via email of same, prior to the given deadline. Deliver RFPs via email to the City Clerk by [Thursday, August 13th] at [5:00pm] MST. It is the sole responsibility of the proposing party to ensure that proposals are received prior to the closing time as late submittals will not be accepted and will be returned unopened. The email address for submission is: procurement@bozeman.net NON-DISCRIMINATION AND EQUAL PAY The City of Bozeman is an Equal Opportunity Employer. Discrimination in the performance of any agreement awarded under this RFP on the basis of race, color, religion, creed, sex, age, marital status, national origin, or actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity or disability is prohibited. This prohibition shall apply to the hiring and treatment of the awarded entity’s employees and to all subcontracts. As such, each entity submitting under this notice shall include a provision wherein the submitting entity, or entities, affirms in writing it will not discriminate on the basis of race, color, religion, creed, sex, age, marital status, national origin, or because of actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity or disability and which also recognizes the eventual contract will contain a provision prohibiting discrimination as described above and that this prohibition on discrimination shall apply to the hiring and treatment of the submitting entity’s employees and to all subcontracts. In addition, pursuant to City Commission Resolution 5169, the entity awarded a contract under this RFP and any subcontractors must abide by the Equal Pay Act of 1963 and Section 39-3-104, MCA (the Montana Equal Pay Act), and affirm it will abide by the above and that it has visited the State of Montana Equal Pay for Equal Work “best practices” website, or equivalent “best practices publication and has read the material. Any administrative questions regarding proposal procedures should be directed to: Mike Maas, City Clerk (406) 582-2321, procurement@bozeman.net . Questions relating to the RFP should be directed to: Shane Miller, Facilities Project Coordinator, (406) 577-7425, smiller@bozeman.net. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 10 00 INVITATION TO BID Page 2 of 2 DATED at Bozeman, Montana, this [Tuesday, July 7th] . Mike Maas City Clerk City of Bozeman For publication on: Saturday, [July 25th] Saturday, [August 1st] Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 21 00 BIDDERS CHECKLIST Page 1 of 2 BIDDER'S CHECKLIST Please utilize the following Bidder's Checklist before submitting your bid. 1) Original Bid Bond Enclosed? (Personal checks, business checks, and faxed copies are not acceptable.) 2) Certificate of Non-Segregated Facilities signed? 3) Certificate of Compliance with Insurance Requirements filled out and signed? 4) Bid Proposal: a. Arithmetic Checked? b. Numerical Bid Prices agree with written Bid Prices? c. Addendum acknowledged on proposal sheet and cover? d. Signature portion completely filled out? 5) Bid Envelope: a. Addressed properly? b. Addendums acknowledged on bid envelope? c. Contains Contract document/specification booklet? d. Sealed? 6) Bid submitted prior to required time at specified location? Be sure to seal your bid. Include the name of the bid, and acknowledgement of all addenda on the outside of the bid envelope. Leave all proposal sheets intact in the Contract Doc ument book. Return the complete Contract Document book. ALL BID DOCUMENTS AND BONDS MUST BE ORIGINALS. NO FAXED COPIES WILL BE ACCEPTED Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 21 00 BIDDERS CHECKLIST Page 2 of 2 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 002113 – INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS I. INTRODUCTION The City of Bozeman (Owner), is seeking proposals from firms to undertake contracting services relating to the renovation of the Childrens’ Room at the Bozeman Public Library. The Owner intends to enter into a contract with the selected firm that will include general contracting services related to the renovation of the City of Bozeman Lib rary Childrens’ Room Renovation. The selected firm is to provide scheduling, construction execution, cost estimates and project sequencing for general renovation, FFE replacement, MEP upgrades, finishes improvements, and administration services for the project per drawings and specifications. This RFP shall not commit the Owner to enter into an agreement, to pay any expenses incurred in preparation of any response to this request, or to procure or contract for any supplies, goods or services. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject all responses received as a result of this RFP if it is in the Owner’s best interest to do so. This procurement is governed by the laws of the State of Montana and venue for all legal proceedings shall be in the 18th Judicial District Court, Gallatin County. By offering to perform services under this RFP, all Submitters agree to be bound by the laws of the State of Montana and of the Owner, including, but not limited to, applicable wage rates, payments, gross receipts taxes, building codes, equal opportunity employment practices, safety, non-discrimination, etc. II. PROJECT BACKGROUND AND DESCRIPTION In 2001, taxpayers approved a $4 million bond refere ndum for a library new facility; the money was used to purchase the 14.3-acre former Milwaukee Railroad pro perty on East Main Street. After five years of fundraising and planning, a new 53,000 square foot Library opene d at 626 East Main Street in November 2006. The new Library achieved a Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) silver level certification, the first public building in the state to be certified LEED. The ‘Kids Room’, located South, just inside the main entrance, serves children of all ages and needs. The Childrens’ Room Renovation project is to include but is not limited to FFE replacements, shelving replacements, finishes upgrades, and general renovation work. Bookshelves, play area furniture, new service desks, new staff work stations, new staff work benches, refurbished kitchenette, upgraded paint, and refreshed flooring are examples of potential design/construction scope of work. III. SCOPE OF SERVICES The Scope of Services for the proposed contract is final construction & owner acceptance of the Childrens’ Room Renovation project. The successful firm will provide all services necessary to complete the construction, commissioning, cost estimates, QA/QC and coordination in oversight of the construction activities. All work must be in compliance with all applicable requirements under Montana and Federal laws and regulations. Construction services may commence NO EARLIER THAN Monday, October 5th. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 2 of 6 IV. PROPOSAL REQUIREMENTS Firms interested in providing the services described above are requested to submit the following information. Responses to each item should appear in the same order as in this RFP and should identifythe item to which the responses applies. • Executive Summary • Qualifications of the Firm for Scope of Services; Cost • Schedule • Related Experience with Similar Projects a) Affirmation of Nondiscrimination (see Appendix A) Non-completion of the Affirmation of Nondiscrimination is cause for disqualification of firms. V. TIMELINES, DELIVERY DEADLINE, AND INSTRUCTIONS EVENT DATE/TIME Publication dates of RFP Saturday, [July 25th] Saturday, [August 1st] Deadline for receipt of proposals [Thursday, August 13th] Evaluation of proposals TBD Interviews (if necessary) and Selection of consultants TBD With the exception of the advertising dates and advertised due date, the City reserves the right to modify the above timeline. Deliver RFPs via email to the City Clerk (procurement@bozeman.net) by [Thursday, August 13th ] at [5:00pm] MST. It is the sole responsibility of the proposing party to ensure that proposals are received prior to the closing time as late submittals will not be accepted and will be returned unopened. All proposals must be provided as a single, searchable PDF document file and be submitted digitally as an email attachment to the RFP Recipient email address agenda@bozeman.net. Respondents are advised that Recipient’s email attachment size limit is 25MB and that only one PDF file will be allowed per response . The subject line of the transmittal email shall clearly identify the RFP title, company name and due date/time. File sizes greater than 25MB in size may be uploaded to bzncloud.bozeman.net upon special arrangement of the Recipient; however, it is the respondent’s sole responsibility to ensure the file upload is completed, and that the Recipient is separately notified via email of same, prior to the given deadline. VI. AMENDMENTS TO SOLICITATION Any interpretation or correction of this request will be published on the City’s webpage. The deadline for questions related to this document is [5:00pm] MST on [Friday, August 7th]. VII. CONTACT INFORMATION Any administrative questions regarding proposal procedures should be directed to: Mike Maas, City Clerk, (406) 582-2321, procurement@bozeman.net Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 3 of 6 Questions relating to scope of services should be directed to: MSR Design Mitch Karr, Architect, mitch@msrdesign.com, (612) 359-3255 -and- City of Bozeman Shane Miller, Facilities Project Coordinator, smiller@bozeman.net, (406) 577-7425 VIII. SELECTION PROCEDURE A review committee will evaluate all responses to the RFP that meet the submittal requirements and deadline. Submittals that do not meet the requirement or deadl ine will not be considered. The review committee will rank the proposals and may arrange interviews with the finalist(s) prior to selection. Selection may be made directly based on the written RFP submission. If interviews occur, the selection of finalists to be interviewed will be made by a selection committee representing the City of Bozeman. The selection of interview candidates will be based on an evaluation of the written responses to the RFPs. All submitted proposals must be complete and contain the information required as stated in the "Request for Proposals.” IX. SELECTION CRITERIA Proposals will be evaluated based on the following criteria: • [5 points] Executive Summary • [45 points] Qualifications of the Firm for Scope of Services; Cost • [30 points] Schedule • [20 points] Related Experience with Similar Projects X. FORM OF AGREEMENT The Contractor will be required to enter into a contract with the City in substantially the same form as the professional services agreement attached as Attachment B. XI. CITY RESERVATION OF RIGHTS / LIABILITY WAIVER All proposals submitted in response to this RFP become the property of the City and public records and, as such, may be subject to public review. A SUBMISSION IN RESPONSE TO THIS REQUEST FOR QUALIFICATION S CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON ANY RESPONDENTS AND SHALL NOT OBLIGATE THE CITY IN ANY MANNER WHATSOEVER. THE CITY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MAKE NO AWARD AND TO SOLICIT ADDITIONAL REQUEST FOR Q UALIFICATIONS AT A LATER DATE. A. This RFP may be canceled or any or all responses may be rejected in whole or in part, as specified herein, when it is in the best interests of the City. If the City cancels or revises this RFP, all Respondents who submitted will be notified using email. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 4 of 6 B. The City reserves the right to accept or reject any and all proposals; to add or delete items and/or quantities; to amend the RFP; to waive any minor irregularities, informalities, or failure to conform to the RFP; to extend the deadline for submitting proposals; to postpone award for up to 60 days; to award one or more contracts, by item or task, or groups of items or tasks, if so provided in the RFP and if multiple awards or phases are determined by the City to be in the public interest. C. The City of Bozeman reserves the right to reject the proposal of any person/firm who previously failed to perform properly to the satisfaction of the City of Bozeman, or complete on time agreements of similar nature, or to reject the proposal of any person/firm who is not in a position to perform such an agreement satisfactorily as determined by the City of Bozeman. D. The City of Bozeman reserves the right to determine the best qualified Contractor and negotiate a final scope of service and cost, negotiate a contract with another Contractor if an agreement cannot be reached with the first selected Contractor, or reject all proposals. E. The professional services contract between the City of Bozeman and the successful Contractor will incorporate the Contractor's scope of service and work schedule as part of the agreement (see Appendix B for form of professional services agreement. The professional services agreement presented to the Contractor may differ from this form as appropriate for the scope of services). F. This RFP does not commit the City to award a contract. The City assumes no liability or responsibility for costs incurred by firms in responding to this request for proposals or request for interviews, additional data, or other information with respect to the selection process, prior to the issuance of an agreement, contract or purchase order. The Contractor, by submitting a response to this RFP, waives all right to protest or seek any legal remedies whatsoever regarding any aspect of this RFP. G. The City reserves the right to cancel, in part or in its entirety, this RFP including, but not limited to: selection procedures, submittal date, and submittal requirements. If the City cancels or revises this RFP, all Contractors who submitted proposals will be notified using email. H. Projects under any contract are subject to the availability of funds. XIII. NONDISCRIMINATION AND EQUAL PAY POLICY The City of Bozeman requires each entity submitting under this notice shall affirm, on a separate form provided, that it will not discriminate on the basis of race, color, religion, creed, sex, age, marital status, national origin, or because of actual or perceived sexual orientation, sexual preference, gender identity, or disability in fulfillment of a contract entered into for the services identified herein and that this prohibition on discrimination shall apply to the hiring and treatment of the submitting entity’s employees and to all subcontracts it enters into in the fulfillment of the services identified herein. Failure to comply with this requirement shall be cause for the submittal to be deemed nonresponsive. The City also requires each entity submitting under this notice shall affirm it will abide by the Equal Pay Act of 1963 and Section 39-3-104, MCA (the Montana Equal Pay Act), and has visited the State of Montana Equal Pay for Equal Work “best practices” website, https://equalpay.mt.gov/BestPractices/Employers, or equivalent “best practices publication and has read the material. XIII. MISCELLANEOUS A. No Oral Agreements. No conversations or oral agreements with any officer, employee, or agent of the City shall affect or modify any term of this solicitation. Oral communications or any written/email communication between any person and City officer, employee or agent shall not be considered binding. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 5 of 6 B. No Partnership/Business Organization. Nothing in this solicitation or in any subsequent agreement, or any other contract entered into as a result of this solicitation, shall constitute, create, give rise to or otherwise be recognized as a partnership or formal business organization of any kind between or among the respondent and the City. C. Employment Restriction and Indemnity. No person who is an owner, officer, employee, contractor, or consultant of a respondent shall be an officer or employee of the City. No rights of the City’s retirement or personnel rules accrue to a respondent, its officers, employees, contractors, or consultants. Respondents shall have the responsibility of all salaries, wages, bonuses, retirement, withholdings, worker’s compensation and occupational disease compensation, insurance, unemployment compensation other benefits and taxes and premiums appurtenant thereto concerning its officers, employees, contractors, and consultants. Each Respondent shall save and hold the City harmless with respect to any and all claims for payment, compensation, salary, wages, bonuses, retirement, withholdings, worker’s compensation and occupational disease compensation, insurance, unemployment compensation other benefits and taxes and premiums in any way related to each respondent’s officers, employees, contractors and consultants. D. Accessibility. Upon reasonable notice, the City will provide assistance for those persons with sensory impairments. For further information please contact the ADA Coordinator David Arnado via the City’s TTY line at 406-582-2301. E. Procurement. When discrepancies occur between words and figures in this solicitation, the words shall govern. No responsibility shall attach to a City employee for the premature opening of an RFP not properly addressed and identified in accordance with these documents. F. Governing Law. This solicitation and any disputes arising hereunder or under any future agreement shall be governed and construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of Montana, without reference to principles of choice or conflicts of laws. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 6 of 6 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 CERTIFICATE OF NON-SEGREGATED FACIL ITIES MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 1 of 2 CERTIFICATE OF NON-SEGREGATED FACILITIES (Applicable to federally assisted construction contracted and related subcontracts exceeding $1,000 which are not exempt from the Equal Opportunity Clauses) The federally assisted construction contractor certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location, under his control, where segregated facilities are maintained. The federally assisted construction contractor certifies further that he will not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he will not permit his employees to perform their services at any location, under his control, where segregated facilities are maintained. The federally assisted construction contractor agrees that a breach of this certification is a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in this contract. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, creed, color, or national origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. The federally assisted construction contractor agrees that (except where he has obtained identical certification from proposed subcontractors for specific time periods) he will obtain identical certifications from proposed subcontractors prior to the award of subcontracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause, and that he will retain such certifications in his files. Date Signature Name and Title of Signer (Please Type) NOTE: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. 1001. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 CERTIFICATE OF NON-SEGREGATED FACIL ITIES MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 2 of 2 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 1 of 2 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS The undersigned Contractor hereby acknowledges that he/she has read and understands the insurance requirements specified in this contract, and hereby agrees (1) that such insurance will be maintained in at least the amounts and types specified in this contract and during any modifications and/or time extensions granted thereto; (2) that these required insurance policies will each contain an endorsement to the effect that cancellation or any material change in the policies adversely affecting the interest of the City of Great Falls in such insurance will not be effective for such period as may be prescribed by the Laws of the State in which this contract is to be performed and in no event less than thirty (30) days after written notice thereof has been given to the contracting officer; (3) that Montana Workmen's Compensation Insurance, or letter of reciprocal agreement with another state, will be maintained on this contract for and during the entire performance period and for and during any modifications and/or time extensions granted thereto; and (4) that this agreement will become a part of and be incorporated into the above referenced contract, and will be legally binding and enforceable at law. INSURANCE COMPANY (IES): PHONE NO. CONTRACTOR: Date: (Authorized Signature) ACCEPTANCE The undersigned authorized representative, on behalf of the City of Great Falls, hereby accepts and ratifies the above agreement and hereby incorporates the above agreement into the above referenced contract. By: (Date) (Authorized representa tive) Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 2 of 2 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel EJCDC C-430 (Penal Sum Form) Bozeman, MT 59715 BID BOND MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 1 of 2 BID BOND Any singular reference to Bidder, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. BIDDER (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business): OWNER (Name and Address): BID Bid Due Date: Description: (Project Name and Include Location): BOND Bond Number: Date (Not earlier than Bid due date): Penal sum $ (Words) (Figures) Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause this Bid Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative. BIDDER SURETY (Seal) (Seal) Bidder’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal By: By: Signature Signature (Attach Power of Attorney) Print Name Print Name Title Title Attest: Attest: Signature Signature Title Title Note: Above addresses are to be used for giving any required notice. Provide execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary. 1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel EJCDC C-430 (Penal Sum Form) Bozeman, MT 59715 BID BOND MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 2 of 2 Payment of the penal sum is the extent of Bidder’s and Surety’s liability. Recovery of such penal sum under the terms of this Bond shall be Owner’s sole and exc lusive remedy upon default of Bidder. 2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents. 3. This obligation shall be null and void if: 3.1 Owner accepts Bidder’s Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or 3.2 All Bids are rejected by Owner, or 3.3 Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when required by Paragraph 5 hereof). 4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 calendar days after receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due. 5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of Award agreed to in writing by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award including extensions shall not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from Bid due date without Surety’s written consent. 6. No suit or action shall be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default required in Paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety and in no case later than one year after Bid due date. 7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in the state in which the Project is located. 8. Notices required hereunder shall be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United States Registered or Certified Mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and shall be deemed to be effective upon receipt by the party concerned. 9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the authority of the officer, agent, or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby. 10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond shall be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute shall govern and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith shall continue in full force and effect. 11. The term “Bid” as used herein includes a Bid, offer, or proposal as applicable. END OF BID BOND Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 41 00 BID FORM Page 1 of 2 SECTION 00 41 00 BID FORM THE PROJECT AND THE PARTIES 1.01 TO: A.City of Bozeman (Owner) 121 North Rouse Avenue Bozeman,Montana 59715 _______ _______ 1.02 FOR: A.Project:BPL Children and Teen Area Remodel 626 E.Main Street Bozeman,Montana 59715 B.MSR Design Project Number:2025021BPL 1.03 DATE:______________(BIDDER TO ENTER DATE) 1.04 SUBMITTED BY: (BIDDER TO ENTER NAME AND ADDRESS) A.Bidder's Full Name _________________________ Address _____________________________ City,State,Zip:________________________ Phone:______________________________ 1.05 OFFER A.Having examined the Place of The Work and all matters referred to in the Instructions to Bidders and the Contract Documents prepared by MSR Design and their subconsultantsfor the above mentioned project,we,the undersigned,hereby offer to enter into a Contract to perform the Work for the Sumof: B._________________________________________________________ dollars ($______________________),in lawful money of the United States of America. C.We have included the required security depositas required by the Instruction to Bidders. D.We have included the required performance assurance bonds in the Bid Amount as required by the Instructions to Bidders. 1.The cost of the required performance assurance bonds is ________________dollars ($___________),in lawful money of the United States of America. E.All applicable federal taxes are includedand State of Montanataxes are included inthe Bid Sum. F.All Cashand ContingencyAllowances described in Section 01 21 00 -Allowancesare included in the Bid Sum. 1.06 ACCEPTANCE A.This offer shall be open to acceptance and is irrevocable for thirty (30)days from the bid closing date. B.If this bid is accepted by Owner within the time period stated above,we will: 1.Execute the Agreement within seven (7)days of receipt of Notice of Award. 2.Furnish the required bonds within seven (7)days of receipt of Notice of Award. 3.Commence work within seven (7)days after written Notice to Proceedof this bid. C.If this bid is accepted within the time stated,and we fail to commence the Work or we fail to provide the required Bond(s),the security deposit shall be forfeited as damages to Ownerby reason of our failure,limited in amount to the lesser of the face value of the security deposit or the difference between this bid and the bid upon which a Contract is signed. D.In the event our bid is not accepted within the time stated above,the required security deposit shall be returned to the undersigned,in accordance with the provisions of the Instructions to Bidders;unless a mutually satisfactory arrangement is made for its retention and validity for an extended period of time. 1.07 CONTRACT TIME A.If this Bid is accepted,we will: B.Complete the Work in ___calendar weeks from Notice to Proceed.(Bidder to enter number of weeks.) Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 41 00 BID FORM Page 2 of 2 1.08 ALTERNATES -SEE SECTION 01 23 00 A.Alternates are identified by number and describe the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work only when that Alternate is made a part of the Work by specific provisions in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. Bidder,in submitting his bid proposal,shall include,in addition to his base bid,the following alternates.The numerical order of listing these alternates does not necessarily imply their priority.The Owner may decide to use any one or more of all the items. Coordinate pertinent related work and modify surrounding work as required to properly integrate the work under each Alternate and to provide the complete construction required by the Contract Documents. B.Alternates identified on the Alternates Form will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. 1.09 CHANGES TO THE WORK A.When Architect establishes that the method of valuation for Changes in the Work will be net cost plus a percentage fee in accordance with General Conditions,our percentage fee will be: 1.______percent overhead and profit on the net cost of our own Work; 2.______percent on the cost of work done by any Subcontractor. B.On work deleted from the Contract,our credit to Owner shall be Architect-approved net cost plus _________of the overhead and profit percentage noted above. 1.10 ADDENDA A.The following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Bid Documents noted below have been considered and all costs are included in the Bid Sum. 1.Addendum #__ Dated _______ 2.Addendum #__ Dated _______ 3.Addendum #__ Dated _______ 1.11 BID FORM SUPPLEMENTS A.The following Supplements are attached to this Bid Form and are considered an integral part of this Bid Form: 1.Document 00 43 23 -Alternates Form: Include the cost variations to the Bid Sumapplicable to the Work as described in Section 01 23 00. 2.Document 00 43 36 -Proposed Subcontractors Form: Include the names of Subcontractors and the portions of the Work they will perform. 1.12 BID FORM SIGNATURE(S) The Corporate Seal of ____________________________________________ (Bidder -print the full name of your firm) (Seal) ____________________________________________ (Authorized signing officer,Title) END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 43 23 ALTERNATES FORM Page 1 of 2 SECTION 00 43 23 ALTERNATES FORM PARTICULARS 1.01 THE FOLLOWING IS THE LIST OF ALTERNATES REFERENCED IN THE BID SUBMITTED BY: 1.02 (BIDDER)_______________________________ 1.03 TO (OWNER ): CITY OF BOZEMAN 1.04 DATED ________________AND WHICH IS AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE BID FORM. ALTERNATES LIST 2.01 THE FOLLOWING AMOUNTS SHALL BE ADDED TO OR DEDUCTED FROM THE BID AMOUNT. REFER TO SECTION 01 23 00 -ALTERNATES. ALTERNATE#1 (ACPNL-4): ADD /(DEDUCT)$________________________ ALTERNATE #2 (ACPNL-5A/B/C AND ACPNL-6A/B/C): ADD /(DEDUCT)$________________________ END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 43 23 ALTERNATES FORM Page 2 of 2 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 43 36 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM Page 1 of 2 SECTION 00 43 36 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM PARTICULARS 1.01 HEREWITH IS THE LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS REFERENCED IN THE BID SUBMITTED BY: 1.02 (BIDDER)____________________________________ 1.03 TO (OWNER ): CITY OF BOZEMAN 1.04 DATED ___________________AND WHICH IS AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE BID FORM. 1.05 THE FOLLOWING WORK WILL BE PERFORMED (OR PROVIDED)BY SUBCONTRACTORS AND COORDINATED BY US: LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS WORK SUBJECT SUBCONTRACTOR NAME _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 43 36 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM Page 2 of 2 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 50 00 CONTRACTING FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS Page 1 of 2 SECTION 00 50 00 CONTRACTING FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTICES A.Notice of Award:Owner's form,as included in Project Manual. B.Notice to Proceed:Owner's form,as included in Project Manual. 1.02 AGREEMENT AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT A.See "Bozeman Library Childrens Room Renovation RFP"dated July 2026 for the Agreement form to be executed. 1.03 FORMS A.Use the following forms for the specified purposes unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in Contract Documents. B.Certificates: 1.Certificate Of Non-Segregated Facilities:Owner's form,as included in Project Manual. 2.Certificate Of Compliance with Insurance Requirements:Owner's form,as included in Project Manual. C.Bond Forms: 1.Bid Bond Form:Owner's form,as included in Project Manual. 2.Performance Bond Form:Owner's form,as included in Project Manual. 3.Payment Bond Form:Owner's form,as included in Project Manual. D.Bid Form Supplements 1.Measurement and Payment Form:Owner's form,as included in Project Manual 2.Non-Discrimination and Equal Pay Affirmation:Owner's form,as included in Project Manual 3.Prevailing Wage Rates for Building Construction,State of Montana E.Post-Award Certificates and Other Forms: 1.Application for Payment Forms: AIA G702 with AIA G703 (for Contractors). F.Clarification and Modification Forms: 1.Request for Information Form:AIA G716. 2.Substitutions Request Form:Form immediately following Section 01 60 10. 3.Architect's Supplemental Instructions Form: AIA G710. 4.Construction Change Directive Form: AIA G714. 5.Proposal Request Form: AIA G709. 6.Change Order Form: AIA G701. G.Closeout Forms: 1.Certificate of Substantial Completion Form: AIA G704. 2.Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens Form: AIA G706A 3.Consent of Surety to Final Payment Form: AIA G707. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AIA G701 -Change Order;2017. B.AIA G702 -Application and Certificate for Payment;1992. C.AIA G703 -Continuation Sheet;1992. D.AIA G704 -Certificate of Substantial Completion;2017. E.AIA G706A -Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens;1994. F.AIA G707 -Consent of Surety to Final Payment;1994. G.AIA G709 -Proposal Request;2018. H.AIA G710 -Architect's Supplemental Instructions;2017. I.AIA G714 -Construction Change Directive;2017. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 00 50 00 CONTRACTING FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS Page 2 of 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel EJCDC C-610 Bozeman, MT 59715 PERFORMANCE BOND MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 1 of 4 PERFORMANCE BOND Contractor Name: [Full formal name of Contractor] Address (principal place of business): [Address of Contractor’s principal place of business] Surety Name: [Full formal name of Surety] Address (principal place of business): [Address of Surety’s principal place of business] Owner Name: [Full formal name of Owner] Address (principal place of business): [Address of Owner’s principal place of business] Contract Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel EJCDC C-610 Bozeman, MT 59715 PERFORMANCE BOND MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 2 of 4 1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner for the perfor Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel EJCDC C-610 Bozeman, MT 59715 PERFORMANCE BOND MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 3 of 4 7. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel EJCDC C-610 Bozeman, MT 59715 PERFORMANCE BOND MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 4 of 4 15. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond will be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner will be deemed to be Contractor. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel EJCDC C-615 Bozeman, MT 59715 PAYMENT BOND MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 1 of 4 PAYMENT BOND Contractor Name: [Full formal name of Contractor] Address (principal place of business): [Address of Contractor’s principal place of business] Surety Name: [Full formal name of Surety] Address (principal place of business): [Address of Surety’s principal place of business] Owner Name: [Full formal name of Owner] Address (principal place of business): [Address of Owner’s principal place of business] Contract Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel EJCDC C-615 Bozeman, MT 59715 PAYMENT BOND MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 2 of 4 1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials, and equipment furnished for use in the Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel EJCDC C-615 Bozeman, MT 59715 PAYMENT BOND MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 3 of 4 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel EJCDC C-615 Bozeman, MT 59715 PAYMENT BOND MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 4 of 4 16.1.5. The date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Constru Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 NOTICE OF AWARD MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 1 of 2 NOTICE OF AWARD Dated Project: Owner: Owner’s Contract No.: Contract: Engineer’s Project No.: Bidder: Bidder’s Address: You are notified that your Bid dated for the above Contract has been considered. You are the Successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for . The Contract Price of your Contract is Two copy(s) of each of the proposed Contract Documents (Project Manual) accompany this Notice of Award. Two sets of the Construction Drawings and Engineering Report are included separately. You must comply with the following conditions precedent within fifteen [15] days of the date you receive this Notice of Award. 1. Deliver to the Owner [two] fully executed counterparts of the Contract Documents. 2. Deliver with the executed Contract Documents, Contract Bonds (2 original copies) as specified in the Construction Agreement, Exhibit H (Required Bonds). 3. Other conditions precedent: 1) Provide two original certificates of general liability insurance and two original copies of other required insurance documents, in accordance with the Construction Agreement, Exhibit G (Required Insurance Coverage). 2) Contractor shall ensure they are registered with the Department of Labor and have a current City of Great Falls Business License. 3) Provide other necessary permits as applicable. Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider you in default, annul this Notice of Award and declare your Bid security forfeited. Within fifteen [15] days after you comply with the above conditions, Owner will return to you one fully executed counterpart of the Contract Documents. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 NOTICE OF AWARD MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 2 of 2 Owner By: Authorized Signature Title ____Initial and Return Copy to Engineer END OF NOTICE OF AWARD Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 NOTICE TO PROCEED MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 1 of 2 NOTICE TO PROCEED Dated Project: Owner: Owner’s Contract No.: Contract: Engineer’s Project No.: Contractor: Contractor’s Address: You are notified that the Contract Times under the above contract will commence to run on ______________________ . On or before that date, you are to start performing your obligations under the Contract Documents. In accordance with the Agreement, the date of Substantial Completion is ______ , unless there is a shut down due to weather. Also before you may start any Work at the Site, you must: 1. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 NOTICE TO PROCEED MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 2 of 2 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 1 of 2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT SCOPE: The following description of work, measurement of pay quantity, and method of payment shall govern payment to Contractor under this Contract. Payment for these items shall be full compensation for the completed item of work furnished and installed, and the cost of any incidental work or materials required to complete the item. BID ITEM DESCRIPTION 101. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 2 of 2 NONDISCRIMINATION AND EQUAL PAY AFFIRMATION ____________________________________(name of entity submitting) hereby affirms it will not discriminate on the basis of race, color, religion, creed, sex, age, marital status, national origin, or because of actual or perceived sexual orientation, gender identity or disability and acknowledges and understands the eventual contract will contain a provision prohibiting discrimination as described above and this prohibition on discrimination shall apply to the hiring and treatments or proposer’s employees and to all subcontracts. In addition, ____________________________________(name of entity submitting) hereby affirms it will abide by the Equal Pay Act of 1963 and Section 39-3-104, MCA (the Montana Equal Pay Act), and has visited the State of Montana Equal Pay for Equal Work “best practices” website, https://equalpay.mt.gov/BestPractices/Employers, or equivalent “best practices publication and has read the material. ______________________________________ Name and title of person authorized to sign on behalf of submitter Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 10 00 SUMMARY Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT A.Project Name: BPL Children and Teen Area Remodel B.Owner's Name: City of Bozeman. C.Design Professional's Name: MSR Design. 1.Project Number: 2025021BPL D.The Project consists of the alterationof the existing library for a new children and teen area. 1.Built alterations are minimal and described in drawings and specifications,areas of significant scope are the expansion of the existing YS workroom space,the reconfiguration of existing stick framed interior storefronts (as well as the provision of limited new systems to match the existing). Several plumbing fixtures are being added to the current restrooms area.The majority of the work is related to replacement and updating of interior finishes,and the reconfiguration of library shelving within the Room. 2.Scope of work in the Teen Corner is limited to F.F.E.work performed outside this contract.Limited work to furnish and install suspended acoustic baffles is described in these drawings and specifications,and identified in section 01 23 00 as Add Alternate No.2 1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A.Contract Type:A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK A.Scope of demolition and removal work is indicated on drawings and specified in Section 02 41 00. B.Scope of alterations work is indicated on drawings. C.Plumbing,HVAC,Electrical Power and Lighting,Fire Alarm,Telephone and Security Systesm: Alter existing system and add new construction,keeping existing in operation. D.Owner will remove the following items before start of work: 1.Portable fixtures,furniture and equipment. 2.Art Installations mounted to walls and ceilings. 3.All library Collections (books &media). E.Contractor is required to remove and deliver the following to Owner prior to start of work: 1.Library shelving not being reused as indicated. 2.Library shelving being modified by Owner's vendor (for reinstallation by Contractor). 3.Items as indicated in Demolition Plan(s). 4.Items as identified by Owner in Pre-Demolition walk-through. F.Contractor is required to remove and store the following prior to start of work,for later reinstallation by Contractor: 1.Doors as indicated. 2.Casework as indicated. 3.Library shelving as indicated for salvage and relocation. 4.Additional items as indicated in Demolition Plan(s). 5.Additional items as identified by Owner in Pre-Demolition walk-through. 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A.Items noted NIC (Not in Contract)will be supplied and installed by OwnerafterDate of Substantial Completion. Some items include: 1.Movable furniture,fixtures and equipment. 2.Code required building,and library collection signage. B.Owner will supply and install the following: 1.Toilet accessories as indicated as OFOI in Section 102800. C.Owner will supply the following for installation by Contractor: 1.Toilet accessories as indicated as OFCI in Section 102800. 2.Residential style appliances as indicated in Drawings. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 10 00 SUMMARY Page 2 of 2 1.05 OWNER OCCUPANCY A.Owner intends to continue to occupy adjacent portions of the existing building during the entire construction period. B.Ownerintends to occupy the Project by the date stated in the Agreement as the contract completion date. C.Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. D.Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy. 1.06 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A.Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. 1.Locate and conduct construction activities in ways that will limit disturbance to site. B.Arrange use of site and premises to allow: 1.Owner occupancy. 2.Work by Others. 3.Work by Owner. 4.Use of site and premises by the public. C.Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner: 1.Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period;provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 2.Do not obstruct roadways,sidewalks,or other public ways without permit. D.Time Restrictions: 1.Limit conduct ofespecially noisy,malodorous,and dustyexterior work toafter business hours. E.Utility Outages and Shutdown: 1.Limit disruption of utility services to hours the building is unoccupied. 2.Do not disrupt or shut down life safety systems,including but not limited to fire sprinklers and fire alarm system,without 7 days notice to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 3.Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities. 1.07 WORK SEQUENCE A.Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner. 1.08 DEFINITIONS AND EXPLANATIONS A.Imperative language is used generally in the specifications.Except as otherwise indicated,requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor as if preceded by the phrase “The Contractor shall”. B.The term “provide”means furnish and install,complete,and ready for intended use.Except as otherwise defined in greater detail,the term “furnish”means supply and deliver to the project site, including unloading,unpacking,inspecting,and storing until ready for receipt by Owner,installation, etc.,as applicable. C.Except as otherwise defined in greater detail,the term “install”is used to describe operations at project site including assembly,erection,placing,anchoring,applying,working to dimension,finishing,curing, protecting,cleaning,and similar operations,as applicable. D.The term “indicated”is as cross-reference to graphics,notes or schedules on drawings,to other paragraphs or schedules in the specifications,and to similar means of recording requirements in contract documents.Where terms such as “shows”,“noted”,“schedules”,and “specified”are used in lieu of “indicated”,it is for purpose of helping reader locate cross-reference,and no limitations of location is intended. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Page 1 of 4 SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B.Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time. C.Change procedures. D.Correlation of Contractor submittals based on changes. E.Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Agreement: Contract Sum,retainages,payment period. B.Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A.Use Schedule of Values Form: AIA G703,edition stipulated in the Agreement. B.Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified;submit draft to Design Professional for approval. C.Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. D.Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. E.Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual.Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization. F.Include separately from each line item,a direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. G.Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders,with each Application For Payment. 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A.Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. B.Use Form AIA G702 and Form AIA G703,edition stipulated in the Agreement. C.Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified;submit sample to Design Professional for approval. D.Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. E.For each item,provide a column for listing each of the following: 1.Item Number. 2.Description of work. 3.Scheduled Values. 4.Previous Applications. 5.Work in Place and Stored Materials under this Application. 6.Authorized Change Orders. 7.Total Completed and Stored to Date of Application. 8.Percentage of Completion. 9.Balance to Finish. 10.Retainage. F.Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. G.Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored products. H.List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item,listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of work. I.Submit one electronic copy of each Application for Payment. J.Include the following with the application: 1.Transmittal letter as specified for submittals in Section 01 30 00. 2.Construction progress schedule,revised and current as specified in Section 01 32 16. 3.Current construction photographs specified in Section 01 30 00. 4.Partial release of liens from major subcontractors and vendors. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Page 2 of 4 5.Project record documents as specified in Section 01 78 00,for review by Owner which will be returned to the Contractor. 6.Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products. K.When Design Professional requires substantiating information,submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal.Show application number and date,and line item by number and description. 1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A.Submit name of the individual authorized to receive change documents and who will be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or subcontractors of changes to Contract Documents. B.The following forms are included for Contract Modifications: 1.AIA G701 -2017 Change Order 2.AIA G709 -2001 Work Change Proposal 3.AIA G710 -2017 Architectural Supplemental Instructions 4.AIA G714 -2017 Construction Change Directive C.For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time,Design Professional will issue instructions directly to Contractor. D.For other required changes,Design Professional will issue a document signed by Owner instructing Contractor to proceed with the change,for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1.The document will describe the required changes and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2.Promptly execute the change. E.For changes for which advance pricing is desired,Design Professionalwill issue a document that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications,a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work requiredand the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractorshall prepare and submit an estimatedprice quotation within 10days. F.Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Design Professional,describing the proposed change and its full effect on the work,with a statement describing the reason for the change,and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 6000. G.Computation of Change in Contract Amount: As specified in the Agreement and Conditions of the Contract. 1.For change requested by Design Professional for work falling under a fixed price contract,the amount will be based on Contractor's price quotation. 2.For change requested by Contractor,the amount will be based on the Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Design Professional. 3.For change ordered by Design Professional without a quotation from Contractor,the amount will be determined by Design Professional based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work. H.Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1.On request,provide the following data: a.Quantities of products,labor,and equipment. b.Taxes,insurance,and bonds. c.Overhead and profit. d.Justification for any change in Contract Time. e.Credit for deletions from Contract,similarly documented. 2.Support each claim for additional costs with additional information: a.Origin and date of claim. b.Dates and times work was performed,and by whom. c.Time records and wage rates paid. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Page 3 of 4 d.Invoices and receipts for products,equipment,and subcontracts,similarly documented. 3.For Time and Material work,submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change,within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. I.Execution of Change Orders: Design Professional will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. J.After execution of Change Order,promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. K.Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time,revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change,and resubmit. L.Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A.Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments,identifying total adjusted Contract Sum,previous payments,and sum remaining due. B.Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1.All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 70 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Page 4 of 4 1 PROJECT:APPLICATION NO: : PERIOD TO:: CONTRACT FOR:: VIA CONTRACT DATE:: ARCHITECT:PROJECT NOS://: a.0 $0.00 )= b.0 day of $0.00 )= $0.00Total Retainage (Lines 5a + 5b or Total in Column I of G703)………………………….. $0.00 $0.00 State of: Subscribed and sworn to before % of Stored Material (Column D + E on G703: me this County of: ARCHITECT'S CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT $0.00 (Line 4 Less Line 5 Total) $0.006. TOTAL EARNED LESS RETAINAGE……………………………………………. $0.00 My Commission expires: Notary Public: This Certificate is not negotiable. The AMOUNT CERTIFIED is payable only to the Contractor named herein. Issuance, payment and acceptance of payment are without prejudice to any rights of the Owner or Contractor under this Contract. By: ARCHITECT: AMOUNT CERTIFIED………………………………………………………………… Date: $0.00 (Attach explanation if amount certified differs from the amount applied. Initial all figures on this Application and on the Continuation Sheet that are changed to conform with the amount certified.) 7. LESS PREVIOUS CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT……………………………….. In accordance with the Contract Documents, based on on-site observations and the data comprising this application, the Architect certifies to the Owner that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief the Work has progressed as indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and the Contractor is entitled to payment of the AMOUNT CERTIFIED.9. BALANCE TO FINISH, INCLUDING RETAINAGE AIA® Document G702™ – 1992 Application and Certificate for Payment FROM TO OWNER: OWNER ARCHITECT CONTRACTOR Distribution to: A&E Architects, P.C.FIELD 001 General Construction CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT CONTRACTOR: $0.00 CONTRACTOR: 124 North 29th Street Billings, MT 59101 $0.00 The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief the Work covered by this Application for Payment has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all amounts have been paid by the Contractor for Work for which previous Certificates for Payment were issued and payments received from the Owner, and that current payment shown herein is now due. Date:By: $0.00 Application is made for payment, as shown below, in connection with the Contract. Continuation Sheet, AIA Document G703, is attached. TOTALS Total changes approved in previous months by Owner $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 NET CHANGES by Change Order $0.00 (Line 3 less Line 6) Total approved this Month $0.00 (Line 6 from prior Certificate) DEDUCTIONSADDITIONS $0.00 8. CURRENT PAYMENT DUE……………………………………………………… CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY 4. TOTAL COMPLETED & STORED TO DATE (Column G on G703)………………. 5. RETAINAGE: (Column F on G703: 1. ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM……………………………………………………… 2. NET CHANGE BY CHANGE ORDERS………………………………………………………….. 3. CONTRACT SUM TO DATE (Line 1 ± 2) ……………………………………….. % of Completed Work 1 A B C D E F H I FROM PREVIOUS APPLICATION (D + E) THIS PERIOD 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 GRAND TOTAL 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00%0.00 0.00 RETAINAGE (IF VARIABLE RATE) BALANCE TO FINISH (C - G) % (G ÷ C) ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO: AIA® Document G703™ – 1992 APPLICATION NO: Continuation Sheet AIA Document, G702TM–1992, Application and Certification for Payment, or G736TM–2009, Project Application and Project Certificate for Payment, Construction Manager as Adviser Edition, containing Contractor's signed certification is attached. In tabulations below, amounts are in US dollars. Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply. APPLICATION DATE: 001 PERIOD TO: ITEM NO. SCHEDULED VALUE WORK COMPLETED DESCRIPTION OF WORK TOTAL COMPLETED AND STORED TO DATE (D + E + F) MATERIALS PRESENTLY STORED (NOT IN D OR E) GLabel 10Applicat Application Period To: LLLLC. G. Document G701TM – 2017 Change Order AIA Document G701™ – 2017. Copyright © 1979, 1987, 2000, 2001 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. To report copyright violations of AIA Contract Documents, e-mail The American Institute of Architects’ legal counsel, copyright@aia.org. PROJECT: (name and address) CONTRACT INFORMATION:CHANGE ORDER INFORMATION: Contract For: Change Order Number: Date: Date: OWNER: (name and address) ARCHITECT: (name and address) CONTRACTOR: (name and address) THE CONTRACT IS CHANGED AS FOLLOWS: (Insert a detailed description of the change and, if applicable, attach or reference specific exhibits. Also include agreed upon adjustments attributable to executed Construction Change Directives.) The original (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Price) was $ The net change by previously authorized Change Orders $ The (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Price) prior to this Change Order was $ The (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Price) will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) $ by this Change Order in the amount of The new (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Price), including this Change Order, will be $ The Contract Time will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by ( ) days. The new date of Substantial Completion will be NOTE: This Change Order does not include adjustments to the Contract Sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, or the Contract Time, that have been authorized by Construction Change Directive until the cost and time have been agreed upon by both the Owner and Contractor, in which case a Change Order is executed to supersede the Construction Change Directive. NOT VALID UNTIL SIGNED BY THE ARCHITECT, CONTRACTOR AND OWNER. ARCHITECT (Firm name) CONTRACTOR (Firm name) OWNER (Firm name) SIGNATURE SIGNATURE SIGNATURE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE DATE DATE DATE Document G709™ – 2018 Proposal Request AIA Document G709 – 2018. Copyright © 1993, 2001 and 2018. All rights reserved. “The American Institute of Architects,” “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are trademarks of The American Institute of Architects. This document was produced at 16:17:27 MT on 11/16/2023 under Order No.4104239707 which expires on 02/06/2024, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail docinfo@aiacontracts.com. User Notes: (3B9ADA5F) 1 PROJECT: (name and address)CONTRACT INFORMATION:Architect’s Project Number: Contract For: Proposal Request Number: 001 Date: Proposal Request Date: OWNER: (name and address)ARCHITECT: (name and address)CONTRACTOR: (name and address) The Owner requests an itemized proposal for changes to the Contract Sum and Contract Time for proposed modifications to the Contract Documents described herein. The Contractor shall submit this proposal within Zero (0) days or notify the Architect in writing of the anticipated date of submission. (Insert a detailed description of the proposed modifications to the Contract Documents and, if applicable, attach or reference specific exhibits.) THIS IS NOT A CHANGE ORDER, A CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE, OR A DIRECTION TO PROCEED WITH THE WORK DESCRIBED IN THE PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS. REQUESTED BY THE ARCHITECT: PRINTED NAME AND TITLE Document G710™ – 2017 Architect's Supplemental Instructions AIA Document G710™ – 2017. Copyright © 1979, 1992 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. To report copyright violations of AIA Contract Documents, e-mail The American Institute of Architects’ legal counsel, copyright@aia.org. PROJECT: (name and address) CONTRACT INFORMATION:ASI INFORMATION: Contract For: ASI Number: Date: Date: OWNER: (name and address) ARCHITECT: (name and address)CONTRACTOR: (name and address) The Contractor shall carry out the Work in accordance with the following supplemental instructions without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. Proceeding with the Work in accordance with these instructions indicates your acknowledgment that there will be no change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. (Insert a detailed description of the Architect’s supplemental instructions and, if applicable, attach or reference specific exhibits.) ISSUED BY THE ARCHITECT: ARCHITECT (Firm name) SIGNATURE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE DATE Document G714™ – 2017 Construction Change Directive AIA Document G714™ – 2017. Copyright © 1987, 2001, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. To report copyright violations of AIA Contract Documents, e-mail The American Institute of Architects’ legal counsel, copyright@aia.org. PROJECT: (name and address) CONTRACT INFORMATION:CCD INFORMATION: Contract For:Directive Number: Date:Date: OWNER: (name and address) ARCHITECT:(name and address)CONTRACTOR: (name and address) The Contractor is hereby directed to make the following change(s) in this Contract: (Insert a detailed description of the change and, if applicable, attach or reference specific exhibits.) PROPOSED ADJUSTMENTS 1.The proposed basis of adjustment to the Contract Sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price: □Lump Sum (increase) (decrease) of $ □Unit Price of $ per □Cost, as defined below, plus the following fee: (Insert a definition of, or method for determining, cost) □As follows: 2.The Contract Time is proposed to (be adjusted) (remain unchanged). The proposed adjustment, if any, is (an increase of days) (a decrease of days). NOTE: The Owner, Architect and Contractor should execute a Change Order to supersede this Construction Change Directive to the extent they agree upon adjustments to the Contract Sum, Contract Time, or Guaranteed Maximum price for the change(s) described herein. When signed by the Owner and Architect and received by the Contractor, this document becomes effective IMMEDIATELY as a Construction Change Directive (CCD), and the Contractor shall proceed with the change(s) described above. Contractor signature indicates agreement with the proposed adjustments in Contract Sum and Contract Time set forth in this CCD. ARCHITECT (Firm name) OWNER (Firm name) CONTRACTOR (Firm name) SIGNATURE SIGNATURE SIGNATURE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE DATE DATE DATE Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 23 00 ALTERNATES Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Description of Alternates. B.Procedures for pricing Alternates. C.Documentation of changes to Contract Sumand Contract Time. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Document 00 21 13 -Instructions to Bidders: Instructions for preparation of pricing for Alternates. B.Document 00 43 23 -Alternates Form: List of Alternates as supplement to Bid Form. C.Agreement Form:Incorporating monetary value of accepted Alternates. 1.03 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES A.Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. B.Alternates may be accepted via change order at any time during construction up until the date of Substantial Completion C.Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each Alternate. 1.04 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A.AlternateNo.1-Suspended Acoustic Ceiling Baffles in Children’s Room: 1.Base Bid:No ACPNL-4 2.Alternate:Provide ACPNL-4 in types and quantities as indicated in Section 09 84 00 and on Drawing 3/A101 “Children’Room RCP”above “Active Play”RM 116A. B.AlternateNo.2-Suspended Acoustic Ceiling Baffles in Teen Corner: 1.Base Bid:No ACPNL-5A/B/C or ACPNL-6A/B/C 2.Alternate:Provide ACPNL-5A/B/C and ACPNL-6A/B/C in types and quantities as indicated in Section 09 84 00 and on Drawing 3/A101 “Teen Corner RCP"above “Teen Corner”RM 109C. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 23 00 ALTERNATES Page 2 of 2 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 12 SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.General administrative requirements. B.Web-based project software service. C.Electronic document submittal service. D.Release of CAD/BIM files. E.Preconstruction meeting. F.Site mobilization meeting. G.Progress meetings. H.Construction progress schedule. I.Contractor's daily reports. J.Progress photographs. K.Coordination drawings. L.Submittals for review,information,and project closeout. M.Number of copies of submittals. N.Requests for Information (RFI)procedures. O.Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 32 16 -Construction Progress Schedule: Form,content,and administration of schedules. B.Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements: General product requirements. C.Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination.requirements. D.Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals: Project record documents;operation and maintenance data; warranties and bonds. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AIA G716 -Request for Information;2004. 1.04 GENERAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Comply with requirements of Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements for coordination of execution of administrative tasks with timing of construction activities. 1.05 PROJECT COORDINATOR A.Project Coordinator: General Contractor. B.Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site;for field offices and sheds,for site access,traffic,and parking facilities. C.During construction,coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator. D.Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra-project communications;submittals,reports and records,schedules,coordination drawings,and recommendations;and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts.ProCore Construction Management software will be utilized. E.Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. Responsibility for providing temporary utilities and construction facilities is identified in Section 01 10 00 -Summary. F.Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Coordinator. G.Make the following types of submittals to Design Professional through the Project Coordinator: 1.Requests for Information. 2.Requests for substitution. 3.Shop drawings,product data,and samples. 4.Test and inspection reports. 5.Design data. 6.Manufacturer's instructions and field reports. 7.Applications for payment and change order requests. 8.Progress schedules. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 12 9.Coordination drawings. 10.Correction Punch List and Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. 11.Closeout submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WEB-BASED PROJECT SOFTWARE SERVICE A.Web-Based Project Software Service: Provide,administer,and use web-based project software to host and manage project communication and documentation. 1.Includethe following features: a.Project directory,including Owner,Contractor,subcontractors,Design Professional,Design Professional's consultants,and other entities involved in the project.Include names of contact persons and contact information for each entity. b.Access control for each entity and for each workflow process to determine each entity's digital rights to create,modify,view,and print documents. c.Workflow planning,allowing customization of workflow for each project entity. d.Creation,logging,tracking,and notification for project communications. e.Tracking of project communication statuses in real time,including timestamped response log. f.Procedures for viewing PDFs or similar file formats,allowing markups by each entity.Provide security features to lock markups against changes once submitted. g.Processing and tracking of payment applications. h.Processing and tracking of contract modifications. i.Creation and distribution of meeting minutes. j.Document management for drawings,specifications,and coordination drawings,including revision control. k.Management of construction progress photographs. l.Mobile device compatibility. m.Creation of data analytics reports. n.Creation and export of editable logs for software functions.Provide Owner,Design Professional,and Design Professional's consultants with rights and ability to download logs when requested. 2.Provide up to 20 user licenses for use by Owner,Design Professional,Design Professional's consultants,and other entities involved in the project. 3.Comply with the software service's current published licensing agreements. 4.Training: Provide one-hour,web-based training session for users of software service.Further training is the responsibility of the user. a.Representatives of Owner are scheduled and included in this training. 5.Project Closeout: Design Professional determines when to terminate the software service for the project and is responsible for obtaining archive copies of files for Owner. 6.Web-Based Project Software Services: Use one of the following: a.Autodesk Build b.Newforma,Inc:www.newforma.com/#sle. c.Procore Technologies. d.Submittal Exchange. e.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 3.02 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL SERVICE A.All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic (PDF, MS Word,or MS Excel)format,as appropriate to the document,and transmitted via an Internet-based submittal service that receives,logs and stores documents,provides electronic stamping and signatures,and notifies addressees via email. 1.The web-based software will provide status logs,reports,searching and automated notifications. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 3 of 12 2.Besides submittals for review,information,and closeout,this procedure applies to Requests for Information (RFIs),progress documentation,contract modification documents (e.g. supplementary instructions,change proposals,change orders),applications for payment,field reports and meeting minutes,Contractor's correction punchlist,and any other document any participant wishes to make part of the project record. 3.Contractor and Design Professional are required to use this service. 4.It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in allowable format. 5.Subcontractors,suppliers,and Design Professional's consultants are to be permitted to use the service at no extra charge. 6.Users of the service need an email address,internet access,and PDF review software that includes ability to mark up and apply electronic stamps (such as Adobe Acrobat,www.adobe.com, or Bluebeam PDF Revu,www.bluebeam.com),unless such software capability is provided by the service provider. 7.Paper document transmittals will not be reviewed;emailed electronic documents will not be reviewed. 8.All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply,except that electronic document requirements do not apply to samples or color selection charts,which shall be delivered by mail or courier. B.Cost: The cost of the service is to be paid by Contractor;include the cost of the service in the Contract Sum. C.Submittal Service: Use one of the following: 1.Autodesk Build 2.Submittal Exchange (tel:1-800-714-0024): www.submittalexchange.com/#sle. 3.Newforma ConstructEx: www.newforma.com/our-solutions/constructex/#sle. 4.ProCore Construction Management Software;https://app.procore.com/account/login 5.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. D.Training: One,one-hour,web-based training session will be arranged for all participants,with representatives of Design Professional and Contractor participating;further training is the responsibility of the user of the service. 1.Representatives of Owner are scheduled and included in this training. E.Project Closeout: Design Professional will determine when to terminate the service for the project and is responsible for obtaining archive copies of files for Owner. 3.03 RELEASE OF CAD/BIM FILES A.Contractors may request plans for their use/benefit for assistance in preparing submittals or for use in construction. 1.A signed release form is required. 3.04 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A.Schedule meeting after Notice of Award. B.Attendance Required: 1.Owner. 2.Design Professional. 3.Contractor. 4.Major subcontractors. 5.Suppliers. C.Agenda: 1.Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2.Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3.Distribution of Contract Documents. 4.Submission of list of subcontractors,list of products,schedule of values,and progress schedule. 5.Submission of initial Submittal schedule. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 4 of 12 6.Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract,the Owner's Representative and Architect/Engineer. 7.Procedures and processing of field decisions,submittals,substitutions,applications for payments, proposal request,Change Orders,and Contract closeout procedures. 8.Scheduling. D.Project Coordinator will record minutes and distribute copies within two (2)days after meeting to participants,with copies to Design Professional,Owner,participants,and those affected by decisions made. 1.Minutes will be distributed through Web-based project management software system. 3.05 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING A.Schedule meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor occupancy. B.Attendance Required: 1.Contractor. 2.Owner. 3.Design Professional. 4.Special consultants. 5.Contractor's superintendent. 6.Major subcontractors. C.Agenda: 1.Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 2.Owner's requirements. 3.Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 4.Temporary utilities provided by Owner. 5.Survey and building layout. 6.Security and housekeeping procedures. 7.Schedules. 8.Application for payment procedures. 9.Procedures for testing. 10.Procedures for maintaining record documents. 11.Requirements for start-up of equipment. 12.Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. D.Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants,with two copies to Design Professional,Owner,participants,and those affected by decisions made. 3.06 PROGRESS MEETINGS A.Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the work at maximum bi-monthly intervals. B.Make arrangements for meetings,prepare agenda with copies for participants,preside at meetings. C.Attendance Required: 1.Contractor. 2.Owner. 3.Design Professional. 4.Special consultants. 5.Contractor's superintendent. 6.Major subcontractors. 7.Major Suppliers. 8.Additional consultants,subcontractors,suppliers and product representatives as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D.Agenda: 1.Review minutes of previous meetings. 2.Review of work progress. 3.Field observations,problems,and decisions. 4.Identification of problems that impede,or will impede,planned progress. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 5 of 12 5.Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6.Review of RFIs log and status of responses. 7.Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 8.Maintenance of progress schedule. 9.Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 10.Planned progress during succeeding work period. 11.Coordination of projected progress. 12.Maintenance of quality and work standards. 13.Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 14.Other business relating to work. E.Project Coordinator will record minutes and distribute copies within two (2)days after meeting to participants,with copies to Design Professional,Owner,participants,and those affected by decisions made. 1.Minutes will be distributed through Web based project management software system 3.07 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE-SEE SECTION 01 32 16 3.08 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS A.Include only factual information. Do not include personal remarks or opinions regarding operations and/or personnel. B.Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site and project progress: 1.Date. 2.High and low temperatures,and general weather conditions. 3.List of subcontractors at Project site. 4.Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 5.Major equipment at Project site. 6.Material deliveries. 7.Safety,environmental,or industrial relations incidents. 8.Meetings and significant decisions. 9.Unusual events (submit a separate special report). 10.Stoppages,delays,shortages,and losses. Include comparison between scheduled work activities (in Contractor's most recently updated and published schedule)and actual activities. Explain differences,if any. Note days or periods when no work was in progress and explain the reasons why. 11.Meter readings and similar recordings. 12.Emergency procedures. 13.Directives and requests of authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). 14.Change Orders received and implemented. 15.Testing and/or inspections performed. 16.List of verbal instruction given by Owner and/or Design Professional. 17.Signature of Contractor's authorized representative. 3.09 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A.Submit new photographs at least once a month,within 3 days after being taken. B.Utilize a photographic documentation platform.Use one of the following: 1.Procore Technologies. 2.StructionSite. 3.Substitutions:See Section 016000 -Product Requirements. C.Photography Type: Digital;electronic files. D.Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of work produced by an experienced photographer,acceptable to Design Professional. E.In addition to periodic,recurring views,take photographs of each of the following events: 1.Existing exterior and interior conditions prior to demolition,minimum of twenty (20). Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 6 of 12 2.Excavations in progress. 3.Foundations in progress and upon completion. 4.Structural framing in progress and upon completion. 5.Enclosure of building,upon completion. 6.Final completion,minimum of ten (10)photos. F.Take photographs as evidence of existing project conditions as follows: 1.Take photographs with maximum depth of field and in focus. 2.Views of Adjacent Buildings:Take photographs of interiors and exteriors of adjacent buildings to create a comprehensive documentation of the existing conditions before commencement of work. 3.Preconstruction Photographs:Photographs of existing site and surrounding properties and existing items to remain during construction shall indicate construction limits,flagged prior to construction photography,and record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures,pavements, and improvements. G.Views: 1.Provide non-aerial photographs from four cardinal views at each specified time,until date of Substantial Completion. 2.Consult with Design Professional for instructions on views required. 3.Provide factual presentation. 4.Provide correct exposure and focus,high resolution and sharpness,maximum depth of field,and minimum distortion. 5.Point of View Sketch:Provide sketch identifying point of view of each photograph. H.Digital Photographs:24 bit color,minimum resolution of 3200 by 2400 pixels,in JPGformat;provide files unaltered by photo editing software. 1.Use flash in low light levels or backlit conditions,and a 360-degree camera when required. 2.Delivery Medium:web-based project software service. 3.File Naming:Include project identification,date and time of view,GPS location data from camera, and view identification. 4.Point of View Sketch: Include digital copy of point of view sketch with each electronic submittal; include point of view identification in each photo file name. 3.10 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A.Review drawings prior to submission to Design Professional. B.Coordination Drawings,General:Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections,and additionally where installation is not completely indicated on Shop Drawings,where limited space availability necessitates coordination,or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1.Content:Project-specific information,drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts.Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data.Include the following information,as applicable: 2.Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings.Prepare sections, elevations,and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. a.Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to coordination drawings in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. b.Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,structural,civil, mechanical,and electrical systems. c.Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. d.Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,valves,and other controls. 3.Indicate required installation sequences. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 7 of 12 a.Indicate dimensions shown on Drawings.Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements.Provide alternative sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts.Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. C.Coordination Drawing Organization:Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1.Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans:Show architectural and structural elements,and mechanical,plumbing,fire-protection,fire-alarm,and electrical Work.Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid.Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2.Plenum Space:Indicate subframing for support of ceiling,and wall systems,mechanical and electrical equipment,and related Work.Locate components within plenums to accommodate layout of light fixtures and other components indicated on Drawings.Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3.Mechanical Rooms:Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms,showing plans and elevations of mechanical,plumbing,fire-protection,fire-alarm,and electrical equipment. 4.Structural Penetrations:Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5.Slab Edge and Embedded Items:Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications,sleeves,anchor bolts,bearing plates,angles,door floor closers,slab depressions for floor finishes,curbs and housekeeping pads,and similar items. 6.Mechanical and Plumbing Work:Show the following: a.Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork,piping,and conduit runs,including insulation, bracing,flanges,and support systems. b.Dimensions of major components,such as dampers,valves,diffusers,access doors,cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. c.Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork. 7.Electrical Work:Show the following: a.Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger. b.Light fixture,exit light,emergency battery pack,smoke detector,and other fire-alarm locations. c.Panel board,switchboard,switchgear,transformer,busway,generator,and motor-control center locations. d.Location of pull boxes and junction boxes,dimensioned from column center lines. 8.Fire-Protection System:Show the following: a.Locations of standpipes,mains piping,branch lines,pipe drops,and sprinkler heads. 9.Review:Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that,in general,the Work is being coordinated,but not for the details of the coordination,which are Contractor’s responsibility.If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared insufficient scope or detail,or are otherwise deficient,Architect will so inform Contractor,who shall make suitable modifications and resubmit. D.Coordination Drawing Process:Prepare coordination drawings in the following manner: 1.Schedule submittal and review of Fire Sprinkler,Plumbing,HVAC,and Electrical Shop Drawings to make required changes prior to preparation of coordination drawings. 2.Commence routing of coordination drawing files with HVAC Installer,who will provide drawing plan files denoting approved ductwork.HVAC Installer will locate ductwork and piping on a single layer,using orange color.Forward drawings to Plumbing Installer. 3.Plumbing Installer will locate plumbing and equipment on a single layer,using blue color. 4.Fire Sprinkler Installer will locate piping and equipment,using red color.Fire Sprinkler Installer shall forward drawing files to Electrical Installer. 5.Electrical Installer will indicate service and feeder conduit runs and equipment in green color. Electrical Installer shall forward drawing files to Communications and Electronic Safety and Security Installer. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 8 of 12 6.Communications and Electronic Safety and Security Installer will indicate cable trays and cabling runs and equipment in purple color.Communications and Electronic Safety and Security Installer shall forward completed drawing files to Contractor. 7.Contractor shall perform the final coordination review.As each coordination drawing is completed,Contractor will meet with Architect to review and resolve conflicts on the coordination drawings. E.Coordination Digital Data Files:Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements: 1.File Preparation Format: 2.Same digital data software program,version,and operating system as original Drawings. 3.File Submittal Format:Submit or post coordination drawing files using format same as file preparation format. 4.BIM File Incorporation:Develop and incorporate coordination drawing files into BIM established for Project. a.Perform three-dimensional component conflict analysis as part of preparation of coordination drawings.Resolve component conflicts prior to submittal.Indicate where conflict resolution requires modification of design requirements by Architect. 5.Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. a.Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b.Digital Data Software Program:Drawings are available in Revit 2022,Windows PC. c.Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106. 3.11 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI) A.Definition: A request seeking one of the following: 1.An interpretation,amplification,or clarification of some requirement of Contract Documents arising from inability to determine from them the exact material,process,or system to be installed;or when the elements of construction are required to occupy the same space (interference);or when an item of work is described differently at more than one place in Contract Documents. 2.A resolution to an issue which has arisen due to field conditions and affects design intent. B.Whenever possible,request clarifications at the next appropriate project progress meeting,with response entered into meeting minutes,rendering unnecessary the issuance of a formal RFI. C.Preparation: Prepare an RFI immediately upon discovery of a need for interpretation of Contract Documents. Failure to submit a RFI in a timely manner is not a legitimate cause for claiming additional costs or delays in execution of the work. 1.Prepare a separate RFI for each specific item. a.Review,coordinate,and comment on requests originating with subcontractors and/or materials suppliers. 2.Prepare in a format and with content acceptable to Owner. a.Use AIA G716 -Request for Information . 3.Prepare using software provided by the Electronic Document Submittal Service. 4.Combine RFI and its attachments into a single electronic file.PDF format is preferred. D.Reason for the RFI: Prior to initiation of an RFI,carefully study all Contract Documents to confirm that information sufficient for their interpretation is definitely not included. 1.Include in each request Contractor's signature attesting to good faith effort to determine from Contract Documents information requiring interpretation. 2.Unacceptable Uses for RFIs: Do not use RFIs to request the following:: a.Approval of submittals (use procedures specified elsewhere in this section). b.Approval of substitutions (see Section -01 60 00 -Product Requirements) Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 9 of 12 c.Changes that entail change in Contract Time and Contract Sum (comply with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract). d.Different methods of performing work than those indicated in the Contract Drawings and Specifications (comply with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract). 3.Improper RFIs: Requests not prepared in compliance with requirements of this section,and/or missing key information required to render an actionable response. They will be returned without a response,with an explanatory notation. 4.Frivolous RFIs: Requests regarding information that is clearly indicated on,or reasonably inferable from,Contract Documents,with no additional input required to clarify the question. They will be returned without a response,with an explanatory notation. a.The Owner reserves the right to assess the Contractor for the costs (on time-and-materials basis)incurred by the Design Professional,and any of its consultants,due to processing of such RFIs. E.Content: Include identifiers necessary for tracking the status of each RFI,and information necessary to provide an actionable response. 1.Official Project name and number,and any additional required identifiers established in Contract Documents. 2.Owner's,Design Professional's,and Contractor's names. 3.Discrete and consecutive RFI number,and descriptive subject/title. 4.Issue date,and requested reply date. 5.Reference to particular Contract Document(s)requiring additional information/interpretation. Identify pertinent drawing and detail number and/or specification section number,title,and paragraph(s). 6.Annotations: Field dimensions and/or description of conditions which have engendered the request. 7.Contractor's suggested resolution: A written and/or a graphic solution,to scale,is required in cases where clarification of coordination issues is involved,for example;routing,clearances, and/or specific locations of work shown diagrammatically in Contract Documents. If applicable, state the likely impact of the suggested resolution on Contract Time or the Contract Sum. F.Attachments: Include sketches,coordination drawings,descriptions,photos,submittals,and other information necessary to substantiate the reason for the request. G.RFI Log:Maintain and print "hard copy"reports for progress meeting.Reports to contain: 1.Indicate current status of every RFI. Update log promptly and on a regular basis. 2.Note dates of when each request is made,and when a response is received. 3.Highlight items requiring priority or expedited response. 4.Highlight items for which a timely response has not been received to date. 5.Identify and include improper or frivolous RFIs. H.Review Time: Design Professional will respond and return RFIs to Contractor within seven calendar days of receipt. For the purpose of establishing the start of the mandated response period,RFIs received after 12:00 noon will be considered as having been received on the following regular working day. 1.Response period may be shortened or lengthened for specific items,subject to mutual agreement,and recorded in a timely manner in progress meeting minutes. 2.For sequential reviews involving Architect's consultants,Owner,or another affected party,allow an additional 7 days. I.Responses: Content of answered RFIs will not constitute in any manner a directive or authorization to perform extra work or delay the project. If in Contractor's belief it is likely to lead to a change to Contract Sum or Contract Time,promptly issue a notice to this effect,and follow up with an appropriate Change Order request to Owner. 1.Response may include a request for additional information,in which case the original RFI will be deemed as having been answered,and an amended one is to be issued forthwith. Identify the amended RFI with an R suffix to the original number. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 10 of 12 2.Do not extend applicability of a response to specific item to encompass other similar conditions, unless specifically so noted in the response. 3.Upon receipt of a response,promptly review and distribute it to all affected parties,and update the RFI Log. 4.Notify Design Professional within seven calendar days if an additional or corrected response is required by submitting an amended version of the original RFI,identified as specified above. 3.12 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A.Submit to Design Professional for review a schedule for submittals in tabular format. 1.Submit at the same time as the preliminary schedulespecified in Section -01 32 16 -Construction Progress Schedule. 2.Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule and schedule of values. 3.Format schedule to allow tracking of status of submittals throughout duration of construction. 4.Arrange information to include scheduled date for initial submittal,specification number and title, submittal category (for review or for information),description of item of work covered,and role and name of subcontractor. 5.Account for time required for preparation,review,manufacturing,fabrication and delivery when establishing submittal delivery and review deadline dates. a.For assemblies,equipment,systems comprised of multiple components and/or requiring detailed coordination with other work,allow for additional time to make corrections or revisions to initial submittals,and time for their review. 3.13 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A.When the following are specified in individual sections,submit them for review: 1.Product data. 2.Shop drawings. 3.Samples for selection. 4.Samples for verification. 5.Other types indicated. B.Submit to Design Professional for review for the limited purpose of checking for compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in Contract Documents. C.Samples will be reviewed for aesthetic,color,or finish selection. D.After review,provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals. 3.14 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A.When the following are specified in individual sections,submit them for information: 1.Design data. 2.Certificates. 3.Test reports. 4.Inspection reports. 5.Manufacturer's instructions. 6.Manufacturer's field reports. 7.Other types indicated. B.Submit for Design Professional's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. C.Daily Logs:Submit to Owner through Architect two (2)copies of Contractor’s daily log indicating all personal on-site including names and time on site.Submit at maximum of monthly intervals at progress meetings and immediately upon request of Owner 3.15 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A.Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. B.Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. C.When the following are specified in individual sections,submit them at project closeout in compliance with requirements of Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals: 1.Project record documents. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 11 of 12 2.Operation and maintenance data. 3.Warranties. 4.Bonds. 5.Other types as indicated. D.Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. 3.16 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A.Electronic Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format;an electronically-marked up file will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up;illegible files will be rejected. B.Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections;one of which will be retained by Design Professional. 1.After review,produce duplicates as needed. 2.Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. 3.17 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A.General Requirements: 1.Use a single transmittal for related items. 2.Submit separate packages of submittals for review and submittals for information,when included in the same specification section. 3.Transmit using approved form. a.Use form generated by Electronic Document Submittal Service software. 4.Sequentially identify each item. For revised submittals use original number and a sequential numerical suffix. 5.Identify: Project;Contractor;subcontractor or supplier;pertinent drawing and detail number; and specification section number and article/paragraph,as appropriate on each copy. 6.Apply Contractor's stamp,signed or initialed certifying that review,approval,verification of products required,field dimensions,adjacent construction work,and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the work and Contract Documents. a.Submittals from sources other than the Contractor,or without Contractor's stamp will not be acknowledged,reviewed,or returned. 7.Deliver each submittal on date noted in submittal schedule,unless an earlier date has been agreed to by all affected parties,and is of the benefit to the project. a.Upload submittals in electronic form to Electronic Document Submittal Service website. 8.Schedule submittals to expedite the Project,and coordinate submission of related items. a.For each submittal for review,allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. b.For sequential reviews involving Design Professional's consultants,Owner,or another affected party,allow an additional 7 days. c.For sequential reviews involving approval from authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ),in addition to Design Professional's approval,allow an additional 30 days. 9.Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work. 10.Provide space for Contractor and Design Professional review stamps. 11.When revised for resubmission,identify all changes made since previous submission. 12.Distribute reviewed submittals. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with requirements. 13.Incomplete submittals will not be reviewed,unless they are partial submittals for distinct portion(s)of the work,and have received prior approval for their use. 14.Submittals not requested will be recognized,and will be returned "Not Reviewed", B.Product Data Procedures: 1.Submit only information required by individual specification sections. 2.Collect required information into a single submittal. 3.Submit concurrently with related shop drawing submittal. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 12 of 12 4.Do not submit (Material)Safety Data Sheets for materials or products. C.Shop Drawing Procedures: 1.Prepare accurate,drawn-to-scale,original shop drawing documentation by interpreting Contract Documents and coordinating related work. 2.Do not reproduce Contract Documents to create shop drawings. 3.Generic,non-project-specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the requirements for shop drawings. D.Samples Procedures: 1.Transmit related items together as single package. 2.Identify each item to allow review for applicability in relation to shop drawings showing installation locations. 3.Include with transmittal high-resolution image files of samples to facilitate electronic review and approval. Provide separate submittal page for each item image. 3.18 SUBMITTAL REVIEW A.Submittals for Review: Design Professional will review each submittal,and approve,or take other appropriate action. B.Submittals for Information:Design Professionalwill acknowledge receipt,but will take no other action. C.Design Professional's actions will be reflected by marking each returned submittal using virtual stamp on electronic submittals. 1.Notations may be made directly on submitted items and/or listed on appended Submittal Review cover sheet. D.Design Professional's and consultants'actions on items submitted for review: 1.Authorizing purchasing,fabrication,delivery,and installation: a."Reviewed". 1)No further action required by Contractor. b."Reviewed -Make Corrections". 1)Resubmit corrected item,with review notations acknowledged and incorporated. Resubmit separately,or as part of project record documents. c."Reviewed -Make Corrections -Revise and Resubmit Noted Items Only." 1)Resubmit corrected items only,with review notations acknowledged and incorporated. Resubmit separately,or as part of project record documents. 2.Not Authorizing fabrication,delivery,and installation: a."Revise and Resubmit in Entirety". 1)Resubmit revised item,with review notations acknowledged and incorporated. 2)Non-responsive resubmittals may be rejected. b."Rejected". 1)Submit item complying with requirements of Contract Documents. E.Design Professional's and consultants'actions on items submitted for information: 1.Items for which no action was taken: a."Not Reviewed"-to notify the Contractorthat the submittal has been received for record only. END OF SECTION AIA® Document G716TM – 2004 Request for Information (“RFI”) AIA Document G716™ – 2004. Copyright © 2004 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 08:54:45 on 09/10/2012 under Order No.3192892183_1 which expires on 07/28/2013, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1937198150) 1 TO: Alan Godfrey, AIA A&E Architects, P.C. 124 North 29th Street, Suite 100 Billings, MT 59101 FROM: ISSUE DATE: RFI No.001PROJECT: Billings Clinic Project 2800 10th Ave North Billings, MT 59101 REQUESTED REPLY DATE: PROJECT NUMBERS: / COPIES TO: RFI DESCRIPTION: (Fully describe the question or type of information requested.) REFERENCES/ATTACHMENTS: (List specific documents researched when seeking the information requested.) SPECIFICATIONS:DRAWINGS:OTHER: SENDER’S RECOMMENDATION: (If RFI concerns a site or construction condition, the sender may provide a recommended solution, including cost and/or schedule considerations.) RECEIVER’S REPLY: (Provide answer to RFI, including cost and/or schedule considerations.) BY DATE COPIES TO Note: This reply is not an authorization to proceed with work involving additional cost, time or both. If any reply requires a change to the Contract Documents, a Change Order, Construction Change Directive or a Minor Change in the work must be executed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Preliminary schedule. B.Construction progress schedule,bar chart type. C.Construction progress schedule,with network analysis diagrams and reports. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 10 00 -Summary: Work sequence,occupancy,and owner-furnished items. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.Within 10days after date of Agreement,submit preliminary schedule. B.If preliminary schedule requires revision after review,submit revised schedule within 10 days. C.Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule,submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1.Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. D.Within 10 days after joint review,submit complete schedule. E.Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. F.Submit in PDF format. G.Submit under transmittal letter form specified in Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Contractor's Administrative Personnel: Five (5)years minimum experience in using and monitoring CPM schedules on comparable projects. 1.05 SCHEDULE FORMAT A.Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each activity with the applicable specification section number. B.Sheet Size: Multiples of 8-1/2 x 11 inches. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE A.Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart or network analysis. 3.02 CONTENT A.Show complete sequence of construction by activity,with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. B.Identify each item by specification section number. C.Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. D.Provide sub-schedules for each stage of Work identified in Section 01 10 00 -Summary. E.Include conferences and meetings in schedule. F.Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item,and total percentage of Work completed,as of the first day of each month. G.Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings,product data,and samples,owner- furnished products,and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Design Professional. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes. H.Indicate delivery dates for owner-furnished products. I.Coordinate content with schedule of values specified in Section 01 20 00 -Price and Payment Procedures. J.Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used. 3.03 BAR CHARTS A.Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. B.Identify the first work day of each week. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE Page 2 of 2 3.04 NETWORK ANALYSIS A.Prepare network analysis diagrams and supporting mathematical analyses using the Critical Path Method. B.Illustrate order and interdependence of activities and sequence of work;how start of a given activity depends on completion of preceding activities,and how completion of the activity may restrain start of subsequent activities. C.Mathematical Analysis: Tabulate each activity of detailed network diagrams,using calendar dates,and identify for each activity: 1.Preceding and following event numbers. 2.Activity description. 3.Estimated duration of activity,in maximum 15 day intervals. 4.Earliest start date. 5.Earliest finish date. 6.Actual start date. 7.Actual finish date. 8.Latest start date. 9.Latest finish date. 10.Total and free float;float time shall accrue to Owner and to Owner's benefit. 11.Monetary value of activity,keyed to Schedule of Values. 12.Percentage of activity completed. 13.Responsibility. D.Analysis Program: Capable of compiling monetary value of completed and partially completed activities,accepting revised completion dates,and recomputation of all dates and float. E.Required Reports: List activities in sorts or groups: 1.By preceding work item or event number from lowest to highest. 2.By amount of float,then in order of early start. 3.05 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE A.Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Design Professional at each submittal. B.Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule. C.After review,revise as necessary as result of review,and resubmit within 10 days. 3.06 UPDATING SCHEDULE A.Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities. B.Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision,with projected completion date of each activity. C.Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work. D.Identify activities modified since previous submittal,major changes in Work,and other identifiable changes. E.Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion. F.Submit reports required to support recommended changes. G.Provide narrative report to define problem areas,anticipated delays,and impact on the schedule. Report corrective action taken or proposed and its effect. 3.07 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE A.Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file,to subcontractors,suppliers, Design Professional,Owner,and other concerned parties. B.Instruct recipients to promptly report,in writing,problems anticipated by projections indicated in schedules. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Submittals. B.Quality assurance. C.References and standards. D.Testing and inspection agencies and services. E.Contractor's construction-related professional design services. F.Contractor's design-related professional design services. G.Control of installation. H.Mock-ups. I.Tolerances. J.Manufacturers'field services. K.Defect Assessment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. B.Section 01 42 16 -Definitions. C.Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM C1021 -Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants;2008 (Reapproved 2023). B.ASTM C1077 -Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation;2017. C.ASTM C1093 -Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry;2023. D.ASTM D3740 -Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction;2019. E.ASTM E329 -Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection,Testing,or Special Inspection;2021. F.ASTM E543 -Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing;2021. G.ASTM E699 -Standard Specification for Agencies Involved in Testing,Quality Assurance,and Evaluating of Manufactured Building Components;2016. H.IAS AC89 -Accreditation Criteria for Testing Laboratories;2025. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A.Contractor's Quality Control Plan: Contractor's management plan for executing the Contract for Construction. B.Contractor's Professional Design Services: Design of some aspect or portion of the project by party other than the design professional of record. Provide these services as part of the Contract for Construction. 1.Design Services Types Required: a.Construction-Related: Services Contractor needs to provide in order to carry out the Contractor's sole responsibilities for construction means,methods,techniques,sequences, and procedures. b.Design-Related: Design services explicitly required to be performed by another design professional due to highly-technical and/or specialized nature of a portion of the project. Services primarily involve engineering analysis,calculations,and design,and are not intended to alter the aesthetic aspects of the design. C.Design Data: Design-related,signed and sealed drawings,calculations,specifications,certifications, shop drawings and other submittals provided by Contractor,and prepared directly by,or under direct supervision of,appropriately licensed design professional. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 6 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION-RELATED PROFESSIONAL DESIGN SERVICES A.Coordination: Contractor's professional design services are subject to requirements of project's Conditions for Construction Contract. B.Provide such engineering design services as may be necessary to plan and safely conduct certain construction operations,pertaining to,but not limited to the following: 1.Temporary sheeting,shoring,or supports. 2.Temporary scaffolding. 3.Temporary bracing. 4.Temporary foundation underpinning. 5.Temporary stairs or steps required for construction access only. 6.Temporary hoist(s)and rigging. 7.Investigation of soil conditions and design of temporary foundations to support construction equipment. 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN-RELATED PROFESSIONAL DESIGN SERVICES A.Coordination: Contractor's professional design services are subject to requirements of project's Conditions for Construction Contract. B.Base design on performance and/or design criteria indicated in individual specification sections. 1.Submit a Request for Interpretation to Design Professional if the criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform required design services. C.Delegated Design Services Statement:Submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design professional,for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional,indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated.Include list of codes,loads,and other factors used in performing these services. D.Scope of Contractor's Professional Design Services:Provide as indicated in technical specifications. 1.Structural Design of Reinforcement Splices: As described in Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2.Structural Design of Formwork: As described in Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3.Concrete Mix Design: As described in Section 03 30 01 -Cast-in-Place Concrete Floor Patching.No specific designer qualifications are required. 4.Structural Design of Steel Connections: As described in Section 05 12 00 -Structural Steel Framing. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B.Designer's Qualification Statement: Submit for Design Professional's knowledge as contract administrator,or for Owner's information. 1.Include information for each individual professional responsible for producing,or supervising production of,design-related professional services provided by Contractor. a.Full name. b.Professional licensure information. c.Statement addressing extent and depth of experience specifically relevant to design of items assigned to Contractor. C.Design Data: Submit for Design Professional's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents,or for Owner's information. 1.Include calculations that have been used to demonstrate compliance to performance and regulatory criteria provided,and to determine design solutions. 2.Include required product data and shop drawings. 3.Include a statement or certification attesting that design data complies with criteria indicated, such as building codes,loads,functional,and similar engineering requirements. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 3 of 6 4.Include signature and seal of design professional responsible for allocated design services on calculations and drawings. D.Test Reports: After each test/inspection,promptly submit two copies of report to Design Professional and to Contractor. 1.Include: a.Date issued. b.Project title and number. c.Name of inspector. d.Date and time of sampling or inspection. e.Identification of product and specifications section. f.Location in the Project. g.Type of test/inspection. h.Date of test/inspection. i.Results of test/inspection. j.Compliance with Contract Documents. k.When requested by Design Professional,provide interpretation of results. 2.Test report submittals are for Design Professional's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents,or for Owner's information. E.Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections,submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Design Professional,in quantities specified for Product Data. 1.Indicate material or product complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data,affidavits,and certifications as appropriate. F.Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Design Professional's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1.Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Testing Agency Qualifications: 1.Prior to start of work,submit agency name,address,and telephone number,and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 2.Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection,with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. 3.Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing testing laboratory is accredited under IAS AC89. B.Designer Qualifications: Where professional engineering design services and design data submittals are specifically required of Contractor by Contract Documents,provide services of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. C.Contractor's Quality Control (CQC)Plan: 1.Prior to start of work,submit a comprehensive plan describing how contract deliverables will be produced. Tailor CQC plan to specific requirements of the project. Include the following information: a.Management Structure: Identify personnel responsible for quality. Include a chart showing lines of authority. 1)Include qualifications (in resume form),duties,responsibilities of each person assigned to CQC function. b.Management Approach: Define,describe,and include in the plan specific methodologies used in executing the work. 1)Management and control of documents and records relating to quality. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 4 of 6 2)Communications. 3)Coordination procedures. 4)Resource management. 5)Process control. 6)Inspection and testing procedures and scheduling. 7)Control of noncomplying work. 8)Tracking deficiencies from identification,through acceptable corrective action,and verification. 9)Control of testing and measuring equipment. 10)Project materials certification. 11)Managerial continuity and flexibility. c.Owner will not make a separate payment for providing and maintaining a Quality Control Plan. Include associated costs in Bid price. d.Acceptance of the plan is required prior to start of construction activities not including mobilization work. Owner's acceptance of the plan will be conditional and predicated on continuing satisfactory adherence to the plan. Owner reserves the right to require Contractor to make changes to the plan and operations,including removal of personnel,as necessary,to obtain specified quality of work results. D.Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications. Engage a person with requisite training and experience to implement and manage quality assurance (QA)and quality control (QC)for the project. 1.09 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A.For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual,also referred to as reference standards,comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B.Comply with reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents,except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C.Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D.Maintain copy at project site during submittals,planning,and progress of the specific work,until Substantial Completion. E.Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents,request clarification from Design Professional before proceeding. F.Neither the contractual relationships,duties,or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Design Professional shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.10 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICES A.As indicated in individual specification sections,Owner or Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing. B.Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C.Contractor Employed Agency: 1.Testing agency:Comply with requirements of ASTM E329,ASTM E543,ASTM E699,ASTM C1021, ASTM C1077,ASTM C1093,and ASTM D3740. 2.Inspection agency:Comply with requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329. 3.Laboratory Qualifications: Accredited by IAS according to IAS AC89. 4.Laboratory: Authorized to operate in the State in which the Project is located. 5.Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. 6.Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or using an NIST established Measurement Assurance Program,under a laboratory measurement quality assurance program. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 5 of 6 PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A.Monitor quality control over suppliers,manufacturers,products,services,site conditions,and workmanship,to produce work of specified quality. B.Comply with manufacturers'instructions,including each step in sequence. C.Should manufacturers'instructions conflict with Contract Documents,request clarification from Design Professional before proceeding. D.Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the work except where more stringent tolerances,codes,or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E.Have work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F.Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G.Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration,physical distortion,and disfigurement. 3.02 MOCK-UPS A.Before installing portions of the Work where mock-ups are required,construct mock-ups in location and size indicated for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements,using materials indicated for the completed Work.The purpose of mock-up is to demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. B.Accepted mock-ups establish the standard of quality the Design Professional will use to judge the Work. C.Notify Design Professionaland Ownerfifteen (15)working days in advance of dates and times when mock-ups will be constructed. D.Provide supervisory personnel who will oversee mock-up construction.Provide workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. E.Tests shall be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. F.Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices,flashings,seals, and finishes. G.Obtain Design Professional's approval of mock-ups before starting work,fabrication,or construction. 1.Design Professional will issue written comments within seven (7)working days of initial review and each subsequent follow up review of each mock-up. 2.Make corrections as necessary until Architect's approval is issued. H.Design Professional will use accepted mock-ups as a comparison standard for the remaining Work. I.Where mock-up has been accepted by Design Professional and is specified in product specification sections to be removed,protect mock-up throughout construction,remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so by Design Professional. J.Where possible salvage and recycle the demolished mock-up materials. 3.03 TOLERANCES A.Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B.Comply with manufacturers'tolerances. Should manufacturers'tolerances conflict with Contract Documents,request clarification from Design Professional before proceeding. C.Adjust products to appropriate dimensions;position before securing products in place. 3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION A.See individual specification sections for testing and inspection required. B.Testing Agency Duties: 1.Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2.Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Design Professional and Contractor in performance of services. 3.Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4.Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 6 of 6 5.Promptly notify Design Professional and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-compliance of Work or products. 6.Perform additional tests and inspections required by Design Professional. 7.Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings. 8.Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. C.Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1.Agency may not release,revoke,alter,or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2.Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3.Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4.Agency has no authority to stop the Work. D.Contractor Responsibilities: 1.Deliver to agency at designated location,adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing,along with proposed mix designs. 2.Cooperate with laboratory personnel,and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3.Provide incidental labor and facilities: a.To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b.To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c.To facilitate tests/inspections. d.To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4.Notify Design Professional and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5.Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests,and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6.Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples,tests,and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. E.Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Design Professional. F.Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. 3.05 MANUFACTURERS'FIELD SERVICES A.When specified in individual specification sections,require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions,conditions of surfaces and installation,quality of workmanshipas applicable,and to initiate instructions when necessary. B.Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions. 3.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A.Replace Work or portions of the Work not complying with specified requirements. B.If,in the opinion of Design Professional,it is not practical to remove and replace the work,Design Professional will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 42 16 DEFINITIONS Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 42 16 DEFINITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Other definitions are included in individual specification sections. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A.Furnish: To supply,deliver,unload,and inspect for damage. B.In-kind: Descriptive term indicating new materials are to match the original material in detail and design in every regard,including but not limited to,form,size,material,species,grade,color, performance,profile,and all other salient characteristic that define the existing such that the new material would be indistinguishable from the original as determined solely by the Architect. C.Install: To unpack,assemble,erect,apply,place,finish,cure,protect,clean,start up,and make ready for use. 1.CF/CI:Item is furnished by Contractor and installed by Contractor. 2.OF/CI:Item is furnished by Owner and installed by Contractor. 3.OF/OI:Item is furnished by Owner and installed by Owner. D.Product: Material,machinery,components,equipment,fixtures,and systems forming the work result. Not materials or equipment used for preparation,fabrication,conveying,or erection and not incorporated into the work result. Products may be new,never before used,or re-used materials or equipment. E.Project Manual: The book-sized volume that includes the procurement requirements (if any),the contracting requirements,and the specifications. F.Provide: To furnish and install. G.Supply: Same as Furnish. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 42 16 DEFINITIONS Page 2 of 2 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 1 of 4 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Dewatering and site water control. B.Temporary utilities:Electricity,lighting,heat,ventilation. C.Temporary telecommunications services. D.Temporary sanitary facilities. E.Temporary Controls:Barriers,enclosures,and fencing. F.Security requirements. G.Vehicular access and parking. H.Waste removal facilities and services. I.Field offices. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 58 13 -Temporary Project Signage. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM E84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2026a. B.ASTM E90 -Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements;2023. 1.04 DEWATERING A.Provide temporary means and methods for dewatering all temporary facilities and controls. B.Maintain temporary facilities in operable condition. C.Site Water Control: 1.Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide,operate,and maintain pumping equipment. 2.Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. 3.Provide temporary drainage trenches,drains,sumps,pumps,or other items required to afford satisfactory working conditions for the execution,completion and protection of the work. Water shall be diverted to or shall be pumped into existing sewerage systems or ditches and shall not be allowed to run onto ground surface area. 1.05 GENERAL A.Install temporary facilities and utilities in conformance with State and Local Codes and requirements. B.Trade Contractors to obtain and pay for required applications,permits and inspections. C.Early Service: Any Contractor requiring temporary service before it can be provided as specified,or whose requirements with respect to a particular service differ from the service specified shall provide such service as suits his needs,at his own expense,and in a manner satisfactory to the Project Coordinator. D.Maintenance: Temporary facilities and utilities are to be maintained and kept in good operating condition. Maintenance men necessary to perform this work shall be provided in accordance with requirements. Maintenance time will include normal working hours for all trades and start up and shut down overtime as required. E.Removals: Subject to approval of Project Coordinator,contractor providing temporary facilities or services shall remove same when no longer required or when their function is replaced by authorized use of permanent facilities. Other removal time may be directed by Project Coordinator. F.Install temporary work in such a manner as not to interfere with the permanent construction. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 2 of 4 G.Disclaimer: Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are specified in this section,as extension of provisions in General Conditions and other contract documents. These requirements have been included for special purposes as indicated. Nothing in this section is intended to limit types and amounts of temporary work required,and no omission from this section will be recognized as an indication by Architect,Engineer or Project Coordinator that such temporary activity is not required for successful completion of the work and compliance with requirements of contract documents. Provisions of this section are applicable to,but not by way of limitation,utility services,construction facilities,security/protection provisions,and support facilities. H.Use of permanent systems and facilities: 1.Obtain written agreement with Owner,establishing start of warranties and conditions of use: a.Systems complete,with utility connections and safety devices. b.Automatic controls operational. c.Temporary filters and items required for protection of equipment and finishes are in place. d.Replace items damaged during temporary service use. 1.06 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A.Owner will provide the following: 1.Electrical power ,consisting of connection to existing facilities. 2.Water supply,consisting of connection to existing facilities. B.Provide and pay for all lighting,heating and cooling,and ventilationrequired for construction purposes. 1.07 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A.Provide,maintain,and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project mobilization. B.Telecommunications services shall include: 1.Windows-based personal computer dedicated to project telecommunications,with necessary software and laser printer. 2.Web-based video conferencing service (i.e.Webex,Zoom,MS Teams). 3.Minimum 50-inch display monitor. 4.External webcam with minimum 1080p at 60 FPS. 5.Microphone and speakers for adequate coverage for all participants.Architect and Owner to confirm the setup meets the needs of the project. 6.Internet Connections:Minimum of 10 mbps up and 100 mbps down;DSL modemor faster. 7.Telephone: Superintendent must be able to be reached on a mobile phone. 8.Email: Account/address reserved for project use. 9.Project web site. C.Telecommunications services will be available for use by both Owner and Architect. 1.08 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A.Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization. B.Use of existing facilities is not permitted. C.Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. D.At end of construction,return facilities to same or better condition as originally found. 1.09 BARRIERS A.Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas,to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public,to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B.Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building. C.Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants. D.Protect non-owned vehicular traffic,stored materials,site,and structures from damage. 1.10 FENCING A.Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 3 of 4 B.Provide 6 foot high fence around construction trailers,equipment and storage areas;equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 1.11 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A.Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products,to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections,and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 1.12 WEATHER PROTECTION A.Protect work and existing or adjacent property against weather,to maintain their work,materials, apparatus and fixtures free form injury or damage in accordance with the General conditions during the entire construction period. Work damaged by failure to provide weather protection all be removed and replaced with new work at the contractor's expense. B.Provide temporary non-staining waterproof coverings to close-off cavities and shed water to exterior and lap wall assemblies not less than 4 inches. Maintain in watertight condition until permanent coverings are in place. C.Remove all snow and ice as may be required for proper protection and execution of the work and protect and safety of the public. 1.13 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A.Provide temporary partitions and ceilingsas indicated to separate work areas from Owner-occupied areas,to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner-occupied areas,and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B.Construction:Framing and reinforced polyethylenesheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces: 1.Maximum flame spread rating of 75 in accordance with ASTM E84. C.Provide all shoring and bracing required for safety and proper execution of the work. Remove the items when the work is completed. D.Paint surfaces exposed to view from Owner-occupied areas. 1.14 PROTECTION OF EXISTING WORK A.Provide temporary protection of existing floor,walls and ceilings that will be exposed to construction traffic. B.Cover floors and walls with 3/8"minimum plywood,masonite or OSB,separated with red rosin paper and held in place by methods that will not damage existing finishes. C.Temporary protection will differ for each phase of work. See sheet G0.05 for additional information. 1.15 SECURITY A.Provide security and facilities to protect Work,existing facilities,and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry,vandalism,or theft. B.Coordinate with Owner's security program. 1.16 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A.Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks,access to emergency facilities,and access for emergency vehicles. B.Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. C.Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic,to minimize interference with public traffic. D.Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants,free of obstructions.Leave fire lanes and aisles to fire fighting equipment unobstructed at all times. Do not pile material in front of fire equipment,fire doors, or hydrants. E.Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. F.Designated existing on-site roads may be used for construction traffic. G.Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate,provide additional off-site parking. 1.Existing parking areas may be used for construction parking. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 4 of 4 2.Parking of private vehicles of workers shall be in an area allocated by Project Coordinator and as agreed to by Owner. 3.Do not obstruct egress to and from parking areas unless authorized by Owner. 1.17 WASTE REMOVAL A.See Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal,for additional requirements. B.Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. Locate in area designated by Owner and Project Coordinator. C.Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site weekly,legally disposing of waste materials,debris and rubbish off site and off Owner's property. D.If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site,provide suitable non- combustible containers;locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. E.Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids. F.Remove waste materials,debris,and rubbish from building daily. G.Carts,trucks,etc.used to transport materials shall be loaded in a safe manner. Materials shall not protrude beyond the sides of conveyance used. H.Materials shall not be thrown or dropped from scaffolds or other overhead areas. I.Gasoline or other highly flammable liquids shall not be brought inside facilities. 1.18 PROJECT SIGNS -SEE SECTION 01 58 13 1.19 FIELD OFFICES A.Office:Weathertight,with lighting,electrical outlets,heating,coolingequipment,and equipped with sturdy furniture,drawing rackand drawing display table. 1.Review proposed location within Project Site with Owner. 2.Provide space for Project meetings,with table and chairs to accommodate 10persons. B.Locate offices a minimum distance of 30 feet from existing and new structures. C.Field Offices shall be maintained until final acceptance and then be removed by the responsible party, no later than fifteen (15)days after acceptance of building,unless the Project Coordinator orders or approves earlier removal. D.Expenses: 1.Project Coordinator: All expenses in connection with primary Field Office,including the installation costs and use of telephones,heat,air-conditioning,light,water and janitor service shall be paid for by the Project Coordinator. 2.Trade Contractors: All expenses associated with their offices including utility installation costs shall be included in their bid. E.Each Trade Contractor:To keep a complete set of drawings,and specifications kept marked up to date with revision,Addenda,as-built drawings,and all permits and approved shop drawings on file. 1.20 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES,FACILITIES,AND CONTROLS A.Remove temporary utilities,equipment,facilities,materials,prior to Date of Substantial Completion inspection. B.Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 4 feet. Grade site as indicated. C.Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D.Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. E.Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION -NOT USED END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Construction procedures to promote adequate indoor air quality after construction. B.Building flush-out after construction and before occupancy. C.Testing indoor air quality before commencement of construction;existing building areas only. D.Testing indoor air quality after completion of construction. E.Testing air change effectiveness after completion of construction. 1.02 PROJECT GOALS A.Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other particulates in HVAC ducts and equipment. 1.Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this Contract. 2.Contractor shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to failure to protect ducts and equipment from construction dust. 3.Establish condition of existing ducts and equipment prior to start of alterations. B.Airborne Contaminants: Procedures and products have been specified to minimize indoor air pollutants. 1.Furnish products meeting the specifications. 2.Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination of installed products leading to indoor air pollution. 1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services. B.Section 01 61 16 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content Restrictions. C.Division 23:HVAC filters;testing HVAC systems for proper air flow rates,adjustment of dampers and registers,and settings for equipment;cleaning air ducts,equipment,and terminal units. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASHRAE Std 129 -Measuring Air-Change Effectiveness;1997 (Reaffirmed 2002). B.ASTM D5197 -Standard Test Method for Determination of Formaldehyde and Other Carbonyl Compounds in Air (Active Sampler Methodology);2021. C.ASTM E779 -Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan Pressurization;2019. D.ASTM E1186 -Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and Air Barrier Systems;2022. E.ASTM E1827 -Standard Test Methods for Determining Airtightness of Buildings Using an Orifice Blower Door;2022. F.CAL (CDPH SM)-Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.2;2017. G.EPA 600/4-90/010 -Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air; 1990. H.EPA 625/R-96/010b -Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Toxic Organic Compounds in Ambient Air;1999,with Addendum (2000). I.SMACNA (OCC)-IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction;2007. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A.Adsorptive Materials: Gypsum board,acoustical ceiling tile and panels,carpet and carpet tile,fabrics, fibrous insulation,and other similar products. B.Contaminants: Gases,vapors,regulated pollutants,airborne mold and mildew,and the like,as specified. C.Particulates: Dust,dirt,and other airborne solid matter. D.Wet Work: Concrete,plaster,coatings,and other products that emit water vapor or volatile organic compounds during installation,drying,or curing. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Page 2 of 6 1.06 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Indoor Air Quality Management Plan: Describe,in detail,measures to be taken to promote adequate indoor air quality upon completion;use SMACNA (OCC)as a guide. 1.Submit not less than 60 days before enclosure of building. 2.Identify potential sources of odor and dust. 3.Identify construction activities likely to produce odor or dust. 4.Identify areas of project potentially affected,especially occupied areas. 5.Evaluate potential problems by severity and describe methods of control. 6.Describe construction ventilation to be provided,including type and duration of ventilation,use of permanent HVAC systems,types of filters and schedule for replacement of filters. 7.Describe cleaning and dust control procedures. C.Interior Finishes Installation Schedule: Identify each interior finish that either generates odors, moisture,or vapors or is susceptible to adsorption of odors and vapors,and indicate air handling zone, sequence of application,and curing times. D.Duct and Terminal Unit Inspection Report. E.Air Contaminant Test Plan: Identify: 1.Testing agency qualifications. 2.Locations and scheduling of air sampling. 3.Test procedures,in detail. 4.Test instruments and apparatus. 5.Sampling methods. F.Air Contaminant Test Reports: Show: 1.Location where each sample was taken,and time. 2.Test values for each air sample;average the values of each set of 3. 3.HVAC operating conditions. 4.Certification of test equipment calibration. 5.Other conditions or discrepancies that might have influenced results. G.Ventilation Effectiveness Test Plan: Identify: 1.Testing agency qualifications. 2.Description of test spaces,including locations of air sampling. 3.Test procedures,in detail;state whether tracer gas decay or step-up will be used. 4.Test instruments and apparatus;identify tracer gas to be used. 5.Sampling methods. H.Ventilation Effectiveness Test Reports: Show: 1.Preliminary tests of instruments and apparatus and of test spaces. 2.Calculations of ventilation effectiveness,variable "E". 3.Location where each sample was taken,and time. 4.Test values for each air sample. 5.HVAC operating conditions. 6.Other information specified in ASHRAE Std 129. 7.Other conditions or discrepancies that might have influenced results. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Testing and Inspection Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency having minimum of 5 years experience in performing the types of testing specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Low VOC Materials: See Section 01 61 16. B.Low VOC Materials: See other sections for specific requirements for materials with low VOC content. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Page 3 of 6 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A.Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by adsorptive materials by: 1.Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the building until wet work is completed and dry. 2.Delivery and storage of such materials in fully sealed moisture-impermeable packaging. 3.Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time frame. B.Begin construction ventilation when building is substantially enclosed. C.If extremely dusty or dirty work must be conducted inside the building,shut down HVAC systems for the duration;remove dust and dirt completely before restarting systems. D.When working in a portion of an occupied building,prevent movement of air from construction area to occupied area. E.Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or electrical rooms. F.Prior to use of return air ductwork without intake filters clean up and remove dust and debris generated by construction activities. 1.Inspect duct intakes,return air grilles,and terminal units for dust. 2.Clean plenum spaces,including top sides of lay-in ceilings,outsides of ducts,tops of pipes and conduit. 3.Clean tops of doors and frames. 4.Clean mechanical and electrical rooms,including tops of pipes,ducts,and conduit,equipment, and supports. 5.Clean return plenums of air handling units. 6.Remove intake filters last,after cleaning is complete. G.Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters. H.Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA (OCC)for avoiding unnecessary contamination due to construction procedures. 3.02 BUILDING FLUSH-OUT A.Contractor's Option: Either full continuous flush-out OR satisfactory air contaminant testing is required, not both. B.Perform building flush-out before occupancy. C.Do not start flush-out until: 1.All construction is complete. 2.HVAC systems have been tested,adjusted,and balanced for proper operation. 3.Inspection of inside of return air ducts and terminal units confirms that cleaning is not necessary. 4.New HVAC filtration media have been installed. D.Building Flush-Out: Operate all ventilation systems at normal flow rates with 100 percent outside air until a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet per square foot of floor area has been supplied. 1.Obtain Owner's concurrence that construction is complete enough before beginning flush-out. 2.Maintain interior temperature of at least 60 degrees F and interior relative humidity no higher than 60 percent. 3.If additional construction involving materials that produce particulates or any of the specified contaminants is conducted during flush-out,start flush-out over. 4.If interior spaces must be occupied prior to completion of the flush-out,supply a minimum of 25 percent of the total air volume prior to occupancy,and: a.Begin ventilation at least three hours prior to daily occupancy. b.Continue ventilation during all occupied periods. c.Provide minimum outside air volume of 0.30 cfm per square foot or design minimum outside air rate,whichever is greater. E.Install new HVAC filtration media after completion of flush-out and before occupancy or further testing. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Page 4 of 6 3.03 AIR CONTAMINANT TESTING A.Contractor's Option: Either full continuous flush-out,or satisfactory air contaminant testing is required, not both. B.Perform air contaminant testing before starting construction,as base line for evaluation of post- construction testing. C.Perform air contaminant testing before occupancy. D.Do not start air contaminant testing until: 1.All construction is complete,including interior finishes. 2.HVAC systems have been tested,adjusted,and balanced for proper operation. 3.New HVAC filtration media have been installed. E.Indoor Air Samples: Collect from spaces representative of occupied areas: 1.Collect samples while operable windows and exterior doors are closed,HVAC system is running normally as if occupied,with design minimum outdoor air,but with the building unoccupied. 2.Collect samples from spaces in each contiguous floor area in each air handler zone,but not less than one sample per 25,000 square feet;take samples from areas having the least ventilation and those having the greatest presumed source strength. 3.Collect samples from height from 36 inches to 72 inches above floor. 4.Collect samples from same locations on 3 consecutive days during normal business hours;average the results of each set of 3 samples. 5.Exception: Areas with normal very high outside air ventilation rates,such as laboratories,do not need to be tested. 6.When retesting the same building areas,take samples from at least the same locations as in first test. F.Outdoor Air Samples: Collect samples at outside air intake of each air handler at the same time as indoor samples are taken. G.Analyze air samples and submit report. H.Volatile Organic Compounds Limits: 1.Formaldehyde: Not more than 27 parts per billion. 2.Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOCs): Not more than 500 micrograms per cubic meter. 3.Chemicals Listed in CAL (CDPH SM)Table 4-1,other than Formaldehyde: Not more than allowable concentrations listed in Table 4-1. I.Air Contaminant Concentration Test Methods: 1.Formaldehyde: ASTM D5197,EPA 625/R-96/010b Method TO-11A,or EPA 600/4-90/010 Method IP-6A. 2.Particulates: EPA 600/4-90/010 Method IP-10. 3.Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC): EPA 625/R-96/010b Method TO-1,TO-15,or TO-17;or EPA 600/4-90/010 Method IP-1. 4.Chemicals Listed in CAL (CDPH SM)Table 4-1,except Formaldehyde: ASTM D5197,or EPA 625/R- 96/010b Method TO-1,TO-15,or TO-17. 5.Carbon Monoxide:EPA 600/4-90/010 Method IP-3,plus measure outdoor air;measure in ppm; report both indoor and outdoor measurements. 3.04 VENTILATION EFFECTIVENESS TESTING A.Perform ventilation effectiveness testing before occupancy. B.Do not begin ventilation effectiveness testing until: 1.HVAC testing,adjusting,and balancing has been satisfactorily completed. 2.Building flush-out or air contaminant testing has been completed satisfactorily. 3.New HVAC filtration media have been installed. C.Test each air handler zone in accordance with ASHRAE Std 129. D.If calculated air change effectiveness for a particular zone is less than 0.9 due to inadequate balancing of the system,adjust,and retest at no cost to Owner. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Page 5 of 6 3.05 ENVELOPE LEAKAGE TESTING A.General: Comply with the following procedural requirements for testing building or space envelope,as applicable: 1.ASTM E779 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan Pressurization. 2.ASTM E1827 Standard Test Methods for Determining Airtightness of Buildings Using an Orifice Blower Door. B.Verify that the envelope to be tested has been sufficiently completed for testing to commence. C.Conduct ongoing inspections as construction progresses to document satisfactory installation conditions.related to thermal and moisture integrity of the building envelope that become concealed upon completion of construction. D.Submit a detailed narrative of proposed pressure test procedures prior to the test.Include a plan view showing proposed installation locations (personnel doors or other similar openings)for blower doors (or flexible ducts for trailer-mounted fans,if used). E.Avoid testing on days forecast to experience high winds,rain,or snow. F.Test the completed building and demonstrate that the air leakage rate of the building envelope does not exceed the specified requirements. G.Determine location and nature of undesirable air leakage pathways using methods specified in ASTM E1186 Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and Air Barrier Systems. H.Deficiencies: Correct deficiencies and re-inspect or re-test,as applicable,at no extra cost to Owner. 1.If difficulty in correction would delay progress,report deficiency to immediately. 2.Insulation for remedying building envelope deficiencies evidenced as excessive air leakage is specified in Section 07 21 00. 3.Air barriers for remedying building envelope deficiencies evidenced as excessive air leakage are specified in Section 07 25 00. 4.Sealants for remedying building envelope deficiencies evidenced as excessive air leakage are specified in Section 07 92 00. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS Page 6 of 6 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 58 13 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 58 13 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Project identification sign. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 10 00 -Summary: Responsibility to provide signs. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Design sign and structure to withstand 112 miles/hrwind velocity. B.Manufacturer Qualifications:Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. C.Finishes,Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering,fading,and chipping for duration of construction. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Shop Drawing: Show content,layout,lettering,color,foundation,structure,sizes and grades of members. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Contractor's Option:Provide rigid OR banner signage type in landscape OR vertical layout. Provide sign with project rendering,if available.Signage templates follow this section. 2.02 SIGN MATERIALS A.Rigid Sign: 1.Structure and Framing:New,wood,structurally adequate. 2.Sign Surfaces:1/8-inch thick DIBOND with 1/4-inch holes evenly spaced every 18-to 24-inches along the perimeter offset 1-inch from material edge. 3.Rough Hardware:Galvanized. 4.Paint and Primers:Exterior quality,twocoats;sign background of color as selected. 5.Lettering:Exterior quality paint,contrasting colors. B.Banner: MAXFlex Hybrid Mesh banner material with metal grommets evenly placed every 18-to 24- inches along the exterior finished banner edge.Banner material to block 90 percent of visibility and allow air to pass through. 2.03 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN A.One painted sign of construction,design,and content indicated on drawings,location designated. B.Content: 1.Project title,and name of Owneras indicated on Contract Documents. 2.Names and titles of authorities. C.Printed Graphics: 1.Rigid Sign:Direct print of high-resolution,full coverage graphics onto exterior grade matte white adhesive vinyl adhered to DIBOND face. 2.Banner:Custom full-coverage,full-color digital graphics printed directly on mesh banner material face. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A.Install project identification sign within 30 days after date fixed by Notice to Proceed. B.Erect at location of high public visibility adjacent to main entrance to site. 1.Signage placement shall be in accordance with local authorities having jurisdiction and not impede traffic or pedestrian traffic. C.Rigid Signs:Erect supports and framing on secure foundation,rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loadings. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 58 13 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE Page 2 of 2 D.Banner Signage:Attach to chain link construction fence with tamper-resistant hardware. E.Install sign surface plumb and level,with butt joints. Anchor securely. 3.02 MAINTENANCE A.Maintain signs and supports clean,repair deterioration and damage. 3.03 REMOVAL A.Remove signs,framing,supports,and foundations at completion of Project and restore the area. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 4 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.General product requirements. B.Re-use of existing products. C.Transportation,handling,storage and protection. D.Product option requirements. E.Substitution limitations. F.Procedures for Owner-supplied products. G.Maintenance materials,including extra materials,spare parts,tools,and software. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 10 00 -Summary: Identification of Owner-supplied products. B.Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. C.Section 01 60 10 -Substitution Procedures D.Section 01 60 10.01 -Substitution Request Form E.Section 01 61 16 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content Restrictions: Requirements for VOC- restricted product categories. F.Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Waste disposal requirements potentially affecting product selection,packaging and substitutions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products,models,options,and other data. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information specific to this Project. B.Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project;indicate utility and electrical characteristics,utility connection requirements,and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. C.Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product,with integral parts and attachment devices.Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1.For selection from standard finishes,submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors,textures,and patterns. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS A.Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by Contract Documents. B.Unforeseen historic items encountered remain the property of the Owner;notify Owner promptly upon discovery;protect,remove,handle,and store as directed by Owner. C.Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed,but not to be re-used,relocated,reinstalled, delivered to the Owner,or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner,become the property of the Contractor;remove from site. D.Specific Products to be Reused: The reuse of certain materials and equipment already existing on the project site is indicated in the documents. 1.If reuse of other existing materials or equipment is desired,submit substitution request. 2.02 NEW PRODUCTS A.Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by Contract Documents. B.See Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements,for additional source quality control requirements. C.Use of products having any of the following characteristics is not permitted: 1.Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. 2.Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber. 3.Containing cadmium or asbestos. 4.Containing lead unless specifically required or permitted by Contract Documents Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 4 D.Where other criteria are met,Contractor shall give preference to products that: 1.If used on interior,have lower emissions. 2.If wet-applied,have lower VOC content. 3.Are extracted,harvested,and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project. 4.Have longer documented life span under normal use. 5.Result in less construction waste. See Section 01 74 19 6.Are made of recycled materials. 7.If made of wood,are made of sustainably harvested wood,wood chips,or wood fiber. 2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS A.Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B.Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with Basis of Design indicated: Use the Basis of Design product,or a product of one of the manufacturers listed which can meet the specifications using a standard or custom product. C.Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 1.See also Section 01 60 10 -Substitution Procedures. 2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A.Furnish extra materials,spare parts,tools,and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B.Deliver to Project site;obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION LIMITATIONS A.See Section 01 60 10 -Substitution Procedures for procedures for submitting equal products for consideration. 3.02 OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS A.See Section 01 10 00 -Summary for identification of Owner-supplied products. B.Owner's Responsibilities: 1.Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings,product data,and samples,to Contractor. 2.Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3.On delivery,inspect products jointly with Contractor. 4.Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged,defective,or deficient items. 5.Arrange for manufacturers'warranties,inspections,and service. C.Contractor's Responsibilities: 1.Review Owner reviewed shop drawings,product data,and samples. 2.Receive and unload products at site;inspect for completeness or damage jointly with Owner. 3.Handle,store,install and finish products. 4.Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. 3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A.Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage;for equipment,package to avoid loss of factory calibration. B.If special precautions are required,attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of packaging. C.Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. D.Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E.Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. F.Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements,quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. G.Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,disfigurement,or damage,and to minimize handling. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 3 of 4 H.Arrange for the return of packing materials,such as wood pallets,where economically feasible. 3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A.Provide protection of stored materials and products against theft,casualty,or deterioration. B.Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. See Section 01 74 19. 1.Structural Loading Limitations:Handle and store products and materials so as not to exceed static and dynamic load-bearing capacities of project floor and roofareas. C.Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers'instructions. D.Store with seals and labels intact and legible. E.Arrange storage of materials and products to allow for visual inspection for the purpose of determination of quantities,amounts,and unit counts. F.Store sensitive products in weathertight,climate-controlled enclosures in an environment favorable to product. G.For exterior storage of fabricated products,place on sloped supports above ground. H.Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. 1.Execute a formal supplemental agreement between Owner and Contractor allowing off-site storage,for each occurrence. I.Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations,weather,precipitation, humidity,temperature,sunlight and ultraviolet light,dirt,dust,and other contaminants. J.Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions,if any. K.Do not store products directly on the ground. L.Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. M.Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. N.Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion,discoloration,or staining. O.Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,disfigurement,or damage. P.Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection.Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 4 of 4 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 60 10 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Page 1 of 4 SECTION 01 60 10 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Procedural requirements for proposed substitutions (equals),prior to bid and after award. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 00 21 13 -Instructions to Bidders: Restrictions on timing of substitution requests. B.Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures,coordination. C.Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements: Fundamental product requirements,product options, delivery,storage,and handling. D.Section 01 60 10.01 -Substitution Request Form E.Section 01 61 16 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content Restrictions: Restrictions on emissions of indoor substitute products. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A.Substitutions: Changes from Contract Documents requirements proposed by Contractor to materials, products,assemblies,and equipment. 1.Substitutions for this project shall only consist of Equal Products: The proposed products must have the same salient characteristics as the Basis of Design or other listed manufacturer or products,but were not listed as an acceptable manufacturer/product in specifications. a.The named products and listed qualities in each section establish the salient features against which comparable products will be evaluated.Qualities may include type,function, dimension,in-service performance,physical properties,appearance,and other characteristics. b.The Design Professional will make the final determination of a proposed product as being equal. 2.Substitutions for Cause: Proposed due to changed Project circumstances beyond Contractor's control. a.Unavailability. b.Regulatory changes. 3.Substitutions for Convenience: Proposed due to possibility of offering substantial advantage to the Project. a.Substitution requests offering advantages solely to the Contractor will not be considered. b.Substitution Requests made after contract award and for the Contractor's convenience will be subject to review fees,and possibly redesign fees,by the design team. 1)These fees will be processed as a deductive change order to the contractor and paid to the design team by the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.A Substitution Request for products,assemblies,materials,and equipment constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1.Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product,equipment,assembly,or system. 2.Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3.Agrees to provide same or equivalent maintenance service and source of replacement parts,as applicable. 4.Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for the work to be complete,with no additional cost to Owner. 5.Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 6.Agrees to reimburse Owner and Design Professional for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 60 10 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Page 2 of 4 B.Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Burden of proof is on proposer. 1.Note explicitly any non-compliant characteristics. C.Content: Include information necessary for tracking the status of each Substitution Request,and information necessary to provide an actionable response. 1.Forms included in the Project Manual are adequate for this purpose,and must be used. D.Limit each request to a single proposed substitution item. 1.Submit an electronic document,combining the request form with supporting data into single document. 3.02 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING PROCUREMENT A.Submittal Time Restrictions: 1.Architect requests for substitutions shall be considered only if submitted at least 10 days prior to the date for receipt of bids. B.Submittal Form (before award of contract): 1.Submit substitution requests by completing the form provided in Section 01 60 10.01. See this form for additional information and instructions. Use only this form;other forms of submission are unacceptable. 2.Substitution requests shall not be considered approved unless included by addendum. 3.03 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING CONSTRUCTION A.Submittal Form (after award of contract): 1.Submit substitution requests by completing the form provided in Section 01 60 10.01. See this section for additional information and instructions. Use only this form;other forms of submission are unacceptable. B.Submit request for Substitution for Cause within 14 days of discovery of need for substitution,but not later than 14 days prior to time required for review and approval by Design Professional,in order to stay on approved project schedule. C.Submit request for Substitution for Convenience within 14 days of discovery of its potential advantage to the project,but not later than 14 days prior to time required for review and approval by Design Professional,in order to stay on approved project schedule. 1.Contractor is responsible for ensuring that the proposed substitution is of equal to or superior to the basis of design in performance,appearance,quality and function prior to Architect’s review. 2.In addition to meeting general documentation requirements,document how the requested substitution benefits the Owner through cost savings,time savings,greater energy conservation, or in other specific ways. 3.Document means of coordinating of substitution item with other portions of the work,including work by affected subcontractors. 4.Bear the costs engendered by proposed substitution of: a.Owner's compensation to the Design Professional for any required redesign,time spent processing and evaluating the request. b.Other construction by Owner. c.Other unanticipated project considerations. D.Substitutions will not be considered under one or more of the following circumstances: 1.When they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals,without having received prior approval. 2.Without a separate written request. 3.04 RESOLUTION A.Design Professional may request additional information and documentation prior to rendering a decision. Provide this data in an expeditious manner. B.Design Professional will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 1.Design Professional's decision following review of proposed substitution will be noted on the submitted form. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 60 10 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Page 3 of 4 3.05 ACCEPTANCE A.Accepted substitutions change the work of the Project. They will be documented and incorporated into work of the project by Change Order,Construction Change Directive,Architectural Supplementary Instructions,or similar instruments provided for in the Conditions of the Contract. 1.An approved and returned Substitution Request Form alone does not qualify. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A.See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals,for closeout submittals. B.Include completed Substitution Request Forms as part of the Project record.Include both approved and rejected Requests. 3.07 ATTACHMENTS A.A facsimile of the Substitution Request Form required to be used on the Project is included after this section. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 60 10 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Page 4 of 4 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 60 10.01 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 60 10.01 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 60 10.01 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Page 2 of 2 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 61 16 VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 61 16 VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC)CONTENT RESTRICTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Requirements for Indoor-Emissions-Restricted products. B.Requirements for VOC-Content-Restricted products. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. B.Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements: Procedures for testing and certifications. C.Section 01 57 19 -Temporary Environmental Controls: Procedures and testing. D.Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements: Fundamental product requirements,substitutions and product options,delivery,storage,and handling. E.Section 07 92 00 -Joint Sealants: Emissions-compliant sealants. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A.Indoor-Emissions-Restricted Products: All products in the following product categories,whether specified or not: 1.Interior paints and coatings applied on site. 2.Interior adhesives and sealants applied on site,including flooring adhesives. 3.Flooring. 4.Composite wood. 5.Products making up wall and ceiling assemblies. 6.Thermal and acoustical insulation. 7.Other products when specifically stated in the specifications. B.VOC-Content-Restricted Products: All products in the following product categories,whether specified or not: 1.Exterior and interiorpaints and coatings applied on site. 2.Exterior and interioradhesives and sealants applied on site,including flooring adhesives. 3.Wet-applied roofing and waterproofing. 4.Other products when specifically stated in the specifications. C.Interior of Building: Anywhere inside the exterior weather barrier. D.Adhesives: All gunnable,trowelable,liquid-applied,and aerosol adhesives,whether specified or not; including flooring adhesives,resilient base adhesives,and pipe jointing adhesives. E.Sealants: All gunnable,trowelable,and liquid-applied joint sealants and sealant primers,whether specified or not;including firestopping sealants and duct joint sealers. F.Inherently Non-Emitting Materials: Products composed wholly of minerals or metals,unless they include organic-based surface coatings,binders,or sealants;and specifically the following: 1.Stone. 2.Concrete. 3.Clay brick. 4.Metals that are plated,anodized,or powder-coated. 5.Glass. 6.Ceramics. 7.Solid wood flooring that is unfinished and untreated. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.40 CFR 59,Subpart D -National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings;U.S.Environmental Protection Agency;Current Edition. B.ASTM D3960 -Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content of Paints and Related Coatings;2025. C.CARB (ATCM)-Airborne Toxic Control Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products;Current Edition. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 61 16 VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS Page 2 of 2 D.CARB (SCM)-Suggested Control Measure for Architectural Coatings;California Air Resources Board; 2020. E.GreenSeal GS-36 -Standard for Adhesives for Commercial Use;2025,with Editorial Revision (2026). F.SCAQMD 1113 -Architectural Coatings;1977,with Amendment (2016). G.SCAQMD 1168 -Adhesive and Sealant Applications;1989,with Amendment (2022). H.SCS (CPD)-SCS Certified Products;Current Edition. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: For each VOC-restricted product used in the project,submit evidence of compliance. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.VOC Content Test Method: 40 CFR 59,Subpart D (EPA Method 24),or ASTM D3960,unless otherwise indicated. 1.Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a.Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements. b.Published product data showing compliance with requirements. c.Certification by manufacturer that product complies with requirements. B.Composite Wood Emissions Standard: CARB (ATCM)for ultra-low emitting formaldehyde (ULEF)resins. 1.Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are: a.Current SCS "No Added Formaldehyde (NAF)"certification;www.scscertified.com. b.Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with requirements. c.Published product data showing compliance with requirements. d.Certification by manufacturer that product complies with requirements. C.Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.All Products: Comply with the most stringent of federal,State,and local requirements,or these specifications. B.VOC-Content-Restricted Products: VOC content not greater than required by the following: 1.Adhesives,Including Flooring Adhesives: SCAQMD 1168 Rule. 2.Aerosol Adhesives: GreenSeal GS-36. 3.Joint Sealants: SCAQMD 1168 Rule. 4.Paints and Coatings: Each color;most stringent of the following: a.40 CFR 59,Subpart D. b.SCAQMD 1113 Rule. c.CARB (SCM). 5.Wet-Applied Roofing and Waterproofing: Comply with requirements for paints and coatings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Owner reserves the right to reject non-compliant products,whether installed or not,and require their removal and replacement with compliant products at no extra cost to Owner. B.Additional costs to restore indoor air quality due to installation of non-compliant products will be borne by Contractor. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 8 SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Examination,preparation,and general installation procedures. B.Requirements for alterations work,including selective demolition. C.Pre-installation meetings. D.Cutting and patching. E.Surveying for laying out the work. F.Cleaning and protection. G.Starting of systems and equipment. H.Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel. I.Closeout procedures,including Contractor's Correction Punch List,except payment procedures. J.General requirements for maintenance service. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 10 00 -Summary: Limitations on working in existing building;continued occupancy;work sequence;identification of salvaged and relocated materials. B.Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures. C.Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures. D.Section 01 50 00 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures. E.Section 01 50 00 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary interior partitions. F.Section 01 51 00 -Temporary Utilities: Temporary heating,cooling,and ventilating facilities. G.Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Additional procedures for trash/waste removal,recycling,salvage,and reuse. H.Section 01 76 10 -Temporary Protective Coverings: Materials for protection of installed work. I.Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals: Project record documents,operation and maintenance data, warranties . J.Section 01 79 00 -Demonstration and Training: Demonstration of products and systems to be commissioned and where indicated in specific specification sections K.Section 02 41 00 -Selective Demolition: Demolition of whole structures and parts thereof;site utility demolition. L.Individual Product Specification Sections: 1.Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections. 2.Limitations on cutting structural members. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.NFPA 241 -Standard for Safeguarding Construction,Alteration,and Demolition Operations;2027. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B.Survey work: Submit name,address,and telephone number of Surveyorbefore starting survey work. 1.On request,submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2.Submit a copy of site drawingsigned by the Land Surveyor,that the elevations and locations of the work are in compliance with Contract Documents. 3.Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record. C.Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities. 1.Indicate extent of demolition,removal sequence,bracing and shoring,and location and construction of barricades and fences. Include design drawings and calculations for bracing and shoring. 2.Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications. 3.Include a summary of safety procedures. D.Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 8 1.Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2.Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3.Efficiency,maintenance,or safety of any operational element. 4.Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5.Work of Owner or separate Contractor. 6.Include in request: a.Identification of Project. b.Location and description of affected work. c.Necessity for cutting or alteration. d.Description of proposed work and products to be used. e.Alternatives to cutting and patching. f.Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor. g.Written permission of affected separate Contractor. h.Date and time work will be executed. E.Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A.For demolition work,employ a firm specializing in the type of work required. 1.Minimum of five (5)years ofdocumentedexperience. B.For surveying work,employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and acceptable to Design Professional. Submit evidence of surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. Employ only individual(s)trained and experienced in collecting and recording accurate data relevant to ongoing construction activities, C.For field engineering,employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project,licensed in the State in which the Project is located. Employ only individual(s)trained and experienced in establishing and maintaining horizontal and vertical control points necessary for laying out construction work on project of similar size,scope and/or complexity. D.For design of temporary shoring and bracing,employ a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Use of explosives is not permitted. B.Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide,operate,and maintain pumping equipment. C.Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. D.Perform dewatering activities,as required,for the duration of the project. E.Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials,to dissipate humidity,and to prevent accumulation of dust,fumes,vapors,or gases. F.Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property. 1.Provide dust-proof enclosures to prevent entry of dust generated outdoors. 2.Provide dust-proof barriers between construction areas and areas continuing to be occupied by Owner. G.Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills,from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. 1.See civil and SWPPP for additional requirements. 2.Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time. 3.Provide temporary measures such as berms,dikes,and drains,to prevent water flow. 4.Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays. 5.Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation;promptly apply corrective measures. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 3 of 8 H.Noise Control: Provide methods,means,and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. 1.Indoors: Limit conduct ofespecially noisyinterior work to _____. I.Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods,means,and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the work. J.Pollution Control: Provide methods,means,and facilities to prevent contamination of soil,water,and atmosphere from discharge of noxious,toxic substances,and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal,state,and local regulations. 1.07 COORDINATION A.See Section 01 10 00 for occupancy-related requirements. B.Coordinate scheduling,submittals,and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,with provisions for accommodating items installed later. C.Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. D.Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing,connecting to,and placing in service,such equipment. E.Coordinate space requirements,supports,and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routing indicated for pipes,ducts,and conduit,as closely as practicable;place runs parallel with lines of building.Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations,for maintenance,and for repairs. F.In finished areas except as otherwise indicated,conceal pipes,ducts,and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. G.Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. H.After Owner occupancy of premises,coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents,to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A.New Materials: As specified in product sections;match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B.Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. C.Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials,submit request for substitution described in Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B.Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C.Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D.Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication,to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication. E.Verify that utility services are available,of the correct characteristics,and in the correct locations. F.Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work,including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work,assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 4 of 8 B.Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C.Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer,sealer,or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.When required in individual specification sections,convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B.Require attendance of parties directly affecting,or affected by,work of the specific section. C.Notify Design Professional five days in advance of meeting date. D.Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1.Review conditions of examination,preparation and installation procedures. 2.Review coordination with related work. E.Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants,with two copies to Design Professional,Owner,participants,and those affected by decisions made. 1.Retain meeting minutes in web-based software for record purposes. 3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK A.Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B.Promptly notify Design Professional of any discrepancies discovered. C.Protect survey control points prior to starting site work;preserve permanent reference points during construction. D.Promptly report to Design Professional the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. E.Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Design Professional. F.Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. G.Establish elevations,lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1.Site improvements including pavements;stakes for grading,fill and topsoil placement;utility locations,slopes,and invert elevations. 2.Grid or axis for structures. 3.Building foundation,column locations,ground floor elevations,and roof elevations. 4.Controlling lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical trades. H.Periodically verify layouts by same means. I.Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A.In addition to compliance with regulatory requirements,conduct construction operations in compliance with NFPA 241,including applicable recommendations in Appendix A. B.Install products as specified in individual sections,in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations,and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. C.Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level,unless otherwise indicated. D.Install equipment and fittings plumb and level,neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. E.Make consistent texture on surfaces,with seamless transitions,unless otherwise indicated. F.Make neat transitions between different surfaces,maintaining texture and appearance. 3.06 ALTERATIONS A.Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1.Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as indicated. 2.Report discrepancies to Design Professional before disturbing existing installation. 3.Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B.Keep areas in which alterations are being conducted separated from other areas that are still occupied. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 5 of 8 1.Provide,erect,and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section 01 50 00. 2.Provide sound retardant partitions of construction specified in Section 01 50 00 where separating occupied space. C.Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications;take care to prevent water and humidity damage. 1.Where openings in exterior enclosure exist,provide construction to make exterior enclosure weatherproof. 2.Insulate existing ducts or pipes that are exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures by alterations work. D.Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1.Remove items indicated on drawings. 2.Relocate items indicated on drawings. 3.Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work,perform removals,patch,and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish;remove existing finish if necessary for successful application of new finish. 4.Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated,patch holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible. E.Services (Including but not limited to HVAC,Plumbing,Fire Protection,Electrical,Telecommunications, and Electronic Safety and Security):Remove,relocate,and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction. 1.Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation;maintain access to equipment and operational components;if necessary,modify installation to allow access or provide access panel. 2.Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require reactivation,put back into operational condition;repair supply,distribution,and equipment as required. 3.Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. a.Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections;minimize duration of outages. b.See Section 01 10 00 for other limitations on outages and required notifications. c.Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service. 4.Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities. 5.Remove abandoned pipe,ducts,conduits,and equipment ,including those above accessible ceilings;remove back to source of supply where possible,otherwise cap stub and tag with identification;patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction. F.Protect existing work to remain. 1.Prevent movement of structure;provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2.Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3.Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. G.Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible. 1.When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Design Professional. 2.Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one,rework floors, walls,and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks,steps,or bulkheads. 3.Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs in existing work,submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Design Professional review and request instructions. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 6 of 8 H.Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished,patch to match the surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished,patch so that the substrate is ready for the new finish. I.Refinish existing surfaces as indicated: 1.Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished,refinish all visible existing surfaces to remain to the specified condition for each material,with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. 2.If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work,re-cover and refinish to match. J.Clean existing systems and equipment. K.Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site;do not burn or bury. L.Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete. M.Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section. 3.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING A.Whenever possible,execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B.See Alterations article above for additional requirements. C.Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1.Complete the work. 2.Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3.Provide openings for penetration of mechanical,electrical,and other services. 4.Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5.Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6.Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7.Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8.Remove and replace defective and non-complying work. D.Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. E.Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements,and sight exposed surfaces. F.Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. G.Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. H.Fit work tightly to pipes,sleeves,ducts,conduit,and other penetrations through surfaces. I.At penetrations of fire rated walls,partitions,ceiling,or floor construction,completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 84 00,to full thickness of the penetrated element. J.Patching: 1.Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly,refinish entire unit. 2.Match color,texture,and appearance. 3.Repair patched surfaces that are damaged,lifted,discolored,or showing other imperfections due to patching work.If defects are due to condition of substrate,repair substrate prior to repairing finish. 3.08 PROGRESS CLEANING A.Maintain areas free of waste materials,debris,and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B.Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases,plenums,attics,crawl spaces,and other closed or remote spaces,prior to enclosing the space. C.Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing,and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D.Collect and remove waste materials,debris,and trash/rubbish from site periodicallyand dispose off- site;do not burn or bury. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 7 of 8 3.09 PROTECTION OF EXISTING AND INSTALLED WORK A.See Section 01 76 10 for temporary protective covering materials. B.Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. C.Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. D.Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products.Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. E.Provide protective coverings at walls,projections,jambs,sills,and soffits of openings. F.Protect finished floors,stairs,and other surfaces from traffic,dirt,wear,damage,or movement of heavy objects,by protecting with durable sheet materials. G.Protect work from spilled liquids. If work is exposed to spilled liquids,immediately remove protective coverings,dry out work,and replace protective coverings. H.Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. I.Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. J.Remove protective coverings when no longer needed;reuse or recycle coverings if possible. 3.10 SYSTEM STARTUP A.Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B.Notify Design Professional and Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item. C.Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication,drive rotation, belt tension,control sequence,and for conditions that may cause damage. D.Verify tests,meter readings,and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E.Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F.Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractorpersonnel in accordance with manufacturers'instructions. G.When specified in individual specification Sections,require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect,check,and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up,and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H.Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A.See Section 01 79 00 -Demonstration and Training. 3.12 ADJUSTING A.Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.13 FINAL CLEANING A.Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. 1.Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy. B.Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C.Clean interior and exterior glass,surfaces exposed to view;remove temporary labels,stains and foreign substances,polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. D.Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. E.Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. F.Cleanfilters of operating equipment. G.Clean debris from roofs,gutters,downspouts,scuppers,overflow drains,area drains,and drainage systems. H.Clean site;sweep paved areas,rake clean landscaped surfaces. I.Remove waste,surplus materials,trash/rubbish,and construction facilities from the site;dispose of in legal manner;do not burn or bury. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 8 of 8 3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A.Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1.Provide copies to Design Professional. 2.Provide copies to Owner. B.Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. C.Notify Design Professional and Project Coordinator when work is considered ready for Design Professional's Substantial Completion inspection. 1.Entire project will be inspected at one time.If the Contractor requests phased inspections for Contractor's convenience,Owner and Architect must agree to phased inspections. a.Phased inspections by the Architect may result in additional fees for the Architect's services. Additional fees to be paid by Owner or Contractor. 2.If Architect conducts the Substantial Completion inspection and determines that the Contractor is not ready for Substantial Completion,the Architect,at their discretion,may take the following actions: a.The Architect may conduct a Substantial Completion inspection of areas deemed ready for inspection.Areas found not ready for inspection,an additional Substantial Completion inspection(s)shall be required.Additional inspections may result in additional fees for Architect's services to be paid by Owner or Contractor. If Architect determines that no areas are ready for Substantial Completion,Contractor must reschedule future Substantial Completion Inspection.Additional inspections may result in additional fees for Architect's services to be paid by Owner or Contractor. D.Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List,that Contract Documents have been reviewed,work has been inspected,and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Design Professional's Substantial Completion inspection. E.Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing Design Professional's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected and submit to Design Professional. F.Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas. G.Accompany Project Coordinator on Contractor's preliminary final inspection. H.Notify Design Professional when work is considered finally complete and ready for Design Professional's Substantial Completion final inspection. I.Complete items of work determined by Design Professional listed in executed Certificate of Substantial Completion. 3.15 MAINTENANCE A.Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections. B.Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or,if not indicated,not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty,whichever is longer. C.Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean,adjust,and lubricate as required. D.Include systematic examination,adjustment,and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. E.Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION Document G704TM – 2017 Certificate of Substantial Completion AIA Document G704™ – 2017. Copyright © 1963, 1978, 1992, 2000 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. To report copyright violations of AIA Contract Documents, e-mail The American Institute of Architects’ legal counsel, copyright@aia.org. PROJECT: (name and address) CONTRACT INFORMATION:CERTIFICATE INFORMATION: Contract For: Certificate Number: Date: Date: OWNER: (name and address) ARCHITECT: (name and address) CONTRACTOR: (name and address) The Work identified below has been reviewed and found, to the Architect’s best knowledge, information, and belief, to be substantially complete. Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. The date of Substantial Completion of the Project or portion designated below is the date established by this Certificate. (Identify the Work, or portion thereof, that is substantially complete.) ARCHITECT (Firm Name) SIGNATURE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION WARRANTIES The date of Substantial Completion of the Project or portion designated above is also the date of commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents, except as stated below: (Identify warranties that do not commence on the date of Substantial Completion, if any, and indicate their date of commencement.) WORK TO BE COMPLETED OR CORRECTED A list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto, or transmitted as agreed upon by the parties, and identified as follows: (Identify the list of Work to be completed or corrected.) The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise agreed to in writing, the date of commencement of warranties for items on the attached list will be the date of issuance of the final Certificate of Payment or the date of final payment, whichever occurs first. The Contractor will complete or correct the Work on the list of items attached hereto within ( ) days from the above date of Substantial Completion. Cost estimate of Work to be completed or corrected: $ The responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work, insurance, and other items identified below shall be as follows: (Note: Owner’s and Contractor’s legal and insurance counsel should review insurance requirements and coverage.) The Owner and Contractor hereby accept the responsibilities assigned to them in this Certificate of Substantial Completion: CONTRACTOR (Firm Name) SIGNATURE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE DATE OWNER (Firm Name) SIGNATURE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE DATE Document G707™ – 1994 Consent Of Surety to Final Payment AIA Document G707™ – 1994. Copyright © 1982 and 1994 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. The “American Institute of Architects,” “AIA,” the AIA Logo, and “AIA Contract Documents” are registered trademarks and may not be used without permission. This document was produced by AIA software at 12:31:33 MT on 01/11/2022 under Order No.2114277448 which expires on 02/06/2023, is not for resale, is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents® Terms of Service. To report copyright violations, e-mail copyright@aia.org. User Notes: (3B9ADA5A) 1 PROJECT: (Name and address)ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER: CONTRACT FOR: TO OWNER: (Name and address)CONTRACT DATED: OWNER: ARCHITECT: CONTRACTOR: SURETY: OTHER: In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the (Insert name and address of Surety) , SURETY, on bond of (Insert name and address of Contractor) , CONTRACTOR, hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor shall not relieve the Surety of any of its obligations to (Insert name and address of Owner) , OWNER, as set forth in said Surety's bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand on this date: (Insert in writing the month followed by the numeric date and year.) (Surety) (Signature of authorized representative) Attest: (Seal):(Printed name and title) Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 1 of 4 SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS A.Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible. B.Owner requests that Contractor utilizes City of Bozeman Solid Waste Services for disposal of waste and recyclable materials whenever possible. C.Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error,poor planning, breakage,mishandling,contamination,or other factors. D.Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills;reuse,salvage,or recycle as much waste as economically feasible. E.Required Recycling,Salvage,and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration: 1.Aluminum and plastic beverage containers. 2.Corrugated cardboard. 3.Wood pallets. 4.Clean dimensional wood. 5.Land clearing debris,including brush,branches,logs,and stumps;see Section 31 10 00 -Site Clearing for use options. 6.Concrete: May be crushed and used as riprap,aggregate,sub-base material,or fill. 7.Metals,including packaging banding,metal studs,sheet metal,structural steel,piping,reinforcing bars,door frames,and other items made of steel,iron,galvanized steel,stainless steel,aluminum, copper,zinc,lead,brass,and bronze. F.Contractor Reporting Responsibilities: Submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports;report landfill disposal, incineration,recycling,salvage,and reuse regardless of to whom the cost or savings accrues;use the same units of measure on required reports. G.Develop and follow a Waste Management Plan designed to implement these requirements. H.Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are: 1.Burning on the project site. 2.Burying on the project site. 3.Dumping or burying on other property,public or private. 4.Other illegal dumping or burying. I.Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements,including but not limited to Federal,state and local requirements,pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 10 00 -Summary: List of items to be salvaged from the existing building for relocation in project or for Owner. B.Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for project meetings,reports, submittal procedures,and project documentation. C.Section 01 50 00 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. D.Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements: Waste prevention requirements related to product substitutions. E.Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements: Waste prevention requirements related to delivery,storage, and handling. F.Section 01 60 10 -Substitution Procedures. G.Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements: Trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition,cutting and patching,installation,protection,and cleaning. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 2 of 4 1.03 DEFINITIONS A.Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils,solvents,caulk,or the like. B.Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials,packaging, trash,debris,and rubble resulting from construction,remodeling,repair and demolition operations. C.Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances,i.e.,ignitibility,corrosivity,toxicity or reactivity. D.Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances,i.e.,ignitibility, corrosivity,toxicity,or reactivity. E.Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure. F.Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others. G.Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others. H.Recycling: The process of sorting,cleansing,treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning,incinerating,or thermally destroying waste. I.Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit. J.Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site. K.Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others. L.Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run- off water. M.Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste. N.Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure. O.Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused,returned,recycled,or salvaged. P.Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable,returnable,recyclable,and reusable material. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Submit Waste Management Plan within 10 calendar daysafter receipt of Notice of Award of Bid,or prior to any trash or waste removal,whichever occurs sooner;submit projection of all trash and waste that will require disposal and alternatives to landfilling. C.Waste Management Plan: Include the following information: 1.Analysis of the trash and waste projected to be generated during the entire project construction cycle,including types and quantities. 2.Landfill Options:The name,address,and telephone number of the landfill(s)where trash/waste will be disposed of,the applicable landfill tipping fee(s),and the projected cost of disposing of all project trash/waste in the landfill(s). 3.Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials that will be diverted from landfills by reuse,salvage, or recycling. 4.Meetings: Describe regular meetings to be held to address waste prevention,reduction, recycling,salvage,reuse,and disposal. 5.Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be diverted from landfills will be protected from contamination and prepared for acceptance by designated facilities;include separation procedures for recyclables,storage,and packaging. 6.Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of materials to be recycled; i.e.whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers,or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler. 7.Recycling Incentives: Describe procedures required to obtain credits,rebates,or similar incentives. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 3 of 4 D.Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals,with details of quantities of trash and waste, means of disposal or reuse,and costs;show both totals to date and since last report. 1.Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment;failure to submit Report will delay payment. 2.Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner. 3.Landfill Disposal: Include the following information: a.Identification of material. b.Amount,in tons or cubic yards,of trash/waste material from the project disposed of in landfills. c.State the identity of landfills,total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill,and total disposal cost. d.Include manifests,weight tickets,receipts,and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 4.Incinerator Disposal: Include the following information: a.Identification of material. b.Amount,in tons or cubic yards,of trash/waste material from the project delivered to incinerators. c.State the identity of incinerators,total amount of fees paid to incinerator,and total disposal cost. d.Include manifests,weight tickets,receipts,and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. 5.Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each: a.Identification of material,including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects. b.Amount,in tons or cubic yards,date removed from the project site,and receiving party. c.Transportation cost,amount paid or received for the material,and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material. d.Include manifests,weight tickets,receipts,and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost. e.Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration. 6.Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each: a.Identification of material and how it was used in the project. b.Amount,in tons or cubic yards. c.Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity. 7.Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above,as appropriate to disposal method. E.Recycling Incentive Programs: 1.Where revenue accrues to Contractor,submit copies of documentation required to qualify for incentive. 2.Where revenue accrues to Owner,submit any additional documentation required by Owner in addition to information provided in periodic Waste Disposal Report. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A.See Section 01 60 00 and Section 01 60 10. B.For each proposed product substitution,submit the following information in addition to requirements specified in Section 01 60 00: 1.Relative amount of waste produced,compared to specified product. 2.Cost savings on waste disposal,compared to specified product,to be deducted from the Contract Sum. 3.Proposed disposal method for waste product. 4.Markets for recycled waste product. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 4 of 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES A.See Section 01 30 00 for additional requirements for project meetings,reports,submittal procedures, and project documentation. B.See Section 01 50 00 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services. C.See Section 01 60 00 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery,storage,and handling. D.See Section 01 70 00 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition,cutting and patching,installation,protection,and cleaning. 3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A.Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan. B.Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman,each subcontractor,Owner,and Design Professional. C.Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation,handling,and recycling,salvage, reuse,and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project. D.Meetings:Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings. 1.Prebid meeting. 2.Preconstruction meeting. 3.Regular job-site meetings. 4.Job safety meetings. E.Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling,salvage,reuse, return,and trash disposal,for use by all contractors and installers. 1.As a minimum,provide: a.Separate area for storage of materials to be reused on-site,such as wood cut-offs for blocking. b.Separate dumpsters for each category of recyclable. c.Recycling bins at worker lunch area. 2.Provide containers as required. 3.Provide temporary enclosures around piles of separated materials to be recycled or salvaged. 4.Locate enclosures out of the way of construction traffic. 5.Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. 6.If an enclosed area is not provided,clearly lay out and label a specific area on-site. 7.Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. F.Hazardous Wastes: Separate,store,and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations. G.Recycling: Separate,store,protect,and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials. H.Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside,sort,and protect separated products in preparation for reuse. I.Salvage: Set aside,sort,and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site. END OF SECTION *See Appendix B for Standard Solid Waste Volume to Weight Conversions 017419.1 017419 - Appendix A Project Waste Management Plan Worksheet A B C D E F G H I J Material Quantity Recycled (in tons) Quantity Salvaged or Reused (in tons) A + B = Total Quantity Diverted from Landfill Quantity To Landfill (in tons) C + D = Total Quantity Generated (in tons) Tip Fee/Ton at Landfill C x F = Tip Fee Savings resulting from Landfill Diversion Cost of Recycling (R), Salvage (S), or Reuse (Re) (Specify R, S, or Re) Revenue from Recycling, Salvage, or Reuse G - H + I = Total Cost (-) or Savings (+) from Diversion Asphalt/Concrete Brick/Masonry/Tile Building Materials (doors, windows, fixtures, shingles, lumber, insulation, sheetgoods, etc.) Carpet Carpet Padding, Foam Only Cardboard Ceiling Tile Drywall Glass Scrap Metal Aluminum Copper Steel Unpainted Wood & Pallets Yard Trimmings, Brush, Trees, Stumps, etc. Garbage/Trash Other Column Totals Total Quantity Recycled Total Quantity Reused or Salvaged Total Quantity Diverted from Landfill Total Quantity To Landfill Total Quantity Generated Tip Fee Savings from Diversion Total Cost of Recycling, Salvage, or Reuse Revenue from Recycling, Salvage, or Reuse Total Cost (-) or Savings (+) from Diversion Percentage Diverted = ______________ (C divided by E from Column Totals) Should meet specified diversion requirement. 017419.2 STANDARD SOLID WASTE CONVERSIONS 017419 - Appendix B STANDARD SOLID WASTE CONVERSIONS The following sections provide conversions for solid waste and recyclable materials. Section 1 provides formulas to convert solid waste volume (cubic yards) into tons. Section 2 includes conversion factors to estimate the volume and weight of a number of solid waste and recyclable materials. 1. To convert cubic yards to tons: A: For un-compacted trash, to convert the units of cubic yards into tons, using the standard density of trash value of 250 pounds per cubic yard: Using “X” cubic yards, multiply by 250 pounds per cubic yard, divide by 2000 pounds per ton, to obtain value in tons. “X” cubic yards x 250 pounds ÷ 1 ton = ______ tons cubic yard 2000 pounds This equals: “X” cubic yards x 0.125 tons = _______ tons cubic yard In this case, 8 cubic yards = one ton. B: To determine your own density value for un-compacted trash (instead of using the standard value of 250 pounds per cubic yard), using a 32 gallon trash can: (1) Weigh the trash can both filled and empty (use a full 32 gallon trash can filled with trash roughly level to the top); (2) Subtract the empty weight from the filled weight to get the weight of trash ( filled weight – empty weight = weight of trash); (3) Use the formula, using “Y” your weight of trash (pounds), divided by 0.15 cubic yards per 32 gallon trash can, to obtain your value in pounds per cubic yard; which equals: “Y” pounds / 0.15 cubic yards = ________ pounds 32 gallon can 32 gallon can cubic yard (4) Substitute this value for the 250 pounds per cubic yard value in Method A above. This would be the more accurate measure of your park’s specific waste. C: For compacted trash, to convert cubic yards into tons: To use a compaction ratio, multiply the appropriate ratio times the un-compacted trash weight in Formula A to obtain the compacted trash weight. “X” cubic yards x 3 (compaction ratio) x 250 pounds x 1 ton = ______ tons 1 cubic yard 2000 pounds 017419.2 STANDARD SOLID WASTE CONVERSIONS Typical compaction ratios for trash: 3:1 (typical) 4:1 (higher-compaction vehicles) If you or your hauler don’t know the compacting ratio, the typical values for compacted trash are 500 to 1000 lbs./cubic yard, average 700 lbs./cubic yard. Use 700 lbs. per cubic yard if you don’t have more accurate records. For compacted trash, 0.4 is used instead of 0.125 in Formula A: “X” cubic yards x 0.4 tons = _______ tons cubic yard D: To convert container size to cubic yards for un-compacted waste: If you don't have size and weight information on your specific containers, then these typical values can be used: 1 cubic yard = 202 gallons 32 gallon can = 0.15 cubic yards 60 gallon tote = 0.30 cubic yards 90 gallon tote = 0.45 cubic yards 2. EPA’s Standard Volume-to-Weight Conversion Factors Category Recyclable Materials (u/c = uncompacted/ compacted & baled) Volume Estimated Waste (in pounds) FOOD SCRAPSA Food scraps, solid and liquid fats 55-gal drum 412 GLASS BottlesB Whole Bottles A. Semicrushed Crushed (mechanically) Uncrushed to manually broken Refillable Whole BottlesC Refillable beer bottles Refillable soft drink bottles 8 oz glass container 1 yd3 1 yd3 1 yd3 55-gal drum 1 case = 24 bottles 1 case = 24 bottles 1 case = 24 bottles 500-700 1,000-1,800 1,800-2,700 300 10-14 12-22 12 LEAD-ACID BATTERIES CarD TruckE MotorcycleE 1 battery 1 battery 1 battery 39.4 lb 53.3 lb lead and plastic 9.5 lb lead and plastic 017419.2 STANDARD SOLID WASTE CONVERSIONS Category Recyclable Materials (u/c = uncompacted/ compacted & baled) Volume Estimated Waste (in pounds) METALS Aluminum CansF Whole Compacted (manually) Uncompacted Ferrous (tin coated steel cans) G Whole Flattened Whole Major AppliancesE Air conditioners (room) Dishwashers Dryers (clothes) Freezers Microwave ovens Refrigerators Ranges Washers (clothes) Water heaters 1 yd3 1 yd3 1 full grocery bag 1 case = 24 cans 1 yd3 1 yd3 1 case = 6 cans 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 1 unit 50-75 250-430 1.5 0.9 150 850 22 64.2 92 130 193 50 181.1 267 177 131 017419.2 STANDARD SOLID WASTE CONVERSIONS Category Recyclable Materials (u/c = uncompacted/ compacted & baled) Volume Estimated Waste (in pounds) PAPER NewspaperF Uncompacted Compacted/baled 12 in. stack Old Corrugated ContainersF Uncompacted Compacted Baled Computer PaperF Uncompacted Compacted/baled 1 case White LedgerF Stacked (u/c) Crumpled (u/c) Ream of 20# bond; 8.5”x11” Ream of 20# bond; 8.5”x14” White ledger pads Tab CardsF Uncompacted Compacted/baled Miscellaneous Paper Yellow legal padsF Colored message padsF Telephone directoriesH Mixed Ledger/Office PaperF Flat (u/c) Crumpled (u/c) 1 yd3 1 yd3 - 1 yd3 1 yd3 1 yd3 1 yd3 1 yd3 2,800 sheets 1 yd3 1 yd3 1 ream = 500 sheets 1 ream = 500 sheets 1 case = 72 pads 1 yd3 1 yd3 1 case = 72 pads 1 carton = 144 pads 1 yd3 1 yd3 1 yd3 360-505 720-1,000 35 50-150 (300)1 300-500 700-1,100 655 1,310 42 375-465/755-925 110-205/325 5 6.4 38 605 1,215-1,350 38 22 250 380/755 110-205/610 017419.2 STANDARD SOLID WASTE CONVERSIONS Category Recyclable Materials (u/c = uncompacted/ compacted & baled) Volume Estimated Waste (in pounds) PLASTICJ PET (Soda Bottles) Whole bottles (uncompacted) Whole bottles (compacted) Whole bottles (uncompacted) Baled Granulated Granulated 8 bottles (2 L size) HDPE (Dairy) Whole (uncompacted) Whole (compacted) Baled HDPE (Mixed) Baled Granulated Granulated Other Plastic Uncompacted Compacted/baled Mixed PET and HDPE (Dairy) Whole Film Baled Baled 1 yd3 1 yd3 gaylord 30” x 62” semiload gaylord 16 L 1 yd3 1 yd3 32” x 60” 32” x 60” gaylord semiload 1 yd3 1 yd3 1 yd3 semiload 30” x 42” x 48” 30-40 515 40-53 500-550 30,000 700-750 1 24 270 400-500 900 800-1,000 42,000 50 400-700 32 50 400-700 TEXTILESH Mixed Textiles 1 yd3 175 TIRES Car Tires Whole tireE Crumb rubberK Truck Tires Whole tireE Crumb rubberK 1 tire 1 tire 1 tire 1 tire 21 12 70 60 WOOD Wood chipsL PalletsF 1 yd3 - 725 30-100 (40 avg) YARD TRIMMINGSF Grass Clippings Uncompacted Compacted Leaves Uncompacted Compacted Vacuumed 1 yd3 1 yd3 1 yd3 1 yd3 1 yd3 350-450 550-1,500 200-250 300-450 350 FURNISHINGSE Foam rubber mattress 1 mattress 55 MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTEM Residential waste (uncompacted at curb) Commercial-industrial waste (uncompacted) MSW (compacted in truck) MSW (landfill density) 1 yd3 1 yd3 1 yd3 1 yd3 150-300 300-600 500-1,000 750-1,250 017419.2 STANDARD SOLID WASTE CONVERSIONS A. Information obtained from Washington State. B. Draft National Recycling Coalition Measurement Standards and Reporting Guidelines presented to NRC membership. October 31, 1989. C. Personal communication with a representative from Allwaste. November 6, 1995. D. Battery Council International. 1995. 1994 National Recycling Rate Study. E. U.S. EPA. 1995. Methodology for Characterization of Municipal Solid Waste in the United States: 1994 Update. EPA530-R-96-001. Washington, DC. F. U.S. EPA. 1993. Business Guide for Reducing Solid Waste. EPA530-K-92-004. Washington, DC. G. Personal communication with a representative from the Steel Recycling Institute. November 1, 1995. H. Information obtained from Massachusetts State. I. Information obtained from New Jersey and New York States. J. Personal communication with a representative from the American Plastics Council. November 2, 1995. K. Personal communication with a representative from the Scrap Tire Management Council. November 6, 1995. L. Information obtained from Northeast Forest Products, Martin Mulch Company, and the Solid Waste Association of North America. M. Solid Waste Association of North America, Manager of Landfill Operations Training and Certification Course. January 1989. N. Information obtained from New Jersey and New York States. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 76 10 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE COVERINGS Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 76 10 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE COVERINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Temporary protective coverings for installed floors,walls,and other surfaces. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements:Coordination of requirements for materials specified in this section. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A.Heavy Duty Protection Level:Floor protection measures suitable for heavy traffic areas with frequent or daily foot and rolling traffic. B.Medium Duty Protection Level:Floor protection measures suitable for medium traffic areas with infrequent foot and rolling traffic. C.Light Duty Protection Level:Floor protection measures suitable for light traffic areas with minimal to no foot and rolling traffic. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ANSI A135.4 -Basic Hardboard;2012 (Reaffirmed 2020). B.ASTM C208 -Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board;2022. C.ASTM E84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2026a. D.NFPA 701 -Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films;2023,with Errata. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide data on specified products,describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes available;and installation instructions. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate existing finished surfaces to be protected. D.Protection Plan:Provide a project specific plan for temporary protection of floors and walls that are finished or contribute to a finished assembly. 1.Identify protected locations,level of protection,and when temporary protection shall be placed or removed. 2.Identify which finished surfaces shall not be protected in the plan and why.Describe how they shall be protected from general construction activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A.Subject to compliance with requirements,available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to the following: 1. FiberTite,Seaman Corporation. 2.Griffolyn,Division of Reef Industries. 3. JG Innovations,Inc. 4.Proflex Products,Inc. 5.Ram Board/Surface Shields. 6.Skudo USA. 7.TuffWrap. 8.Substitutions:See Section 016000 -Product Requirements. 2.03 MATERIALS A.Sheet Materials: 1.Corrugated polypropylene sheet. 2.Wood Hardboard: ANSI A135.4,tempered,1/4 inch thick nominal. 3.Plywood,1/2 inch thick nominal. 4.Fiberboard: ASTM C208,1/2 inch thick nominal. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 76 10 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE COVERINGS Page 2 of 2 5.Flame Retardance: Meet requirements of NFPA 701. 6.Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread index of 25 and smoke developed index of 450;when system tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B.Rolled Materials: 1.Self-adhering polyethylene film. 2.Recycled cellulose fiberboard paper. 3.Laminated glass fiber reinforced kraft paper. 4.Flame Retardance: Meet requirements of NFPA 701. 5.Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread index of 25 and smoke developed index of 450;when system tested in accordance with ASTM E84. C.Corner and Door Jamb Protection Materials: 1.Cardboard,shaped specifically for application. 2.PVC plastic. D.Tape: Type recommended by protective covering material manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A.Surfaces requiring protection from construction for duration of the Work: 1.Architectural concrete,sealed concrete,polished concrete,and burnished concrete shall be protected from normal construction activities in both unfinished and finished conditions. 2.All Division 09 finishes once installed and subjected to construction traffic and activities. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Remove dirt and debris from surfaces to be protected. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Trim or overlap sheet materials to fit area to be covered. C.Roll out and cut rolled materials to fit area to be covered. D.Tape seams. Avoid taping directly to finished surfaces. E.Stretch self-adhering film materials to completely cover surface. F.Install door jamb protection to full height of opening. 3.04 REMOVAL A.Remove protective coverings prior to Date of Substantial Completion. Reuse or recycle materials if possible. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Page 1 of 4 SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Project record documents. B.Operation and maintenance data. C.Materials transparency manual. D.Warranties and bonds. E.Warranty ticket system. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures,shop drawings,product data, and samples. B.Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. C.Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. D.Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Design Professional with claim for final Application for Payment. B.Operation and Maintenance Data: 1.For equipment,or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner,submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 2.Submit PDF electronic files.Assemble each manual into one combined,electronically indexed file. Submit through web-based project software. a.Name each indexed document file in combined electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically-linked operation and maintenance directory. b.Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals. 3.Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection,with Design Professional comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4.Submit one electronicset of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C.Materials Transparency Manual: 1.Compile and submit a digitalversion of information disclosing materials content for interior finishes,furnishings (including workstations),built-in furniture. Meet IWBI (BS)requirements for format and content. D.Warranties and Bonds: 1.For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission,submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2.Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion,prior to final Application for Payment. 3.For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion,submit within 10 days after acceptance,listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A.Maintain on site one set of the following record documents;record actual revisions to the Work: 1.Drawings. 2.Specifications. 3.Addenda. 4.Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Page 2 of 4 5.Reviewed shop drawings,product data,and samples. 6.Manufacturer's instruction for assembly,installation,and adjusting. B.Ensure entries are complete and accurate,enabling future reference by Owner. C.Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D.Record information concurrent with construction progress. 1.Note Construction Change Directive numbers,alternate numbers,Change Order numbers,and similar identification,where applicable. E.Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1.Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2.Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3.Changes made by Addenda and modifications. 4.Submit record specifications as annotated PDF electronic file. F.Record Drawingsand Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1.Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 2.Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 3.Field changes of dimension and detail. 4.Details not on original Contract drawings. G.Record Digital Data Files:Immediately before inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect.When authorized,prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings. 1.Format:Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 2.Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. 3.Delete,redraw,and add details and notations where applicable. 4.Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for resolution. 5.Design Professional shall furnish one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information in accordance with Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A.Source Data: For each product or system,list names,addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers,including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B.Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts,and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C.Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems,to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D.Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure,incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A.For Each Product,Applied Material,and Finish: 1.Product data,with catalog number,size,composition,and color and texture designations. 2.Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products. B.Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods,precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods,and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C.Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards,chemical composition,and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance,and repair. D.Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Page 3 of 4 E.Where additional instructions are required,beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A.For each item of equipment and each system: 1.Description of unit or system,and component parts. 2.Identify function,normal operating characteristics,and limiting conditions. 3.Include performance curves,with engineering data and tests. 4.Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B.Where additional instructions are required,beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. C.Operating Procedures: Include start-up,break-in,and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation,control,stopping,shut-down,and emergency instructions. Include summer,winter,and any special operating instructions. D.Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting;disassembly,repair,and reassembly instructions;and alignment,adjusting,balancing, and checking instructions. E.Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. F.Provide original manufacturer's parts list,illustrations,assembly drawings,and diagrams required for maintenance. G.Include test and balancing reports. H.Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION A.Assemble operation and maintenance data into one multiple file composite electronic PDF file for Owner's personnel use,with data arranged in the same sequence as,and identified by,the specification sections. B.Electronic files:Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available.Where scanning of paper documents is required,configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. C.Bookmarks:Bookmark individual documents based on file names. D.File Names:Name document files to correspond to system,subsystem,and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A.Obtain warranties and bonds,executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors,suppliers,and manufacturers,within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission,leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial completion is determined. B.Verify that documents are in proper form,contain full information,and are notarized. C.Co-execute submittals when required. D.Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E.Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. F.Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS,with title of Project; name,address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier;and name of responsible company principal. G.Table of Contents: Neatly typed,in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual,with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified,and the name of product or work item. 1.Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. 2.Provide full information,using separate typed sheets as necessary.List Subcontractor,supplier, and manufacturer,with name,address,and telephone number of responsible principal. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Page 4 of 4 3.07 WARRANTY TICKET SYSTEM A.Develop,host,and maintain an online warranty ticket system for tracking and managing warranty claims.System shall be accessible to Architect,Owner,and subcontractors for the duration of the warranty period. 1.Online warranty system: 2.Warranty claims submitted electronically and incorporate detailed descriptions and photographs of warranty issues. 3.Track status of each claim. 4.Provide updates on actions taken including investigation reports,subcontractor communication, and completion of warranty work. 5.Provide notification to Architect,and other relevant parties,when warranty issues require design input or involve non-warranty matters. B.Provide training and support to Owner,Architect,and subcontractors on use of warranty ticket system. C.Use of this system does not absolve the Contractor of any responsibilities outlines in the contract documents regarding the correction of Work or maintenance services. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Demonstration of products and systems where indicated in specific specification sections. B.Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for: 1.All software-operated systems. 2.HVAC systems and equipment. 3.Plumbing equipment. 4.Electrical systems and equipment. 5.Items specified in individual product Sections. C.Training of Owner personnel in care,cleaning,maintenance,and repair is required for: 1.Roofing,waterproofing,and other weather-exposed or moisture protection products. 2.Finishes,including flooring,wall finishes,ceiling finishes. 3.Fixtures and fittings. 4.Items specified in individual product Sections. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance manuals. B.Section 01 91 13 -General Commissioning Requirements: Additional requirements applicable to demonstration and training. C.Other Specification Sections: Additional requirements for demonstration and training. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B.Training Plan: Ownerwill designate personnel to be trained;tailor training to needs and skill-level of attendees. 1.Submit to Design Professional for transmittal to Owner. 2.Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training. 3.Revise and resubmit until acceptable. 4.Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions. 5.Include at least the following for each training session: a.Identification,date,time,and duration. b.Description of products and/or systems to be covered. c.Name of firm and person conducting training;include qualifications. d.Intended audience,such as job description. e.Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training. f.Methods to be used,such as classroom lecture,live demonstrations,hands-on,etc. g.Media to be used,such a slides,hand-outs,etc. h.Training equipment required,such as projector,projection screen,etc.,to be provided by Contractor. C.Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee;allow for minimum of two attendees per training session. 1.Include applicable portion of O&M manuals. 2.Include copies of all hand-outs,slides,overheads,video presentations,etc.,that are not included in O&M manuals. 3.Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and maintenance data. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design,operation,maintenance and troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems. 1.Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Page 2 of 2 2.Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects,provide specialists with necessary qualifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEMONSTRATION -GENERAL A.Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes of this section,unless approved in advance by Owner. B.Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable. C.Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes,including start-up,shut-down, seasonal changeover,emergency conditions,and troubleshooting,and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance. 1.Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 2.For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation,perform demonstration for other season within six months. D.Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning,scheduled and preventive maintenance,and repair procedures. 1.Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 3.02 TRAINING -GENERAL A.Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated. B.Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor. C.Provide training in minimum two hour segments. D.Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained;re-schedule training sessions as required by Owner;once schedule has been approved by Owner failure to conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for personnel "show-up"time. E.Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss: 1.The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation;backup copies. 2.Typical contents and organization of all manuals,including explanatory information,system narratives,and product specific information. 3.Typical uses of the O&M manuals. F.Product-and System-Specific Training: 1.Review the applicable O&M manuals. 2.For systems,provide an overview of system operation,design parameters and constraints,and operational strategies. 3.Review instructions for proper operation in all modes,including start-up,shut-down,seasonal changeover and emergency procedures,and for maintenance,including preventative maintenance. 4.Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance. 5.Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements;discuss relevant health and safety issues and emergency procedures. 6.Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions. 7.Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 8.Discuss warranties and guarantees,including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage. 9.Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers. 10.Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor. 11.Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures. G.Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees;if unable to answer during training session,provide written response within three days. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 8 SECTION 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Commissioning is intended to achieve the following specific objectives;this section specifies the Contractor's responsibilities for commissioning: 1.Verify that the work is installed in accordance with Contract Documents and the manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions,and that it receives adequate operational checkout prior to startup: Startup reports and Prefunctional Checklists executed by Contractor are utilized to achieve this. 2.Verify and document that functional performance is in accordance with Contract Documents: Functional Tests executed by Contractor and witnessed by the Commissioning Provider are utilized to achieve this. 3.Verify that operation and maintenance manuals submitted to Owner are complete: Detailed operation and maintenance (O&M)data submittals by Contractor are utilized to achieve this. 4.Verify that the Owner’s operating personnel are adequately trained: Formal training conducted by Contractor is utilized to achieve this. B.Commissioning,including Functional Tests,O&M documentation review,and training,is to occur after startup and initial checkout and be completed before Substantial Completion. C.The Commissioning Provider directs and coordinates all commissioning activities;this section describes some but not all of the Commissioning Provider's responsibilities. D.The Commissioning Provider is employed by Owner. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 57 19 -Temporary Environmental Controls: Precautions and procedures;smoking room testing;building flush-out. B.Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements: General startup requirements. C.Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals: Scope and procedures for operation and maintenance manuals and project record documents. D.Section 01 79 00 -Demonstration and Training: Scope and procedures for Owner personnel training. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.PECI (Samples)-Sample Forms for Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Performance Tests;Current Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures;except: 1.Make all submittals specified in this section,and elsewhere where indicated for commissioning purposes,directly to the Commissioning Provider,unless they require review by Design Professional;in that case,submit to Design Professional first. 2.Submit one copy to the Commissioning Provider,not to be returned. 3.Make commissioning submittals on time schedule specified by Commissioning Provider. 4.Submittals indicated as "Draft"are intended for the use of the Commissioning Provider in preparation of Prefunctional Checklists or Functional Test requirements;submit in editable electronic format;Microsoft Word 2010 preferred. 5.As soon as possible after submittals made to Design Professional are approved,submit copies of approved submittals to Commissioning Provider. B.Product Data: If submittals to Design Professional do not include the following,submit copies as soon as possible: 1.Manufacturer's product data,cut sheets,and shop drawings. 2.Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.Startup,operating,and troubleshooting procedures. 4.Fan and pump curves. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 8 5.Factory test reports. 6.Warranty information,including details of Owner's responsibilities in regard to keeping warranties in force. C.Manufacturers'Instructions: Submit copies of all manufacturer-provided instructions that are shipped with the equipment as soon as the equipment is delivered. D.Startup Plans and Reports. E.Completed Prefunctional Checklists. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT A.Provide all standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required Functional Testing;unless otherwise noted such testing equipment will NOT become the property of Owner. B.Calibration Tolerances: Provide testing equipment of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified. If not otherwise noted,the following minimum requirements apply: 1.Temperature Sensors and Digital Thermometers: Certified calibration within past year to accuracy of 0.5 degree F and resolution of plus/minus 0.1 degree F. 2.Pressure Sensors: Accuracy of plus/minus 2.0 percent of the value range being measured (not full range of meter),calibrated within the last year. 3.Calibration: According to the manufacturer’s recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged;affix calibration tags or keep certificates readily available for inspection. C.Equipment-Specific Tools: Where special testing equipment,tools and instruments are specific to a piece of equipment,are only available from the vendor,and are required in order to accomplish startup or Functional Testing,provide such equipment,tools,and instruments as part of the work at no extra cost to Owner;such equipment,tools,and instruments are to become the property of Owner. D.Dataloggers: Independent equipment and software for monitoring flows,currents,status,pressures, etc.of equipment. 1.Dataloggers required for Functional Tests will be provided by the Commissioning Provider and will not become the property of Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COMMISSIONING PLAN A.Commissioning Authority will prepare the Commissioning Plan. 1.Attend meetings called by the Commissioning Provider for purposes of completing the commissioning plan. 2.Require attendance and participation of relevant subcontractors,installers,suppliers,and manufacturer representatives. B.Contractor is responsible for compliance with the Commissioning Plan. C.Commissioning Plan: The commissioning schedule,procedures,and coordination requirements for all parties in the commissioning process. D.Commissioning Schedule: 1.Submit anticipated dates of startup of each item of equipment and system to Commissioning Provider within 60 days after award of contract. 2.Re-submit anticipated startup dates monthly,but not less than 4 weeks prior to startup. 3.Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Tests are to be performed in sequence from components, to subsystems,to systems. 4.Provide sufficient notice to Commissioning Authority for delivery of relevant Checklists and Functional Test procedures to avoid delay. 3.02 STARTUP PLANS AND REPORTS A.Startup Plans: For each item of equipment and system for which the manufacturer provides a startup plan,submit the plan not less than 8 weeks prior to startup. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Page 3 of 8 B.Startup Reports: For each item of equipment and system for which the manufacturer provides a startup checklist (or startup plan or field checkout sheet),document compliance by submitting the completed startup checklist prior to startup,signed and dated by responsible entity. C.Submit directly to the Commissioning Authority. 3.03 PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS A.A Prefunctional Checklist is required to be filled out for each item of equipment or other assembly specified to be commissioned. 1.No sampling of identical or near-identical items is allowed. 2.These checklists do not replace manufacturers'recommended startup checklists,regardless of apparent redundancy. 3.Prefunctional Checklist forms will not be complete until after award of the contract;the following types of information will be gathered via the completed Checklist forms: a.Certification by installing contractor that the unit is properly installed,started up,and operating and ready for Functional Testing. b.Confirmation of receipt of each shop drawing and commissioning submittal specified, itemized by unit. c.Manufacturer,model number,and relevant capacity information;list information "as specified,""as submitted,"and "as installed." d.Serial number of installed unit. e.List of inspections to be conducted to document proper installation prior to startup and Functional Testing;these will be primarily static inspections and procedures;for equipment and systems may include normal manufacturer’s start-up checklist items and minor testing. f.Sensor and actuator calibration information. 4.PECI (Samples)found at http://www.peci.org/library/mcpgs.htm indicate anticipated level of detail for Prefunctional Checklists. B.Contractor is responsible for filling out Prefunctional Checklists,after completion of installation and before startup;witnessing by the Commissioning Provider is not required unless otherwise specified. 1.Each line item without deficiency is to be witnessed,initialed,and dated by the actual witness; checklists are not complete until all line items are initialed and dated complete without deficiencies. 2.Checklists with incomplete items may be submitted for approval provided the Contractor attests that incomplete items do not preclude the performance of safe and reliable Functional Testing; re-submission of the Checklist is required upon completion of remaining items. 3.Individual Checklists may contain line items that are the responsibility of more than one installer; Contractor shall assign responsibility to appropriate installers or subcontractors,with identification recorded on the form. 4.If any Checklist line item is not relevant,record reasons on the form. 5.Contractor may independently perform startup inspections and/or tests,at Contractor's option. 6.Regardless of these reporting requirements,Contractor is responsible for correct startup and operation. 7.Submit completed Checklists to Commissioning Provider within 2 days of completion. C.Commissioning Authority is responsible for furnishing the Prefunctional Checklists to Contractor. 1.Initial Drafts: Contractor is responsible for initial draft of Prefunctional Checklist where so indicated in Contract Documents. 2.Provide all additional information requested by Commissioning Provider to aid in preparation of checklists,such as shop drawing submittals,manufacturers'startup checklists,and O&M data. 3.Commissioning Provider may add any relevant items deemed necessary regardless of whether they are explicitly mentioned in Contract Documents or not. 4.When asked to review the proposed Checklists,do so in a timely manner. D.Commissioning Authority Witnessing:Required for: Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Page 4 of 8 1.Each piece of primary equipment,unless sampling of multiple similar units is allowed by the commissioning plan. 2.A sampling of non-primary equipment,as allowed by the commissioning plan. E.Deficiencies: Correct deficiencies and re-inspect or re-test,as applicable,at no extra cost to Owner. 1.If difficulty in correction would delay progress,report deficiency to the Commissioning Provider immediately. 3.04 FUNCTIONAL TESTS A.A Functional Test is required for each item of equipment,system,or other assembly specified to be commissioned,unless sampling of multiple identical or near-identical units is allowed by the final test procedures. B.Contractor is responsible for execution of required Functional Tests,after completion of Prefunctional Checklist and before closeout. C.Commissioning Authority is responsible for witnessing and reporting results of Functional Tests, including preparation and completion of forms for that purpose. D.Contractor is responsible for correction of deficiencies and re-testing at no extra cost to Owner;if a deficiency is not corrected and re-tested immediately,the Commissioning Authority will document the deficiency and the Contractor's stated intentions regarding correction. 1.Deficiencies are any condition in the installation or function of a component,piece of equipment or system that is not in compliance with Contract Documents or does not perform properly. 2.When the deficiency has been corrected,the Contractor completes the form certifying that the item is ready to be re-tested and returns the form to the Commissioning Provider;the Commissioning Provider will reschedule the test,and the Contractor shall re-test. 3.Identical or Near-Identical Items: If 10 percent,or three,whichever is greater,of identical or near-identical items fail to perform due to material or manufacturing defect,all items will be considered defective;provide a proposal for correction within 2 weeks after notification of defect, including provision for testing sample installations prior to replacement of all items. 4.Contractor shall bear the cost of Owner and Commissioning Authority personnel time witnessing re-testing. 5.Contractor shall bear the cost of Owner and Commissioning Authority personnel time witnessing re-testing if the test failed due to failure to execute the relevant Prefunctional Checklist correctly; if the test failed for reasons that would not have been identified in the Prefunctional Checklist process,Contractor shall bear the cost of the second and subsequent re-tests. E.Functional Test Procedures: 1.Some test procedures are included in Contract Documents;where Functional Test procedures are not included in Contract Documents,test procedures will be determined by the Commissioning Provider with input by and coordination with Contractor. 2.Examples of Functional Testing: a.Test the dynamic function and operation of equipment and systems (rather than just components)using manual (direct observation)or monitoring methods under full operation (e.g.,the chiller pump is tested interactively with the chiller functions to see if the pump ramps up and down to maintain the differential pressure setpoint). b.Systems are tested under various modes,such as during low cooling or heating loads,high loads,component failures,unoccupied,varying outside air temperatures,fire alarm,power failure,etc. c.Systems are run through all the HVAC control system’s sequences of operation and components are verified to be responding as the sequence's state. d.Traditional air or water test and balancing (TAB)is not Functional Testing;spot checking of TAB by demonstration to the Commissioning Provider is Functional Testing. 3.PECI (Samples)found at http://www.peci.org/library/mcpgs.htm indicated anticipated level of detail for Functional Tests. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Page 5 of 8 F.Deferred Functional Tests: Some tests may need to be performed later,after substantial completion, due to partial occupancy,equipment,seasonal requirements,design or other site conditions; performance of these tests remains the Contractor's responsibility regardless of timing. 3.05 SENSOR AND ACTUATOR CALIBRATION A.Calibrate all field-installed temperature,relative humidity,carbon monoxide,carbon dioxide,and pressure sensors and gauges,and all actuators (dampers and valves)on this piece of equipment shall be calibrated. Sensors installed in the unit at the factory with calibration certification provided need not be field calibrated. B.Calibrate using the methods described below;alternate methods may be used,if approved by Design Professional,Owner and Commissioning Authority beforehand.See PART 2 for test instrument requirements.Record methods used on the relevant Prefunctional Checklist or other suitable forms, documenting initial,intermediate,and final results. C.All Sensors: 1.Verify that sensor location is appropriate and away from potential causes of erratic operation. 2.Verify that sensors with shielded cable are grounded only at one end. 3.For sensor pairs that are used to determine a temperature or pressure difference,for temperature make sure they are reading within 0.2 degree F of each other,and for pressure, within tolerance equal to 2 percent of the reading,of each other. 4.Tolerances for critical applications may be tighter. D.Sensors Without Transmitters -Standard Application: 1.Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. 2.Verify that the sensor reading,via the permanent thermostat,gauge or building automation system,is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured value. 3.If not,install offset,calibrate or replace sensor. E.Sensors With Transmitters -Standard Application. 1.Disconnect sensor. 2.Connect a signal generator in place of sensor. 3.Connect ammeter in series between transmitter and building automation system control panel. 4.Using manufacturer’s resistance-temperature data,simulate minimum desired temperature. 5.Adjust transmitter potentiometer zero until 4 mA is read by the ammeter. 6.Repeat for the maximum temperature matching 20 mA to the potentiometer span or maximum and verify at the building automation system. 7.Record all values and recalibrate controller as necessary to comply with specified control ramps, reset schedules,proportional relationship,reset relationship and P/I reaction. 8.Reconnect sensor. 9.Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. 10.Verify that the sensor reading,via the permanent thermostat,gauge or building automation system,is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured value. 11.If not,replace sensor and repeat. 12.For pressure sensors,perform a similar process with a suitable signal generator. F.Sensor Tolerances for Standard Applications: Plus/minus the following maximums: 1.Watthour,Voltage,Amperage: 1 percent of design. 2.Pressure,Air,Water,Gas: 3 percent of design. 3.Air Temperatures (Outside Air,Space Air,Duct Air): 0.4 degrees F. 4.Relative Humidity: 4 percent of design. 5.Barometric Pressure: 0.1 inch of Hg. 6.Flow Rate,Air: 10 percent of design. 7.Flow Rate,Water: 4 percent of design. 8.AHU Wet Bulb and Dew Point: 2.0 degrees F. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Page 6 of 8 G.Critical Applications: For some applications more rigorous calibration techniques may be required for selected sensors. Describe any such methods used on an attached sheet. H.Valve/Damper Stroke Setup and Check: 1.For all valve/damper actuator positions checked,verify the actual position against the control system readout. 2.Set pump/fan to normal operating mode. 3.Command valve/damper closed;visually verify that valve/damper is closed and adjust output zero signal as required. 4.Command valve/damper to open;verify position is full open and adjust output signal as required. 5.Command valve/damper to a few intermediate positions. 6.If actual valve/damper position does not reasonably correspond,replace actuator or add pilot positioner (for pneumatics). I.Isolation Valve or System Valve Leak Check: For valves not associated with coils. 1.With full pressure in the system,command valve closed. 2.Use an ultra-sonic flow meter to detect flow or leakage. 3.06 TEST PROCEDURES -GENERAL A.Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute the Functional Tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests,adjustments and problem-solving. B.Provide all necessary materials and system modifications required to produce the flows,pressures, temperatures,and conditions necessary to execute the test according to the specified conditions. At completion of the test,return all affected equipment and systems to their pre-test condition. C.Sampling: Where Functional Testing of fewer than the total number of multiple identical or near- identical items is explicitly permitted,perform sampling as follows: 1.Identical Units: Defined as units with same application and sequence of operation;only minor size or capacity difference. 2.Sampling is not allowed for: a.Major equipment. b.Life-safety-critical equipment. c.Prefunctional Checklist execution. 3.XX =the percent of the group of identical equipment to be included in each sample;defined for specific type of equipment. 4.YY =the percent of the sample that if failed will require another sample to be tested;defined for specific type of equipment. 5.Randomly test at least XX percent of each group of identical equipment,but not less than three units. This constitutes the "first sample." 6.If YY percent of the units in the first sample fail,test another XX percent of the remaining identical units. 7.If YY percent of the units in the second sample fail,test all remaining identical units. 8.If frequent failures occur,the Commissioning Provider may stop the testing and require Contractor to perform and document a checkout of the remaining units prior to continuing testing. D.Manual Testing: Use hand-held instruments,immediate control system readouts,or direct observation to verify performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data taken over time to make the “observation”). E.Simulating Conditions: Artificially create the necessary condition for the purpose of testing the response of a system;for example apply hot air to a space sensor using a hair dryer to see the response in a VAV box. F.Simulating Signals: Disconnect the sensor and use a signal generator to send an amperage,resistance or pressure to the transducer and control system to simulate the sensor value. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Page 7 of 8 G.Over-Writing Values: Change the sensor value known to the control system in the control system to see the response of the system;for example,change the outside air temperature value from 50 degrees F to 75 degrees F to verify economizer operation. H.Indirect Indicators: Remote indicators of a response or condition,such as a reading from a control system screen reporting a damper to be 100 percent closed,are considered indirect indicators. I.Monitoring: Record parameters (flow,current,status,pressure,etc.)of equipment operation using dataloggers or the trending capabilities of the relevant control systems;where monitoring of specific points is called for in Functional Test Procedures: 1.All points that are monitored by the relevant control system shall be trended by Contractor;at the Commissioning Provider's request,Contractor shall trend up to 20 percent more points than specified at no extra charge. 2.Other points will be monitored by the Commissioning Authority using dataloggers. 3.At the option of the Commissioning Authority,some control system monitoring may be replaced with datalogger monitoring. 4.Provide hard copies of monitored data in columnar format with time down left column and at least 5 columns of point values on same page. 5.Graphical output is desirable and is required for all output if the system can produce it. 6.Monitoring may be used to augment manual testing. 3.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals for additional requirements. B.Add design intent documentation furnished by Design Professional to manuals prior to submission to Owner. C.Submit manuals related to items that were commissioned to Commissioning Authority for review;make changes recommended by Commissioning Provider. D.Commissioning Authority will add commissioning records to manuals after submission to Owner. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS Page 8 of 8 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 02 41 00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Page 1 of 6 SECTION 02 41 00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes. B.Abandonment and removal of existing utilities and utility structures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Appendix -Available Information:Existing building survey conducted by Owner;information about known hazardous materials. B.Section 01 10 00 -Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises. C.Section 01 10 00 -Summary: Sequencing and staging requirements. D.Section 01 10 00 -Summary: Description of items to be removed by Owner. E.Section 01 10 00 -Summary: Description of items to be salvaged or removed for re-use by Contractor. F.Section 01 50 00 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences,security,protective barriers,and waste removal. G.Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements: Handling and storage of items removed for salvage and relocation. H.Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions;protection of bench marks,survey control points,and existing construction to remain;reinstallation of removed products; temporary bracing and shoring. I.Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials;requirements for recycling. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A.Demolish: Dismantle,raze,destroy,or wreck any building or structure or any part thereof. B.Remove: Detach or dismantle items from existing construction and dispose of them off site,unless items are indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. C.Remove and Salvage: Detach or dismantle items from existing construction in a manner to prevent damage. Clean,package,label and deliver salvaged items to Owner in ready-for-reuse condition. D.Remove and Reinstall: Detach or dismantle items from existing construction in a manner to prevent damage. Clean and prepare for reuse and reinstall where indicated. E.Existing to Remain: Designation for existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.29 CFR 1926 -Safety and Health Regulations for Construction;Current Edition. B.NFPA 241 -Standard for Safeguarding Construction,Alteration,and Demolition Operations;2027. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Site Plan: Indicate: 1.Vegetation to be protected. 2.Areas for temporary construction and field offices. 3.Areas for temporary and permanent placement of removed materials. C.Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as required by OSHA and local AHJs. 1.Indicate extent of demolition,removal sequencing,bracing and shoring,and location and construction of barricades and fences. 2.Summary of safety procedures. 3.Schedule of building demolition activities with starting and ending dates for each activity. 4.Include measures for environmental protection,for dust control,and for noise control. 5.Include construction waste management plan (see Section 01 74 19). 6.Detail special measures proposed to protect adjacent buildings to remain including means of egress from those buildings. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 02 41 00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Page 2 of 6 D.Pre-demolition photographs or video.See 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for additional information. E.Inventory of items that have been removed and salvaged. F.Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Regulatory Requirements:Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition.Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B.Standards:Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Spaces immediately adjacent to demolition area will be occupied.Conduct demolition so operations of occupied spaces will not be disrupted. 1.Provide not less than 72 hours'notice of activities that will affect operations of adjacent occupied spaces. 2.Maintain access to existing walkways,exits,and other facilities used by occupants of adjacent spaces. a.Do not close or obstruct walkways,exits,or other facilities used by occupants of adjacent spaces without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. B.Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C.Hazardous Materials:It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1.If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered,do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner.Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. D.On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted. E.Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations or operations of adjacent occupied spaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS --NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEMOLITION A.Selective demolition of the building as required to accommodate new work as shown. B.Remove portions of existing building as indicated in demolition plans. C.Remove other items indicated,for salvage and relocation. D.Fill openings or penetrations as result of removals,firestop at rated walls as indicated in code plan. 3.02 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A.Unless otherwise indicated,demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B.Historic items,relics,antiques,and similar objects including,but not limited to,cornerstones and their contents,commemorative plaques and tablets,and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1.Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 3.03 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Comply with requirements in Section 01 70 00. B.Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1.Obtain required permits. 2.Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241. 3.Use of explosives is not permitted. 4.Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed;do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 02 41 00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Page 3 of 6 a.Survey existing conditions of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during building demolition operations. Notify Architect or Engineer of any concerns. 5.Provide,erect,and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 6.Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public. a.Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. b.Where open excavations or other hazardous conditions remain,leave temporary barriers and protections in place. 7.Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 8.Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permits from authority having jurisdiction. 9.Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits.Do not obstruct required exits at any time.Protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. 10.Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse,infringe upon,or limit access to their property. C.Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner. D.Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed. E.Survey existing conditions of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during building demolition operations. Notify Architect or Engineer of any concerns. F.Protect existing structures and other elements to remain in place and not removed. 1.Provide bracing and shoring. 2.Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3.Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. G.Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations.Do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding,sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers,or other pollution. H.Hazardous Materials: 1.If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations,stop work and notify Design Professional and Owner;hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead,PCBs,and mercury. I.Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials. 1.Comply with requirements of Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal. 2.Dismantle existing construction and separate materials. 3.Set aside reusable,recyclable,and salvageable materials;store and deliver to collection point or point of reuse. 3.04 EXISTING UTILITIES A.Coordinate work with utility companies.Notify utilities before starting work,comply with their requirements,and obtain required permits. B.Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C.Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D.Do not close,shut off,or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to Owner. E.Do not close,shut off,or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to Owner. F.Locate and mark utilities to remain;mark using highly visible tags or flags,with identification of utility type;protect from damage due to subsequent construction,using substantial barricades if necessary. G.Remove exposed piping,valves,meters,equipment,supports,and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 02 41 00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Page 4 of 6 H.Prepare building demolition areas by disconnecting and capping utilities outside the demolition zone. Identify and mark,in same manner as other utilities to remain,utilities to be reconnected. 3.05 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A.Existing construction and utilities indicated on drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1.Verify construction and utility arrangements are as indicated. 2.Report discrepancies to Design Professional before disturbing existing installation. 3.Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition. B.Cooperate with the Owner and Authorities Having Jurisdiction to provide Interim Life Safety Measures (ILSM)in all areas affected by demolition or construction operations.ILSM consists of the following measures: 1.Ensure exits provide an unobstructed egress. Building areas under construction must maintain escape facilities for construction workers at all times.Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic-ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2.Ensure fire alarm,detection and suppression systems are not impaired. Provide temporary systems if necessary. 3.Ensure temporary construction partitions are smoke-tight and built of non-combustible or limited combustible materials that will not contribute to the development or spread of fire. 4.Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt.Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. 5.Develop and enforce storage,housekeeping,and debris removal practices that reduce the flammable and combustible fire load of the building to the lowest level necessary for daily operations as stated in the general conditions. 6.Provide hazard surveillance of building,grounds,and equipment with attention to construction areas,construction storage,and field offices. 7.Follow NFPA 241 guidelines pertaining to safe-guarding for construction and demolition processes. 8.Follow NFPA 1 guidelines pertaining to fire prevention measures. C.Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from areas that remain occupied. 1.Provide,erect,and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section 01 50 00. 2.Provide sound retardant partitions of construction when separating occupied space. D.Structural Demolition: 1.Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials.Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 2.Maintain fire watch during and for at least 24 hours after flame-cutting operations. 3.Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 4.Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically,from higher to lower level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 5.Demolish or Abandon foundation walls and other below-grade construction that are within footprint of new construction and extending 5 feet (1.5 m)outside footprint indicated for new construction as indicated on the drawings. a.Remove below-grade construction,including basements,foundation walls,and footings,to depths indicated. 6.Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in Section 312000 -Earth Moving. 7.Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface,free from irregular surface changes.Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 02 41 00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Page 5 of 6 E.Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure,except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications;prevent water and humidity damage. F.Salvaged Items:Comply with the following: 1.Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris. 2.Pack or crate items after cleaning.Identify contents of containers. 3.Protect items from damage during transport and storage. G.Remove existing work as indicated and required to accomplish new work. 1.Remove items indicated on drawings. 2.Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. H.Services including,but not limited to,HVAC,Plumbing,Fire Protection,Electrical,and Telecommunications: Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. 1.Maintain existing active systems to remain in operation,and maintain access to equipment and operational components. 2.Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. 3.See Section 01 10 00 -Summary for limitations on outages and required notifications. 4.Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. 5.Remove abandoned pipe,ducts,conduits,and equipment,including those above accessible ceilings.Remove back to source of supply where possible,otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. I.Protect existing work to remain. 1.Prevent movement of structure.Provide shoring and bracing as required. 2.Perform cutting to accomplish removal work neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3.Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4.Patch to match new work. 3.06 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A.Remove debris,junk,and trash from site. 1.Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2.Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls,floors,or framing. 3.Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 4.Project Coordinator to provide dumpster and coordinate with waste hauler for drop off and pick- up. 5.Dumpster to be located as agreed upon at Pre-Bid meeting or by Owner. B.Remove materials not to be reused on site;do not burn or bury. C.Leave site in clean condition,ready for subsequent work. D.Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 02 41 00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Page 6 of 6 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 03 05 16 UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER Page 1 of 2 SECTION 03 05 16 UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Sheet vapor barrier under concrete slabs on grade (VB-1). B.Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 03 30 01 -Cast-in-Place Concrete Floor Patching:Preparation of subgrade,granular fill, placement of concrete. B.Section 07 21 00 -Thermal Insulation:Foam board insulation under concrete slabs-on-grade (INSUL-3). 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM E1643 -Standard Practice for Selection,Design,Installation,and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs;2024. B.ASTM E1745 -Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs;2017 (Reapproved 2023). 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Coordination: Coordinate the installation of sheet vapor barrier with size,location and installation of subgrade utility lines. B.Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section;require attendance by all affected installers. C.Sequencing: Ensure that utility penetrations through vapor barrier are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Submit manufacturers'data on manufactured products. C.Test Data: Submit report of tests showing compliance with specified requirements. D.Certificates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. E.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Deliver materials to project site in original manufacturer's containers. B.Store materials and accessories under cover and elevated above grade. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Underslab Vapor Barrier: 1.Water Vapor Permeance: Not more than 0.010 perms,maximum. 2.Complying with ASTM E1745 Class A. 3.Thickness: 10 mils. 4.Product: a.Epro Services;Ecoshield: www.eproserv.com. b.Reef Industries;Griffolyn: www.reefindustries.com. c.Stego Industries LLC;Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier: www.stegoindustries.com/#sle. d.W.R.Meadows,Inc.;PERMINATOR: www.wrmeadows.com. e.Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B.Accessory Products:Vapor barrier manufacturer's recommended tape,adhesive,mastic,etc.,for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor barrier. C.Seam Tape: Manufacturer's pressure-sensitive type with maximum WVTR -0.1 Perms. D.Vapor Proofing Mastic: Manufacturer's recommended material with maximum WVTR -0.1 Perms. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 03 05 16 UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER Page 2 of 2 E.Pipe Boots /Slab Penetrations: Provide manufacturer's recommended sealant system compatible with vapor barrier. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that surface over which vapor barrier is to be installed is complete and ready before proceeding with installation of vapor barrier. B.Verify that under slab aggregate fill is properly compacted and free of sharp projections which may puncture or damage vapor barrier. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Install vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E1643. B.Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade;lap sheet over footings and seal to foundation walls. C.Lap joints minimum 6 inches. D.Seal joints,seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. E.No penetration of vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities. F.Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering with other materials. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Perform visual inspection of vapor barrier prior to placing concrete;ensure continuity of taped joints and sealing of penetrations and sealing to perimeter or terminations of barrier. B.Provide services of vapor barrier manufacturer's field representative to observe for proper installation of system and submit report required prior to pouring of concrete. 3.04 PROTECTION A.Protect installed vapor barrier from damage resulting from subsequent construction operations. B.Repair damaged areas with additional layer of sheet vapor barrier;overlap damaged area 6 inches and tape entire perimeter of patch. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 03 30 01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FLOOR PATCHING Page 1 of 6 SECTION 03 30 01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FLOOR PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Concrete floor patching -trenching and infill. B.Concrete reinforcement. C.Joint devices associated with concrete work. D.Concrete curing. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ACI CODE-318 -Building Code for Structural Concrete—Code Requirements and Commentary;2025. B.ACI PRC-211.1 -Selecting Proportions for Normal-Density and High Density-Concrete -Guide;2022. C.ACI PRC-302.1 -Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction;2015. D.ACI PRC-304 -Guide for Measuring,Mixing,Transporting,and Placing Concrete;2000 (Reapproved 2009). E.ACI PRC-308 -Guide to External Curing of Concrete;2016. F.ACI SPEC-301 -Specifications for Concrete Construction;2020. G.ASTM A615/A615M -Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement;2026. H.ASTM C33/C33M -Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates;2024a. I.ASTM C39/C39M -Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2026. J.ASTM C94/C94M -Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete;2026a. K.ASTM C150/C150M -Standard Specification for Portland Cement;2024. L.ASTM C171 -Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete;2020. M.ASTM C173/C173M -Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method;2026. N.ASTM C260/C260M -Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete;2024. O.ASTM C494/C494M -Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete;2024. P.ASTM C618 -Standard Specification for Coal Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete;2025a. Q.ASTM C685/C685M -Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing;2025a. R.ASTM C881/C881M -Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete;2020a. S.ASTM C1059/C1059M -Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete;2024. T.ASTM C1602/C1602M -Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete;2022. U.ASTM E1643 -Standard Practice for Selection,Design,Installation,and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs;2024. V.ASTM E1745 -Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs;2017 (Reapproved 2023). 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting at least two weeks prior to the start of the work of this section;require attendance of concrete producer and all affected installers. Review satisfactory jobsite conditions,design mixes and field quality control requirements. B.Sequencing: Ensure that under-slab utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 03 30 01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FLOOR PATCHING Page 2 of 6 B.Product Data: Submit manufacturers'data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions. C.Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design. 1.Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI SPEC-301,Section 4 -Concrete Mixtures. 2.Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI CODE-318,Chapter 5 -Concrete Quality,Mixing and Placing. D.Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI SPEC-301 and ACI CODE-318,current editions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS A.Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M,Grade 40 (40,000 psi). 1.Type: Deformed billet-steel bars. 2.Finish: Unfinished,unless otherwise indicated. B.Reinforcement Accessories: 1.Tie Wire: Annealed,minimum 16 gauge,0.0508 inch. 2.Chairs,Bolsters,Bar Supports,Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS A.Cement: ASTM C150/C150M,Type I -NormalPortland type or Type III -High Early Strength Portland type. B.Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M. 1.Acquire aggregates for entire project from same source. 2.Where concrete is to be exposed to view,do not use aggregate containing iron or other staining elements. C.Fly Ash: ASTM C618,Class C or F. D.Water: ASTM C1602/C1602M;clean,potable,and not detrimental to concrete. 2.03 ADMIXTURES A.Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. B.Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M. 1.Manufacturers: a.Air Mix or AEA-92 manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company.. b.Darex or Daravair manufactured by Grace Construction Products.. c.MB-AE 90,MB-VR or Micro Air manufactured by BASF Corporation -Admixture Systems.. d.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. C.High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizers): ASTM C494/C494M Type F. 1.Products: a.Eucon 37 or Plastol Series manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company. b.Glenium Series or Rheobuild 1000 manufactured by BASF Corporation -Admixture Systems. c.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. D.Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A. 1.Products: a.Eucon Series manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company. b.Pozzolith Series or PolyHeed Series manufactured by BASF Corporation -Admixture Systems. c.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.Underslab Vapor Retarder: Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 03 30 01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FLOOR PATCHING Page 3 of 6 1.Sheet Material: ASTM E1745,Class A;stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. a.Multi-layer,fabric-,cord-,grid-,or aluminum-reinforced polyethylene or equivalent.Single ply polyethylene is prohibited. 2.Thickness:15-mils,minimum 3.Permeance:less than 0.01 perms after mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E1745 (7.1.1 to 7.1.5); 4.Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape,adhesive,mastic, prefabricated boots,etc.,for sealing seams and penetrations. 5.Products: a.Stego Industries,LLC;Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A: www.stegoindustries.com/#sle. b.W.R.Meadows,Inc;PERMINATOR Class A -15 mils (0.38 mm): www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. c.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B.Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment (Hardener/Sealer): Clear,water-based solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components;odorless;colorless and non-yellowing;that penetrates,hardens,densifies and seals concrete surfaces. 1.Coefficient of Friction: 0.81 dry,0.72 wet. 2.Product: a.Curecrete Distribution Inc;Ashford Formula b.Prosoco,Inc.;Consolideck LS/CS c.Euclid Chemical Company;Euco Diamond Hard d.SpecChem;Spec Hard e.Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 -Product Requirements. 2.05 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A.Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex,complying with ASTM C1059/C1059M,Type II. 1.Products: a.Euclid Chemical Company;AKKRO-7T: www.euclidchemical.com/#sle. b.Grace Construction Products;Daraweld c.Kaufman Products Inc;SureBond: www.kaufmanproducts.net/#sle. d.Kaufman Products Inc;SureWeld: www.kaufmanproducts.net/#sle. e.Sika Corporation;Sika Latex f.SpecChem,LLC;Strong Bond Acrylic Bonder: www.specchemllc.com/#sle. g.W.R.Meadows,Inc;ACRY-LOK: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. h.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B.Epoxy Bonding System: 1.Complying with ASTM C881/C881M and of Type required for specific application. 2.Products: a.Euclid Chemical Company;DURAL FAST SET LV: www.euclidchemical.com/#sle. b.Euclid Chemical Company;DURALFLEX GEL: www.euclidchemical.com/#sle. c.Kaufman Products Inc;SurePoxy HM EPL: www.kaufmanproducts.net/#sle. d.Kaufman Products Inc;SurePoxy HM Class B: www.kaufmanproducts.net/#sle. e.SpecChem,LLC;SpecPoxy 1000,SpecPoxy 2000,SpecPoxy 3000,or SpecPoxy 3000FS: www.specchemllc.com/#sle. f.W.R.Meadows,Inc;Rezi-Weld Gel Paste,Rezi-Weld Gel Paste State,Rezi-Weld 1000: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. g.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. C.Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch thick,height equal to slab thickness,with removable top section that will form 1/2 inch deep sealant pocket after removal. 1.Material: Closed-cell,non-absorbent,compressible polymer foam in sheet form. 2.Products: Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 03 30 01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FLOOR PATCHING Page 4 of 6 a.Nomaco,Inc;Nomaflex Expansion Joint Filler with Void Cap Option: www.nomaco.com/#sle. b.Nomaco,Inc;Fastflex Slab Isolation Joint Filler with Tear-Off Strip: www.nomaco.com/#sle. c.W.R.Meadows,Inc;Deck-O-Foam Joint Filler with pre-scored top strip: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. d.W.R.Meadows,Inc;Ceramar Joint Filler with Snap-Cap: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. e.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. D.Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed,galvanized steel,with 1 inch diameter knockout holes for conduit or rebar to pass through joint form at 6 inches on center;ribbed steel stakes for setting. 1.Provide removable plastic cap strip that forms wedge-shaped joint for sealant installation. 2.06 CURING MATERIALS A.Moisture-Retaining Sheet: ASTM C171. 1.Curing paper,regular or white. 2.Polyethylene film,white opaque,minimum nominal thickness of 4 mil,0.004 inch. 3.White-burlap-polyethylene sheet,weighing not less than 3.8 ounces per square yard. B.Water: Potable,not detrimental to concrete. 2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A.Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI PRC-211.1 recommendations. 1.Replace up to 50%of Portland cement as possible with fly ash and ground granulated blast furnace slag as is consistent with ACI recommendations. B.Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI PRC-211.1 and at rates recommended or required by manufacturer. C.Normal Weight Concrete: 1.Compressive Strength,when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days: 4,000 pounds per square inch. 2.Fly Ash Content: Maximum 25 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3.Calcined Pozzolan Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 4.Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight. 5.Total Air Content: 5 percent,determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M. a.Do not allow air content of trowel finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 6.Maximum Slump: 3 inches. 7.Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch. 8.Maximum Aggregate Size: Maximum aggregate size not to exceed 1/5 of the narrowest dimension between the sides of the forms,one-third of the depth of slabs,nor three-quarters of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or prestressing tendons. Comply with requirements of ACI 318. 9.Combination of Fly Ash,Slag and other Pozzolans: Maximum 50 percent. 2.08 MIXING A.On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer,complying with ASTM C685/C685M. Mix each batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes. B.Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M. C.Adding Water: If concrete arrives on-site with slump less than suitable for placement,do not add water that exceeds the maximum water-cement ratio or exceeds the maximum permissible slump. D.Do not add water to mix on site beyond that amount indicated on approved mix design. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify lines,levels,and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 03 30 01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FLOOR PATCHING Page 5 of 6 B.Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete,prepare existing surface by cleaning and applying bonding agent in according to bonding agent manufacturer's instructions. 1.Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces,for structural load-bearing applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required. 2.Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications. C.Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler. D.In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work,drill holes in existing concrete,insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. E.Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade.Comply with ASTM E1643. Lap joints minimum 6 inches. Seal joints,seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions.Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering. 1.Tie into existing where possible. 2.Vapor Retarder Over Granular Fill: Install compactible granular fill before placing vapor retarder as indicated on drawings. Do not use sand. 3.Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing,before concrete placement. Repair with vapor retarder material;lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. 4.Seal penetrations (including pipes)per manufacturer's instructions. a.Construct pipe boots using sheet vapor barrier,pressure sensitive tape and mastic in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS A.Comply with requirements of ACI SPEC-301.Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale,and accurately position,support,and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. B.Verify that anchors,seats,plates,reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed,positioned securely,and will not interfere with concrete placement. C.Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings,templates,diagrams, instructions,and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE A.Place concrete in accordance with ACI PRC-304. B.Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI PRC-302.1. C.Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date,location,quantity,air temperature,and test samples taken. D.Ensure reinforcement,inserts,embedded parts,and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. E.Place concrete continuously without construction (cold)joints wherever possible;where construction joints are necessary,before next placement prepare joint surface by removing laitance and exposing the sand and sound surface mortar,by sandblasting or high-pressure water jetting. F.Finish floors level and flat,unless otherwise indicated,within the tolerances specified below. 3.05 SLAB JOINTING A.Locate joints as indicated on drawings,or as required to maintain existing joint layout. B.Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement. C.Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant,total height equal to thickness of slab,set flush with top of slab. 1.Install wherever necessary to separate slab from other building members,including columns, walls,equipment foundations,footings,stairs,manholes,sumps,and drains. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 03 30 01 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FLOOR PATCHING Page 6 of 6 D.Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool,within 24 hours after placing; use 3/16 inch thick blade and cut at least 1 inch deep but not less than one quarter (1/4)the depth of the slab. E.Construction Joints: Where not otherwise indicated,use metal combination screed and key form,with removable top section for joint sealant. 3.06 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES A.Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1.Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2.Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 3.Under Carpeting: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B.Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified. C.Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process. 3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING A.Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI PRC-302.1 and as follows: 1.Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel"as described in ACI 302.1R;thin floor coverings include carpeting,resilient flooring,seamless flooring,and thin set ceramic tile. 2.Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: Trowel as described in ACI PRC-302.1,minimizing burnish marks and other appearance defects. 3.08 CURING AND PROTECTION A.Comply with requirements of ACI PRC-308.Immediately after placement,protect concrete from premature drying,excessively hot or cold temperatures,and mechanical injury. B.Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1.Normal concrete: Not less than seven days. C.Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1.Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Wet cure. 2.Curing:Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than seven days by saturated burlap or Moisture-Retaining Sheet. a.Saturated Burlap: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down over floor slab areas,lapping ends and sides;maintain in place. b.Moisture-Retaining Sheet: Lap strips not less than 3 inches and seal with waterproof tape or adhesive;secure at edges. 3.09 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A.Defective Concrete: Concrete not complying with required lines,details,dimensions,tolerances or specified requirements. B.Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Design Professional/Engineer. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. C.Do not patch,fill,touch-up,repair,or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Design Professional/Engineer for each individual area. 3.10 PROTECTION A.Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 04 01 00 MAINTENANCE OF MASONRY Page 1 of 2 SECTION 04 01 00 MAINTENANCE OF MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Modification of existing masonry veneer construction for new penetrations. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 02 41 00 -Demolition. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.TMS 402/602 -Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures;2022,with Errata (2024). 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section. 2.Review conditions of installation,installation procedures,and coordination with related work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B.Shop Drawings: Indicate special supports for the work.Detail temporary or permanent support. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE -MASONRY WORK A.Comply with provisions of TMS 402/602,except where exceeded by requirements of Contract Documents. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS -MASONRY WORK A.Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of TMS 402/602 or applicable building code,whichever is more stringent. B.Coordinate opening size and schedule prior to masonry modification work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY ACCESSORIES A.Lintels:See Section 05 50 00. B.Mortar:To match exisitng. C.Sealant:See Section 07 92 00 D.Retrofit Weeps: Polyethylene,3/8 inch diameter by depth of brick,anchored in drilled hole in mortar joint with two-part epoxy bonding agent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A.Protect surrounding elements from damage due to modification procedures. B.Mask immediately adjacent surfaces with material that will withstand cleaning and restoration procedures. C.Do not allow cleaning runoff to drain into sanitary or storm sewers. 3.02 PREPARATION -MODIFICATION ACCESSORIES A.Demolition: 1.See Section 02 41 00 -Selective Demolition for additional requirements. B.Removal: 1.See Section 02 41 00 -Selective Demolition for additional requirements. 3.03 MASONRY MODIFICATION A.Cut out masonry with care in a manner to prevent damage to any adjacent remaining materials. B.Support veneer as necessary in advance of cutting out units. C.Mortar Mix: Colored and proportioned to match existing work. D.Build in all openings,accessories and fittings. 3.04 CLEANING MASONRY A.Verify mortar is fully set and cured. B.Clean surfaces and remove large particles with wood scrapers,brass or nylon wire brushes. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 04 01 00 MAINTENANCE OF MASONRY Page 2 of 2 C.Scrub walls with cleaning agent solution using stiff brush.Thoroughly rinse and wash off cleaning solution,dirt and mortar crumbs using clean,pressurized water. D.Protect area below cleaning operation and keep masonry soaked with water and flushed free of acid and dissolved mortar continuously for duration of cleaning. 3.05 CLEANING A.Immediately remove stains,efflorescence,or other excess resulting from the work of this section. B.Remove excess mortar,smears,and droppings as work proceeds and upon completion. C.Clean surrounding surfaces. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 1 of 4 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Shop fabricated steel and stainless steel items,including: 1.Support for ceiling-hung MEP items,including overhead lighting. B.Miscellaneous angles,channels,tubes,plates,brackets and fasteners,as required to complete the project,including but not limited to: 1.Jamb angles and plates. C.Slotted channel adjustable framing system. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 05 75 00 -Decorative Metal. B.Section 09 91 23 -Interior Painting: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel;2019. B.ASTM A283/A283M -Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates;2024. C.ASTM A501/A501M -Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing;2021. D.ASTM A653/A653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process;2025a. E.ASTM A1011/A1011M -Standard Specification for Steel,Sheet and Strip,Hot-Rolled,Carbon,Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy,High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,and Ultra-High Strength; 2025. F.ASTM F3125/F3125M -Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts and Assemblies,Steel and Alloy Steel,Heat Treated,Inch Dimensions 120 ksi,144 ksi,and 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, and Metric Dimensions 830 MPa and 1040 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength;2025a. G.AWS A2.4 -Standard Symbols for Welding,Brazing,and Nondestructive Examination;2020. H.AWS D1.1/D1.1M -Structural Welding Code -Steel;2025,with Amendment (2026). I.SSPC-Paint 15 -Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer;2004. J.SSPC-SP 2 -Hand Tool Cleaning;2024. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B.Shop Drawings: provide for fabricated items listed in 1.01A above. 1.Indicate profiles,sizes,connection attachments,reinforcing,anchorage,size and type of fasteners,and accessories. Include erection drawings,elevations,and details where applicable. 2.Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 3.Design data: Submit drawings and supporting calculations,signed and sealed by a qualified professional structural engineer. a.Include the following,as applicable: 1)Design criteria. 2)Engineering analysis depicting stresses and deflections. 3)Member sizes and gauges. 4)Details of connections. 5)Support reactions. 6)Bracing requirements. 4.Where installing items to existing precast concrete,concrete or masonry,propose connections not detailed for structural engineer approval. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 2 of 4 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Design members and connections under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. B.Fabricate steel items in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS -STEEL A.Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M. B.Steel Tubing: ASTM A501/A501M hot-formed structural tubing. C.Plates: ASTM A283/A283M. D.Slotted Channel Framing: ASTM A653/A653M,Grade 33. E.Slotted Channel Fittings: ASTM A1011/A1011M. F.Bolts,Nuts,and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M,Type 1,plain. G.Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M;type required for materials being welded. H.Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15,complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. I.Anchoring Devices: 1.Anchor Rods: Anchor rods used with structural steel members shall be plain steel rods conforming to ASTM F1554 (Grade 36),complete with suitable nuts and washers,unless noted otherwise. 2.Expansion Bolts: Expansion anchors shall consist of one-piece wedge type carbon steel anchor bolts with heavy-duty nuts and washers. All components shall be zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633. a.Structural Applications 1)Acceptable products must have a valid and current ICC report,as listed at www.icc- es.org. b.Non-Structural Applications 1)Acceptable Manufacturers and products: Hilti Fastening Systems- Kwik Bolt III Anchor; ITW Red Head Mechanical Anchoring Systems -Trubolt Wedge Anchor;Powers Fastening Inc -Power-Stud Anchor;(or approved equivalent) 3.Epoxy Adhesive Anchoring System: Epoxy anchoring shall consist of a threaded rod and the epoxy adhesive cartridge. a.Structural Applications 1)Acceptable products must have a valid and current ICC report,as listed at www.icc- es.org . b.Non-Structural Applications 1)Acceptable Manufacturers and products:Hilti Fastening System -HIT RE 500;ITW Red Head Adhesive Anchoring Systems -Epcon C6 Adhesive;Powers Fastening Inc.- PE1000+;(or approved equivalent). J.Grout: Non-shrink,non-metallic aggregate type,complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M and capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi at 28 days. 2.02 FABRICATION A.Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections,for delivery to site. B.Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C.Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds,where welding is indicated. D.Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush,and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E.Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts;unobtrusively located;consistent with design of component,except where specifically noted otherwise. F.Furnish components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication,except where specifically noted otherwise. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 3 of 4 G.Welded Joints:Cope components at connections to provide close fit,or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections,including at fittings. Weld corners and seams continuously where visible or where exposed to moisture,even if intermittent or stitch welds are structurally adequate,and to comply with the following: 1.Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. 2.Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight,flush,and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. 2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS A.Ledge Angles,Shelf Angles,Channels,and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of non-structural members;prime paint finish. B.Support for Ceiling-Hung MEP items: As detailed,prime paint finish. If not detailed,use slotted channel adjustable framing system C.Slotted Channel Framing: Fabricate channels and fittings from structural steel complying with the referenced standards;factory-applied,rust-inhibiting thermoset acrylic enamel finish. 1.Product:System of channel members and bolted connections fabricated to support loads without welded connections. 2.Fittings and accessories shall be fabricated from hot rolled,pickled and oiled steel plates meeting the requirements of ASTM A 575. 3.Nuts and screws shall be Unified and American coarse screw thread meeting the requirements of ASTM A 576 GR1015 (nut),and ASTM A 307 and SAE J429 GR2 (screw). 4.Nuts and screws shall be electro-galvanized (EG)coated to commercial standards meeting the requirements of ASTM B 633 Type III SC1 finish. 5.Finish: Adjustable framing shall be pre-finished with Unistrut's Perma-Green II;B-Line's Dura Green;or equal. All miscellaneous accessories,brackets,and fittings shall match framing. 6.Manufacturer:Unistrut Corporation Unistrut;B-Line Systems,Inc.Powerstruct;or equal. 2.04 FINISHES -STEEL A.Prime paint steel items. 1.Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete,where field welding is required,and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing. B.Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. C.Clean surfaces of rust,scale,grease,and foreign matter prior to finishing. D.Prime Painting: One coat. 2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A.Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B.Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C.Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D.Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E.Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B.Examine substrates and site area for conditions that might prevent satisfactory installation. C.Verify that dimensions of supporting structure are within plus/minus 1/8 inch of dimensions shown on shop drawings. D.Verify that all adjacent painting,roofing,masonry work,and other work that might damage prefinished items has been completed prior to installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B.Furnish setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 4 of 4 C.Remove all mill scale,rust,grease,foreign matter and surface imperfections from steel components that will be painted to ensure a smooth,even appearance of finish. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Install premanufactured items in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B.Install items plumb and level,accurately fitted,free from distortion or defects. C.Provide for erection loads,and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. D.Anchor units to structure as indicated on the drawings. E.Field weld components as indicated on shop drawings. 1.Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. F.Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. G.After erection,prime welds,abrasions,and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized,except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. H.Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts,toggle bolts,through bolts,lag bolts,wood screws,and other connectors.Grout voids as required to result in secure installation. I.Touch-up damaged finish coating using material provided by manufacturer to match original coating. 3.04 TOLERANCES A.Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch per story or 10 feet,non-cumulative. B.Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. C.Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. 3.05 CLEANING A.Clean exterior surfaces of dust and debris;follow manufacturer's cleaning instructions for the finish used. 3.06 PROTECTION A.Protect items after installation to prevent damage due to other work until Date of Substantial Completion END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 05 75 00 DECORATIVE METAL Page 1 of 4 SECTION 05 75 00 DECORATIVE METAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Fabrications made of formed metal,secondary supports,and anchors to structure,including: 1.Metal wall panels (MTLPNL-1) 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 05 50 00 -Metal Fabrications:Non-decorative metal fabrications. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel;2019. B.ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products;2024. C.ASTM A153/A153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2023. D.ASTM A276/A276M -Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes;2025. E.ASTM A480/A480M -Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate,Sheet,and Strip;2025b. F.ASTM A653/A653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process;2025a. G.ASTM A666/A666M -Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,Strip,Plate,and Flat Bar;2024. H.ASTM E488/E488M -Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete Elements;2022. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B.Product Data -Sheet Metal Material: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1.Installation methods. C.Shop Drawings: Show layout and elevations,dimensions and thickness of panels,connections,details and location of joints,method of anchorage,number of anchors,supports,and accessories. 1.Show actual field measurements on shop drawings. 2.Indicate substrates and adjacent work with which the fabrications must be coordinated. 3.Include large-scale details of anchorages and connecting elements. D.Verification Samples: For each product specified,minimum size 12 inches square,representing actual product in color and finish. E.Maintenance Data: Care of finishes and warranty requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating products specified in this section. 1.With not less than three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Deliver products in manufacturer's original,unopened,undamaged containers with identification labels intact. 1.Protect finishes by applying heavy duty removable plastic film during production. 2.Package for protection against transportation damage. 3.Provide markings to identify components consistently with drawings. 4.Exercise care in unloading,storing and installing panels to prevent bending,warping,twisting and surface damage. B.Store products protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer. 1.Store in well-ventilated space out of direct sunlight. 2.Protect from moisture and condensation with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight covering installed to provide ventilation. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 05 75 00 DECORATIVE METAL Page 2 of 4 3.Store at a slope to ensure positive drainage of accumulated water. 4.Do not store in enclosed space where ambient temperature can exceed 120 degrees F. 5.Avoid contact with other materials that might cause staining,denting,or other surface damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL FABRICATIONS -GENERAL A.Shop Assembly: Preassemble items to greatest extent possible. Minimize field splices and field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for transportation and handling. Mark items clearly for assembly and installation. B.Coordination: Match dimensions and attachment of metal items to adjacent construction. Produce integrated assemblies. Closely fit joints;align edges and flat surfaces unless indicated otherwise. C.Forming:Profiles indicated.Maximize lengths. D.Supports: Miscellaneous framing,mounting,clips,sleeves,fasteners and accessories required for installation. E.Performance Requirements: 1.Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by isolating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 2.02 METAL FABRICATIONS -SHEET METAL A.Metal Wall Panels (MTLPNL-1): Magnetic wall panels,capable of holding standard ceramic or rare-earth magnets. 1.Size:As indicated in Drawings. 2.Material:Hot-dip galvanized steel,smooth edges. a.Thickness:20 -22 gauge. 3.Mounting:Adhered to substrate. 2.03 MATERIALS A.General: Provide sheet metal without pitting,seam marks,roller marks,stains,discolorations,or other imperfections exposed to view on finished units. B.Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M,G90 (Z275)coating. C.Anchors,Clips and Accessories: Use one of the following: 1.Stainless steel complying with ASTM A276/A276M,ASTM A480/A480M,or ASTM A666. 2.Steel complying with ASTM A36/A36M and hot-dipped galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M. 3.Steel complying with ASTM A36/A36M and hot-dipped galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M Coating Grade 35. 4.Structural Anchors: Provide anchors where work is indicated to comply with design loads. a.Type: Provide chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors. b.Capacity: When tested according to ASTM E488/E488M;four times the load imposed when installed in concrete. 5.Nonstructural Anchors: Provide powder-actuated fasteners where work is not indicated to comply with design loads. Provide size and number required for load,installation,and as recommended by manufacturer,unless indicated otherwise. D.Fasteners,General: Same basic metal and alloy as formed metal sheet unless indicated otherwise. Do not use metals incompatible with the materials joined. E.Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic,noncorrosive compound free of asbestos,sulfur,and other deleterious impurities;15 mil dry film thickness per coat. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify dimensions,tolerances,and interfaces with other work. B.Verify substrate on-site to determine that conditions are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C.If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer,notify Design Professional of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 05 75 00 DECORATIVE METAL Page 3 of 4 D.Notify Design Professional in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION -SHEET METAL AND PLATE FABRICATIONS A.Locate and place decorative formed sheet metal items level and plumb;align with adjacent construction. Cut,drill and fit as required to install. B.Do not cut or abrade sheet metal finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return such items to manufacturer or fabricator for required alterations and refinishing or provide new items. C.Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide washers where needed on bolts or screws to protect metal surfaces and make weathertight connection. D.Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers indicated. E.Corrosion Protection: Apply permanent separation materials on concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact with incompatible substrate materials. Prevent corrosion damage to material and finish. 3.04 CLEANING A.Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period.Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to manufacturer or fabricator. Refinish entire unit or provide new units. B.Remove protective film after installation of joint sealers,after cleaning of adjacent materials,and immediately prior to completion of work. C.Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. D.Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.05 PROTECTION A.Protect installed products from damage during construction. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 05 75 00 DECORATIVE METAL Page 4 of 4 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 1 of 4 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Fire retardant treated wood materials. B.Concealed wood blocking,nailers,and supports. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 61 16 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content Restrictions. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM D5456 -Standard Specification for Evaluation of Structural Composite Lumber Products;2024. B.ASTM E84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2026a. C.AWPA U1 -Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood;2025. D.PS 1 -Structural Plywood;2023. E.PS 20 -American Softwood Lumber Standard;2025. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Provide technical data on panel products. B.Structural Composite Lumber: Submit manufacturer's published structural data including span tables, marked to indicate which sizes and grades are being used;if structural composite lumber is being substituted for dimension lumber or timbers,submit grading agency structural tables marked for comparison. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture.Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. B.Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping,storage,and installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1.If no species is specified,provide species graded by the agency specified;if no grading agency is specified,provide lumber graded by grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2.Grading Agency: Grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,American Lumber Standard Committee at www.alsc.org, and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified;provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. 3.Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearance characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified. B.Engineered wood products containing added urea-formaldehyde are not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER/TIMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A.Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings,S4S. B.Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. C.Miscellaneous Framing,Blocking,Nailers,Grounds,and Furring: 1.Lumber: S4S,No.1 or Construction Grade. 2.Boards: Standard or No.3. 2.03 STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBER A.At Contractor's option,structural composite lumber may be substituted for concealed dimension lumber and timbers. B.Structural Composite Lumber Materials: Factory-fabricated engineered wood products consisting of wood veneers,strands,or flakes pressed with moisture-resistant adhesive into blocks of material, evaluated in accordance with ASTM D5456. 1.Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL): Engineered wood products consisting of thin wood veneer bonded together with adhesive with grain of veneers running parallel to long dimension. a.Manufacturer's Published Modulus of Elasticity,E: 1,800,000 psi,minimum. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 2 of 4 C.Structural Composite Lumber: Factory fabricated beams,headers,and columns,of sizes and types indicated on drawings,or as approved by Engineer of Record;structural capacity as published by manufacturer. 2.04 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A.Concealed Backing for wall-mounted items-provide backing as required for loading from one of the following: 1.Dimension Lumber:As noted above 2.Plywood: As noted below 3.All wood backing to be fire-rated. B.Other Applications: 1.Plywood Concealed From View But Located Within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1,C-C Plugged or better,Exterior grade. 2.Plywood Exposed to View But Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1,A-D,or better. 3.Other Locations: PS 1,C-D Plugged or better. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A.Fasteners and Anchors: 1.Metal and Finish: Stainless steel for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2.Drywall Screws: Bugle head,hardened steel,power driven type,length three times thickness of sheathing. 3.Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. 2.06 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A.Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 -Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories,expected service conditions,and specific applications. 1.Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements. B.Fire Retardant Treatment: 1.Interior Type A: AWPA U1,Use Category UCFA,Commodity Specification H,low temperature (low hygroscopic)type,chemically treated and pressure impregnated;capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84,with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes. a.Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. b.Treat rough carpentry items as indicated . c.Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may become wet. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A.Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections. 3.02 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A.Select material sizes to minimize waste. B.Where treated wood is used on interior,provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.03 BLOCKING,NAILERS,AND SUPPORTS A.Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes,fixtures,specialty items,and trim. B.In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces,provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code,to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space;other material acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 3 of 4 C.In metal stud walls,provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames,securely attached to stud framing. D.In walls,provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items,unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. E.Where ceiling-mounting is indicated,provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. F.Provide the following specific nonstructural framing and blocking: 1.Cabinets and shelf supports. 2.Wall brackets. 3.Grab bars. 4.Towel and bath accessories. 5.Wall-mounted door stops. 6.Chalkboards,tack boards and marker boards. 7.Wall paneling and trim. 8.Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs. 9.Other wall-or ceiling-mounted items indicated on drawings. 10.Wall-protection items,including corner guards. 11.Owner-provided wall-mounted equipment,whether owner-installed or contractor-installed. 3.04 CLEANING A.Waste Disposal: See Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal. 1.Comply with applicable regulations. 2.Do not burn scrap on project site. 3.Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4.Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol,CCA,or ACA to co-generation facilities or “waste-to-energy”facilities. B.Do not leave wood,shavings,sawdust,etc.on the ground or buried in fill. C.Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 4 of 4 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 1 of 4 SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Finish carpentry items,including: 1.Wood framed interior storefront partitions,custom glazed (STFT-3). 2.Wood door frames (WD-1B). 3.Wood trim (WD-2A). B.Shop finishing. C.Accessories,including: 1.Shim space spray foam insulation (INSUL-7). 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 61 16 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content Restrictions. B.Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Support framing,grounds,and concealed blocking. C.Section 08 80 00 -Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards;2014. B.AWMAC/WI (NAAWS)-North American Architectural Woodwork Standards,U.S.Version 3.0;2016. C.NHLA G-101 -Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood and Cypress;2023. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Coordinate the work with installation of associated and adjacent components. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: 1.Provide data on wood treatment. 2.Provide data for attachment hardware. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate materials,component profiles,fastening methods,jointing details,and accessories. 1.Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot,minimum. 2.Provide information as required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS). D.Samples: Submit twosamples of wood components 8 inch long. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.Company that follows AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards". 2.Single Source Responsibility: Provide and install this work and that of Section 064100 from single fabricator. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Deliver factory-fabricated units to project site in original packages,containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification. B.Store finish carpentry items under cover,elevated above grade,and in a dry,well-ventilated area not exposed to heat or sunlight. C.Protect from moisture damage. D.Handle materials and products to prevent damage to edges,ends,or surfaces. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Coordinate sizes and locations of framing,blocking,furring,reinforcements,utilities,and other related work to ensure that finish carpentry items can be supported and installed as indicated. B.Locate concealed framing,blocking,and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed,and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C.During and after installation of finish carpentry,maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 2 of 4 D.Do not deliver product until the building is secure and weathertight. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A.Quality Standard: Custom Grade,in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise. B.Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide materials having fire and smoke properties as required by applicable code. C.Interior Woodwork Items: 1.Wood at custom glazed interior partitions (STFT-3):Hardwood,prepare for transparent finish. 2.Wood door frames (WD-1B):Species,cut and finish to match doors,prepare for transparent finish. 3.Wood trim,casings and moldings:White Maple,prepare for transparent finish. 2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS A.Hardwood Lumber:White Maple species,plain sawn,maximum moisture content of 8 percent;with flat grain,of quality suitable for transparent finish. 1.Grading: In accordance with NHLA G-101 Grading Rules;www.nhla.org. 2.Sizes and Configurations:As indicated in Drawings. a.Casings: 3/4 by 4 inches tall,longest lengths practical. 3.Finish: Water-based polyurethane sealer,UV-stable. 2.03 FASTENINGS A.Adhesive for Purposes Other Than Laminate Installation: Suitable for the purpose;not containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds. B.Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application;any finish in concealed locations and satin stainless steel finish in exposed locations. C.Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A.Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. B.Lumber for Shimming: Softwood lumber of pine species. C.Shim Space Insulation (INSUL-7): Polyurethane type,single component spray foam system,minimal expansion spray foam system;semi-rigid;open or closed cell. 1.Density: Less than 1 lb/cu ft,when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1622. 2.Flame Spread:20,when tested in accordance with UL 1715 Fire Test. 3.Smoke Development:25,when tested in accordance with UL 1715 Fire Test. D.Wood Filler: Solvent base,tinted to match surface finish color. 2.05 FABRICATION A.Shop assemble work for delivery to site,permitting passage through building openings. B.When necessary to cut and fit on site,provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. 2.06 SHOP FINISHING A.Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B.Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C.On items to receive transparent finishes,use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and is of type recommended for the applicable finish. D.Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS),Section 5 -Finishing for grade specified and as follows: 1.Transparent: a.System -12,Polyurethane,Water-based. b.Stain: As selected by Design Professional. c.Sheen: Satin. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 3 of 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B.See Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry for installation of recessed wood blocking. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Install custom fabrications in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade indicated. B.Do not begin installation until wood materials have been fully acclimated to interior conditions. C.Set and secure materials and components in place,plumb and level. D.Carefully scribe work abutting other components,with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. E.Install componentswith trim nails at stud or blocking locations. F.Set exposed fasteners,fill with wood filler,and finish to match panel finish. 3.03 TOLERANCES A.Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B.Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY Page 4 of 4 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Page 1 of 10 SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Relocation of existing casework. B.New wood casework: 1.Transparent finish. 2.Laminate cladding. C.Shop finishing. D.Specially fabricated cabinet units,including: 1.Base cabinets and upper cabinets. 2.Library bookshelves. 3.Upholstered benches (UPH-1) E.Cabinet hardware and accessories,including: 1.Drawer and door pulls (MWA-1). 2.Cabinet locks (MW-3A). F.Preparation for installing utilities. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 61 16 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content Restrictions. B.Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Support framing,grounds,and concealed blocking. C.Section 06 20 00 -Finish Carpentry:Wood railing components (WD-1) D.Section 08 71 00 -Door Hardware. E.Section 07 92 00 -Joint Sealants: Sealant at millwork and countertops at walls F.Section 08 80 00 -Glazing: Glass and fittings for casework (GL-4). G.Section 12 36 00 -Countertops:Countertops and accessories (brackets,grommets). H.Division 22 -Plumbing:Coordination of sinks and plumbing fixture trim and connections I.Division 26 -Electrical:Coordination of lighting and electrical trim and connections. 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A.AWI: Architectural Woodwork Institute. B.HPDL: High-pressure decorative laminate. C.MDF: Medium-density fiberboard. D.MDO: Medium-density overlay. E.PTB: Particleboard. F.TFL: Thermally-fused laminate. G.WI: Woodwork Institute. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ANSI A208.2 -Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF)for Interior Applications;2022. B.ANSI/AWI 0400 -Factory Finishing;2022. C.ANSI/AWI 0620 -Finish Carpentry/Installation;2024. D.ANSI/AWI 0641 -Architectural Wood Casework;2019. E.ASTM B221 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,Rods,Wire, Profiles,and Tubes;2021. F.AWI 200 -Care and Storage;2018. G.AWI 300 -Materials;2018. H.AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards;2014. I.BHMA A156.9 -Cabinet Hardware;2020. J.BHMA A156.11 -American National Standard for Cabinet Locks;2024. K.BHMA A156.18 -Standard for Materials and Finishes;2020. L.HPVA HP-1 -American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood;2024. M.MPI (APSM)-Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual;Current Edition. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Page 2 of 10 N.NEMA LD 3 -High-Pressure Decorative Laminates;2005. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Coordination: 1.Coordinate work of this section with installation of wood blocking,wood backing,and other anchoragethat provides casework backing and structural support. 2.Coordinate work of this section with rough-in plumbing and rough-in electrical integrally-related with casework. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Shop Drawings: Provide casework locations,large scale plans,elevations,cross sections,rough-in and anchor placement dimensions and tolerances,clearances required.Indicate materials,component profiles,configurations,assembly methods,fastening methods,jointing details,utility and service requirements and locations,accessory listings,hardware location and schedule of finishes. 1.Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot,minimum. 2.Provide information as required by {\rs\#1}. C.Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. D.Finish Verification Samples: 1.For each finish product specified,two each,3 inches x 5 inches,of colors and finishes selected by architect. 1.07 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A.Reinforce frame and support counters in all areas,to safely support a load of 200 lbs (90 kg) concentrated on one square foot (0.093 sq m)in any area with no indentation showing on surface and with permanent set not exceeding 0.005 inch (0.127 mm). 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.Single Source Responsibility: Provide and install this work from single fabricator. B.Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, quality as indicated for specific items. C.Single Source Responsibility: Provide and install this work and that of Section 062000 from single fabricator. 1.09 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.See Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal for packaging waste requirements. B.Store products prior to installation on flat,level,clean surfaces;elevate products above floors and protect from sunlight. C.Store products in interior rooms wit completed wet work and overhead work. D.Relative Humidity Conditions for Storing Wood and Wood-Based Core Products: 1.Maintain relative humidity between 25 and 45 percent. E.Store non-wood-based products under cover and elevated above grade. 1.Protect from excessive moisture and standing water. F.For products other than wood and wood-based products,store and handle in accordance with fabricator's documented instructions. G.Handle materials and products to prevent damage to edges,ends,or surfaces. H.Handle wood products with clean hands or gloves;protect from marks or damage. I.Protect units from moisture damage. J.Protect exposed surfaces throughout the construction period with corrugated cardboard covering the top and securely taped to edges. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Coordinate casework installation with size,location and installation of service utilities. B.Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in walls for support of casework. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Page 3 of 10 C.Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work. D.Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. E.Do not deliver product until the following conditions are met: 1.Windows and doors are installed and the building is secure and weathertight. 2.Ceiling,overhead ductwork and lights are installed. 3.All painting is completed and floor tile is installed. F.During and after installation of custom cabinets,maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. 1.Ambient Conditions for Acclimation,Installation,and Post-Installation of Wood-Based Products: a.Acclimation Period Prior to Installation: 72 hours minimum,inside installation environment. b.Temperature Conditions During Installation and Post-Installation: Maintain temperature between 60 degrees F and 90 degrees F. c.Relative Humidity Conditions During Acclimation,Installation,and Post-Installation: Maintain relative humidity between 25 and 45 percent. d.Maximum Sustained Time outside Specified Relative Humidity Range: 24 hours. 1.11 SCOPE OF THE CASEWORK SUPPLIER/INSTALLER A.Casework and accessories: Furnish to building,and unpad and/or uncrate,set in place,level and fasten all specified casework and equipment. B.Clean up: Remove debris,dirt,and rubbish accumulated as a result of delivery of this equipment and leave premises broom clean and orderly. C.ADA-Americans With Disabilities Act Requirements: Where specifically indicated on architectural plans as “ADA,”at public spaces or by General Note,casework items are to be in compliance with Federal Register Volume 56,No.144,Rules and Regulations. D.Fillers,Scribes,Access holes: Provide all necessary fillers and scribes for a complete job. Provide all access holes in cabinets and countertops required by mechanical,electrical,and HVAC contractors. 1.12 SCOPE NOT COVERED BY CASEWORK SUPPLIER/INSTALLER A.Service to and within equipment: Furnishing piping system,traps,drain lines,and conduit within equipment,in service turrets or tunnels,through,under or along backs of working surfaces and in reagent racks above countertops. B.Setting of plumbing fixtures and accessory fixtures,and final connections of such. C.Plumbing services: Furnishing,installation and connection of traps,drain lines,drop-in sinks,vents, steam fittings and special plumbing fixtures or piping to meet local codes,whether or not specifically called for in the contract documents. D.Electrical services: Furnishing and installation of rigid and flexible conduit,fittings,and special electrical equipment and accessories,wire,pulling of wire,and wiring and connection to electrical boxes, receptacles,switches,lights,and flush plates. Work shall be in accordance with local codes,whether or not specifically called for in the contract documents. E.Bracing and supports: Furnishing and installation of all framing and reinforcements of wall,floors and ceilings necessary to adequately support the equipment,and all bucks and plaster grounds required for proper installation of equipment. Casework supplier/installer to direct others as to the type of bracing required and the location needed. F.Base molding applied to casework,furnished and installed by flooring contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK A.Casework Finish: Wood casework with transparent finish. B.Casework Finish: Wood casework with laminate cladding. C.Provide casework and casework components in sizes and profiles as indicated on drawings. 1.Interior Clearances: Comply with specified performance requirements. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Page 4 of 10 D.Adjustable Shelves,Number of Shelves Per Cabinet Unit:Unless otherwise indicated in Drawings, provide: 1.Base Cabinets: One shelf for each cabinet unit. 2.Wall Cabinets: Two shelves for each cabinet unit. E.Scribed Fillers: 1.Finish and Materials: Same materials and finish as exposed surfaces. 2.Material thickness: Fabricator's option. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI)Performance Requirements: 1.Comply with AWI 300,ANSI/AWI 0641,ANSI/AWI 0400,and ANSI/AWI 0620 as applicable for specified casework finish,aesthetic grade,and performance duty level. a.Aesthetic Grade: Custom. b.Product Performance Duty Level: Duty Level 3. 2.Panel and Material Thicknesses: Provide panels and materials as required to meet specified performance duty level,subject to minimum thickness requirements of AWI 300 and ANSI/AWI 0641 and flatness requirements indicated below. 3.Panel Flatness: Provide panels with maximum variation from flat in 12 inches as measured diagonally across panel. a.Custom Grade: Plus or minus 0.047 inch maximum. 4.Cabinet Door Flatness: a.Comply with specified performance requirements. 2.03 WOOD CASEWORK WITH TRANSPARENT FINISH A.Finishing Method: 1.Shop-applied transparent finish. B.Casework Construction: 1.Frameless Cabinet and Door Interface: Flush overlay. 2.Door and Drawer Front Profile: Flush. 3.Reveal Dimensions: Comply with specified performance requirements. C.Wood Species for Exposed Exterior and Interior Surfaces: 1.Hardwood Species and Cut: White Maple;plain-sliced. D.Premium Grade -Wood Casework with Transparent Finish: 1.Exposed Exterior Surfaces,Panels to Receive Transparent Finish: a.Wood Veneer Panels: 1)Face Veneers: Grade AA;well-matched for color and grain with adjacent wood veneer; compatible in color with solid wood panels. 2.Exposed Interior Surfaces,Panels to Receive Transparent Finish: a.Comply with specified performance requirements. b.Wood Veneer Panels,Face Veneers: Grade A. 1)Species and Cut: Same species and cut and cut as exposed surfaces. 3.Semi-Exposed Surfaces,Panels and Wood Face Veneers: a.Comply with specified performance requirements. E.Exposed Exterior Surfaces,Matching of Veneer Leaves: 1.Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match. 2.Matching of Veneer Leaves Within Cabinet Unit Face: Running match. 3.Matching Between Doors,Drawers,and Adjacent Panels: Sequence matched. 4.End Matching of Veneer Leaves: End match. F.Grain Direction of Exposed Surfaces: 1.AllPanels: Vertical. 2.Edgebanding: Parallel to long direction of edge. G.Edgebanding Materials for Wood Casework with Transparent Finish: 1.Species: Same species as exposed surfaces. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Page 5 of 10 2.Solid Wood: Thickness as indicated in Material ID List. a.Miter solid wood edgebanding on face if 1/4 inch or greater. 2.04 WOOD CASEWORK WITH LAMINATE CLADDING A.Casework Construction: 1.Frameless Cabinet and Door Interface: Flush overlay. 2.Door and Drawer Front Profile: Flush. 3.Reveal Dimensions: Comply with performance requirements. B.Wood Drawer Boxes with Laminate Cladding: 1.Cladding: HPDL. C.Custom Grade -Laminate-Clad Wood Casework: 1.Exposed Exterior Surfaces,Panels to Receive Laminate Cladding: a.HPDL Panels;Surface Finish: As specified. 2.Exposed Interior Surfaces: a.Same laminate materials and thicknesses as exposed exterior surfaces. 1)Color to match exposed interior or face. 3.Exposed Interior Surfaces Except Door and Drawer Front Surfaces: a.HPDL: Compatible laminate in color and pattern to exposed exterior surfaces. 4.Semi-Exposed Surfaces;Panels to Receive Laminate Cladding: a.Fabricator's Option: 1)HPDL Panels;Surface Finish: As selected by Architect. D.Edgebanding Applications for Laminate-Clad Wood Casework: 1.Drawer Box Top Edges: a.Comply with specified performance requirements. E.Edgebanding Materials for Laminate-Clad Wood Casework: 1.HPDL: Match exposed surfaces. 2.Exceptions: a.Edgebanding at Adjustable Shelf Edges,Semi-Exposed Surfaces: 1)PVC:Well-matched to exposed face;radiused and beveled on edges and corners if thickness is greater than 0.039 inch. 2.05 LUMBER MATERIALS A.Softwood Lumber: NIST PS 20;Graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated,Grade II/Custom;average moisture content of 5-10 percent;species as follows: 1.Concealed Surfaces: Species -contractors choice. 2.06 HARDWOOD PLYWOOD PANELS A.Description: Panels consisting of wood face veneers applied to cores;panel layup with face ply,back ply,and core of either single layer or odd number of inner plies,to produce balanced construction panel;comply with HPVA HP-1. 1.Panels subject to size limitations,minimum thickness requirements,and fabrication tolerances of specified aesthetic grade and performance duty level in accordance with AWI 300 and ANSI/AWI 0641. B.Hardwood Face Veneers Intended to Receive Transparent Finish: 1.Species and Cut: As specified in this section with wood casework for transparent finish. 2.Face Veneer Grade: As specified in this section with wood casework intended for transparent finish;associated with applicable surface exposures and specified performance requirements. 3.Face Veneer Special Characteristics: In accordance with specified aesthetic grade. C.Back: Comply with backer requirements of AWI 300. D.Panel Cores: 1.Medium Density Fiberboard Core (MDF). E.Hardwood Plywood: Plywood manufactured for nonstructural decorative applications;consisting of faces and backs applied to a variety of core types;comply with HPVA HP-1. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Page 6 of 10 1.Woodwork Quality Standard: Panels complying with specified woodwork quality standard. 2.Face: White Maple;plain-sliced;grade AA. a.Finish: UV-cured clear topcoat. 3.Core,Medium Density Fiberboard: Comply with ANSI A208.2. a.Construction and Thickness: 3 plies,1/2 inch. 2.07 LAMINATE MATERIALS A.Manufacturers: 1.Arborite:www.arborite.com/#sle. 2.Formica Corporation: www.formica.com/#sle. 3.Panolam Industries International,Inc;Nevamar: www.panolam.com/#sle. 4.Panolam Industries International,Inc;Pionite: www.panolam.com/#sle. 5.BASIS OF DESIGN:Wilsonart LLC:www.wilsonart.com/#sle. 6.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B.High Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3,types as recommended for specific applications. 1.Manufacturer/Style/Color (PLAM-1): As indicated in Finish Schedule C.Provide specific types as follows: 1.Horizontal Surfaces: HGS,0.048 inchnominal thickness,through color,colors as scheduled,finish as scheduled. 2.Vertical Surfaces: VGS,0.028 inchnominal thickness,through color,colors as indicated,finish as scheduled. 3.Cabinet Liner: CLS,0.020 inchnominal thickness,through color,color as selected. 4.Laminate Backer: BKL,0.020 inchnominal thickness,undecorated;for application to concealed backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate. 2.08 WOOD AND WOOD-BASED MATERIALS A.AWI 200 Wood Moisture Content Requirements: 1.Climate Zone 2: Between 6 and 10 percent. 2.09 CABINET AND DRAWER HARDWARE A.Hinges,Number of Hinges for Each Cabinet Door: 1.Comply with specified performance requirements. B.Hinges,Self-Closing,Integrated Damper Hinges: 1.Description: Self-closing hinges with integrated damper mechanisms. 2.Comply with BHMA A156.9,B01712. 3.Features: Provide soft-closing integrated damper hinges. 4.Opening Range: Between 115 to 150to degrees. 5.Material and Finish: BHMA A156.18,630 or 654 satin stainless steel. C.Cabinet Door and DrawerPulls: Provide one at each door and drawer. 1.Description: Back-mounted pulls. 2.Comply with BHMA A156.9,B02011. 3.Center-to-Center Mounting Dimension:6-5/16 inch 4.Length: 6-27/32 inches. 5.Material and Finish: Satin chromium-plated nickel. 6.Products: a.Dave Mockett &Company,Inc;DP 305 Series Blade Drawer Pull: www.mockett.com/#sle. D.Shelf Rests: 1.Description: Metal shelf rests for installation into prepared holes in substrate. 2.Comply with BHMA A156.9,B04013. 3.Material and Finish: BHMA A156.18,630 or 654 satin stainless steel. E.Drawer Slides: 1.Description: Hardware units that suspend drawers and provide controlled drawer sliding. 2.Comply with BHMA A156.9,Heavy Duty Grade 1HD-100. 3.Features: Self-closing and soft-closing. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Page 7 of 10 4.Travel: Full extension with overtravel. 5.Material and Finish: BHMA A156.18,630 or 654 satin stainless steel. F.Cabinet Door and Drawer Silencers: 1.Description: Self-adhesive silicone silencers. 2.Doors,Quantity: One silencer at top and bottom of closing edge of each door. 3.Drawers,Quantity: Two silencer at back side of each drawer front cover. 4.Size: 1/4 inch diameter;1/8 inch projection. 5.Color: Clear. G.Cabinet Door Keyed Locks with Dead Bolts: 1.Description: Keyed cylinder locks for securing cabinet doors. 2.Keying Action: Key projects and retracts dead bolts. 3.Size:19 mm 4.Mounting: Half-mortised into back of door. a.Comply with BHMA A156.11,E07111. 5.Interchangeable Cores: Provide interchangeable cores. 6.Key Control: See Section 08 71 00. 7.Material and Finish: BHMA A156.18,630 or 654 satin stainless steel. 8.Products: a.Hafele:Cam Lock 235.20.210. 2.10 CASEWORK ACCESSORY COMPONENTS A.Metal Hanging Systems:(Contractor's option) 1.Description: Cleated,z-shaped clips and rails,hanging systems. 2.Material: Extruded aluminum;alloy 6005-T6 tempered in accordance with ASTM B221. 2.11 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A.Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. B.Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. C.Bolts,Nuts,Washers,Lags,Pins,and Screws: Of size and type to suit application;galvanizedfinish in concealed locations and stainless steelfinish in exposed locations. D.Adhesives: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. 2.12 COUNTERTOPS A.Countertops: See Section 12 36 00. 2.13 ACCESSORIES A.Bench Cushions: 1.Fabric (UPH-1): As indicated in Material ID in Drawings. 2.Cushion Foam:Marine-grade,high density,firm feel foam,with Dacron wrap on top. Mounted to 5/8”min.plywood or similar. Thickness as detailed. All visible edges to be finished. 3.Style: Double-corded,boxed cushions. 4.Size:See plans,interior elevations and details 5.Attachment: a.Seat: Velcro-straps sewn to cushion bottom and adhered to top of bench substrate. 2.14 FABRICATION A.Shop-fabricate casework to dimensions,profiles,and details indicated on drawings. B.Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. C.Edging: Fit shelves,doors,and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length. D.Fitting:When necessary to cut and fit on site,provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. E.Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline;secure with concealed fasteners. 1.Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Page 8 of 10 2.Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. F.Matching Wood Grain:Comply with requirements of quality standard for specified Grade and as follows: 1.Run grain vertically at all panels. G.Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures,inserts,appliances,outlet boxes,and fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Fully finish exposed cut edges. H.Hardware: Install hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's written instructions;use fasteners supplied by hardware manufacturer. 2.15 SHOP FINISHING A.Surface Preparation: Comply with: 1.ANSI/AWI 0400 for specified aesthetic grade. B.Shop Finishing: Shop finish architectural wood casework. 1.Comply with ANSI/AWI 0400 for specified aesthetic grade. C.Grain Fillers: Apply to open-grained wood substrates;tint to match wood;work fillers into wood grain; wipe excess from surfaces. D.Transparent Finish System: 1.MPI (APSM)Gloss Level Measured at 60-Degree Angle: a.Gloss Level 5. 2.ANSI/AWI 0400 Finish System: TR-11 -Polyurethane,Water-Based. 3.Stain: As selected by Design Professional from stain manufacturer's full range of colors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify casework and materials required for installation have been delivered,handled and stored as specified. B.Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. C.Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section. D.Verify location and sizes of cutouts for appliances and special equipment to be mounted in or adjacent to casework. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Acclimate casework to environments indicated for installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS)requirements for grade indicated. B.Install work of this section rigid,plumb,and level and in accordance with fabricator's documented instructions;secure casework as indicated on drawings. C.Install cabinet hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's documented instructions using hardware manufacturer's furnished fasteners. D.Install scribe fillers to close gaps between casework and adjacent walls. E.Set and secure custom cabinets in place,assuring that they are rigid,plumb,and level. F.Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. G.Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. H.Carefully scribe casework abutting other components,with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. I.Secure cabinets and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. J.Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood;finish flush with surrounding surfaces. K.Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces. 3.04 INSTALLATION ITEMS BY TRADE CONTRACTORS A.Install plumbing and electrical service to and within equipment. B.Set plumbing fixtures and accessory fixtures,and make final connections of such. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Page 9 of 10 C.Complete wiring and connection to electrical boxes,receptacles,switches,lights,and flush plates. Work shall be in accordance with local codes,whether or not specifically called for in the contract documents. D.Close ends of units,splash aprons,shelves and bases with sealant. 3.05 ADJUSTING A.Adjust installed work. B.Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.06 CLEANING A.See Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements for additional requirements. B.Clean casework,counters,shelves,hardware,fittings,and fixtures. C.Clean all materials provided under this section and all adjacent materials,which may have become soiled from this work. 1.High Pressure Laminates (HPL):refer to NEMA publication Ld3-2005 Annex B Care and Cleaning of Laminates. D.Wipe out millwork interiors and empty drawers of dirt and debris. Remove pencil marks and other blemishes from millwork surfaces. E.Remove foreign matter that could affect operation or appearance of hardware. F.Make final adjustments to drawers and doors. Doors shall swing freely. All doors shall be aligned both vertically and horizontally. Drawers shall open and close smoothly,without binding or excessive slide and play. 3.07 PROTECTION A.Protect installed casework from subsequent construction operations. B.Do not permit finished casework to be exposed to continued construction activity. C.Cover with protective cover,taped to casework. D.Remove temporary protective cover at date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Page 10 of 10 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS Page 1 of 6 SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Nonsag gunnable joint sealants. B.Self-leveling pourable joint sealants. C.Joint backings and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 61 16 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content Restrictions: Additional requirements for sealants and primers. B.Section 07 24 00 -Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems:Joint sealants as part of EIFS system (JS-2) C.Section 08 71 00 -Door Hardware:Setting door thresholds in sealant. D.Section 08 80 00 -Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories. E.Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Sealing acoustical and sound-rated walls and ceilings. F.Section 09 30 00 -Tiling: Sealant between tile and plumbing fixtures and at junctions with other materials and changes in plane. G.Section 09 97 23 -Concrete and Masonry Coatings:Crack repair sealants as part of coating system (JS- 1). 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM C661 -Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer;2015 (Reapproved 2022). B.ASTM C834 -Standard Specification for Latex Sealants;2017 (Reapproved 2023). C.ASTM C919 -Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications;2024. D.ASTM C920 -Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants;2018 (Reapproved 2024). E.ASTM C1193 -Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants;2025. F.ASTM C1248 -Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants;2022. G.ASTM C1311 -Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants;2022. H.ASTM D2240 -Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness;2015 (Reapproved 2021). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical datasheets for each product to be used;include the following: 1.Physical characteristics,including movement capability,VOC content,hardness,cure time,and color availability. 2.List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product. 3.Backing material recommended by sealant manufacturer. 4.Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible. 5.Substrates the product should not be used on. 6.Substrates for which use of primer is required. 7.Substrates for which laboratory adhesion and/or compatibility testing is required. 8.Installation instructions,including precautions,limitations,and recommended backing materials and tools. 9.Sample product warranty. 10.Certification by manufacturer indicating that product complies with specification requirements. C.Product Data for Accessory Products: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheet for each product to be used,including physical characteristics,installation instructions,and recommended tools. D.Color Cards for Selection: Where sealant color is not specified,submit manufacturer's color cards showing standard colors available for selection. E.Installation Plan: Submit at least four weeks prior to start of installation. F.Installation Log: Submit filled-out log for each length or instance of sealant installed. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS Page 2 of 6 G.Executed warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and with at least three years of experience. C.Installation Plan: Include schedule of sealed joints,including the following: 1.Installation Log Form: Include the following data fields,with known information filled out. a.Unique identification of each length or instance of sealant installed. b.Location on project. c.Substrates. d.Sealant used. e.Stated movement capability of sealant. f.Primer to be used,or indicate no primer is used. g.Size and actual backing material used. h.Date of installation. i.Name of installer. j.Actual joint width;provide space to indicate maximum and minimum width. k.Actual joint depth to face of backing material at centerline of joint. l.Air temperature. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B.Manufacturer Warranty:Provide 5-year manufacturer warranty for installed sealants and accessories that fail to achieve a watertight seal,exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion,or do not cure.Complete forms in Owner's name and register with manufacturer. 1.Silicones:20-year PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Nonsag Sealants: 1.Adhesives Technology Corporation: www.atcepoxy.com. 2.Bostik Inc:www.bostik-us.com. 3.Dow Corning Corporation: www.dowcorning.com/construction/sle. 4.Fortifiber Building Systems Group: www.fortifiber.com/sle. 5.Hilti,Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle. 6.Master Builders Solutions:www.master-builders-solutions.com/en-us/#sle. 7.Momentive Performance Materials,Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com/sle. 8.Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com/?sle. 9.Sherwin-Williams Company:www.sherwin-williams.com. 10.Sika Corporation: www.usa-sika.com. 11.Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing:www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. 12.W.R.Meadows,Inc: www.wrmeadows.com/sle. 13.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B.Self-Leveling Sealants: 1.Adhesives Technology Corporation: www.atcepoxy.com. 2.Bostik Inc:www.bostik-us.com. 3.Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com. 4.Dow Corning Corporation: www.dowcorning.com/construction/sle. 5.Master Builders Solutions:www.master-builders-solutions.com/en-us/#sle. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS Page 3 of 6 6.Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com/?sle. 7.Sherwin-Williams Company:www.sherwin-williams.com. 8.Sika Corporation: www.usa-sika.com. 9.Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing:www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. 10.W.R.Meadows,Inc: www.wrmeadows.com/sle. 11.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 JOINT SEALANTS -GENERAL A.Sealants and Primers: Provide products with acceptable levels of volatile organic compound (VOC) content;see Section 01 61 16. 2.03 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS A.Type -General Purpose Exterior Sealant -Non-Staining Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920,Grade NS,Uses M, G,O and A;not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1.Movement Capability:Plus and minus 50 percent,minimum. 2.Nonstaining to Porous Stone: Nonstaining to light-colored natural stone when tested in accordance with ASTM C1248. 3.Dirt Pick-Up: Reduced dirt pick-up compared to other silicone sealants. 4.Hardness Range: 15 to 35,Shore A,when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 5.Color:To be selected by Design Professionalfrom manufacturer's fullrange. 6.Cure Type: Single-component,neutral moisture curing. 7.Products: a.Dow;DOWSIL 756 SMS Building Sealant: www.dow.com/#sle. b.Dow;DOWSIL 790 Silicone Building Sealant: www.dow.com/#sle. c.Dow;DOWSIL 791 Silicone Weatherproofing Sealant,Carbon Neutral: www.dow.com/#sle. d.Dow;DOWSIL 795 Silicone Building Sealant,Carbon Neutral: www.dow.com/#sle. e.Momentive Performance Materials,Inc/GE Silicones;SCS9000 SilPruf NB -Non-Staining Silicone Weatherproofing Sealant: www.siliconeforbuilding.com/#sle. f.Pecora Corporation;Pecora 890 NST (Non-Staining Technology): www.pecora.com/#sle. g.Pecora Corporation;Pecora 864 NST (Non-Staining Technology): www.pecora.com/#sle. h.Sika Corporation;Sikasil WS-290: usa.sika.com/#sle. i.Sika Corporation;Sikasil WS-295: usa.sika.com/#sle. j.Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing;Spectrem 1: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. k.Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing;Spectrem 2: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. l.Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing;Spectrem 3: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. m.Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing;Tremsil 200: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. n.Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing;Tremsil 400: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. 8.Applications: a.Wall expansion and control joints. b.Joints between door,window,and other frames and adjacent construction. c.Joints between different exposed materials. B.Type -Sanitary Sealant -Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920,Grade NS,Uses M and A;single component,mildew resistant;not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1.Color:Clear. 2.Products: a.Dow Corning Corporation;786 Mildew Resistant. b.GE Advanced Materials -Silicones;Sanitary SCS1700. c.Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. d.Sika Corporation;Sikasil GP: www.usa.sika.com/#sle. e.Tremco Incorporated;Tremsil 200 Sanitary. 3.Applications: a.Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. b.Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS Page 4 of 6 C.Type -Acoustical Sealant -Acrylic-Urethane Sealant: Water-based;ASTM C920,Grade NS,Uses M and A;single component;paintable;not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1.Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent,minimum. 2.Hardness Range: 15 to 40,Shore A,when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 3.Color: White. 4.Applications: a.In sound-rated wall assemblies,and where not indicated as fire-rated: 1)gaps between top stud runner and structure,between bottom stud track and floor, between gypsum wall board and floor,and between gypsum wall board and structure. 2)gaps at electrical outlets,wiring devices,piping,and other openings;between wall/ceiling and other construction;and other flanking sound paths. D.Type -General Purpose Interior Sealant -Acrylic Emulsion Latex: Water-based;ASTM C834,single component,non-staining,non-bleeding,non-sagging;not intended for exterior use. 1.Color:Type OP (opaque),paintable. 2.Color: To be selected by Design Professional from manufacturer's standard range. 3.Grade: ASTM C834;Grade -NF. 4.Products: a.Pecora Corporation;AC-20 +Silicone: www.pecora.com/#sle. b.Sherwin-Williams Company;White Lightning 3006 Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. c.Sherwin-Williams Company;850A Acrylic Latex Caulk: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. d.Sherwin-Williams Company;950A Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk: www.sherwin- williams.com/#sle. e.Sherwin-Williams Company;Bolt Quickdry Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk: www.sherwin- williams.com/#sle. f.Sherwin-Williams Company;Powerhouse Siliconized Acrylic Latex Sealant: www.sherwin- williams.com/#sle. g.Top Gun,a brand of PPG Architectural Coatings;Top Gun 200: www.pittsburghpaintsco.com/#sle. h.Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing;Tremflex 834: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. 5.Applications: a.Interior wall and ceiling control joints in non-wet areas. b.Joints between door,window,and other frames and adjacent construction. c.Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. E.Type -Moving Joint Sealant -Non-Curing Butyl Sealant: Solvent-based;ASTM C1311;single component, non-sag,non-skinning,non-hardening,non-bleeding;vapor-impermeable;intended for fully concealed applications. 1.Products: a.Pecora Corporation;Pecora BA-98 Non-Skinning Butyl Sealant: www.pecora.com/#sle. b.Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing;Acoustical/Curtainwall Sealant: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. 2.Applications: a.Lap Joints in Sheet Metal Fabrications b.Lap Joints between Manufactured Metal Panels 2.04 SELF-LEVELING JOINT SEALANTS A.Type -Exterior Pavement Sealant -Self-Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920,Grade P,Uses M and A;single or multi-component;explicitly approved by manufacturer for traffic exposure;not expected to withstand continuous water immersion . 1.Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent,minimum. 2.Hardness Range: 35 to 55,Shore A,when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS Page 5 of 6 3.Color: Gray. 4.Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 180 degrees F. 5.Products: a.Sherwin-Williams Company;Stampede 1SL Polyurethane Sealant: www.sherwin- williams.com/#sle. b.Sherwin-Williams Company;Stampede 2SL Polyurethane Sealant: www.sherwin- williams.com/#sle. c.Sika Corporation;Sikaflex SL 1: usa.sika.com/#sle. d.Sika Corporation;Sikaflex SL 2: usa.sika.com/#sle. e.Sika Corporation;Sikaflex-1c SL: usa.sika.com/#sle. f.Sika Corporation;Sikaflex-2c SL: usa.sika.com/#sle. 6.Applications: a.Control and Expansion Joints in Concrete Paving B.Type -Interior Slabs (unpolished)-Semi-Rigid Self-Leveling Epoxy Joint Filler: Epoxy or epoxy/polyurethane copolymer;intended for filling cracks and control joints not subject to significant movement;rigid enough to support concrete edges under traffic. 1.Composition: Single or multi-component,100 percent solids by weight. 2.Durometer Hardness: Minimum of 85 for Type A or 35 for Type D,after seven days when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240. 3.Color: To be selected by Design Professional from manufacturer's standard colors. 4.Joint Width,Minimum: 1/8 inch. 5.Joint Width,Maximum: 1/4 inch. 6.Joint Depth: Provide product suitable for joints from 1/8 inch to 2 inches in depth including space for backer rod. 7.Products: a.Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com/#sle. b.Euclid Chemical Company;EUCO 700: www.euclidchemical.com/#sle. c.Mapei;Mapeiflex Joint Sealant EP 90/50: www.mapei.com/#sle. d.Pecora Corporation;DynaThane 800HM: www.pecora.com/#sle. e.Nox-Crete Inc;DynaFlex 502: www.nox-crete.com/#sle. f.W.R.Meadows,Inc;Rezi-Weld Flex: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. g.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A.Backer Rod: Cylindrical cellular foam rod with surface that sealant will not adhere to,compatible with specific sealant used,and recommended by backing and sealant manufacturers for specific application. 1.Closed Cell and Bi-Cellular: 25 to 33 percent larger in diameter than joint width. B.Backing Tape: Self-adhesive polyethylene tape with surface that sealant will not adhere to and recommended by tape and sealant manufacturers for specific application. C.Masking Tape: Self-adhesive,nonabsorbent,nonstaining,removable without adhesive residue,and compatible with surfaces adjacent to joints and sealants. D.Joint Cleaner: Noncorrosive and nonstaining type,type recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. E.Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application;nonstaining. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that substrates and joints are ready to receive work. B.Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants. C.Verify that backer rods are of the correct size. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B.Clean joints,and prime as necessary,in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS Page 6 of 6 C.Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D.Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant work;be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable. E.Concrete Floor Joints That Will Be Exposed in Completed Work: Test joint filler in an inconspicuous area to verify that it does not stain or discolor slab. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Install this work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B.Provide joint sealant installations complying with ASTM C1193. C.Install acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919. D.Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve the following,unless otherwise indicated: 1.Width/depth ratio of 2:1. 2.Neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width. 3.Surface bond area on each side not less than 75 percent of joint width. E.Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used. F.Install sealant free of air pockets,foreign embedded matter,ridges,and sags,and without getting sealant on adjacent surfaces. G.Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended temperature range,or will be outside that range during the entire curing period,unless manufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed. H.Do not seal the following types of joints. 1.Intentional weepholes in masonry. 2.Joints indicated to be treated with manufactured expansion joint cover or some other type of sealing device. 3.Joints where sealant is specified to be provided by manufacturer of product to be sealed. 4.Joints where installation of sealant is specified in another section. 5.Through-penetrations in sound-rated assemblies that are also fire-rated assemblies. I.Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave,unless otherwise indicated;remove masking tape immediately after tooling sealant surface. J.Concrete Floor Joint Filler: After full cure,shave joint filler flush with top of concrete slab. 3.04 CLEANING A.Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A.Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 1 of 4 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Flush wood doors;flushand flush glazedconfiguration;non-rated. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 08 71 00 -Door Hardware. B.Section 08 80 00 -Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards;2014. B.AWMAC/WI (NAAWS)-North American Architectural Woodwork Standards,U.S.Version 3.0;2016. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction;veneer species,type and characteristics. C.Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames,elevations,sizes,types,swings,undercuts,beveling,blocking for hardware,factory machining,factory finishing,cutouts for glazing or hardware and other details. D.Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer,12 by 6 inches in size illustrating wood grain,stain color, and sheen. E.Specimen warranty. F.Warranty,executed in Owner's name. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section, with not less than threeyears ofexperience. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Package,deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B.Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging,and inspect for damage. C.Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas;or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Coordinate the work with door opening construction,door frame and door hardware installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B.Manufacturer Warranty: Provide manufacturer's warranty on interior doors for the life of the installation.Complete forms in Owner's name and register with manufacturer. 1.Include coverage for delamination of veneer,warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials,and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 1.Haley Brothers: www.haleybros.com. 2.Marshfield Door Systems,Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com. 3.Masonite Architectural:www.masonite.com 4.Oregon Door: www.oregondoor.com/#sle. 5.VT Industries,Inc: www.vtindustries.com/#sle. 6.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 DOORS A.Doors:See drawings for locations and additional requirements. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 2 of 4 1.Quality Standard: Custom Grade,Heavy Dutyperformance,in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS),unless noted otherwise. 2.Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated. 3.No added urea-formaldehyde. B.Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated;flush construction. 1.Provide solid core doors at each location. 2.Wood veneer facing with factory transparent finishto match Architect's sample. 2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A.Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type structural composite lumber core (SCLC),plies and faces as indicated. 2.04 DOOR FACINGS A.Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish:White oak,HPVA Grade A,plain sliced (flat cut),with reverse slip matchbetween leaves of veneer,running matchof spliced veneer leaves assembled on door or panel face. 1.Vertical Edges:Same species as face veneer;lumber or veneer (ME),or compatible hardwood (CE),sanded ease;visible joints allowed on hinge edge. 2."Sequence Match"each pair of doors;"Set Match"pairs of doors within 10 feet of each other when doors are closed. B.Facing Adhesive: Type I -waterproof. 2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A.Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B.Cores Constructed with stiles and rails: 1.Provide solid blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement. 2.Provide solid blocking for other through-bolted hardware. C.Glazed Openings: Non-removable stops on non-secure side;sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. D.Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware,in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. E.Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings,with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. F.Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified. 2.06 FINISHES -WOOD VENEER DOORS A.Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS),Section 5 -Finishing for grade specified and as follows: 1.Transparent: a.System -12,Polyurethane,Water-based. b.Stain:None,clear finish. c.Sheen:Satin. B.Factory finish doors in accordance with sample to be provided. C.Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A.Glazing:See Section 08 80 00for non-rated glass. B.Glazing Stops: Wood,of same species as door facing,mitered corners;prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. C.Door Hardware: See Section 08 71 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify existing conditions before starting work. B.Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C.Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 3 of 4 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. B.Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim;if fit or clearance is not correct,replace door. C.Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. D.Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. E.Coordinate installation of glazing. 3.03 TOLERANCES A.Comply with specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. B.Comply with specified quality standard for telegraphing,warp,and squareness. 3.04 ADJUSTING A.Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B.Adjust closers for full closure. 3.05 SCHEDULE A.Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 4 of 4 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE Page 1 of 8 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Hardware for wooddoors. B.Gasketing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 06 20 00 -Finish Carpentry: Wood storefront framing. B.Section 08 14 16 -Flush Wood Doors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ADA Standards -2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design;2010. B.BHMA (CPD)-Certified Products Directory;Current Edition. C.BHMA A156.1 -Standard for Butts and Hinges;2025. D.BHMA A156.4 -Door Closers and Pivots;2024. E.BHMA A156.7 -Template Hinge Dimensions;2022. F.BHMA A156.13 -Mortise Locks and Latches;2022. G.BHMA A156.16 -Standard for Auxiliary Hardware;2023. H.BHMA A156.22 -Standard for Gasketing;2021. I.BHMA A156.115W -Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames;2006. J.ICC A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities;2017. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Coordinate the manufacture,fabrication,and installation of products that door hardware is installed on. B.Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog literature for each type of hardware,marked to clearly show products to be furnished for this project,and includes construction details,material descriptions, finishes,and dimensions and profiles of individual components. C.Door Hardware Schedule:Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening,include: 1.Door Index;include door number,heading number,and Architects hardware set number. 2.Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet:List locking device and function for each opening. 3.Quantity,type,style,function,size,and finish of each hardware item. 4.Name and manufacturer of each item. 5.Fastenings and other pertinent information. 6.Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings. 7.Explanation of all abbreviations,symbols,and codes contained in schedule. 8.Mounting locations for hardware. 9.Door and frame sizes and materials. 10.Name and phone number for local manufacturer's representative for each product. 11.Submittal Sequence:Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data,Samples,and Shop Drawings.Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. D.Operations and Maintenance Data:Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include: 1.Complete information on care,maintenance,and adjustment;data on repair and replacement parts,and information on preservation of finishes. 2.Catalog pages for each product. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE Page 2 of 8 3.Final approved hardware schedule,edited to reflect conditions as-installed. 4.Final keying schedule 5.Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to identify project. E.Key Schedule: 1.After Keying Conference,provide keying schedule listing levels of keying as well as explanation of key system's function,key symbols used and door numbers controlled. 2.Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems”as guideline for nomenclature,definitions,and approach for selecting optimal keying system. 3.Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance with referenced DHI publication.Include schematic keying diagram and index each key to unique door designations. 4.Index keying schedule by door number,keyset,hardware heading number,cross keying instructions,and special key stamping instructions. 5.Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic illustrating system usage and expansion. 6.Forward bitting list,key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner,by means as directed by Owner. 7.Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier,detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks. F.Specimen warranty. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Supplier Qualifications and Responsibilities:Recognized architectural hardware supplier with record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity,type,and quality to that indicated for this Project. 1.Warehousing Facilities:In Project's vicinity. 2.Scheduling Responsibility:Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 3.Engineering Responsibility:Preparation of data for electrified door hardware,including Shop Drawings,based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. 4.Coordination Responsibility:Assist in coordinating installation of electronic security hardware with Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to Architect and other related subcontractors. a.Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation,inspect and verify that all components are working properly. B.Single Source Responsibility:Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer. C.Electrified Door Hardware:Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100,by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D.Accessibility Requirements:For door hardware on doors in an accessible route,comply with governing accessibility regulations cited in “REFERENCES”article,herein. E.Keying Conference 1.Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including: a.Function of building,flow of traffic,purpose of each area,degree of security required,and plans for future expansion. b.Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c.Requirements for key control system. d.Requirements for access control. e.Address for delivery of keys. F.Pre-installation Conference Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE Page 3 of 8 1.Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,Installer's personnel, equipment,and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2.Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 3.Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware. 4.Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 5.Review required testing,inspecting,and certifying procedures. 6.Conference can be done remotely via web or conference call. G.Coordination Conferences: 1.Installation Coordination Conference:Prior to hardware installation,schedule and hold meeting to review questions or concerns related to proper installation and adjustment of door hardware. 2.Electrified Hardware Coordination Conference:Prior to ordering electrified hardware,schedule and hold meeting to coordinate door hardware with security,electrical,doors and frames,and other related suppliers. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to Project site. B.Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions,templates,and necessary fasteners with each item or package. 1.Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer’s original packaging. C.Project Conditions: 1.Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and installation periods. 2.Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project.Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. D.Protection and Damage: 1.Promptly replace products damaged during shipping. 2.Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage,marring,or scratching.Correct,replace or repair products damaged during Work. 3.Protect products against malfunction due to paint,solvent,cleanser,or any chemical agent. E.Deliver keys and permanent cores/cylinders to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.08 COORDINATION A.Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction.Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. B.Installation Templates:Distribute for doors,frames,and other work specified to be factory or shop prepared.Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C.Security:Coordinate installation of door hardware,keying,and access control with Owner's security consultant. 1.09 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B.Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide warranty against defects in material and workmanship for period indicated.Complete forms in Owner's name and register with manufacturer. 1.Closers: Five years,minimum. 2.Locksets and Cylinders: Three years,minimum. 3.Other Hardware: Two years,minimum. C.Warranty Period:Beginning from date of Substantial Completion,for durations indicated by the manufacturer. D.Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation,improper use or abuse. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE Page 4 of 8 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Approval of manufacturers and/or products other than those listedas the BASIS OF DESIGN in the individual article or on Drawings for the product category shall be in accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE article,herein. B.Approval of products from other than the manufacturers indicated is contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer’s product. C.Where specified hardware is not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having same operation and quality as type specified,subject to Architect's approval. 2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A.Provide specified door hardware as required to make doors fully functional,compliant with applicable codes,and secure to extent indicated. B.Provide individual items of single type,of same model,and by same manufacturer. C.Provide door hardware products that comply with the following requirements: 1.Applicable provisions of state and localcodes. 2.Accessibility: ADA Standards and ICC A117.1. 3.Listed and certified compliant with specified standards by BHMA (CPD). 4.Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16. 5.Hardware Preparation for Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames: BHMA A156.115W. D.Lock Function: Provide lock and latch function numbers and descriptions of manufacturer's series.See Door Hardware Schedule. E.Fasteners: 1.Provide fasteners of proper type,size,quantity,and finish that comply with commercially recognized standards for proposed applications. a.Aluminum fasteners are not permitted. b.Provide phillips flat-head screws with heads finished to match door surface hardware unless otherwise indicated. 2.Provide wall grip inserts for hollow wall construction. 3.Concealed Fasteners: Do not use through or sex bolt type fasteners on door panel sides indicated as concealed fastener locations,unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 HINGES A.Manufacturers: 1.McKinney;an Assa Abloy Group company;TB/T4B Series: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle. 2.Hager Companies;BB series: www.hagerco.com/#sle. 3.BASIS OF DESIGN:Ives;www.iveshardware.com 4.Stanley:FBB Series 5.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B.Hinges: Comply with BHMA A156.1,Grade 1. 1.Material: a.Exterior:Bronze or stainless steel b.Interior:Steel 2.Weight: a.1-3/4 inch (44 mm)thick doors,up to and including 36 inches (914 mm)wide:Standard weight. b.Over 36 inch wide and 2 inches or thicker doors:Heavy weight. c.All doors with exit devices and push/pull hardware to have heavy weight hinges. 3.Width of hinges:Adjust hinge width as required for door,frame,and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening. a.1-3/4 inch (44 mm)thick doors,up to and including 36 inches (914 mm)wide:4-1/2 inches (114 mm) Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE Page 5 of 8 b.Over 36 inch wide and 2 inches (51 mm)or thicker doors:5 inches (127 mm) 4.Butt Hinges: Comply with BHMA A156.1 and BHMA A156.7 for templated hinges. a.Provide hinge width required to clear surrounding trim. 5.Provide hinges on every swinging door. a.Where new hinges are specified for existing doors or existing frames,provide new hinges of identical size to hinge preparation present in existing door or existing frame. 6.Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated. 7.Provide ball-bearing hinges at each door. 8.Hinge Pins:Except as otherwise indicated,provide hinge pins as follows: a.Steel Hinges:Steel pins b.Non-Ferrous Hinges:Stainless steel pins c.Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors:Non-removable pins 9.Interior Non-lockable Doors:Non-rising pins 10.Provide following quantity of butt hinges for each door: a.Doors up to 90 inches High:Three hinges. b.Doors over 90 inchesHigh:One additional hinge per each additional 30 inchesin height. 2.04 LOCK CYLINDERS A.Manufacturers:Match existing key system(s)as directed by Owner. B.Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of each lock,unless otherwise indicated. 1.Provide cylinders from same manufacturer as locking device. 2.Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices. C.Keying: 1.Provide a factory registered keying system,complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference. 2.Provide cylinders/cores keyed into Owner’s existing factory registered keying system. 3.Comply with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28,incorporating decisions made at keying conference. 4.Provide cylinders/cores keyed into Owner’s existing keying system complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28,incorporating decisions made at keying conference. D.Requirements: 1.Provide permanent cylinders/cores keyed by the manufacturer according to the following key system. a.Master Keying system as directed by the Owner. 2.Forward bitting list and keys separately from cylinders,by means as directed by Owner.Failure to comply with forwarding requirements will be cause for replacement of cylinders/cores involved at no additional cost to Owner. 3.Provide keys with the following features: a.Material:Nickel silver;minimum thickness of .107-inch (2.3mm) 4.Identification: a.Mark permanent cylinders/cores and keys with applicable blind code per DHI publication “Keying Systems and Nomenclature”for identification.Do not provide blind code marks with actual key cuts. b.Identification stamping provisions must be approved by the Architect and Owner. c.Stamp cylinders/cores and keys with Owner’s unique key system facility code as established by the manufacturer;key symbol and embossed or stamped with “DO NOT DUPLICATE” along with the “PATENTED”or patent number to enforce the patent protection. d.Failure to comply with stamping requirements will be cause for replacement of keys involved at no additional cost to Owner. e.Forward permanent cylinders/cores to Owner,separately from keys,by means as directed by Owner. 5.Quantity:Furnish in the following quantities. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE Page 6 of 8 a.Change (Day)Keys:3 per cylinder/core. b.OPTION for LFIC or SFIC:Permanent Control Keys:3. c.Master Keys:6. 2.05 MORTISE LOCKS A.Manufacturers: 1.Schlage,an Allegion brand;L Series:www.allegion.com/us/#sle. 2.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B.Mortise Locks: Comply with BHMA A156.13,Grade 1,Security,1000 Series. 1.Latchbolt Throw: 3/4 inch,minimum. 2.Deadbolt Throw: 1 inch,minimum. 3.Backset: 2-3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. 4.Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each latchset or lockset with strike box and curved lip extending to protect frame in compliance with indicated requirements. a.Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: Provide for locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. b.Finish: To match lock or latch. 2.06 CLOSERS A.Manufacturers;Surface Mounted: 1.BASIS OF DESIGN (Owner's standard):LCN,an Allegion brand;4040XP series: www.allegion.com/us/#sle. 2.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B.Closers: Comply with BHMA A156.4,Grade 1. 1.ISO 9000 certify closers.Stamp units with date of manufacture code. 2.Type: Surface mounted to door. 3.At corridor entry doors,mount closer on room side of door. 4.Requirements a.Provide door closers with fully hydraulic,full rack and pinion action with high strength cast iron cylinder,and full complement bearings at shaft. b.Cylinder Body:1-1/2 inch (38 mm)diameter with 3/4 inch (19 mm)diameter double heat- treated pinion journal. c.Hydraulic Fluid:Fireproof,passing requirements of UL10C,and requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. d.Spring Power:Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes,and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards. e.Hydraulic Regulation:By tamper-proof,non-critical valves,with separate adjustment for latch speed,general speed,and backcheck. f.Provide closers with solid forged steel main arms and factory assembled heavy-duty forged forearms for parallel arm closers. g.Pressure Relief Valve (PRV)Technology:Not permitted. h.Finish for Closer Cylinders,Arms,Adapter Plates,and Metal Covers:Powder coating finish which has been certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing as described in ANSI Standard A156.4 and ASTM B117,or has special rust inhibitor (SRI). i.Provide special templates,drop plates,mounting brackets,or adapters for arms as required for details,overhead stops,and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting. 2.07 WALL STOPS A.Manufacturers: 1.Burns 2.Rockwood;an Assa Abloy Group company:www.assaabloydss.com/#sle. 3.BASIS OF DESIGN:Ives;www.iveshardware.com B.Provide door stops at each door leaf: 1. Provide wall stops wherever possible. 2.Where a wall stop cannot be used,provide universal floor stops for low or high rise options. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE Page 7 of 8 3.Where wall or floor stop cannot be used,provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop. C.Wall Stops: Comply with BHMA A156.16,Grade 1 and Resilient Material Retention Test as described in this standard. 1.Provide wall stops to prevent damage to wall surface upon opening door. 2.Type: Bumper,concave,wall stop. 3.Material:Steelhousing with rubber insert. 2.08 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND GASKETING A.Manufacturers: 1.National Guard Products,Inc:www.ngpinc.com/#sle. 2.Reese Enterprises,Inc:www.reeseusa.com/#sle. 3.BASIS OF DESIGN:Zero International,Inc:www.zerointernational.com/#sle. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B.Gasketing: Comply with BHMA A156.22. 1.Head and Jamb Type: Self-adhesive. 2.Material: Aluminum,with neoprene weatherstripping. 3.See Section 08 1416 when wood door to frame sealing system is applied by door manufacturer. 4.Provide sound-rated gasketing on all doors. 2.09 SILENCERS A.Manufacturers: 1.Burns 2.BASIS OF DESIGN:Ives,an Allegion brand;_____:www.allegion.com/us/#sle. 3.Rockwood;an Assa Abloy Group company;_____: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle. 4.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B.Silencers:Provide at equal locations on door frame to mute sound of door's impact upon closing.Omit where gasketing is specified. 1.Provide "push-in"type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames. 2.Single Door: Provide three on strike jamb of frame. 3.Pair of Doors: Provide two on head of frame,one for each door at latch side. 4.Material: Rubber,gray color. 2.10 FINISHES A.Finish:BHMA 626/652 (US26D);except: 1.Overhead Stops and Holders:BHMA 630 (US32D) 2.Door Closers:Powder Coat to Match 3.Wall Stops:BHMA 630 (US32D) 4.Weatherstripping:Clear Anodized Aluminum PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Prior to installation of hardware,examine doors and frames,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,labeled fire-rated door assembly construction,wall and floor construction,and other conditions affecting performance. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. B.Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C.Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations,using only fasteners provided by manufacturer. D.Do not install surface mounted items until application of finishes to substrate are fully completed. E.Set units level,plumb and true to line and location.Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. F.Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE Page 8 of 8 G.Install operating parts so they move freely and smoothly without binding,sticking,or excessive clearance. H.Door Hardware Mounting Heights: Distance from finished floor to center line of hardware item. As indicated in following list;unless noted otherwise in Door Hardware Schedule or on drawings. 1.Flush Wood Doors: See Section 08 14 16. 2.Mounting heights in compliance with ADA Standards: a.Locksets: 40-5/16 inch. I.Hinges:Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than quantity recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm)of door height,whichever is more stringent,unless other equivalent means of support for door,such as spring hinges or pivots,are provided. J.Lock Cylinders:Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1.Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying section. K.Door Closers:Mount closers on room side of corridor doors,inside of exterior doors,and stair side of stairway doors from corridors.Mount closers so they are not visible in corridors,lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect. L.Stops:Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule.Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present tripping hazard. M.Perimeter Gasketing:Apply to head and jamb,forming seal between door and frame. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Perform field inspection and testing under provisions of Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements. B.Provide an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC)to inspect installation and certify that hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified. 3.04 ADJUSTING A.Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements. B.Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 1.Door Closers:Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C.Adjust gasketing for complete,continuous seal;replace if unable to make complete seal. D.Occupancy Adjustment:Approximately three to six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant must examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces,as necessary to ensure function of doors and door hardware. 3.05 CLEANING A.Clean finished hardware in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions after final adjustments have been made. B.Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C.Replace items that cannot be cleaned to manufacturer's level of finish quality at no additional cost. D.See Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal for additional requirements. 3.06 PROTECTION A.Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements. B.Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 80 00 GLAZING Page 1 of 4 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Glazing units,for interior glazing (GL-4). B.Plastic films (FILM-1). C.Glazing accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 06 20 00 -Finish Carpentry: Interior wood storefront framing. B.Section 07 92 00 -Joint Sealants: Sealants for other than glazing purposes. C.Section 08 14 16 -Flush Wood Doors:Glazing requirements for lites in doors. D.Section 08 83 00 -Mirrors:Cut-glass mirrors (MIR-1) 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.16 CFR 1201 -Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials;Current Edition. B.ANSI Z97.1 -American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings -Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test;2015 (Reaffirmed 2020). C.ASTM C864 -Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,Setting Blocks, and Spacers;2005 (Reapproved 2026). D.ASTM C1036 -Standard Specification for Flat Glass;2025. E.ASTM C1048 -Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;2025. F.ASTM C1193 -Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants;2025. G.GANA (GM)-GANA Glazing Manual;2022. H.GANA (SM)-GANA Sealant Manual;2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data on Glazing Unit and Plastic FilmGlazing Types:Provide structural,physical and environmental characteristics,size limitations,special handling and installation requirements. C.Product Data on Glazing Accessories: Provide functional,and environmental characteristics,limitations, special application requirements,and identify available colors. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM)and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. B.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Protect glazing according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glazing from moisture,condensation,temperature changes,direct exposure to sun,or other causes. B.Comply with glazing manufacturer's written instructions for shipping,storing,and handling glazing as needed to prevent deterioration of coatings,damage to edges,and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings.Store indoors. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Maintain minimum ambient temperature before,during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. B.Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Float Glass Manufacturers: 1.Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com. 2.Guardian Glass,LLC: www.guardianglass.com. 3.Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na/#sle. 4.Saint Gobain North America:www.saint-gobain.com/#sle. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 80 00 GLAZING Page 2 of 4 5.Vitro Architectural Glass (formerly PPG Glass): www.vitroglazings.com/#sle. 6.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 GLASS MATERIALS A.Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless otherwise indicated. 1.Annealed Type: ASTM C1036,Type I -Transparent Flat,Class 1 -Clear,Quality -Q3. 2.Kind FT -Fully Tempered Type: Complies with ASTM C1048. 3.Fully Tempered Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 or 16 CFR 1201 criteria for safety glazing used in hazardous locations. 4.Impact Resistant Safety Glass:Complies with ANSI Z97.1 -Class A,or 16 CFR 1201 -Category II criteria. 2.03 GLAZING UNITS A.Monolithic Vision Glazing: 1.Applications: Interior glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2.Glass Type: Fully tempered Fully temperedfloat glass,mid-iron. 3.Tint: Clear. 4.Thickness: 1/4 inch,nominal,unless otherwise indicated. a.Provide thicker if required per code or GANA recommendations based on spans. b.Provide 1/2-inch where spans exceed 8 feet 5.Glazing Method: Dry glazing method,gasket glazing. 2.04 PLASTIC FILMS A.Decorative Plastic Film (FILM-1):PVC-free vinyl type. 1.Application: Locations as indicated on drawings. 2.Series Type:Specialty (thin vertical lines made to simulate brushed fiber). 3.Tint:Translucent white. 4.Pattern/Style:As indicated in Material ID List 5.Thickness:2.5 mil 6.Manufacturers: a.BASIS OF DESIGN:Skyline Design:UltraGreen SX-5038-UG Jute b.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A.Setting Blocks: Neoprene,with 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness;ASTM C864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B.Spacer Shims: Neoprene,50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness;ASTM C864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application,self adhesive on one face. C.Glazing Tape,Back Bedding Mastic Type: Preformed,butyl-based,100 percent solids compound with integral resilient spacer rod applicable to application indicated;5 to 30 cured Shore A durometer hardness;coiled on release paper;black color. 1.Width: 1/2 inch. 2.Thickness: As required for application. D.Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot;ASTM C864 Option I;color black. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS A.Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances,including those for size, squareness,and offsets at corners. B.Verify that the minimum required face and edge clearances are being provided. C.Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean,free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement,weeps are clear,and support framing is ready to receive glazing system. D.Verify that sealing between joints of glass framing members has been completed effectively. E.Proceed with glazing system installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 80 00 GLAZING Page 3 of 4 3.02 PREPARATION A.Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry immediately before glazing.Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates. B.Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C.Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion. 3.03 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A.Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass,gaskets,and other glazing material manufacturers,unless more stringent requirements are indicated,including those in glazing referenced standards. B.Install glazing sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193,GANA (SM),and manufacturer's instructions. C.Do not exceed edge pressures around perimeter of glass lites as stipulated by glass manufacturer. D.Set glass lites of system with uniform pattern,draw,bow,and similar characteristics. E.Set glass lites in proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as indicated. F.Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of construction operations such as,and not limited to the following;weld splatter,fire-safing,plastering,mortar droppings,and paint. 3.04 INSTALLATION -EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY GLAZING METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A.Application -Exterior and/or Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from either the exterior or the interior of the building. B.Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch from corners. C.Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact. D.Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket;exert pressure for full continuous contact. 3.05 INSTALLATION -PLASTIC FILM A.Install plastic film with adhesive,applied in accordance with film manufacturer's instructions. B.Place without air bubbles,creases or visible distortion. C.Install film tight to perimeter of glass and carefully trim film with razor sharp knife.Provide 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch gap at perimeter of glazed panel unless otherwise required.Do not score the glass. 3.06 CLEANING A.See Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal,for additional requirements. B.Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers. C.Remove nonpermanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete. D.Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured. E.Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.07 PROTECTION A.After installation,mark pane with an 'X'by using removable plastic tape or paste;do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. B.Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 80 00 GLAZING Page 4 of 4 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 83 00 MIRRORS Page 1 of 2 SECTION 08 83 00 MIRRORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Glass mirrors,frameless (MIR-1). 1.Tempered safety glass. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 10 28 00 -Toilet and Miscellaneous Accessories: Metal mirror frames. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM C1048 -Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;2025. B.GANA (GM)-GANA Glazing Manual;2022. C.GANA (SM)-GANA Sealant Manual;2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B.Product Data on Mirror Types: Submit structural,physical and environmental characteristics,size limitations,special handling and installation requirements. C.Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Perform Work in accordance with {\rs\#1}and {\rs\#1}for glazing installation methods. B.Fabricate,store,transport,receive,install,and clean mirrors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B.Maintain minimum ambient temperature before,during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.07 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. B.Provide five year manufacturer warranty for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Mirror Design Criteria: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirror material deflection to 1/200,or to the flexure limit of glass,with full recovery of glazing materials,whichever is less. B.Mirror Glass: Clear,tempered safety glass;ASTM C1048,with copper and silver coatings,and protective overcoating. 1.Thickness: 1/4 inch,unless thicker recommeded by GANA for mirror size. 2.Edges: Polished. 3.Size/Shape: As indicated on drawings. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A.Mirror Adhesive: Silicone pre-polymer based,chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate. 1.Volatile Organic Content (VOC): Less than 7 percent by weight. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that openings for mirrored glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B.Verify that surfaces of mirror frames or recesses are clean,free of obstructions,and ready for installation of mirrors. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 08 83 00 MIRRORS Page 2 of 2 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Install mirrors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B.Set mirrors plumb and level,and free of optical distortion. C.Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or backsplashes. D.Frameless Mirrors: Set mirrors in proper place with adhesive,applied in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 CLEANING A.Remove wet glazing materials from finish surfaces. B.Remove labels after work is complete. C.Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 05 61 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION Page 1 of 6 SECTION 09 05 61 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.This section applies to floors identified in Contract Documents that are receiving the following types of floor coverings: 1.Resilient tile. 2.Carpet tile. 3.Thin-set ceramic tile. B.Preparation of new and existing concrete floor slabs for installation of floor coverings. C.Testing of concrete floor slabs for moisture and alkalinity (pH). D.Remediation of concrete floor slabs due to unsatisfactory moisture or alkalinity (pH)conditions. 1.Contractor shall perform all specified remediation of concrete floor slabs. If such remediation is indicated by testing agency's report,is an existing slab,and is due to a condition not under Contractor's control or could not have been predicted by examination prior to entering into the contract,a contract modification will be issued. E.Remedial floor coatings. F.Alternate flooring adhesives. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements: Additional requirements relating to testing agencies and testing. B.Section 03 30 01 -Cast-in-Place Concrete Floor Patching: Limitations on curing requirements for new concrete floor slabs. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A.MVE:Moisture Vapor Emission. B.MVER:Moisture Vapor Emission Rate;measured in lbs per1000 ft2 /24 hours. C.RH:Relative Humidity;measured in percentage. D.VOC:Volatile Organic Compound;measured in grams/liter. E.CSP:Concrete Surface Profile defined by ICRI. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM F710 -Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;2022. B.ASTM F1869 -Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride;2023. C.ASTM F2170 -Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes;2019a. D.RFCI (RWP)-Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings;2018. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Coordinate scheduling of cleaning and testing,so that preliminary cleaning has been completed for at least 24 hours prior to testing. B.Pre-Installation Meeting: 1.Convene minimum two weeks prior to starting work of this section. 2.Discuss contract document requirements,moisture tests,manufacturer recommendations, installer's recommendations,scheduling,and protection of work from damage by other trades. 3.Attendance required by:Contractor,Floor Installer,Manufacturer's Representative,Independent testing agency,Concrete Subcontractor,Ready Mix supplier. 4.Objective of conference is: a.Review methods and procedures. b.Tour job site representative areas to inspect and discuss condition of substrate. c.Review concrete finishing requirements. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 05 61 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION Page 2 of 6 d.Review and finalize construction schedule to ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress. e.Review required inspections,testing,certifications,material usage procedures. f.Review environmental restrictions and forecasts. g.Confirm compatibility of MVE control coatings with other concrete chemicals specified. h.Record content of conference including attendance and topics. 5.Furnish record of pre-installation conference to all parties who are affected by MVE control systems work. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A.Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers'Product Literature: For each specific combination of substrate,floor covering,and adhesive to be used;showing: 1.Moisture and alkalinity (pH)limits and test methods. 2.Manufacturer's required bond/compatibility test procedure. B.Remedial Materials Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on each product to be used for remediation. 1.Manufacturer's statement of compatibility with types of flooring applied over remedial product. 2.Test reports indicating compliance with specified performance requirements,performed by nationally recognized independent testing agency. 3.Specimen Warranty: Copy of warranty to be issued by coating manufacturer and certificate of underwriter's coverage of warranty. C.Testing Agency's Report: 1.Description of areas tested;include floor plans and photographs if helpful. 2.Summary of conditions encountered. 3.Moisture and alkalinity (pH)test reports. 4.Copies of specified test methods. 5.Recommendations for remediation of unsatisfactory surfaces. 6.Product data for recommended remedial coating. 7.Submit report to Design Professional. 8.Submit report not more than two business days after conclusion of testing. D.Adhesive Bond and Compatibility Test Report. E.Installer's Qualification Statement. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Supply all components of MVE Control System from single source manufacturer. B.Moisture and alkalinity (pH)testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency employed and paid by Contractor. C.Contractor may perform adhesive and bond test with Contractor's own personnel or hire a testing agency. D.Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency experienced in the types of testing specified. 1.Submit evidence of experience consisting of at least 3 test reports of the type required,with project Owner's project contact information. E.Contractor's Responsibility Relating to Independent Agency Testing: 1.Provide access for and cooperate with testing agency. 2.Confirm date of start of testing at least 10 days prior to actual start. 3.Allow at least 4 business days on site for testing agency activities. 4.Achieve and maintain specified ambient conditions. 5.Notify Design Professional when specified ambient conditions have been achieved and when testing will start. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 05 61 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION Page 3 of 6 F.Remedial Coating Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section,trained by or employed by coating manufacturer,and able to provide at least 3 project references showing at least 3 years'experience installing moisture emission coatings. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Deliver,store,handle,and protect products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. B.Deliver materials in manufacturer’s packaging;include installation instructions. C.Keep materials from freezing. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed,and for at least 48 hours prior to testing,at not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F. B.Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed,and for at least 48 hours prior to testing,at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Alternate Flooring Adhesive: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product,suitable for the moisture and pH conditions present;low-VOC. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring manufacturer,provide a product recommended by adhesive manufacturer as suitable for substrate and floor covering and for conditions present. 1.Not for use with carpet tile,which requires releasable adhesive. B.Remedial Floor Coating,Two-Component: Single-layer coating resistant to water vapor transmission meeting flooring manufacturer's emission limits,resistant to alkalinity (pH)level found,and suitable for flooring adhesion without further treatment. 1.Thickness: As required for application and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 2.ASTM F3010 qualified,fluid-applied,two-component,100 percent solids epoxy resin,low viscosity,penetrating,one-coat membrane forming system;formulated for application on concrete substrates to reduce MVER to level required for installation of floor covering indicated, including adhesives. 3.Products: a.Allied Construction Technologies,Inc.(ACTech),GoEarly Technology; www.actechperforms.com b.ARDEX Engineered Cements;ARDEX MC RAPID: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. c.Custom Building Products;TechMVC Moisture Vapor and Alkalinity Barrier: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle. d.TEC Specialty Products LLC;TEC LiquiDam Moisture Mitigation: www.tecspecialty.com/#sle. e.ISE Logik:MVEC 710;www.iselogik.com f.Koster American Corporation;Koster VAP 1 2000: www.kosterusa.com. g.LATICRETE International,Inc;LATICRETE VAPOR BAN E: www.laticrete.com/#sle. h.MAPEI Americas:Planiseal VS or VS Fast;www.mapei.com/US-EN i.Maxxon Corporation:MVP;www.maxxoncorporation.com j.Tnemec Company,Inc;Series 208 Epoxoprime MVT: www.tnemec.com/#sle. k.UZIN UTZ NORTH AMERICA,INC;UZIN PE 460 with UZIN PE 280: https://us.uzin.com/#sle. l.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION A.Perform following operations in the order indicated: 1.Existing concrete slabs (on-grade and elevated)with existing floor coverings: a.Visual observation of existing floor covering,for adhesion,water damage,alkaline deposits, and other defects. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 05 61 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION Page 4 of 6 b.Removal of existing floor covering. 2.Existing concrete slabs with coatings or penetrating sealers/hardeners/dustproofers: a.Do not attempt to remove coating or penetrating material. b.Do not abrade surface. 3.Preliminary cleaning. 4.Moisture vapor emission tests;3 tests in the first 1000 square feet and one test in each additional 1000 square feet,unless otherwise indicated or required by flooring manufacturer. 5.Internal relative humidity tests;in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests,unless otherwise indicated. 6.Alkalinity (pH)tests;in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests,unless otherwise indicated. 7.Specified remediation,if required. 8.Patching,smoothing,and leveling,as required. 9.Other preparation specified. 10.Adhesive bond and compatibility test. 11.Protection. B.Remediations: 1.Active Water Leaks or Continuing Moisture Migration to Surface of Slab: Correct this condition before doing any other remediation;re-test after correction. 2.Excessive Moisture Emission or Relative Humidity: If an adhesive that is resistant to the level of moisture present is available and acceptable to flooring manufacturer,use that adhesive for installation of the flooring;if not,apply remedial floor coating or remedial sheet membrane over entire suspect floor area. 3.Excessive Alkalinity (pH): If remedial floor coating is necessary to address excessive moisture,no additional remediation is required;if not,if an adhesive that is resistant to the level present is available and acceptable to the flooring manufacturer,use that adhesive for installation of the flooring;otherwise,apply a skim coat of specified patching compound over entire suspect floor area. 3.02 REMOVAL OF EXISTING FLOOR COVERINGS A.Comply with local,State,and federal regulations and recommendations of RFCI (RWP),as applicable to floor covering being removed. B.Dispose of removed materials in accordance with local,State,and federal regulations and as specified. 3.03 PRELIMINARY CLEANING A.Clean floors of dust,solvents,paint,wax,oil,grease,asphalt,residual adhesive,adhesive removers, film-forming curing compounds,sealing compounds,alkaline salts,excessive laitance,mold,mildew, and other materials that might prevent adhesive bond. B.Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning. 3.04 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION TESTING A.Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this specification,comply with the manufacturer's requirements. B.Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method,comply with the requirements of this section. C.Test in accordance with ASTM F1869 and as follows. D.Plastic sheet test and mat bond test may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test method,as those methods do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently. E.In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits,perform remediation as indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits,perform remediation if test values exceed 3 pounds per 1000 square feet per 24 hours. F.Report: Report the information required by the test method. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 05 61 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION Page 5 of 6 3.05 INTERNAL RELATIVE HUMIDITY TESTING A.Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this specification,comply with the manufacturer's requirements. B.Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method,comply with the requirements of this section. C.Test in accordance with ASTM F2170 Procedure A and as follows. D.Testing with electrical impedance or resistance apparatus may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test method,as the values determined are not comparable to the ASTM test values and do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently. E.In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits,perform remediation as indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits,perform remediation if any test value exceeds 75 percent relative humidity. F.Report: Report the information required by the test method. 3.06 ALKALINITY TESTING A.Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method or this specification,comply with the manufacturer's requirements. B.The following procedure is the equivalent of that described in ASTM F710,repeated here for the Contractor's convenience. 1.Use a wide range alkalinity (pH)test paper,its associated chart,and distilled or deionized water. 2.Place several drops of water on a clean surface of concrete,forming a puddle approximately 1 inch in diameter. Allow the puddle to set for approximately 60 seconds,then dip the alkalinity (pH)test paper into the water,remove it,and compare immediately to chart to determine alkalinity (pH)reading. 3.Use of a digital pH meter with probe is acceptable;follow meter manufacturer's instructions. C.In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits,perform remediation as indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits,perform remediation if alkalinity (pH)test value is over 10. 3.07 PREPARATION A.See individual floor covering section(s)for additional requirements. B.Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. C.Fill and smooth surface cracks,grooves,depressions,control joints and other non-moving joints,and other irregularities with patching compound. D.Do not fill expansion joints,isolation joints,or other moving joints. 3.08 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING A.Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer. 3.09 APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATING A.Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer. 3.10 PROTECTION A.Cover prepared floors with building paper or other durable covering. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 05 61 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION Page 6 of 6 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 1 of 8 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B.Metal stud wall framing. C.Metal channel ceiling framing. D.Acoustic insulation (INSUL-1). E.Tile backer board. F.Gypsum wallboard (GBD-1). G.Joint treatment and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 50 00 -Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls:Temporary partition requirements B.Section 01 61 16 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content Restrictions. C.Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements. D.Section 07 92 00 -Joint Sealants: Sealing gaps in construction other than acoustically-rated walls. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.AISI S100 -North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members;2016, with Supplement (2022). B.AISI S201 -North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing -Product Data;2017. C.AISI S220 -North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Nonstructural Framing;2020. D.AISI S240 -North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing;2020. E.ASCE 7 -Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures;Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard. F.ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel;2019. G.ASTM A653/A653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process;2025a. H.ASTM A1003/A1003M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Carbon,Metallic-and Nonmetallic- Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members;2025. I.ASTM C1007 -Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial)Steel Studs and Related Accessories;2020 (Reapproved 2024). J.ASTM C475/C475M -Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board;2017 (Reapproved 2022). K.ASTM C754 -Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw- Attached Gypsum Panel Products;2020. L.ASTM C840 -Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board;2025. M.ASTM C954 -Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in.(0.84 mm)to 0.112 in.(2.84 mm)in Thickness; 2022. N.ASTM C1002 -Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs;2022. O.ASTM C1047 -Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2019. P.ASTM C1178/C1178M -Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel;2024. Q.ASTM C1396/C1396M -Standard Specification for Gypsum Board;2024. R.ASTM D3273 -Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber;2021. S.ASTM E90 -Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements;2023. T.ASTM E413 -Classification for Rating Sound Insulation;2022. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 2 of 8 U.GA-216 -Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products;2024. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Coordination: Coordinate the installation of gypsum board assemblies with size,location,and installation of service utilities. B.Sequencing: Install service utilities in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: 1.Provide data on metal framing,gypsum board,accessories,and joint finishing system. 2.Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors,showing compliance with requirements. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with acoustic seals. D.Test Reports: For stud framing products that do not comply with AISI S220 or ASTM C754,provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Designer Qualifications: Perform design under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. 1.Application:For stud framing products that do not comply with AISI S220 or ASTM C754. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. C.Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.See Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal for packaging waste requirements. B.Store gypsum products and accessories indoors and keep above freezing.Elevate boards above floor,on nonwicking supports,in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C.Store metal products to prevent corrosion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A.Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. 1.See PART 3 for finishing requirements. B.Interior PartitionsIndicated as Sound-Rated: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1.Acoustic Attenuation: STC as indicated in wall typescalculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90. C.Seismic Performance: Ceiling systems designed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions in accordance with ASCE 7 for Seismic Design Category D,E,or F and complying with the following: 1.Local authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A.Material and Product Requirements Criteria: AISI S201. B.Steel Sheet: ASTM A1003/A1003M,subject to the ductility limitations indicated in AISI S220 or equivalent. 1.Structural Grade: As required to meet design criteria. 2.Corrosion Protection Coating Designation: G40,or equivalent in accordance with AISI S220. C.Manufacturers -Metal Framing,Connectors,and Accessories: 1.CEMCO: www.cemcosteel.com/#sle. 2.Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com. 3.Marino: www.marinoware.com. 4.Phillips Manufacturing Co: www.phillipsmfg.com/#sle. 5.SCAFCO Corporation: www.scafco.com/#sle. 6.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 3 of 8 D.Non-structural Framing System Components: ASTM C645;galvanized sheet steel,of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated,with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf;L/360 for tiled walls. 1.Contractor to confirm any gages or spacings indicated in wall types and modify as required to meet standards. 2.Studs: C-shaped with knurled or embossed faces. 3.Paired Studs for Sound-Rated Assemblies: Engineered single-piece assemblies comprised of paired studs coupled by sound isolators,designed to replace conventional side-by-side,parallel, double-wall partition framing. a.Widths: As indicated on drawings. 4.Runners: U shaped,sized to match studs. 5.Ceiling Channels: C-shaped. 6.Furring Members: Hat-shaped sections,minimum depth of 7/8 inch. 7.Resilient Furring Channels: Single or double legconfiguration;1/2 inchchannel depth. a.Products: 1)ClarkDietrich;RC Deluxe Resilient Channel: www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle. 2)MarinoWARE;RC Max: www.marinoware.com/#sle. 3)Phillips Manufacturing Co;RC-2 Resilient Sound Channel: www.phillipsmfg.com/#sle. 4)Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. E.Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate deflection and prevent rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition. 1.Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity required by applicable code,when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100. 2.Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet,SS Grade 50/340,with G60/Z180 hot-dipped galvanized coating. 3.Provide top track preassembled with connection devices spaced to fit stud spacing indicated on drawings;minimum track length of 12 feet. F.Non-structural Framing Accessories: 1.Ceiling Hangers:Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required. 2.Partial Height Wall Framing Support (GBDA-1): Provides stud reinforcement and anchored connection to floor. a.Materials: ASTM A36/A36M formed sheet steel support member with factory-welded ASTM A1003/A1003M steel plate base. b.Products: 1)ClarkDietrich;Pony Wall (PW): www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle. 2)Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 3.Framing Connectors: ASTM A653/A653M G90 galvanized steel clips;secures cold rolled channel to wall studs for lateral bracing. a.Products: 1)ClarkDietrich;FastBridge Clip (FB33): www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle. 2)Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 4.Flexible Wood Backing: Fire-retardant-treated wood with sheet steel connectors. a.Option to blocking specified in 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry. b.Products: 1)ClarkDietrich;Danback: www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle. 2)Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. G.Grid Suspension Systems: Steel grid system of main tees and support bars connected to structure using hanging wire. 1.Products: a.CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/ceilings-and-walls/#sle. b.USG Corporation;Drywall Suspension System: www.usg.com/#sle. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 4 of 8 c.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.03 BOARD MATERIALS A.Manufacturers -Gypsum-Based Board: 1.American Gypsum Company: www.americangypsum.com. 2.CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 3.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com. 4.National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. 5.USG Corporation: www.usg.com. 6.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B.Gypsum Wallboard (GBD-1,GYP-2): Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place;ends square cut. 1.Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings,unless otherwise indicated. 2.Mold Resistance: Score of 10,when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. a.Mold-resistant board is required whenever board is being installed before the building is enclosed and conditioned. 3.Greenguard Certified. 4.Thickness: a.Vertical Surfaces: 1/2 (GYP-2)and 5/8 inch(GYP-1),as indicated in Wall Types. b.Ceilings: 5/8 inch. c.Multi-Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings. 5.Paper-Faced Products: a.American Gypsum Company;LightRoc Gypsum Wallboard: www.americangypsum.com/#sle. b.American Gypsum Company;FireBloc Type X Gypsum Wallboard: www.americangypsum.com/#sle. c.American Gypsum Company;FireBloc Type C Gypsum Wallboard: www.americangypsum.com/#sle. d.CertainTeed Corporation;Type C Drywall: www.certainteed.com/#sle. e.CertainTeed Corporation;Type X Drywall: www.certainteed.com/#sle. f.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum;ToughRock: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle. g.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum;ToughRock Fireguard X: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle. h.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum;ToughRock Fireguard C: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle. i.Gold Bond Building Products,LLC provided by National Gypsum Company;Gold Bond Fire- Shield Gypsum Board: www.goldbondbuilding.com/#sle. j.Gold Bond Building Products,LLC provided by National Gypsum Company;Gold Bond Fire- Shield C 5/8"Gypsum Board: www.goldbondbuilding.com/#sle. k.USG Corporation;Sheetrock Brand EcoSmart Panels Firecode X 5/8 in.(15.9 mm): www.usg.com/#sle. l.USG Corporation;Sheetrock Brand Firecode X Panels 5/8 in.(15.9 mm): www.usg.com/#sle. m.USG Corporation;Sheetrock Brand UltraLight Panels Firecode ULIX 5/8 in.(15.9 mm): www.usg.com/#sle. n.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 6.Mold-Resistant,Paper-Faced Products: a.American Gypsum Company;M-Bloc: www.americangypsum.com/#sle. b.American Gypsum Company;M-Bloc Type X: www.americangypsum.com/#sle. c.American Gypsum Company;M-Bloc Type C: www.americangypsum.com/#sle. d.CertainTeed Corporation;M2Tech 1/2"Moisture &Mold Resistant Drywall: www.certainteed.com/#sle. e.CertainTeed Corporation;M2Tech 5/8"Type X Moisture &Mold Resistant Drywall: www.certainteed.com/#sle. f.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum;ToughRock Mold-Guard: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle. g.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum;ToughRock Fireguard X Mold-Guard: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 5 of 8 h.Gold Bond Building Products,LLC provided by National Gypsum Company;Gold Bond XP Gypsum Board: www.goldbondbuilding.com/#sle. i.Gold Bond Building Products,LLC provided by National Gypsum Company;Gold Bond XP Fire- Shield Gypsum Board: www.goldbondbuilding.com/#sle. j.USG Corporation;Sheetrock Brand EcoSmart Panels Mold Tough Firecode X 5/8 in.(15.9 mm): www.usg.com/#sle. k.USG Corporation;Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Firecode SCX Panels 5/8 in.(15.9 mm): www.usg.com/#sle. l.USG Corporation;Sheetrock Brand UltraLight Panels Mold Tough 1/2 in.(12.7 mm): www.usg.com/#sle. m.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. C.Tile Backer Board: 1.Application: Install at all walls scheduled for wall tile. 2.Mold Resistance: Score of 10,when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3.Glass Mat Faced Board: Coated glass mat water-resistant gypsum backing panel as defined in ASTM C1178/C1178M. a.Regular Type: Thickness 5/8 inch. b.Products: 1)CertainTeed Corporation;5/8"GlasRoc Tile Backer Type X: www.certainteed.com/#sle. 2)Georgia-Pacific Gypsum;DensShield Tile Backer: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle. 3)Gold Bond Building Products,LLC provided by National Gypsum Company;Gold Bond eXP Fire-Shield Tile Backer: www.goldbondbuilding.com/#sle. 4)USG Corporation;Durock Brand Glass-Mat Tile Backerboard 5/8 in.(15.9 mm): www.usg.com/#sle. 5)Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 4.Edges: Tapered. D.Board For Non-Wet (Damp)Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M;sizes to minimum joints in place;ends square cut. 1.Application:untiled toilets and janitorial areas,including their ceilings,and areas around sinks and equipment with a water supply. 2.Mold Resistance: Score of 10,when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3.Type:Regular,in locations indicated. 4.Regular Board Thickness: 5/8 inch. 5.Edges:Tapered. 6.Paper Facing:Green 7.Products: a.American Gypsum Company;M-Bloc: www.americangypsum.com/#sle. b.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum;ToughRock Mold-Guard Gypsum Board: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle. c.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum;DensArmor Plus: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle. d.Gold Bond Building Products,LLC provided by National Gypsum Company;Gold Bond XP Fire- Shield Gypsum Board: www.goldbondbuilding.com/#sle. e.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.04 INSULATION MATERIALS A.Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation (INSUL-1): Flexible preformed batt or blanket,complying with ASTM C665; friction fit;unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero)when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.Application: At interior walls for acoustic insulation. 2.Density:2.5 pcf. 3.Thickness: As required to meet STC rating indicated. 4.Facing: Unfaced. 5.Products: a.Thermafiber:SAFB. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 6 of 8 b.Roxul:AFB. c.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.05 GYPSUM BOARD ACCESSORIES A.Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant;do not use solvent-based non-curing butyl sealant. 1.See Section 079200 for additional requirements B.Beads,Joint Accessories,and Other Trim: ASTM C1047,rigid plastic,galvanized steel,or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise. 1.Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. 2.Special Shapes: In addition to conventional corner bead and control joints,provide U-beadat exposed panel edges. 3.Products: a.Same manufacturer as framing materials. b.Brand X Metals;www.brandxmetals.com c.Phillips Manufacturing Co: www.phillipsmfg.com/#sle. d.Trim-tex,Inc: www.trim-tex.com/#sle. e.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. C.Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1.Fiberglass Tape:2 inchwide,coated glass fiber tape for joints and cornersat glass-faced gypsum or cement board. 2.Paper Tape:2 inchwide,creased paper tape for joints and cornersat paper-faced gypsum. 3.Joint Compound: Drying type,vinyl-based,ready-mixed. 4.Joint Compound: Setting type,field-mixed. D.Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033 inches in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002;self-piercing tapping screws,corrosion-resistant. E.Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954;steel drill screws,corrosion-resistant. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. B.Verify that rough-in utilities are in proper location. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A.Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C1007AISI S220 and manufacturer's instructions. B.Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as permitted by standard unless noted more restrictively on drawings. 1.Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200. 2.Laterally brace entire suspension system. C.Studs: Space studs as permitted by standard. 1.Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. 2.Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure,maintain clearance between top of studs and structure,and connect studs to track using specified mechanical devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions;verify free movement of top of stud connections;do not leave studs unattached to track. D.Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels,using not less than double studs at jambs. E.Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete and masonrywalls scheduled to receive gypsum board,not more than 4 inchesfrom floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 incheson center. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 7 of 8 1.Orientation: Vertical. 2.Spacing: As permitted by standard. F.Blocking: Install wood blocking or mechanically fastened steel sheet blockingfor support of: 1.Framed openings. 2.Countertop and shelf supports 3.Wall mounted cabinets. 4.Plumbing fixtures. 5.Toilet partitions. 6.Toilet accessories. 7.Wall-mounted door hardware. 8.Handrails 9.Corner guards 10.Wall hooks 11.Chalkboards,tack boards,and marker boards. 12.Owner provided wall mounted equipment,whether owner-installed or contractor-installed. 13.Other locations as indiated in drawings. 3.03 ACOUSTIC WALL INSTALLATION A.Minimize penetrations,such as,but not limited to,ductwork,piping,plenum grilles,etc.,of acoutically rated walls. B.Walls to be built to deck. The wall must allow space to seal the wall to the deck with non-hardening sealant (1/4"spacing is recommended between wall material and deck for sealant). C.Walls must seal all penetrations through wall with non-hardening sealant. If the perimeter opening is greater than ½”,the penetration must be filled with acoustic batt insulation prior to being sealed with non-hardening sealant D.Backboxes,receptacles,and other similar equipment must not share stud cavity space with adjacent room ,and shall be sealed with acoustic backer putty E.The outer most layers of gypsum board must be sealed with a bead of non-hardening sealant to the soffits,ceiling structure,and to the floor structure. F.If multiple layers of gypsum board are used,the installation must be staggered so that the seams do not line up between layers. G.Installation must follow manufacturer’s guidelines where acoustic products such as,but not limited to, resilient channels,dampening compound,mass loaded vinyl,resilient clips,resilient hangers,insulation, sealant,etc.are specified. H.Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces,around cut openings,behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions,and tight to items passing through partitions. 1.Do not compress insulation. I.Acoustic Sealant:Install per Section 07 92 19 -Acoutsical Joint Sealants. 3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION A.Comply with ASTM C840,GA-216,and manufacturer's instructions.Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B.Single-Layer Nonrated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction,with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. C.Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of gypsum board. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A.Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1.Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. B.Corner Beads: Install at external corners,using longest practical lengths. C.Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. D.Decorative Trim: Install at locations shown on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 8 of 8 3.06 JOINT TREATMENT A.Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Tile Backer Board: Use fiberglass joint tape,embed andfinish with setting type joint compound. B.Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape,embed with drying type joint compound and finish with drying type joint compound. C.Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840,as follows: 1.Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish,and other areas specifically indicated. a.Spray-applied high build drywall sufacer is not allowed. 2.Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive other paint finishes,unless otherwise indicated. 3.Level 2: In utility areas,behind cabinetry,and on backing board to receive tile finish. 4.Level 1: Wallareas above finished ceilings,whether or not accessible in the completed construction. 5.Level 0: Temporary partitions. D.Tape,fill,and sand exposed joints,edges,and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1.Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 2.Taping,filling,and sanding are not required at base layer of double-layer applications. E.Where Level 5 finish is indicated,slightly thin all-purpose joint compound,roll on wall with 24-inc roller and wipe down with drywall knife. F.Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by manufacturer. 3.07 TOLERANCES A.Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 3.08 PROTECTION A.Protect installed gypsum board assemblies from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 30 00 TILING Page 1 of 6 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Tile for floor applications (TL-4). B.Tile for wall applications (TL-5). C.Accessories,including: 1.Non-ceramic trim (TLA-1,TLA-2). 2.Setting and grouting products. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 07 92 00 -Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between tile work and adjacent construction and fixtures. B.Section 09 05 61 -Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Concrete slab moisture and alkalinity testing and remediation procedures. C.Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Tile backer board. D.Section 10 28 00 -Toilet,Bath,and Laundry Accessories;coordination 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ANSI A118.4 -American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar;2023. B.ANSI A118.7 -American National Standard Specifications for High Performance Cement Grouts for Tile Installation;2019. C.ANSI A118.12 -American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation;2014 (Reaffirmed 2024). D.ANSI A137.1 -American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile;2013.1. E.ANSI A326.3 -American National Standard Test Method for Measuring Dynamic Coefficient of Friction of Hard Surface Flooring Materials;2021. F.ASTM C373 -Standard Test Methods for Determination of Water Absorption and Associated Properties by Vacuum Method for Pressed Ceramic Tiles and Glass Tiles and Boil Method for Extruded Ceramic Tiles and Non-tile Fired Ceramic Whiteware Products;2018 (Reapproved 2023). G.TCNA (HB)-Handbook for Ceramic,Glass,and Stone Tile Installation;2026. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data:Provide manufacturers'data sheets on tile,mortar,grout,and accessories.Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout,patterns,color arrangement,perimeter conditions,junctions with dissimilar materials,control and expansion joints,and setting details. D.Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels,minimum 18 by 18 inches in size illustrating pattern,color variations,and grout joint size variations. E.Installer's qualification statement. 1.Submit documentation of National Tile Contractors Association (NTCA)or Tile Contractors' Association of America (TCAA)accreditation;www.tile-assn.com/#sle F.Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods,cleaning materials,and stain removal methods. G.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1.See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements,for additional provisions. 2.Extra Tile: 5 percent of each size,color,and surface finish combination,but not less than one carton of each type. 3.Turn over to owner,for storage on-site or off-site. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section,with minimum five years of documented experience. B.Installer Qualifications: Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 30 00 TILING Page 2 of 6 1.Company specializing in performing tile installation,with minimum of five years of documented experience. 2.Installer Certification: a.Ceramic Tile Education Foundation (CTEF): Certified Tile Installer (CTI). 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.See Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal for packaging waste requirements. B.Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment. B.Maintain ambient and substrate temperature above 50 degrees F and below 100 degrees F during installation and curing of setting materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Floor Tile: Provide tile for flooring applications with minimum wet Dynamic Coefficient of Friction (DCOF)of 0.42 when tested in accordance with ANSI A326.3. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A.Provide Basis of Design manufacturer listed,or an approved standard or custom product from another manufacturer,(approved prior to bid),with equivalent performance,material properties,features, general configuration,appearance,and warranty. 1.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B.Tile: 1.BASIS OF DESIGN:Atlas Concord 2.BASIS OF DESIGN:Crossville Ceramics 3.Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.03 TILE A.Porcelain Tile: ANSI A137.1 standard grade. 1.Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373. 2.Size(s): As indicated in Material ID. 3.Thickness(es):As indicated in Material ID. 4.Joint Width:As indicated in Material ID. 5.Collection /Style /Color /Finish:As indicated in Material ID. 6.Install:As indicated in Drawings 2.04 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A.Non-CeramicTrim:Satin natural anodized extruded aluminum,style and dimensions as detailed and noted below,for setting using tile mortar or adhesive. 1.Applications: a.Open edges of wall and floor tile. b.Floor-to-wall joints. 2.Products: a.Genesis APS International: www.genesis-gs.com/#sle. b.LATICRETE International,Inc: www.laticrete.com/#sle. c.Profilitec;www.profilitec.com d.BASIS OF DESIGN:Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com/#sle. e.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 3.Products: a.(TLA-1)Floor-to-Wall Cove:trapezoid-perforated anchoring legs,which are secured in the mortar bond coat,and a 23/32"(18.5 mm)radius cove section that forms the visible surface; Schluter-DILEX-AHK. b.(TLA-2)Edge-Protection:L-shaped profile with 1/8 inch wide visible surface,integrated trapezoid-perforated anchoring leg,and integrated grout joint spacer;Schluter-JOLLY. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 30 00 TILING Page 3 of 6 2.05 SETTING MATERIALS A.Provide setting and grout materials from same manufacturer. B.Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4. 1.Applications: Use this type of bond coat where indicated,and where no other type of bond coat is indicated. 2.Products: a.ARDEX Engineered Cements;ARDEX X 5: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. b.Custom Building Products;ProLite Premium Rapid Setting Large Format Tile Mortar,with Multi-Surface Bonding Primer: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle. c.BASIS OF DESIGN:H.B.Fuller Construction Products,Inc;TEC TotalFlex 110 Universal Mortar: www.tecspecialty.com/#sle. d.LATICRETE International,Inc;TRI-LITE: www.laticrete.com/#sle. e.Mapei Ultracontact (for floors),Ultralite (for walls) f.Merkrete,by Parex USA,Inc;Merkrete 735 Premium Flex: www.merkrete.com/#sle. g.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.06 GROUTS A.Provide setting and grout materials from same manufacturer. B.High Performance Polymer Modified Grout:ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout. 1.Applications: Use where indicated on drawings and where no other type of grout is indicated. 2.Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger;use unsanded grout for joints less than 1/8 inch wide. 3.Color(s):As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 4.Products: a.ARDEX Engineered Cements;ARDEX FL: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. b.Custom Building Products;Prism Color Consistent Grout: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle. c.BASIS OF DESIGN:TEC Specialty Products LLC;TEC Power Grout:www.tecspecialty.com/#sle. d.LATICRETE International,Inc;LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Grout: www.laticrete.com/#sle. e.Mapei Flexcolor CQ f.Merkrete,by Parex USA,Inc;Merkrete Pro Grout: www.merkrete.com/#sle. g.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A.Grout Release: Temporary,water-soluble pre-grout coating. 1.Products: a.Custom Building Products;Aqua Mix Grout Release: www.custombuildingproducts.com/#sle. b.LATICRETE International,Inc;STONETECH Grout Release: www.laticrete.com/#sle. c.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.08 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.Concrete Floor Slab Crack Isolation Membrane: Material complying with ANSI A118.12;not intended as waterproofing. 1.Crack Resistance: No failure at 1/8 inch gap,minimum. 2.Fluid or Trowel Applied Type: a.Material: Synthetic rubber or Acrylic. b.Thickness: 20 mils,maximum. c.Products: 1)H.B.Fuller Construction Products,Inc;TEC HydraFlex Waterproofing Crack Isolation Membrane: www.tecspecialty.com/#sle. 2)TEC Specialty Products LLC;TEC Crack Defense Pro Crack Isolation Membrane: www.tecspecialty.com/#sle. 3)LATICRETE International,Inc;LATICRETE FRACTURE BAN SC: www.laticrete.com/#sle. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 30 00 TILING Page 4 of 6 4)Mapei Corporation;Mapelastic CI: www.mapei.com/#sle. 5)Merkrete,by Parex USA,Inc;Merkrete Fracture Guard: www.merkrete.com/#sle. 6)Sika Corp;SikaTile 200 Fracture Guard Rapid: www.sika.com/#sle. 7)Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 3.Peel-and-Stick Sheet Type: a.Material: Rubberized membrane laminated to reinforcing fabric. b.Thickness: 20 mils,maximum. c.Products: 1)Protecto Wrap;AFM Anti-Fracture Membrane: www.protectowrap.com/#sle. 2)Sika Corp;SikaTile 225 PNS: www.sika.com/#sle. 3)Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify subfloor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B.Verify wall surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. C.Verify that subfloor surfaces are dust free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to subfloor surfaces. D.Cementitious Subfloor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are ready for tiling installation by testing for moisture and alkalinity (pH). 1.Test in accordance with Section 09 05 61. 2.Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tiling material manufacturer and setting material manufacturer. 3.Follow moisture and alkalinity remediation procedures in Section 09 05 61. E.Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. B.Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. C.Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A.Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1a through ANSI A108.13,manufacturer's instructions,and TCNA (HB)recommendations. B.Lay tile to pattern indicated on drawings.Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C.Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile,leaving sealant joint space. Form cornersand basesneatly. Align floor and wall joints. D.Place tile joints uniform in width,subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids,cracks,excess mortar or excess grout,or too little grout. E.Form internal angles square and external angles with trim. F.Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G.Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. H.Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar,grout,and adhesive. I.Prior to grouting,allow installation to completely cure;minimum of 48 hours. J.Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. K.At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints,use tile sealant instead of grout,with either bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding. 3.04 INSTALLATION -FLOORS -THIN-SET METHODS A.Over interior concrete substrates,install in accordance with TCNA (HB)Method F113,dry-set or latex- Portland cement bond coat,on ground,with standard grout,unless otherwise indicated on drawings. 1.Use uncoupling membrane under tile unless other underlayment is indicated on drawings. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 30 00 TILING Page 5 of 6 2.Where waterproofing membrane is indicated,install in accordance with TCNA (HB)Method F122, with latex-Portland cement grout. 3.Where crack isolation membrane is indicated on drawings,install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F125-Partial,with latex-Portland cement grout. B.Install tile-to-tile floor movement joints in accordance with TCNA (HB)Method EJ171F. 3.05 INSTALLATION -WALL TILE A.Over coated glass mat backer board on studs,install in accordance with TCNA (HB)Method W245. 3.06 CLEANING A.Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.07 PROTECTION A.Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 30 00 TILING Page 6 of 6 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Page 1 of 4 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Suspended metal grid ceiling system,for acoustical units. B.Acoustical units (ACP-1B): 1.Verify Owner's attic stock. 2.Provide new products where Owner's attic stock is not of sufficient quantity. C.Supplementary insulation above ceiling. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 61 16 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content Restrictions. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASCE 7 -Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures;Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard. B.ASTM A653/A653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process;2025a. C.ASTM C635/C635M -Standard Specification for Manufacture,Performance,and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings;2022. D.ASTM E84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2026a. E.ASTM E1264 -Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products;2023. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,sufficient heat is provided,dust generating activities have terminated,and overhead work is completed,tested,and approved. B.Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning,junctions with other ceiling finishes,and mechanical and electrical items installed in the ceiling. C.Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units. D.Samples: Submit two samples 4 by 4 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B.Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications:Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum fiveyearsexperience. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F,and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to,during,and after acoustical unit installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Provide products to match existing to extent possible. B.Acoustic Tiles/Panels: 1.Armstrong World Industries,Inc:www.armstrong.com. 2.CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 3.Hunter Douglas Contract[<>]: www.hunterdouglascontract.com. 4.Rockfon:www.rockfon.com/#sle. 5.USG: www.usg.com. 6.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. C.Suspension Systems: 1.Same as for acoustical units. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Page 2 of 4 2.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A in accordance with ASTM E84. B.Seismic Performance: Ceiling systems designed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7 for Seismic Design Category D,E,or F and complying with the following: 1.Local authorities having jurisdiction. 2.03 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A.Acoustical Units -General: ASTM E1264,Class A. 1.VOC Content: As specified in Section 01 61 16. B.Acoustical Panels: Mineral fiber with membrane-faced overlay,with the following characteristics: 1.Size:24 by 24 inches 2.Match existing to extent possible,for the following criteria: a.Form and Pattern,according to ASTM E1264 b.Color c.Thickness d.Edge profile e.Light Reflectance f.Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) g.Articulation Class (AC)and/or Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC) 2.04 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A.Metal Suspension Systems -General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M;die cut and interlocking components,with perimeter moldings,hold-down clips,stabilizer bars,clips,and splices as required. 1.Materials: a.Steel Grid: ASTM A653/A653M,G30 coating,unless otherwise indicated. B.Exposed Suspension System:Hot-dip galvanized steel grid with steel cap. 1.Applications:Typical (seismic). 2.Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty,when tested in accordance with ASTM C635/C635M. 3.Profile:Tee;face width to match existing. 4.Finish: Baked enamel. 5.Color:To match exisitng. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A.Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel;size and type to suit application and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B.Hanger Wire: 12 gauge,0.08 inch galvanized steel wire. C.Hold-Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips to suit application. D.Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips for seismic conditions and to suit application. E.Perimeter Moldings: Same metal and finish as grid. 1.Size:As required for installation conditionsand specified Seismic Design Category. 2.Angle Molding: L-shaped,for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. F.Acoustical Insulation:Specified in Section 07 21 00. 1.Thickness:As indicated in Drawings. G.Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify existing conditions before starting work. B.Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. B.Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. C.Provide hanger clips during steel deck erection.Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Page 3 of 4 3.03 INSTALLATION -SUSPENSION SYSTEM A.Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M,ASTM E580/E580M,and manufacturer's instructions,as supplemented in this section. B.Rigidly secure system,including integral mechanical and electrical components,for maximum deflection of 1:360. C.Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. D.Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1.Use longest practical lengths. 2.Overlap and rivet corners. E.Seismic Suspension System,Seismic Design Categories D,E,F: Hang suspension system with grid ends attached to the perimeter molding on two adjacent walls;on opposite walls,maintain a 3/4 inch clearance between grid ends and wall. F.Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers,reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. G.Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. H.Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner,or support components independently. I.Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. J.Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus 1 inch movement. Maintain visual closure. 3.04 INSTALLATION -ACOUSTICAL UNITS A.Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Fit acoustical units in place,free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C.Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D.Install acoustical units level,in uniform plane,and free from twist,warp,and dents. E.Cutting Acoustical Units: 1.Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. 2.Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. 3.Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges. F.Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 ft of an exterior door. 3.05 TOLERANCES A.Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B.Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. 3.06 CLEANING A.See Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements for additional requirements. B.Clean surfaces. C.Replace damaged or abraded components. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Page 4 of 4 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING &BASE Page 1 of 4 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING &BASE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Resilient tile flooring (RFL-1,RFL-2). B.Resilient base (RB-3). C.Installation accessories. 1.Resilient transitions (FLA-1) 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 61 16 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content Restrictions. B.Section 03 30 01 -Cast-in-Place Concrete Floor Patching: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors to receive adhesive-applied resilient flooring. C.Section 09 05 61 -Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Concrete slab moisture and alkalinity testing and remediation procedures. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM F1861 -Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base;2021 (Reapproved 2025). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide data on specified products,describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes,patterns and colors available;and installation instructions. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan for sheet flooring installation. D.Verification Samples: Submit twosamples,full width by 4 inchin size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient stair or transition product specified. E.Concrete Subfloor Test Report: Submit a copy of the moisture and alkalinity (pH)test reports. F.Certification: Prior to installation of flooring,submit written certification by flooring manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of subfloor is acceptable. G.Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures,recommended maintenance materials,and suggested schedule for cleaning,stripping,and re-waxing. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified flooring with minimum threeyearsdocumentedexperience. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing specified flooring with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Upon receipt,immediately remove any shrink-wrap and check materials for damage and the correct style,color,quantity and run numbers. B.Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized,weather-tight space. C.Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. D.Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Store materials for not less than 1 week prior to installation in area of installation at temperature range recommended by manufacturer. B.After installation and until Substantial Completion,maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 55 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F. C.Do not install floor coverings and adhesives when the moisture condition of concrete slab exceeds manufacturer's recommendations. D.Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter,maintain conditions above 65 degrees F. E.Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or,if permanent lighting is not in place,simulate permanent lighting conditions during polished concrete operations. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING &BASE Page 2 of 4 1.08 WARRANTY A.Wear:ten years PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A.Provide Basis of Design manufacturer listed,or another standard or custom product,approved prior to bid,with equivalent performance,material properties,features,general configuration,appearance,and warranty. 2.02 TILE FLOORING A.Rubber and Cork Tile:Manufactured with a composition of 65%cork and Nitrile rubber,with fade resistant pigments and natural filler. 1.Manufacturers: a.BASIS OF DESIGN:Zandur:Sustain;www.zandur.com. b.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.Size:As indicated in Material ID. 3.Thickness:As indicated in Material ID. 4.Tile Edge/Installation:Straight,adhesive installation. 5.Color:As indicated in Material ID. 2.03 RESILIENT BASE A.Resilient Base:ASTM F1861,Type TP,rubber,thermoplastic;top set style as indicated below. 1.Manufacturers: a.Flexco Corporation:www.flexcofloors.com/#sle. b.Mannington Commercial:www.manningtoncommercial.com#sle. c.Roppe Corporation;Pinnacle Rubber Base:www.roppe.com/#sle. d.BASIS OF DESIGN:Tarkett Flooring;Baseworks:www.tarkett.com/#sle. e.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.Height:4 inch. 3.Thickness:0.125 inch. 4.Finish: Satin. 5.Length:Rolls;4 foot section prohibited. 6.Style:As indicated in Material ID 7.Color(s):As indicated in Material ID 2.04 ACCESSORIES A.Subfloor Filler: White premix latex;type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. B.Primers,Adhesives,and Seam Sealer: Waterproof;types recommended by flooring manufacturer. 1.VOC Content Limits: As specified in Section 01 61 16. C.Moldings,Transition and Edge Strips: Resilient. 1.Profile:As indicated in Material ID List 2.Color:As indicated in Material ID List 3.Manufacturers: a.Mannington Commercial: www.manningtoncommercial.com#sle. b.BASIS OF DESIGN:Johnsonite,a Tarkett Company:www.johnsonite.com/#sle. c.Roppe Corporation;www.roppe.com d.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer,free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring,clean,dry,and free of curing compounds,surface hardeners,and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B.Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are dust-free,and are ready to receive resilient base. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING &BASE Page 3 of 4 C.Cementitious Subfloor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture and alkalinity (pH). 1.Test in accordance with Section 09 05 61. 2.Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. 3.Follow moisture and alkalinity remediation procedures in Section 09 05 61. D.Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. B.Remove subfloor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots,cracks,joints,holes,and other defects with subfloor filler to achieve smooth,flat,hard surface. C.Prohibit traffic until filler is fully cured. D.Clean substrate: Perform light abrasive blasting of floor surfaces;vacuum residue. E.Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-through"or interference with adhesion by substances that cannot be removed. 3.03 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A.Starting installation constitutes acceptance of subfloor and wall conditions. B.Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C.Adhesive-Applied Installation: 1.Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. 2.Fit joints and butt seams tightly. 3.Set flooring in place,press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. D.Where type of floor finish,pattern,or color are different on opposite sides of door,terminate flooring under centerline of door. E.Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges,where flooring terminates,and where indicated. 1.Metal Strips: Attach to substrate before installation of flooring using stainless steel screws. 2.Resilient Strips: Attach to substrate using adhesive. F.Scribe flooring to walls,columns,cabinets,floor outlets,and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3.04 INSTALLATION -TILE FLOORING A.Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed,unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions. B.Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel or perpendicular,as indicated in Drawings,to building lines to produce symmetrical pattern. C.Install square tile to indicatedpattern. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. 3.05 INSTALLATION -RESILIENT BASE A.Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B.Miter internal corners. C.At external corners,'V'cut back of base strip to 2/3 of its thickness and fold. D.Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. E.Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.06 CLEANING A.Remove excess adhesive from floor,base,and wall surfaces without damage. B.Cleanin accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.07 PROTECTION A.Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING &BASE Page 4 of 4 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING Page 1 of 4 SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Carpet tile,fully adhered (CPT-3A,CPT-3B,CPT-3C). B.Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 61 16 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content Restrictions. B.Section 03 30 01 -Cast-in-Place Concrete Floor Patching: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors,water vapor-reducing admixture. C.Section 09 05 61 -Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Concrete slab moisture and alkalinity testing and remediation procedures. D.Section 09 65 00 -Resilient Flooring;Resilient transitions and base. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM D2859 -Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials;2016 (Reapproved 2021). B.ASTM E648 -Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source;2014c. C.CRI 104 -Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet;2015. D.NFPA 253 -Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source;2015. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Provide data on specified products,describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes,patterns,colors available,and method of installation. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints and direction of carpet pile. D.Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. E.Concrete Subfloor Test Report: Submit a copy of the moisture and alkalinity (pH)test reports. F.Operation and Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures,recommended maintenance materials,and suggested schedule for cleaning. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with minimum five years documented experience. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet tile with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. B.Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature 24 hours prior to,during and 24 hours after installation. C.Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A.Wear:Fifteen years PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Provide Basis of Design manufacturer listed,or another standard or custom product,approved prior to bid,with equivalent performance,material properties,features,general configuration,appearance,and warranty. B.Tile Carpeting: 1.BASIS OF DESIGN:Interface,Inc: www.interface.com/#sle. 2.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING Page 2 of 4 2.02 MATERIALS A.Tile Carpeting: Tufted pattern loop,manufactured in one color dye lot. 1.Properties: a.Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm,when tested in accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253. b.Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the "pill test"). c.Dye Method:100%Solution Dyed 2.Manufacturer /Model /Colors /Patterns:As indicated in Material/Product ID List in the Drawings 3.Tile Size: As indicated in Material/Product ID List in the Drawings 4.Install Method: As indicated in Material/Product ID List in the Drawings 2.03 ACCESSORIES A.Subfloor Filler: White premix latex;type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B.Transition and Edge Strips:Resilient.See Section 096500 C.Carpet Tile Adhesive: Recommended by carpet tile manufacturer;releasable type. 1.Compatible with materials being adhered;maximum VOC content of 50 g/L;CRI (GL)certified. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that subfloor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile. B.Verify that subfloor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to subfloor surfaces. C.Cementitious Subfloor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture and alkalinity (pH). 1.Test in accordance with Section 09 05 61. 2.Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. 3.Follow moisture and alkalinity remediation procedures in Section 09 05 61. D.Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. B.Remove subfloor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots,cracks,joints,holes,and other defects with subfloor filler. C.Apply,trowel,and float filler to achieve smooth,flat,hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D.Vacuum clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Starting installation constitutes acceptance of subfloor conditions. B.Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104 (Commercial). C.Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. D.Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. E.Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings. 1.Locate seams in area of least traffic,out of areas of pivoting traffic,and parallel to main traffic. 2.Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings. 3.Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent pieces. 4.Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. 5.Provide monolithic color,pattern,and texture match within any one area. F.Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate. G.Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. H.Complete installation of edge strips,concealing exposed edges. 3.04 CLEANING A.See Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements for additional requirements. B.Remove excess adhesive without damage,from floor,base,and wall surfaces. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING Page 3 of 4 C.Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING Page 4 of 4 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 72 00 WALL COVERINGS Page 1 of 4 SECTION 09 72 00 WALL COVERINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Surface preparation. B.Wall coverings,including: 1.Tackable wall coverings (WCVG-1) 2.Vinyl wall coverings (WCVG-2) 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 06 20 00 -Finish Carpentry:Wood trim. B.Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies:Substrate for wall covering. C.Section 09 91 23 -Interior Painting: Substrate preparation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM D1308 -Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Coating Systems;2020 (Reapproved 2025). B.ASTM E84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2026a. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets for wall covering and adhesive.Indicate compliance with specified flame spread and smoke developed ratings. C.Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations with seaming layout. D.Samples: Submit twosamples of wall covering,18 by 18 inchin size illustrating color,finish,and texture. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with minimum 3 years of documented experience. B.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified,with minimum 3 years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Inspect roll materials for damage upon arrival. B.Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures. C.Do not store roll goods on end. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Maintain adhesive and wall covering manufacturer's recommended temperature ranges 24 hours before,during,and after installation. B.Provide lighting level of 80 fc measured mid-height at substrate surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL COVERINGS A.Performance Requirements: 1.Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25,maximum,and smoke developed index of 50,maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.Chemical and Stain Resistance: No visible staining or discoloration and no damage to surface texture when tested in accordance with ASTM D1308. B.Manufacturers: 1.Provide Basis of Design manufacturer listed in the Material ID List ,or a pre-approved standard or custom product from another manufacturer with equivalent performance,material properties, features,general configuration,appearance,and warranty,approved prior to bid. 2.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. C.Wall Covering: 100 percent olefin composite wall covering. 1.PVC-free. 2.Weight/Thickness:As indicated in Finish Schedule Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 72 00 WALL COVERINGS Page 2 of 4 3.Roll Width: As indicated in Finish Schedule 4.Style/Pattern/Color: As indicated in Finish Schedule. 5.Manufacturers: a.BASIS OF DESIGN:MDC Interior Solutions:www.mdcwall.com b.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. D.Tackable Wallcovering: Linoleum;factory-fabricated. 1.Material: Homogeneous wear layer of linseed oil (linoxyn),pine resin,ground cork dust,sawdust, and mineral fillers such as calcium carbonate,on a bonded burlap or canvas backing,with color and pattern through wear layer thickness. 2.Color,Pattern,and Texture: As indicated in Material ID List. 3.Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25,maximum,and smoke developed index of 450,maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4.Size: As indicated on drawings. 5.Edge Molding:none,see Section 06 20 00 for wood trim. 6.Adhesives: Provide manufacturer's recommended adhesive,primer,and sealer,produced for use on substrate shown on drawings. Provide materials which are mildew-resistant and non staining to wallcovering. 7.Products: a.BASIS OF DESIGN:Forbo:Bulletin Board;www.forbo.com b.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A.Adhesive:Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer. 1.BASIS OF DESIGN (WCVG-2):Roman Pro 774 Heavy Duty Clay Strippable B.Substrate Filler: As recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturers;compatible with substrate. C.Substrate Primer and Sealer: Manufacturer's recommended type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify substrate surfaces are prime painted and meet manufacturer's requirements to receive work, and comply with requirements of wall covering manufacturer. 1.Verity walls were constructed with a Level 5 finish. B.Measure moisture content of substrates with electronic moisture meter.Do not apply wall coverings if moisture content of substrate exceeds level recommended by wall covering manufacturer. C.Verify flatness tolerance of surfaces does not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or at rate greater than 1/16 inch/ft. D.Notify Design Professional of detrimental conditions affecting wall covering installation. E.Correct detrimental conditions before starting installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Remove wall plates and accessories impeding wall covering installation. B.Substrate Priming and Preparation: 1.Fill cracks in substrate and correct irregularities with filler;sand smooth. 2.For marks capable of bleeding through surface finishes,seal with shellac. 3.Apply one coat of primer sealer to substrate surfaces.Allow to dry.Lightly sand smooth. C.Wash impervious surfaces with tetra-sodium phosphate;rinse and neutralize;wipe dry. D.Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates,hardware,light fixture trim,escutcheons, and fittings before preparing surfaces or finishing. E.Correct surface defects affecting work of this section and clean surfaces.Remove existing coatings exhibiting loose surface defects. F.Vacuum surfaces to remove loose particles. G.Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 72 00 WALL COVERINGS Page 3 of 4 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B.Apply adhesive to wall immediately before applying wall covering. C.Use wall covering in roll number sequence. D.Razor trim edges of wall covering.Do not razor trim on gypsum board surfaces. E.Smoothly apply wall covering without wrinkles,gaps,or overlaps.Eliminate air pockets and ensure full bond to substrate surface. F.Butt edges tightly. G.Horizontal seams are not permitted. H.Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within 6 inches of external corners. I.Install wall covering before installing bases and items attached to,abutting,or located within 1 inch of wall surface. J.Do not install wall covering more than 1/4 inch below top of resilient base. K.Cover spaces above and below windows and above doors in pattern sequence from roll. L.Where wall covering tucks into reveals,metal wallboard,or plaster stops,use contact adhesive within 6 inches of wall covering termination.Ensure complete contact bond. M.Remove excess adhesive from seams while wet and before proceeding to next wall covering sheet. N.Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed to accommodate work of this section. 3.04 CLEANING A.See Section 01 70 00 -Execution and Closeout Requirements for additional requirements. B.Clean wall coverings of dust,dirt,excess adhesive,and other contaminants. 3.05 PROTECTION A.Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 72 00 WALL COVERINGS Page 4 of 4 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 84 00 ACOUSTICAL DECORATIVE PANELS Page 1 of 4 SECTION 09 84 00 ACOUSTICAL DECORATIVE PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Sound-absorbing felt ceiling panels/clouds (ACPNL-4) B.Sound-absorbing felt ceiling baffles/shades (ACPNL-5A,ACPNL-5B,ACPNL-6A) C.Mounting accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 01 61 16 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content Restrictions. B.Section 09 51 00 -Acoustical Ceilings:Ceiling suspension system and panels (ACP-1B). 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM C423 -Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method;2023,with Editorial Revision (2024). B.ASTM C636/C636M -Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels;2019. C.ASTM E580/E580M -Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions;2022. D.ASTM E84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2026a. E.ASTM E795 -Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens during Sound Absorption Tests;2023. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data sheets for products specified. C.Shop Drawings: Fabrication and installation details,panel layout,fabric orientation,and wood grain orientation. D.Verification Samples: Fabricated samples of each type of panel specified;12 by 12 inch,showing construction,edge details,and fabric covering. E.Test Reports: Certified test data from an independent test agency verifying that panels meet specified requirements for acoustical and fire performance. F.Low-Emitting Materials:Provide verification of VOC Emissions Evaluation 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section,with at least three years of documented experience. B.Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and installation components for each type by a single manufacturer. C.Coordination of Work: Coordinate acoustical wall work with installers of related work including,but not limited to building insulation,gypsum board,light fixtures,mechanical systems,electrical systems,and sprinklers. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Protect acoustical units from moisture during shipment,storage,and handling.Deliver in factory- wrapped bundles;do not open bundles until units are needed for installation. B.Store units flat,in dry,well-ventilated space;do not stand on end. C.Before installing acoustical wall panels,permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. D.Protect edges from damage. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F,and maximum humidity of 70 percent prior to,during,and after installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. B.Provide fiveyear manufacturer warranty for ____. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 84 00 ACOUSTICAL DECORATIVE PANELS Page 2 of 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Provide Basis of Design manufacturer listed in the Material ID List,or an approved standard or custom product,approved prior to bid,with equivalent performance,material properties,features,general configuration,appearance,and warranty. B.Felt Sound-Absorbing Units: 1.BASIS OF DESIGN (shades):Eureka 2.BASIS OF DESIGN (clouds):Frasch 3.Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 FELT SOUND-ABSORBING UNITS: A.General: Prefinished,factory assembled fabric-covered panels. 1.Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less and smoke developed index of 450 or less,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B.Felt Acoustic Ceiling Panels:Prefinished felt panels. 1.Material: Polyester (PET)felt,50%post-consumer recycled. 2.Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC):1.0 minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM C423 for mounting indicated,per ASTM E795. 3.Cleanable and easily demountable. 4.UV stabilized and resistant to color fade 5.Panel Shapes/Sizes:As indicated in Drawings 6.Thickness:12 mm,unless otherwise indicated in Mateiral ID List 7.Edges:Exposed felt,machined edge. 8.Color(s):As indicated in Mateiral ID List 9.Mounting Method: a.Suspended with 3/64”steel aircraft cable,inserted into integral clips supplied by manufacturer. C.Felt Acoustic Ceiling Shades:Prefinished,factory assembled felt panels. 1.Material:Polyester (PET)felt,50%pre-consumer recycled. 2.Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC):0.65,when tested in accordance with ASTM C423 for Type J ceiling mounting,per ASTM E795. 3.Cleanable and easily demountable. 4.UV stabilized and resistant to color fade 5.Edges:Exposed felt,machined edge. 6.Corners:Square,exposed felt,machined edge. 7.Color(s):As indicated in Mateiral ID List 8.Mounting Method:Horizontally suspended from ceiling a.Suspended with 3/64”steel aircraft cable,inserted into integral clips supplied by manufacturer. 2.03 FABRICATION A.Tolerances: Fabricate to finished tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch for thickness,overall length and width,and squareness from corner to corner. B.Factory-applied finishes on acoustical panels to be uniform,smooth,and without blemishes. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A.Ceiling-Suspended Accessories: Manufacturer's standard accessories at locations as indicated on each acoustical unit,sized appropriately for weight of acoustical unit. 1.Provide stainless steel aircraft cablefor suspension from ceiling at heights as indicated. B.Panel Adhesive: Low VOC;acceptable to acoustical panel manufacturer for application as indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates for conditions detrimental to installation of acoustical units.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 84 00 ACOUSTICAL DECORATIVE PANELS Page 3 of 4 B.Field verify surface sizes before fabricating panels. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Install acoustical units in locations as indicated,following manufacturer's installation instructions. B.Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M,ASTM E580/E580M,and manufacturer's instructionsand as supplemented in this section. C.Install mounting accessories and supports in accordance with shop drawings. D.Align panels accurately,with edges plumb and top edges level. Scribe to fit accurately at adjoining work and penetrations. E.Suspend ceiling units at locations and heights as indicated. F.Install acoustical units to construction tolerances of plus or minus 1/8 inchfor the following: 1.Plumb and level. 2.Flatness. 3.Width of joints. 3.03 CLEANING A.Clean sound-absorptive panels upon completion of installation from dust and other foreign materials, following manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 PROTECTION A.Provide protection of installed acoustical panels until Date of Substantial Completion. B.Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired to satisfaction of the Design Professional. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 84 00 ACOUSTICAL DECORATIVE PANELS Page 4 of 4 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING Page 1 of 8 SECTION 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Surface preparation. B.Field application of paints (PT-2,PT-2,PT-3,PT-4,PT-5)and stains. C.Materials for backpriming woodwork. D.Scope: Finish interior surfaces exposed to view,unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated. 1.Steel and iron. 2.Galvanized metal. 3.Wood. 4.Gypsum board. 5.Acoustical ceiling tiles,where indicated. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS: A.Section 01 61 16 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content Restrictions. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A.MPI Gloss Level 1 (Flat or Matte):Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B.MPI Gloss Level 3 (Eggshell):10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,according to ASTM D 523. C.MPI Gloss Level 5 (Semi-Gloss):35 to 70 units at 60 degrees,according to ASTM D 523. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data 1.For each type of product,include the following: a.Preparation requirements and application instructions. b.Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List"for each product category specified,with the proposed product highlighted. c.Product list cross-referenced to paint system and locations of application areas.Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2.For all paints and coatings,provide manufacturer’s documentation indicating compliance with the following requirements as detailed in Part 2: a.General Emissions Evaluation b.VOC Content Requirements for Wet Applied Products. c.Paint Content Restrictions. B.Samples for Verification:For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1.Submit Samples on rigid backing,8 inches (200 mm)square. 2.Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3.Label each coat of each Sample. 4.Label each Sample for location and application area. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Material Ingredients Disclosure Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1%(1,000 ppm)with all content characterized and screened. 1.For each product,provide one of the following documents: a.Health Product Declaration (HPD) b.Declare Label 1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A.Furnish extra materials, from the same product run,that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.Paint:5 percent,but not less than 1 gal.(3.8 L)of each material and color applied. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING Page 2 of 8 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.MPI Standards: 1.Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"for products and paint systems indicated. B.Mockups:Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system. a.Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces:Provide samples of at least 100 sq.ft.(9 sq. m). b.Other Items:Architect will designate items or areas required. 2.Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a.If preliminary color selections are not approved,apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3.Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4.Subject to compliance with requirements,approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1.Maintain containers in clean condition,free of foreign materials and residue. 2.Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B.Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent;at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C)above the dew point;or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Provide Basis of Design manufacturer listed in the Material ID List,or another standard or custom product,approved prior to bid,with equivalent performance,material properties,features,general configuration,appearance,and warranty. B.Benjamin Moore &Co. C.PPG Architectural Finishes,Inc. D.BASIS OF DESIGN: Sherwin-Williams Company (The). E.Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 PAINT,GENERAL A.MPI Standards: 1.Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." 2.All paints and coatings to meet MPI X-Green Performance Standards except where otherwise indicated. B.Material Compatibility: 1.Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated,under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer,based on testing and field experience. 2.For each coat in a paint system,products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C.General Emissions Evaluation: Products must be compliant with the California Department of Public Health (CDPH)Standard Method v1.1–2010 or later version. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING Page 3 of 8 1.Compliance to be confirmed with one of the following certifications: a.UL GreenGuard Gold. b.SCS Indoor Advantage Gold. c.Master Painters Institute (MPI)Extreme Green (X-Green). d.Green Wise Gold. e.Compliance with CHPS (Collaborative for High Performance Schools). D.VOC Content Requirements for Wet Applied Products: 1.All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the applicable VOC limits of the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD)Rule 1113,effective February 5,2016,except as follows: a.All interior paints and coatings,including colorants and tints,shall not exceed the limits defined below,measured in grams per liter (g/L)less water and less exempt compounds: 1)Flat: 10 2)Non-Flat: 10 3)Primers: 10,except as allowed by specified MPI Number. 4)Colorants do not increase the VOC content of the base paint when tinted. E.Paint Content Restrictions 1.All interior paints and coatings must be free of alkylphenol ethoxylates (APEs). a.This means paint products do not contain intentionally added or unintentionally added/residual APEs (above 100 ppm) 2.All paints and coatings must be free of antimicrobial products. a.Antimicrobials added to materials or products for the sole purpose of preserving the product are exempt from this restriction. 3.Compliance with above restrictions to be confirmed with one of the following documents: a.Green Seal Paint Standard GS-11 Certification,Green Seal,Inc. b.Material Ingredients Disclosure Documentation indicating product is Red List Free. c.Manufacturer’s signed letter of confirmation. F.Provide products with Material Ingredients Disclosure Documentation demonstrating the chemical inventory of the product to at least 0.1%(1,000 ppm),with all content characterized and screened,to be verified through the HPD or Declare Label. G.Colors: As indicated in Color Schedule. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.Testing of Paint Materials:Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1.Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials.Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken.If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site,samples may be taken at Project site.Samples will be identified,sealed,and certified by testing agency. 2.Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3.Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements.Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site,pay for testing,and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials.Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if,on repainting with complying materials,the two paints are incompatible. 2.04 PRIMERS/SEALERS A.Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #149 X-Green. 1.VOC Content: E Range of E3 (<11g/L). 2.Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3. 2.05 WOOD PRIMERS A.Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #137 X-Green. 1.VOC Content: E Range of E3 (<51g/L). 2.Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING Page 4 of 8 2.06 METAL PRIMERS A.Primer,Rust-Inhibitive,Water Based: MPI #107 X-Green. 1.VOC Content: E Range of E3 (<51g/L). 2.Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3. B.Primer,Galvanized,Water Based: MPI #134 X-Green. 1.VOC Content: E Range of E3 (<51g/L). 2.Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3. 2.07 WATER-BASED PAINTS A.Flat (MPI Gloss Level 1)MPI #143 X-Green 1.VOC Content: E Range of E3 (<11g/L). 2.Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4. B.Eggshell (MPI Gloss Level 3)MPI #145 X-Green 1.VOC Content: E Range of E3 (<11g/L). 2.Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5. C.Semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5),MPI #147 X-Green 1.VOC Content: E Range of E3 (<11g/L). 2.Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 5.5. 2.08 ACOUSTICAL COATING A.Solids: 40%+1% B.Preparation:Clean existing surfaces as recommended by manufacturer for condition observed. C.One coat applied at 1-2 mil wet at 50%overlap. 1.ProCoat:ProCoustic;www.procoat.com PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates and conditions,with Applicator present,for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B.Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates:When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1.Concrete:12 percent. 2.Masonry (Clay and CMUs):12 percent. 3.Wood:15 percent. 4.Gypsum Board:12 percent. 5.Plaster:12 percent. C.Gypsum Board Substrates:Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D.Plaster Substrates:Verify that plaster is fully cured. E.Verify suitability of substrates,including surface conditions and compatibility,with existing finishes and primers. F.Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B.Remove hardware,covers,plates,and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted.If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1.After completing painting operations,use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed.Remove surface-applied protection if any. C.Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints,including dust,dirt,oil,grease,and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1.Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING Page 5 of 8 D.Concrete Substrates:Remove release agents,curing compounds,efflorescence,and chalk.Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E.Masonry Substrates:Remove efflorescence and chalk.Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F.Steel Substrates:Remove rust,loose mill scale,and shop primer,if any.Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer,but not less than the following: 1.SSPC-SP 2. 2.SSPC-SP 3. 3.SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4. 4.SSPC-SP 11. G.Shop-Primed Steel Substrates:Clean field welds,bolted connections,and areas where shop paint is abraded.Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC- PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. H.Galvanized-Metal Substrates:Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean,lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I.Wood Substrates: 1.Scrape and clean knots,and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2.Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view,and dust off. 3.Prime edges,ends,faces,undersides,and backsides of wood. 4.After priming,fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.03 APPLICATION A.Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1.Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2.Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.Before final installation,paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3.Paint front and backsides of access panels,removable or hinged covers,and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4.Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,identification, performance rating,or nomenclature plates. 5.Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B.Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied.Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat,but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C.If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat,apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish,color,and appearance. D.Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness,spotting,holidays,laps,brush marks,roller tracking,runs,sags,ropiness,or other surface imperfections.Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E.Painting Fire Suppression,Plumbing,HVAC,Electrical,Communication,and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1.Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: a.Equipment,including panelboards and switch gear. b.Uninsulated metal piping. c.Uninsulated plastic piping. d.Pipe hangers and supports. e.Metal conduit. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING Page 6 of 8 f.Plastic conduit. g.Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h.Duct,equipment,and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. 2.Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a.Equipment,including panelboards. b.Uninsulated metal piping. c.Uninsulated plastic piping. d.Pipe hangers and supports. e.Metal conduit. f.Plastic conduit. g.Duct,equipment,and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. h.Other items as directed by Architect. 3.Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts,without liner,behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Dry Film Thickness Testing:Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1.Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2.If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations,Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.At end of each workday,remove rubbish,empty cans,rags,and other discarded materials from Project site. B.After completing paint application,clean spattered surfaces.Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping,or other methods.Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C.Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application.Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning,repairing,replacing,and refinishing,as approved by Architect,and leave in an undamaged condition. D.At completion of construction activities of other trades,touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.06 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A.Steel Substrates: 1.Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 5.1S: a.Prime Coat:Primer,rust inhibitive,water based MPI #107 X-Green. b.Intermediate Coat:Latex,interior,institutional low odor/VOC,matching topcoat. c.Topcoat:Latex,interior,institutional low odor/VOC,semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #147 X-Green. B.Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1.Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 5.3N: a.Prime Coat:Primer,galvanized,water based, MPI #134 X-Green. b.Intermediate Coat:Latex,interior,institutional low odor/VOC,matching topcoat. c.Topcoat:Latex,interior,institutional low odor/VOC,semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #147 X-Green. C.Wood Substrates: 1.Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 6.3V: a.Prime Coat:Primer,latex,for interior wood, MPI #137 X-Green. b.Intermediate Coat:Latex,interior,institutional low odor/VOC,matching topcoat. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING Page 7 of 8 c.Topcoat:Latex,interior,institutional low odor/VOC,eggshell (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #145 X- Green. D.Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates: 1.Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 9.2M: a.Prime Coat:Primer sealer,interior,institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149 X-Green. b.Intermediate Coat:Latex,interior,institutional low odor/VOC,matching topcoat. c.Topcoat:Latex,interior,institutional low odor/VOC,eggshell (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #145 X- Green. 3.07 COLOR SCHEDULE A.PT-__A:White;Benjamin Moore Chantilly Lace OC-65 B.PT-__B:Exterior ___ C.PT-__C:Accent:Benjamin Moore Bonsai CC-666 D.PT-__D:Accent:Benjamin Moore Essex Green HC-188 E.PT-__E:Accent:BShwerwin Williams Retreat SW 6207 F.PT-__F:Accent:Benjamin Moore Vintage Vogue 462 G.PT-__G:Accent:Benjamin Moore Terazzo Brown CSP-360 END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING Page 8 of 8 Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 10 26 00 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION Page 1 of 2 SECTION 10 26 00 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Corner guards (CG-1). 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Blocking for wall and corner guard anchors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM D256 -Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics; 2026. B.ASTM D543 -Standard Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents;2021. C.ASTM F476 -Standard Test Methods for Security of Swinging Door Assemblies;2023. D.ASTM G21 -Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi; 2015,with Editorial Revision (2021). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data:Indicate physical dimensions,features,and anchorage details. C.Shop Drawings: Include plans,elevation,sections,and attachment details. D.Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. E.Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions for care and cleaning of each type of product. Include information about both recommended and potentially detrimental cleaning materials and methods. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Deliver wall and door protection items in original,undamaged protective packaging. Label items to designate installation locations. B.Protect work from moisture damage. C.Do not deliver products to project site until areas for storage and installation are fully enclosed,and interior temperature and humidity are in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations for each type of item. D.Store products in either horizontal or vertical position,in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 WARRANTY A.See Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Corner Guards: 1.Babcock-Davis: www.babcockdavis.com/#sle. 2.Construction Specialties,Inc: www.c-sgroup.com/#sle. 3.Inpro: www.inprocorp.com/#sle. 4.Koroseal Interior Products: www.koroseal.com/#sle. 5.Nystrom,Inc: www.nystrom.com/#sle. 6.Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A.Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50,maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B.Impact Strength: Unless otherwise noted,provide protection products and assemblies that have been successfully tested for compliance with applicable provisions of ASTM D256 and/or ASTM F476. C.Chemical and Stain Resistance: Unless otherwise noted,provide protection products and assemblies with chemical and stain resistance complying with applicable provisions of ASTM D543. D.Fungal Resistance: Unless otherwise noted,provide protection products and assemblies which pass ASTM G21 testing. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 10 26 00 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION Page 2 of 2 2.03 PRODUCT TYPES A.Corner Guards -Surface Mounted: 1.Material: Type 304 stainless steel,No.4 finish,16 gage,1/16 inch thick. 2.Performance: Resist lateral impact force of 100 lbs at any point without damage or permanent set. 3.Width of Wings:1 inch 4.Corner: Square. 5.Length: One piece,from top of base to height indicated. 6.Styles: Provide 90 degree corners. 7.Attachment:Adhered. 8.Locations:As indicated in drawings. B.Adhesives: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.04 FABRICATION A.Fabricate components with tight joints,corners and seams. B.Pre-drill holes for attachment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify that rough openings,concealed blocking,and anchors are correctly sized and located. B.Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings. C.Start of installation constitutes acceptance of project conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A.Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,level and plumb,secured rigidly in position to supporting construction. B.Position corner guard 4 inches above finished floor to height indicated. 3.03 TOLERANCES A.Maximum Variation From Required Height: 1/4 inch. B.Maximum Variation From Level or Plane For Visible Length: 1/4 inch. 3.04 CLEANING A.See Section 01 74 19 -Construction Waste Management and Disposal,for additional requirements. B.Clean wall and door protection items of excess adhesive,dust,dirt,and other contaminants. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 10 28 00 TOILET AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES Page 1 of 4 SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Commercial toilet accessories:for toilet rooms,utility rooms,and rooms with sinks;including,but not limited to: 1.Toilet Paper Dispenser (TA-3,TA-27). 2.Combination Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle (TA-8) 3.Soap Dispenser (TA-1) 4.Grab Bars (TA-12) 5.Sanitary Napkin Disposal (TA-14) B.Diaper Changing Stations (TA-24). C.Child Protection Seat (TA-25) D.Miscellaneous specialties,including: 1.Coat hooks (TA-19). 2.Wire baskets (TA-28) 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry: Concealed supports for accessories,including blocking. B.Section 09 30 00 -Tiling;coordination. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ADA Standards -2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design;2010. B.ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products;2024. C.ASTM A269/A269M -Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service;2025. D.ASTM A653/A653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process;2025a. E.ASTM A666/A666M -Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,Strip,Plate,and Flat Bar;2024. F.ASTM B86 -Standard Specification for Zinc and Zinc-Aluminum (ZA)Alloy Foundry and Die Castings; 2023. G.ASTM B456 -Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium;2017 (Reapproved 2022). H.ASTM F2285 -Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Diaper Changing Tables for Commercial Use;2022. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A.Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size,finish,details of function,and attachment methods. C.Schedule: submit schedule listing accessories,by room,with quantities and sizes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Provide Basis of Design manufacturer listed in the Material ID list,or a standard or custom product from one of the other listed manufacturers,approved prior to bid,with equivalent performance,material properties,features,general configuration,appearance,and warranty. B.Commercial Toilet,Shower,and Bath Accessories: 1.ASI -American Specialties,Inc: www.americanspecialties.com. 2.Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 10 28 00 TOILET AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES Page 2 of 4 3.BASIS OF DESIGN:Bobrick;www.bobrick.com 4.BASIS OF DESIGN (soap disp):Kohler;www.kohler.com 5.Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. C.Cook Hooks: 1.BASIS OF DESIGN:Shelfology;www.shelfology.com 2.Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. D.Diaper Changing Stations /Child Protection Seats: 1.American Specialties,Inc: www.americanspecialties.com. 2.Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. 3.Foundations;www.foundations.com 4.BASIS OF DESIGN (diaper station):Koala Kare Products:www.koalabear.com. 5.BASIS OF DESIGN (seats):Sova by Foundations:www.choosesova.com/#sle. 6.Substitutions: 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. E.Provide products of each category type by single manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A.Accessories -General: Shop assembled,free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings,steel anchor plates,adapters,and anchor components for installation. 1.Grind welded joints smooth. 2.Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets with flat surfaces. B.Keys: Provide four keys for each accessory to Owner;master key lockable accessories. C.Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666/A666M,Type 304. D.Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269/A269M,Grade TP304 or TP316. E.Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet,ASTM A653/A653M,with G90/Z275 coating. F.Zinc Alloy: Die cast, ASTM B86. G.Fasteners,Screws,and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized;tamper-proof;security type. H.Expansion Shields: Fiber,lead,or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.03 FINISHES A.Stainless Steel: Satin finish. B.Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456,SC 2,satin finish,unless otherwise noted. C.Baked Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition,apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy baked enamel. D.Powder-Coated Steel: Clean,degrease,and neutralize. Follow immediately with a phosphatizing treatment,prime coat,and two finish coats of powder coat enamel. E.Galvanizing for Items Other than Sheet: Comply with ASTM A123/A123M;galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices. F.Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean,spray apply one coat primer and bake. G.Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. 2.04 PUBLIC TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A.Toilet Paper Dispenser (TA-3):Jumbo Double roll,surface-mounted,stainless steel unit,tumbler lock. 1.Product: a.Bobrick:B-2892 B.Toilet Paper Dispenser (TA-27):Single roll,surface-mounted,stainless steel unitwith hood. 1.Finish:As indicated in Material ID 2.Product: a.Bobrick:B-66997 C.Combination Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle (TA-8):Surface-mount flush with wall,stainless steel; seamless wall flanges,continuous piano hinges,tumbler locks on doors. 1.Waste receptacle liner: Reusable,heavy-duty vinyl. 2.Towel dispenser capacity: 600 C-fold,800 multifold,or 1100 singlefold Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 10 28 00 TOILET AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES Page 3 of 4 3.Waste receptacle capacity:6.3 gallons,minimum. 4.Products: a.Bobrick B-2803 D.Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser,deck-mounted on vanity,with polyethylene container concealed below deck;piston and 4 inch spout of stainless steel. 1.Minimum Capacity:16 ounces;refillable from top. 2.Finish:As indicated in Material ID List 3.Products: a.Kohler K-1995. E.Grab Bars (TA-12):Stainless steel,smooth surface,concealed mounting. 1.Standard Duty Grab Bars: a.Push/Pull Point Load:250 pound-force,minimum. b.Dimensions: 1-1/2 inch outside diameter,minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness,concealed flange mounting,1-1/2 inch clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. c.Finish:As indicated in Material ID. d.Length and Configuration: As indicated on drawings. e.Products: 1)Bobrick Fino B-9806 F.Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit (TA-14): Stainless steel,surface-mounted,top hinged door,full-length stainless steel piano-type hinge,removable receptacle. 1.Product: a.Bobrick:Contura B-270 2.05 DIAPER CHANGING STATIONS A.Diaper Changing Station (TA-24): Wall-mounted folding diaper changing station for use in commercial toilet facilities,meeting or exceeding ASTM F2285. 1.Material:Stainless steel,with polypropylene interior. 2.Mounting:Recessed. 3.Orientation:Vertical. 4.Minimum Rated Load:250 pounds. 5.Features:Pneumatic cylinder,2-year warranty. 6.Products: a.Koala Kare Products;KB311-SSRE:www.koalabear.com. b.Substitutions: 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.06 CHILD PROTECTION SEAT A.Child Protection Seat (TA-25): Wall-mounted folding child protection seat for use in commercial toilet facilities,meeting or exceeding ASTM F2285. 1.Material: Polyethylene. 2.Mounting:Surface. 3.Color:As indicated in Material ID List. 4.Minimum Rated Load:50 pounds. 5.Features:Pneumatic cylinder,2-year warranty. 6.Products: a.Sova by Foundations;Toddler Wall Safety Seat: www.choosesova.com/#sle. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A.Coat Hook (TA-19):Vertically-oriented double hook,powder-coated steel,with exposed fasteners. 1.Color:As indicated in Material ID 2.Anchor:Drywall 3.Size:5-1/2"high by 1 "wide by 2"projection. 4.Capacity:150 lbs. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 10 28 00 TOILET AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES Page 4 of 4 5.Product: a.Shelfology:Doohooky B.Wire Baskets (TA-28):Coated steel wire baskets,surface-mounted. 1.Size:As indicated in Material ID List. 2.Color:As indicated in Material ID List. 3.Products: a.Rack'Em Safety:Rack'em Mount Anywhere Wire Basket;www.rackemsafety.com PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Verify existing conditions before starting work. B.Verify exact location of accessories for installation. C.Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings. D.Verify installation of blocking,reinforcing plates,and concealed anchors in walls,and ceilings. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B.Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers'instructions in locations indicated on drawings. B.Install plumb and level,securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C.Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations.See also mounting height chart in drawings. 1.Grab Bars: As indicated on drawings. a.Mount top of grab bar 34 inches above finish floor and horizontally as indicated in drawings. b.Where toilet paper dispenser mounting conflicts with a grab bar,mount above grab bar with bottom of dispenser 12 inches clear above grab bar,but no higher than 48 inches above finish floor. 2.Other Accessories: As indicated on drawings. 3.04 PROTECTION A.Protect installed accessories from damage due to subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS Page 1 of 4 SECTION 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Countertops for architectural cabinet work: 1.Plastic Laminate (PLAM-1) 2.Solid Surface:(SSF-3). B.Wall-hung counters and vanity tops. C.Accessories,including: 1.Grommets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.Section 06 10 00 -Rough Carpentry;installation of concealed blocking. B.Section 06 41 00 -Architectural Wood Casework:Base cabinets and aprons. C.Section 22 40 00 -Plumbing Fixtures:Drop-in and undermount Sinks,trim and connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A.ASTM E84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2026a. B.AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards;2014. C.AWMAC/WI (NAAWS)-North American Architectural Woodwork Standards,U.S.Version 3.0;2016. D.ISFA 2-01 -Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material;2013. E.NEMA LD 3 -High-Pressure Decorative Laminates;2005. F.PS 1 -Structural Plywood;2023. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B.Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used,including: 1.Specimen warranty. C.Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation ;combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections. D.Verification Samples: For each finish product specified,minimum size 6 inches square,representing actual product,color,and patterns. E.Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair of countertop surfaces. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B.Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Custom quality,unless other quality is indicated for specific items. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A.Do not deliver countertops until painting and similar operations that could damage countertops have been completed in installation areas. B.Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. C.Store and dispose of solvent-based materials,and materials used with solvent-based materials,in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Maintain environmental conditions (temperature,humidity,and ventilation)within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. B.Field Measurements:Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction,verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication,and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.08 WARRANTY A.Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS Page 2 of 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COUNTERTOPS A.Plastic Laminate Countertops:High-pressure decorative laminate (HPDL)sheet bonded to substrate. 1.Laminate Sheet,Type ___: NEMA LD 3,Grade HGS,0.048 inch nominal thickness. a.Manufacturers:Provide Basis of Design indicated in Material ID unless otherwise approved prior to bid. 1)Formica Corporation:www.formica.com. 2)Panolam Industries International,Inc Nevamar:www.nevamar.com. 3)Panolam Industries International,Inc Pionite:www.pionitelaminates.com. 4)BASIS OF DESIGN:Wilsonart:www.wilsonart.com. 5)Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. b.Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25,maximum;smoke developed index of 450,maximum;when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. c.Finish: Matte or suede,gloss rating of 5 to 20. d.Surface Color and Pattern:As indicated in Material ID list. 2.Exposed Edge Treatment:Square,substrate built up to minimum 1-1/4 inchthick;covered with matching laminate. 3.Back and End Splashes: Same material,same construction. a.Provide where indicated. 4.Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS),Section 11 - Countertops,Custom Grade. 5.Skirts:As indicated on drawings. 6.Sinks:Stainless steel drop-in;see Plumbing B.Solid Surfacing Countertops:Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous substrate. 1.Flat Sheet Thickness:1/2 inch,minimum. 2.Solid Surfacing Sheet:Complying with ISFA 2-01 and NEMA LD 3;acrylic or polyesterresin,mineral filler,and pigments;homogenous,non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools;no surface coating;color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. a.Manufacturers: 1)Avonite Surfaces:www.avonitesurfaces.com. 2)Dupont;Corian:www.corian.com. 3)Formica Corporation:www.formica.com. 4)LG Hausys America,Inc;HI-MACS 12mm: www.lghausysusa.com/#sle. 5)BASIS OF DESIGN:Wilsonart:www.wilsonart.com. 6)Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. b.Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25,maximum;smoke developed index of 450,maximum;when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. c.Finish on Exposed Surfaces:Matte,gloss rating of 5 to 20. d.Color and Pattern:As indicated in Material ID List. 3.Other Components Thickness: 1/2 inch,minimum. 4.Exposed Edge Treatment:Square,eased,thickness as indicated in Drawings. 5.Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS),Section 11 - Countertops,Premium Grade. 2.02 MATERIALS A.Wood-Based Components: 1.Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B.Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade,A-C veneer grade,minimum 5-ply;minimum 3/4 inch thick;join lengths using metal splines. C.Seam Filler:as recommended by manufacturer,color to match stone. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS Page 3 of 4 D.Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined. E.Joint Sealant:Mildew-resistant siliconesealant,clear. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A.Countertop Brackets:Fixed,concealed vertical leg,side-of-stud mounting. 1.Materials:Steel plates. a.Depth:As recommended for countertop depth indicated b.Color:Black 2.Products: a.A&M Hardware,Inc;Concealed Brackets:www.aandmhardware.com/#sle. b.A&M Hardware,Inc;Concealed Flat Brackets:www.aandmhardware.com/#sle. c.Centerline Brackets;Floating Wall Mount:www.countertopbracket.com/#sle. d.Rakks/Rangine Corporation;Inside Wall Flush Mount Brackets:www.rakks.com/#sle. e.Substitutions:See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B.Grommets:Standard 2-inch molded plastic grommets for cut-outs with matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage; 1.Furnish 2 grommets,for field locating. 2.Finish/Color:As selected by Design Professional from manufacturer's full range. 3.Products: a.Doug Mockett OG Series b.Substitutions:See Section 016000 -Product Requirements. 2.04 FABRICATION A.Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable,with top surface of joints flush. 1.Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer. 2.Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or wall. a.Rout a 1/8 inch drip groove at underside of exposed overlapping edges,set back 1/2 inch from face of edge. 3.Prepare all cutouts accurately to size;replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes. B.Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated. 1.Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue. 2.Height: 4 inches,unless otherwise indicated. C.Solid Surfacing:Fabricate tops and wall panelsup to 144 incheslong in one piece;join pieces with adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. D.Wall-Mounted Counters:Provide skirts,aprons,and bracesas indicated on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A.Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B.If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer,notify Design Professional of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C.Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper locations. 3.02 PREPARATION A.Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B.Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A.Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;shim where required. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman,MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS Page 4 of 4 B.Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board of 5/8 inch. C.Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces. 1.See Section 079200 for additional requirements. 3.04 TOLERANCES A.Variation From Horizontal:1/8 inch in 10 feet,maximum. B.Offset From Wall,Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum;1/16 inch minimum. C.Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide,maximum. 3.05 CLEANING A.Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly. 3.06 PROTECTION A.Protect installed products until completion of project. B.Touch-up,repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF PLUMBING Page 1 of 8 SECTION 22 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The requirements listed in this section are supplemental to the Division 01 General Requirements. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor to examine and refer to all Architectural, Civil, Structural, Electrical, and Landscape and specifications for construction conditions which may affect the scope of Plumbing work. Inspect the building site and existing facilities for verification of present conditions. Make proper provisions for these conditions in performance of the work and cost thereof. C. Plumbing work for this project shall include all items, articles, materials and the associated labor mentioned, scheduled or shown in these specifications and in the accompanying drawings. D. Furnish and install all equipment, materials and any required incidental items required by good practice to complete the systems described herein. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Work shall meet the requirements of the plans and specifications and shall not be less than the minimum requirements of applicable sections of the latest Codes and Standards of the following Organizations: 1. American Gas Association (AGA) 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 4. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 5. National Electrical Code (NEC) 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 8. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) 9. Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA) 10. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) 11. International Mechanical Code (IMC) 12. International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) 13. International Building Code (IBC) 14. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) 15. Requirements of the Serving Utility Company 16. Local and State Codes and Ordinances 1.03 FEES AND PERMITS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay all fees and arrange all permits required for work done under their contract and under their supervision by subcontract. B. All usage contracts between the Owner and the serving utilities company, such as membership and usage charges or fees, etc., for the purpose of obtaining the services for the utility company shall be applied for and paid for by the Owner. 1.04 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturer’s trade names and catalog numbers listed are intended to indicate the quality of equipment or materials desired. Manufacturers not listed in the specification will be considered substitutions and must have prior approval. B. See Division 01 for Substitutions Procedures. Requests for substitution are to be submitted sufficiently ahead of the deadline, to give ample time for examination. Prior approval request for substitution must Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF PLUMBING Page 2 of 8 indicate the specific item or items to be furnished in lieu of those scheduled, together with complete technical and comparative data on scheduled items and items proposed for substitution. C. If the engineer approves any proposed substitution, the approved product will be listed in an addendum. Bidders shall not rely on approval made in any other manner. D. Plumbing equipment may be installed with manufacturer’s standard finish and color except where specific color, finish or choice is indicated. If the manufacturer has no standard finish, equipment shall have a prime coat and two finish coats of gray enamel. E. High altitude operation: Capacity of all equipment is to be sized and manufactured to perform at the elevation of the project site. If not specifically indicated in the equipment schedule or in the specifications provide all required accessories and equipment for proper operation at elevation of the project site. F. This Contractor shall be responsible for materials and equipment installed under this contract. Contractor shall also be responsible for the protection of materials and equipment of others from damage as a result of his work. G. Manufactured material and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by manufacturer unless herein specified to the contrary. H. This Contractor shall make the required arrangement with the General Contractor or Construction Manager for the introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. I. Store materials and equipment indoors at the job site. If this is not possible, store on raised platforms and protect from the weather by means of waterproof covers. Coverings shall permit circulation of air around the materials to prevent condensation of moisture. Screen or cap openings in equipment to prevent the entry of vermin. 1.05 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. The drawings are diagrammatic and do not necessarily show exact location of piping and ductwork unless specifically dimensioned. Riser and other diagrams are schematic and do not necessarily show the physical arrangement of the equipment. They shall not be used for obtaining lineal runs of piping or ductwork, nor shall they be used for shop drawings for piping and ductwork fabrication or ordering. Discrepancies shown on different plans, or between plans and actual field conditions shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for resolution. 1.06 RESPONSIBILITY A. Plumbing work shall conform to requirements of all division 22 specifications. B. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of a satisfactory and complete system in accordance with the intent of the drawing and specifications. Provide, at no extra cost, all incidental items, materials, accessories and labor required for completion of the work even though they are not specifically mentioned or indicated on the drawings or in the specifications. C. The drawings do not attempt to show complete details of the building construction which affect the mechanical and plumbing installation; and reference is therefore required to the Architectural, Civil, Structural, Landscape and Electrical drawings and specifications and to shop drawings of all trades for additional details which affect the installation of the work covered under this Division of the Contract. D. Location of mechanical and plumbing system components shall be checked for conflicts with openings, structural members and components of other systems having fixed locations. In the event of any conflicts, the Architect/Engineer shall be consulted, and their decision shall govern. Necessary changes shall be made at the Contractor’s expense. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF PLUMBING Page 3 of 8 E. Determine, and be responsible for, the proper location and character of inserts for hangers, chases, sleeves, and other openings in the construction required for the work and obtain this information well in advance of the construction progress so work will not be delayed. F. Final location of inserts, hangers, etc., required for each installation, must be coordinated with facilities required for other installations to prevent interference. G. Take extreme caution not to install work that connects to equipment until such time as complete Shop Drawings of such equipment have been approved by the Architect/Engineer. Any work installed by the Contractor, prior to approval of Shop Drawings, will be at the Contractor's risk. H. All modifications and changes required due to installation of equipment other than the scheduled equipment shall be made at the contractor’s expense. I. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate changes to work by other trades that result from the installation of equipment other than the scheduled equipment. J. If the provided equipment is heavier or larger than the scheduled or specified equipment, it shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate the required structural changes and pay for any and all associated cost. K. If the provided equipment has different motor characteristics or electrical requirements than the scheduled or specified equipment, it shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate the required changes and pay for any and all associated cost. L. If larger or additional electrical conduits, wire or breakers are required due to the installation of equipment other than the scheduled or specified equipment it shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate the required changes and pay for any and all associated cost. M. If the provided equipment requires different fluid flow rates than the scheduled or specified equipment, it shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all required changes including but not limited to pumps, piping, valves, etc and pay for any and all associated cost. N. At all times during the performance of this Contract, properly protect work from damage and protect the Owner's property from injury of loss. Make good any damage, injury or loss, except such as may be directly due to errors in the Bidding Documents or caused by Agents or Employees of the Owner. Adequately protect adjacent property as provided by law and the Bidding Documents. Provide and maintain passageways, guard fences, lights and other facilities for protection required by Public Authority or Local conditions. O. The Contractor shall be responsible for damages incurred due to the work of their contractors, to the building or its contents, people, etc. 1.07 REVIEW A. All work and material is subject to review at any time by the Architect/Engineer or his representative. If the Architect/Engineer or his representative finds material that does not conform to these specifications or that is not properly installed or finished, correct the deficiencies in a manner satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer at the Contractor’s expense. 1.08 WORKMANSHIP A. Work under this contract shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular trade, including work necessary to properly complete the installation in a workmanlike manner to present a neat and finished appearance. B. Obtain Architect's/Engineer's approval before performing any cutting on structural members or patching of building surfaces. Any damage to the building or equipment by the Plumbing Contractor shall be the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor and shall be repaired by skilled craftsmen of the trades involved at the Contractor’s expense. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF PLUMBING Page 4 of 8 C. Chases, openings, sleeves, hangers, anchors, recesses, equipment pads, and framing for equipment; shall be provided by others only if so noted on the drawings. Otherwise, they will be provided by the Mechanical or Plumbing Contractor for their work. 1.09 COORDINATION A. The Plumbing Contractor shall plan their work to proceed with a minimum interference with other trades and it shall be their responsibility to inform the General Contractor of all openings required in the building structure for installation of work, and to provide sleeves as required. Dimensions of equipment installed and/or provided by others shall be checked so that correct clearances and connections may be made. B. In general, pipelines requiring gravity drainage shall be installed first, followed by ductwork, large piping mains and electrical conduit. The location of fire protection piping and heads shall be coordinated with other trades to ensure that installations by other trades do not block heads. C. Leave sufficient space for the installation of insulation on piping and ductwork as specified. It is not acceptable to compress pipe or duct insulation for any reason. 1.10 CLEANING A. Keep the job site clean. The Plumbing Contractor shall remove all waste and rubbish associated with their work. B. Upon completion of work, remove materials, scraps and debris related to plumbing and mechanical work and leave all spaces including tunnels, crawlspaces, pipe or duct chases and ceiling plenums clean and orderly. C. The Plumbing Contractor will be responsible for cleaning the exterior and interior of all equipment prior to star-up. Once all equipment has been cleaned it shall be inspected by the Architect/Engineer prior to start-up. D. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide dust protection of existing materials and equipment as well as new materials and equipment for the duration of the project. Protect existing materials and equipment from damage for the duration of the project. Clean the exterior and interior of all existing equipment at the completion of the project. 1.11 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Offices 1. The Plumbing Contractor must have the permission of the Owner and General Contractor or Construction Manager to install a temporary office/job trailer on the project site. 2. The Contractor shall completely remove his temporary installations when no longer needed and the premises shall be completely clean, disinfected, patched, and refinished to match adjacent areas. B. Ladders and Scaffolds 1. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide their own ladders, scaffolds, etc. of substantial construction for access to their work in various portions of the building as may be required. When no longer needed, they shall be removed by the Contractor. C. Protection Devices 1. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide and maintain his own necessary barricades, fences, signal lights, etc., required by all governing authorities or shown on the drawings. When no longer needed, they shall be removed by the Contractor. D. TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION 1. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide all necessary first aid hand fire extinguishers for Class A, B, C and special hazards as may exist in his own work area only in accordance with good and safe practice and as required by jurisdictional safety authority. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF PLUMBING Page 5 of 8 1.12 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals will be required for each piece of equipment, material or product as noted in the table below. All submittals shall be submitted, reviewed and all discrepancies addressed prior to ordering equipment or starting work. Any equipment ordered without having first completed the submittal process is done at the risk of the contractor. Any work performed prior to completing the submittal process is done at the risk of the contractor. B. Specification Section Product Data Performance Data Shop Drawing Delegated Design Wiring Diagram Color Chart Sustainability Compliance Notes 220500 X X 220523 X 220529 X X Provide Delegated Design per the requirements of this section 220548 X X Provide Delegated Design per the requirements of this section 220553 X 220716 X 221116 X 221119 X 221316 X X 221319 X 224100 X X X X X C. Submittal Definitions 1. Product Data: Provide manufacturers’ cut sheets that include general product information including but not limited to, model number, physical data, nominal capacities, and rough-in requirements. 2. Performance Data: Provide detailed performance and capacities based on project specific requirements including but not limited to: flow rates, capacities, pressure loss, temperatures, fan curves, pump curves, part load performance, sound data, and electrical characteristics. 3. Shop Drawings: Provide detailed drawings of the equipment showing overall dimensions, location of electrical and piping connection, location of anchorage points, location of electrical and control panels, and all operating, service and maintenance clearances. 4. Delegated Design: Provide detailed drawings prepared and stamped by a registered Professional Engineer, that detail pertinent design criteria, the materials and products to be installed and the required installation locations. 5. Wiring Diagram: Provide diagrams that identify, and detail required field wiring. 6. Color Chart: Provide a physical color chart of material samples required for selection of equipment colors. 7. Sustainability Compliance: Provide literature that indicates a products compliance with LEED or Green Globes. See Division 01 for additional information and requirements. D. Submittal Formats: 1. Include the following information with each submittal: a. Project Name Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF PLUMBING Page 6 of 8 b. Submittal Date c. Name of Architect d. Name of Engineer e. Name of General Contractor or Construction Manager f. Name of Sub-Contractor g. Name of firm or entity that prepared the submittal h. Unique Submittal Number i. Type of Submittal j. Specification Section k. Name or Mark of equipment or material and detail or drawings reference. 2. All Submittals with the exception of color charts or material samples shall be electronically transmitted PDFs. E. Submittal Requirements 1. Submittals shall be submitted as a complete specification section. The submittal must include all materials and equipment for that specification section. Submittals for individual materials of equipment will be rejected without review. 2. Submittals shall be complete, clearly show item used, size, dimensions, capacity, rough in, etc., as required for complete check and installation. Manufacturer’s literature showing more than one item shall be clearly marked as to which item is being furnished or it will be rejected and returned without review. 3. Each submittal shall be thoroughly checked by the Contractor for compliance with the Contract Document requirements, accuracy of dimensions, relationship to the work of other trades, and conformance with sound, safe practices as to erection and installation. Each submittal shall then bear a stamp evidencing such checking and shall show corrections made, if any. Submittals requiring extensive corrections shall be revised before submission. Each submittal not stamped and signed by the Contractor evidencing such checking will be rejected and returned without review. 4. On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet. 5. Review of the shop drawings and literature by the engineer shall not relieve the contractor for responsibility for deviations from the drawings or specifications, nor shall it relieve the contractor from responsibility for errors in the shop drawings or literature. It is the responsibility of the contractor to provide materials and equipment which meet the specifications and job requirements. 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals (O&M Manuals) shall contain: 1. Names and contact information for the Project Architect, Project Engineer. 2. Names and contact information for the General Contractor or Construction Manager. 3. Names and contact information for sub-contractors. 4. Installation, maintenance and operating instructions for each piece of equipment. 5. Parts lists 6. Wiring Diagrams 7. Equipment Start-up and inspection certificates 8. Test and Balance Reports 9. Commissioning Reports 10. Copies of Equipment Warranties 11. Copies of Submittals 12. Record Drawings. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF PLUMBING Page 7 of 8 B. Prior to substantial completion, submit an electronic copy of the O&M manual in PDF format to the Architect, Engineer and Owner for Review and approval. The PDF shall be one file with an index and hyperlinks to each section. Individual bound PDFs without automated navigation will be rejected. All O&M data shall be grouped by the equipment type and ordered by the specification numbering. C. Prior to final payment a final electronic copy of the O&M manual on an archival quality DVD as well as two printed copies, shall be furnished to the owner. Printed copies shall have commercial quality 8- 1/2” x 11” 3-ring binders with tabbed dividers for each section. 1.14 AS-BUILT RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner and Architect/Engineer a marked print showing the location of all concealed or underground pipe or conduit runs and other equipment installed other than as shown on the drawings. Dimension underground lines from established building lines. Indicate all installed pull boxes in conduit runs. B. The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer a marked print showing the location of all mechanical equipment, plumbing fixtures, piping, ductwork, diffusers, grilles, etc. The location of any item which deviates from the bid documents shall be accurately drawn and dimensioned. C. All underground piping and ductwork shall be dimensioned from nearest column and/or exterior walls. The location of all maintenance related items, such as duct access doors, fire dampers, isolation valves, filters, etc., shall be highlighted on the as built drawing. 1.15 PLACING SYSTEM INTO OPERATION A. Prior to the starting of equipment, the Plumbing Contractor shall thoroughly inspect the installation and any work completed by other trades and subcontractors to verify compliance with the contract documents. 1.16 OWNER TRAINING A. General 1. The system training is intended to familiarize the Owner’s operating and maintenance staff with all systems requiring maintenance. Training is to be provided after the systems are in place and operational, after issues noted during commissioning have been resolved, and before final acceptance. 2. Provide second set of training sessions for automatic control systems about 6-9 months after the first sessions. B. Systems Requiring Training 1. All mechanical, electrical, safety, standby, and automatic control systems in the project, and other systems specified elsewhere to have training. C. Attendance: 1. Training is to be provided by contractor’s representatives that are familiar with the system’s operation and maintenance requirements. Individual training sessions (modules) shall be provided for each type or group of systems, separated roughly by trade group that will be performing maintenance on the system. The trades groups and systems typically requiring training are: a. Plumbers (Domestic and Sanitary Plumbing, gas-fired heating, packaged rooftop units, miscellaneous process piping systems) D. Schedule: 1. Duplicate training sessions are to be provided for each training module, so that the Owner’s operating personnel can be split into two groups during training. Duplicate training sessions shall be scheduled on different days. Length of training sessions will be determined by scope of training indicated below, and as coordinated with Owner after draft copy of training documents have been reviewed. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF PLUMBING Page 8 of 8 E. Training Documentation: 1. Contractor to submit draft copy of agenda and training documents to Owner for review at least two weeks prior to training date. 2. Provide a copy of the following items for each person that will be attending the training sessions. Coordinate required number with the Owner. a. Training agenda. b. Summary of new systems and existing systems affected by this project. c. Summary of work performed under this project. d. Control system drawings and sequences of operation. e. List of important maintenance and trouble-shooting operations for all systems. 3. Provide minimum of 2 copies of following items: a. Contract documents including all drawings, specifications, addendums, and change orders. F. Training Sessions: 1. Assemble at location to be determined by the Owner. 2. Distribute training documentation as indicated above. 3. Provide classroom style training if required for orientation and discussion of new systems and existing systems affected by this project, and other issues appropriate for a classroom format. 4. Visit site and review locations; and perform detailed review of operation and maintenance requirements for current systems. 1.17 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall guarantee that all materials and labor installed are new and of first quality and that any material or labor found defective shall be replaced without cost to the Owner within one (1) year after substantial completion of the Contract or one (1) full season of heating and cooling operation, whichever is the greater. The guarantee shall list the date of the beginning of the one (1) year period, which shall be the date that the Substantial Completion Certificate is issued. B. Any damage to the building, caused by defective work or material of the Contractor within the above- mentioned period, shall be satisfactorily repaired without cost to the Owner. C. The guarantee does not include maintenance of equipment. The Owner shall accept full responsibility for proper operation and maintenance of equipment immediately upon substantial completion and occupancy of the building. D. Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions are mounted in Equipment Rooms and Operating Personnel are thoroughly indoctrinated in the operation of all mechanical equipment by the Contractor. E. No equipment installed as part of this project shall be used for temporary heat during construction. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS OF PLUMBING Page 1 of 6 SECTION 22 05 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS OF PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Expansion Fittings and Loops for Piping Systems 2. Alignment Guides and Anchors 3. Dielectric Fittings 4. Pipe Sleeves 5. Sleeve Seals Systems for Piping 6. Silicone Sealant 7. Escutcheons for Piping 8. Floor Plates 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 22 00 00 “General Requirements of Plumbing” for Submittal requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe and Pressure-Vessel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures. B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS A. Rubber Union Connector Expansion Joints 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Engineered Flexible Products EFP b. Mason Industries, Inc. c. MetraFlex. d. Twin City Hose. e. Vibro-Acoustics 2. Material: Twin reinforced-rubber spheres with external restraining cables. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150psig at 170 deg F, unless otherwise indicated. 4. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. B. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Engineered Flexible Products EFP b. Mason Industries, Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Twin City Hose Inc. e. Vibro-Acoustics Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS OF PLUMBING Page 2 of 6 2. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two flexible-metal- hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible hose. 3. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths. 4. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper-alloy fittings with solder-joint end connections. a. Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 340 psig at 450 deg F ratings. 5. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Copper-alloy fittings with threaded end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 300 psig at 70 deg F and 225 psig at 450 deg F ratings. 6. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Carbon-steel fittings with threaded end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 325 psig at 600 deg F ratings. 7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Carbon-steel fittings with flanged end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 200 psig at 70 deg F and 145 psig at 600 deg F ratings. 8. Expansion Joints for DWV and Storm Drainage PVC or Cast Iron Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper- alloy fittings with no hub or flanged end connections. a. Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 340 psig at 450 deg F ratings. b. UPC listed with cleanout plugs located in the U-Bend 9. Expansion Joints for DWV and Storm Drainage or Cast Iron Piping NPS 4 to NPS 8: Stainless steel fittings with no hub or flanged end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 300 psig at 70 deg F and 225 psig at 450 deg F ratings. b. UPC listed with cleanout plugs located in the U-Bend 2.02 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS A. Alignment Guides 1. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding slider for bolting to pipe. B. Anchor Materials: 1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head. 3. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. 4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel. b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel. c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel. 5. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type stud, bonding-system anchor for use with hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. a. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed. b. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless otherwise indicated. c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS OF PLUMBING Page 3 of 6 2.03 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Dielectric Unions are not allowed. C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Matco-Norca. d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: 175psig. 5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 3. Pressure Rating: 150psig. 4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. E. PEX Dielectric Separator: 1. Description: 6” long section of pex piping shall be installed between dis-similar piping materials. 2. Pipe Material: PEX plastic according to ASTM F 876. 3. Oxygen Barrier: O2 permeability <= 0.32 mg/m2/day in accordance with DIN 4726. 4. Fittings: ASTM F 1960, cold expansion fittings and reinforcing rings. 5. Pressure/Temperature Rating: Minimum 100 psig and 180 deg F. 2.04 SLEEVES A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Pipe Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. 2.05 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. GPT; an EnPro Industries company. 4. Metraflex Company (The). B. Description: Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS OF PLUMBING Page 4 of 6 1. Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve. 2. Designed to form a hydrostatic seal of 20-psig. 3. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size. 4. Pressure Plates: Composite plastic. 5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 2.06 ASSEMBLY PENETRATIONS A. All penetrations through a fire rated assembly shall be protected with an approved fire stop system in compliance with the rated assemblies as outlined in the Underwriters Laboratory Listing. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. 3M Company b. Holdrite c. Hilti 2.07 SILICONE SEALANTS A. Silicone, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. Grade P Pourable (self-leveling) formulation is for opening in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated. 2.08 ESCUTCHEONS A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener. B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring- clip fasteners. C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners. 2.09 FLOOR PLATES A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed. B. Install expansion joint per the manufacturer’s written instructions. 3.02 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress. B. Install two guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to expansion joint not more than four (4) pipe diameters from expansion joint. C. Attach guides to pipe, and secure guides to building structure. D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. E. Anchor Attachments: 1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 2. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, Type 24; U bolts bolted to anchor. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS OF PLUMBING Page 5 of 6 F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding. 2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions. G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete. 3.03 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Install Dielectric fittings per the manufacturers written instructions. C. Install pipe hangers immediately upstream and downstream of dielectric fittings. D. Install isolation valves immediately upstream and downstream of dielectric fittings. E. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: PEX Dielectric Separator. F. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Dielectric Flange. 3.04 SLEEVE INTALLATION A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1- inchannular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls. C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inchesabove finished floor level. 2. Using silicone sealant, seal space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system. D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping and fill materials specified in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.05 SLEEVE-SEALS SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at piping entries into building. B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal- system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal. 3.06 SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE A. Use sleeve and sleeve-seals for the following piping-penetration applications: 1. Exterior Concrete Walls Above Grade: Galvanized-Steel Sheet Pipe Sleeves with Sleeve-seal system 2. Exterior Concrete Walls Below Grade: Galvanized-Steel Sheet Pipe Sleeves with Sleeve-seal system 3. Interior or Exterior Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Sleeve not required. 4. Interior Concrete Slabs Above Grade: Galvanized-Steel Sheet Pipe Sleeves with Silicone Sealant or Fire calk 5. Interior Partitions: Sleeve not required – fire calk penetrations of rated assemblies. 3.07 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS OF PLUMBING Page 6 of 6 A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors. B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening. 3.08 FLOOR PLATE INSTALLATION A. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors. B. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING Page 1 of 2 SECTION 22 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Ball Valves 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 22 00 00 “General Requirements for Pluming” for submittal requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 4. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections. 5. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 6. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. C. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted. D. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves. E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. G. Valves in Insulated Piping: 1. Include 2-inchstem extensions. 2. Extended operating handle of nonthermal-conductive material, and protective sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking the vapor seals or disturbing insulation. 3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied. 2.02 BRONZE BALL VALVES, TWO-PIECE WITH FULL PORT AND STAINLESS-STEEL TRIM: A. Manufacturers: Provide products from one of the following: 1. Apollo 2. Nibco 3. Milwaukee 4. Red-White Valves 5. Watts B. Description: 1. Standard: MSS SP-110. 2. SWP Rating: 150 psig. 3. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 4. Body Design: Two piece. 5. Body Material: Bronze. 6. Ends: Solder or Threaded. 7. Seats: PTFE. 8. Stem: Stainless steel. 9. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING Page 2 of 2 10. Port: Full. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. 3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted. B. Select valves with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS ½” – 2” and Smaller: solder ends. 2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2” and Smaller: Threaded ends. 3.03 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Domestic Water ½” – 2” NPS: Ball Valve, Solder or Threaded Ends END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 6 SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Pipe positioning systems. 6. Equipment supports. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 22 00 00 “General Requirements of Plumbing” for submittal requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Equipment supports. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 6 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. B. Copper Pipe Hangers: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components. 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 2.02 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. 2.03 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier. B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength. C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.04 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2.05 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications. 2.06 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 6 B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. D. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. M. Insulated Piping: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 4 of 6 a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.02 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.03 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.05 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting.", Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting.", Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings." C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.06 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 5 of 6 C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications. F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing. G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing. I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 9. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps. K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 6 of 6 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. 2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs. 3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. Q. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 6 SECTION 22 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Elastomeric isolation pads. 2. Elastomeric isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Open-spring isolators. 5. Housed-spring isolators. 6. Restrained-spring isolators. 7. Housed-restrained-spring isolators. 8. Pipe-riser resilient supports. 9. Resilient pipe guides. 10. Elastomeric hangers. 11. Spring hangers. 12. Snubbers. 13. Restraint channel bracings. 14. Restraint cables. 15. Seismic-restraint accessories. 16. Mechanical anchor bolts. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. See Section 22 00 00 “General Requirements for Plumbing” for submittal requirements. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation and seismic-restraint device. 1. Include design calculations and details for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are unavailable, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic-Restraint Loading: 1. Design seismic restraints for components for seismic design forces defined in Chapter 13 of ASCE 7-16. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 6 a. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods, See Structural Drawings for Site Specific SDS Value b. Component Importance Factor, IP = 1.0; except for components conveying, supporting, or otherwise containing natural gas or other flammable and/or explosive contents, IP = 1.5. c. Component Response Modification Factor, RP: See Table 13.6-1 of ASCE 7-16 d. Component Amplification Factor, aP: See Table 13.6-1 of ASCE 7-16 2.02 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads: 1. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading over pad area. 2. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment. 3. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties. 4. Surface Pattern: Smooth, Ribbed or Waffle pattern. 5. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers. 6. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads. 2.03 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS A. Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts: 1. Mounting Plates: a. Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and threaded with threaded studs or bolts. b. Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to support structure. 2. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material. 2.04 RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS A. Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts: 1. Description: All-directional isolator with seismic restraints containing two separate and opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. a. Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel. b. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material. 2.05 OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators: 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa). 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. 2.06 HOUSED-SPRING ISOLATORS A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators in Two-Part Telescoping Housing: 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 6 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig. b. Top housing with attachment and leveling bolt. 2.07 RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint: 1. Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed. a. Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig. b. Top plate with threaded mounting holes. c. Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 2.08 HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS A. Freestanding, Steel, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint in Two-Part Telescoping Housing: 1. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement. a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig. b. Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 2.09 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes separated by a minimum 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. 1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. 2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psig on isolation material providing equal isolation in all directions. 2.10 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 4 of 6 A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. 1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements. 2.11 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods: 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel contact. 2.12 SPRING HANGERS A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in Compression: 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod. 8. Self-centering hanger-rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. 2.13 SNUBBERS A. Description: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings. 1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female- wedge type. 2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. 3. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch- thick resilient cushion. 2.14 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS A. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces. 2.15 RESTRAINT CABLES A. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables. End connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. 2.16 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES A. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 5 of 6 B. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs. C. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used. D. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face. E. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. 2.17 EXECUTION A. components so strength is adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits. 2.18 VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." or Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete." B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment. C. Comply with requirements in Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. D. Equipment Restraints: 1. Install seismic snubbers on plumbing equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure. 2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch. 3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC- ES that provides required submittals for component. E. Piping Restraints: 1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet. F. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. G. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES that provides required submittals for component. H. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base. I. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall. J. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. K. Drilled-in Anchors: Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 6 of 6 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications. 2.19 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping" for piping flexible connections. 2.20 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 2 SECTION 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Warning signs and labels. 2. Pipe labels. 3. Valve Tags. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: White C. Background Color: Red D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions. 2.02 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. 2.03 VALVE TAGS A. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Engineer. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener. 1. Material: 0.032-inch thick brass or aluminum. 2. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 2 B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal- operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. B. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 1. Compressed Air Piping: a. Background: Blue b. Letter Colors: White 2. Domestic Water Piping: a. Background: Green b. Letter Colors: White 3. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping: a. Background Color: Black b. Letter Color: White 3.02 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory- fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. 1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Valve-Tag Color: Natural Brass or Aluminum. 3.03 VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION A. Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 07 16 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND PIPING INSULATION Page 1 of 10 SECTION 22 07 16 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating requirements for equipment and piping. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See section 22 00 00 “General Requirements of Plumbing” for submittal requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Equipment Insulation Schedule" "Piping Insulation Schedule," and “Duct Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Aeroflex USA, Inc. b. Armacell LLC. c. K-Flex USA. G. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 07 16 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND PIPING INSULATION Page 2 of 10 b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. H. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Owens Corning. 2. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. I. Thermal Insulating Wool: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Owens Corning b. Prior Approved Equal 2. Type I, 1000 Deg F Materials: Inorganic glass fibers bonded with thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C553, TIW Type I. 2.02 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449. 2.03 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 2.04 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF- 19565C, Type II. B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 4. Color: White. C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services. 1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 4. Color: White. 2.05 SEALANTS Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 07 16 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND PIPING INSULATION Page 3 of 10 A. Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: Aluminum. B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: White. 2.06 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory- applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2.07 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. c. Proto Corporation. d. Speedline Corporation. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories. C. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. c. RPR Products, Inc. 2. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing or factory cut and rolled to size. 3. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 4. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper or 2.5-mil-thick polysurlyn. 5. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers: a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. b. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 07 16 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND PIPING INSULATION Page 4 of 10 c. Tee covers. d. Flange and union covers. e. End caps. f. Beveled collars. g. Valve covers. h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available. D. Underground Direct-Buried Jacket: 125-mil-thick vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven-glass fiber or polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation. b. Polyguard Products, Inc. 2.08 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Width: 2 inches. 2. Thickness: 6 mils. 3. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 500 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width. C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Width: 2 inches. 2. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 5 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width. 2.09 SECUREMENTS A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 07 16 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND PIPING INSULATION Page 5 of 10 c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick, galvanized- steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel. 2.10 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface. B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14. 2.11 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. b. Truebro. c. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Truebro. b. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 07 16 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND PIPING INSULATION Page 6 of 10 B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item as specified in insulation schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 07 16 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND PIPING INSULATION Page 7 of 10 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. Q. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. 3.03 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.04 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 07 16 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND PIPING INSULATION Page 8 of 10 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Joints and Couplings: 1. All piping fittings shall be insulated by filling the total void over all fittings between straight runs of pipe insulation with thermal insulating wool, forming a uniform insulation thickness equal to, or exceeding, the adjacent pipe insulation. 2. Finish all insulated pipe fittings by applying PVC fitting covers overlapping the adjacent pipe insulation outer covering. 3. For hot service piping (105F and above), secure the PVC fitting covers stainless steel tack fasteners. 4. For cold service piping (60F and below), seal the ends of the adjacent pipe insulation with vapor barrier mastic, ensure that the PVC fitting cover overlaps the adjacent pipe insulation jacket by 2” minimum and secure PVC fitting covers to adjacent pipe insulation with 2” wide PVC Tape. 5. Fitting covers for grooved piping systems shall be the type specifically manufactured for grooved piping systems. 3.06 INSULATION INSTALLATION ON VALVES AND PIPE SPECIALTIES A. Install removable insulation covers on all valves and specialties 1-1/2” and larger. 1. Valves, Strainers, and Unions 1-1/2 – 2 NPS: “No Sweat” re-usable valve covers or approved equal product. 3.07 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 07 16 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND PIPING INSULATION Page 9 of 10 B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. C. Where underground direct-buried jacket are indicated, install per the manufacturers instructions. 3.08 FINISHES A. Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material and where Required: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting." 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Do not field paint aluminum or PVC jacketing. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance. C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses for Plumbing piping are identified in the table below. If more than one material is listed for an application, selection from materials listed is at the Contractor's option. Application Nominal Pipe Size Insulation Type Insulation Conductivity (Btu x in) / (hr x ft2 x F) Insulation Thickness (in) Vapor Barrier Factory Installed Jacket Type Domestic Cold Water Piping All Glass Fiber or Flexible Elastomeric 0.27 1 Yes ASJ Domestic Hot Water and Recirc. ½ - 1-1/4 NPS Glass Fiber or Flexible Elastomeric 0.27 1 No ASJ 3.11 FIELD APPLIED JACKETING SCHEDULE A. Field applied jackets for Plumbing piping are identified in the table below. If more than one material is listed for an application, selection from materials listed is at the Contractor's option. Application Installation Location Field Applied Jacketing Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 07 16 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND PIPING INSULATION Page 10 of 10 Application Installation Location Field Applied Jacketing Domestic Water Piping Indoors PVC when piping is exposed and within 7ft of the floor. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Page 1 of 6 SECTION 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Copper tube and fittings. 2. Piping joining materials. 3. Transition fittings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 05 00 “General Provisions of Plumbing” 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. See Section 22 00 00 “General Requirements of Plumbing” for submittal requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61 Annex G. and Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw." C. Comply with NSF Standard 372 for low lead. 2.02 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper. B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper. C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. E. Copper Unions: 1. MSS SP-123. 2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body. 3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. 4. Solder-joint or threaded ends. F. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings: 1. Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in each end. 2. Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in each end. 2.03 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: 1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated. 2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Page 2 of 6 E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8M/A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. General Requirements: 1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EARTHWORK A. Comply with requirements in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install domestic water piping level and plumb. D. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 22 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." E. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. F. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. G. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. H. Install piping to permit valve servicing. I. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. J. Install piping free of sags and bends. K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. L. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty. M. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 22 05 00 "General Provisions of Plumbing." N. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 22 05 00 "General Provisions of Plumbing." O. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 22 05 00 "General Provisions of Plumbing." 3.03 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Page 3 of 6 C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter. E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. G. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. 3.04 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping. B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping: 1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions. 3.05 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 22 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch. E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. G. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PEX tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 32 inches with 3/8-inch rod. H. Install hangers for vertical PEX tubing every 48 inches. I. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-58 and manufacturer's written instructions. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Page 4 of 6 3.06 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping. 2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than that required by plumbing code. 4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3.07 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Piping Inspections: a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: 1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures. 2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements. c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Piping Tests: a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Page 5 of 6 f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.09 ADJUSTING A. Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow. a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch. b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated. 5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Page 6 of 6 Application Location Size Material Fittings Domestic Water Piping Indoor Above Grade All Type L Copper Copper: Sweat or Pressure Seal END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES Page 1 of 3 SECTION 22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves. 2. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves. 3. Drain valves. 4. Water-hammer arresters. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 05 00 “General Provisions of Plumbing” for Expansion Loops, Alignment Guides, Dielectric Fittings, Sleeves and Sleeve Seals, Sealants, Escutcheons and floor plates. 2. Section 22 05 19 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure gages. 3. Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping" for piping and fittings. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. See Section 22 00 00 “General Requirements of Plumbing” for submittal requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 14. Mark "NSF-pw" on plastic piping components. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125psig unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES A. Point of Use Water-Temperature Limiting Devices: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Leonard Valve Company. b. Symmons Industries, Inc. c. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. d. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1070. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Type: Thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve. 5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet. 7. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-control handle. 8. Valve Finish: Chrome plated. 2.04 BRONZE, CALIBRATED-ORIFICE, BALANCING VALVES 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand. b. Flow Design, Inc. c. Nexus Valve, Inc. d. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc. 2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES Page 2 of 3 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Plug: Resin. 5. Seat: PTFE. 6. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. 2.05 DRAIN VALVES A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves: 1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain. 2.06 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Water-Hammer Arresters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co. b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. c. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. d. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3. Type: Metal bellows or Copper tube with piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet. 1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. B. Install balancing valves at each hot water recirculation branch connection to the return main. C. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201. 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical connections. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES Page 3 of 3 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves. Verify flow rates with Engineer prior to setting. B. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves. Verify temperature setting with engineer prior to setting. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 1 of 6 SECTION 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. See section 22 00 00 “General Requirements of Plumbing” for submittal requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. See section 22 05 48 “Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment” 2.02 PIPING MATERIALS A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.03 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. B. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings: 1. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. 2. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 2.04 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Type DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings. C. Copper Pressure Fittings: 1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to- metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. D. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end. 1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. 2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. E. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 2 of 6 2.05 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping. B. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. C. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. D. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. E. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 2.06 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Transition Couplings: 1. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. 2. Unshielded, Non-pressure Transition Couplings: a. Standard: ASTM C 1173. b. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. c. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. d. Sleeve Materials: 1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. 3. Shielded, Non-pressure Transition Couplings: a. Standard: ASTM C 1460. b. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. c. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EARTH MOVING A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving." 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. 1. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. 2. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 3 of 6 H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 22 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." K. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. 1. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. 2. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. a. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. 3. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. 4. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. a. Reducing size of waste piping in direction of flow is prohibited. L. Lay buried building waste piping beginning at low point of each system. 1. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. 2. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. 3. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. M. Install soil and waste and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Horizontal Sanitary Waste: 1/4” per foot downward in direction of flow. 1/8” per foot is allowable if necessitated by site conditions. 2. Vent Piping: 1/8” per foot down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. N. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." O. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." P. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665. Q. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. R. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping. a. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 22 13 19 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." S. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. 1. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 22 05 00 "General Provisions of Plumbing." U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. 1. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 22 05 00 "General Provisions of Plumbing." V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. 1. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 22 05 00 "General Provisions of Plumbing." Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 4 of 6 3.03 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. B. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use ASTM B 813, water- flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder. C. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe according to AWWA C606. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections, over gasket, with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts. D. Plastic, Non-pressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes. 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 appendixes. 3.04 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION A. Transition Couplings: 1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs. 2. In Waste Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. 3.05 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 22 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling. D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods. F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches. G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet. H. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 4. NPS 3 and NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 5 of 6 I. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. J. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. K. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches. L. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-58 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.06 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect waste and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect waste piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect waste and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. 5. Equipment: Connect waste piping as indicated. a. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. b. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger. D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3.07 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Re-inspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for re-inspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 6 of 6 D. Test sanitary waste and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. a. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced waste and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. a. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test waste and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. a. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. b. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. c. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. a. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. b. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. c. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. d. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.09 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect sanitary waste and vent piping during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint. E. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by waste and vent piping installation. 3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Piping system materials are identified in the table below. If more than one material is listed, selection from the materials listed is at the Contractor’s option. For existing systems, match pipe type to existing installation. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 13 19 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES Page 1 of 2 SECTION 22 13 19 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 22 13 16 “Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping” 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 22 00 00 “General Requirements of Plumbing” for submittal requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS A. Sanitary waste piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary waste piping specialty components. 2.02 CLEANOUTS A. Above Grade Wall Cleanout 1. Provide JR Smith 4422 or approved equal 2. Description: Cast iron caulked spigot ferrule with cast bronze taper thread plug and stainless- steel round cover and screw. B. Finished Floor Cleanout 1. Provide JR Smith 4100 or approved equal 2. Description: Cast iron cleanout with extra heavy-duty round, adjustable, scoriated, secured nickel bronze top, and no-hub outlet, gasket seal bronze plug and flashing clamp for. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout with top flush with finished floor. It shall be the responsibility of the plumbing contractor to coordinate the installation of cleanouts with the general contractor and floor contractor to ensure that floor cleanouts are properly adjusted so that the top is flush and level with finished flooring material. Cleanout covers that are not flush and level with the finished floor will be rejected and the plumbing contractor will be required to sawcut or core drill the floor, provide and install and new cleanout, coordination installation of new concrete and new finished flooring material. C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. D. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 13 19 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES Page 2 of 2 E. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." D. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 41 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES Page 1 of 3 SECTION 22 41 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plumbing fixtures shown and scheduled on the drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See section 22 00 00 “General Requirements of Plumbing” for submittal requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PLUMBING FIXTURE MANUFACTURERS A. DRINKING FOUNTAINS & WATER COOLERS 1. Fixtures a. Haws b. Elkay c. Acorn B. LAVATORIES 1. Fixtures a. Kohler b. American Standard c. Toto 2. Carriers And Supports a. Jr Smith b. Zurn c. Josam 3. Faucets a. Moen Commercial b. Sloan c. Chicago Faucets 4. Piping Covers a. Trubro b. Plummerex C. STAINLESS STEEL SINKS 1. Fixtures a. Elkay b. Just c. Kohler 2. Faucets a. Moen Commercial b. T&S Brass c. Chicago Faucet D. STOP VALVES 1. Brasscraft 2. Watts 3. Kingston Brass E. THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES 1. Symmons 2. Watts Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 41 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES Page 2 of 3 3. Leonard F. WATER CLOSETS 1. Fixtures a. Kohler b. American Standard c. Toto d. Sloan 2. Flush Valves a. Moen b. Zurn c. Sloan 3. Seats a. Kohler b. Church c. Olsonite 4. Carriers and Supports a. Jr Smith b. Zurn c. Josam PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. B. Install floor-mounted water closets on closet flange attachments to drainage piping. C. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework. D. Install pedestal lavatories on pedestals and secured to wood blocking in wall. E. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. 1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 22 05 23 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." F. Install toilet seats on water closets. G. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. H. Install traps on fixture outlets. 1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes unless otherwise indicated. I. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have disposer. Install switch where indicated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated. J. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories and sinks. K. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep- pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. L. Seal joints between plumbing fixtures, counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. M. The Plumbing contractor shall furnish a 24V control transformer to all hard wired optical/handsfree fixtures. The Plumbing contractor shall coordinate with the electrical contractor to install all line and Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 22 41 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES Page 3 of 3 low voltage wiring in compliance with section 26 05 19 “Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables”, and section 26 05 23 “Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables”. 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping." C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping." D. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories and sinks. E. All electrical connections shall be coordinated by the plumbing contractor with the electrical contractor. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Operate and adjust plumbing fixtures and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After completing installation of plumbing fixtures, inspect and repair damaged finishes. B. Clean plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. C. Provide protective covering for installed plumbing fixtures and fittings. D. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF HVAC Page 1 of 8 SECTION 23 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The requirements listed in this section are supplemental to the Division 01 General Requirements. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor to examine and refer to all Architectural, Civil, Structural, Plumbing, Electrical, and Landscape plans and specifications for construction conditions which may affect the scope of HVAC work. Inspect the building site and existing facilities for verification of present conditions. Make proper provisions for these conditions in performance of the work and cost thereof. C. Mechanical work for this project shall include all items, articles, materials and the associated labor mentioned, scheduled or shown in these specifications and in the accompanying drawings. D. Furnish and install all equipment, materials and any required incidental items required by good practice to complete the systems described herein. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Work shall meet the requirements of the plans and specifications and shall not be less than the minimum requirements of applicable sections of the latest Codes and Standards of the following Organizations: 1. American Gas Association (AGA) 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 4. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association Inc. (SMACNA) 5. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 6. National Electrical Code (NEC) 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 9. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) 10. Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA) 11. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) 12. International Mechanical Code (IMC) 13. International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC) 14. International Building Code (IBC) 15. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) 16. Requirements of the Serving Utility Company 17. Local and State Codes and Ordinances 1.03 FEES AND PERMITS A. The Mechanical Contractor shall pay all fees and arrange all permits required for work done under their contract and under their supervision by subcontract. B. All usage contracts between the Owner and the serving utilities company, such as membership and usage charges or fees, etc., for the purpose of obtaining the services for the utility company shall be applied for and paid for by the Owner. 1.04 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturer’s trade names and catalog numbers listed are intended to indicate the quality of equipment or materials desired. Manufacturers not listed in the specification will be considered substitutions and must have prior approval. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF HVAC Page 2 of 8 B. See Division 01 for Substitutions Procedures. Requests for substitution are to be submitted sufficiently ahead of the deadline, to give ample time for examination. Prior approval request for substitution must indicate the specific item or items to be furnished in lieu of those scheduled, together with complete technical and comparative data on scheduled items and items proposed for substitution. C. If the engineer approves any proposed substitution, the approved product will be listed in an addendum. Bidders shall not rely on approval made in any other manner. D. Mechanical equipment may be installed with manufacturer’s standard finish and color except where specific color, finish or choice is indicated. If the manufacturer has no standard finish, equipment shall have a prime coat and two finish coats of gray enamel. E. High altitude operation: Capacity of all equipment is to be sized and manufactured to perform at the elevation of the project site. If not specifically indicated in the equipment schedule or in the specifications provide all required accessories and equipment for proper operation at elevation of the project site. F. This Contractor shall be responsible for materials and equipment installed under this contract. Contractor shall also be responsible for the protection of materials and equipment of others from damage as a result of his work. G. Manufactured material and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by manufacturer unless herein specified to the contrary. H. This Contractor shall make the required arrangement with the General Contractor or Construction Manager for the introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. I. Store materials and equipment indoors at the job site. If this is not possible, store on raised platforms and protect from the weather by means of waterproof covers. Coverings shall permit circulation of air around the materials to prevent condensation of moisture. Screen or cap openings in equipment to prevent the entry of vermin. 1.05 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. The drawings are diagrammatic and do not necessarily show exact location of piping and ductwork unless specifically dimensioned. Riser and other diagrams are schematic and do not necessarily show the physical arrangement of the equipment. They shall not be used for obtaining lineal runs of piping or ductwork, nor shall they be used for shop drawings for piping and ductwork fabrication or ordering. Discrepancies shown on different plans, or between plans and actual field conditions shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for resolution. 1.06 COMMISSIONING OF SYSTEMS A. Mechanical systems with a total cooling capacity exceeding 480,000 Btu/hr or a combined heating and service water-heating capacity exceeding 600,000 Btu/hr shall be commissioned by a registered professional in accordance with Section C408 of the International Energy Conservation Code. The mechanical contractor shall correct all installation deficiencies identified by the commissioning agent at no cost to the owner. B. See Sections 019113 “Commissioning Requirements of Contractor”, 220800 “Commissioning of Plumbing”, 230800 “Commissioning of HVAC”, 260800 “Commissioning of Electrical Systems”. 1.07 RESPONSIBILITY A. HVAC work shall conform to requirements of all divisions 22 and 23 specifications. B. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of a satisfactory and complete system in accordance with the intent of the drawing and specifications. Provide, at no extra cost, all incidental items, materials, accessories and labor required for completion of the work even though they are not specifically mentioned or indicated on the drawings or in the specifications. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF HVAC Page 3 of 8 C. The drawings do not attempt to show complete details of the building construction which affect the mechanical installation; and reference is therefore required to the Architectural, Civil, Structural, Landscape and Electrical drawings and specifications and to shop drawings of all trades for additional details which affect the installation of the work covered under this Division of the Contract. D. Location of mechanical system components shall be checked for conflicts with openings, structural members and components of other systems having fixed locations. In the event of any conflicts, the Architect/Engineer shall be consulted, and their decision shall govern. Necessary changes shall be made at the Contractor’s expense. E. Determine, and be responsible for, the proper location and character of inserts for hangers, chases, sleeves, and other openings in the construction required for the work and obtain this information well in advance of the construction progress so work will not be delayed. F. Final location of inserts, hangers, etc., required for each installation, must be coordinated with facilities required for other installations to prevent interference. G. Take extreme caution not to install work that connects to equipment until such time as complete Shop Drawings of such equipment have been approved by the Architect/Engineer. Any work installed by the Contractor, prior to approval of Shop Drawings, will be at the Contractor's risk. H. All modifications and changes required due to installation of equipment other than the scheduled equipment shall be made at the contractor’s expense. I. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate changes to work by other trades that result from the installation of equipment other than the scheduled equipment. J. If the provided equipment is heavier or larger than the scheduled or specified equipment, it shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate the required structural changes and pay for any and all associated cost. K. If the provided equipment has different motor characteristics or electrical requirements than the scheduled or specified equipment, it shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate the required changes and pay for any and all associated cost. L. If larger or additional electrical conduits, wire or breakers are required due to the installation of equipment other than the scheduled or specified equipment it shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate the required changes and pay for any and all associated cost. M. If the provided equipment requires different fluid flow rates than the scheduled or specified equipment, it shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all required changes including but not limited to pumps, piping, valves, etc and pay for any and all associated cost. N. At all times during the performance of this Contract, properly protect work from damage and protect the Owner's property from injury of loss. Make good any damage, injury or loss, except such as may be directly due to errors in the Bidding Documents or caused by Agents or Employees of the Owner. Adequately protect adjacent property as provided by law and the Bidding Documents. Provide and maintain passageways, guard fences, lights and other facilities for protection required by Public Authority or Local conditions. O. The Contractor shall be responsible for damages incurred due to the work of their contractors, to the building or its contents, people, etc. 1.08 REVIEW A. All work and material is subject to review at any time by the Architect/Engineer or his representative. If the Architect/Engineer or his representative finds material that does not conform to these specifications or that is not properly installed or finished, correct the deficiencies in a manner satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer at the Contractor’s expense. 1.09 WORKMANSHIP Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF HVAC Page 4 of 8 A. Work under this contract shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular trade, including work necessary to properly complete the installation in a workmanlike manner to present a neat and finished appearance. B. Obtain Architect's/Engineer's approval before performing any cutting on structural members or patching of building surfaces. Any damage to the building or equipment by the Mechanical Contractor shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and shall be repaired by skilled craftsmen of the trades involved at the Contractor’s expense. C. Chases, openings, sleeves, hangers, anchors, recesses, equipment pads, and framing for equipment; shall be provided by others only if so noted on the drawings. Otherwise, they will be provided by the Mechanical Contractor for their work. 1.10 COORDINATION A. The Mechanical Contractor shall plan their work to proceed with a minimum interference with other trades and it shall be their responsibility to inform the General Contractor of all openings required in the building structure for installation of work, and to provide sleeves as required. Dimensions of equipment installed and/or provided by others shall be checked so that correct clearances and connections may be made. B. In general, pipelines requiring gravity drainage shall be installed first, followed by ductwork, large piping mains and electrical conduit. The location of fire protection piping and heads shall be coordinated with other trades to ensure that installations by other trades do not block heads. C. Leave sufficient space for the installation of insulation on piping and ductwork as specified. It is not acceptable to compress pipe or duct insulation for any reason. 1.11 CLEANING A. Keep the job site clean. The Mechanical Contractor shall remove all waste and rubbish associated with their work. B. Upon completion of work, remove materials, scraps and debris related to mechanical work and leave all spaces including tunnels, crawlspaces, pipe or duct chases and ceiling plenums clean and orderly. C. The Mechanical contractor will be responsible for cleaning the exterior and interior of all equipment prior to star-up. Once all equipment has been cleaned it shall be inspected by the Architect/Engineer prior to start-up. D. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide dust protection of existing materials and equipment as well a new materials and equipment for the duration of the project. Protect existing materials and equipment from damage for the duration of the project. Clean the exterior and interior of all existing equipment at the completion of the project. 1.12 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Offices 1. The Mechanical Contractor must have the permission of the Owner and General Contractor or Construction Manager to install a temporary office/job trailer on the project site. 2. The Contractor shall completely remove his temporary installations when no longer needed and the premises shall be completely clean, disinfected, patched, and refinished to match adjacent areas. B. Ladders and Scaffolds 1. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide their own ladders, scaffolds, etc. of substantial construction for access to their work in various portions of the building as may be required. When no longer needed, they shall be removed by the Contractor. C. Protection Devices Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF HVAC Page 5 of 8 1. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide and maintain his own necessary barricades, fences, signal lights, etc., required by all governing authorities or shown on the drawings. When no longer needed, they shall be removed by the Contractor. D. TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION 1. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all necessary first aid hand fire extinguishers for Class A, B, C and special hazards as may exist in his own work area only in accordance with good and safe practice and as required by jurisdictional safety authority. 1.13 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals will be required for each piece of equipment, material or product as noted in the table below. All submittals shall be submitted, reviewed and all discrepancies addressed prior to ordering equipment or starting work. Any equipment ordered without having first completed the submittal process is done at the risk of the contractor. Any work performed prior to completing the submittal process is done at the risk of the contractor. B. Specification Section Product Data Performance Data Shop Drawing Delegated Design Wiring Diagram Color Chart Sustainability Compliance Notes 230500 X X 230529 X X Provide Delegated Design per the requirements of this section 230548 X X Provide Delegated Design per the requirements of this section 230553 X 230593 Provide T&B Certifications 230713 X X X X Provide Shop Drawings with Ductwork Plans 233113 X X X X 233300 X X 233346 X 233423 X X X X 233713 X X C. Submittal Definitions 1. Product Data: Provide manufacturers’ cut sheets that include general product information including but not limited to, model number, physical data, nominal capacities, and rough-in requirements. 2. Performance Data: Provide detailed performance and capacities based on project specific requirements including but not limited to: flow rates, capacities, pressure loss, temperatures, fan curves, pump curves, part load performance, sound data, and electrical characteristics. 3. Shop Drawings: Provide detailed drawings of the equipment showing overall dimensions, location of electrical and piping connection, location of anchorage points, location of electrical and control panels, and all operating, service and maintenance clearances. 4. Delegated Design: Provide detailed drawings prepared and stamped by a registered Professional Engineer, that detail pertinent design criteria, the materials and products to be installed and the required installation locations. 5. Wiring Diagram: Provide diagrams that identify, and detail required field wiring. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF HVAC Page 6 of 8 6. Color Chart: Provide a physical color chart of material samples required for selection of equipment colors. 7. Sustainability Compliance: Provide literature that indicates a products compliance with LEED or Green Globes. See Division 01 for additional information and requirements. D. Submittal Formats: 1. Include the following information with each submittal: a. Project Name b. Submittal Date c. Name of Architect d. Name of Engineer e. Name of General Contractor or Construction Manager f. Name of Sub-Contractor g. Name of firm or entity that prepared the submittal h. Unique Submittal Number i. Type of Submittal j. Specification Section k. Name or Mark of equipment or material and detail or drawings reference. 2. All Submittals with the exception of color charts or material samples shall be electronically transmitted PDFs. E. Submittal Requirements 1. Submittals shall be submitted as a complete specification section. The submittal must include all materials and equipment for that specification section. Submittals for individual materials of equipment will be rejected without review. 2. Submittals shall be complete, clearly show item used, size, dimensions, capacity, rough in, etc., as required for complete check and installation. Manufacturer’s literature showing more than one item shall be clearly marked as to which item is being furnished or it will be rejected and returned without review. 3. Each submittal shall be thoroughly checked by the Contractor for compliance with the Contract Document requirements, accuracy of dimensions, relationship to the work of other trades, and conformance with sound, safe practices as to erection and installation. Each submittal shall then bear a stamp evidencing such checking and shall show corrections made, if any. Submittals requiring extensive corrections shall be revised before submission. Each submittal not stamped and signed by the Contractor evidencing such checking will be rejected and returned without review. 4. On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet. 5. Review of the shop drawings and literature by the engineer shall not relieve the contractor for responsibility for deviations from the drawings or specifications, nor shall it relieve the contractor from responsibility for errors in the shop drawings or literature. It is the responsibility of the contractor to provide materials and equipment which meet the specifications and job requirements. 1.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals (O&M Manuals) shall contain: 1. Names and contact information for the Project Architect, Project Engineer. 2. Names and contact information for the General Contractor or Construction Manager. 3. Names and contact information for sub-contractors. 4. Installation, maintenance and operating instructions for each piece of equipment. 5. Parts lists Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF HVAC Page 7 of 8 6. Wiring Diagrams 7. Equipment Start-up and inspection certificates 8. Test and Balance Reports 9. Commissioning Reports 10. Copies of Equipment Warranties 11. Copies of Submittals 12. Record Drawings. B. Prior to substantial completion, submit an electronic copy of the O&M manual in PDF format to the Architect, Engineer and Owner for Review and approval. The PDF shall be one file with an index and hyperlinks to each section. Individual bound PDFs without automated navigation will be rejected. All O&M data shall be grouped by the equipment type and ordered by the specification numbering. C. Prior to final payment a final electronic copy of the O&M manual on an archival quality DVD as well as two printed copies, shall be furnished to the owner. Printed copies shall have commercial quality 8- 1/2” x 11” 3-ring binders with tabbed dividers for each section. 1.15 AS-BUILT RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner and Architect/Engineer a marked print showing the location of all concealed or underground pipe or conduit runs and other equipment installed other than as shown on the drawings. Dimension underground lines from established building lines. Indicate all installed pull boxes in conduit runs. B. The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer a marked print showing the location of all mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork, diffusers, grilles, etc. The location of any item which deviates from the bid documents shall be accurately drawn and dimensioned. C. All underground piping and ductwork shall be dimensioned from nearest column and/or exterior walls. The location of all maintenance related items, such as duct access doors, fire dampers, isolation valves, filters, etc., shall be highlighted on the as built drawing. 1.16 PLACING SYSTEM INTO OPERATION A. Prior to the starting of equipment, the Mechanical Contractor shall thoroughly inspect the installation and any work completed by other trades and subcontractors to verify compliance with the contract documents. B. Start-up of all HVAC equipment shall be completed by factory trained representatives. At the completion of start-up, the factory representative shall submit to the architect and engineer, a start-up report that indicates any problems encountered, potential problems including installation issues, adjustments made or required to be made to ensure proper operation of the equipment. Any installation deficiencies identified shall be corrected at no additional cost to the owner. 1.17 OWNER TRAINING A. General 1. The system training is intended to familiarize the Owner’s operating and maintenance staff with all systems requiring maintenance. Training is to be provided after the systems are in place and operational, after issues noted during commissioning have been resolved, and before final acceptance. 2. Provide second set of training sessions for automatic control systems about 6-9 months after the first sessions. B. Systems Requiring Training 1. All mechanical, electrical, safety, standby, and automatic control systems in the project, and other systems specified elsewhere to have training. C. Attendance: Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF HVAC Page 8 of 8 1. Training is to be provided by contractor’s representatives that are familiar with the system’s operation and maintenance requirements. Individual training sessions (modules) shall be provided for each type or group of systems, separated roughly by trade group that will be performing maintenance on the system. The trades groups and systems typically requiring training are: a. HVAC (Fan systems, controls) D. Schedule: 1. Duplicate training sessions are to be provided for each training module, so that the Owner’s operating personnel can be split into two groups during training. Duplicate training sessions shall be scheduled on different days. Length of training sessions will be determined by scope of training indicated below, and as coordinated with Owner after draft copy of training documents have been reviewed. E. Training Documentation: 1. Contractor to submit draft copy of agenda and training documents to Owner for review at least two weeks prior to training date. 2. Provide a copy of the following items for each person that will be attending the training sessions. Coordinate required number with the Owner. a. Training agenda. b. Summary of new systems and existing systems affected by this project. c. Summary of work performed under this project. d. Control system drawings and sequences of operation. e. List of important maintenance and trouble-shooting operations for all systems. 3. Provide minimum of 2 copies of following items: a. Contract documents including all drawings, specifications, addendums, and change orders. F. Training Sessions: 1. Assemble at location to be determined by the Owner. 2. Distribute training documentation as indicated above. 3. Provide classroom style training if required for orientation and discussion of new systems and existing systems affected by this project, and other issues appropriate for a classroom format. 4. Visit site and review locations; and perform detailed review of operation and maintenance requirements for current systems. 1.18 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall guarantee that all materials and labor installed are new and of first quality and that any material or labor found defective shall be replaced without cost to the Owner within one (1) year after substantial completion of the Contract or one (1) full season of heating and cooling operation, whichever is the greater. The guarantee shall list the date of the beginning of the one (1) year period, which shall be the date that the Substantial Completion Certificate is issued. B. Any damage to the building, caused by defective work or material of the Contractor within the above- mentioned period, shall be satisfactorily repaired without cost to the Owner. C. The guarantee does not include maintenance of equipment. The Owner shall accept full responsibility for proper operation and maintenance of equipment immediately upon substantial completion and occupancy of the building. D. Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions are mounted in Equipment Rooms and Operating Personnel are thoroughly indoctrinated in the operation of all mechanical equipment by the Contractor. E. No equipment installed as part of this project shall be used for temporary heat during construction. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC Page 1 of 6 SECTION 23 05 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Expansion Fittings and Loops for Piping Systems 2. Alignment Guides and Anchors 3. Dielectric Fittings 4. Pipe Sleeves 5. Sleeve Seals Systems for Piping 6. Silicone Sealant 7. Escutcheons for Piping 8. Floor Plates 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 00 00 “General Requirements of HVAC” for Submittal requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe and Pressure-Vessel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures. B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS A. Rubber Union Connector Expansion Joints 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Engineered Flexible Products EFP b. Mason Industries, Inc. c. MetraFlex. d. Twin City Hose. e. Vibro-Acoustics 2. Material: Twin reinforced-rubber spheres with external restraining cables. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 170 deg F, unless otherwise indicated. 4. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. B. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Engineered Flexible Products EFP b. Mason Industries, Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Twin City Hose Inc. e. Vibro-Acoustics Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC Page 2 of 6 2. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two flexible-metal- hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible hose. 3. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths. 4. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper-alloy fittings with solder-joint end connections. a. Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 340 psig at 450 deg F ratings. 5. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Copper-alloy fittings with threaded end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 300 psig at 70 deg F and 225 psig at 450 deg F ratings. 6. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Carbon-steel fittings with threaded end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 325 psig at 600 deg F ratings. 7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Carbon-steel fittings with flanged end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 200 psig at 70 deg F and 145 psig at 600 deg F ratings. 8. Expansion Joints for DWV and Storm Drainage PVC or Cast Iron Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper- alloy fittings with no hub or flanged end connections. a. Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 340 psig at 450 deg F ratings. b. UPC listed with cleanout plugs located in the U-Bend 9. Expansion Joints for DWV and Storm Drainage or Cast Iron Piping NPS 4 to NPS 8: Stainless steel fittings with no hub or flanged end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 300 psig at 70 deg F and 225 psig at 450 deg F ratings. b. UPC listed with cleanout plugs located in the U-Bend 2.02 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS A. Alignment Guides 1. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding slider for bolting to pipe. B. Anchor Materials: 1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head. 3. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. 4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel. b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel. c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel. 5. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type stud, bonding-system anchor for use with hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. a. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed. b. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless otherwise indicated. c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC Page 3 of 6 2.03 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Dielectric Unions are not allowed. C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Matco-Norca. d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. E. PEX Dielectric Separator: 1. Description: 6” long section of pex piping shall be installed between dis-similar piping materials. 2. Pipe Material: PEX plastic according to ASTM F 876. 3. Oxygen Barrier: O2 permeability <= 0.32 mg/m2/day in accordance with DIN 4726. 4. Fittings: ASTM F 1960, cold expansion fittings and reinforcing rings. 5. Pressure/Temperature Rating: Minimum 100 psig and 180 deg F. 2.04 SLEEVES A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Pipe Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. 2.05 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. GPT; an EnPro Industries company. 4. Metraflex Company (The). B. Description: Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC Page 4 of 6 1. Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve. 2. Designed to form a hydrostatic seal of 20-psig. 3. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size. 4. Pressure Plates: Composite plastic. 5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 2.06 ASSEMBLY PENETRATIONS A. All penetrations through a fire rated assembly shall be protected with an approved fire stop system in compliance with the rated assemblies as outlined in the Underwriters Laboratory Listing. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. 3M Company b. Holdrite c. Hilti 2.07 SILICONE SEALANTS A. Silicone, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. Grade P Pourable (self-leveling) formulation is for opening in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated. 2.08 ESCUTCHEONS A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener. B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring- clip fasteners. C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners. 2.09 FLOOR PLATES A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed. B. Install expansion joint per the manufacture’s written instructions. 3.02 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress. B. Install two guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to expansion joint not more than four (4) pipe diameters from expansion joint. C. Attach guides to pipe, and secure guides to building structure. D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. E. Anchor Attachments: 1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 2. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, Type 24; U bolts bolted to anchor. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC Page 5 of 6 F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding. 2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions. G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete. 3.03 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Install Dielectric fittings per the manufacturers written instructions. C. Install pipe hangers immediately upstream and downstream of dielectric fittings. D. Install isolation valves immediately upsteam and downstream of dielectric fittings. E. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: PEX Dielectric Separator. F. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Dielectric Flange. 3.04 SLEEVE INTALLATION A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1- inchannular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls. C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inchesabove finished floor level. 2. Using silicone sealant, seal space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system. D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping and fill materials specified in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.05 SLEEVE-SEALS SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at piping entries into building. B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal- system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal. 3.06 SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE A. Use sleeve and sleeve-seals for the following piping-penetration applications: 1. Exterior Concrete Walls Above Grade: Galvanized-Steel Sheet Pipe Sleeves with Sleeve-seal system 2. Exterior Concrete Walls Below Grade: Galvanized-Steel Sheet Pipe Sleeves with Sleeve-seal system 3. Interior or Exterior Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Sleeve not required. 4. Interior Concrete Slabs Above Grade: Galvanized-Steel Sheet Pipe Sleeves with Silicone Sealant or Fire calk 5. Interior Partitions: Sleeve not require – fire calk penetrations of rated assemblies. 3.07 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 00 GENERAL PROVISIONS OF HVAC Page 6 of 6 A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors. B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening. 3.08 FLOOR PLATE INSTALLATION A. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors. B. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 6 SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Pipe positioning systems. 6. Equipment supports. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 00 00 “General Requirements of HVAC” for submittal requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Equipment supports. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 6 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. B. Copper Pipe Hangers: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components. 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 2.02 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. 2.03 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier. B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength. C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.04 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2.05 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2.07 Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure. B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 6 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. D. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. L. Insulated Piping: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 4 of 6 e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.02 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.03 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.05 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting.", Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting.", Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings." C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.06 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 5 of 6 E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications. F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing. G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing. I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 9. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps. K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 6 of 6 7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. 2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs. 3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 6 SECTION 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Elastomeric isolation pads. 2. Elastomeric isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Open-spring isolators. 5. Housed-spring isolators. 6. Restrained-spring isolators. 7. Housed-restrained-spring isolators. 8. Pipe-riser resilient supports. 9. Resilient pipe guides. 10. Elastomeric hangers. 11. Spring hangers. 12. Snubbers. 13. Restraint channel bracings. 14. Restraint cables. 15. Seismic-restraint accessories. 16. Mechanical anchor bolts. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 00 00 “General Requirements for HVAC” for submittal requirements. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation and seismic-restraint device. 1. Include design calculations and details for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are unavailable, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic-Restraint Loading: 1. Design seismic restraints for components for seismic design forces defined in Chapter 13 of ASCE 7-16. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 6 a. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods, See Structural Drawings for Site Specific SDS Value b. Component Importance Factor, IP = 1.0; except for components conveying, supporting, or otherwise containing natural gas or other flammable and/or explosive contents, IP = 1.5. c. Component Response Modification Factor, RP: See Table 13.6-1 of ASCE 7-16 d. Component Amplification Factor, aP: See Table 13.6-1 of ASCE 7-16 2.02 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads: 1. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading over pad area. 2. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment. 3. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties. 4. Surface Pattern: Smooth, Ribbed or Waffle pattern. 5. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers. 6. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads. 2.03 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS A. Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts: 1. Mounting Plates: a. Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and threaded with threaded studs or bolts. b. Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to support structure. 2. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material. 2.04 RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS A. Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts: 1. Description: All-directional isolator with seismic restraints containing two separate and opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. a. Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel. b. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material. 2.05 OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators: 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa). 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. 2.06 HOUSED-SPRING ISOLATORS A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators in Two-Part Telescoping Housing: 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 6 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig. b. Top housing with attachment and leveling bolt. 2.07 RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint: 1. Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed. a. Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig. b. Top plate with threaded mounting holes. c. Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 2.08 HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS A. Freestanding, Steel, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint in Two-Part Telescoping Housing: 1. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement. a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig. b. Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 2.09 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes separated by a minimum 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. 1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. 2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psig on isolation material providing equal isolation in all directions. 2.10 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 4 of 6 A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. 1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements. 2.11 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods: 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel contact. 2.12 SPRING HANGERS A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in Compression: 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod. 8. Self-centering hanger-rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. 2.13 SNUBBERS A. Description: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings. 1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female- wedge type. 2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. 3. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch- thick resilient cushion. 2.14 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS A. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces. 2.15 RESTRAINT CABLES A. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables. End connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. 2.16 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES A. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 5 of 6 B. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs. C. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used. D. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face. E. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. 2.17 EXECUTION A. components so strength is adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits. 2.18 VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." or Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete." B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment. C. Comply with requirements in Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. D. Equipment Restraints: 1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure. 2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch. 3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC- ES that provides required submittals for component. E. Piping Restraints: 1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet. F. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. G. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES that provides required submittals for component. H. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base. I. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall. J. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. K. Drilled-in Anchors: Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 6 of 6 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications. 2.19 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping" for piping flexible connections. 2.20 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 1 of 3 SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Valve Tags. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: White 3. Background Color: Black 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch For name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. C. All labels on equipment visible to the public/occupant shall be coordinated with the architect or engineer prior to installation. 2.02 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: White C. Background Color: Red D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 3 lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions. 2.03 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. 2.04 VALVE TAGS A. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Engineer. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener. 1. Material: 0.032-inch thick brass or aluminum. 2. Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook. B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal- operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.02 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. 3.03 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 3 of 3 A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory- fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. 1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Valve-Tag Color: Natural Brass or Aluminum. 3.04 VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION A. Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 1 of 8 SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Variable-air-volume systems. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work. F. TDH: Total dynamic head. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 00 00 “General Requirement of HVAC” for submittal requirements 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC, NEBB, TABB, or as approved by the Engineer prior to bidding. B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms. D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation." E. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Test and Balance Contractors: A. The following companies are pre-approved. Companies not listed below must submit for approval prior to bidding the project: 1. Precision Air and Water Balance, Bozeman, MT 2. RGO, Belgrade, MT 3. Highlands Balancing, Bozeman, MT PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 2 of 8 C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. E. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling, diverting, or mixing fluid flows. F. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. G. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. H. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following: 1. Airside: a. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed. b. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional. c. Clean filters are installed. d. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. e. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified. f. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. g. Ceilings are installed. h. Windows and doors are installed. i. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided. 3.03 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance", NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with plastic plugs. 2. Coordinate with the mechanical insulation contractor to Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 23 07 13 "Duct Insulation," Section 23 07 16 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 23 07 19 "HVAC Piping Insulation." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. 3.04 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 3 of 8 G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components. L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts." 3.05 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow. a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions. b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow. c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable. d. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows: a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling system. d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured. 3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 4. Obtain approval from Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance. 5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows. 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. 2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow. 3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows. 1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow. 3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow. 4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted. 3.06 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Verify that the system static pressure sensor is located two-thirds of the distance down the duct from the fan discharge. 2. Verify that the system is under static pressure control. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 4 of 8 3. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow. Measure inlet static pressure, and adjust system static pressure control set point so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. 4. Calibrate and balance each terminal unit for maximum and minimum design airflow as follows: a. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for maximum airflow. Some controllers require starting with minimum airflow. Verify calibration procedure for specific project. b. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design maximum airflow. Record calibration factor. c. When maximum airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units. d. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for minimum airflow. e. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design minimum airflow. Record calibration factor. If no minimum calibration is available, note any deviation from design airflow. f. When in full cooling or full heating, ensure that there is no mixing of hot-deck and cold-deck airstreams unless so designed. g. On constant volume terminals, in critical areas where room pressure is to be maintained, verify that the airflow remains constant over the full range of full cooling to full heating. Note any deviation from design airflow or room pressure. 5. After terminals have been calibrated and balanced, test and adjust system for total airflow. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions. b. Set terminals for maximum airflow. If system design includes diversity, adjust terminals for maximum and minimum airflow so that connected total matches fan selection and simulates actual load in the building. c. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow. d. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable. e. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow. 6. Measure fan static pressures as follows: a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling system. d. Report any artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured. 7. Set final return and outside airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems. b. Verify that terminal units are meeting design airflow under system maximum flow. 8. Re-measure the inlet static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the system static pressure set point to the most energy-efficient set point to maintain the optimum system static pressure. Record set point and give to controls contractor. 9. Verify final system conditions as follows: a. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design. Readjust to match design if necessary. b. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. c. Re-measure final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 5 of 8 d. Mark final settings. e. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary. Measure and record all operating data. f. Verify tracking between supply and return fans. 3.07 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data. 3.08 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused. 1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan. 2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. 3. Check the refrigerant charge. 4. Check the condition of filters. 5. Check the condition of coils. 6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap. 7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies. B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following: 1. New filters are installed. 2. Coils are clean and fins combed. 3. Drain pans are clean. 4. Fans are clean. 5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. 6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected. C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work. 1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils. 2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer. 3. If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required. 4. Balance each air outlet. 3.09 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 6 of 8 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above. 3.10 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. 3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB specialist. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. d. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. e. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 7 of 8 e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Number, make, and size of belts. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg. E. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. F. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 3.11 DUCT TESTING A. Duct Testing is required for supply, return or exhaust ductwork that will operate at 3 inWC static pressure or greater. B. Leakage test procedures shall follow the outlines and classifications in the SMANCA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. C. The Owner and mechanical engineer shall select sections of ductwork from each air handling system for duct leakage testing. The sample shall include at least five transverse joints, typical seams, and access door connections. The sample will include all medium pressure supply ductwork between the air handling unit to within 2’ of the connection to variable air volume terminal units. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 8 of 8 D. The Air handling systems shall be tested at 3 inches w.g. and shall meet leakage Class 3. E. If a section fails to meet allotted leakage level, the contractor shall modify the ductwork to bring it into compliance and shall retest the section until acceptable leakage is demonstrated. One retest shall be provided by the TAB contractor. The mechanical contractor shall pay the TAB contractor for any additional retesting required. F. All testing and necessary repairs shall be completed prior to concealment of the ductwork. 3.12 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 120 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 1 of 7 SECTION 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following duct services: 1. Indoor Duct Insulation. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 07 16 "HVAC Equipment and Piping Insulation." 2. Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 00 00 “General Requirements of HVAC” for submittal requirements. B. Provide floor plan shop drawings showing intended locations of insulation. Exposed ductwork that is to not be insulated shall be specifically noted. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 2 of 7 G. Jacketed Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. H. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation without factory- applied jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. 2.02 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 2.03 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF- 19565C, Type II. B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 4. Color: White. C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services. 1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 4. Color: White. 2.04 SEALANTS A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: Aluminum. B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 3 of 7 4. Color: White. 2.05 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory- applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 2.06 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil-thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting a rubberized bitumen compound; heat applied to a multi-ply embossed UV-resistant aluminum foil/polymer laminate, and polyester/foil multiple layer laminate with acrylic adhesive. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Polyguard Products, Inc. b. Prior Approved Equal 2.07 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Width: 2 inches. 2. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 4. Elongation: 5 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width. 2.08 SECUREMENTS A. Cupped Head Weld Pins: 1. Material: Low carbon steel. 2. Finish: Copper coated pins with galvanized washer 3. Pin gauge: 12 Ga. B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel. C. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 4 of 7 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self- sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings. L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 5 of 7 3.03 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. C. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. D. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.04 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 6 of 7 surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches. 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6- inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor- discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches. 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6- inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 3.05 FINISHES A. Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting." B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. C. Do not field paint outdoor ductwork. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION Page 7 of 7 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by engineer, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article. C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.07 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Duct insulation shall not be installed on indoor supply or return ductwork that is exposed to view in a normally occupied and conditioned space unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. B. Insulation materials and thicknesses for ductwork are identified in the table below. If more than one material is listed for an application, selection from materials listed is at the Contractor's option. Ductwork that is not listed below or is exposed to view shall not be insulated. Location Application Insulation Type Installed R-Value ** Vapor Barrier Factory Installed Jacket Type Indoor Supply Mineral- Fiber Blanket 6 YES FSK Indoor Exhaust* Mineral- Fiber Blanket 12 YES FSK Unconditioned Space Supply, Return & Exhaust Mineral- Fiber Board 12 YES FSK *Indoor Exhaust Ductwork shall be insulated from the penetration of the building envelope to 10ft upstream of a backdraft of shutoff damper. ** All above values are a minimum and shall be superseded by more stringent currently adopted Energy or Mechanical Code. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 09 00 HVAC CONTROLS Page 1 of 13 SECTION 23 09 00 HVAC CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes systems for monitoring and controlling for HVAC systems. B. The HVAC controls shall consist of a system of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment and programmed to control mechanical systems. A PC or handheld device (tablet) permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 00 00 “General Requirements of HVAC for additional submittal requirements. B. Product Data: For each control device. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Schematic drawings for each controlled HVAC system indicating the following: a. I/O points labeled with point names shown. Indicate instrument range, normal operating set points, and alarm set points. Indicate fail position of each damper and valve, if included in Project. b. I/O listed in table format showing point name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and cross-reference to product data sheet number. c. A graphic showing location of control I/O in proper relationship to HVAC system. d. Wiring diagram with each I/O point having a unique identification and indicating labels for all wiring terminals. e. Unique identification of each I/O that shall be consistently used between different drawings showing same point. f. Elementary wiring diagrams of controls for HVAC equipment motor circuits including interlocks, switches, relays and interface to DDC controllers. g. Narrative sequence of operation. h. Graphic sequence of operation, showing all inputs and output logical blocks. 2. DDC system network riser diagram indicating the following: a. Each device connected to network with unique identification for each. b. Interconnection of each different network in DDC system. c. For each network, indicate communication protocol, speed and physical means of interconnecting network devices, such as copper cable type, or optical fiber cable type. Indicate raceway type and size for each. d. Each network port for connection of an operator workstation or other type of operator interface with unique identification for each. 3. DDC system electrical power riser diagram indicating the following: a. Each point of connection to field power with requirements (volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each. b. Each control power supply including, as applicable, transformers, power-line conditioners, transient voltage suppression and high filter noise units, DC power supplies, and UPS units with unique identification for each. c. Each product requiring power with requirements (volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each. d. Power wiring type and size, race type, and size for each. 4. Monitoring and control signal diagrams indicating the following: a. Control signal cable and wiring between controllers and I/O. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 09 00 HVAC CONTROLS Page 2 of 13 b. Point-to-point schematic wiring diagrams for each product. c. Control signal tubing to sensors, switches and transmitters. d. Process signal tubing to sensors, switches and transmitters. 5. Color graphics indicating the following: a. Itemized list of color graphic displays to be provided. b. For each display screen to be provided, a true color copy showing layout of pictures, graphics and data displayed. c. Intended operator access between related hierarchical display screens. 1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Project Record Drawings of as-built versions of submittal Shop Drawings provided in electronic PDF format. b. As-built versions of submittal Product Data. c. Names, addresses, e-mail addresses and 24-hour telephone numbers of Installer and service representatives for DDC system and products. d. Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems including logging on and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding computer control and changing set points and variables. e. Backup copy of graphic files, programs, and database on electronic media such as DVDs. f. List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers. g. Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance information for furnished third-party hardware including computer equipment and sensors. h. Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating systems, custom programming language, operator workstation software, and graphics software. i. Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents. j. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components, including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time between tasks; and task descriptions. k. Owner training materials 1.04 TESTING AND BALANCING A. The temperature control contractor shall have a technician present at the jobsite during testing and balancing of the HVAC systems to assist with making adjustment to the system. 1.05 WIRING A. All low and live voltage wiring required by the HVAC Controls shall be the responsibility of the Temperature Controls Contractor. All low voltage wiring must be installed by direct employees of the Temperature Control Contractor. The installation of low voltage wiring may not be sub-contracted. The Temperature Control Contractor shall coordinate the installation of line voltage wiring required by the HVAC controls with the project electrical contractor. All wiring shall comply with the provisions in Division 26 and current local codes. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Installing contractor shall specialize in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer. C. Installing contractor shall be a franchised or direct representative of the control system manufacturer. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 09 00 HVAC CONTROLS Page 3 of 13 D. System shall be that of a contractor who regularly designs, installs and services HVAC temperature control systems as their primary function and must have a history of at least six years in that field. E. The installing contractor shall have operated a permanent office for at least the past two years within 200 miles of the job site. The company shall have not less than three factory certified resident personnel who provide engineering, design, installation, troubleshooting and maintenance services. F. The contractor shall provide ability to respond in person with factory certified personnel within 24 hours of a service call from the owner, regardless of time of day, day of week, holiday or other factors. The contractor shall also demonstrate ability to respond to an owner service call via telephone and/or e-mail within two hours, regardless of time of day, day of week, holiday or other factors. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in service to Owner. 2. Include updates or upgrades to software and firmware if necessary to resolve deficiencies. a. Install updates only after receiving Owner's written authorization. 3. Warranty service shall occur during normal business hours and commence within 24 hours of Owner's warranty service request. 4. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DDC SYSTEM INSTALLERS A. The following companies are pre-approved. Companies not listed below must submit for approval prior to bidding the project: 1. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group. B. Provide a complete temperature control system including all required sensors, actuators, switched, relays, valves, dampers, controllers, user interfaces and programming required for a complete system and to provide the functionality listed in the sequence of operations. C. The temperature control system shall allow the building owner to remotely access the control system to monitor and make adjustments. D. The Temperature Control Contractor shall coordinate the connection of the Control system to the owner’s network and the internet. E. The Temperature Control Contractor shall maintain a remote connection to the control system to assist the owner with monitoring, adjusting and troubleshooting for a period of 1 year following substantial completion. 2.02 NETWORK AREA CONTROLLER (NAC) A. The contractor shall be responsible for programming the existing Network Area Controller (NAC) to accommodate the additional functions as part of this contract. B. The Network Area Controller (NAC) shall provide the interface between the LAN or WAN and the field control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over the control devices connected to the NAC. It shall execute application control programs to provide: 1. Calendar functions 2. Scheduling 3. Trending 4. Alarm monitoring and routing 5. Time synchronization 6. Integration of LonWorks controller data and BACnet controller data 7. Network Management functions for all LonWorks based devices Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 09 00 HVAC CONTROLS Page 4 of 13 C. Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated. D. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user: 1. Screen message text 2. Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability to route and email alarms based on: a. Day of week b. Time of day c. Recipient 3. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message 4. Graphic with flashing alarm object(s) 5. Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer 6. Dial up to a secondary security office. E. The following shall be recorded by the NAC for each alarm (at a minimum): 1. Time and date 2. Location (building, floor, zone, room number, etc.) 3. Equipment (air handler #, accessway, etc.) 4. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement. 5. Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement. F. Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for that purpose. G. Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types or classes of alarms defined by the user. H. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC and/or a server (if configured in the system) and shall be available for review by the user. I. Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters. J. A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be provided and available for review by the user. K. An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and available for review by the user. L. The NAC shall collect data for any property of any object and store this data for future use. M. The data collection shall be performed by log objects, resident in the NAC that shall have, at a minimum, the following configurable properties: 1. Designating the log as interval or deviation. 2. For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week and the sample collection interval. 3. For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a variable to a fixed value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of the object. 4. For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for the log and to set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover the data on a first-in, first-out basis. 5. Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-based event or by a user-defined event or action. 6. Trends shall be set with an appropriate interval and cache to review system operation 7. Analog values should trend at a minimum of 650 values at a 15-minute interval. 8. Binary values shall trend 1 week of expected cycles. N. All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the NAC. O. Note that the contractor will configure the system, tailored to the Owner’s request, to archive logs to the server automatically based upon one or more of the four criteria above. This will be determined at the pre-installation conference. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 09 00 HVAC CONTROLS Page 5 of 13 2.03 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE A. Operating System: To run on the latest release of Windows or MAC OS. B. Provide programming as necessary to create the additional graphics. C. Graphics shall provide “quick links” or “jump tags” from an operating graphic directly to a trend, by left clicking on the numerical value to be trended. D. The system graphics shall be expanded and organized so as to provide a logical, functional grouping of data on each graphical page(s) with pertinent information and functional devices for each system. Each page shall have “buttons” which will be for linking or navigating to all the other screens created for this system. This includes links to the scheduling and alarm functions in the system. On all pages, each button will display a red flashing condition if an alarm exists on its respective system depicted on that screen. E. Graphics shall include: 1. Graphics shall be dynamic, indicating status of fans, pumps, dampers and valves. 2. All outputs shall be overridable. 3. All overriden points shall be indicated as such on the graphic. 4. All setpoints shall be adjustable on the respective graphics page. Include an option to return to a default setpoint. 5. All logs of inputs and outputs shall be accessed by clicking on the point. F. At a minimum, the graphical pages shall be arranged as follows. The final layout and grouping of the pages and points shall be determined at the pre-engineering conference, and this shall be used as a basic guideline for graphical page creation. 1. Main Page – The existing main page shall include “link buttons” to all other pages added to the system. These buttons may be arranged along the top, bottom, or side of the page, and also may be arranged as a menu “tree” along the side of the page. The “menu tree” will provide access to other pages such as alarm pages, scheduling functions, log/trend functions, etc. 2. Provide an overall graphics page showing the new controls with links to individual pages. Show clearly if the north or south zone is in a heating or cooling mode. All temperature points shall be shown on the graphics. 3. At a minimum, the following type of equipment or systems shall have graphics pages. a. Boilers b. Chillers c. Cooling Towers d. Condensing Units e. Pumps f. Heat Exchanges g. Heat Pumps: Air and Water Source h. Air Handling Units i. Terminal Units: VAV Boxes, Cabinet Heaters, Unit Heaters, Chilled Beams, Fancoils, etc. j. Exhaust Fans k. Exhaust Hoods l. Make-up Air Units m. Heat Recovery Units n. Computer Room HVAC Units o. Ducted and Ductless Split HVAC Units p. Variable Refrigerant Volume Systems q. Domestic Hot Water Heaters r. Floor Plan Layout showing all equipment. 2.04 DDC CONTROLLERS Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 09 00 HVAC CONTROLS Page 6 of 13 A. DDC system shall consist of a combination of network controllers, programmable application controllers and application-specific controllers to satisfy performance requirements indicated. B. DDC controllers shall perform monitoring, control, energy optimization and other requirements indicated. C. DDC controllers shall use a multitasking, multiuser, real-time digital control microprocessor with a distributed network database and intelligence. D. Each DDC controller shall be capable of full and complete operation as a completely independent unit and as a part of a DDC system wide distributed network. E. DDC Controller Spare I/O Point Capacity: Include 10% spare I/O point capacity for each controller. F. Maintenance and Support: Include the following features to facilitate maintenance and support: 1. Mount microprocessor components on circuit cards for ease of removal and replacement. 2. Means to quickly and easily disconnect controller from network. 3. Means to quickly and easily access connect to field test equipment. 4. Visual indication that controller electric power is on, of communication fault or trouble, and that controller is receiving and sending signals to network. 2.05 PROGRAMMABLE APPLICATION CONTROLLERS A. General Programmable Application Controller Requirements: 1. Include adequate number of controllers to achieve performance indicated. 2. Controller shall have enough memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements. 3. Data shall be shared between networked controllers and other network devices. 4. Operating system of controller shall manage input and output communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow for central monitoring and alarms. 5. Controllers shall have a real-time clock. 6. Controller shall continually check status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, controller shall assume a predetermined failure mode and generate an alarm notification. 7. Controllers shall be fully programmable. B. Communication: 1. Programmable application controllers shall communicate with other devices on network. C. Operator Interface: 1. Controller shall be equipped with a service communications port for connection to a portable operator's workstation or mobile device. 2. Local Keypad and Display: a. Equip controller with local keypad and digital display for interrogating and editing data. b. Use of keypad and display shall require security password. D. Serviceability: 1. Controller shall be equipped with diagnostic LEDs or other form of local visual indication of power, communication, and processor. 2. Wiring and cable connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. 3. Controller shall maintain BIOS and programming information in event of a power loss for at least 72 hours. 2.06 APPLICATION-SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS A. Description: Microprocessor-based controllers, which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a specific piece of equipment. Controllers are not fully user-programmable but are configurable and customizable for operation of equipment they are designed to control. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 09 00 HVAC CONTROLS Page 7 of 13 1. Capable of standalone operation and shall continue to include control functions without being connected to network. 2. Data shall be shared between networked controllers and other network devices. B. Communication: Application-specific controllers shall communicate with other application-specific controller and devices on network, and to programmable application and network controllers. C. Operator Interface: Controller shall be equipped with a service communications port for connection to a portable operator's workstation. Connection shall extend to port on space temperature sensor that is connected to controller. D. Serviceability: 1. Controller shall be equipped with diagnostic LEDs or other form of local visual indication of power, communication, and processor. 2. Wiring and cable connections shall be made to field-removable, modular terminal strips or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable. 3. Controller shall use nonvolatile memory and maintain all BIOS and programming information in event of power loss. 2.07 TEMPERATURE SENSORS AND THERMOSTATS A. Room Thermostat: Electric, solid state, microprocessor based with the following features: 1. Heat / Cool auto change over. 2. 40 – 90 F range 3. +/- 2ºF user adjustment. 4. Insulated back. 5. Manual un-occupied model override button. 6. Integral service jack. 7. Thermostats shall not display the room temperature. B. Room Temperature Sensors: Blank face, space temperature sensors 1. Insulated Back 2. Stainless steel face plate 2.08 DUCT AND PIPE TEMPERATURE SENSORS, TRANSMITTERS A. Immersion Thermostat (Aquastat): Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point. B. Airstream Thermostats: Two-pipe, fully proportional, single-temperature type; with adjustable set point in middle of range, adjustable throttling range, plug-in test fitting or permanent pressure gage, remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element. C. Electric, Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual (freezestat use) or automatic- reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or below set point. 1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet. 2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface. D. Electric, High-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, automatic- reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or above set point. 1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet. 2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface. 2.09 DAMPERS A. AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.108-inch- minimum thick, galvanized-steel or 0.125-inch- minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 09 00 HVAC CONTROLS Page 8 of 13 B. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless- steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade. C. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. D. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed-cell neoprene. E. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D. 2.10 ACTUATORS A. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque. B. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure. C. Dampers: Size for running torque required for the damper. D. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. E. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. F. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear release on nonspring-return actuators. G. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F. H. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed. 2.11 STATUS SENSORS A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable range of 0- to 5-inch wg. B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump. C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current. D. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy. E. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor. F. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements. G. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal. H. Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating, stainless- steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. 2.12 CONTROL WIRE AND CABLE A. Wire: Single conductor control wiring above 24 V. 1. Wire size shall be at least No. 18 AWG. Size all conductors for load and distance. 2. Conductor shall be 7/24 soft annealed copper strand with 2- to 2.5-inch lay. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 09 00 HVAC CONTROLS Page 9 of 13 3. Conductor insulation shall be 600 V, Type THWN or Type THHN, and 90 deg C according to UL 83. 4. Conductor colors shall be black (hot), white (neutral), and green (ground). 5. Furnish wire on spools. B. Single Twisted Shielded Instrumentation Cable above 24 V: 1. Wire size shall be a minimum No. 18 AWG. Size all conductors for load and distance. 2. Conductors shall be a twisted, 7/24 soft annealed copper strand with a 2- to 2.5-inch lay. 3. Conductor insulation shall have a Type THHN/THWN or Type TFN rating. 4. Shielding shall be 100 percent type, 0.35/0.5-mil aluminum/Mylar tape, helically applied with 25 percent overlap, and aluminum side in with tinned copper drain wire. 5. Outer jacket insulation shall have a 600-V, 90-deg C rating and shall be Type TC cable. 6. For twisted pair, conductor colors shall be black and white. For twisted triad, conductor colors shall be black, red and white. 7. Furnish wire on spools. C. Single Twisted Shielded Instrumentation Cable 24 V and Less: 1. Wire size shall be a minimum No. 18 AWG. Size all conductors for load and distance. 2. Conductors shall be a twisted, 7/24 soft annealed copper stranding with a 2- to 2.5-inch lay. 3. Conductor insulation shall have a nominal 15-mil thickness, constructed from flame-retardant PVC. 4. Shielding shall be 100 percent type, 1.35-mil aluminum/polymer tape, helically applied with 25 percent overlap, and aluminum side in with tinned copper drain wire. 5. Outer jacket insulation shall have a 300-V, 105-deg C rating and shall be Type PLTC cable. 6. For twisted pair, conductor colors shall be black and white. For twisted triad, conductor colors shall be black, red and white. 7. Furnish wire on spools. D. LAN and Communication Cable: Comply with DDC system manufacturer requirements for network being installed. 1. Cable shall be balanced twisted pair. 2. Cable shall be plenum rated. 3. Cable shall comply with NFPA 70. 4. Cable shall have a unique color that is different from other cables used on Project. 2.13 CONTROL POWER WIRING AND RACEWAYS A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" electrical power conductors and cables. B. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for electrical power raceways and boxes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for products to verify actual locations of connections before installation. 1. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in piping to verify actual locations of connections before installation. 2. Examine roughing-in for instruments installed in duct systems to verify actual locations of connections before installation. B. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where product will be installed. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 DDC SYSTEM INTERFACE WITH OTHER SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 09 00 HVAC CONTROLS Page 10 of 13 A. Communication Interface to Equipment with Integral Controls: 1. DDC system shall have communication interface with equipment having integral controls and having a communication interface for remote monitoring or control. 3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Field verify the installation of thermostats and humidistats with the architect and engineer prior to installation. Unless otherwise directed, install room thermostats 48 inches above the floor to comply with accessibility requirements. Install all other devices 60 inchesabove the floor. B. Install Blank Face room temperature sensors in public areas, corridors and entries. C. Install products to satisfy more stringent of all requirements indicated. D. Install products level, plumb, parallel, and perpendicular with building construction. E. Support products, tubing, piping wiring and raceways. F. If codes and referenced standards are more stringent than requirements indicated, comply with requirements in codes and referenced standards. G. Fabricate openings and install sleeves in ceilings, floors, roof, and walls required by installation of products. Before proceeding with drilling, punching, and cutting, check for concealed work to avoid damage. Patch, flash, grout, seal, and refinish openings to match adjacent condition. H. Firestop Penetrations Made in Fire-Rated Assemblies: Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." I. Seal penetrations made in acoustically rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." J. Fastening Hardware: 1. Stillson wrenches, pliers, and other tools that damage surfaces of rods, nuts, and other parts are prohibited for work of assembling and tightening fasteners. 2. Tighten bolts and nuts firmly and uniformly. Do not overstress threads by excessive force or by oversized wrenches. 3. Lubricate threads of bolts, nuts and screws with graphite and oil before assembly. K. If product locations are not indicated, install products in locations that are accessible and that will permit service and maintenance from floor, equipment platforms, or catwalks without removal of permanently installed furniture and equipment. L. The temperature control contractor shall coordinate with the electrical contractor to provide dedicated electrical circuits to power the components of the temperature control system. It shall be the responsibility of the temperature control contractor to pay for all work associated with providing power for the temperature control system. M. All low and line voltage cabling shall be installed in conduit. Minimum trade size shall be 3/4”. 3.04 OPERATOR WORKSTATION INSTALLATION A. Portable Workstations Installation: 1. Turn over portable workstations to Owner at Substantial Completion. 2. Install software on workstation(s) and verify software functions properly. B. Color Graphics Application: 1. Use system schematics indicated as starting point to create graphics. 2. Develop Project-specific library of symbols for representing system equipment and products. 3. Incorporate digital images of Project-completed installation into graphics where beneficial to enhance effect. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 09 00 HVAC CONTROLS Page 11 of 13 4. Submit sketch of graphic layout with description of all text for each graphic for Owner's and Engineers review before creating graphic using graphics software. 5. Seek Owner input in graphics development once using graphics software. 6. Final editing shall be done on-site with Owner's review and feedback. 7. Refine graphics as necessary for Owner acceptance. 8. On receiving Owner acceptance, print a hard copy for inclusion in operation and maintenance manual. Prepare a scanned copy PDF file of each graphic and include with softcopy of DDC system operation and maintenance manual. 3.05 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION A. Install controllers in enclosures to comply with indicated requirements. B. Connect controllers to field power supply and to UPS units where indicated. C. Install controller with latest version of applicable software and configure to execute requirements indicated. D. Test and adjust controllers to verify operation of connected I/O to achieve performance indicated requirements while executing sequences of operation. E. Installation of Network Controllers: 1. Quantity and location of network controllers shall be determined by DDC system manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated. 2. Install controllers in a protected location that is easily accessible by operators. 3. Top of controller shall be within 72 inches of finished floor. F. Installation of Programmable Application Controllers: 1. Quantity and location of programmable application controllers shall be determined by DDC system manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated. 2. Install controllers in a protected location that is easily accessible by operators. 3. Top of controller shall be within 72 inches of finished floor. G. Application-Specific Controllers: 1. Quantity and location of application-specific controllers shall be determined by DDC system manufacturer to satisfy requirements indicated. 2. For controllers not mounted directly on equipment being controlled, install controllers in a protected location that is easily accessible by operators. 3.06 ELECTRIC POWER CONNECTIONS A. Connect electrical power to DDC system products requiring electrical power connections. B. Design of electrical power to products not indicated with electric power is delegated to DDC system provider and installing trade. Work shall comply with NFPA 70 and other requirements indicated. C. Comply with requirements in Section 26 28 16 "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for electrical power circuit breakers. D. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical power conductors and cables. E. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for electrical power raceways and boxes. 3.07 NETWORK INSTALLATION A. Install balanced twisted pair cable when connecting between Network controllers located in same building. B. Install cable in continuous raceway. 1. Where indicated on Drawings, cable trays may be used for copper cable in lieu of conduit. 3.08 CONTROL WIRE, CABLE AND RACEWAYS INSTALLATION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 09 00 HVAC CONTROLS Page 12 of 13 A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Wire and Cable Installation: 1. Comply with installation requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.” 2. Comply with installation requirements in Section Spec Section 26 05 33 “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems” 3. Comply with installation requirements in Section 27 05 28 “Pathways for Communications Systems”. 4. Comply with installation requirements in Section 27 13 13 "Communications Copper Backbone Cabling." 5. Wiring pathways for mechanical controls shall be separate from network cabling pathways. 6. Install cables with protective sheathing that is waterproof and capable of withstanding continuous temperatures of 90 deg C with no measurable effect on physical and electrical properties of cable. a. Provide shielding to prevent interference and distortion from adjacent cables and equipment. 7. Provide strain relief. 8. Terminate wiring in a junction box. a. Clamp cable over jacket in junction box. b. Individual conductors in the stripped section of the cable shall be slack between the clamping point and terminal block. 9. Terminate field wiring and cable not directly connected to instruments and control devices having integral wiring terminals using terminal blocks. 10. Install signal transmission components according to IEEE C2, REA Form 511a, NFPA 70, and as indicated. 11. Use shielded cable to transmitters. 12. Use shielded cable to temperature sensors. 13. Perform continuity and meager testing on wire and cable after installation. C. Conduit Installation: 1. Comply with Section "260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for control-voltage conductors. 2. Comply with Section 27 05 28 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for balanced twisted pair cabling and optical fiber installation. 3.09 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by DDC system manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, cleaning, calibration and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3.11 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two year(s). B. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 09 00 HVAC CONTROLS Page 13 of 13 1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule and access system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary. 3.12 DEMONSTRATION A. See Section 01 79 00 “Demonstration and Training” for additional requirements. B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative with complete knowledge of Project-specific system installed to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain DDC system. C. Training Documentation: 1. Contractor to submit draft copy of agenda and training documents to Owner for review at least two weeks prior to training date. 2. Provide a copy of the following items for each person that will be attending the training sessions. Coordinate required number with the Owner. a. Training agenda. b. Summary of new systems and existing systems affected by this project. c. Summary of work performed under this project. d. Control system drawings and sequences of operation. e. List of important maintenance and trouble-shooting operations for all systems. 3. Provide minimum of 2 copies of following items: a. Contract documents including all drawings, specifications, addendums, and change orders. 3.13 TRAINING SESSIONS: 1. Assemble at location to be determined by the Owner. 2. Distribute training documentation as indicated above. 3. Provide classroom style training if required for orientation, discussion of new systems and existing systems affected by this project, and other issues appropriate for a classroom format. 4. Visit site and review locations, and perform detailed review of operation and maintenance requirements for current systems. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS Page 1 of 8 SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Acoustic Liner. 6. Hangers and supports. 7. Seismic-restraint devices. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 05 29 “Hangars and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment.” 2. Section 23 05 48 “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment” 3. Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 4. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ANSI/ASHRAE 62.1. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 00 00 “General Requirements of HVAC” for submittal requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up." B. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS Page 2 of 8 2.02 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 24 in Diameter: Flanged. C. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.03 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts. D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article. E. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view. F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.04 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS Page 3 of 8 C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots. 2.05 ACOUSTIC LINER A. General: The liner shall meet the Life Safety Standards as established by NFPA 90A and 90B, FHC 25/50 and Limited Combustibility and the airstream surface coating should contain an immobilized, EPA- registered, antimicrobial agent so it will not support microbial growth as tested in accordance with ASTM G 21 and G 22. B. Performance: The duct liner shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 1071, with an NRC not less than 0.75 as tested per ASTM C 423 using a Type “A” mounting, and a thermal conductivity no higher than .25 Btu•in/(hr•ft2•°F) at 75° mean temperature. C. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C1071 and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed LLC; Saint-Gobain North America. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. 2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: a. Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. b. Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. 3. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C916. a. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less. 2.06 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS Page 4 of 8 F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. H. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." 3.02 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS Page 5 of 8 3.03 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." B. Seal ducts at a minimum to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class B. 6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class A. 7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class C. 10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class B. 11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF ACOUTIC LINER A. Liner shall be adhered to the sheet metal with full coverage of an approved adhesive that conforms to ASTM C 916, and all exposed leading edges and transverse joints shall be coated with an approved adhesive and shall be neatly butted without gaps. Shop or field cuts shall be liberally coated with an approved adhesive. B. Metal nosings shall be securely installed over transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream at forward discharge and at any point where lined duct is preceded by unlined duct. C. Acoustic liner shall be additionally secured with mechanical fasteners spaced per the manufacturer’s recommendations. The pin length should be such as to hold the material firmly in place with minimum compression of the material. D. Acoustic liner shall be installed in ductwork as indicated on the plans. Additional acoustic liner shall be installed as indicated below: 1. Acoustic liner shall be installed in rectangular supply, return and exhaust ductwork within 10’ of any fan or fan powered equipment. 2. Acoustic liner shall be installed in rectangular supply ductwork downstream of VAV boxes. 3. Acoustic liner shall be installed in rectangular transfer ductwork. E. The dimensions of ductwork listed on the plans indicates the clear width and height and has not been increased to accommodate indicated liner. Duct sizes shall be increased to accommodate the thickness of the liner. 3.05 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS Page 6 of 8 C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.06 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems." And ASCE/SEI 7. 3.07 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.08 START UP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.09 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows: B. Supply Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 16. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 8. 2. Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 8. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 4. 3. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 16. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 8. C. Return Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 16. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 8. 2. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS Page 7 of 8 c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 16. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 8 D. Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 16. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 8. E. Intermediate Reinforcement: 1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. 2. PVC-Coated Ducts: a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Galvanized. 3. Stainless-Steel Ducts: a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. 4. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum. F. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90- degree elbow. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS Page 8 of 8 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90- degree elbow. 4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam. G. Branch Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. 2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral. H. Liner: 1. Supply-Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick. 2. Return-Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick. 3. Exhaust-Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick. 4. Transfer Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 1 of 6 SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Control dampers. 4. Flange connectors. 5. Turning vanes. 6. Duct-mounted access doors. 7. Flexible connectors. 8. Duct accessory hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 37 23 "HVAC Gravity Ventilators" for roof-mounted ventilator caps. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See section 23 00 00 “General Requirements of HVAC” for submittal requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a 2D finish for concealed ducts and 2BA finish for exposed ducts. C. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts. D. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6. E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.03 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cesco Products; a divsion of MESTEK, Inc. 2. Nailor Industries Inc. 3. Ruskin Company. B. Description: Gravity balanced. C. Maximum Air Velocity: 1000 fpm. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 2 of 6 D. Maximum System Pressure: 4.5 inch wg. E. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.063-inch-thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners or mechanically attached and mounting flange. F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, end pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inch-thick, roll-formed aluminum with sealed edges. G. Blade Action: Parallel. H. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked. I. Blade Axles: 1. Material: Nonmetallic. 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch. J. Bearings: synthetic pivot bushings. K. Accessories: 1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations. 3. Electric actuators. 4. Chain pulls. 5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve. a. Sleeve Thickness: 20 gage minimum. b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum. 6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted. 7. Screen Material: Aluminum. 8. Screen Type: Bird. 9. 90-degree stops. 2.04 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cesco Products; a division of MESTEK, Inc. b. Nailor Industries Inc. c. Ruskin Company. 2. Standard leakage rating. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: a. Frame: 16 gauge galvanized steel, 5 in deep b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. 16 gauge galvanized steel with V groove for stiffness. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: a. Molded synthetic. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 9. Locking Quadrant handles Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 3 of 6 2.05 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cesco Products; a division of MESTEK, Inc. 2. Nailor Industries Inc. 3. Ruskin Company. B. Frames: 1. U shaped. 2. 16 gage galvanized steel. 3. Interlocking, gusseted corners. C. Blades: 1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 6 inches. 2. Parallel- and opposed-blade design. 3. 14 gage Galvanized-steel. 4. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene. 5. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals. D. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch-diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings. 1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. E. Bearings: 1. Oil-impregnated stainless-steel sleeve. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2.06 FLANGE CONNECTORS A. Description: Roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. B. Material: Galvanized steel. C. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. 2.07 TURNING VANES A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill. B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." D. Vane Construction: Double wall. 2.08 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cesco Products; a divsion of MESTEK, Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 4. Nailor Industries Inc. 5. Ruskin. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 4 of 6 B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct." 1. Door: a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inchbutt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Continuous and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. C. Pressure Relief Access Door: 1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Door: Double wall with insulation fill with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure class. 3. Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negative-pressure ducts. 4. Factory set at 3.0- to 8.0-inch wg. 5. Doors close when pressures are within set-point range. 6. Hinge: Continuous piano. 7. Latches: Cam. 8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber. 9. Insulation Fill: 1-inch-thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board. 2.09 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. B. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. E. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F. 2.10 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct- insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 5 of 6 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated. D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing. H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Upstream and downstream from duct filters. 3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. 4. At drain pans and seals. 5. Downstream from control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment. 6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. 7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. 8. Control devices requiring inspection. 9. Elsewhere as indicated. I. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. J. Access Door Sizes: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. K. Label access doors according to Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door. L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. M. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. N. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. O. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. P. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 6 of 6 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat- response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 33 46 FLEXIBLE DUCTS Page 1 of 2 SECTION 23 33 46 FLEXIBLE DUCTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Insulated flexible ducts. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See section 23 00 00 “General Requirements of HVAC” for submittal requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. C. Comply with the Air Diffusion Council's "ADC Flexible Air Duct Test Code FD 72-R1." D. Comply with ASTM E 96/E 96M, "Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials." 2.02 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. JP Lamborn 3. Hart & Cooley. 4. Quietflex B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, two-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. 4. Insulation R-Value: R6. 2.03 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS A. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install flexible ducts according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts. B. Install in indoor applications only. Flexible ductwork should not be exposed to UV lighting. C. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. D. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. E. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. F. Installation: Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 33 46 FLEXIBLE DUCTS Page 2 of 2 1. Install ducts fully extended. 2. Do not bend ducts across sharp corners. 3. Bends of flexible ducting shall not exceed a minimum of one duct diameter. 4. Avoid contact with metal fixtures, water lines, pipes, or conduits. 5. Install flexible ducts in a direct line, without sags, twists, or turns. G. Supporting Flexible Ducts: 1. Suspend flexible ducts with bands 1-1/2 inches wide or wider and spaced a maximum of 48 inches apart. Maximum centerline sag between supports shall not exceed 1/2 inch per 12 inches. 2. Install extra supports at bends placed approximately one duct diameter from center line of the bend. 3. Ducts may rest on ceiling joists or truss supports. Spacing between supports shall not exceed the maximum spacing per manufacturer's written installation instructions. 4. Vertically installed ducts shall be stabilized by support straps at a maximum of 72 inches o.c. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 1 of 3 SECTION 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. In-line centrifugal fans. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 00 00 “General Requirements of HVAC” for submittal requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA- Certified Ratings Seal. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corp. 2. Loren Cook Company. 3. Greenheck. B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation. C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service. D. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in. E. Accessories: 1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. 2. Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light. 3. Time-Delay Switch: Assembly with single-pole rocker switch, timer, and cover plate. 4. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. 5. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings. F. Capacities and Characteristics: See Drawings 1. Vibration Isolators: a. Type: Elastomeric hangers. b. Static Deflection: 1 inch. 2.02 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 2 of 3 B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Equipment Mounting: 1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in Section 23 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." B. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps. C. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers or spring hangers having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in Section 23 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. E. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.02 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." D. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 3 of 3 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. C. Lubricate bearings. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 23 37 13 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS Page 1 of 1 SECTION 23 37 13 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 23 00 00 “General Requirements of HVAC” for submittal requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Krueger. 2. Nailor Industries Inc. 3. Price Industries 4. Titus B. See the “Grilles Registers and Diffusers Schedule” on the drawings for grille, register or diffuser type, mounting, capacities, characteristics, finish, etc. C. Coordinate the color and finish of all grilles registers and diffusers with the architect if not specifically listed in the “Grilles Registers and Diffusers Schedule”. D. Substituted grilles, registers and diffusers must meet or exceed the performance of the schedules diffuser. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install grilles, registers and diffusers level and plumb. B. Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install grilles, registers and diffusers with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. D. Provide all duct transitions and duct fittings required for a complete installation. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust grilles, registers and diffusers to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 00 10 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 10 SECTION 26 00 10 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The requirements listed in this section are supplemental to the Division 01 General Requirements. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical and Low-voltage Contractors to examine and refer to all Architectural, Mechanical, Plumbing and Technology drawings and specifications for construction conditions which may affect the scope of Electrical, Communications, Electronic Safety and Security work. Inspect the building site and existing facilities for verification of present conditions. Make proper provisions for these conditions in performance of the work and cost thereof. C. Electrical, Communications, Electronic Safety and Security work for this project shall include all items, articles, materials and the associated labor mentioned, schedules or shown in these specifications and in the accompanying drawings. D. Furnish and install all equipment, materials and any required incidental items required by good practice to complete the systems described herein. E. Refer to Division 01 for any listed Alternates and provide separate pricing and work as indicated in Division 01 and Contract Documents. 1.02 DEFINITIONS - Throughout contract documents these words and phrases are used: A. Contract documents - All drawings, specifications, addenda and change orders that document work to be done. B. Demolition – Carefully disconnect and remove items. All reasonable caution shall be taken to avoid damaging removed equipment and to retain its operability. C. Remove back to source - Remove all conduit and wire back to panelboard or last live device. D. Equivalent or equal - Product of like type and function that complies with all applicable provisions of drawings and specifications and which has been approved as substitute for specified item. E. Furnish - Purchase material as shown and specified, and place material to approved location on site or elsewhere as noted or agreed upon. F. Install - Set in place and connect, ready for use and in complete and properly operating finished condition. G. Provide - Furnish and install with all products, labor, sub-contracts, and appurtenances required for a complete and properly operating, finished condition. H. Rough-in - Provide conduit raceway system with junction boxes, fittings, straps, BUSHINGS, etc., for future installation of wiring, devices, disconnects and breakers. Provision shall be made in panelboard (hardware, etc.) for future installation of breakers. I. Serviceable - Arranged so that component or product in question may be properly removed and replaced without disassembly, destruction or damage to surrounding installation. 1.03 CODES, STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS A. Codes - Perform all work in strict accordance with all applicable national, state and local codes; including, but not limited to latest legally enacted editions of following codes: 1. International Building Code – IBC 2. NFPA 70, National Electric Code – NEC 3. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code 4. International Fire Code – IFC 5. International Energy Conservation Code – IECC 6. ANSI-C2, National Electrical Safety Code – NESC Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 00 10 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 10 B. Standards - Reference to standards infers that installation, equipment and material shall be within limits for which it was designed, tested and approved, in conformance with current publications and standards of following organizations: 1. American National Standards Institute – ANSI 2. American Society for Testing and Materials – ASTM 3. American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers – ASHRAE (Standard 90- 75) 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers – IEEE 5. Insulated Cable Engineers Association – ICEA 6. National Electrical Contractors Association – NECA 7. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association – NEMA 8. National Fire Protection Association – NFPA 9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration – OSHA 10. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. – UL 11. Rules and Regulations of the State/Local Fire Marshal 12. Standards and Requirement of the Serving Utilities 13. State and Local Ordinances C. Regulations - Design has been performed in accordance with applicable regulations and guidelines noted below. Contractor shall carefully apply these regulations and bring any discrepancies to immediate attention of Architect/Engineer. 1. Americans with Disabilities Act – ADA 1.04 FEES AND PERMITS A. Electrical Contractor shall pay for all permits or fees in connection with electrical work. Fees shall include any or all user fees, government fees, system development fees, connection fees or other fees that are required to be paid before systems can be connected or used. B. Schedule all required electrical inspections with local electrical inspector. Notify engineer of all items of discrepancy noted by electrical inspector if those items affect cost or function of system, or if they conflict with electrical drawings and specifications. C. Deliver all inspection certificates to Architect/Engineer prior to final acceptance of work. 1.05 INTENT OF SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS A. Plans and specifications are intended to result in complete electrical installation in full compliance with all applicable codes, standards and ordinances. B. Plans and specifications are to supplement each other and any details contained in one shall be included as if contained in both. C. Electrical drawings shall serve as working drawings, but Architectural drawings shall take precedence if any dimensional discrepancies exist. D. Drawings are partly diagrammatic and do not show routing of conduits, exact location of products, or installation features in exact detail. Locations of devices, fixtures and equipment are approximate unless dimensioned. E. Riser diagrams and control schematics are not to scale and do not show physical arrangement of equipment. Do not use riser diagrams or schematics to obtain lineal conduit and cabling distances. F. Items are shown on drawings in locations to minimize interference with other equipment, structural members, etc. Exact finish locations are not indicated, however, and all work shall be done to avoid interference, preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear. G. In event that discrepancies of any kind exist or required items/details have been omitted, Contractor shall notify Architect/Engineer in writing of such discrepancy or omission at least ten days prior to bid date. Failure to do so shall be construed as willingness of Contractor to supply all necessary materials and labor required for proper completion of work. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 00 10 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Page 3 of 10 1.06 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY - Contractor shall be responsible for installation of complete and functional piece of work in accordance with true intent of contract documents. Provide all incidental items required for complete installation and satisfactory operation of all equipment, whether or not specifically noted in contract documents. A. QUALIFICATIONS 1. Contractor shall employ on this project, capable, experienced and reliable foreman and such skilled workmen as may be required for various classes of work to be performed. 2. Where special skills and certification are required, Contractor shall ensure that work is performed by individuals with required experience, skill and certification. 3. If, in Engineer's opinion, Contractor's employees do not possess necessary qualifications to perform specialty work, Contractor will be required to obtain services of workmen who are approved by manufacturer and certified by applicable agency or group. These workmen, if required, shall be provided at no additional expense. 4. Refer to other specification sections for additional required contractor qualifications and certification. B. LICENSING AND CERTIFICATION - All Division 26 work shall be accomplished by Electricians, licensed by state in which work is being done, certified as required, and skilled in their craft. Electrician may elect to hire subcontractors for portions of work (such as systems described in Divisions 27 and 28) who are not licensed electricians, but have required certificates and are licensed in their discipline by state in which work is being done. C. COORDINATION 1. Contractor shall consult all contract documents, shop drawings of other trades, and actual building dimensions to predetermine that his work and equipment will fit as planned. Do not scale drawings for fabrication. No extra payment will be issued for materials or items which do not fit because of Contractor's failure to verify as-built building dimensions. 2. Contractor shall check location of fixtures, outlets, equipment, conduit, etc., to determine they clear all openings, structural members, piping, ducts and miscellaneous equipment having fixed locations. 3. Changes in location of electrical work, necessary due to obstacles or installation of other trades shown on contract documents, shall be made by Electrical Contractor at no extra cost. 4. Contractor shall coordinate with Plumbing and Mechanical Contractors to avoid installation of piping and ductwork above or below panelboards in violation of National Electrical Code. 5. Lay out all work in advance and avoid conflict with other work in progress. Physical dimensions shall be determined from architectural and structural plans. Verify locations for junction boxes, disconnect switches, stub-ups, etc., for connection to equipment furnished by others, or in other Divisions of this work. 6. Contractor shall coordinate and plan work to proceed with work of other trades. 7. Contractor shall inform General Contractor of all required openings in building structure for installation of electrical equipment. 8. Contractor shall check dimensions of all electrical equipment installed, provided by himself or by others, so correct clearances and connections can be made. 9. Consulting all contract documents and shop drawings of other trades, contractor shall determine where electrical junction/pull boxes and equipment can be installed to maintain proper accessibility. Where accessibility cannot be maintained by judicious placement of boxes, Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with General Contractor to provide, fabricate, install, adjust, paint, etc. access doors through non-accessible floor, wall, and ceiling finishes to allow access to all electrical junction and pull boxes, electrical devices, electrical equipment, etc. at all required locations whether shown or not shown on plans. Electrical Contractor is responsible for determining size and location of the access doors. Report any conflicts to Architect/Engineer. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 00 10 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Page 4 of 10 1.07 REVIEW A. All work and material is subject to review at any time by the Architect/Engineer or his representative. If the Architect/Engineer or his representative finds material that does not conform to these specifications or that is not properly installed or finished, correct the deficiencies in a manner satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer at the Contractor’s expense. 1.08 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. ELECTRICAL UTILITIES 1. The Electrical Contractor shall provide temporary electrical power to the construction site as directed by the General Contractor. 2. The Electrical Contractor shall provide temporary electrical power to job trailers as directed by the General Contractor. 3. The Electrical Contractor shall provide temporary communications to job trailers as directed by the General Contractor. 4. All Costs associated with temporary power, communications and utility cost shall be paid by to the General Contractor. 5. The Electrical Contractor shall provide temporary construction lighting as directed by the General Contractor to provide a safe working environment. 6. All temporary services are to be removed in their entirety prior to occupancy as directed by the General Contractor. B. OFFICES 1. The Electrical Contractor must have the permission of the Owner and General Contractor or Construction Manager to install a temporary office/job trailer on the project site. 2. Contractor shall completely remove his temporary installations when no longer needed and the premises shall be completely clean, disinfected, patched, and refinished to match adjacent areas. C. LADDERS AND SCAFFOLDS 1. The Electrical and Low-voltage Contractors shall provide their own ladders, scaffolds, etc. of substantial construction for access to their work in various portions of the building as may be required. When no longer needed, they shall be removed by the Contractor. D. PROTECTION DEVICES 1. The Electrical and Low-voltage Contractors shall provide and maintain their own necessary barricades, fences, signal lights, etc., required by all governing authorities or shown on the drawings. When no longer needed, they shall be removed by the Contractor. E. TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION 1. The Electrical and Low-voltage Contractors shall provide all necessary first aid hand fire extinguishers for Class A, B, C and special hazards as may exist in his own work area only in accordance with good and safe practice and as required by jurisdictional safety authority. 1.09 RECORD DOCUMENTS (AS-BUILT DRAWINGS) A. See requirements regarding record documents in General Division and Division 1. B. At beginning of work, Contractor shall set aside one complete set of drawings which shall be maintained as complete "As-Built" set. Drawings shall be updated daily in neat and legible manner and shall not be used for any other purpose. Drawings, specification, addenda, change orders, etc. shall be maintained at job site and available for review at any time. C. Show dimensioned location and routing of all electrical work that will become permanently concealed, cast in concrete or buried underground. D. Show complete routing and sizing of any significant revisions to systems shown. E. Show provisions for future connection, referenced to building lines or approved bench marks. F. Provide wiring diagrams for all individual communications systems as installed. Identify all components and show all wire and terminal numbers and connections. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 00 10 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Page 5 of 10 G. At completion of project, deliver drawings to Engineer for review. 1.10 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall guarantee that all materials and labor installed are new and of first quality and that any material or labor found defective shall be replaced without cost to the Owner within one (1) year after substantial completion of the Contract or one (1) full season of heating and cooling operation, whichever is the greater. The guarantee shall list the date of the beginning of the one (1) year period, which shall be the date that the Substantial Completion Certificate is issued. B. Any damage to the building, caused by defective work or material of the Contractor within the above- mentioned period, shall be satisfactorily repaired without cost to the Owner. C. The guarantee does not include maintenance of equipment. The Owner shall accept full responsibility for proper operation and maintenance of equipment immediately upon substantial completion and occupancy of the building. D. Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions are mounted in Equipment Rooms and Operating Personnel thoroughly indoctrinated in the operation of all electrical equipment by the Contractor. E. No equipment installed as part of this project shall be used for temporary heat during construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturer’s trade names and catalog numbers listed are intended to indicate the quality of equipment or materials desired. Manufacturers not listed in the specification will be considered substitutions and must have prior approval. B. See Division 01 for Substitutions Procedures. Requests for substitution are to be submitted sufficiently ahead of the deadline, to give ample time for examination. Prior approval request for substitution must indicate the specific item or items to be furnished in lieu of those scheduled, together with complete technical and comparative data on scheduled items and items proposed for substitution. C. If the engineer approves any proposed substitution, the approved product will be listed in an addendum. Bidders shall not rely on approval made in any other manner. D. Electrical equipment may be installed with manufacturer’s standard finish and color except where specific color, finish or choice is indicated. If the manufacturer has no standard finish, equipment shall have a prime coat and two finish coats of gray enamel. E. High altitude operation: Capacity of all equipment is to be sized and manufactured to perform at the elevation of the project site. If not specifically indicated in the equipment schedule or in the specifications provide all required accessories and equipment for proper operation at elevation of the project site. F. This Contractor shall be responsible for materials and equipment installed under this contract. Contractor shall also be responsible for the protection of materials and equipment of others from damage as a result of his work. G. Manufactured material and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by manufacturer unless herein specified to the contrary. H. This Contractor shall make the required arrangement with General Contractor or Construction Manager for the introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. I. Store materials and equipment indoors at the job site or, if this is not possible, store on raised platforms and protect from the weather by means of waterproof covers. Coverings shall permit circulation of air around the materials to prevent condensation of moisture. Screen or cap openings in equipment to prevent the entry of vermin. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 00 10 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Page 6 of 10 2.02 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS - Where substituted equipment requires structural, architectural, mechanical, plumbing or electrical work that differs from basic design, cost of all changes, including re- design, shall be responsibility of contractor using substitution. A. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 1. In general, one particular manufacturer and part number or series is listed to describe equipment. Equivalent equipment of other manufacturers listed for that item may be substituted without prior approval. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to ensure that item used for bidding purposes is truly equivalent to that specified. If it is not equivalent, it will be rejected at shop drawing review and Contractor shall supply specified item at his own cost. 2. It is understood that manufacturers listed may not actually have equivalent product to that specified. If contractor/distributor has any questions regarding desired product characteristics and suitability of proposed substitution, he is encouraged to submit for prior approval. Also, any manufacturer not listed shall be submitted for prior approval. B. PRIOR APPROVALS 1. Manufacturers not listed in specification or on schedule for a particular item are open for substitution prior to bid opening only. 2. Manufacturers desiring approval shall submit catalog cuts that define quality of product and ability to perform as specified. It is understood that no two manufactures use identical methods or make identical products. Any and all deviations from that specified shall be clearly noted. 3. Submittals shall arrive at Engineer at least ten (10) days prior to bid opening. All approvals will be listed in last addendum as being approved to bid. Items substituted, but not listed in contract documents, will not be considered if submitted on shop drawings. 4. Approval of substitute equipment is on basis of quality only. Materials supplier shall be responsible for his quotation reflecting proper selection of his particular equipment with regard to proper capacities, physical dimensions, requirements, intended function, finish, color, etc. Engineer will not give approval to specific model numbers or check capacities, dimensions, or requirements. Evaluation will be on basis of quality and equality to specified items. 5. Prior approval shall be obtained from engineer and no other entity (architect, owner, etc.) is authorized to give such approval. C. SAMPLES 1. Where, in Engineer/Architect's opinion, product sample is required in order to determine appearance, quality, workmanship or operation, Contractor shall submit actual production samples of item in question. 2. Samples will be returned to Contractor. Approved samples may be used. 3. All costs incurred in providing and returning samples will be Contractor's responsibility. 2.03 PRODUCT AND SYSTEM SUBMITTALS A. Submittals will be required for each piece of equipment, material or product as noted in the table below. All submittal shall be submitted, reviewed and all discrepancies addressed prior to ordering equipment or starting work. Any equipment ordered without having first completed the submittal process is done at the risk of the contractor. Any work performed prior to completing the submittal process is done at the risk of the contractor. B. SUBMITTAL DEFINITIONS 1. Product Data: Provide manufacturers cut sheets that include general product information includ- ing but not limited to: Model Number, physical data, nominal capacities, rough-in requirements. 2. Performance Data: Provide detailed performance and capacities based on project specific require- ments including but not limited to: voltage, phase, amperage, overcurrent protection, conductor size, conductor material, conduit size, color temperature, color rendering index, life expectance, efficacy, efficiency, IP ratings, light distribution types and lighting control. 3. Shop Drawings: Provide detailed drawings of the equipment showing overall dimensions, location of electrical connection, location of anchorage points, location of electrical and control panels, and all operating, service and maintenance clearances. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 00 10 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Page 7 of 10 4. Delegated Design: Provide detailed drawings prepared and stamped by a registered Professional Engineer that detail pertinent design criterial, the materials and products to be installed and the required installation locations. 5. Wiring Diagram: Provide diagrams that identify and detail required field wiring. 6. Color Chart: Provide a physical color chart of material samples required for selection of equipment colors. C. SUBMITTAL FORMATS 1. Include the following information with each submittal: a. Project Name b. Submittal Date c. Name of Architect d. Name of Engineer e. Name of General Contractor or Construction Manager f. Name of Sub-Contractor g. Name of firm or entity that prepared the submittal h. Unique Submittal Number i. Type of Submittal j. Specification Section k. Name or Mark of equipment or material and detail or drawings reference. 2. All Submittal with the exception of color charts or material samples shall be electronically trans- mitted PDFs. All submittals over 8 Mb shall be setup on a share file site and access granted through email with folder’s link for download. D. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Submittals shall be submitted as a complete specification section. The submittal must include all materials and equipment for that specification section. Submittals for individual materials of equipment will be rejected without review. 2. Submittals shall be complete, clearly show item used, size, dimensions, capacity, rough in, etc., as required for complete check and installation. Manufacturer’s literature showing more than one item shall be clearly marked as to which item is being furnished or it will be rejected and returned without review. 3. Each submittal shall be thoroughly checked by the Contractor for compliance with the Contract Document requirements, accuracy of dimensions, relationship to the work of other trades, and conformance with sound, safe practices as to erection and installation. Each submittal shall then bear a stamp evidencing such checking and shall show corrections made, if any. Submittals requir- ing extensive corrections shall be revised before submission. Each submittal not stamped and signed by the General and Electrical Contractors evidencing such checking will be rejected and returned without review. 4. On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, in- cluding minor variations and limitations; include relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet. 5. Review of the shop drawings and literature by the engineer shall not relieve the contractor for responsibility for deviations for the drawings or specifications, nor shall it relieve the contractor from responsibility for errors in the shop drawings or literature. It is the responsibility of the con- tractor to provide materials and equipment which meet the specifications and job requirements. 6. Luminaires submittals shall include dimensions, quality, distribution, color rendering index, color temperature, optics, photometrics, all listings (UL, DLC, Energy Star, Made in America, etc.), IP rat- ings, voltage, wattage, warranty, installation methods, control methods, efficacy, efficiency, dif- fuser options, emergency operation and any required accessories. Provide IES and Revit files upon request. E. ENGINEER'S REVIEW - Submittal review is for general design and arrangement only and does not relieve Contractor from any requirements of contract documents. Submittals will not be checked for quantity, Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 00 10 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Page 8 of 10 dimension, fit or proper technical design of manufactured equipment. Where product or system performance deviations have not been specifically noted in submittal by Contractor, Engineer's review will not relieve Contractor's responsibility to provide complete and satisfactory working installation of equal quality and performance to specified system. Ordering, manufacture, shipment or installation of equipment prior to receipt of Engineer's written review is strictly at Contractor's risk and all costs associated with shipping, changes, replacement or restocking shall be Contractor's responsibility. 2.04 SUB-CONTRACTORS - With shop drawing submittals, Contractor shall submit list of all sub-contractors to be used for the project. 2.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals (O&M Manuals) shall contain: 1. Names and contact information for the Project Architect, Project Engineer. 2. Names and contact information for the General Contractor or Construction Manager. 3. Names and contact information for sub-contractors. 4. Installation, maintenance and operating instructions for each piece of equipment. 5. Parts lists 6. Wiring Diagrams 7. Equipment Start-up and inspection certificates 8. Test and Balance Reports 9. Commissioning Reports 10. Copies of Equipment Warranties 11. Copies of Submittals 12. Record Drawings. 13. Training DVD’s. B. Prior to substantial completion submit an electronic copy of the O&M manual in PDF format to the Architect, Engineer and Owner for Review and approval. The PDF shall be one file with an index and hyperlinks to each section. Individual bound PDFs without automated navigation will be rejected. All O&M data shall be grouped by the equipment type and ordered by the specification numbering. C. Prior to final payment a final electronic copy of the O&M manual on an archival quality DVD as well as two printed copies shall be furnished to the owner. Printed copies shall have commercial quality 8-1/2” x 11” 3-ring binders with tabbed dividers for each section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SITE EXAMINATION A. Prior to submitting bid, Contractor shall visit site of proposed work and familiarize himself with conditions affecting work. Allowance shall be made in bid for these conditions and no additional allowance shall be granted because of lack of knowledge of such conditions. B. Contractor shall verify all measurements at building site. 3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Obtain written permission of Architect/Engineer before cutting or piercing structural members. B. Sleeves through floors and walls shall be black iron pipe, flush with walls, ceilings or finished floors, sized to accommodate raceway. Grout all penetrations through concrete walls or floors. Holes through existing concrete and concrete block (CMU) shall be core drilled. 3.03 CLEAN-UP AND COMMISSIONING A. DURING CONSTRUCTION - Throughout construction, keep work area reasonably neat and orderly by periodic clean-ups. B. COMMISSIONING - As independent parts of construction are completed, they may be commissioned and utilized during construction. See various sections for restrictions. C. AT COMPLETION OF WORK Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 00 10 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Page 9 of 10 1. Clean equipment of dirt and debris, including interior of panels, outlet boxes, etc. Remove labels from and clean all fixture lenses. 2. Remove materials, scraps, etc., relative to this work and leave premises in clean and orderly condition. This includes all tunnels, attics, ceiling and crawl spaces. 3. Remove all temporary facilities and restore to conditions present prior to work. 3.04 PROJECT COMPLETION AND DEMONSTRATION A. TESTING 1. Prior to final test, all switches, panelboards, devices, and fixtures shall be in place. 2. At completion of work, or upon request from Architect/Engineer, place entire electrical installation, and/or any portion thereof, in operation to demonstrate satisfactory operation. 3. All electrical systems shall be free from short circuits and unintentional grounds. 4. Furnish one (1) copy of certified test results to Architect/Engineer prior to final inspection and include one (1) copy in each Brochure of Equipment. B. ADJUSTMENTS 1. Make all changes necessary to balance connected electrical loads on complete system. Arrange for balanced conditions of circuits under connected load demands, as contemplated by normal working conditions. Final load and balance test shall be demonstrated in presence of Architect/Engineer. 2. Immediately correct all deficiencies which are evidenced during tests and repeat tests until system is approved. Do not cover or conceal electrical installations until satisfactory tests are made and approved. C. FINAL WALK-THRU 1. Conduct operating tests during final inspection. Demonstrate installation to operate satisfactorily in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. Should any portion of installation fail to meet requirements of Contract Documents, repair or replace items failing to meet requirements until items can be demonstrated to comply. 2. Have instruments available for measuring light intensities, voltage and current values and for demonstration of continuity, grounds, or open circuit conditions. 3. Furnish personnel to assist in taking measurements and making tests. In event that systems are not complete and fully operational at time of final inspection, all costs of any subsequent inspections shall be borne by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. 3.05 OWNER ORIENTATION AND TRAINING A. GENERAL 1. The system training is intended to familiarize the Owner’s operating and maintenance staff with all systems requiring maintenance. Training is to be provided after the systems are in place and operational, after issues noted during commissioning have been resolved, and before final ac- ceptance. 2. Provide second set of training sessions for automatic control systems about 6-9 months after the first sessions. 3. All Training shall be videotaped and reproduced on DVD’s and given to the owner. Provide a copy for each O&M manual produced. 4. See Individual specification sections for additional training requirements. B. ATTENDANCE 1. Training is to be provided by contractor’s representatives that are familiar with the system’s oper- ation and maintenance requirements. Individual training sessions (modules) are to provided for each type or group of systems, separated roughly by trade group that will be performing mainte- nance on the system. C. SCHEDULE 1. Duplicate training sessions are to be provided for each training module, so that Owner’s operating personnel can be split into two groups during training. Duplicate training sessions to be scheduled Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 00 10 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Page 10 of 10 on different days. Length of training sessions will be determined by scope of training indicated below, and as coordinated with Owner after draft copy of training documents have been reviewed. D. TRAINING DOCUMENTATION 1. Contractor to submit draft copy of agenda and training documents to Owner for review at least two weeks prior to training date. 2. Provide a copy of the following items for each person that will be attending the training sessions. Coordinate required number with the Owner. a. Training agenda. b. Summary of new systems and existing systems affected by this project. c. Summary of work performed under this project. d. Control system drawings and sequences of operation. e. List of important maintenance and trouble-shooting operations for all systems. 3. Provide minimum of 2 copies of following items: a. Contract documents including all drawings, specifications, addendums, and change orders. E. TRAINING SESSIONS 1. Assemble at location to be determined by the Owner. 2. Distribute training documentation as indicated above. 3. Provide classroom style training if required for orientation, discussion of new systems and existing systems affected by this project, and other issues appropriate for a classroom format. 4. Visit site and review locations, and perform detailed review of operation and maintenance require- ments for current systems. 5. All training session shall be video recorded and distributed to the owner upon completion in DVD format, or owner desired format. Include all training videos in the O&M manual. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 05 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 of 4 SECTION 26 05 05 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section describes general requirements and methods of execution relating to selective demolition of electrical systems. B. Not all removal and revision work required as part of the demolition work is shown on the plans. The plans are intended to indicate areas where demolition will occur and to establish the intent of the demolition work. It is the Contractor's responsibility to remove all existing electrical raceways, wires, devices and equipment that fall within the area affected by demolition of the structure. C. The Contractor shall thoroughly familiarize himself with work and local conditions under which the work is to be performed. Using original design drawings and walk-through inspections, a concerted effort was made to place pertinent information on contract drawings. However, due to nature of demo/remodel work, the Contractor must bear in mind that unforeseen conditions may exist, and shall thoroughly inspect work area prior to his bid. The Contractor shall include in his bid any incidental items which may be required to provide complete demolition and rework associated systems in adjacent areas where no demolition is occurring. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide materials in accordance with applicable sections in these specifications where: 1. Additional conduit, fittings, conductors, etc., are required for re-connection of circuits that extend beyond the demolition area. 2. Devices or equipment need to be temporarily or permanently relocated. 3. Portions of the remaining structure need to be patched or resurfaced. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements as shown on Drawings. B. Verify that raceways, wiring and equipment being demo'ed only serve facilities in the designated demolition area. C. Examine existing light fixtures being removed to verify if ballasts contain PCB's. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations and follow the safe working practice requirements of NFPA 70E. B. PRE-DEMOLITION MEETING - Participate in a pre-demolition meeting at the project site with Owner and all affected stakeholders. 1. Inspect and discuss the condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review all asbestos reports and plan electrical demo work to comply with report findings. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review and coordinate requirements of work performed by other trades. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 6. Review procedures to be followed when critical systems are inadvertently interrupted. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination required with Owner prior to device/system removal to ensure systems that must remain operational are not compromised during the demolition process. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 05 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 2 of 4 C. SURVEY OF EXISTING CONDITIONS - Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or video. 1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. D. EXISTING ELECTRICAL SERVICE 1. Make provisions to maintain existing power system in service at all times. 2. Disable the power system only to make switchovers and connections. 3. Obtain permission from the Owner and the Architect/Engineer at least 72 hours prior to partially or completely disabling the system. 4. Minimize the duration of any outages. 5. If required, make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to the demolition work area. E. EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 1. Maintain existing system in service at all times. 2. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections 3. Obtain permission from the Owner and the Architect/Engineer at least 72 hours prior to partially or completely disabling the fire alarm system. 4. Minimize the duration of any outages and maintain a fire watch throughout the outage duration. 5. If required, make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to the demolition work area. 3.03 COORDINATION A. The Contractor is responsible for providing and coordinating phased activities and construction methods that minimize disruption to facility operations. Ensure that any portion of systems or devices to remain continue to be complete and operational. Equipment and devices shall not be removed or reconfigured until coordinated with owner. B. The Contractor shall coordinate interfaces to existing systems that are being demolished in order to minimize disruption to the existing systems operations. Coordinate all utility service and system outages with the Owner's Representative, the Architect/Engineer and the local Utility Company as applicable. C. Demolition and remodel shall be done quickly so as to not hinder other trades. D. Refer to demolition drawings, new drawings and site drawings to coordinate demolition and remodel efforts. Notify Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies. 3.04 EXISTING SERVICES/SYSTEMS TO REMAIN - Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. A. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions. B. When temporary bypass systems are installed, test and get approval from Engineer before proceeding with demolition of existing systems. C. For existing equipment cabinets with active components in them, provide an air tight dust seal around the cabinet and circulate cooling air with a portable air conditioning unit or other means to ensure equipment does not overheat. 3.05 DEMOLITION A. Revise electrical connections as required to remove all equipment and items listed herein or shown on plans. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 05 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 3 of 4 B. Remove all electrical devices from walls, floors and ceilings that are to be demolished or moved. This includes but is not limited to: 1. Abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment along with the conduits and wires that constitute their feeders. 2. Starters, disconnects and other devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that is being removed. 3. Light fixtures including brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. 4. Switches, outlets, horns, bells, intercom stations, clocks, etc. C. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit and wiring servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for any abandoned boxes which are noted on the plans as not removed. D. Remove conduit to point where it no longer interferes with construction and is concealed. For conduit buried in concrete or CMU walls, cut conduit off flush with floor and plug conduit. E. If certain conduits and boxes are abandoned but not scheduled for removal, they shall be shown on the "As Built Drawings". F. If the plans specifically call for conduits that are routed through the demolition area, and are to remain, provide supplemental support to meet the requirements in: 1. Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 2. Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 3. Section 26 05 48.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." G. Remove all conductors back to source (panelboard or last live device). Remove all abandoned communications and security systems cable from origin to destination (do not abandon in place UNO). H. Contractor shall give Owner option to keep demo’ed electrical items of his choice. Contractor is responsible for disposal of all remaining electrical items. I. Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of all removed lamps and ballasts. Ballasts may contain PCB's and lamps may contain Mercury. These shall be disposed of according to environmental regulations. J. Provide revised typed circuit directory in panelboards that have circuits removed. K. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. L. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. M. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover any openings to remain. N. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. O. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and/or portable fire suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. P. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. Q. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. R. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 3.06 RELOCATION OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT A. Equipment to be relocated shall be serviced, modified and repaired as necessary to place it in good working order and to satisfaction of Architect/Engineer. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 05 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 4 of 4 B. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. C. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make the item functional for use at its new location. E. Equipment shall be tested in the new location and proper function demonstrated. 3.07 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.08 LAMP DISPOSAL A. All lamps contain mercury and/or lead, as well as other heavy metals and compounds which are regulated by the EPA. As a result, regulations have been issued covering the handling and disposal of all lamps. Lamps which have been removed from service for disposal shall be handled as follows by the Contractor: 1. The Contractor shall very carefully remove all lamps (fluorescent, incandescent, and HID) from light fixtures before removal of the fixture from its mounted position. This is to reduce the likelihood that the lamps will be broken. 2. All fluorescent, neon, mercury vapor, high pressure sodium, and metal halide lamps shall be recycled in accordance with Administrative Rules of Montana ARM 17.53.1303 by either working with a certified recycler from this list: https://deq.mt.gov/Portals/112/Land/hazwaste/documents/HAZ_Lamp_Recycler_Lst.pdf, or by becoming a small quantity handler of universal waste in accordance with 40 CFR 273. In either case, the contractor shall be responsible for storing, labeling, shipping and training workers in accordance with 40 CFR 273. Include recycling receipts in O&M Manuals at the completion of the project. 3.09 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before demolition operations began. B. The contractor shall be required, on a daily basis, to dispose of any demolished material not required to be returned to the Owner. All materials shall be transported off of the Owner’s property at the expense of the Contractor. C. At the end of each work day or shift, the Contractor shall be required to clean up the work area and remove all construction debris such that the site is clean and usable without hazard to workers. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 1 of 3 SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less. 2. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, rated 600 V or less. 3. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COPPER BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. Alpha Wire Company. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Cerro Wire LLC. 5. Encore Wire Corporation. 6. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 7. Okonite Company. 8. Service Wire Co. 9. Southwire Incorporated. 10. WESCO C. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide." D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors. E. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type USE-2 and Type SE: Comply with UL 854. 2. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 3. Type THW-2: Comply with NEMA WC-70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 83. 4. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44. 2.02 METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC A. Description: A factory assembly of one or more current-carrying insulated conductors in an overall metallic sheath. B. Approved for lighting whips 6’ or less. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 2 of 3 C. Approved for installation into existing walls. D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems. 2. Alpha Wire Company. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation. 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Okonite Conpany. 7. Service Wire Co. 8. Southwire Incorporated. 9. WESCO E. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. Comply with UL 1569. F. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide." G. Conductors: 1. Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors. 2. Maximum size wire: #10 AWG. H. Ground Conductor: Insulated. I. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type TFN/THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. J. Armor: Steel, interlocked. K. Jacket: PVC applied over armor for mechanical connection or wet/damp environments 2.03 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 3M Electrical Products 2. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 3. Gardner Bender. 4. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 5. Ideal Industries, Inc. 6. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. 7. NSi Industries LLC. 8. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 9. Service Wire Co. 10. TE Connectivity Ltd. 11. Thomas and Betts Corp Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 3 of 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 3.02 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND WIRING METHODS A. Feeders: 1. Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. B. Branch Circuits: 1. Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. C. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire- mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. F. Support cables according to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." G. Provide a dedicated neutral conductor for each 120 V branch circuit. 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. 3.05 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor. 3.06 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 44 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.07 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 of 3 SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. RATIONALE – Grounding provides the foundation to the entire electrical system. This system is designed to: B. Protect personnel. C. Minimize damage to equipment and property in the event of high fault current situations, D. Improve overall electrical system reliability, and E. Minimize the effects of transient overvoltages. F. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 2.02 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Equipment and wiring device grounding conductor shall be as follows: 1. Bare copper or have green insulation of same type as circuit conductors (larger wires may be permanently marked with green). 2. Properly sized in accordance with the NEC. C. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. D. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 2 of 3 2.03 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. E. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual, tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts. F. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy. G. Cable Tray Ground Clamp: Mechanical type, zinc-plated malleable iron. H. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub. I. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt. J. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw. K. Service Post Connectors: Mechanical type, bronze alloy terminal, in short- and long-stud lengths, capable of single and double conductor connections. L. Signal Reference Grid Clamp: Mechanical type, stamped-steel terminal with hex head screw. M. Straps: Solid copper, copper lugs. Rated for 600 A. N. Tower Ground Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal one-piece clamp. O. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial. P. Water Pipe Clamps: 1. Mechanical type, two pieces with zinc-plated bolts. a. Material: Die-cast zinc alloy. b. Listed for direct burial. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Any threaded bolt connectors shall be torqued in accordance with manufacturer’s guidelines. 3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. Do not rely on conduit for the grounding path. B. Multiple circuits sharing a raceway may share a single grounding conductor if all of the following requirements are met: 1. All circuits originate in the same panel. 2. No more than three single pole circuits may share a ground conductor. 3. Size the ground conductor for the largest circuit. C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 3 of 3 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. D. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. E. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. C. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. Size bonding conductors and jumpers in accordance with NEC 250.122, using the rating of the circuit that is likely to energize the ducts. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed 25 ohms to ground. E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 of 3 SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Conduit and cable support devices. 3. Support for conductors in vertical conduit. 4. Structural steel for fabricated supports and restraints. 5. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners, mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and hanger rods. 6. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the supported equipment and systems will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the supported equipment and systems will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2.02 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch-diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c. in at least one surface. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. b. B-line, an Eaton business. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. Flex-Strut Inc. e. Gripple Inc. f. G-Strut. g. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. h. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International. 2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 3. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Galvanized steel. 4. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria. 5. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 6. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 2 of 3 7. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 8. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable iron. D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.03 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter: 1. NECA 1. 2. NECA 101 3. NECA 102. 4. NECA 105. 5. NECA 111. B. Comply with requirements for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies. C. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." D. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. E. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 3 of 3 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps. F. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings, and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, according to NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58,Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that comply with seismic- restraint strength and anchorage requirements. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing bars. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 of 8 SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Surface raceways. 5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Metal Conduit: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. b. Electri-Flex Company. c. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. d. Patriot Aluminum Products, LLC. e. Perma-Cote. f. Picoma Industries, Inc. g. Plasti-Bond. h. Republic Conduit. i. Southwire Company. j. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. k. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 2. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. 4. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. 5. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. a. Comply with NEMA RN 1. b. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum. 6. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 7. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. 8. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. B. Metal Fittings: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 3. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and NFPA 70. 4. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Setscrew. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 2 of 8 5. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 6. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. C. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Nonmetallic Conduit: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Arnco Corporation. b. CANTEX INC. c. CertainTeed Corporation. d. Champion Fiberglass, Inc. e. Condux International, Inc. f. Electri-Flex Company. g. FRE Composites. h. Kraloy. i. Lamson & Sessions. j. Niedax Inc. k. RACO; Hubbell. l. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. B. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC or Type EPC-80-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. 2. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. 3. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A. 4. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B. C. Nonmetallic Fittings: 1. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 2. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. 3. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B. 4. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer. 2.03 STANDARD CONDUIT SEALS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. American Polywater Corporation 2. Dura-Line, Inc. 3. FS3, Inc. B. Description: Sealing compound for use in underground conduit to prevent water and gas infiltration in non-classified locations. 1. Semi-permanent, re-enterable seal. 2. Compatible with PVC, rigid steel, EMT, IMC, fiberglass and polyethylene conduits. 3. Keeps water, acids, greases, gases, insects, rodents, etc., out of the conduit. 4. Two-part high-expansion urethane foam with 98% closed cell content. 5. Cured compressive strength of 300 lbs. (ASTM D790), tensile strength of 250 lbs. (ASTM D1623), and flexural strength of 450 lbs. (ASTM D790) and temperature range of -20⁰ to 200⁰F. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 3 of 8 6. Cured sealant will be capable of holding 10 psi water pressure continuously. 7. Meets NEC requirements for raceway seals per Articles 225.27, 230.8 and 300.5 8. FST™ Sealant or equivalent. 2.04 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 3. MonoSystems, Inc. B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 4 or Type 12 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold- down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.05 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Mono-Systems, Inc. b. Panduit Corp. c. Wiremold / Legrand. 2.06 J-HOOKS A. Description: Prefabricated sheet metal cable supports for low-voltage cables (lighting controls). B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton, B-line. 2. Panduit Corp. 3. Wiremold / Legrand. C. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. 2.07 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business. 2. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 3. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 4. Hubbell Incorporated. 5. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 6. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 7. MonoSystems, Inc. 8. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. 9. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 4 of 8 10. RACO; Hubbell. 11. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover. E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. F. Metal Floor Boxes. See drawings for differing floor box requirements based on location, floor material and box use. 1. All floor boxes shall be: a. Fully adjustable. b. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Specific conditions include: a. Concrete floors (3" min. pour depth) - 4-gang floor box with corrosion resistant coating for on-grade use and up to 2" conduit feed. b. Raised access floors - 4-gang floor box for up to 2" conduit feed. c. Fire rated poke-through floor box for elevated concrete slabs: 1) Small - 3" diameter core. 2) Large - 8" diameter for up to 2" conduit feed. d. Flush, round single service floor box for concrete floors with up to 1" conduit feed. e. Tombstone pedestal floor box with 1" conduit feed. 3. Include all interior box dividers, flanges, mounting hardware, wiring devices, faceplates, etc. to provide complete floor box outlet in accordance with drawings. Ensure that the floor box cover is appropriate for the flooring being installed. Architect/Owner shall approve the cover finish type and color. 4. Refer to Section 26 27 26 “Wiring Devices” for requirements of receptacles contained within floor boxes. 5. Products: Subject to alignment with specific conditions listed above and compliance with requirements of this Section, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Concrete floors: Hubbell CFB4G30CR. b. Raised access floors: Hubbell AFB4G50. c. Fire-rated poke-through, 3” diameter: Hubbell PT7FSD. d. Fire-rated poke-through, 8” diameter: Hubbell S1R8PTFIT1. e. Single-service: Hubbell B2506. f. Tombstone pedestal: Hubbell 6301. G. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. H. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb. 1. Listing and labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. I. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. J. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. K. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 5 of 8 L. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep with single gang mud ring unless device(s) requires otherwise. M. Gang-able boxes are allowed for 6-gang or larger. N. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 4 or Type 12 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. O. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R or Type 12 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. Exposed Schedule 40 PVC is not allowed. 2. Concealed Aboveground Conduit: EMT. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 5. Provide expansion-joint fittings where required below. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated. 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. 3. Concealed in New Ceilings and New Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Concealed in Existing Walls and Partitions: MC cable. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 nonmetallic in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. 8. Concealed in CMU block wall: Type EPC-40-PVC. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1 inch trade size for telecom/data and 3/4 inch trade size for all other applications. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 3. EMT: Use setscrew, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 6 of 8 E. Install surface raceways only where specifically indicated on Drawings. F. Install nonmetallic conduit or tubing for protecting bare grounding conductors. G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F. 3.02 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE INSTALLATION A. Any low voltage cables in exposed or finished areas shall be in raceway. B. In accordance with NEC 300.11 and NEC 800.24, any low voltage cables installed in accessible ceilings without conduit, including lighting control cables, shall be as follows: 1. Cables shall not be draped over air ducts, pipes, or conduits, shall not rest on the ceiling grid or tiles, and shall not use ceiling grid support wires or rods. 2. Cables shall be supported using j-hooks at intervals not to exceed 48”. J-hooks shall be attached to the structure with dedicated support wires, and a j-hook shall be installed at each change in cabling direction. 3. Written approval shall be obtained from the IT designer prior to any use of communications system cable/ladder tray or j-hooks. Wherever cable tray or communication system j-hooks are used, the lighting controls cabling shall be bundled with cable ties. Any non-metallic cable ties used to bundle the cables shall be plenum rated. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. C. Do not install raceways or electrical items on any "explosion-relief" walls or rotating equipment. D. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof. E. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. F. Whenever routed in parallel, maintain 12” minimum separation between communications conduits and power conduits. Where these conduits must intersect, cross at 90 degrees. G. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. H. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. I. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved. J. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. K. Support conduit within 12 inchesof enclosures to which attached. L. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. M. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 7 of 8 N. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. O. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. P. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. Q. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. R. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. S. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. T. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. U. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inchradius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. V. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. W. Standard Conduit Seals: 1. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: a. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. b. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. c. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building. d. Conduit extending into pressurized duct and equipment. e. Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to maintain different pressure set points. f. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. X. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install where RNC (Schedule 80 PVC) is allowed/required for utility riser at service entrance. 2. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). 3. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 8 of 8 4. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per degree F of temperature change for PVC conduits. 5. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 6. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. Y. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. Z. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. AA. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between the box and cover plate or the supported equipment and box. BB. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. CC. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. DD. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. EE. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. FF. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. 3.04 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. 3.05 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 of 5 SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Color and legend requirements for raceways, conductors, and warning labels and signs. 2. Tapes and stencils. 3. Signs. 4. Cable ties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with ASME A13.1. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Comply with NFPA 70E requirements for arc-flash warning labels. F. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. 2.02 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits within Buildings. Identify the covers of each junction and pull box. 1. Affix label with black letters indicating voltage and system or service type. B. Conductor Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors. 1. Utilize factory applied, colored insulation for No. 8 AWG and smaller. 2. If Authority Having Jurisdiction permits, for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, where conductors with factory colored insulation are not commonly available, colored non-aging, plastic tape may be field applied. Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. 3. Colors for Three-Phase Wye, 208/120V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White. 4. Colors for Three-Phase, 480/277V Circuits: a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow. d. Neutral: Gray. 5. Color for Equipment Grounds: Bare copper or Green. 6. Lighting Circuit Switched Legs and 3-way/4-way Traveler: Color unique to those listed above. C. Warning Label Colors: 1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 2 of 5 D. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 3. Arc Flash Warning: “WARNING – KEEP CLEAR. RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR ARC FLASH. PPE REQUIRED.”. E. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Black letters on a white field, or white letters on a black field. 2. Include equipment designation and circuit. 3. Exterior equipment labels shall have a rivet or screw mounted label on the exterior door. 4. 1” minimum height letters for service disconnect and emergency shut-off switches. 5. 1/2" minimum height letters for panelboards, switchboards, relay enclosures and transformers. 6. 1/4" minimum height letters for disconnect switches and motor starters. 7. 1/8” minimum height letters for device coverplates (where required). 2.03 TAPES AND STENCILS A. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use. B. Floor Marking Tape: 2-inch-wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay. C. Underground-Line Warning Tape: 1. Tape: a. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. b. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. c. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert and not subject to degradation when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. 2. Color and Printing: a. Comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, ANSI Z535.4, and ANSI Z535.5. b. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: "ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE”. c. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: "TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE”. 3. Type: a. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core; bright colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service. b. Width: 3 inches. c. Overall Thickness: 5 mils. d. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil. e. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft.. f. Tensile according to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf and 4600 psi. 2.04 SIGNS A. Baked-Enamel Signs: 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, high-intensity reflective, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal Size: 7 by 10 inches. B. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs: 1. Engraved legend. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 3 of 5 2. Thickness: a. For signs up to 20 sq. in., minimum 1/16 inch thick. b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in., 1/8 inch thick. c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners with 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. 2.05 CABLE TIES A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding. B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self- extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black. C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, and self-locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. 5. Color: Black. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. C. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance of electrical systems and connected items. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 4 of 5 E. Self-Adhesive Identification Products used on the exterior of the building: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product. Labels shall have a rivet or screw mounted on each side of the label, located on the exterior door. F. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. G. Floor Marking Tape: Apply stripes to finished surfaces following manufacturer's written instructions. H. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs: 1. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. I. Cable Ties: General purpose, for attaching tags, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices. B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points, and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation. C. Accessible Fittings for Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box with self-adhesive labels containing the wiring system legend and system voltage. D. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination. E. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations, provide self- adhesive wraparound labels with the conductor designation. F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source. G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. H. Workspace Indication: Apply floor marking tape to finished surfaces. Show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. I. Instructional Signs: Self-adhesive labels, including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors. J. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive equipment labels. 1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 2. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power-transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 5 of 5 K. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive labels. L. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. M. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Self-adhesive labels, Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch-high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer and load shedding. N. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic label. 2. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, Laminated acrylic or melamine label. 3. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: 1) Update the existing typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Spares shall be filled in by hand with pencil. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Transformers. f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. g. Enclosed switches. h. Enclosed circuit breakers. i. Enclosed controllers. j. Variable-speed controllers. k. Push-button stations. l. Power transfer equipment. m. Contactors. n. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. o. Power-generating units. p. Monitoring and control equipment. q. UPS equipment. r. Wiring devices: See specification section “Wiring Devices”. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 1 of 6 SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors. 2. Switchbox-mounted occupancy and vacancy sensors B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 27 26 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, and manual light switches. 1.02 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Devices shall accommodate the square-footage coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing occupancy sensors, switches/dimmers, daylighting sensors and accessories that suit the required lighting and electrical system parameters. B. Devices and system shall conform to requirements of NFPA 70. C. All components shall comply with FCC emission standards specified in part 15, sub-part J for commercial and residential application. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Catalog sheets and specifications. 2. Ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, service condition requirements, and installed features. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation instructions. B. Manufacturer's Certificates 1. Certify all products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. Certify installer/programmer’s training to work with the system. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting control devices. B. Operation and Maintenance Manual 1. Include approved Product Data. 2. Include Sequence of Operation, identifying operation for each room or space. 3. Include manufacturer's maintenance information. 4. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on device programming and setup. 5. Include startup and test reports. C. Software and firmware operational documentation. D. Remote configuration tools. 1.05 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum two weeks prior to commencing Work of this section. Meeting to be attended by Contractor, Architect, system installer, factory authorized manufacturer's representative, and representative of all trades related to the system installation. B. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related Work and the following: 1. Confirm the location and mounting of all devices, with special attention to placement of switches, dimmers, and any sensors. 2. Review the specifications for low voltage control wiring and termination. 3. Discuss the functionality and configuration of all products, including sequences of operation, per design requirements. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 2 of 6 4. Discuss requirements for integration with other trades C. Inspect and make notes of job conditions prior to installation: 1. Record minutes of the conference and provide copies to all parties present. 2. Identify all outstanding issues in writing designating the responsible party for follow-up action and the timetable for completion. 3. Installation shall not begin until all outstanding issues are resolved to the satisfaction of the Architect. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace lighting control devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Include: a. One (1) on-site visit, six months after substantial completion, to recommission and retrain Owner's personnel. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING CONTROL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturers: Design is based on devices by Wattstopper. Systems/devices by other manufacturers may be submitted for prior approval. Include the following for evaluation: 1. Clear description of system function and topology including all wiring connections. 2. Description of each system component with itemized list of all ways it matches and differs from the specified component. 2.02 INDOOR OCCUPANCY AND VACANCY SENSORS A. Manufacturers: Design is based on WattStopper DT-300 and DT-200 Series, but subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be substituted into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 5. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 6. Philips Lighting Controls. 7. Sensor Switch, Inc. B. General Requirements for Sensors: 1. Wall and Ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors. 2. Dual technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic). 3. Separate power pack, unless installed on gyp. board ceilings or walls. 4. Hardwired (line or low-voltage) connection to switch. 5. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 6. Operation (as noted on plans): 1. Occupancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. 2. Vacancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, lights are manually turned on and sensor turns lights off when the room is unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. 7. Sensor Output: Sensor is powered from the power pack. 8. Power: Line voltage where installed on gyp. board ceilings or walls. 9. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20A LED load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120- V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 3 of 6 10. Mounting: 1. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. 2. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. 3. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door. 11. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor. 12. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 13. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected lighting level is present. C. Dual-Technology Type: Wall or Ceiling mounted (as noted on plans); detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 3. Ceiling Mounted Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling. 4. Wall Mounted Detection Coverage: Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180-degree pattern centered on the sensor over an area of 2000 square feet when mounted 72 inchesabove finished floor. 2.03 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS, DUAL TECHNOLOGY A. Manufacturers: Design is based on WattStopper DSW-300 Series, but subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be substituted into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 5. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 6. Philips Lighting Controls. 7. Sensor Switch, Inc. B. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination lighting-control sensor and conventional switch lighting- control unit using dual technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic). 1. Connections: Hard wired. 2. Rated 1200 W at 120-V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120-V ac or 10 A at 277-V ac for fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/6 hp at 120-V ac. 3. Adjustable time delay of 5 to 20 minutes. 4. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. 2.04 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multi-conductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Consult manufacturer for Class 2 wiring requirements. Provide in a separate raceway if manufacturer does not allow cabling shared with Class 1 cabling. C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multi-conductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 4 of 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Do not begin installation until measurements have been verified and work areas have been properly prepared. B. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Verify that required pre-installation meeting specified in Part 1 of this specification has been completed, recorded meeting minutes have been distributed and all outstanding issues noted have been resolved prior to the start of installation. 3.02 DEVICE LOCATIONS - Device locations on plan drawings are approximate and are intended to indicate general area to be covered. 1. All devices shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s guidelines. 2. Contractor shall provide additional devices and associated hardware as required to cover the entire area. 3. Occupancy sensor locations shall be shifted as necessary to ensure the following: 1. Normal devices shall be installed only no higher than 120” AFF. 2. No device employing PIR sensing shall be installed in a location where obstacles may block the sensor’s field of view. 3. Any device employing ultrasonic sensing shall be installed at a minimum of 72” away from any strong transfer of air such as supply diffusers. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Examine all lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire- suppression systems, and partition assemblies. D. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90-percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-borne vibration unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators. F. When using wire for connections other than the DLM local network (Cat 5e with RJ-45 connectors), provide detailed point to point wiring diagrams for every termination. Provide wire specifications and wire colors to simplify contactor termination requirements G. Install the work of this Section in accordance with the approved system shop drawings in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions unless otherwise indicated. H. Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of occupants and energy savings. Adjust time delay so that controlled area remains lighted for 5 minutes after occupant leaves area. I. Provide written or computer-generated documentation on the commissioning of the system including room by room description including: 1. Sensor parameters, time delays, sensitivities, and daylighting set-points. 2. Sequence of operation, (e.g. manual ON, Auto OFF. etc.) 3. Load Parameters (e.g. blink warning, etc.) J. Post start-up tuning - Adjust sensor time delays and sensitivities to meet the Owner's requirements 30 days from beneficial occupancy. Provide a detailed report to the Architect / Owner of post start-up activity. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 5 of 6 3.04 WIRING - In general, all devices and equipment shall be wired in accordance with manufacturer’s guidelines. Wireless devices shall only be used if specifically approved in writing by the Engineer. A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 3/4 inch. B. All low voltage cabling shall meet manufactures requirements. C. Install all room/area devices using manufacturer's factory-tested Cat 5e cable with pre-terminated RJ-45 connectors. 1. If pre-terminated cable is not used for room/area wiring, each field-terminated cable shall be tested following installation and testing results submitted to the Manufacturer's Representative for approval prior to proceeding with the Work. 2. If fixtures have internal DLM Control Modules, ensure that they are also connected with Cat 5e cable. 3. Install all room to room network devices using manufacturer-supplied LM-MSTP network wire or wireless devices. Network wire substitution is not permitted and may result in loss of product warranty. 4. Low voltage wiring topology must comply with manufacturer's specifications. 5. Route network wiring as indicated on the Drawings as closely as possible. Document final wiring location, routing and topology on as built drawings. D. Low voltage cables do not require raceway where concealed in accessible ceilings. Cabling shall be cleanly organized and supported by J-Hooks or approved methods every 6 feet. E. Low voltage cables shall be installed in conduit/raceway where exposed. F. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. G. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. H. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. I. All line voltage connections shall be tagged to indicate circuit and switched legs. J. Test all devices to ensure proper communication. K. Tighten all panel Class I conductors from both circuit breaker and to loads to torque ratings as marked on enclosure UL label. L. All Class II cabling shall enter enclosures from within low-voltage wiring areas and shall remain within those areas. No Class I conductors shall enter a low-voltage area. M. Run separate neutrals for any phase dimmed branch load circuit. Different types of dimming loads shall have separate neutral. N. Verify all non-panel-based lighting loads to be free from short circuits prior to connection to room controllers. 3.05 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor. B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections - perform the following inspections. 1. Verify Class I and II wiring connections are terminated properly by validating system performance. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Page 6 of 6 2. Verify / complete task programming for all switches, dimmers, time clocks, and sensors. 3. Verify that the control of each space complies with the Sequence of Operation. 4. Correct any system issues and retest. B. Lighting control devices/system will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Provide a report in table format with drawings, or using a software file that can be opened in the manufacturer's system software including each room or space that has lighting control installed. Indicate the following: 1. Date of test or inspection. 2. Loads per space, or Fixture Address identification. 3. Quantity and Type of each device installed 4. Reports providing each device's settings. 3.07 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: Provide one on-site visit eight months from date of substantial completion to assist in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. In addition to the one required visit, when requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting lighting control devices to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations. 3.9 DEMONSTRATION 1. Before Substantial Completion, arrange and provide a one-day Owner instruction period to designated Owner personnel. Set-up, starting of the lighting control system, and Owner instruction includes: B. Confirmation of entire system operation and communication to each device. C. Confirmation of operation of individual relays, switches, and sensors. D. Confirmation of system Programming, override settings, etc. E. Provide training to cover installation, programming, operation, and troubleshooting of the lighting control system. F. During on-site visit, six months after substantial completion, recommission and retrain Owner's personnel. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Page 1 of 7 SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Straight-blade convenience receptacles. 2. TV outlets (power & signal). 3. USB charger devices. 4. GFCI receptacles. 5. Floor box receptacles. 6. Toggle switches. 7. Wall-box dimmers. 8. Wall plates. 9. Finishes. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to Section 26 09 23 “Lighting Control Devices” for occupancy/vacancy sensors, etc. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Abbreviations of Manufacturers' Names: 1. Cooper: Copper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Hubbell: Hubbell Incorporated: Wiring Devices-Kellems. 3. Leviton: Leviton Mfg. Company, Inc. 4. P&S: Pass & Seymour/Legrand. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Dimmer switch and LED lamp manufacturers’ literature showing compatibility between the two. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section. D. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment: 1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations including wire count, poles, twistlock, etc. E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.02 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125V, 20A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; TR5362 (duplex). Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Page 2 of 7 b. Hubbell; HBL5362TR (duplex). c. Leviton; 5362-SG (duplex). d. P&S; TR5362 (duplex). 2.03 TV OUTLET (POWER & SIGNAL) A. Recessed, 2-gang, in-wall enclosure with: 1. Power kit (20A duplex receptacle). 2. 1” conduit and pullstring provision for single cable. Route to accessible ceiling space, and to floor box where applicable. 3. Flush while-in-use cover. B. Recessed, 3-gang, in-wall enclosure with: 1. Left: 20A duplex receptacle, single-gang back box. 2. Center: single-gang removable back box for data, with low voltage divider. Route 1” conduit and pullstring provision for signal cable to accessible ceiling space. 3. Right: single-gang removable back box for audio/visual. Route 1-1/4” conduit and pullstring provision for signal cable to accessible ceiling space and to floor box where applicable. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2-gang: Hubbell; NSAV62M (recessed box), NSOKPTR (power kit), NSAV6C (cover). 2. 3-gang: Arlington TVBS507 2.04 USB CHARGER DEVICES A. Tamper-Resistant, USB Charger Receptacles: 12V, 2.0A, USB Type A; Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, UL 1310, and FS W-C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; TR7756. b. Hubbell; USB20A5. c. Leviton; T5832. d. P&S; TR5362USB. 2. Description: Single-piece, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system. Nickel-plated, brass mounting strap. 3. USB Receptacles: Dual, Type A. 4. Line Voltage Receptacles: Dual, two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 2.05 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: 1. 125V, 20A, straight blade, non-feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C- 596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. 4. Self-testing: a. Automatic test initiates within 5 seconds of power availability to the line or load terminals and repeats at least every 3 hours. b. If auto-monitoring detects a problem, GFCI will trip with the inability to reset. B. Tamper-Resistant, Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125V, 20A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; TRVGF20. b. Hubbell; GFRTRST20. c. Leviton; GFTR2-KW. d. P&S; 2097TR. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Page 3 of 7 2.06 FLOOR BOXES A. All receptacles contained in floor boxes shall comply the requirements of this Section. B. Refer to Section 26 05 33 “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems” for Metal Floor Boxes requirements, types, products, and installation. 2.07 TOGGLE SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. B. Switches, 120/277V, 20A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Single Pole: 1) Cooper; AH1221. 2) Hubbell; HBL1221. 3) Leviton; 1221-2. 4) P&S; CSB20AC1. b. Two Pole: 1) Cooper; AH1222. 2) Hubbell; HBL1222. 3) Leviton; 1222-2. 4) P&S; CSB20AC2. c. Three Way: 1) Cooper; AH1223. 2) Hubbell; HBL1223. 3) Leviton; 1223-2. 4) P&S; CSB20AC3. d. Four Way: 1) Cooper; AH1224. 2) Hubbell; HBL1224. 3) Leviton; 1224-2. 4) P&S; CSB20AC4. C. Lit-Handle Switches, 20A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; AH1221LT. b. Hubbell; HBL1201IL. c. Leviton; 1221-LH1. d. P&S; PS20AC1-CSL. 2. Description: Single pole, with lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off". D. Pilot-Light Switches, 20A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; AH1221PL (single-pole), AH1222PL (two-pole). b. Hubbell; HBL1221PL (single-pole), HBL1222PL (two-pole). c. Leviton; 1221-PLR (single-pole), 1222-PLR (two-pole). d. P&S; PS20AC1-RPL (single-pole), PS20AC2-RPL (two-pole). 2. Description: Single pole or two-pole, with lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "on." E. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277V, 20A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Single Pole: Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Page 4 of 7 1) Cooper; AH1221L. 2) Hubbell; HBL1221L. 3) Leviton; 1121-2L. 4) P&S; PS20AC1L. b. Two Pole: 1) Cooper; AH1222L. 2) Hubbell; HBL1222L. 3) Leviton; 1122-2L. 4) P&S; PS20AC2L. c. Three Way: 1) Cooper; AH1223L. 2) Hubbell; HBL1223L. 3) Leviton; 1123-2L. 4) P&S; PS20AC3L. d. Four Way: 1) Cooper; AH1224L. 2) Hubbell; HBL1224L. 3) Leviton; 1124-2L. 4) P&S; PS20AC4L. 2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle. F. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277V, 15A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors. a. Cooper; 1995, 1995L (keyed). b. Hubbell; HBL1557, HBL1557L (keyed) c. Leviton; 1257-W, 1257-L (keyed). d. Pass & Seymour; 1251, 1251L (keyed). 2.08 DIGITAL TIMER LIGHT SWITCH A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Watt Stopper; TS-200. 2. Hubbell; TD300. 3. P&S; RT-100 B. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination digital timer and conventional switch lighting-control unit, with backlit digital display, with selectable time interval from 5 minutes to 12 hours. 1. Rated 0-800W at 120V ac, and 0-1200W at 277V ac for tungsten, fluorescent, and LED loads. 2. Optional beep warning every five seconds during last minute of countdown. 3. Optional one second light flash warning at one minute before timer runs out. 4. Time scrolling options for overriding the preset time. 5. Electroluminescent back-lit Liquid Crystal Display shows timer countdown. 6. Integral relay for connection to BAS. 2.09 WALL-BOX DIMMERS A. General: These are stand-alone dimmer switches. See Section 26 09 23 “Lighting Control Devices” for dimmers that interface with daylight sensors, low-voltage lighting control panels, room controllers, etc. B. 0-10V Dimming for LED fixtures: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Philips; Sunrise series. b. Watt Stopper; Radiant series. c. Synergy; ISD-BC. d. Lutron; Diva series. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Page 5 of 7 2. Slide dimmer with separate ON/OFF switch button. Lighting is switched ON or OFF at the level currently set by the slider. 3. Designed for use with standard three-way and four-way switches for applications requiring control from multiple locations. 4. Match dimmer to lamp(s) being dimmed in accordance with manufacturer’s guidelines. C. Dimmer Switches for screw-in LED lamps (LED lamps with integral drivers, designed to replace incandescent or screw-in compact fluorescent lamps): 1. Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters. 2. Match dimmer to lamp(s) being dimmed in accordance with manufacturer’s guidelines. 3. 600 W dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. 2.10 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch-thick, satin-finished, Type 302 stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. B. Damp/Wet Location Covers 1. General: a. All wiring devices installed in damp or wet locations shall have cast metal covers. b. Covers shall be UL listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. c. Distinction between damp and wet locations shall be in accordance with NEC 406.9. d. Cover shall be appropriate for the device orientation with the hinge on top. e. Gasketing shall be provided to seal the cover to the box. Caulking shall be provided as required to seal any gaps between the cover and wall finish material. 2. Damp Location Covers: a. Cast metal with spring-loaded lift cover to seal the device when it is NOT in use. b. Leviton Series 6196 or equivalent. 3. Wet Location (Weatherproof-in-Use) Covers: a. Heavy Duty, Lockable, cast metal cover to seal the device whether it is in use or not. b. Intermatic Series WP1010MXD or equivalent. 2.11 FINISHES A. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. B. Wall Plates: Stainless steel, to match existing within building. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Page 6 of 7 5. Coordinate receptacle configuration, location and mounting height with equipment/ function it serves. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device- mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. 10. Damp Location Covers: Not permitted UNO. 11. Wet Location Covers: Install everywhere outside UNO. 12. For conduit routed to audio/visual section of 3-gang TV outlet, provide bushing at conduit termination in wall. Remove audio/visual back box and route conduit to opening. E. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. F. Dimmers: 1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan-speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions. 4. Match dimmer to lamp(s) being dimmed in accordance with manufacturer’s guidelines. G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates. H. GFCI Receptacles: Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. B. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. C. Perform the following tests and inspections: Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES Page 7 of 7 1. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: a. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132V. b. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. c. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. d. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. e. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. f. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. D. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which the device is served. 1. Mark inside of box or coverplate with permanent marker. Test to ensure that marker lines are not visible on outside of cover when it is installed. 2. Mark outside of coverplate using labeler such as Brother PT-90 to produce 1/8” black letters (white letters if cover is dark) on clear tape. 3.04 WEATHER STRIPPING A. Behind exterior wall devices 1. Install a precut foam insulation pad over the fixture and reinstall the cover. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 29 13 MANUAL AND MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS Page 1 of 3 SECTION 26 29 13 MANUAL AND MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual motor controllers. 2. Enclosures. 3. Accessories. 4. Identification. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. UL Compliance: Fabricate and label magnetic motor controllers to comply with UL 508 and UL 60947-4- 1. C. NEMA Compliance: Fabricate motor controllers to comply with ICS 2. D. Seismic Performance: Magnetic controllers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the controller will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5. 2.02 MANUAL MOTOR STARTER SWITCHES A. Fractional Horsepower Manual Motor Starter Switches: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push- button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Eaton. b. General Electric Company. c. Square D; by Schneider Electric. 2. 120V Single Phase – Single Pole Single throw. 3. 208V or 480V Single Phase – Double Pole Single throw. 4. Configuration: Nonreversing. 5. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor; external reset push button; bimetallic type. 6. Pilot Light: Red. 7. Surface mounted, UNO. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 29 13 MANUAL AND MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS Page 2 of 3 2.03 ENCLOSURES A. Comply with NEMA 250, type designations as indicated on Drawings, complying with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: Type 12. B. The construction of the enclosures shall comply with NEMA ICS 6. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. 1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty or oil-tight unless noted otherwise. 2. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays. B. Motor protection relays shall be with solid-state sensing circuit and isolated output contacts for hardwired connections. 1. Phase-failure. 2. Phase-reversal, with bicolor LED to indicate normal and fault conditions. Automatic reset when phase reversal is corrected. 3. Under/overvoltage, operate when the circuit voltage reaches a preset value, and drop out when the operating voltage drops to a level below the preset value. Include adjustable time-delay setting. 2.05 IDENTIFICATION A. Controller Nameplates: Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as described in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems," for each compartment, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install magnetic controllers on walls with tops at uniform height indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" unless otherwise indicated. C. Comply with requirements for seismic control devices specified in Section 26 05 48.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." D. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 70. E. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. F. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. G. Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller. H. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 26 28 13 "Fuses." I. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 29 13 MANUAL AND MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS Page 3 of 3 J. Setting of Overload Relays: Select and set overloads on the basis of full-load current rating as shown on motor nameplate. Adjust setting value for special motors as required by NFPA 70 for motors that are high-torque, high-efficiency, and so on. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Comply with the provisions of NFPA 70B, "Testing and Test Methods" Chapter. 2. Visual and Mechanical Inspection a. Compare equipment nameplate data with drawings and specifications. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. d. Verify the unit is clean. e. Inspect contactors: 1) Verify mechanical operation. 2) Verify contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure are according to manufacturer's published data. f. Motor-Running Protection: 1) Verify overload element rating is correct for its application. 2) If motor-running protection is provided by fuses, verify correct fuse rating. g. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces. C. Motor controller will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.04 SYSTEM FUNCTION TESTS A. System function tests shall prove the correct interaction of sensing, processing, and action devices. Perform system function tests after field quality control tests have been completed and all components have passed specified tests. 1. Perform tests for the purpose of evaluating performance of integral components and their functioning as a complete unit within design requirements and manufacturer's published data. 2. Verify the correct operation of interlock safety devices for fail-safe functions in addition to design function. 3. Verify the correct operation of sensing devices, alarms, and indicating devices. B. Motor controller will be considered defective if it does not pass the system function tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 51 00 LED LIGHTING Page 1 of 6 SECTION 26 51 00 LED LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior lighting fixtures that are designed for and exclusively use LED lamp technology. 2. Luminaire supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 09 23 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including occupancy sensors. 2. Section 26 27 26 "Wiring Devices". 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color Rendering Index. C. Fixture: See "Luminaire." D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating. E. LED: Light-emitting diode. F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing. H. THD: Total Harmonic Distortion. 1.03 PRIOR APPROVAL A. Prior approvals are not required unless otherwise noted on the Luminaire Schedule. 1. All material supplied to the project must meet or exceed the quality, performance, and have similar features to the product originally specified. It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that substituted equipment matches the exterior dimensions, weight, and configuration of the specified equipment. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Ballast/Driver, including THD. 3. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 4. Energy-efficiency data. 5. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data. 6. Fixture UL/ETL rating. 7. Design Lights Consortium (DLC) certification and/or Energy Star rating. 8. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. 9. Color samples (if color is to be chosen by architect/engineer). 10. Foot-candle calculations for spot lights and flood lights. 11. List of all parts necessary for particular installation configuration. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 51 00 LED LIGHTING Page 2 of 6 B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. B. Sample warranty. 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 50 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Fixture-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 50 emergency lighting unit. 3. Ballasts/Drivers: One for every 50 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. B. Fire rated assemblies: Fixtures installed in fire rated assemblies shall maintain the fire rating of said assembly. Contractor is required to coordinate with Architectural draws to verify assembly ratings. C. Insulated ceiling space: Fixtures installed in an insulated ceiling be IC rated or manufacturer recommended clearances between fixture and insulation. Contractor is required to coordinate with Architectural draws to verify insulated areas above ceilings. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock resistant. 1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event." Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 51 00 LED LIGHTING Page 3 of 6 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5. 2.02 GENERAL LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Standards - Where noted on plans, comply with the following: 1. ENERGY STAR or Design Lights Consortium (DLC) certified. 2. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL. 3. UL Listing: Listed for damp and/or wet locations as required. 4. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4. C. Indoor fixtures shall have a minimum CRI of 80 UNO and a CCT of 3500 K UNO. D. Minimum rated LED lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70. E. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 10 percent of maximum light output. F. Internal ballast/driver, UNO. G. Nominal Operating Voltage: As noted on the plans. H. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum UNO. I. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. J. Lens and Refractor Gaskets for Exterior Luminaires: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. K. Source Limitations: For luminaires, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of luminaire from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. L. Housings: 1. Rigidly formed, light-tight enclosure that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. 2. Provide weather-tight enclosure with filter/breather for enclosed exterior luminaires. M. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Indoor applications: Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Exterior applications: Sheet metal components shall be corrosion-resistant aluminum. 4. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging N. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. O. Diffusers, and Globes - Tempered glass, acrylic or polycarbonate as noted on plans. 1. Acrylic: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. b. UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 METAL FINISHES A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 51 00 LED LIGHTING Page 4 of 6 B. Source Limitations: For luminaires, obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of luminaire from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. C. Factory-Applied, powder-coat finish, UNO, with standard color chosen by Architect or as noted on plans. 1. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. a. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. b. Class I, Color-Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: Medium satin; Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker), complying with AAMA 611. 2. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. a. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 or SSPC-SP 8. b. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel. 2.04 LED ASSEMBLIES A. Products UL rated for 40 degree C (104 degrees F) ambient environments. B. 50,000 hour fixture life including driver, 5 year warranty. C. All products compliant with IESNA LM-79 and LM-80 standards. 2.05 LUMINAIRE SUPPORTS A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire. C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gauge. E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. C. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. D. Fasten luminaire to structural support. E. Supports: 1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight, and weight of emergency power unit where applicable. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning, while relamping and when testing emergency power unit. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 51 00 LED LIGHTING Page 5 of 6 3. Provide support for luminaire and emergency power unit without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire and emergency power unit weight and vertical force of 400 percent of fixture weight. 5. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. F. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support: Secured to outlet box. G. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Attached to structural members in walls or to a minimum 20 gauge backing plate attached to wall structural members. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board. H. Ceiling-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Secure to any required outlet box and attach to structural member in ceiling or to a minimum 20 gauge backing plate attached to ceiling structural members. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board. 3. Provide offset from ceiling as required by luminaire manufacturer. 4. Secure emergency power unit using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of emergency power unit. I. Suspended Luminaire Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices. 3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure. J. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element. 1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. 4. Install at least two independent support rods or wires from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3. K. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections. L. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly and reinstall. M. Remote Mounting of Ballasts/Drivers: Distance between the driver and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by luminaire manufacturer. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 26 51 00 LED LIGHTING Page 6 of 6 3.03 INSULATED CEILING SPACES A. Provide IC rated fixture assemblies or manufacturer recommended clearances between fixture and insulation. 3.04 FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES A. Provide fire rated fixture assemblies or a third party fire rated cover. 1. Fire rated covers a. Provide manufacturer recommended clearances for all non IC rated fixtures. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. 2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal. B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS PROJECT OVERVIEW Page 1 of 1 SECTION 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS PROJECT OVERVIEW PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. This project includes the installation, testing and certification of structured cabling. Network media included in this project are horizontal Category 6A data and voice cabling. 1.02 RELATED PROJECTS A. The Contractor for this project will be required to coordinate with other contractors providing data, telephone, audio and video equipment and installation directly to the Owner. 1.03 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer Qualifications: Division 27 sub-contractor shall be a manufacturer certified contractor and will be required to provide a minimum 20-year performance warranty on parts and labor for all Category 6A cabling and systems. Proof of the sub-contractor’s ability to provide such a warranty shall be submitted to the General Contractor at the time of bidding and to the Owner prior to the Notice to Proceed. This warranty shall cover the patch panels, horizontal cabling, work area outlets, and patch cords. B. Contractor shall employ, in conjunction with construction of the project, a capable, experienced, and reliable foreperson and such skilled workers as may be required for the various classes of work to be performed. Contractor shall be required to submit evidence of foreperson's skilled experience on ANSI/TIA certified structured cabling systems. Evidence of experience shall be submitted to Owner with submittal of bid. Minimum experience for any individual involved in cabling work shall be cable pulling and termination work on projects for a minimum of 5 years and completion of training (40 hrs. minimum) which certifies the person’s work in copper cabling installations. Training can be a combination of BICSI and manufacturer training. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 01 00 BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 8 SECTION 27 01 00 BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Include in bid all labor, materials, tools, transportation, storage costs, training, equipment, insurance, temporary protection, permits, inspections, taxes and all necessary and related items required to provide complete and deliver operational systems shown and described. B. References to Codes and Standards called for in the Contract Documents mean the latest edition, amendment and revisions to the Codes and Standards in effect on the date of these Contract Documents: 1. Minimum composition requirements and/or installation methods for the following materials and work are included in this Section. a. Miscellaneous supports b. Access doors and panels c. Fire stopping d. Flashing and sealing e. Cutting and patching f. Waterproofing C. Contract shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Copper and fiber optic cabling 2. Routing cabling through telecommunication pathways 3. Telecommunications spaces 1.02 RELATED SECTION AND DOCUMENTS A. All work and materials shall conform to and be installed, inspected and tested in accordance with the governing rules and regulations of federal, state and local governmental agencies. 1.03 REGULATIONS AND CODE COMPLIANCE A. All work and materials shall conform to and be installed, inspected and tested in accordance with the governing rules and regulations of federal, state and local governmental agencies. B. The following is a list of codes and standards that will apply to this project. 1. Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration - OSHA 2. National Life Safety Code, NFPA 101 3. National Electrical Safety Code, 2020 4. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 5. Owner’s Insurance Carrier 6. ANSI/TIA - Building Telecommunications Standards 7. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 8. IEEE Standards 9. Federal Communications Commission 10. NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association 11. ADA, Americans with Disabilities Act 12. International Building Code 1.04 GLOSSARY A. Acronyms: ACRONYM DEFINITION Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 01 00 BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 8 ANSI American National Standards Institute ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing Materials BICSI Building Industry Consulting Services International EIA Electronic Industries Association ER Equipment Room FCC Federal Communications Commission FM Factory Mutual Insurance Company IEEE Institute Of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IRI Industrial Rick Insurers ISD Information Systems Division ISO International Standards Organization NEC National Electric Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association NESC National Electrical Safety Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration TIA Telecommunications Industry Association TR Telecommunications Room UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization UL Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. 1.05 DEFINITIONS: A. Definitions: 1. Approved / Approval: Written permission to use a material or system. 2. As Called For: Materials, equipment including the execution Specified/shown in the contract documents. 3. Code Requirements: Minimum requirements. 4. Concealed: Work installed in pipe and duct shafts, chases or recesses, inside walls, above ceilings, in slabs or below grade. 5. Equal or Equivalent: Equally acceptable 6. Exposed: Work not identified as concealed. 7. Final Acceptance: Owner acceptance of the project from Contractor upon certified by Engineer. 8. Furnish: Supply and deliver to installation location. 9. Furnished by Others: Receive delivery at job site or where called for and install. 10. Inspection: Visual observations by Owner’s site Representative. 11. Install: Mount and connect equipment and associated materials ready for use. 12. Labeled: Refers to classification by a standards agency. 13. Or Approved Equal: Approved equal or equivalent as determined by Engineer. 14. Engineer: The Prime Professional. 15. Prime Professional: Architect or Engineer having a contract directly with the Owner for professional services. 16. Provide: Furnish, install and connect ready for use. 17. Relocate: Disassemble, disconnect, and transport equipment to new locations, then clean, test, and install ready for use. 18. Replace: Remove and provide new item. 19. Review: A general contractual conformance check of specified products. 20. Roughing: Pipe, duct, conduit, equipment layout and installation. Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 01 00 BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS Page 3 of 8 21. Satisfactory: As specified in contract documents. 22. Site Representative: Construction Manager or Owner’s Inspector at the work site. 23. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract for additional definitions. 1.06 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. The drawings are diagrammatic, unless detailed dimensioned drawings are included. Drawings show approximate locations of equipment, and fixtures. Exact locations are subject to the approval of the Engineer. B. Anything mentioned in the Specifications and not shown in the Drawings or shown in the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown and mentioned in both. In case of differences between the Drawings and the Specifications, the stricter provision as determined by the Engineer shall govern. Omissions from the Drawings or Specifications, or the incorrect description of details of Work which are evidently necessary to carry out the intent of the Drawings and Specifications, or which are customarily performed, shall not relieve the Contractor from performing such omitted or incorrectly described details of the Work, but they shall be performed as if correctly described in the Contract Documents. Acceptance of this project by the Contractor acknowledges that they have verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data, or will do so, and that they will check and coordinate each shop drawing and sample with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 1.07 REVIEW OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and shall at once report to the Engineer any error, inconsistency or omission he or she may discover. If contractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the contract documents without such notice to the Engineer or Owner, the contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such performance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable cost for correction. B. The contractor must verify all dimensions locating the work and its relation to existing work, all existing conditions and their relation to the work and all man-made obstructions and conditions, etc. affecting the completion and proper execution of the work as indicated in the Contract Documents. 1.08 EXAMINATION OF THE PREMISES A. Contractor shall visit Site to familiarize themselves with the local conditions under which the work is to be performed and correlate their observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. No allowance will be made for claims for concealed conditions, which Contractor, in exercise of reasonable diligence in its observations of the Site and review of the local conditions under which the work is to be performed, learned or should have learned of, unless otherwise specifically agreed by Owner and Engineer in writing. B. Before ordering any materials or doing any work, the contractor shall verify all measurements and be responsible for correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed for duplicate work or material required because of an unverified difference between an actual dimension and the measurement indicated in the drawings. Any discrepancies found shall be submitted in writing to the Project Manager and Engineer for consideration before proceeding with the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS A. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. B. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements: Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 01 00 BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS Page 4 of 8 1. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a National Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) label. 2. Electrical equipment and systems shall meet UL Standards and requirements of the NESC. This listing requirement applies to the entire assembly. Any modifications to equipment to suit the intent of the specifications shall be performed in accordance with these requirements. 3. Equipment shall meet all applicable FCC Regulations. 4. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and be the standard products of the manufacturer. Used equipment or damaged material will be rejected. 5. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not indicate acceptance of a standard or cataloged item of equipment. All equipment and systems must conform to the Specifications and meet the quality of the design make. 6. The Contractor shall furnish and file with the proper Authorities all drawings required by them in connection with this work. The Contractor, if required, shall obtain all official permits, licenses and inspections and shall pay all legal and proper fees and charges. 7. The Contractor shall at inception of the work provide the Project Coordinator with copies of all required building and trade permits, if said are required. 8. The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging all inspections and for securing all required signatures. Upon completion of the work, properly completed permits shall be returned to the Project Coordinator, if any are required. 2.02 WORKMANSHIP, SUBSTITUTIONS AND WARRANTY A. Materials and workmanship shall meet or exceed industry standards. Horizontal and backbone cabling and all related passive equipment shall be fully guaranteed by the manufacturer for a minimum of twenty-five years from final acceptance. Cable integrity and associated terminations shall be thoroughly inspected, fully tested and guaranteed as free from defects, transpositions, opens-shorts, tight kinks, damaged jacket insulation, etc. 1. All labor must be thoroughly competent and skilled, and all work shall be executed in strict accordance with the best practice of the trades. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for and make good, without expense to the Owner, any and all defects arising during this warranty period that are due to imperfect materials, appliances, improper installation or poor workmanship. 3. No substitution will be considered unless written request has been submitted by the Bidder to the Engineer and has been approved by the Engineer at least seven (7) days prior to the date for receipt of bids. Each request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution. Provide original product data (no copies will be accepted) with performance and test data and any other information necessary for an evaluation. See Division 1 for further information. 4. After a Contract is awarded, requests to substitute for previously approved materials shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer within seven (7) days, complete with reasons for substitution and savings, which accrue to Owner if substitutes are approved. Substitutes, after Contract award, will be considered only if equal or superior to that specified. 5. Approval of alternate or substitute equipment or material in no way voids Contract document requirements. 6. Under no circumstances shall the Owner be required to prove that an item proposed for substitution is not equal to the specified item. It shall be mandatory that the Contractor submit to the Owner all evidence to support his contention that the item proposed for substitution is equal to the contract specified item. The Owner’s decision as to the equality of substitution shall be final and without further recourse. 2.03 CABLES Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 01 00 BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS Page 5 of 8 A. Any cable associated with this Contract shall be suitable, listed and marked for use in a riser or plenum application unless noted otherwise. For example, riser cable shall minimally be CMR rated for riser spaces and CMP for plenum spaces per the 2020 National Electrical Code and shall meet all local and state codes. 2.04 FACTORY ASSEMBLED PRODUCTS A. Provide maximum standardization of components to reduce spare part requirements. B. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies that include components made by others shall assume complete responsibility for final assembled unit. 1. All components of an assembled unit need not be products of same manufacturer, but the completed system shall supply the Owner with a minimum manufacturer’s 25-year performance warranty. 2. Constituent parts, which are alike, shall be product of a single manufacturer. 3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for intended service. 4. Contractor shall guarantee for the minimum of twenty years, the assemblies of components, and shall repair or replace elements of the assemblies as required to deliver complete assembly. C. Components of equipment shall bear manufacturer's name or trademark, model number and serial number on a nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place, or cast integral with, stamped or otherwise permanently marked upon the components of the equipment. D. Major items of equipment that serve the same function must be the same make and model. Exception will be permitted if performance requirements cannot be met. 2.05 COMPATIBILITY OF RELATED EQUIPMENT A. Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items being furnished and with existing items so that a complete and fully operational system will result. B. Provide maximum standardization of components to reduce spare part requirements. C. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies that include components made by others shall assume complete responsibility for final assembled unit. 1. Constituent parts that are alike shall be product of a single manufacturer. 2. Contractor shall guarantee assemblies of components and shall repair or replace elements of the assemblies as required to deliver the complete assembly. 3. Components of equipment shall bear manufacturer's name or trademark, model number and serial number on a nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place, or cast integral with, stamped or otherwise permanently marked upon the components of the equipment. 2.06 SPECIAL TOOLS A. If any part of equipment requires a special tool for assembly, adjustment or maintenance thereof and such tool is not readily available on commercial tool market, it shall be furnished by the Contractor. 2.07 LIFTING ATTACHMENTS A. Provide equipment with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to be lifted in its normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions that might be encountered without bending or distortion of shape, such as rapid lowering and braking of load. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORTS A. Metal bars, plates, tubing, etc. shall conform to ASTM standards: 1. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and grating - ASTM A 36 2. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing - ASTM A 500 3. Hot - Rolled Steel Tubing - ASTM A 501 4. Steel Pipe - ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 01 00 BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS Page 6 of 8 2.09 FIRESTOPPING A. Fire stopping for Openings through Fire and Smoke Rated Walls and Floor Assemblies shall be listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Fire-Stop Systems." The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. B. Inside of all conduits, the fire-stop system shall consist of a dielectric, water resistant, non- hardening, permanently pliable/re-enterable putty along with the appropriate damming or backer materials (where required). The sealant must be capable of being removed and reinstalled and must adhere to all penetrants and common construction materials and shall be capable of allowing normal wire/cable movement without being displaced. C. The Contractor shall patch all openings remaining around and inside all conduit, sleeves and cable penetrations to maintain the integrity of any fire rated wall, ceiling, floor, etc. The fire-stop system shall consist of a dielectric, water resistant, non-hardening, permanently pliable/re- enterable putty along with the appropriate damming materials (where required). The sealant must be capable of being removed and reinstalled and must adhere to all penetrants and common construction materials and shall be capable of allowing normal wire/cable movement without being displaced. D. All building conduits and sleeves installed and/or used under this contract shall be fire-stopped, or re- fire-stopped, upon cable placement through such passageways. E. Manufacturer's recommended installation standards must be closely followed (i.e. minimum depth of material, use of ceramic fiber and installation procedures). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH-IN A. Before construction work commences, the Contractor shall visit the site and identify the exact routing for all horizontal pathways. B. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, etc. Verify final locations for installation with field measurements and with the equipment being connected. Verify exact location and elevations at work site prior to any rough in work. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require a significant change to the original documents, contact the owners’ representative for approval before proceeding. C. All equipment locations shall be coordinated with other trades, other renovation projects, and existing conditions to eliminate interference with required clearances for equipment maintenance and inspections. 1. Coordinate work with other trades, other renovation projects, and existing conditions to determine exact routing of all cable tray, hangers, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Verify with Engineer exact location and mounting height of all equipment in finished areas, such as equipment racks, communication and electrical devices. Coordinate all work with existing Architecture. 2. Where more than one trade is involved in an area, space or chase, all shall cooperate and install their own work to utilize the space equally between them in proportion to their individual requirements. There will be no priority schedule for trades. If, after installation of any equipment, piping, ducts, conduit, and boxes, it is determined that ample maintenance and passage space has not been provided, rearrange work and/or furnish other equipment as required for ample maintenance space. Any changes in the size or location of the material or equipment supplied or proposed, which may be necessary in order to meet field conditions or in order to avoid conflicts between trades, shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Engineer and approval received before such alterations are made. D. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at equipment racks and enclosures, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 01 00 BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS Page 7 of 8 E. The Contractor shall be responsible for all required locations, cutting, patching, coring and associated work for the complete cabling system at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Contractor shall include the required cutting and patching work to perform work. Cut and drill from both sides of walls and/or floors to eliminate splaying. Patch adjacent existing work disturbed by installation of new work including insulation, walls and wall covering, ceiling and floor covering, other finished surfaces. Patch and/or paint openings and damaged areas equal to existing surface finish. Cut openings in prefabricated construction units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 CHASES A. General: 1. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such pathways. 2. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted conduit due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location. 3. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Cap or fire stop all unused conduits and sleeves. 4. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge-galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves a minimum 3" above floors. 5. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge-galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings. 3.04 SUPPORTS A. Provide required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, straps, struts, and other items to properly support contract work. Supports shall meet the approval of the Engineer. Modify studs, add studs, add framing, or otherwise reinforce studs in metal stud walls and partitions as required to suit contract work. If necessary, in stud walls, provide special supports from floor to structure above. For precast Panels/Planks and Metal Decks, support communication work as determined by manufacturer and Engineer. Provide heavy gauge steel mounting plates for mounting contract work. Mounting plates shall span two or more studs. Size, gauge, and strength of mounting plates shall be sufficient for equipment size, weight, and desired rigidity. 3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate ordering and installation of all equipment with long lead times or having a major impact on work by other trades so as not to delay the job or impact the schedule. B. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. C. Set all equipment to accurate line and grade, level all equipment and align all equipment components. D. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery of equipment and apparatus furnished into the premises. These items shall be removed from premises when no longer required. E. No equipment shall be hidden or covered up prior to inspection by the Engineer. All work that is determined to be unsatisfactory shall be corrected immediately. F. All work shall be installed level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components. G. Contractor shall replace/repair all ceiling tiles or plaster damaged by work performed as part of Division 27 contract. Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 01 00 BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS Page 8 of 8 3.06 PAINTING A. Contract includes the following: 1. Painting for all cut and patch work performed as part of Division 27 contract. 2. Painting for junction boxes and conduits per Owner’s standards or Division 27 standards. 3. Painting for damage to existing wall and ceiling surfaces. 4. Under no circumstances shall any of the cabling be painted. 3.07 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES A. In the event that the Engineer is required to provide additional engineering services as a result of substitution of equivalent materials or equipment by the Contractor, or changes by the Contractor in dimension, weight, power requirements, etc., of the equipment and accessories furnished, or if the Engineer is required to examine and evaluate any changes proposed by the Contractor for the convenience of the Contractor, then the Engineer's expenses in connection with such additional services shall be paid by the Contractor and may be deducted from any moneys owed to the Contractor. B. In the event that the Engineer is required to provide additional engineering services as a result of Contractor's errors, omissions or failure to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, or if the Engineer is required to examine and evaluate any changes proposed by the Contractor solely for the convenience of the Contractor, then the Engineer's expense in connection with such additional services shall be paid by the Contractor and may be deducted from any monies owed to the Contractor. 3.08 FIRE-STOPPING A. Fire-stopping for Openings through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed. The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. To be used inside all conduits and sleeves. Caulk on exterior of conduit penetration. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where conduit, fiber, cable trays, cables/wires, and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities that permit the easy removal or addition of conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. Typical rating: a. Floors - 3 hours b. Corridor walls - 2 hours c. Offices - ¾ hour d. Smoke partitions - ¾ - 1 hour END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 1 of 7 SECTION 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Optical-fiber-cable pathways and fittings. 4. Metallic surface pathways. 5. Nonmetallic surface pathways. 6. J-Hooks. 7. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 8. Polymer-concrete handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. 9. Cable trays. 10. Ladder racks. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product used on this project, provide cut sheet with highlighted part number of product. A separate submittal is required for each specification section. Do not combine or merge specification sections. B. Retain "Shop Drawings" Paragraph below for custom enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and boxes. C. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Description: Metal raceway of circular cross section with manufacturer-fabricated fittings. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 2. Southwire Company. 3. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. C. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-E. D. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. E. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. F. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. G. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated IMC. 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum. H. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. I. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and NFPA 70. 2. Fittings for EMT: Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 2 of 7 a. Material: Steel b. Type: Setscrew 3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL-467, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. J. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Description: Nonmetallic raceway of circular section with manufacturer-fabricated fittings. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carlon; a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation. 2. Dura-Line. 3. RACO; Hubbell. C. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Conduits and Fittings: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-E. D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC Type EPC-80-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. E. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A. F. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651A. G. RTRC: Comply with UL 2515A and NEMA TC 14. 1. Fittings: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. H. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer. 2.03 OPTICAL-FIBER-CABLE PATHWAYS AND FITTINGS A. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible-type pathway with a circular cross section, approved for plenum or riser installation unless otherwise indicated. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carlon; a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation. 2. Dura-Line. 3. Hubbell. 2.04 SURFACE METAL PATHWAYS A. Description: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers, complying with UL 5. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. MonoSystems, Inc. 2. Panduit Corp. 3. Wiremold / Legrand. C. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with TIA-569-E. 2.05 SURFACE NONMETALLIC PATHWAYS: A. Description: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and manufactured of rigid PVC. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 3 of 7 1. Panduit Corp. 2. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. Wiremold / Legrand. C. Finish: Texture and color determined at time of submittal. D. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. E. Comply with TIA-569-E. 2.06 J-HOOKS A. Description: Prefabricated sheet metal cable supports for telecommunications cable. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton, B-line. 2. Panduit Corp. 3. Wiremold / Legrand. C. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with TIA-569-E. 2.07 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Description: Enclosures for communications. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 2. RACO; Hubbell. 3. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. C. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: 1. Comply with TIA-569-E. 2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for use in wet locations. 3. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. 4. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep, with single gang mud ring, U.N.O. D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 3R, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: a. Material: Fiberglass. b. Finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2.08 POLYMER-CONCRETE HANDHOLES A. Description: Molded of sand and aggregate; bound together with polymer resin; and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armorcast Products Company. 2. NewBasis. 3. Quazite: Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. C. General Requirements for Polymer Concrete Handholes: Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 4 of 7 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Comply with TIA-569-E. D. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated. E. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 1. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 2. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "COMMUNICATIONS". 2.09 CABLE TRAYS A. Description: wire mesh basket cable support for telecommunications cable. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton, B-line. 2. Panduit Corp. 3. Wiremold / Legrand. C. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with TIA-569-E. 2.10 LADDER RACK A. Description: rail/rung style cable support for telecommunications cable. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton, B-line. 2. Panduit Corp. 3. Chatsworth. C. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with TIA-569-E. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PATHWAY APPLICATION A. Minimum Pathway Size: refer to drawings. B. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location. C. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. D. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings. E. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with the following standards for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter: 1. NECA 1. 2. TIA-569-E. 3. NECA 101. 4. NECA 102. 5. NECA 105. 6. NECA 111. B. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 5 of 7 C. Keep pathways at least 12 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping. D. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation. E. Install no more than the equivalent of 180-degree bends in any pathway run. Provide junction box at locations exceeding 180-degree bends. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. Utilize long radius elbows for all optical-fiber cables. F. Conceal rigid conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. G. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. H. Pathways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals. 2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. Comply with requirements for expansion joints specified in this article. 3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location. I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. K. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. L. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure, to assure a continuous ground path. M. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length. N. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Secure pull wire, so it cannot fall into conduit. Cap pathways designated as spare alongside pathways in use. O. Surface Pathways: 1. Install surface pathway for surface telecommunications outlet boxes only where indicated on Drawings. 2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. P. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 6 of 7 2. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. Q. Install pathway-sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway-sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. R. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals, so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. S. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings. T. J-Hooks: 1. Size to allow a minimum of 25 percent future capacity without exceeding design capacity limits. 2. Shall be supported by dedicated support wires. Do not use ceiling grid support wire or support rods. 3. Hook spacing shall allow no more than 6 inches of slack. The lowest point of the cables shall be no less than 6 inches adjacent to ceilings, mechanical ductwork and fittings, luminaires, power conduits, power and telecommunications outlets, and other electrical and communications equipment. 4. Space hooks no more than 4 feet o.c. 5. Provide a hook at each change in direction. U. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. V. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. W. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls, so they are not in the same vertical channel. X. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. Y. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. Z. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Install backfill. 2. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. 3. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub- ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete around conduit for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Page 7 of 7 from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 4. Underground Warning Tape: Provide warning tape 12” above trenched conduit. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2- inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade. D. Field cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. 3.05 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. 3.06 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 15 13 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING Page 1 of 5 SECTION 27 15 13 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Category 6A twisted pair cable. 2. Twisted pair cable hardware, including plugs and jacks. 3. Cable management system. 4. Grounding provisions for twisted pair cable. 1.02 COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal cabling system shall provide interconnections between the patch panels in the telecommunications rooms, and the equipment outlet. Cabling system consists of horizontal cables, intermediate and main cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for horizontal-to-horizontal cross-connection. B. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 90 meters. This maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 10 meters used for patching. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product used on this project, provide cut sheet with highlighted part number of product. A separate submittal is required for each specification section. Do not combine or merge specification sections. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For installers and installation supervisor. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. B. As-built drawings. C. Test results. D. Warranty certificate. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. 1.07 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer Qualifications: Division 27 sub-contractor shall be a manufacturer certified contractor and will be required to provide a minimum 25-year performance warranty on parts and labor for all Category 6 and Category 6A cabling and systems. Proof of the sub-contractor’s ability to provide such a warranty shall be submitted to the General Contractor at the time of bidding and to the Owner prior to the Notice To Proceed. This warranty shall cover the patch panels, horizontal cabling, work area outlets, and patch cords. B. Contractor shall employ, in conjunction with construction of the project, a capable, experienced, and reliable foreperson and such skilled workers as may be required for the various classes of work to be performed. Contractor shall be required to submit evidence of foreperson's skilled experience on ANSI/TIA certified structured cabling systems. Evidence of experience shall be submitted to Owner with submittal of bid. Minimum experience for any workman involved in cabling work shall be cable pulling and termination work on projects for a minimum of 5 years and completion of training (40 hrs. Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 15 13 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING Page 2 of 5 minimum) which certifies the person’s work in copper cabling installations. Training can be a combination of BICSI and manufacturer training. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA-568.1- E, when tested according to test procedures of this standard. B. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA-569-E. C. Grounding: Comply with TIA-607-D. 2.02 GENERAL CABLE CHARACTERISTICS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with the applicable standard and NFPA 70 for the following types: 1. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP B. RoHS compliant. 2.03 CATEGORY 6A TWISTED PAIR CABLE A. Description: Four-pair, balanced-twisted pair cable, certified to meet transmission characteristics of Category 6A cable at frequencies up to 500MHz. See drawings for additional details. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. CommScope, Inc. 2. Prysmian, with Panduit performance warranty 3. The Siemon Company. C. Standard: Comply with TIA-568.2-E for Category 6A cables. D. Conductors: 100-ohm, 23 AWG solid copper. E. Shielding/Screening: Unshielded twisted pairs (UTP) F. Cable Rating: Plenum. G. Jacket: Blue. 2.04 TWISTED PAIR CABLE HARDWARE A. Description: Hardware designed to connect, splice, and terminate twisted pair copper communications cable. No minimum specification grade hardware will be accepted. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. CommScope, Inc. 2. Panduit, with Minicom. 3. The Siemon Company. C. General Requirements for Twisted Pair Cable Hardware: 1. Comply with the performance requirements of Category 6 and Category 6A. 2. Comply with TIA-568.2-E, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. 3. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. 4. No minimum specification hardware will be accepted. D. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack location for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. 1. Features: a. Universal T568A and T568B wiring labels. b. Labeling areas adjacent to conductors. c. Replaceable connectors. Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 15 13 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING Page 3 of 5 d. 48 ports. 2. Construction: 16-gauge steel and mountable on 19-inch equipment racks. 3. Number of Jacks per panel: 48. E. Patch Cords: Provide one factory terminated Category 6A patch cord for each horizontal cable terminated within the patch panels. See drawings for additional details. The patch cable lengths shall be field measured before ordering (typical lengths are 3’ and 5’). Provide two factory terminated Category 6 or Category 6A patch cord for each duplex outlet indicated on the plans and four for each quad outlet indicated on the plans. The patch cable lengths shall be field measured before ordering (typical lengths are 5’ – 9’). Division 27 contractor to provide all patching within the telecommunications room. Field verify prior to ordering. 1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging. 2. Patch cords to be 28 AWG, UNO. a. Permanent links that exceed 83 meters shall use 24 AWG patch cords. 3. Provide all patching required for a complete and operational system. F. Plugs and Plug Assemblies: 1. Male; eight position; color-coded modular telecommunications connector designed for termination of a single four-pair, 100-ohm, unshielded or shielded twisted pair cable. 2. Standard: Comply with TIA-568.2-E.2. 3. Marked to indicate transmission performance. G. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: 1. Female; eight position; modular; fixed telecommunications connector designed for termination of a single four-pair, 100-ohm, unshielded or shielded twisted pair cable. 2. Designed to snap-in to a patch panel or faceplate. 3. Standard: Comply with TIA-568.2-E. 4. Marked to indicate transmission performance. 5. Color to be determined at time of submittal. H. Faceplates: 1. Two, Four, and Six port, vertical single gang faceplates designed to mount to double gang wall boxes with single gang mud rings. 2. Eight, Ten, and Twelve port, vertical double gang faceplates designed to mount to double gang wall boxes. 3. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. 4. Metal Faceplate: Stainless steel. 5. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of twisted pair, optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords. 6. Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed inserts. 7. Color to be determined at time of submittal. 2.05 GROUNDING A. Comply with TIA-607-D. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF TWISTED-PAIR HORIZONTAL CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1 and ANSI/TIA 568. B. Wiring Method: Install cables in j-hooks, raceways and cable trays. Conceal raceway and cables, except in unfinished spaces. 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 15 13 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING Page 4 of 5 C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. D. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA-568.1-E. 2. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not untwist twisted pair cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. 4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 48” and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, prevent straining connections, and prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Use hook and loop Velcro for all cable bundling. 8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation, and replace it with new cable. 9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 10. In the telecommunications room, install a 10’ long service loop. At the work area outlet, install a 12” long service loop. E. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with recommendations from BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual" and TIA-569-E for separating unshielded copper communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 3.02 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with TIA-569-E. 3.03 GROUNDING A. Comply with TIA-607-D. B. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall, allowing at least a 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground, using a minimum No. 6 AWG grounding electrode conductor. C. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than a No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. D. Bonding busbar shall be 12” x 4” x 1/4”. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Cable and Wire Identification: 1. Label each cable within 2” of each termination with a mechanically generated label. 2. Label each patch panel, patch panel port, and each faceplate port with a mechanically generated label. 3. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type, with a printing area and font color that contrast with cable jacket color but still comply with TIA-606-D. Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 15 13 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING Page 5 of 5 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests per section 27 17 00. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 17 00 TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF BALANCED TWISTED PAIR INFRASTRUCTURE Page 1 of 9 SECTION 27 17 00 TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF BALANCED TWISTED PAIR INFRASTRUCTURE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, field-test instruments and equipment required for the complete testing, identification and administration of the work called for in the Contract Documents. B. In order to conform to the overall project event schedule, the cabling contractor shall survey the work areas and coordinate cabling testing with other applicable trades. C. In addition to the tests detailed in this document, the contractor shall notify the Owner or the Owner’s representative of any additional tests that are deemed necessary to guarantee a fully functional system. The contractor shall carry out and record any additional measurement results at no additional charge. 1.02 SCOPE A. This Section includes the minimum requirements for the test certification, identification and administration of horizontal balanced twisted pair cabling. B. This Section includes minimum requirements for: 1. Copper cabling test instruments 2. Copper cabling testing 3. Identification a. Labels and labeling 4. Administration 5. Test results documentation 6. As-built drawings C. Testing shall be carried out in accordance with this document. D. Testing shall be performed on each cabling link. (100% testing) E. All tests shall be documented. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All testing procedures and field-test instruments shall comply with applicable requirements of: 1. ANSI/TIA-1152, Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling 2. ANSI/TIA-568.0-E, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises. 3. ANSI/TIA-568.1-E, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard 4. ANSI/TIA-568.2-E, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards. 5. ANSI/TIA-606-D, Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure, including the requirements specified by the customer, unless the customer specifies their own labeling requirements. B. Trained technicians who have successfully attended an appropriate training program and have obtained a certificate as proof thereof shall execute the tests. These certificates may have been issued by any of the following organizations or an equivalent organization: 1. Manufacturer of the connectors or cable. 2. Manufacturer of the test equipment used for the field certification. Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 17 00 TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF BALANCED TWISTED PAIR INFRASTRUCTURE Page 2 of 9 3. Training organizations (e.g., BICSI, A Telecommunications Association headquarters in Tampa, Florida; ACP [Association of Cabling Professionals™] Cabling Business Institute located in Dallas, Texas) C. The Owner or the Owner’s representative shall be invited to witness and/or review field-testing. 1. The Owner or the Owner’s representative shall be notified of the start date of the testing phase five (5) business days before testing commences. 2. The Owner or the Owner’s representative will select a random sample of 5% of the installed links. The Owner or the Owner’s representative shall test these randomly selected links and the results are to be stored in accordance with Part 3 of this document. The results obtained shall be compared to the data provided by the installation contractor. If more than 2% of the sample results differ in terms of the pass/fail determination, the installation contractor under supervision of the representative shall repeat 100% testing at no cost to the Owner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers catalog sheets and specifications for the test equipment being used on this project. B. A schedule (list) of all balanced twisted-pair copper links to be tested. C. Sample test reports. 1.05 ACCEPTANCE OF TEST RESULTS A. Unless otherwise specified by the Owner or the Owners representative, each cabling link shall be in tested for: 1. Wire Map 2. Length 3. Propagation Delay 4. Delay Skew 5. DC Loop Resistance – recorded for information only 6. DC Resistance Unbalance – recorded for information only 7. Insertion Loss 8. NEXT (Near-End Crosstalk) 9. PS NEXT (Power Sum Near-End Crosstalk) 10. ACR-N (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Near-End) – recorded for information only 11. PS ACR-N (Power Sum Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Near-End) – recorded for information only 12. ACR-F (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Far-End) 13. PS ACR-F (Power Sum Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Far-End) 14. Return Loss 15. TCL (Transverse Conversion Loss) – recorded for information only 16. ELTCTL (Equal Level Transverse Conversion Transfer Loss) – recorded for information only B. All installed cabling Permanent Links shall be field-tested and pass the test requirements and analysis as described in Part 3. Any Permanent Link that fails these requirements shall be diagnosed and corrected. Any corrective action that must take place shall be documented and followed with a new test to prove that the corrected Permanent Link meets performance requirements. The final and passing result of the tests for all Permanent Links shall be provided in the test results documentation in accordance with Part 3. C. Acceptance of the test results shall be given in writing after the project is fully completed and tested in accordance with Contract Documents and to the satisfaction of the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 17 00 TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF BALANCED TWISTED PAIR INFRASTRUCTURE Page 3 of 9 2.01 BALANCED TWISTED-PAIR CABLE TESTERS A. The field-test instrument shall be within the calibration period recommended by the manufacturer, typically 12 months. B. Certification tester 1. Accuracy a. Level IV accuracy in accordance with ANSI/TIA-1152 b. Independent verification of accuracy c. Acceptable manufacturers 1) Fluke Networks 2. Permanent Link Adapters a. RJ45 plug must meet the requirements for NEXT, FEXT and Return Loss in accordance with ANSI/TIA-568.2-E Annex C. b. Twisted pair Category 5e, 6, and 6A cords are not permitted as their performance degrades with use and can cause false Return Loss failures. 3. Results Storage a. Must be capable of storing > 10,000 results for all measurements found in 2.1 B.4 below. 4. Measurement capabilities a. Wire Map b. Length c. Propagation Delay d. Delay Skew e. DC Loop Resistance f. DC Resistance Unbalance g. Insertion Loss h. NEXT (Near-End Crosstalk) i. PS NEXT (Power Sum Near-End Crosstalk) j. ACR-N (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Near-End) k. PS ACR-N (Power Sum Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Near-End) l. ACR-F (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Far-End) m. PS ACR-F (Power Sum Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Far-End) n. Return Loss o. TCL (Transverse Conversion Loss) p. ELTCTL (Equal Level Transverse Conversion Transfer Loss) q. Time Domain Reflectometer r. Time Domain Xtalk Analyzer C. PC Software 1. Windows® based. 2. Must show when 3 dB and 4 dB rules are applied. 3. Re-certification capability, where results must have their Cable IDs suffixed with (RC). 4. Built in PDF export – no additional third party software permitted. 5. Built-in statistical analysis. 2.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Labels 1. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969. 2. Shall be preprinted using a mechanical means of printing (e.g., laser printer). Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 17 00 TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF BALANCED TWISTED PAIR INFRASTRUCTURE Page 4 of 9 3. Where used for cable marking, provide vinyl substrate with a white printing area and a clear “tail” that self laminates the printed area when wrapped around the cable. If cable jacket is white, provide cable label with printing area that is any other color than white, preferably orange or yellow – so that the labels are easily distinguishable. 4. Where insert type labels are used provide clear plastic cover over label. 5. Provide plastic warning tape 6 inches wide continuously printed and bright colored 18” above all direct buried services, underground conduits and duct-banks. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Brady Corporation b. Silver Fox c. Brother d. Epson e. Dymo 2.03 ADMINISTRATION A. Administration of the documentation shall include test results of each Permanent Link. B. The test result information for each link shall be recorded in the memory of the field-test instrument upon completion of the test. C. The test result records saved within the field-test instrument shall be transferred into a Windows® - based database utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of these test records. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All outlets, cables, patch panels and associated components shall be fully assembled and labeled prior to field-testing. Any testing performed on incomplete systems shall be redone on completion of the work. 3.02 BALANCED TWISTED PAIR CABLE TESTING A. Field-test instruments shall have the latest software and firmware installed. B. Permanent Link test results including the individual frequency measurements from the tester shall be recorded in the test instrument upon completion of each test for subsequent uploading to a PC in which the administrative documentation (reports) may be generated. C. Testing shall be performed on each cabling segment (connector to connector). Sampling is not acceptable. D. Permanent Link adapters made from twisted pair Category 5e, 6, 6A, 7 or 7A cords are not permitted as their performance degrades with use and can cause false Return Loss failures. E. The installer shall build a reference link. All components shall be anchored so it is not possible to disturb them. The technician is to conduct a Category 6A Permanent Link test each day to ensure no degradation of the tester or its Permanent Link adapters. F. Wire Map Measurement 1. The wire map test is intended to verify pin-to-pin termination at each end and check for installation connectivity errors. For each of the 8 conductors in the cabling, the wire map indicates: a. Continuity to the remote end b. Shorts between any two or more conductors c. Reversed pairs d. Split pairs Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 17 00 TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF BALANCED TWISTED PAIR INFRASTRUCTURE Page 5 of 9 e. Transposed pairs f. Distance to open on shield g. Any other miss-wiring 2. The correct connectivity of telecommunications outlets/connectors is defined in ANSI/TIA-568.2- E. Two color schemes are permitted. The user shall define which scheme is to be used. The field tester shall document which color scheme was used. Examples are given below: G. Length Measurement 1. The length of each balanced twisted pair shall be recorded. 2. Since physical length is determined from electrical length, the physical length of the link calculated using the pair with the shortest electrical delay shall be reported and used for making the pass or fail determination. 3. The pass or fail criteria is based on the maximum length allowed for the Permanent Link as specified in ANSI/TIA-568.2-E plus the nominal velocity of propagation (NVP) uncertainty of 10%. For a Permanent Link, the length measurement can be 325 ft. (99 m) before a fail is reported. H. Propagation Delay measurement 1. Is the time it takes for a signal to reach the end of the link. 2. The measurement shall be made at 10 MHz per ANSI/TIA-1152. 3. The propagation delay of each balanced twisted pair shall be recorded. 4. Is not to exceed 498 ns per ANSI/TIA-568.2-E Section 6.3.18. I. Delay Skew measurement 1. Is the difference in propagation delay @ 10 MHz between the shortest delay and the delays of the other wire pairs. 2. The delay skew of each balanced twisted pair shall be recorded. 3. Is not to exceed 44 ns per ANSI/TIA-568.2-E Section 6.3.19. J. DC Resistance 1. Often reported as Resistance, is the loop resistance of both conductors in the pair. 2. Is not specified in ANSI/TIA-1152, but shall be recorded for all four pairs. K. DC Resistance Unbalance 1. Often reported as Resistance Unbalance, is the difference in resistance of the two wires within the pair. 2. Is not specified in ANSI/TIA-1152 for a Permanent Link, but shall be recorded for all four pairs. L. Insertion Loss 1. Is the loss of signal strength over the cabling (in dB). 2. The frequency resolution shall be: a. 1 – 31.25 MHz Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 17 00 TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF BALANCED TWISTED PAIR INFRASTRUCTURE Page 6 of 9 b. 31.25 – 100 MHz c. 100 – 500 MHz 3. Worst case shall be reported for all four pairs in one direction only. 4. Reported margins found to be within the accuracy of the field tester shall be marked with an asterisk (*). 5. Is not to exceed the Category 6A Permanent Link limits found in ANSI/TIA-568.2-E Section 6.3.7. M. NEXT (Near-End Crosstalk) 1. Is the difference in amplitude (in dB) between a transmitted signal and the crosstalk received on other wire pairs at the same end of the cabling. 2. The frequency resolution shall be: a. 1 – 31.25 MHz b. 31.25 – 100 MHz c. 100 – 500 MHz 3. Shall be measured in both directions. (12 pair to pair possible combinations) 4. Both worst case and worst margins shall be reported. 5. Is not to exceed the Category 6A Permanent Link limits found in ANSI/TIA-568.2-E Section 6.3.8. 6. Reported margins found to be within the accuracy of the field tester shall be marked with an asterisk (*). 7. The Time Domain Xtalk data shall be stored for any marginal or failing NEXT results. N. PS NEXT (Power Sum Near-End Crosstalk) 1. Is the difference (in dB) between the test signal and the crosstalk from the other pairs received at the same end of the cabling. 2. The frequency resolution shall be: a. 1 – 31.25 MHz b. 31.25 – 100 MHz c. 100 – 500 MHz 3. Shall be measured in both directions. (8 pair possible combinations) 4. Both worst case and worst margins shall be reported. 5. Is not to exceed the Category 6A Permanent Link limits found in ANSI/TIA-568.2-E Section 6.3.9. 6. Reported margins found to be within the accuracy of the field tester shall be marked with an asterisk (*). 7. The Time Domain Xtalk data shall be stored for any marginal or failing PS NEXT results. O. ACR-N (Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Near-End) 1. Is a calculation of NEXT minus Insertion Loss of the disturbed pair in dB. 2. The frequency resolution shall be: a. 1 – 31.25 MHz b. 31.25 – 100 MHz c. 100 – 500 MHz 3. Shall be calculated in both directions. 4. Is not specified in ANSI/TIA-1152, but shall be recorded for all 12 possible combinations. P. PS ACR-N (Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Near-End) 1. Is a calculation of PS NEXT minus Insertion Loss of the disturbed pair in dB. 2. The frequency resolution shall be: a. 1 – 31.25 MHz b. 31.25 – 100 MHz Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 17 00 TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF BALANCED TWISTED PAIR INFRASTRUCTURE Page 7 of 9 c. 100 – 500 MHz 3. Shall be calculated in both directions. 4. Is not specified in ANSI/TIA-1152, but shall be recorded for all 8 possible combinations. Q. ACR-F (Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far-End) 1. Is a calculation of FEXT minus Insertion Loss of the disturbed pair in dB. 2. The frequency resolution shall be: a. 1 – 31.25 MHz b. 31.25 – 100 MHz c. 100 – 500 MHz 3. Shall be measured in both directions. (24 pair to pair possible combinations) 4. Both worst case and worst margins shall be reported. 5. Is not to exceed the Category 6A Permanent Link limits found in ANSI/TIA-568.2-E Section 6.3.11. 6. Reported margins found to be within the accuracy of the field tester shall be marked with an asterisk (*). R. PS ACR-F (Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far-End) 1. Is a calculation of PS FEXT minus Insertion Loss of the disturbed pair in dB. 2. The frequency resolution shall be: a. 1 – 31.25 MHz b. 31.25 – 100 MHz c. 100 – 500 MHz 3. Shall be measured in both directions. (8 pair possible combinations) 4. Both worst case and worst margins shall be reported. 5. Is not to exceed the Category 6 Permanent Link limits found in ANSI/TIA-568.2-E Section 6.3.13. 6. Reported margins found to be within the accuracy of the field tester shall be marked with an asterisk (*). S. Return Loss 1. Is the difference (in dB) between the power of a transmitted signal and the power of the signals reflected back. 2. The frequency resolution shall be: a. 1 – 31.25 MHz b. 31.25 – 100 MHz c. 100 – 500 MHz 3. Shall be measured in both directions. (8 pair possible combinations) 4. Both worst case and worst margins shall be reported. 5. Shall be ignored at all frequencies where the Insertion Loss is less than 3 dB for that pair. 6. Is not to exceed the Category 6 Permanent Link limits found in ANSI/TIA-568.2-E Section 6.3.6. 7. Reported margins found to be within the accuracy of the field tester shall be marked with an asterisk (*). 8. The Time Domain Reflectometer data shall be stored for any marginal or failing Return Loss results. T. TCL (Transverse Conversion Loss) 1. Is the ratio (in dB) between a differential mode signal inject at the near-end and the common- mode signal measured at the near-end on the same wire pair. 2. The frequency resolution shall be: a. 1 – 31.25 MHz Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 17 00 TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF BALANCED TWISTED PAIR INFRASTRUCTURE Page 8 of 9 b. 31.25 – 100 MHz c. 100 – 500 MHz 3. Shall be measured in both directions. 4. Is not specified in ANSI/TIA-1152 for a Permanent Link, but shall be recorded for all 8 possible combinations. U. ELTCTL (Equal Level Transverse Conversion Transfer Loss) 1. Is the ratio (in dB) between a differential mode signal inject at the near-end and the common- mode signal measured at the far end on the same wire pair minus the Insertion Loss of that pair. 2. The frequency resolution shall be: a. 1 – 31.25 MHz b. 31.25 – 100 MHz c. 100 – 500 MHz 3. Shall be measured in both directions. 4. Is not specified in ANSI/TIA-1152 for a Permanent Link, but shall be recorded for all 8 possible combinations. 3.03 ADMINISTRATION A. Test results documentation 1. Test results saved within the field-test instrument shall be transferred into a Windows™-based database utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of the test records. These test records shall be uploaded to the PC unaltered, i.e., “as saved in the field-test instrument”. The file format, CSV (comma separated value), does not provide adequate protection of these records and shall not be used. 2. The test results documentation shall be available for inspection by the Owner or the Owner’s representative during the installation period and shall be passed to the Owner's representative within 5 working days of completion of tests on cabling served by a telecommunications room or of backbone cabling. The installer shall retain a copy to aid preparation of as built information. 3. The database for the complete project, including twisted-pair copper cabling links, if applicable, shall be stored and delivered in PDF Format prior to Owner acceptance of the building. 4. Circuit IDs reported by the test instrument should match the specified label ID (see 3.3 of this Section). 5. The detailed test results documentation data is to be provided in an electronic database for each tested balance twisted-pair and shall contain the following information a. The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test b. The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester c. The identification of the customer site as specified by the end-user d. The name of the test limit selected to execute the stored test results e. The name of the personnel performing the test f. The version of the test software and the version of the test limit database held within the test instrument g. The manufacturer, model and serial number of the field-test instrument h. The adapters used i. The factory calibration date j. Wire Map k. Propagation Delay values, for all four pairs l. Delay Skew values, for all four pairs m. DC Resistance values, for all four pairs Bozeman Public Library Children's Room and Teen Corner Remodel Bozeman, MT 59715 MSR Design #2025021BCR 27 17 00 TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF BALANCED TWISTED PAIR INFRASTRUCTURE Page 9 of 9 n. DC Resistance Unbalance, values for all four pairs o. Insertion Loss, worst case values for all four pairs p. NEXT, worst case margin and worst case values, both directions q. PS NEXT, worst case margin and worst case values, both directions r. ACR-F, worst case margin and worst case values, both directions s. PS ACR-F, worst case margin and worst case values, both directions t. Return Loss, worst case margin and worst case values, both directions u. TCL, worst case values both directions v. ELTCTL, worst case values, both directions w. Time Domain Crosstalk data if the link is marginal or fails x. Time Domain Reflectometer data if the link is marginal or fails B. Record copy and as-built drawings. 1. Provide record copy drawings periodically throughout the project as requested by the Construction Manager or Owner, and at end of the project in PDF format. Record copy drawings at the end of the project shall be in CAD format and include notations reflecting the as built conditions of any additions to or variation from the drawings provided such as, but not limited to cable paths and termination point. The as built drawings shall include, but are not limited to block diagrams, frame and cable labeling, cable termination points, equipment room layouts and frame installation details. The as-builts shall include all field changes made up to construction completion: a. Field directed changes to pull schedule. b. Horizontal cable routing changes. c. Associated detail drawings. END OF SECTION Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel 28 31 11 Bozeman, MT 59715 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 1 of 5 SECTION 28 31 11 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Notification appliances. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. LED: Light-emitting diode. B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Noncoded, voice-evacuation based, addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only. Extension of existing Simplex fire alarm system in building. Scope is limited to relocation of existing notification devices as shown on plans. No new devices or added devices are anticipated. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.07 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.08 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction and include the following: 1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter. 3. Record copy of site-specific software. 4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of the same name and include the following: a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer's user training manuals. 5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel 28 31 11 Bozeman, MT 59715 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 2 of 5 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level II technician. C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL. F. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than three days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's written permission. 1.11 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational, except where specifically noted to remove devices. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service. B. Equipment Removal: Where specifically noted on drawings, remove existing disconnected fire-alarm equipment and wiring. 1.12 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Comply with UL 864. B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years. C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software. 1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Existing system is by SimplexGrinnell and all new devices shall be UL cross-listed as required for use with the existing panel. 2.02 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems: 1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Duct smoke detectors. 5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions: Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel 28 31 11 Bozeman, MT 59715 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 3 of 5 1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 5. Activate voice/alarm communication system. 6. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode. 7. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 8. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors. 9. Activate elevator Shunt-Trip circuit, prior to the discharge of water from the sprinkler system. 10. Record events in the system memory. C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Valve supervisory switch. 2. Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system. 3. Automatic sprinkler system Tamper Switch. 4. Elevator shunt-trip supervision. D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices. 3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits. 5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 6. Break in standby battery circuitry. 7. Failure of battery charging. 8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator. 9. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system. E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire- alarm control unit and remote annunciators. Record the event on system printer. 2.03 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT A. Re-use and tie-in to existing Simplex Grinnell Fire-Alarm Control Unit. B. Circuits: 1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuit Classifications: NFPA 72 a. Initiating Device Circuits: [Class B] b. Notification Appliance Circuits: [Class B] c. Signaling Line Circuits [Class B] 2.04 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Notification devices shall be the same type and configuration as those existing in the Library building, adapted as required for the locations they are installed. B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a signaling line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. C. Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output. D. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output. E. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel 28 31 11 Bozeman, MT 59715 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 4 of 5 F. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1- inch-high letters on the lens. 1. Rated Light Output: a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field. 2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with guards in place. 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, color (white or red) to be selected by architect. G. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances: 1. Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL. 2. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W. 3. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W. 4. Mounting: Flush or surface mounted. 5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker location. 2.05 CABLES AND RACEWAYS A. All conductors associated with fire alarm system shall be installed in conduit. Minimum raceway size: ¾”. B. Conductors for all initiating and signal circuits shall be solid copper, with minimum gauge of #18. All conductors shall terminate under screw terminal. C. Conductors for all notification appliance circuits (NACs) shall be sized for distance and current load, in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Minimum wire size shall be #14 AWG. Whenever practical, NAC wiring should not be larger than #12 AWG wire. Where larger size is required to serve load, additional circuit module shall be provided to split load current. D. Fire alarm raceways shall not contain any conductors not part of fire alarm system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment. B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections. 1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building. 2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station. 3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing equipment as necessary to extend existing functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit. 3.03 GROUNDING A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Bozeman Public Library Children’s Room and Teen Corner Remodel 28 31 11 Bozeman, MT 59715 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM MSR Design #2025021BCR Page 5 of 5 C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing. a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter. b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components. 2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4. 4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances. F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system. END OF SECTION